Nissan - Sentra - Workshop Manual - 2004 - 2004

B ENGINE A SECTION ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ACC C D CONTENTS ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ...................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 2 REMOVAL ............................................................. 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 2 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 3 Accelerator Control ................................................... 3 PEDAL TRAVEL .................................................... 3 E F G H I J K L M ACC-1 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:18005 EBS00DTP REMOVAL 1. a. b. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position sensor electrical connector. Pull the connector lock back to unlock the connector from the accelerator pedal position sensor. Pull up on the connector to disconnect it from the accelerator pedal position sensor. LBIA0333E 2. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal assembly nuts. WBIA0520E 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. ● For electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-540, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" and EC-546, "DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR" (QG18DE) or EC-1210, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" and EC-1217, "DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR" (QR25DE). CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal assembly. ● Avoid impact from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. ● Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. ● Check that the accelerator pedal moves through the full specified distance of the specified pedal travel “A”. Pedal Travel “A” : 52.6 - 58.2 mm (2.07 - 2.29 in) CAUTION: When the accelerator pedal position sensor harness connector is disconnected, perform the “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . ACC-2 LBIA0062E SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Accelerator Control PFP:00030 A EBS00EWA PEDAL TRAVEL ACC C D E LBIA0062E Accelerator pedal - total travel “A” 52.6 - 58.2 mm (2.07 - 2.29 in) F G H I J K L M ACC-3 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ACC-4 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)..... 2 Description ............................................................... 2 E F G H I J ACS L M ACS-1 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) Description PFP:18930 UKS000DY Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-635, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" (QG engine models), EC-1319, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" (QR engine models). ACS-2 C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE A SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE B AT D CONTENTS RE4F03B TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ................................ 7 Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ......................... 7 PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 9 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 9 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine .................................................... 9 Precautions .............................................................. 9 Service Notice or Precautions .................................11 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 12 PREPARATION ......................................................... 13 Special Service Tools ............................................. 13 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 16 OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................. 17 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 17 Circuit Diagram ...................................................... 18 Cross-sectional View .............................................. 19 Hydraulic Control Circuit ........................................ 20 Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 21 Control System ....................................................... 30 CAN Communication .............................................. 31 Control Mechanism ................................................ 32 Control Valve .......................................................... 36 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 38 Introduction ............................................................ 38 OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 38 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 38 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 42 CONSULT-II ........................................................... 42 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION ........... 56 Introduction ............................................................ 56 Work Flow .............................................................. 60 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION ... 63 A/T Fluid Check ...................................................... 63 Stall Test ................................................................. 63 Line Pressure Test .................................................. 67 Road Test ............................................................... 68 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 84 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 84 TCM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 109 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY .... 112 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 112 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 113 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH .................................................................. 115 Description ............................................................ 115 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 116 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 117 Component Inspection .......................................... 119 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................................. 120 Description ............................................................ 120 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS .............................. 122 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 123 Component Inspection .......................................... 125 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 126 Description ............................................................ 126 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ........................ 128 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 131 Description ............................................................ 131 Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ......................... 132 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 133 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................ 135 Description ............................................................ 135 Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST ............................... 137 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 138 Component Inspection .......................................... 139 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 140 Description ............................................................ 140 Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND .............................. 142 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 143 Component Inspection .......................................... 144 AT-1 E F G H I J K L M DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 145 Description ............................................................ 145 Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD .............................. 147 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 148 Component Inspection .......................................... 149 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ................ 150 Description ............................................................ 150 Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH ............................... 153 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 154 Component Inspection .......................................... 158 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 159 Description ............................................................ 159 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 160 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 161 Component Inspection .......................................... 162 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 163 Description ............................................................ 163 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 166 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 167 Component Inspection .......................................... 172 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 173 Description ............................................................ 173 Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 174 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 175 Component Inspection .......................................... 177 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ............... 179 Description ............................................................ 179 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ........................... 180 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181 Component Inspection .......................................... 182 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ............... 183 Description ............................................................ 183 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ........................... 184 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 185 Component Inspection .......................................... 186 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] ........................................................................ 187 Description ............................................................ 187 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188 Possible Cause ..................................................... 188 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 188 Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS .............................. 190 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 191 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ..................................................................... 193 Description ............................................................ 193 Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ...................... 194 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 195 Component Inspection .......................................... 196 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE). 197 Description ............................................................ 197 Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ......................... 199 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 200 Component Inspection .......................................... 202 DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR ......................................................... 203 Description ............................................................ 203 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ....................... 205 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 206 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 208 Description ............................................................ 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 208 Possible Cause ..................................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 208 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 209 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 210 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) ...................................................................... 211 Description ............................................................ 211 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 211 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) ......................... 213 Description ............................................................ 213 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 214 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ........... 215 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 215 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 220 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position.222 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed ............................................... 223 4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .......................... 224 5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position ...................... 225 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position.226 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position ............................................................ 228 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ................. 230 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ..................................................... 233 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 .......................... 235 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ........................... 237 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ....................... 239 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ............ 240 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ................................. 242 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ................................................. 243 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ..................... 244 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF” ............................... 246 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position ....................................... 247 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position ........................................ 248 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake.249 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/ neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks} ....... 249 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 252 Description ............................................................ 252 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location .......... 252 Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ................................. 253 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 254 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 257 Components .......................................................... 257 AT-2 Removal ............................................................... 257 Installation ............................................................ 258 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ......................................... 259 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators .......... 259 Control Cable Adjustment .................................... 262 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment . 262 Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ................ 263 Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 263 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................... 264 Removal ............................................................... 264 Installation ............................................................ 265 OVERHAUL ............................................................ 267 Components ......................................................... 267 Oil Channel .......................................................... 270 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ......................... 271 Disassembly ......................................................... 272 MANUAL SHAFT .................................................... 288 Components ......................................................... 288 Removal ............................................................... 288 Inspection ............................................................. 289 Installation ............................................................ 289 OIL PUMP ............................................................... 292 Components ......................................................... 292 Disassembly ......................................................... 292 Inspection ............................................................. 293 Assembly .............................................................. 295 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ............................. 297 Components ......................................................... 297 Disassembly ......................................................... 298 Inspection ............................................................. 301 Assembly .............................................................. 302 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY ......................... 307 Components ......................................................... 307 Disassembly ......................................................... 307 Inspection ............................................................. 308 Assembly .............................................................. 309 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY .........................311 Components ..........................................................311 Disassembly ..........................................................311 Inspection ............................................................. 312 Assembly .............................................................. 312 REVERSE CLUTCH ............................................... 313 Components ......................................................... 313 Disassembly ......................................................... 313 Inspection ............................................................. 314 Assembly .............................................................. 315 HIGH CLUTCH ....................................................... 318 Components ......................................................... 318 Disassembly ......................................................... 318 Inspection ............................................................. 320 Assembly .............................................................. 321 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH . 324 Components ......................................................... 324 Disassembly ......................................................... 324 Inspection ............................................................. 326 Assembly .............................................................. 328 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE .................................... 332 Components ......................................................... 332 Disassembly ......................................................... 332 Inspection ............................................................. 334 Assembly .............................................................. 334 REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB .................... 337 Components ......................................................... 337 Disassembly ......................................................... 337 Inspection ............................................................. 339 Assembly .............................................................. 339 OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER ................. 342 Components ......................................................... 342 Disassembly ......................................................... 342 Inspection ............................................................. 344 Assembly .............................................................. 345 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY ...................... 348 Components ......................................................... 348 Disassembly ......................................................... 348 Inspection ............................................................. 351 Assembly .............................................................. 351 FINAL DRIVE .......................................................... 355 Components ......................................................... 355 Disassembly ......................................................... 355 Inspection ............................................................. 357 Assembly .............................................................. 357 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 360 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 360 Adjustment (1) ...................................................... 361 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 368 Adjustment (2) ...................................................... 372 Assembly (3) ......................................................... 376 Assembly (4) ......................................................... 379 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 385 General Specifications .......................................... 385 Shift Schedule ...................................................... 385 Stall Revolution ..................................................... 385 Line Pressure ....................................................... 386 Control Valves ...................................................... 386 Clutch, Brake and Brake Band ............................. 386 Clutch and Brake Return Springs ......................... 388 Oil Pump ............................................................... 388 Input Shaft ............................................................ 388 Planetary Carrier .................................................. 389 Final Drive ............................................................ 389 Reduction Pinion Gear ......................................... 390 Output Shaft ......................................................... 392 Bearing Retainer ................................................... 392 Total End Play ....................................................... 393 Reverse Clutch End Play ...................................... 393 Accumulator .......................................................... 393 Band Servo ........................................................... 393 Removal and Installation ...................................... 393 Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 394 Solenoid Valve ...................................................... 394 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 394 Revolution Sensor ................................................ 394 Dropping Resistor ................................................. 394 AT-3 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M RE4F04B TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ............................ 395 Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ..................... 395 PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 397 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 397 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ................................................. 397 Precautions ........................................................... 397 Service Notice or Precautions .............................. 399 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 400 PREPARATION ....................................................... 401 Special Service Tools ........................................... 401 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 404 OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................ 405 A/T Electrical Parts Location ................................. 405 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 406 Cross-sectional View ............................................ 407 Hydraulic Control Circuit ....................................... 408 Shift Mechanism ................................................... 409 Control System ..................................................... 418 CAN Communication ............................................ 419 Control Mechanism ............................................... 421 Control Valve ........................................................ 425 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 427 Introduction ........................................................... 427 OBD-II Function for A/T System ........................... 427 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II .......... 427 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............... 427 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 431 CONSULT-II .......................................................... 431 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ......... 439 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION ........... 444 Introduction ........................................................... 444 Work Flow ............................................................. 448 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ..... 450 A/T Fluid Check .................................................... 450 Stall Test ............................................................... 450 Line Pressure Test ................................................ 454 Road Test ............................................................. 455 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 471 Symptom Chart ..................................................... 471 TCM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 481 System Description ............................................... 484 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY .... 485 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 485 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 486 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 488 Description ............................................................ 488 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 488 Possible Cause ..................................................... 488 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 488 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 490 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 491 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................................. 494 Description ............................................................ 494 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 494 Possible Cause ..................................................... 494 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 494 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 496 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 497 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 500 Description ............................................................ 500 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 500 Possible Cause ..................................................... 500 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 500 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ......................... 502 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 503 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL .................... 505 Description ............................................................ 505 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 505 Possible Cause ..................................................... 505 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 505 Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ......................... 506 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 507 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................. 509 Description ............................................................ 509 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 509 Possible Cause ..................................................... 509 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 509 Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST ............................... 511 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 512 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 514 Description ............................................................ 514 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 514 Possible Cause ..................................................... 514 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 514 Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND .............................. 516 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 517 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 519 Description ............................................................ 519 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 519 Possible Cause ..................................................... 519 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 519 Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD .............................. 521 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 522 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ................. 524 Description ............................................................ 524 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 524 Possible Cause ..................................................... 524 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 524 Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH ............................... 526 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 527 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH AT-4 SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 531 Description ........................................................... 531 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 531 Possible Cause .................................................... 531 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 531 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 533 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 534 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 536 Description ........................................................... 536 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 536 Possible Cause .................................................... 536 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 536 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ....................... 538 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 539 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 544 Description ........................................................... 544 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 544 Possible Cause .................................................... 544 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 544 Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 546 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 547 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A .............. 550 Description ........................................................... 550 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 550 Possible Cause .................................................... 550 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 550 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A .......................... 552 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 553 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B .............. 555 Description ........................................................... 555 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 555 Possible Cause .................................................... 555 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 555 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B .......................... 557 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 558 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] ....................................................................... 560 Description ........................................................... 560 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 560 Possible Cause .................................................... 560 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 560 Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS .............................. 562 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 563 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ..................................................................... 565 Description ........................................................... 565 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 565 Possible Cause .................................................... 565 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 565 Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ...................... 567 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 568 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE). 570 Description ............................................................ 570 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 570 Possible Cause ..................................................... 570 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 570 Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ......................... 572 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 573 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR .................. 577 Description ............................................................ 577 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 577 Possible Cause ..................................................... 577 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 577 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ...................... 579 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 580 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR ............... 582 Description ............................................................ 582 Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ........................ 584 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 585 Component Inspection .......................................... 586 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 587 Description ............................................................ 587 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 587 Possible Cause ..................................................... 587 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 587 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 588 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 589 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) ...................................................................... 590 Description ............................................................ 590 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 590 Possible Cause ..................................................... 590 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 590 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 591 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) ......................... 592 Description ............................................................ 592 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 593 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 594 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 594 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 598 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position. 599 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed .............................................. 601 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ............................ 601 5. Large Shock N → R Position ............................ 603 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position. 605 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 2 or 1 Position ........................................................................ 608 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ................. 610 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ..................................................... 613 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 .......................... 615 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 .......................... 618 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ...................... 620 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ............ 621 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ................................ 622 AT-5 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ................................................ 623 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ..................... 625 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF ................................... 626 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position ............................................ 626 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position ............................................ 627 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. 628 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/ neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks} ....... 628 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 633 Description ............................................................ 633 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 633 Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ................................ 634 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 635 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 638 Components ......................................................... 638 Removal ............................................................... 638 Installation ............................................................. 639 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 640 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators .......... 640 Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 642 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ... 642 Control Cable Adjustment ..................................... 643 Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ................. 643 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................... 645 Removal ............................................................... 645 Installation ............................................................. 646 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 648 Components ......................................................... 648 Oil Channel ........................................................... 651 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 652 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 653 Disassembly ......................................................... 653 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 668 Manual Shaft ........................................................ 668 Oil Pump ............................................................... 671 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 675 Control Valve Upper Body ..................................... 683 Control Valve Lower Body ..................................... 687 Reverse Clutch ..................................................... 690 High Clutch ........................................................... 693 Forward And Overrun Clutches ............................ 698 Low & Reverse Brake ........................................... 704 Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub ...................................................... 706 Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer ................................................... 710 Band Servo Piston Assembly ................................ 715 Final Drive ............................................................. 720 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 725 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 725 Adjustment (1) ....................................................... 726 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 731 Adjustment (2) ....................................................... 738 Assembly (3) ......................................................... 741 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 748 General Specifications .......................................... 748 Shift Schedule ....................................................... 748 Stall Revolution ..................................................... 748 Line Pressure ........................................................ 749 Control Valves ....................................................... 749 Accumulator .......................................................... 749 Clutch and Brakes ................................................. 750 Final Drive ............................................................. 752 Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump ............................ 752 Input Shaft ............................................................. 753 Reduction Pinion Gear .......................................... 753 Band Servo ........................................................... 754 Output Shaft .......................................................... 754 Bearing Retainer ................................................... 755 Total End Play ....................................................... 755 Reverse Clutch End Play ...................................... 755 Removal and Installation ....................................... 755 Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 756 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 756 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 756 Revolution Sensor ................................................. 756 Dropping Resistor ................................................. 756 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 756 AT-6 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX [RE4F03B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC PFP:00000 A ECS005VU ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) B CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-135 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-140 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-145 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-150 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-163 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-120 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-131 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-173 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-193 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-115 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 P0750 AT-179 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-183 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-159 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-187 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 P0720 AT-126 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AT-208 ● *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. ● *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. ● *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-7 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX [RE4F03B] P NO. INDEX FOR DTC DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-115 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-120 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-126 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-131 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-135 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-140 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-145 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-150 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-159 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-163 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-173 P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-179 P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-183 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-187 P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-193 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-208 ● *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. ● *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. ● *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. AT-8 PRECAUTIONS [RE4F03B] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ECS005VV The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. AT WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. F Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ECS005VW The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precautions ● ECS005VX Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned off. H I J K L M SEF289H AT-9 G PRECAUTIONS [RE4F03B] ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. AAT470A ● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or not. See page AT-109 . MEF040DA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common SAT964I shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transaxle. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to AT-11, "ATF COOLER SERVICE" . After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the MA section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . AT-10 PRECAUTIONS [RE4F03B] Service Notice or Precautions ECS005VY A FAIL-SAFE The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major electrical input/output device circuit is damaged. Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The cus- B tomer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration. When the ignition key is turned “ON” following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about 8 seconds. [For “TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)”, refer to AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure AT (No Tools)" .] The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions. D Always follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-60, "Work Flow" . The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows: ● The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor. E ● During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated. TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ● External leaks in the hub weld area. ● Converter hub is scored or damaged. ● Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft. ● Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines. ● Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter. ● Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.) ● Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze. ● Internal failure of stator roller clutch. ● Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter). ● Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter. The torque converter should not be replaced if: ● The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles. ● The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged. ● Transaxle failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter. ● Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such as taxi, delivery or police use. ATF COOLER SERVICE Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Replace radiator lower tank (which includes ATF cooler) with a new one and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air. Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR" . OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on AT-54, "Judgement of Self-diagnosis Code" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. ● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in the ECM and TCM memories. Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on page AT-40 to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. ● The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions. – PNP switch *: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-52, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . ● AT-11 F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [RE4F03B] ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-48, "HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)" . Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". AT-12 ECS005VZ PREPARATION [RE4F03B] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS005W0 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name (J34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 (J34301-1) Oil pressure gauge 2 (J34301-2) Hoses 3 (J34298) Adapter 4 (J34282) Adapter 5 (790-301-1230-A) 60° Adapter 6 (J34301-15) Square socket Measuring line pressure B AT D AAT896 E F KV31103000 (J38982) Drift Installing differential oil seal (Use with ST35325000.) a: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia. b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. G H NT105 ST35325000 ( — Drift Installing differential oil seal (Use with KV31103000.) a: 215 mm (8.46 in) b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia. c: M12 x 1.5P ) I J NT417 KV38107700 (J39027) Preload adapter ● Measuring turning torque of final drive assembly ● Measuring clearance between side gear and differential case with washer ● Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim Removing and installing clutch return spring a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) NT423 AT-13 L M NT087 KV31103200 (J34285-A and J34285-87) Clutch spring compressor K PREPARATION [RE4F03B] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST23540000 (J25689-A) Pin punch Removing and installing parking rod plate, manual plate and differential pinion mate shaft retaining pins a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia. b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. NT442 KV32101000 (J25689-A) Pin punch Installing throttle lever and manual shaft retaining pins a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. NT410 ST25710000 ( — Pin punch Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of transmission case a: 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. ) NT410 ST3306S001 (J22888-D) Differential side bearing puller set 1 ST33051001 (J22888-D) Puller 2 ST33061000 (J8107-2) Adapter Removing differential side bearing inner race a: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia. b: 29.5 mm (1.161 in) dia. c: 130 mm (5.12 in) d: 135 mm (5.31 in) e: 120 mm (4.72 in) NT745 KV381054S0 (J34286) Puller NT414 ST27180001 (J25726-B) Puller ● Removing idler gear bearing outer race ● Removing differential side oil seals ● Removing differential side bearing outer race ● Removing needle bearing from bearing retainer a: 250 mm (9.84 in) b: 160 mm (6.30 in) ● Removing idler gear a: 100 mm (3.94 in) b: 110 mm (4.33 in) c: M8 x 1.25P NT424 ST30031000 (J22912-O1) Puller Removing reduction gear bearing inner race a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia. b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. NT411 AT-14 PREPARATION [RE4F03B] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST35272000 (J26092) Drift ● Installing reduction gear bearing inner race ● Installing idler gear bearing inner race A B a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. b: 35.5 mm (1.398 in) dia. AT NT426 ST37830000 ( — Drift Installing idler gear bearing outer race a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia. b: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia. ) D E NT427 ST35321000 ( — Drift Installing output shaft bearing a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. ) F G H NT073 ST30633000 ( — Drift Installing differential side bearing outer race a: 67 mm (2.64 in) dia. b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. ) I J NT073 ST35271000 (J26091) Drift ● Installing idler gear a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. K L NT115 ST33400001 (J26082) Drift ● Installing oil pump housing oil seal a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. NT115 KV38105710 ( — ● ) NT087 AT-15 Measuring clearance between side gear and differential case M PREPARATION [RE4F03B] Commercial Service Tools ECS005W1 Tool name Description Puller ● Removing idler gear bearing inner race ● Removing and installing band servo piston snap ring NT077 Drift Removing idler gear bearing inner race a: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia. NT109 Drift Installing differential left side bearing a: 86 mm (3.39 in) dia. b: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. NT115 Drift Installing differential right side bearing a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. NT115 AT-16 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] OVERALL SYSTEM A/T Electrical Parts Location PFP:00000 A ECS005W2 B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0162E AT-17 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Circuit Diagram ECS005W3 WCWA0116E AT-18 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Cross-sectional View ECS005W4 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT842J AT-19 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Hydraulic Control Circuit ECS005W5 WAT408 AT-20 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Shift Mechanism ECS005W6 A CONSTRUCTION B AT D E F SAT998I 1. Torque converter 2. Oil pump 3. 4. Brake band 5. Reverse clutch 6. High clutch 7. Front sun gear 8. Front pinion gear 9. Front internal gear G Input shaft H 10 Front planetary carrier . 11 Rear sun gear . 12 Rear pinion gear . 13 Rear internal gear . 14 Rear planetary carrier . 15 Forward clutch . 16 Forward one-way clutch . 17 Overrun clutch . 18 Low one-way clutch . 19 Low & reverse brake . 20 Parking pawl . 21 Parking gear . 22 Output shaft . 23 Idle gear . 24 Output gear . K Function L I J FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Clutch and brake components Abbr. 5 Reverse clutch R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 7 . 6 High clutch H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 10 . 15 Forward clutch F/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with forward one-way clutch 16 . 17 Overrun clutch O/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with rear internal gear 13 . 4 Brake band B/B To lock front sun gear 7 . 16 Forward one-way clutch F/O.C When forward clutch 15 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 13 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. 18 Low one-way clutch L/O.C To stop front planetary carrier 10 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. 19 Low & reverse brake L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 10 . AT-21 M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] CLUTCH AND BAND CHART Shift position Reverse clutch 5 High clutch 6 Forward clutch 15 Overrun clutch 17 Band servo 2nd apply 3rd release 4th apply Forward one-way clutch 16 Low oneway clutch 18 Low & reverse brake 19 Lockup PARK POSITION P R O REVERSE POSITION O NEUTRAL POSITION N D *4 2 1 Remarks 1st O *1 D 2nd O *1 A O *1 A *2 C C *3 C C 3rd O O 4th O C B B B B *1 O O O 1st O O *2 C B 2nd O O O B 3rd O O *2 C B 1st O O 2nd O O O B 3rd O O *2 C B B B Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔ 4 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇐3 O Locks (held stationary) in 1st speed 1⇐2⇐3 ● *1: Operates when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position. ● *2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side. ● *3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts. ● *4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position. ● O: Operates. ● A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake. ● B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration. ● C: Operates but does not affect power transmission. ● D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake. AT-22 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] POWER TRANSMISSION “N” and “P” Positions ● ● A “N” position Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the clutches do not operate. “P” position Similar to the “N” position, the clutches do not operate. The parking pawl engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the powertrain is locked. B AT D E F G H SAT991I I J K L M AT-23 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] “11 ” Position SAT374J ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Overrun clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse brake. This is different from that of D1 and 21 . Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-24 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] “D1 ” and “21 ” Positions A B AT D E F G H I J SAT377J ● Forward one-way clutch ● Forward clutch ● Low one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions (Engine brake) Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these three clutches. D1 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 21 : Always engaged At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low oneway clutch. K L M AT-25 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] “D2 ”, “22 ” and “12 ” Positions SAT378J ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Brake band Overrun clutch engagement conditions Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier. As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward oneway clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed. D2 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 22 and 12 : Always engaged AT-26 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] “D3 ” “23 ” and “13 ” Positions A B AT D E F G H I J SAT379J ● High clutch ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch. This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed. D3 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 23 and 13 : Always engaged K L M AT-27 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] “D4 ” (OD) Position SAT380J ● High clutch ● Brake band ● Forward clutch (Does not affect power transmission) Engine brake Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch. This front carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes front internal gear (output) turn faster. At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-28 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] “R” Position A B AT D E F G H I J SAT381J ● Reverse clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake. Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction. As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. K L M AT-29 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Control System ECS005W7 OUTLINE The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various switches and sensors. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SWITCHES & SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Vehicle speed sensor Overdrive control switch ASCD control unit Stop lamp switch Turbine revolution sensor Shift control Line pressure solenoid Lock-up control Overrun clutch control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-II communication line control Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Overrun clutch solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve O/D OFF indicator lamp CONTROL SYSTEM WCIA0163E AT-30 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] TCM FUNCTION A The function of the TCM is to: ● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. ● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. ● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. B INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM Sensors, switches and solenoid valves PNP switch Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Detects accelerator pedal position and requested throttle opening and sends a signal to TCM. Engine speed signal From ECM. A/T fluid temperature sensor Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM. Revolution sensor Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM. Vehicle speed sensor Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions. Overdrive control switch Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to “D4 ” (overdrive) position, to the TCM. ASCD control unit Sends the cruise signal and “D4 ” (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD control unit to TCM. Stop lamp switch Releases lock-up system when depressing pedal in lock-up condition. Shift solenoid valve A/B Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Line pressure solenoid valve Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Overrun clutch solenoid valve Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. O/D OFF indicator lamp Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction. Input Output AT Function CAN Communication D E F G H I J K ECS006H7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT System diagram LKIA0132E AT-31 L M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM TCM Accelerator pedal position signal T R Output shaft revolution signal R T A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Combination Meter Stop lamp switch signal R T Overdrive control switch signal R T O/D OFF indicator signal T R Engine speed signal T R Engine coolant temperature signal T R Vehicle speed signal R T Fuel level sensor signal R T Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Control Mechanism ECS005W8 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL TCM has various line pressure control characteristics to match the driving conditions. An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics. Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation. Normal Control The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable clutch operation. SAT003J Back-up Control (Engine brake) If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D4 (OD) or D3 , great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to deal with this driving force. SAT004J AT-32 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] During Shift Change A The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock. B AT SAT005J D At Low Fluid Temperature ● ● Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize shifting quality. The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission fluid when temperature is low. E F G H SAT006J ● Line pressure is increased to a maximum, irrespective of the throttle opening, when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F). This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low temperature. I J K L SAT007J M SHIFT CONTROL The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy. Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] and revolution sensor to select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM. The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When set to “ON”, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the shift valve. SAT008J AT-33 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Relation Between Shift Solenoid Valves A and B and Gear Positions Gear position Shift solenoid valve D1 , 21 , 11 D 2 , 2 2 , 12 D3 D4 (OD) N-P A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Control of Shift Valves A and B SAT009J Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B. The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward. LOCK-UP CONTROL The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to an oil pressure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston. Conditions for Lock-up Operation When vehicle is driven in 3rd and 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed. Overdrive control switch ON Selector lever Gear position Vehicle speed sensor Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] A/T fluid temperature sensor OFF “D” position D3 D4 More than set value Less than set opening More than 40°C (104°F) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the “OFF” period, and opens the circuit during the “ON” period. If the percentage of OFFtime increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and pilot pressure remains high. SAT010J AT-34 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock. OFF-time INCREASING ↓ Amount of drain DECREASING ↓ Pilot pressure HIGH ↓ Lock-up RELEASING A B AT SAT011J D Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation E F G AAT155A Lock-up released The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked. Lock-up applied When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch piston applied. Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up. H I J OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL) K Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective. The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed. L Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions M SAT014J Selector lever position Gear position “D” position D1 , D2 , D3 gear position “2” position 21 , 22 gear position “1” position 11 , 12 gear position AT-35 Throttle opening Less than 3/16 At any position OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control (engine brake control). When this solenoid valve is “ON”, the pilot pressure drain port closes. When it is “OFF”, the drain port opens. During the solenoid valve “ON”, pilot pressure is applied to the end face of the overrun clutch control valve. SAT015J Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation When the solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure is applied to the overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does not engage. When the solenoid valve is “OFF”, pilot pressure is not generated. At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun clutch to engage. In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times. SAT016J Control Valve ECS005W9 FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES Valve name Function Pressure regulator valve, plug and sleeve Regulates oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Pressure modifier valve and sleeve Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, shift timing. Accumulator control valve Regulates accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions. Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions. Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral. Shift valve A Simultaneously switches four oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B. Shift valve B Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A. AT-36 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Valve name Function Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with application of the brake band in D4 . (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during D4 .) 1st reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when down-shifting from the “1” position 12 to 11 . Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock. In “1” and “2” positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability. Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure. Torque converter clutch control valve, plug and sleeve Activates or inactivates the lock-up function. Also provides smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system. 1-2 accumulator valve and piston Dampens the shock encountered when 2nd gear band servo contracts, and provides smooth shifting. 3-2 timing valve Switches oil pressure with 3-2 timing valve according to throttle opening. Shuttle control valve Reduces shock when down-shifting from 3rd to 2nd and regulates overrun clutch. Cooler check valve Regulates oil pressure which causes lock-up when driving at low speeds. A B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-37 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Introduction PFP:00000 ECS005WA The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, refer to AT-43, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE" . OBD-II Function for A/T System ECS005WB The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ECS005WC ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below. MIL Items One trip detection Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 X Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 X Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] or switch — DTC: P1705 X Except above Two trip detection X The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ECS005WD HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. ( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720, P0725, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. AT-38 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF DIAGNOSIS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. A B AT SAT014K D If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. E F G SAT015K H If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”. I J K SAT016K Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-57, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 2 3 Items Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. AT-39 L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as follows. ● If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. ● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . ● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. Touch “SELF DIAGNOSIS”. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. Touch “ENGINE”. Touch “SELF DIAGNOSIS”. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) AT-40 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] A B AT D E F G H I WCIA0365E J HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Perform TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure. Refer to AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-64, "How to Erase DTC" . K L HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Perform TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure. Refer to AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Perform OBD-II Self-diagnostic Procedure. Refer to AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . AT-41 M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 1. 2. ECS005WE The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking the lamp. ● If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to DI26, "WARNING LAMPS" . (Or see MIL & CONSULT-II in EC section. Refer to EC-66, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" , and EC-114, "CONSULTII Function" . When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp should go off. If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For detail, refer to EC-53, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" . SAT964I CONSULT-II ECS005WF After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (AT-43, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" ), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”, (AT-57, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" ). Reference pages are provided following the items. NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: – Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, – Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and – Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). 4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit. FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-II. Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. Reference page AT-43 — AT-45 — AT-47 — AT-42 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. A Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis. If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-112, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY" . If result is NG, refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . B AT D SAT014K 2. Touch “SELF DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. CONSULT-II performs “REAL TIME DIAG”. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. E F G SAT987J SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE H Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” test mode) TCM self-diagnosis Available by O/D OFF Malfunction is detected when ... “A/T” — ● PNP SW/CIRC Revolution sensor VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T ● VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT Vehicle speed sensor (Meter) VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR A/T 1ST GR FNCTN ● A/T 2ND GR FNCTN ● A/T 3RD GR FNCTN A/T 4th gear function A/T 4TH GR FNCTN ● A/T 4TH GR FNCTN A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) A/T TCC S/V FNCTN — I J P0705 K X P0720 TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X — M ● A/T 3rd gear function A/T 3RD GR FNCTN TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. — A/T 2nd gear function A/T 2ND GR FNCTN TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on the gear position) from the switch. Available by malfunction indicator lamp *2, “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST L ● A/T 1st gear function A/T 1ST GR FNCTN indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II “ENGINE” PNP switch circuit OBD-II (DTC) A/T TCC S/V FNCTN ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0731*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0732*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0733*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0734*1 — P0744*1 A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. AT-43 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” test mode) TCM self-diagnosis Available by O/D OFF Malfunction is detected when ... “A/T” SHIFT SOLENOID/V A ● SFT SOL A/CIRC Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT SOLENOID/V B ● SFT SOL B/CIRC Overrun clutch solenoid valve OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V ● O/R CLUCH SOL/ CIRC T/C clutch solenoid valve T/C CLUTCH SOL/V ● TCC SOLENOID/ CIRC Line pressure solenoid valve LINE PRESSURE S/ V ● L/PRESS SOL/CIRC Throttle position sensor, Throttle position switch THROTTLE POSI SEN indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II “ENGINE” Shift solenoid valve A ● ● ENGINE SPEED SIG A/T fluid temperature sensor ● ATF TEMP SEN/ CIRC TCM (RAM) CONTROL UNIT (RAM) ● ● X P0750 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0755 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P1760 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0740 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0745 X P1705 TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the ECM. X P0725 TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. X P0710 TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning. — — TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. — — TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. — — X — X X TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. — TCM (EEP ROM) CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. — TCM (ROM) CONTROL UNIT (ROM) Available by malfunction indicator lamp *2, “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST TP SEN/CIRC A/T Engine speed signal BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN OBD-II (DTC) ● — Initial start ● INITIAL START — No failure (NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDICATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED**) ● This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen.) No failure has been detected. X: Applicable —: Not applicable *1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL *2: Refer to EC-66, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. AT-44 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) A Monitor item Item Display Vehicle speed sensor 1 (A/ T) (Revolution sensor) VHCL/S SE·A/T [km/h] or [mph] Vehicle speed sensor 2 (Meter) VHCL/S SE·MTR [km/h] or [mph] TCM input signals THRTL POS SEN [V] A/T fluid temperature sensor FLUID TEMP SE [V] BATTERY VOLT [V] Engine speed ENGINE SPEED [rpm] X X X Overdrive control switch PN position switch R position switch D position switch 2 position switch 1 position switch ASCD cruise signal OVERDRIVE SW [ON/OFF] — ● X Battery voltage — ● X — PN POSI SW [ON/OFF] X — R POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — X — 2 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — 1 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — ASCD CRUISE [ON/OFF] X — AT-45 Vehicle speed display may not be accurate under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when vehicle is stationary. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] signal voltage is displayed. Signal voltage lowers as fluid temperature rises. ● Source voltage of TCM is displayed. ● Engine speed, computed from engine speed signal, is displayed. AT D E F G H Engine speed display may not be accurate under approx. 800 rpm. It may not indicate 0 rpm even when engine is not running. ON/OFF state computed from signal of overdrive control SW is displayed. I J K ON/OFF state computed from signal of PN position SW is displayed. L ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of R position SW is displayed. M ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of D position SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2 position SW, is displayed. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1 position SW, is displayed. ● Status of ASCD cruise signal is displayed. ON ... Cruising state OFF ... Normal running state ● D POSITION SW [ON/OFF] Vehicle speed computed from signal of vehicle speed sensor is displayed. ● ● — When racing engine in “N” or “P” position with vehicle stationary, CONSULT-II data may not indicate 0 km/ h (0 mph). A/T fluid temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed. X X Vehicle speed computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed. ● — — Remarks B ● X Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Description Main signals ● This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Monitor item Item ASCD OD cut signal Kickdown switch Gear position Selector lever position Vehicle speed Stop lamp switch Display TCM input signals ASCD OD CUT [ON/OFF] KICKDOWN SW [ON/OFF] X — X — — X GEAR SLCT LVR POSI VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [mph] — X — X BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] X Throttle position Line pressure duty Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty THROTTLE POSI [/8] LINE PRES DTY [%] — — Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Overrun clutch solenoid valve Self-diagnosis display lamp (O/D OFF indicator lamp) SHIFT S/V A [ON/OFF] SHIFT S/V B [ON/OFF] — — Status of ASCD OD release signal is displayed. ON ... OD released OFF ... OD not released ● This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of kickdown SW, is displayed. ● This is displayed even when no kickdown switch is equipped. ● Gear position data used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● Selector lever position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error. ● Vehicle speed data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● ON/OFF status are displayed. ON: Brake pedal is depressed. OFF: Brake pedal is released. ● Throttle position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error. ● Control value of line pressure solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of shift solenoid valve A, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of shift solenoid valve B, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of overrun clutch solenoid valve computed by TCM from each input signal is displayed. ● Control status of O/D OFF indicator lamp is displayed. X X X X X OVERRUN/C S/ V [ON/OFF] — X SELF-D DP LMP [ON/OFF] — X X: Applicable —: Not applicable AT-46 Remarks ● — TCC S/V DUTY [%] — Description Main signals Control value of solenoid is displayed even if solenoid circuit is disconnected. The “OFF” signal is displayed if solenoid circuit is shorted. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II CONSULT-II Setting Procedure 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Connect CONSULT-II to Data link connector which is located in left side lower dash panel. B AT D LAT136 3. 4. E Turn ignition switch “ON”. Touch “START”. F G H SAT586J 5. Touch “A/T”. I J K SAT014K 6. L Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”. M WCIA0366E AT-47 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] 7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.). SAT018K 8. Touch “START”. SAT589J 9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. SAT019K ● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. SAT591J AT-48 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] 10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. A B AT SAT592J D E F G SAT593J 11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed. H I J SAT594J K 12. Touch “YES” or “NO”. L M SAT595J AT-49 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] 13. CONSULT-II procedure ended. SAT596J SAT593J If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE DTC work support item Description Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed. 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can be confirmed. ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed. 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed. 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed. 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 Check items (Possible cause) ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) ● ● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE WITHOUT CONSULT-II OBD-II Self-diagnostic Procedure (With GST) Refer to EC-129, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)" . AT-50 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] OBD-II Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools) A Refer to EC-66, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools) 1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. Start the engine. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Wait 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? AT D E F SAT967I G H I J LAT154 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO AT-220, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . K L M AT-51 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] 2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position. Move A/T selector lever from “P” to “D” position. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 5. Depress and hold overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”) until directed to release the switch. If O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on, go to AT-249, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" . 6. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 7. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 8. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”). 9. Wait 2 seconds. 10. Move A/T selector lever to “2” position. 11. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”). SAT968I 12. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”) until directed to release the switch. >> GO TO 3. SAT969I AT-52 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] 3. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Move A/T selector lever to “1” position. Release the overdrive control switch. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”). Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”). Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”) until directed to release the switch. B AT D E SAT970I 6. 7. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will begin to flash “ON” and “OFF”). F G >> GO TO 4. H I SAT981F 4. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE J Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to AT-54, "Judgement of Self-diagnosis Code" . K L M LAT154 >> DIAGNOSIS END AT-53 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Judgement of Self-diagnosis Code O/D OFF indicator lamp: All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0073E WCIA0074E All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . 2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0075E WCIA0076E Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . 4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0077E WCIA0078E Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . 6th judgement flicker is longer than others. 7th judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0079E WCIA0080E Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . 8th judgement flicker is longer than others. 9th judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0081E WCIA0082E A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power source circuit is damaged. Þ Go to AT-197, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)" . Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-131, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . AT-54 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] O/D OFF indicator lamp: 11th judgement flicker is longer than others. 10th judgement flicker is longer than others. A B AT WCIA0083E SAT599J Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . The ECM-A/T communication line is open or shorted. Þ Go to AT-208, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Flickers as shown below. Lamp comes on. D E F WCIA0084E WCIA0085E Battery power is low. Battery has been disconnected for a long time. Battery is connected conversely. (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.) t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged. Þ Go to AT-249, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" . G H t4 = 1.0 second I J K L M AT-55 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4F03B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION Introduction The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-60, "Work Flow" . PFP:00000 ECS005WG AAT473A SAT632I Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the example (AT-58, "Diagnostic Worksheet" ) should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins for information. SEF234G AT-56 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4F03B] DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information from Customer A KEY POINTS ● WHAT ..... Vehicle & A/T model ● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies ● WHERE..... Road conditions ● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms Customer name MR/MS B AT Model & Year VIN Trans. model Engine Mileage Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. ❏ No up-shift ❏ Intermittent ( times a day) (❏ Any position (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ No down-shift D ❏ 2nd → 3rd (❏ O/D → 3rd ❏ Particular position) E ❏ 3rd → O/D) ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st) F ❏ Lockup malfunction ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lockup ❏ Any drive position) G ❏ Noise or vibration ❏ No kickdown H ❏ No pattern select ❏ Others ( O/D OFF indicator lamp Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ) I Blinks for about 8 seconds. ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit J K L M AT-57 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Worksheet 1. ❏ Read the “FAIL-SAFE” and listen to customer complaints. AT-11, "FAILSAFE" 2. ❏ CHECK A/T FLUID AT-63, "A/T Fluid Check" ❏ Leakage (Follow specified procedure) ❏ Fluid condition ❏ Fluid level 3. ❏ Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST. ❏ Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others. ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Reverse clutch ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Overrun clutch ❏ Forward one-way clutch ❏ Low & reverse brake ❏ Low one-way clutch ❏ Engine ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Clutches and brakes except high clutch and brake band are OK AT-63, "Stall Test", AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" ❏ Line Pressure test — Suspected parts: 4. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-68, "Road Test" 4-1. AT-70, "1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED" Check before engine is started. ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items. ❏ PNP switch, AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-131, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . ❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ PNP, overdrive control and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-249, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-197, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)" . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . ❏ Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-211, "DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)" . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-213, "DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)" . ❏ Battery ❏ Others 4-2. Check at idle ❏ 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-220, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . ❏ 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-222, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position" . ❏ 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-223, "3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed" . ❏ 4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-224, "4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" . ❏ 5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position, AT-225, "5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position" . ❏ 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-226, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . ❏ 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-228, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position" . AT-58 AT-71, "2. CHECK AT IDLE" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4F03B] 4. (cont'd) 4-3 (cont'd) Cruise test Part-1 ❏ 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 , AT-230, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-233, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 →D3 , AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →D4 , AT-237, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . ❏ 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-239, "12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" . ❏ 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-240, "13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" . ❏ 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-242, "14. Lock-up Is Not Released" . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ), AT-243, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Part-2 ❏ 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 , AT-244, "16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1" . ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-233, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 →D3 , AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →D4 , AT-237, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . 4. (cont'd) 4-3 . (cont'd) Part-3 ❏ 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 →D3 When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”, AT-246, "17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”" . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3 ), AT-243, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . ❏ 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position, AT-247, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position" . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D2 ), AT-243, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . ❏ 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 →11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position, AT-248, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position" . ❏ 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-249, "20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items. ❏ PNP switch, AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-131, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . ❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ PNP, overdrive control and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-249, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-197, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)" . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . ❏ Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-211, "DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)" . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-213, "DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)" . ❏ Battery ❏ Others AT-59 AT-73, "3. CRUISE TEST" AT-77, "Cruise Test — Part 1" A B AT D AT-80, "Cruise Test — Part 2" AT-82, "Cruise Test — Part 3" E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4F03B] 5. ❏ For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-43, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE" 6. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-68, "Road Test" 7. ❏ Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items. Refer to EC-126, "DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE" . EC section ❏ DTC (P0731), AT-135, "DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION" . ❏ DTC (P0732), AT-140, "DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION" . ❏ DTC (P0733), AT-145, "DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION" . ❏ DTC (P0734), AT-150, "DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION" . ❏ DTC (P0744), AT-163, "DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)" . 8. ❏ Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts. Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible symptoms and the component inspection orders.) AT-43, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE" AT-84, "Symptom Chart" 9. ❏ Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories. AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" Work Flow ECS005WH HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information from Customer” (AT-57, "Information from Customer" ) and “Diagnostic Worksheet” (AT-58, "Diagnostic Worksheet" ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible. AT-60 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4F03B] WORK FLOW CHART A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT300 *1 AT-57, "Information from Customer" *2 AT-58, "Diagnostic Worksheet" *4 AT-63, "A/T Fluid Check" *5 AT-63, "Stall Test", AT-67, "Line Pres- *6 sure Test" AT-68, "Road Test" *7 AT-42, "CONSULT-II" *8 AT-38, "Introduction" *9 AT-54, "Judgement of Self-diagnosis Code" *1 0 AT-115, "Description" *1 1 AT-213, "Description" *1 2 AT-220, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" AT-61 *3 AT-11, "FAIL-SAFE" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4F03B] *1 3 AT-249, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" *1 4 AT-84, "Symptom Chart" *1 5 AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" *1 6 AT-115, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" *1 7 AT-213, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" *1 8 EC-53, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS". AT-62 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION A/T Fluid Check PFP:00000 A ECS005WI FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK 1. 2. 3. Clean area suspected of leaking, for example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission case. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in “D” position and wait a few minutes. Stop engine. B AT D SAT767B 4. E Check for fresh leakage. F G H SAT288G I FLUID CONDITION CHECK Fluid color Suspected problem Dark or black with burned odor Wear of frictional material Milky pink Water contamination — Road water entering through filler tube or breather Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and tacky Oxidation — Over or under filling, — Overheating J K L SAT638A FLUID LEVEL CHECK M Refer to MA-31, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Stall Test ECS005WJ STALL TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) SAT647B AT-63 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 3. 4. Set parking brake and block wheels. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test. ● It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine rpm on indicator. SAT513G 5. 6. 7. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in "D" position. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot brake. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release throttle. ● During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5 seconds. Stall revolution QG18DE : 2,350 - 2,800 rpm SAT514G 8. 9. Move selector lever to “N” position. Cool off ATF. ● Run engine at idle for at least one minute. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in “2”, “1” and “R” positions. SAT771B JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST The test result and possible damaged components relating to each result are shown in the illustrations that follow. In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, follow the “Work Flow” shown in AT-60, "Work Flow" . NOTE: Stall revolution is too high in “D”, “2” or “1” position: ● Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears...... Low one-way clutch slippage ● Slippage occurs in the following gears: 1st through 3rd gears in “D” position and engine brake functions with overdrive control switch set to “OFF”. 1st and 2nd gears in “2” position and engine brake functions with accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle)...... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage Stall revolution is too high in R position: ● Engine brake does not function in “1” position...... Low & reverse brake slippage ● Engine brake functions in “1” position...... Reverse clutch slippage Stall revolution within specifications: ● Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH)...... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing CAUTION: Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally. ● Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in “D” position...... High clutch slippage AT-64 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in “D” position...... Brake band slippage ● Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in “D” position, 2nd gear in “2” position, and 1st gear in “1” position with overdrive control switch set to “OFF”....... Overrun clutch slippage Stall revolution less than specifications: ● Poor acceleration during starts...... One-way clutch slippage in torque converter ● A B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-65 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] SAT871HA AT-66 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] Line Pressure Test ECS005WK LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS A Location of line pressure test ports are shown in the illustration. ● Always replace pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts. B AT D SAT561J LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. E Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or oil. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature F : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) G H SAT647B 3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port. I J K AAT898 4. Set parking brake and block wheels. ● Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure test is being performed at stall speed. M SAT513G AT-67 L TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed. ● When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the stall test procedure. Refer to AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" . SAT493G JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST Judgement Line pressure is low in all positions. Line pressure is low in particular position. Suspected parts ● Oil pump wear ● Control piston damage ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged ● Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve ● Clogged strainer ● Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch ● For example, line pressure is: − Low in “R” and “1” positions, but − Normal in “D” and “2” positions. Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit. At idle Refer to AT-22, "CLUTCH AND BAND CHART" . Line pressure is high. Line pressure is low. At stall speed ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] ● A/T fluid temperature sensor damaged ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Open in dropping resistor circuit ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pilot valve sticking Road Test ECS005WL DESCRIPTION ● ● 1. 2. The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of the transmission and analyze causes of problems. The road test consists of the following three parts: Check before engine is started Check at idle SAT786A AT-68 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 3. ● ● Cruise test Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and items to check. Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found. Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test. Refer to AT-38, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" and AT-215, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS" . A B AT SAT496G D E F G H I J K L M AT-69 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED 1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Park vehicle on flat surface. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? SAT967I LAT154 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop ROAD TEST. Go to AT-220, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . 2. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds? LAT154 Yes or No Yes >> TCM is in fail-safe mode. Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the AT-58, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . Refer to AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . No >> 1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items. Refer to AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . 3. Go to AT-71, "2. CHECK AT IDLE" . AT-70 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK AT IDLE A 1. CHECK ENGINE START B 1. Park vehicle on flat surface. 2. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. 5. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop ROAD TEST. Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-222, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position" . AT D E SAT769B 2. CHECK ENGINE START F 1. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position. 2. Move A/T selector lever to “D”, “1”, “2” or “R” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. 4. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> Stop ROAD TEST. Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-222, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position" . No >> GO TO 3. G H I SAT770B J 3. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. 2. 3. K Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Release parking brake. L >> GO TO 4. M SAT768B AT-71 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. Push vehicle forward or backward. 2. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward? 3. Apply parking brake. Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-223, "3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 5. SAT796A 5. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. Start engine. 2. Move A/T selector lever to “N” position. 3. Release parking brake. 4. Does vehicle move forward or backward? Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-224, "4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 6. SAT771B 6. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK 1. Apply foot brake. SAT797A 2. Move A/T selector lever to “R” position. 3. Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position? Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-225, "5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 7. SAT772B AT-72 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 7. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE A 1. Release foot brake for several seconds. 2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-226, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. B AT D SAT799A 8. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE E 1. Move A/T selector lever to “D”, “2” and “1” positions and check if vehicle creeps forward. 2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-73, "3. CRUISE TEST" . No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-228, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. F G H SAT773B 3. CRUISE TEST ● I Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3 of Diagnostic Worksheet. J K L SAT601J With CONSULT-II ● ● M Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result. Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per Shift Schedule. CONSULT-II Setting Procedure CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. AT-73 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. LAT136 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. SAIA0450E 3. Touch “A/T”. SAT014K 4. Touch “DATA MONITOR”. WCIA0366E AT-74 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 5. 6. Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”. See “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph Display”. A B AT SAT175K D 7. 8. Touch “SETTING” to recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”. Touch “START”. E F G SAT973J 9. H When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”. I J K SAT134K 10. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”. L M SAT135K AT-75 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 11. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”. SAT987J SAT974J 12. 13. 14. 15. Touch “DISPLAY”. Touch “PRINT”. Check the monitor data printed out. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3. SAT975J Without CONSULT-II ● Throttle position sensor can be checked by voltage across terminals 41 and 42 of TCM. WAT360 AT-76 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] Cruise Test — Part 1 A 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. ATF operating temperature 2. 3. 4. 5. B Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature. : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) AT Park vehicle on flat surface. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. Start engine. D E F SAT001J 6. G Move A/T selector lever to “D” position. H I J SAT775B K 7. 8. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway. Does vehicle start from D1 ? L Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-230, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . Continue ROAD TEST. M SAT495G AT-77 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2 ) Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2 : Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-233, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT954I 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 : Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT955I 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D3 to D4 : Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-237, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT956I AT-78 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 5. CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U) A Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%. Specified speed when lock-up occurs B : Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-239, "12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D SAT957I E 6. CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP F Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Go to AT-240, "13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" . 7. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 G L/U TO D4 ) H 1. Release accelerator pedal. 2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Go to AT-242, "14. Lock-up Is Not Released" . Continue ROAD TEST. I J K SAT958I 8. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 1. 2. L TO D3 ) Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3 ? M Read gear position and engine speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go toAT-80, "Cruise Test — Part 2" . No >> Go to AT-243, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT959I AT-79 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] Cruise Test — Part 2 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. 2. 3. 4. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position. Confirm A/T selector lever is in “D” position. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again. Does vehicle start from D1 ? Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-244, "16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT495G 2. CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 1. 2. 3. TO D4 TO D2 ) Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully? Read gear position and throttle position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-233, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT404H 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 : Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT960I AT-80 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) AND ENGINE BRAKE A Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3 . Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? B Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go to AT-82, "Cruise Test — Part 3" . No >> Go to AT-237, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D SAT405H E F G H I J K L M AT-81 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] Cruise Test — Part 3 1. VEHICLE SPEED D4 1. 2. 3. POSITION Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4 . >> GO TO 2. SAT812A 2. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 1. 2. 3. TO D3 ) Release accelerator pedal. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position while driving in D4 . Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)? SAT813A Read gear position and vehicle speed. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-246, "17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT999I 3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-243, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT999I AT-82 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3 1. 2. TO D2 ) A Move A/T selector lever from “D” to “2” position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF). Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to D2 ? B Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-247, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D SAT791GA E 5. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE F Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-243, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. G H I SAT791GA 6. CHECK SHIFT DOWN 1. 2. J Move A/T selector lever from “2” to “1” position while driving in 22 . Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position? K Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Go to AT-248, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. L M SAT778B 7. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-51, "TCM Selfdiagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . No >> Go to AT-249, "20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT778B AT-83 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Chart PFP:00000 ECS005WM Numbers are arranged in order of inspection. Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. Reference Page Items Symptom Engine cannot start in “P” and “N” positions. AT-222, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position" Condition ON vehicle Not Used Engine starts in position other than “N” and “P” positions. ON vehicle AT-222, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position" Diagnostic Item 1. Ignition switch and starter 2. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 3. PNP switch adjustment AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" 1. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 2. PNP switch adjustment AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 5. Oil pump AT-292, "Components" 6. Torque converter AT-272, "Disassembly" Transaxle noise in “P” and “N” positions. OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" and SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" ON vehicle Not Used QG18DE (SULEV) AT-84 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Vehicle moves when changing into “P” position, or parking gear does not disengage when shifted out of “P” position. AT-223, "3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed" Not Used Vehicle moves in “N” position. AT-224, "4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" Condition Diagnostic Item QG18DE (ULEV) A ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" B OFF vehicle 2. Parking components AT-267, "Components" AT ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" D 2. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 3. Reverse clutch AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" 4. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 1. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" OFF vehicle 2. Stall test Vehicle will not run in “R” position (but runs in “D”, “2” and “1” positions). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. AT-226, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" 3. Line pressure test 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 5. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 6. Reverse clutch AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" 7. High clutch OFF vehicle AT-63, "Stall Test" AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage QG18DE (SULEV) AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" E F G H I J K 8. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" L 9. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" M 10. Low & reverse brake AT-85 AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Not Used Vehicle braked when shifting into “R” position. OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item Shift Shock Sharp shock in shifting from “N” to “D” position. OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 4. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 5. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 6. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 7. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 8. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 1. Engine idling rpm EC-36, "Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment" 2.Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 3. Line pressure test ON vehicle QG18DE (SULEV) 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/ T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" 5. Engine speed signal AT-131, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" 6. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 7. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 8. Accumulator N-D AT-297, "Components" 9. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" AT-86 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Vehicle will not run in “D” and “2” positions (but runs in “1” and “R” positions). Condition Diagnostic Item QG18DE (ULEV) ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-267, "Components" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Stall test Vehicle will not run in “D”, “1”, “2” positions (but runs in “R” position). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 5. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 6. Accumulator N-D 7. Reverse clutch 8. High clutch AT-297, "Components" B AT D E F AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 9. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 10. Forward one-way clutch AT-337, "Components" 11. Low one-way clutch AT-267, "Components" OFF vehicle A AT-63, "Stall Test" 3. Line pressure test ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage QG18DE (SULEV) G H I J K L M AT-87 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Clutches or brakes slip somewhat in starting. AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 4. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 6. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" Excessive creep. ON vehicle AT-297, "Components" 8. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 9. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 10. Overrun clutch solenoid AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 11. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 12. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 13. Reverse clutch AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" 14. Low & reverse brake AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" 15. Oil pump AT-292, "OIL PUMP" OFF vehicle Not Used QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Fluid level 7. Accumulator N-D Slips/Will Not Engage QG18DE (SULEV) 16. Torque converter AT-267, "Components" 1. Engine idling rpm EC-36, "Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment" AT-88 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Slips/Will Not Engage Symptom No creep at all. AT-226, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position", AT-228, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position" Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 3. Control valve assembly 4. Forward clutch OFF vehicle No Up Shift ON vehicle OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Fluid level 5. Oil pump Failure to change gear from “D1 ” to “D2 ”. QG18DE (SULEV) AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" A B AT D AT-292, "OIL PUMP" 6. Torque converter AT-267, "Components" 1. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 2. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 3. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 5. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 6. Brake band AT-348, "Components" E F G H I J K L M AT-89 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Control cable adjustment ON vehicle No Up Shift Failure to change gear from “D2 ” to “D3 ”. OFF vehicle QG18DE (SULEV) QG18DE (ULEV) AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 2. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 3. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 5. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 6. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 7. Brake band AT-348, "Components" AT-90 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Failure to change gear from “D3 ” to “D4 ". AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" 2. Overdrive control switch AT-249, "21. TCM Selfdiagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" ON vehicle 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 1. PNP switch adjustment 3. Shift solenoid valve A No Up Shift QG18DE (SULEV) AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/ T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" 6. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 7. Brake band AT-348, "Components" A B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-91 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Improper Shift Timing Symptom Too high a gear change point from “D1 ” to “D2 ”, from “D2 ” to “D3 ”, from “D3 ” to “D4 ”. AT-233, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2", AT235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" , AT-237, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" Gear change directly from “D1 ” to “D3 ” occurs. Condition ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item Engine stops when shifting lever into “R”, “D”, “2” and “1”. AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" or AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Accumulator servo release AT-297, "Components" 3. Brake band Shift Shock Too sharp a shock in change from “D1 ” to “D2 ”. ON vehicle AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 4. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 5. Torque converter AT-267, "Components" 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 3. Accumulator servo release AT-297, "Components" 4. Control valve assembly OFF vehicle AT-348, "Components" EC-36, "Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment" 2. Fluid level ON vehicle OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] 1. Engine idling rpm Not Used QG18DE (SULEV) AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/ T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" 6. Brake band AT-348, "Components" AT-92 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] 2. Line pressure test ON vehicle Shift Shock Too sharp a shock in change from “D2 ” to “D3 ”. 3. Control valve assembly 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor OFF vehicle ON vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" B AT AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" D AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/ T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" E AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 6. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Line pressure test A AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 5. High clutch F G H AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" I 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/ T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" J 5. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 3. Control valve assembly Shift Shock QG18DE (SULEV) Too sharp a shock in change from “D3 ” to “D4 ”. 6. Forward one-way clutch OFF vehicle 7. Overrun clutch AT-324, "Components" AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" K L M AT-93 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level Almost no shock or clutches slipping in change from “D1 ” to “D2 ”. 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Almost no shock or slipping in change from “D2 ” to “D3 ”. Almost no shock or slipping in change from “D3 ” to “D4 ”. ON vehicle AT-297, "Components" AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 6. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 5. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 6. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2.Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] 3. Line pressure test 4. Control valve assembly OFF vehicle AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 4. Accumulator servo release 4. Control valve assembly Slips/Will Not Engage AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 3. Line pressure test OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 3. Line pressure test 5. Control valve assembly Slips/Will Not Engage QG18DE (SULEV) 5. Brake band AT-94 AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" AT-348, "Components" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Vehicle braked by gear change from “D1 ” to “D2 ”. Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level Vehicle braked by gear change from “D3 ” to “D4 ”. AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" 3. Low & reverse brake AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" 4. High clutch Vehicle braked by gear change from “D2 ” to “D3 ”. QG18DE (ULEV) 2. Reverse clutch OFF vehicle Not Used QG18DE (SULEV) AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" A B AT D 5. Low one-way clutch AT-267, "Components" ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-348, "Components" ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" F 2. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" G OFF vehicle 3. Forward one-way clutch 4. Reverse clutch E AT-337, "Components" AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" H I J K L M AT-95 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Not Used Maximum speed not attained. Acceleration poor. OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item QG18DE (SULEV) QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. PNP switch adjustment AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" 3. Overdrive control switch AT-249, "21. TCM Selfdiagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" 4. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 5. Vehicle speed sensor · A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor · MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 8. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 9. Reverse clutch AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" 10. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 11. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 12. Low & reverse brake 13. Oil pump 14. Torque converter AT-96 AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" AT-292, "OIL PUMP" AT-267, "Components" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level ON vehicle Failure to change gear from “D4 ” to “D3 ”. No Down Shift AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" A B AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" E 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" F 6. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 7. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 8. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" AT D G H I J 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" K 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" L 5. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" ON vehicle OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 2.Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from “D3 ” to “D2 ” or from “D4 ” to “D2 ”. QG18DE (SULEV) 6. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 7. Brake band AT-348, "Components" AT-97 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Failure to change gear from “D2 ” to “D1 ” or from “D3 ” to “D1 ”. Shift Shock Improper Shift Timing Gear change shock felt during deceleration by releasing accelerator pedal. Too high a change point from “D4 ” to “D3 ”, from “D3 " to “D2 ”, from “D2 ” to “D1 ”. ON vehicle AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 5. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 6. Low one-way clutch OFF vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 3. Shift solenoid valve A ON vehicle No Down Shift QG18DE (SULEV) AT-267, "Components" 7. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 8. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 4. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" ON vehicle AT-98 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Kickdown does not operate when depressing pedal in “D4 ” within kickdown vehicle speed. Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Revolution sensor and vehicle speed sensor AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 4. Shift solenoid valve B Improper Shift Timing 1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR ON vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] 3. Shift solenoid valve A Kickdown operates or engine overruns when depressing pedal in “D4 ” beyond kickdown vehicle speed limit. QG18DE (SULEV) 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] A B AT D E AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" F AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" G AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" H I J AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" K 3. Shift solenoid valve A 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" L M AT-99 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D4 ” to “D2 ” when depressing pedal. AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 6. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 7. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 8. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] ON vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) 3. Line pressure test ON vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D4 ” to “D3 ” when depressing pedal. QG18DE (SULEV) AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 3. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 7. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 8. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 9. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" OFF vehicle 10. Forward clutch AT-100 AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D3 ” to “D2 ” when depressing pedal. AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 5. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 7. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 8. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D4 ” or “D3 ” to “D1 ” when depressing pedal. QG18DE (ULEV) 3. Line pressure test ON vehicle ON vehicle QG18DE (SULEV) AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" A B AT D E F G H I J 3. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" L 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" M 7. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 8. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 9. Forward one-way clutch AT-337, "Components" 10. Low one-way clutch AT-267, "Components" OFF vehicle AT-101 K TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Vehicle will not run in any position. Diagnostic Item AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 3. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 5. Oil pump AT-292, "OIL PUMP" 6. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 7. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 8. Low & reverse brake Not Used No Down Shift Improper Shift Timing Failure to change from “D3 ” to “22 ” when changing lever into “2” position. AT-247, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position" Gear change from “22 ” to “23 ” in “2” position. QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Fluid level OFF vehicle Transmission noise in “D”, “2”, “1” and “R” positions. QG18DE (SULEV) AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" 9. Torque converter AT-267, "Components" 10. Parking components AT-267, "Components" ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" OFF vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-267, "Components" 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" OFF vehicle 2. Shift solenoid valve B AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" 3. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 4. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 5. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 1. PNP switch adjustment AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" ON vehicle 2. Control cable adjustment AT-102 AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Not Used Not Used Symptom Engine brake does not operate in “1” position. AT-248, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position" Engine brake does not operate in “1” position. AT-248, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position" Condition ON vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Gear change from “11 ” to “12 ” in “1” position. AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" 2. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 4. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 6. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" OFF vehicle AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" 2. Control cable adjustment AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" 1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" ON vehicle Does not change from “12 ” to “11 ” in “1” position. 2. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 3. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 4. Low one-way clutch OFF vehicle Shift Shock Large shock changing from “12 ” to “11 ” in “1” position. AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" 1. PNP switch adjustment ON vehicle No Down Shift QG18DE (ULEV) 1. PNP switch adjustment 7. Low & reverse brake Improper Shift Timing QG18DE (SULEV) 5. Brake band AT-267, "Components" AT-348, "Components" 6. Low & reverse brake AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" OFF vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" AT-103 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level ON vehicle Not used Transaxle overheats. QG18DE (ULEV) AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Engine idling rpm EC-36, "Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment" 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 4. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" 6. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 7. Oil pump AT-292, "OIL PUMP" 8. Reverse clutch AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" 9. High clutch OFF vehicle QG18DE (SULEV) AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 10. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 11. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 12. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" 13. Low & reverse brake 14. Torque converter AT-104 AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" AT-267, "Components" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level 2. Reverse clutch ATF shoots out during operation. White smoke emitted from exhaust pipe during operation. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Offensive smell at fluid charging pipe. QG18DE (ULEV) AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" A B AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" AT 3. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 4. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 5. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" E 6. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" F 7. Low & reverse brake Not Used QG18DE (SULEV) 1. Fluid level AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" 2. Torque converter AT-267, "Components" 3. Oil pump AT-292, "OIL PUMP" 4. Reverse clutch AT-313, "REVERSE CLUTCH" D G H 5. High clutch AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" 6. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 7. Forward clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" J 8. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" K OFF vehicle 9. Low & reverse brake AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" I L M AT-105 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items No Lockup Engagement/ TCC Inoperative Symptom Torque converter is not locked up. Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 3. Engine speed signal 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor OFF vehicle QG18DE (SULEV) AT-131, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/ T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" 5. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 6. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 7. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 8. Torque converter AT-106 AT-267, "Components" TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Torque converter clutch piston slip. No Lockup Engagement/ TCC Inoperative Lock-up point is extremely high or low. ON vehicle QG18DE (ULEV) AT-63, "FLUID LEVEL CHECK" AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" A B AT 3. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" D 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" E 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" F 6. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" ON vehicle OFF vehicle QG18DE (SULEV) 7. Torque converter AT-267, "Components" 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 4. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" AT-107 G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Reference Page Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle No Up Shift A/T does not shift to “D4 ” when driving with overdrive control switch “ON”. Diagnostic Item QG18DE (SULEV) QG18DE (ULEV) 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" 2. PNP switch adjustment AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" 3. Overdrive control switch AT-249, "21. TCM Selfdiagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)", AT203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" 6. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" 7. Control valve assembly AT-297, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" 8. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/ T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" 9. Line pressure test AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" 10. Brake band AT-348, "Components" 11. Overrun clutch AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" OFF vehicle AT-108 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] TCM Terminals and Reference Value ECS005WN A PREPARATION ● Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48 by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”. B AT D SAT216J TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT E F G H WAT158 TCM INSPECTION TABLE (Data are reference values.) Terminal No. 1 2 3 Wire color R/W P/B Y/G I Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Line pressure solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve (with dropping resistor) Torque converter clutch solenoid valve When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 1.5 - 3.0V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 4 - 14V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V K L M 5 L CAN-H — — 6 Y CAN-L — — 10 BR/R Power source AT-109 J When turning ignition switch to “ON”. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to “OFF”. 0V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Terminal No. 11 12 Wire color L/W L/Y Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in “D1 ” or “D4 ”.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in “D2 ” or “D3 ”.) 0V When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in “D1 ” or “D2 ”.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in “D3 ” or “D4 ”.) 0V When turning ignition switch to “ON”. 19 20 25 26 27 28 29 PU L/B B BR/Y B/R R/B W OBD-II Overrun clutch solenoid valve Ground PNP switch “1” position PNP switch “2” position Power source (Memory back-up) Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to “OFF”. 0V When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. Battery voltage When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate. 0V — 0V When setting selector lever to “1” position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to “2” position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When turning ignition switch to “OFF”. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to “ON”. Battery voltage When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. 150Hz When vehicle parks. Under 1.3V or over 4.5V or Revolution sensor AT-110 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F03B] Judgement standard (Approx.) Terminal No. Wire color Item 30 ** G/B Data link connector — — 31 ** GY/L Data link connector — — 32 R 34 35 36 W/G G/Y LG Condition Throttle position sensor (Power source) PNP switch “D” position PNP switch “R” position PNP switch “N” or “P” position When turning ignition switch to "ON". 4.5 - 5.5V When turning ignition switch to "OFF". 0V When setting selector lever to “D” position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to “R” position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V A B AT D E F G H 39 * L/OR Engine speed signal Refer to EC-106, "ECM INSPECTION TABLE" . — I J 40 41 * 42 47 48 PU/R GY B/W BR B Vehicle speed sensor When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine. (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) Throttle position sensor Throttle position sensor (Ground) — A/T fluid temperature sensor Ground AT-111 Fully-closed throttle: 0.5 - 0.7V Fully-open throttle: 4V 0V When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F). 1.5V When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F). 0.5V — * : This terminal is connected to the ECM. ** : These terminals are connected to the Data link connector. Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V 0V K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F03B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN PFP:00000 ECS005WO WCWA0061E AT-112 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F03B] A B AT WAT338 D Diagnostic Procedure ECS005WP 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. F G H I SAT611J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. J 2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2 K 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground. L M LAT253 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. AT-113 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F03B] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: – Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28 (Main harness) – Fuse – Ignition switch Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to AT-112, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. AT-114 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4F03B] DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Description ● ● PFP:32006 A ECS005WQ The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. B AT D SAT088JA E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : PNP SW/CIRC : P0705 Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position. Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● PNP switch F G DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. 3. H I J SAT014K Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V Selector lever: D position (OD “ON” or “OFF”) L M With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-115 K DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ECS005WR WCWA0117E AT-116 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4F03B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 26 27 34 35 36 BR/Y B/R W/G G/Y LG PNP SWITCH "1" POSITION PNP SWITCH "2" POSITION PNP SWITCH "D" POSITION PNP SWITCH "R" POSITION PNP SWITCH "N" OR "P" POSITION DATA (DC) WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "1" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "2" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "D" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "R" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "N" OR "P" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V A B AT D E F G Diagnostic Procedure ECS005WS 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “P/N”, “R”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following items: ● PNP switch Refer toAT-119, "Component Inspection" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . AT-117 H I J K L M SAT701J DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each position. Terminal No. Lever position 36 35 34 27 26 P, N B 0 0 0 0 R 0 B 0 0 0 D 0 0 B 0 0 2 0 0 0 B 0 1 0 0 0 0 B Voltage B 0 : Battery voltage : 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following items: ● PNP switch Refer to AT-119, "Component Inspection" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . SAT425J 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-115, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-118 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005WT A PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position B Terminal No. P 3—7 R 3—8 N 3—9 D 3—6 2 3—5 1 3—4 1—2 AT 1—2 D E F G WAT159 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If NG, check again with control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch. H I J K SAT089JA L M AT-119 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F03B] DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description PFP:31940 ECS005WU The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. WAT237 SAT021J CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item A/T fluid temperature sensor Condition Specification (Approx.) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC Malfunction is detected when ... TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. : P0710 Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. SAT014K AT-120 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F03B] With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.) CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) A B AT With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. D SEF949Y E F G H I J K L M AT-121 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ECS005WV WCWA0059E AT-122 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 42 B/W SENSOR (GROUND) 47 BR A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR — DATA (DC) WHEN ATF FLUID TEMPERATURE IS 20°C (68°F) 1.5V WHEN ATF FLUID TEMPERATURE IS 80°C (176°F) 0.5V Diagnostic Procedure A 0V B ECS005WW AT 1. INSPECTION START D Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. E 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) F With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. G H I J SAT614J Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] K : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. L M AT-123 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F03B] 3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T. SAT937J Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] 3. 4. 5. : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F57 terminal 42 (B/W) and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. WCIA0152E 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-124 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F03B] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold. B AT D E LAT160 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check the following items: – A/T fluid temperature sensor Refer to AT-125, "Component Inspection" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open Component Inspection F G H ECS005WX I A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ● ● For removal, refer to AT-259, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown at left. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.) 20 (68) 2.5 kΩ 80 (176) 0.3 kΩ J K L SAT298F M AT-125 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F03B] DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description PFP:32702 ECS005WY The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. SAT357H ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT Malfunction is detected when... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. : P0720 Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Revolution sensor DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value increase. If the check result is NG, go to AT-126, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WCIA0366E SAT014K AT-126 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F03B] 5. If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. A B AT SEF949Y D E F G H I J K L M AT-127 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ECS005WZ WCWA0118E AT-128 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 10 BR/R 29 W 42 B/W POWER SOURCE REVOLUTION SENSOR DATA (DC) WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "ON" BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "OFF" 0V WHEN MOVING AT 20 KM/H (12 MPH). USE CONSULT-II PULSE FREQUENCY MEASURING FUNCTION THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (GROUND) — A B 150 Hz AT 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS005X0 D 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) E 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. F G H I SAT614J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J K 2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) L With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. M WAT402 Check harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution sensor. Refer to AT-128, "Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T" . – Check harness for short or open between ignition switch and revolution sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – AT-129 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F03B] 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-126, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-130 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F03B] DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL Description PFP:24825 A ECS005X1 The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. B ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : ENGINE SPEED SIG Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM. Check item (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) AT : P0725 D DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) E F G SAT014K H I With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. J K SEF949Y L M AT-131 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ECS005X2 WCWA0119E AT-132 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 39 L/OR ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL REFER TO ECM TABLE Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC) A — ECS005X3 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM B AT Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 3. NG >> Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-32, "INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART" . 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) D E F With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”. Check engine speed changes according to throttle position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM ● Resistor and ignition coil Refer to EC-32, "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" . G H I J SAT645J K L M AT-133 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F03B] 3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 39 and ground. LAT162 Voltage (Idle speed) : Refer to AT-109, "TCM Terminals and Reference Value" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM ● Resistor and ignition coil Refer to EC-32, "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" . 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-131, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-134 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS005X4 This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open 2* 2 3 3 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4* 3 3 4 D E F G H I *: P0731 is detected. J Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... : A/T 1ST GR FNCTN : P0731 A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Check items (Possible cause) ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit K L DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. AT-135 M SAT014K DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down WCIA0366E the fluid). Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 SAT021J MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-138, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition No malfunction exists Malfunction for P0731 exists. 8. Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 1→2→3→4 2→2→3→3 4→3→3→4 Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”.) Refer to AT-138, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-136 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST ECS005X5 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT118 WAT343 AT-137 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS005X6 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check shift solenoid valve operation. – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B Refer to AT-139, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. 2. WAT163 2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. 1. 2. SAT367H 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-135, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-138 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005X7 A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B ● Refer to AT-259, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Resistance Check ● B Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 2 AT 20 - 30Ω Ground 1 D 5 - 20Ω E F G H WAT213 I Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. J K L M WAT163 AT-139 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION Description PFP:31940 ECS005X8 This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. ● ● Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4 3* 3 4 *: P0732 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code : A/T 2ND GR FNCTN Malfunction is detected when ... A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. : P0732 Check items (Possible cause) ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. SAT014K With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V 1. WCIA0366E AT-140 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] 3. 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). A Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 MPH) under the B following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) AT Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTD TLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 SAT021J MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) E If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-143, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for F “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. G Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0732 exists. 4→3→3→4 8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-143, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. H I J K L M AT-141 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND ECS005X9 WAT119 WAT344 AT-142 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS005XA A 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check shift solenoid valve operation. – Shift solenoid valve B Refer to AT-144, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. 2. AT D E F G H I WAT164 J 2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. 1. 2. K L M SAT367H 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-140, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-143 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005XB SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ● Refer to AT-259, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Resistance Check ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve B Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 1 Ground 5 - 20Ω WAT165 Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. WAT164 AT-144 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS005XC This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band, AT etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC E This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed 1 1 4* 4 *: P0733 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code : A/T 3RD GR FNCTN D Malfunction is detected when ... A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. : P0733 Check items (Possible cause) ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit F G H I J K DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. AT-145 L M SAT014K DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down WCIA0366E the fluid). Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) until SAT021J “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists. 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1→1→4→4 8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-146 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD ECS005XD A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT120 WAT345 AT-147 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS005XE 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check shift solenoid valve operation. – Shift solenoid valve A Refer to “Component Inspection”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. 2. WAT166 2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. 1. 2. SAT367H 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-145, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-148 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005XF A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ● Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Resistance Check ● B Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve A Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 2 Ground AT 20 - 30Ω D E F G H WAT167 I Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. J K L M WAT166 AT-149 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 ECS005XG This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or when the line pressure is low. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Line pressure solenoid valve duty Condition Specification (Approx.) Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) 24% ↓ 95% ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed 1 2 2 1* *: P0734 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... : A/T 4TH GR FNCTN : P0734 A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. AT-150 Check items (Possible cause) ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before continuing. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. B AT D SAT014K With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. WCIA0366E FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) SAT021J Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0734 exists. 1→2→2→1 8. A Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”.) Refer to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . AT-151 E F G H I J K L M DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-152 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH ECS005XH A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0065E AT-153 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 1 2 11 12 R/W P/B L/W L/Y LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (WITH DROPPING RESISTOR) SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B DATA (DC) WHEN RELEASING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 1.5 - 2.5V WHEN DEPRESSING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 0V WHEN RELEASING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 5 - 14V WHEN DEPRESSING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 0.5V OR LESS WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A OPERATES BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A DOES NOT OPERATES 0V WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B OPERATES BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B DOES NOT OPERATES 0V Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 ECS005XI TO D4 ) During “Cruise Test − Part 1” (AT-77, "Cruise Test — Part 1" ), does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 2. SAT988H 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" . LAT236 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. AT-154 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] 3. CHECK SOLENOID VALVES A 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Refer to AT-158, "SOLENOID VALVES" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. B AT D E F G H WAT168 4. CHECK CONTROL VALVE I 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair control valve. J K L M SAT367H 5. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-155 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] 6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Refer to AT-158, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. WAT170 7. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . 2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair control valve. SAT367H 8. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-156 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] 9. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-151, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Perform “Cruise Test — Part 1” (AT-77, "Cruise Test — Part 1" ) again and return to the start point of this test group. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-157 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005XJ SOLENOID VALVES ● Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Resistance Check ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. Shift solenoid valve A 2 Shift solenoid valve B 1 Line pressure solenoid valve 4 20 - 30Ω Ground 5 - 20Ω 2.5 - 5Ω WAT169 Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. WAT168 AT-158 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS005XK The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in “D4 ”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]s. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. B AT D WAT237 E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Condition Specification (Approx.) Lock-up “OFF” ↓ Lock-up “ON” 4% ↓ 94% F G ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : TCC SOLENOID/CIRC Malfunction is detected when... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. : P0740 Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● T/C clutch solenoid valve H I DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. J K With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. L SAT014K 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II and wait at least 1 second. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-159 M DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ECS005XL WCWA0066E AT-160 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 3 Y/G TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE WHEN A/T PERFORMS LOCKUP 8 - 15V WHEN A/T DOES NOT PERFORM LOCK-UP 0V DATA (DC) A B Diagnostic Procedure ECS005XM AT 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground. E F G H LAT171 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Refer to AT-162, "TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open I J K 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector F56. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly F50 terminal 5 (Y/G) and TCM harness connector terminal 3 (Y/G). L M Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. WCIA0086E 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-159, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-161 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005XN TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ● Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Resistance Check ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 5 Ground 5 - 20Ω WAT173 Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. WAT174 AT-162 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS005XO This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits AT open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE D Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Condition Specification (Approx.) Lock-up “OFF” ↓ Lock-up “ON” 4% ↓ 94% E F G H I J K L M AT-163 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed 1 2 2 1* *: P0744 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when... : A/T TCC S/V FNCTN : P0744 A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. Check items (Possible cause) ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). 3. Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. 1. SAT014K WCIA0366E AT-164 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] 4. – – 5. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.) THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94% VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) Check that “GEAR” shows “4”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) Refer to AT-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-385, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. A B AT SAT021J D E F G H I J K L M AT-165 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ECS005XP WCWA0067E AT-166 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 1 2 3 R/W P/B Y/G LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (WITH DROPPING RESISTOR) TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DATA (DC) WHEN RELEASING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 1.5 - 2.5V WHEN DEPRESSING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 0.5V OR LESS WHEN RELEASING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 5 - 14V WHEN DEPRESSING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 0.5V OR LESS WHEN A/T PERFORMS LOCKUP 8 - 14V WHEN A/T DOES NOT PERFORM LOCK-UP 0V A B AT D E Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 ECS005XQ F TO D4 ) During “Cruise Test − Part 1” (AT-77, "Cruise Test — Part 1" ), does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> GO TO 2. G H I SAT988H J 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" . K L M LAT236 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. AT-167 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve. SAT367H 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). 5. CHECK DTC Perform AT-164, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. Check lock-up condition. AT-168 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] 6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE A 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check line pressure solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-177, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. B AT D E F G H WAT175 I 7. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . 2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair control valve. J K L M SAT367H 8. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-169 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] 9. CHECK DTC Perform AT-164, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. Check for proper lock-up. 10. CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION During “Cruise Test − Part 1” (AT-77, "Cruise Test — Part 1" ), does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> Perform “Cruise Test − Part 1” (AT-77, "Cruise Test — Part 1" ) again and return to the start point of this test group. No >> GO TO 11. SAT989H 11. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-162, "TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. WAT176 AT-170 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] 12. CHECK CONTROL VALVE A 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-298, "Disassembly" . 2. Check control valves for sticking. – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter clutch relief valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair control valve. B AT D E SAT367H F 13. CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). G H 14. CHECK DTC Perform AT-164, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Perform “Cruise Test — Part 1” (AT-77, "Cruise Test — Part 1" ) again and return to the start point of this test group. I J K L M AT-171 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005XR SOLENOID VALVES ● Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Resistance Check ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. Line pressure solenoid valve 4 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 5 2.5 - 5Ω Ground 5 - 20Ω WAT177 Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. WAT178 AT-172 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS005XS The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”. B AT D WAT237 E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Line pressure solenoid valve duty Condition Specification (Approx.) Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) 24% ↓ 95% F G NOTE: The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”. ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : L/PRESS SOL/CIRC I Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. : P0745 Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Line pressure solenoid valve DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE L M With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. SAT014K 2. Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 5 seconds. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-173 J K NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. H DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ECS005XT WCWA0068E AT-174 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 1 2 R/W P/B LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (WITH DROPPING RESISTOR) DATA (DC) WHEN RELEASING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 1.5 - 3.0V WHEN DEPRESSING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 0.5V OR LESS WHEN RELEASING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 5 - 14v WHEN DEPRESSING ACCELERATOR PEDAL (ENGINE WARM) 0.5V OR LESS Diagnostic Procedure 1. 2. 3. B AT ECS005XU 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE A D E Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground. F G H I LAT179 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Line pressure solenoid valve Refer to AT-177, "Component Inspection" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open J K L M AT-175 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 2. LAT180 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following items: ● Dropping resistor Refer to AT-178, "DROPPING RESISTOR" . ● Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Check resistance between terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 1. LAT181 If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 3. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-173, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-176 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005XV A LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE ● Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Resistance Check B ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve 4 AT Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. Ground 2.5 - 5Ω D E F G H WAT182 I Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. J K L M WAT183 AT-177 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] DROPPING RESISTOR ● Check resistance between two terminals. Resistance : 10 - 15Ω SAT444J AT-178 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F03B] DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Description PFP:31940 A ECS005XW Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. B AT D WAT237 E Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : SFT SOL A/CIRC F G Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Check items (Possible cause) ● ● : P0750 Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) H Shift solenoid valve A I DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. 3. Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift “1” → “2” (“GEAR”). 1. J K L SAT014K With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-179 M DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ECS005XX WAT125 WAT345 AT-180 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS005XY A 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground. AT D E F LAT184 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Shift solenoid valve A Refer to AT-182, "Component Inspection" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open G H I 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal 2 and TCM harness connector terminal 11. J K L M LAT185 If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-179, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-181 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005XZ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ● Refer to AT-182, "Component Inspection" . Resistance Check ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve A Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 2 Ground 20 - 30Ω WAT186 Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. WAT187 AT-182 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F03B] DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Description PFP:31940 A ECS005Y0 Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. B AT D WAT237 E Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : SFT SOL B/CIRC F G Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Check items (Possible cause) ● ● : P0755 Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) H Shift solenoid valve B I DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. J K L SAT014K With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. 3. Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift 1 → 2 → 3 (“GEAR”). With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-183 M DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ECS005Y1 WAT126 WAT344 AT-184 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS005Y2 A 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. AT D E F LAT188 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Shift solenoid valve B Refer to AT-186, "Component Inspection" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open G H I 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 12. J K L M LAT189 If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-183, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-185 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005Y3 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ● Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Resistance Check ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve B Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 1 Ground 5 - 20Ω WAT190 Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. WAT191 AT-186 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F03B] DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] PFP:22560 Description A ECS006GS The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls throttle position. This system also uses an electric throttle control actuator which consists of a throttle control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM. AT CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] B Condition Specification Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V D E F G H I J K L M AT-187 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F03B] On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS006GT Diagnostic trouble code TP SEN/CIRC A/T with CONSULT-II or P1705 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the ECM. Possible Cause ECS006GU Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS006GV CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Accelerator pedal condition THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW Fully released Less than 4.7V ON OFF Partially depressed 0.1 - 4.6V OFF OFF Fully depressed 1.9 - 4.6V OFF ON 2. 3. If the check result is NG, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) If the check result is NG, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. SAT014K WCIA0366E 4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) SAT014K AT-188 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F03B] A B AT SEF949Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. E F G H I J K L M AT-189 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ECS006GW WCWA0120E AT-190 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 32 41 42 R GY B/W A IGNITION SWITCH ON 4.5 - 5.5V IGNITION SWITCH OFF 0V THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] IGNITION ON AND ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED SLOWLY AFTER WARMING UP ENGINE FULLY CLOSED THROTTLE: 0.5V SENSOR GROUND — — SENSOR POWER WIDE OPEN THROTTLE: 4.0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS006GX 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM B AT D E Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Refer to EC-66, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . OK or NG OK (with CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-235, "DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR" and EC-540, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . ● 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) F G H I With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”. J K L M SAT614J Voltage: Fully-closed throttle Fully-open throttle :Approximately 0.5V :Approximately 4V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit. (Main harness) AT-191 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F03B] 3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 (GY) and 42 (B/W) while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly. Voltage: Fully-closed throttle :Approximately 0.5V valve Fully-open throttle :Approximately 4V valve (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) WCWA0085E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit. (Main harness) 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-192 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS005Y8 The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the inhibitor switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled. B AT D WAT237 E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. : P1760 Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Overrun clutch solenoid valve G DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. H I J SAT014K With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 MPH) with “D” position (OD “ON”). Release accelerator pedal completely with “D” position (OD “OFF”). K L M With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-193 F DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ECS005Y9 WAT128 WAT351 AT-194 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS005YA A 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground. AT D E F LAT195 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Overrun clutch solenoid valve Refer to AT-196, "Component Inspection" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open G H I 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal 3 and TCM harness connector terminal 20. J K L M LAT196 If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-193, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-195 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F03B] Component Inspection ECS005YB OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ● Refer to AT-196, "Component Inspection" . Resistance Check ● Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Overrun clutch solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 3 Ground 20 - 30Ω WAT197 Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. WAT198 AT-196 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F03B] DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) PFP:31940 Description A ECS005YC The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. B AT D WAT237 E F G H SAT021J I CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item A/T fluid temperature sensor J Specification (Approx.) Condition Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN L Malfunction is detected when ... TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. : 8th judgement flicker Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. K With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH). Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. SAT014K AT-197 M DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F03B] 2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH). WCIA0366E 3. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools), AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . SAT335HC AT-198 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ECS005YD A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0121E AT-199 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 10 BR/R POWER SOURCE 19 BR/R POWER SOURCE 28 R/B POWER SOURCE (MEMORY BACK UP) 42 B/W GROUND (A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) 47 BR A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR DATA (DC) WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "ON" BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "OFF" 0V WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "ON" BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "OFF" 0V WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "OFF" BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN TURNING IGNITION SWITCH TO "ON" BATTERY VOLTAGE — 0V WHEN ATF TEMPERATURE IS 20°C (68°F) APPROX. 1.5V WHEN ATF TEMPERATURE IS 80°C (176°F) APPROX. 0.5V Diagnostic Procedure ECS005YE 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. Voltage 3. 4. : Battery voltage Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM (Main harness) ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . AT-200 WCIA0164E DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector F50 in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F50 terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold. B AT D E LCIA0027E 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 3. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 4. NG >> 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check the following items: – A/T fluid temperature sensor Refer to AT-202, "Component Inspection" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open F G H 3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) I With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. J K L M SAT614J Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer toEC-141, "Wiring Diagram" . AT-201 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T. Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] 3. 4. : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. SAT463J 5. Check resistance between terminal 42 (B/W) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to EC-141, "Wiring Diagram" . WCIA0152E 5. CHECK DTC Perform AT-197, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Component Inspection ECS005YF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ● ● Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (approx.) 20 (68) 2.5 kΩ 80 (176) 0.3 kΩ SAT298F AT-202 DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4F03B] DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR Description PFP:24814 A ECS005YG The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR. B AT D E F G H LAT199 ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. : 2nd judgement flicker Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Vehicle speed sensor I J DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before continuing. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K L M With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. SAT014K 2. 1. 2. Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 16 MPH). Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in “D” and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16 MPH). WCIA0366E AT-203 DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4F03B] 3. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to “TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)”, AT-51, "TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)" . SAT329HA AT-204 DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ECS005YH A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0122E AT-205 DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4F03B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 40 PU/R VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR WHEN MOVING VEHICLE AT 2 TO 3 KM/H (1 TO 2 MPH) FOR 1 m (3ft) OR MORE DATA (DC) VOLTAGE VARIES FROM GREATER THAN 1V TO LESS THAN 4.5 V Diagnostic Procedure ECS005YI 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. SAT614J Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. LAT201 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following items: ● Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor Refer to DI-25, "VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK" . ● Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness) AT-206 DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-203, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-207 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F03B] DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 ECS006GM CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS006GN This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control unit. Possible Cause ECS006GO Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS006GP NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. AT-208 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ECS006GQ A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0123E AT-209 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS006GR 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and start engine. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode for "A/T" with CONSULTII. Is any malfunction of the "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" indicated? Yes >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section. Refer to LAN - LAN-4, "CAN Communication Unit" No >> INSPECTION END. PCIA0061E AT-210 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4F03B] DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) Description PFP:31036 A ECS005YJ The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. B AT D SAT574J E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic Trouble Code No. : CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) Malfunction is detected when .... TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is malfunctioning. Check Item (Possible Cause) ● F TCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. H With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. I J SAT014K 3. K Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. L M WCIA0366E Diagnostic Procedure ECS005YK 1. INSPECTION START (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. >> GO TO 2. AT-211 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK DTC Perform AT-211, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK DTC AGAIN Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END AT-212 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4F03B] DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) Description PFP:31036 A ECS005YL The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. B AT D SAT574J E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. Check item (Possible cause) ● F TCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. H With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. I 1. J SAT014K 3. K Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. L M WCIA0366E AT-213 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS005YM 1. CHECK DTC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position). 4. Touch “ERASE”. 5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds. Perform AT-213, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again? Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END AT-214 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC PFP:00007 A ECS005YN B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0124E AT-215 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 26 27 34 35 36 BR/Y B/R W/G G/Y LG PNP SWITCH "1" POSITION PNP SWITCH "2" POSITION PNP SWITCH "D" POSITION PNP SWITCH "R" POSITION PNP SWITCH "N" OR "P" POSITION DATA (DC) WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "1" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "2" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "D" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "R" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO "N" OR "P" POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER TO OTHER POSITIONS 0V AT-216 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0074E AT-217 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] WCWA0125E TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND AT-218 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 5 L CAN-H — — 6 Y CAN-L — — 30 G/B DATA LINK CONNECTOR (RX) — — 31 GY/L DATA LINK CONNECTOR (TX) 32 R SENSOR POWER — A B — IGNITION SWITCH ON APPROX. 4.5 - 5.5V IGNITION SWITCH OFF APPROX. 0V AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-219 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ECS005YO SYMPTOM: O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”. WCIA0153E 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. Voltage 3. 4. : Battery voltage Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and SAT467J TCM (Main harness). Refer to AT-112, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM (Main harness) Refer to AT-112, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . ● Ignition switch and fuse. Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . 2. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Refer to AT-112, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . SAT468J AT-220 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS A With CONSULT-II Does "SELECTION FORM MENU" in "DATA MONITOR" show damage to O/D OFF indicator lamp (SELF D DP LMP) signal circuit? B No Tools Execute the self-diagnosis. Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES or NO AT YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-208, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 4. D 4. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT Turn ignition switch to "OFF" position. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-6, "Combination Meter" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the combination meter. E 5. CHECK SYMPTOM G 1. 2. F Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. H I J K L M AT-221 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position ECS005YP SYMPTOM: ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position. ● Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “2”, “1” or “R” position. 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. SCIA0706E 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION Check for short or open of PNP switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2. Refer to AT-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace PNP switch. 3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . SAT023JB 4. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-222 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed ECS005YQ A SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in “P” position. B 1. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . AT D E SAT023JB F 2. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS G Check parking components. Refer to AT-267, "Components" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I SAT282F J K L M AT-223 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ECS005YR SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position. 1. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . SAT023JB 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> 1. Disassemble A/T. 2. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Overrun clutch assembly – Reverse clutch assembly SAT171B 4. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-224 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position ECS005YS A SYMPTOM: There is large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position. B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT173, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" or AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . No >> GO TO 2. AT D E SAT831HA F 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve – Oil pump assembly G H I SAT494G J K 3. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-225 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position ECS005YT SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting “R” position. 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position. Refer to AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following item: – Oil pump assembly SAT494G 3. CHECK STALL TEST Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. OK in “1” position, NG in “R” position>>1.Disassemble A/T. 2. Check the following items: – Reverse clutch assembly NG in both “1” and “R” positions>> GO TO 6. SAT493G AT-226 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. B AT D SAT171B E 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F G H 1. 2. Disassemble A/T. Check the following items: – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly – Low & reverse brake assembly – Forward clutch assembly – Overrun clutch assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M AT-227 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position ECS005YU SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D”, “2” or “1” position. 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following item: – Oil pump assembly SAT494G 3. CHECK STALL TEST Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT63, "Stall Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT493G AT-228 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. B AT D SAT171B E 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F G H 1. 2. Disassemble A/T. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M AT-229 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ECS005YV SYMPTOM: Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise Test — Part 1. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-226, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), overrun clutch solenoid valve, torque converter clutch solenoid valve, shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , AT-193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" or AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . No >> GO TO 3. SAT695K 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-184, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-67, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. SAT494G AT-230 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 8. B AT D SAT171B E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM F G H I J Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. K L M AT-231 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – High clutch assembly – Torque converter – Oil pump assembly – Reverse clutch assembly – Low and reverse brake assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-232 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ECS005YW SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed. A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed. A B 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-228, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position" , AT-230, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . AT D E F G H SAT023JB I 3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuits. J K L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] M Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-184, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E AT-233 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 8. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-234 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ECS005YX A SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed. B 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” AT OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. D No >> Go to AT-228, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position" , AT-230, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT E With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit? F Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 3. G H I SCIA0706E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-184, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. J K L M LCIA0110E AT-235 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 7. SAT171B 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – High clutch assembly – Brake band OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-236 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ECS005YY A SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed. ● A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur. B 1. CHECK SYMPTOM AT Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-228, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position" , AT-230, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . D E 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS With CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits? ● PNP switch ● Overdrive control switch ● A/T fluid temperature sensor ● Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) ● Shift solenoid valve A or B ● Vehicle speed sensor·MTR Yes or No SAT833HB Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" , AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-184, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. G H I J K L M LCIA0110E AT-237 F TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 7. SAT171B 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-238 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ECS005YZ A SYMPTOM: A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), engine speed signal, torque converter clutch solenoid valve, or vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-120, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-131, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT159, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , and AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . No >> GO TO 2. AT D E SAT696K 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-184, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. F G H I J LCIA0110E K 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter relief valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Remove A/T. 4. Check torque converter. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 4. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-239 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ECS005Z0 SYMPTOM: A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds. 1. CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-131, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT835H 2. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT171B 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 4. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-240 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-241 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ECS005Z1 SYMPTOM: Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released. 1. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to AT115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. SCIA0706E 2. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-242 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ECS005Z2 A SYMPTOM: ● Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D4 to D3 . ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning overdrive control switch OFF. ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting A/T from “D” to “2” position. B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS AT Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT193, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F SAT836H 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-184, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. G H I J LCIA0110E K 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. L M SAT171B AT-243 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-259, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Overrun clutch assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ECS005Z3 SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2. 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-126, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-179, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-183, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , AT-203, "DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . No >> GO TO 2. AT-244 SAT934FA TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 2. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> Go to AT-230, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-245 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF” SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 ECS005Z4 when changing overdrive control switch to “OFF” position. 1. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to overdrive control switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" . No >> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . SCIA0706E AT-246 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 ECS005Z5 A when changing selector lever from “D” to “2” position. B 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit? AT Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" No >> Go to AT-233, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . D E F SCIA0706E G H I J K L M AT-247 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position ECS005Z6 SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever from “2” to “1” position. 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. SCIA0706E 2. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. SAT778B AT-248 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ECS005Z7 A SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 22 (12 ) to 11 . B 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-243, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . No >> Go to AT-226, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . AT D 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks} E SYMPTOM: O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is good. F ECS006GY DESCRIPTION ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. G H I J SAT088JA ● Overdrive control switch Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and sends a signal to the TCM. K L M SAT360H ● Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls the throttle position. This system also uses an electric throttle control actuator, which consists of a throttle control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM. LCIA0110E AT-249 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NOTE: The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive control switch circuits. 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out P/N, R, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following items: ● PNP switch (Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/ NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch ● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM SAT701J 2. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SW”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly. (Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive “OFF”.) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following items: ● Overdrive control switch (Refer to AT-251, "Overdrive Control Switch" ● Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch ● Harness of ground for overdrive control switch for short or open SAT645J 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Perform throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] inspection. Refer to AT-187, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● AT-250 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F03B] 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION A 1. Perform AT-250, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> ● Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. ● If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connections with harness connector. AT COMPONENT INSPECTION Overdrive Control Switch ● B Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. D Switch position Continuity RELEASED No DEPRESSED Yes E F WAT205 G PNP Switch 1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position H Terminal No. P 3—7 R 3—8 N 3—9 D 3—6 2 3—5 1 3—4 I 1—2 J 1—2 K L M WAT204 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-262, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch. SAT089JA AT-251 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F03B] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:34950 ECS006H0 The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder. Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ECS006H1 SAT862J AT-252 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ECS006H2 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0126E AT-253 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F03B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS006H3 SYMPTOM 1: ● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied. ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released. ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder. SYMPTOM 2: Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position. It can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”. 1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Check key interlock cable for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-638, "Components" . 2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION Check selector lever position for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" . 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. (Do not start engine.) ● Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M44 terminal 7 (G) and ground. Voltage: Brake pedal depressed: Brake pedal released: Battery voltage 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SCIA1166E AT-254 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F03B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the following items. 1. Harness for open or short between fuse block (J/B) connector M1 terminal 12K and stop lamp switch harB ness connector M26 terminal 3. 2. Harness for open or short stop lamp switch harness connector M26 terminal 4 and A/T device harness connector M44 terminal 7 (G). AT 3. 10A fuse [10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. 4. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector M26 terminals 3 (G) and 4 (G). D Condition Continuity When brake pedal is depressed Yes When brake pedal is released No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal —refer to BR-12, "STOP LAMP SWITCH AND ASCD CANCEL SWITCH CLEARANCE" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E F WCIA0156E G 5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch to "OFF" position. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Check continuity between A/T device harness M44 terminal 6 (B) and ground. I Continuity should exist Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness. J K L SCIA0784E 6. CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH Check continuity between A/T device harness conector M44 terminals 6 (B) and 7 (G). Brake pedal Operation sound Depressed No Released Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace park position switch. LAT232 AT-255 M A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F03B] 7. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID 1. 2. 3. Connect A/T device harness connector. Turn ignition switch to "ON" position. Check operation sound. Condition When ignition switch is turned to "ON" position and selector lever is in the "P" position. Brake pedal Operation sound Depressed Yes Released No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace shift lock solenoid. 8. CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION 1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 3. Recheck shift lock operation. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO .9 9. CHECK A/T DEVICE INSPECTION 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test. 2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-256 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE [RE4F03B] KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Components PFP:34908 A ECS005ZD B AT D E F G H I J WAT242 CAUTION: ● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. Removal 1. ECS005ZE Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder and remove interlock rod from cable. SAT853J AT-257 K L M KEY INTERLOCK CABLE [RE4F03B] 2. Remove lock plate from steering lock assembly and remove key interlock cable. SAT854J Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. ECS005ZF Turn ignition key to lock position. Set A/T selector lever to "P" position. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install lock plate. Clamp cable to steering column and attach to control cable with band. SAT854J 5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. SAT804E 6. 7. Install casing cap to bracket. Move slider in order to connect adjuster holder to interlock rod. SAT805E AT-258 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F03B] ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators PFP:00000 A ECS005ZG REMOVAL 1. 2. Drain ATF from transaxle. Remove oil pan and gasket. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. B AT D SAT992C 3. E Disconnect A/T solenoid valve harness connector. F G H AAT264A I 4. 5. Remove stopper ring from A/T solenoid harness terminal body. Remove A/T solenoid harness by pushing terminal body into transmission case. J K L AAT265A M AT-259 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F03B] 6. Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts A, B and C. AAT260A Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “l” Number of bolts A B C 40.0 mm (1.575 in) 33.0 mm (1.299 in) 43.5 mm (1.713 in) 5 6 2 Be careful not to drop manual valve and servo release accumulator return springs. Disassemble and inspect control valve assembly if necessary. Refer to AT-297, "Components" . Remove servo release and N-D accumulators by applying compressed air if necessary. ● Hold each piston with a clean, lint-free towel. ● 7. 8. SAT935J AT-260 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F03B] INSTALLATION ● A Tighten mounting bolts A, B and C to specification. : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) B AT D E F G AAT260A ● ● H Set manual shaft in Neutral position, then align manual plate with groove in manual valve. After installing control valve assembly to transmission case, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all positions. I J K SAT497H L M AT-261 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F03B] Control Cable Adjustment ECS005ZH Move selector lever from the “P” position to the “1” position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents cannot be felt or if the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in “P” position. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in “P” position. 3. Push control cable, by specified force, in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration. Specified force 4. 5. 6. : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb) Release control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow for 1.0 mm (0.039 in). Tighten control cable lock nut by hand. Tighten control cable lock nut. : 11.8 - 14.7 N·m (1.20 - 1.50 kg-m, 8.7 - 10.8 ft-lb) 7. 8. Move selector lever from “P” to “1” position again. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control cable. Install any part removed. Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. 2. 3. AAT980 ECS005ZI Remove control cable end from manual shaft. Set manual shaft in “N” position. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. SAT479J 4. a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Use a 4 mm (0.157 in) pin for this adjustment. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole. Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into hole in PNP switch. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch. Reinstall any part removed. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-119, "Component Inspection" . AT-262 SAT480J ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F03B] Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement 1. 2. ECS005ZJ A Remove drive shaft assemblies using Tool. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . Remove oil seals. B AT D SAT905D 3. Install oil seals using Tool. ● Apply ATF to oil seal surface before installing. E F G AAT976 ● Install oil seals so that dimensions “A” and “B” are within specifications. I Unit: mm (in) 4. A B 5.5 - 6.5 (0.217 - 0.256) −0.5 to 0.5 (−0.020 to 0.020) H J Reinstall any part removed. K WAT141 Revolution Sensor Replacement ECS005ZK 1. Disconnect revolution sensor harness connector. 2. Remove harness bracket from A/T. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Always use new sealing parts. M SAT303G AT-263 L REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F03B] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal PFP:00000 ECS005ZL CAUTION: Before separating transaxle from engine, remove the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from transaxle. Be careful not to damage sensor. 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove air duct between throttle body and air cleaner. 3. Disconnect terminal cord assembly, PNP switch harness connector and revolution sensor harness connector. SAT501HA 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Drain ATF from transaxle. Disconnect control cable from transaxle. Disconnect oil cooler hoses. Remove drive shafts. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . Remove the intake manifold support bracket. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . Remove starter motor from transaxle. Tighten bolts to specified torque. SAT304G : 33.3 - 46.1 N·m (3.4 - 4.7 kg-m, 25 - 34 ft-lb) 10. Remove upper bolts fixing transaxle to engine. 11. Support transaxle with a jack. 12. Remove center member. ● Tighten center member fixing bolts to specified torque, Refer to EM-65, "INSTALLATION" . AAT469 AT-264 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F03B] 13. Remove rear plate cover. 14. Remove torque converter bolts. Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts. 15. Remove rear transaxle to engine bracket. Refer to EM-63, "REMOVAL" . 16. Support engine with a jack. 17. Remove rear transaxle mount. Refer to EM-62 . 18. Remove lower bolts fixing transaxle to engine. 19. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack. A B AT AAT259A D Installation 1. ECS005ZM Check drive plate runout. CAUTION: Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear teeth. Maximum allowable runout ● E :EM-76, "Flywheel Runout" . F If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate with ring gear. G SAT977H H 2. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled. Distance “A” I : 21.1 mm (0.831 in) J K SAT573D 3. Install torque converter to drive plate. ● With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that transaxle rotates freely without binding. L M AAT266A AT-265 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F03B] 4. Tighten bolts fixing transaxle. Bolt No. Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Bolt length “l ” mm (in) 1 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 50 (1.97) 2 16 - 20 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 25 (0.98) 3 31 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 30 (1.18) SAT029K 5. 6. Reinstall any part removed. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . 7. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-119, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . 8. Refill transaxle with ATF and check fluid level. 9. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transaxle operates correctly. With parking brake applied, idle engine. Move selector lever through “N” to “D”, to “2”, to “1” and “R” positions. A slight shock should be felt through the hand gripping the selector each time the transaxle is shifted. 10. Perform road test. Refer to AT-68, "Road Test" . AT-266 SAT638A OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 A ECS005ZN B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT404 AT-267 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] WCIA0218E AT-268 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0219E AT-269 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] Oil Channel ECS005ZO WAT405 AT-270 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ECS005ZP A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT246 AT-271 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] Disassembly 1. ECS005ZQ Drain ATF through drain plug. WAT247 2. Remove torque converter. SAT008D 3. a. b. c. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as shown. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into one-way clutch outer race. While fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one-way clutch spline using flat-bladed screwdriver. Check to make sure the inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace torque converter assembly. SAT009D AT-272 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] 4. Remove oil charging pipe and oil cooler tube. A B AT SAT586H D 5. 6. Set manual shaft to “P” position. Remove PNP switch. E F G SAT023JB 7. 8. 9. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure. ● If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-14, "Removal and Installation" . Remove control valve assembly according to the following procedures. H I J K SAT128E L M AT-273 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] a. Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts A, B and C. AAT260A b. c. Remove stopper ring from terminal body. Push terminal body into transmission case and draw out solenoid harness. AAT262A 10. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly as a precaution. SAT017D 11. Remove return spring from servo release accumulator piston. SAT877J AT-274 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] 12. Remove servo release accumulator piston with compressed air. 13. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston. A B AT SAT019DA 14. Remove N-D accumulator piston and return spring with compressed air. 15. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston. D E F G SAT020D H 16. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transmission case for damage. 17. Check accumulator return springs for damage and free length. Return springs I : Refer to AT-393, "RETURN SPRING" . J K SAT023DA 18. Remove lip seals from band servo oil port. L M SAT129E 19. Remove converter housing according to the following procedures. AT-275 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts A and B. SAT027D b. Remove converter housing. SAT028D c. Remove O-ring from differential oil port. SAT131E 20. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case. SAT030D AT-276 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] 21. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission case using Tool. A B AT AAT477 D 22. Remove differential side bearing adjusting shim from transmission case. E F G SAT132E H 23. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter housing using Tool. I J K AAT478 24. Remove oil seal from converter housing using a screwdriver. ● Be careful not to damage case. L M SAT133E AT-277 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] 25. Remove side oil seal from transmission case using a screwdriver. SAT072D 26. Remove oil tube from converter housing. SAT134EA 27. Remove oil pump according to the following procedures. a. Remove O-ring from input shaft. SAT127E b. Remove oil pump assembly from transmission case. SAT035D AT-278 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] c. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump assembly. A B AT SAT036D D 28. Remove brake band according to the following procedures. a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin. ● Do not reuse anchor end pin. E F G SAT037DA b. Remove brake band from transmission case. H I J SAT038D ● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown. Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. K L M SAT039D AT-279 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] c. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns. SAT040D 29. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) and reverse clutch according to the following procedures. SAT041D a. b. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) with reverse clutch. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) from reverse clutch. SAT042D c. d. Remove needle bearing from high clutch drum. Check input shaft assembly and needle bearing for damage or wear. SAT043D AT-280 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] 30. Remove high clutch hub and needle bearing from transmission case. 31. Check high clutch hub and needle bearing for damage or wear. A B AT SAT044D D 32. Remove front sun gear and needle bearings from transmission case. 33. Check front sun gear and needle bearings for damage or wear. E F G SAT579D H 34. Remove front planetary carrier assembly and low one-way clutch according to the following procedures. a. Remove snap ring using a screwdriver. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. I J K SAT046D b. Remove front planetary carrier with low one-way clutch. L M SAT047D AT-281 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] c. Check that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of the arrow and locks in the opposite direction. SAT048D d. e. Remove low one-way clutch from front planetary carrier by rotating it in the direction of unlock. Remove needle bearing from front planetary carrier. SAT049D f. g. Check front planetary carrier, low one-way clutch and needle bearing for damage or wear. Check clearance between pinion washer and planetary carrier using feeler gauge. Standard clearance Allowable limit : 0.15 - 0.70 mm (0.0059 - 0.0276 in) : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) Replace front planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit. SAT050D 35. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear according to the following procedures. SAT051D a. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly from transmission case. AT-282 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] b. Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary carrier. A B AT SAT052D D c. Remove needle bearings from rear planetary carrier assembly. E F G SAT053D d. e. Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle bearings for damage or wear. Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary carrier using feeler gauge. H I Standard clearance : 0.15 - 0.70 mm (0.0059 - 0.0276 in) Allowable limit : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) J Replace rear planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit. SAT054D K 36. Remove rear internal gear from transmission case. L M SAT055D 37. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear. ● Check needle bearing for damage or wear. SAT056D AT-283 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] 38. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case. SAT272E 39. Remove thrust washer from transmission case. AAT215A 40. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following procedures. SAT059D a. b. Remove side cover bolts. Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer. SAT434D ● Be careful not to drop output shaft assembly. It might come out when removing side cover. AT-284 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] c. Remove adjusting shim. A B AT SAT440D D d. Remove output shaft assembly. E F G SAT439D ● If output shaft assembly came off with side cover, tap cover with a soft hammer to separate. H I J SAT435D e. K Remove needle bearing. L M SAT453D 41. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following procedures. SAT060D AT-285 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] a. b. c. Set manual shaft to position “P” to fix idler gear. Unlock idler gear lock nut using a pin punch. Remove idler gear lock nut. ● Do not reuse idler gear lock nut. SAT061D d. Remove idler gear with puller using Tool. WAT234 e. f. Remove reduction pinion gear. Remove adjusting shim from reduction pinion gear. SAT310G 42. Remove return spring from parking shaft using a screwdriver. WAT293 AT-286 OVERHAUL [RE4F03B] 43. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pawl from transmission case. 44. Check parking pawl and shaft for damage or wear. A B AT WAT142 D 45. Remove parking actuator support from transmission case. ● Check parking actuator support for damage or wear. E F G SAT066D 46. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case. H I J SAT311G K L M AT-287 MANUAL SHAFT [RE4F03B] MANUAL SHAFT Components PFP:31920 ECS005ZR WAT248 Removal 1. ECS005ZS Remove detent spring from transmission case. SAT313G 2. Drive out manual plate retaining pin using Tool. AAT486 AT-288 MANUAL SHAFT [RE4F03B] 3. 4. 5. Drive and pull out parking rod plate retaining pin using Tool. Remove parking rod plate from manual shaft. Draw out parking rod from transmission case. A B AT AAT534 D 6. Pull out manual shaft retaining pin. E F G SAT049F 7. 8. H Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transmission case. Remove manual shaft oil seal. I J K SAT080D Inspection ● L ECS005ZU M Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary. Installation 1. ECS005ZT Install manual shaft oil seal using a suitable tool. ● Apply ATF to outer surface of oil seal. SAT081D AT-289 MANUAL SHAFT [RE4F03B] 2. Install manual shaft and manual plate. SAT610H 3. 4. Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transmission case. Install manual shaft retaining pin using Tool. AAT487 5. 6. Install parking rod to parking rod plate. Set parking rod assembly onto manual shaft. SAT078D 7. Drive in manual plate retaining pin and parking rod plate retaining pin using Tool. AAT485 AT-290 MANUAL SHAFT [RE4F03B] 8. Install detent spring. A : 6.4 - 7.5 N·m (0.65 - 0.76 kg-m, 56.4 - 66.0 in-lb) B AT SAT313G D E F G H I J K L M AT-291 OIL PUMP [RE4F03B] OIL PUMP Components PFP:15010 ECS005ZV WCIA0220E Disassembly 1. ECS005ZW Remove seal rings. SAT699H 2. Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover. SAT091D AT-292 OIL PUMP [RE4F03B] 3. Remove inner and outer gear from oil pump housing. A B AT SAT092D D 4. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing. E F G SAT093D 5. H Remove oil pump housing oil seal. I J K SAT094D Inspection ECS005ZX OIL PUMP HOUSING, OIL PUMP COVER, INNER GEAR AND OUTER GEAR ● L Check for wear or damage. M AT-293 OIL PUMP [RE4F03B] SIDE CLEARANCES ● Measure side clearance of inner and outer gears in at least four places around each outside edge. Maximum measured values should be within specified range. Standard clearance ● If clearance is less than standard, select inner and outer gear as a set so that clearance is within specifications. Inner and outer gear ● : 0.02 - 0.04 mm (0.0008 - 0.0016 in) : Refer to AT-294, "SIDE CLEARANCES" . If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump assembly except oil pump cover. SAT095D ● Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● : 0.08 - 0.15 mm (0.0031 - 0.0059 in) : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) If not within allowable limit, replace whole oil pump assembly except oil pump cover. SAT096D SIDE RING CLEARANCE ● ● Install new seal rings onto oil pump cover. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● : 0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) If not within allowable limit, replace oil pump cover assembly. SAT097D AT-294 OIL PUMP [RE4F03B] Assembly 1. ECS005ZY A Install oil seal on oil pump housing using Tool. B AT D SAT922D 2. Install O-ring on oil pump housing. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. E F G SAT093D 3. Install inner and outer gears on oil pump housing. ● Take care with the direction of the inner gear. H I J K SAT092D L 4. a. b. Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly on oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape. Tighten bolts in numerical order. M SAT101D AT-295 OIL PUMP [RE4F03B] 5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove with petroleum jelly. ● Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. It may deform the ring. SAT699H AT-296 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31705 A ECS005ZZ B AT D E F G H I J WAT407 1. Solenoid valve assembly 2. O-ring 3. Stopper ring 4. Terminal body 5. Control valve lower body 6. Oil strainer 7. Support plate 8. Lower inter separating gasket 9. Separating plate 10. Lower separating gasket 11. Steel ball 12. Control valve inter body 13. Pilot filter 14. Upper inter separating gasket 15. Separating plate 16. Upper separating gasket 17. Steel ball 18. Control valve upper body 19. Check ball 20. Oil cooler relief valve spring 21. O-ring 22. T/C pressure holding spring 23. Check ball AT-297 K L M CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] Disassembly ECS00600 Disassemble upper, inter and lower bodies. ● Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “l” Number of bolts A B C D E F G 13.5 mm (0.531 in) 58.0 mm (2.283 in) 40.0 mm (1.575 in) 66.0 mm (2.598 in) 33.0 mm (1.299 in) 78.0 mm (3.071 in) 18.0 mm (0.709 in) 6 3 6 11 2 2 1 F: Reamer bolt with nut SAT869J 1. Remove bolts A, D and F, and remove oil strainer from control valve assembly. SAT083F 2. Remove solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve from control valve assembly. ● Be careful not to lose the line pressure solenoid valve spring. SAT316GA AT-298 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 3. Remove O-rings from solenoid valves and terminal body. A B AT SAT317G D 4. Place upper body face down, and remove bolts B, C and F. E F G SAT064F 5. H Remove lower body from inter body. I J K SAT432D 6. Turn over lower body, and accumulator support plates. L M SAT109D AT-299 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 7. 8. Remove bolts E, separating plate and separating gaskets from lower body. Remove check balls, oil cooler relief valve springs and T/C pressure holding spring from lower body. ● Be careful not to lose steel balls and relief valve springs. SAT873J 9. Remove inter body from upper body. 10. Remove pilot filter, separating plate and gaskets from upper body. SAT065F 11. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in inter body and then remove them. ● Be careful not to lose steel balls. SAT870J 12. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body and then remove them. ● Be careful not to lose steel balls. SAT871J AT-300 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] Inspection ECS00601 A LOWER AND UPPER BODIES ● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in lower body. B AT D SAT872J ● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in upper body. E F G SAT321G H OIL STRAINER ● Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage. I J K SAT115D L SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES A AND B, LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE, TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE AND OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ● Refer to AT-182, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-186, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , AT-177, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-177, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" and AT-196, "OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . M WAT237 AT-301 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] OIL COOLER RELIEF VALVE SPRING ● ● Check springs for damage or deformation. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-388, "Clutch and Brake Return Springs" SAT138D Assembly 1. ECS00602 Install upper, inter and lower body. SAT871J a. b. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their proper positions. Install upper separating gasket, upper inter separating gasket and upper separating plate in order shown in illustration. SAT072F Always use new gaskets. Install reamer bolts F from bottom of upper body. Using reamer bolts as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set. ● c. SAT073F AT-302 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] d. Install pilot filter. A B AT SAT074F D e. Place inter body as shown in the illustration. Install steel balls in their proper positions. E F G SAT870J f. Install inter body on upper body using reamer bolts F as guides. H I J SAT076F Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls. Install steel balls, oil cooler relief valve springs and T/C pressure holding spring in their proper positions in lower body. K ● g. L M SAT873J AT-303 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] h. Install lower separating gasket, inter separating gasket and lower separating plate in order shown in the illustration. SAT077F i. Install bolts E from bottom of lower body. Using bolts E as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set. SAT078F j. k. Install support plates on lower body. Install lower body on inter body using reamer bolts F as guides and tighten reamer bolts F slightly. AAT536 2. 3. Install O-rings to solenoid valves and terminal body. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. Install and tighten bolts. SAT317G AT-304 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “l” A B C D E F G 13.5 mm (0.531 in) 58.0 mm (2.283 in) 44.0 mm (1.732 in) 66.0 mm (2.598 in) 33.0 mm (1.299 in) 78.0 mm (3.071 in) 18.0 mm (0.709 in) 6 3 6 11 2 2 1 A B Number of bolts F: Reamer bolt with nut AT D E F G H SAT869J a. Install and tighten bolts B to specified torque. I : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) J K SAT081F b. L Install solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve to lower body. M SAT316GA AT-305 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] c. Remove reamer bolts F and set oil strainer on control valve assembly. SAT323G d. e. Reinstall reamer bolts F from lower body side. Tighten bolts A , C , D and F to specified torque. : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) SAT083F f. Tighten bolts E to specified torque. : 3.4 - 4.4 N·m (0.35 - 0.45 kg-m, 30.4 - 39.1 in-lb) SAT084FA AT-306 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4F03B] CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY Components PFP:31711 A ECS00603 Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-386, "CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS" . B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT250 Disassembly 1. ECS00604 Remove valves at retainer plates. ● Do not use a magnetic “hand”. SAT321G AT-307 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4F03B] a. Use a screwdriver to remove retainer plates. SAT135D b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs or sleeves. SAT136D Remove plugs slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out. Place mating surface of valve body face down, and remove internal parts. ● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down and lightly tap it with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves. ● c. SAT137D Inspection ECS00605 VALVE SPRING ● Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-386, "CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS" . Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. SAT138D CONTROL VALVES ● Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. AT-308 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4F03B] Assembly ● ECS00606 A Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do not stand the control valve body upright. B AT D SAT139D 1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores. E F G SAT140DA ● ● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body. Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into their proper positions. H I J K SAT141D L 1-2 ACCUMULATOR VALVE ● ● Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2 accumulator retainer plate from opposite side of control valve body. Install return spring, 1-2 accumulator piston and plug. M SAT142D AT-309 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4F03B] 1. Install retainer plates. ● Install retainer plate while pushing plug or return spring. SAT143D RETAINER PLATE (FOR CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY) Refer to AT-307, "CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY" . Unit: mm (in) Name of valve and piston ● No. Pilot valve 22 1-2 accumulator valve 17 1-2 accumulator piston 25 1st reducing valve 30 Width A Length B 21.5 (0.846) 40.5 (1.594) 21.5 (0.846) 6.0 (0.236) Overrun clutch reducing valve 5 Torque converter relief valve 8 21.5 (0.846) 24.0 (0.945) Torque converter clutch control valve 13 28.0 (1.102) 3-2 timing valve 34 21.5 (0.846) Cooler check valve 21 24.0 (0.945) Install proper retainer plates. AT-310 SAT086F CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY [RE4F03B] CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY Components PFP:31713 A ECS00607 Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-386, "CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS" . B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT251 Disassembly ECS00608 Remove valves at retainer plate. For removal procedures, refer to AT-311, "Disassembly" . SAT872J AT-311 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY [RE4F03B] Inspection ECS00609 VALVE SPRINGS ● Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-386, "CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS" . Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. SAT138D CONTROL VALVES ● Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage. Assembly ● ECS0060A Install control valves. For installation procedures, refer to AT-312, "Assembly" . SAT872J RETAINER PLATE (FOR CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY) Refer to AT-311, "CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY" . Unit: mm (in) Name of control valve ● No. Pressure regulator valve 14 Accumulator control valve 24 Shift valve A 28 Overrun clutch control valve 20 Pressure modifier valve 12 Shuttle control valve 31 Shift valve B 5 Width A Length B Type 6.0 (0.236) 28.0 (1.102) I SAT089F — — Install proper retainer plates. AT-312 II REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4F03B] REVERSE CLUTCH Components PFP:31510 A ECS0060B B AT D E F SAT485JA Disassembly 1. a. b. c. ECS0060C H Check operation of reverse clutch. Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and install reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil hole. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. I J SAT155D 2. 3. G Remove snap ring. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish plates. K L M SAT156D AT-313 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 4. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from reverse clutch drum while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. AAT489 5. Remove spring retainer and return springs. ● Do not remove return springs from spring retainer. SAT301E 6. Remove piston from reverse clutch drum by turning it. SAT159D 7. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SAT138E Inspection ECS0060D REVERSE CLUTCH SNAP RING, SPRING RETAINER AND RETURN SPRINGS ● ● ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. Replace if necessary. When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace them as a set. AT-314 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4F03B] REVERSE CLUTCH DRIVE PLATES ● ● A Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) Wear limit : 1.8 mm (0.071 in) ● B AT If not within wear limit, replace. SAT162D D REVERSE CLUTCH DISH PLATES ● ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure thickness of dish plate. Thickness of dish plate “t” ● E : 2.8 mm (0.110 in) F If deformed or fatigued, replace. G SAT163D H REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON ● ● ● Make sure check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure that there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure air leaks past ball. I J K SAT164D Assembly 1. L ECS0060E Install D-ring and oil seal on piston. ● Take care with the direction of the oil seal. ● Apply ATF to both parts. M SAT160DA AT-315 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. SAT159D 3. Install return springs and spring retainer on piston. Return spring : Refer to AT-388, "Clutch and Brake Return Springs" . SAT168D 4. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above return springs. AAT489 5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plates. ● Do not align the projections of any two dish plates. ● Take care with the order and direction of plates. SAT170D AT-316 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 6. Install snap ring. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. A B AT SAT156D D 7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. E Specified clearance Standard : 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in) Allowable limit : 1.2 mm (0.047 in) Retaining plate : Refer to AT-386, "REVERSE CLUTCH" F G SAT174D 8. H Check operation of reverse clutch. Refer to AT-313, "Components" . I J SAT173D K L M AT-317 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4F03B] HIGH CLUTCH Components PFP:31410 ECS0060F WCIA0221E Disassembly 1. a. b. c. ECS0060G Check operation of high clutch. Apply compressed air to oil hole of input shaft. ● Stop up a hole on opposite side of input shaft. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. SAT176D AT-318 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 2. Remove seal rings from input shaft. A B AT SAT177D D 3. 4. Remove snap ring. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. E F G SAT178D 5. 6. H Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from high clutch drum while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return springs. ● Do not remove return spring from spring retainer. I J K AAT683 L M SAT302E 7. Remove piston from high clutch drum by turning it. SAT189D AT-319 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 8. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SAT139E Inspection ECS0060H REVERSE CLUTCH SNAP RING, SPRING RETAINER AND RETURN SPRINGS ● ● ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. Replace if necessary. When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace them as a set. HIGH CLUTCH DRIVE PLATES ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) Wear limit : 1.8 mm (0.071 in) ● If not within wear limit, replace. SAT162D HIGH CLUTCH PISTON ● ● ● Make sure check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure air leaks past ball. SAT186D SEAL RING CLEARANCE ● ● Install new seal rings onto input shaft. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● : 0.08 - 0.23 mm (0.0031 - 0.0091 in) : 0.23 mm (0.0091 in) If not within wear limit, replace input shaft assembly. SAT187D AT-320 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4F03B] Assembly 1. ECS0060I A Install D-ring and oil seal on piston. ● Take care with the direction of the oil seal. ● Apply ATF to both parts. B AT D SAT182DA 2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. E F G SAT189D 3. H Install return springs and spring retainer on piston. Return spring I : Refer to AT-388, "Clutch and Brake Return Springs" . J K SAT191D 4. L Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above return springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. M AAT683 AT-321 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4F03B] ● Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. SAT193D 5. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. Take care with the order and direction of plates. 6. Install snap ring. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. SAT195D 7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate : 1.4 - 1.8 mm (0.055 - 0.071 in) : 2.4 mm (0.094 in) : Refer to AT-387, "HIGH CLUTCH" . SAT199D 8. Check operation of high clutch. Refer to AT-318, "HIGH CLUTCH" . SAT196D AT-322 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 9. Install seal rings to input shaft. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. A B AT SAT197D D ● Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading. E F G SAT198D H I J K L M AT-323 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH Components PFP:31570 ECS0060J WCIA0222E Disassembly 1. ECS0060K Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch. SAT201D a. b. c. Install bearing retainer on forward clutch drum. Apply compressed air to oil hole of forward clutch drum. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. AT-324 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] d. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. A B AT SAT202D D 2. 3. Remove snap ring for forward clutch. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for forward clutch. E F G SAT203D 4. 5. H Remove snap ring for overrun clutch. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for overrun clutch. I J K SAT204D 6. 7. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from forward clutch drum while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above return springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return springs. L M AAT685 AT-325 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 8. Remove forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston from forward clutch drum by turning it. SAT216D 9. Remove overrun clutch piston from forward clutch piston by turning it. SAT215D 10. Remove D-rings and oil seals from forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston. SAT140E Inspection ECS0060L SNAP RINGS AND SPRING RETAINER ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH RETURN SPRINGS ● ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-388, "Clutch and Brake Return Springs" . Replace if deformed or fatigued. SAT138D AT-326 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH DRIVE PLATES ● ● A Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Forward clutch Standard value : 1.8 mm (0.071 in) Wear limit : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Overrun clutch Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● B AT SAT162D If not within wear limit, replace. E FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH DISH PLATES ● ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure thickness of dish plate. Thickness of dish plate “t” Forward clutch Overrun clutch ● D F : 2.5 mm (0.098 in) : 2.15 mm (0.0846 in) G If deformed or fatigued, replace. H SAT163D FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ● ● ● I Make sure check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole from outside of forward clutch drum. Make sure air leaks past ball. Apply compressed air to oil hole from inside of forward clutch drum. Make sure there is no air leakage. J K L SAT213D OVERRUN CLUTCH PISTON ● ● ● M Make sure check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side. Make sure air leaks past ball. SAT212D AT-327 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] Assembly 1. ECS0060M Install D-rings and oil seals on forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston. ● Take care with direction of oil seal. ● Apply ATF to both parts. SAT208DA 2. Install overrun clutch piston assembly on forward clutch piston while turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston. SAT215D 3. Install forward clutch piston assembly on forward clutch drum while turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. SAT216D 4. Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward clutch drum. SAT217D AT-328 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 5. 6. Install return spring on piston. Install spring retainer on return springs. Return spring A : Refer to AT-388, "Clutch and Brake Return Springs" . B AT SAT218D D 7. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above return springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. E F G AAT685 ● H Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. I J SAT220D 8. 9. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for overrun clutch. Install snap ring for overrun clutch. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. L M SAT204D AT-329 K FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 10. Measure clearance between overrun clutch retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Overrun clutch retaining plate : 1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) : Refer to AT-387, "OVERRUN CLUTCH" . SAT227D 11. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for forward clutch. Take care with the order and direction of plates. 12. Install snap ring for forward clutch. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. SAT203D 13. Measure clearance between forward clutch retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Forward clutch retaining plate : 0.45 - 0.85 mm (0.0177 - 0.0335 in) : 1.85 mm (0.0728 in) : Refer to AT-387, "FORWARD CLUTCH" SAT228D 14. Check operation of forward clutch. Refer to AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" . SAT201D AT-330 FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH [RE4F03B] 15. Check operation of overrun clutch. Refer to AT-324, "FORWARD CLUTCH AND OVERRUN CLUTCH" . A B AT SAT202D D E F G H I J K L M AT-331 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4F03B] LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Components PFP:31645 ECS0060N WCIA0223E Disassembly 1. a. b. c. ECS0060O Check operation of low & reverse brake. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transmission case. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. SAT230D 2. 3. 4. Stand transmission case. Remove snap ring. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate from transmission case. SAT231D AT-332 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4F03B] 5. 6. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above return springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return springs. A B AT AAT687 D ● Do not remove return springs from spring retainer. E F G SAT303E 7. 8. H Apply compressed air to oil hole of transmission case while holding piston. Remove piston from transmission case by turning it. I J K L M SAT234D AT-333 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4F03B] 9. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SAT767G Inspection ECS0060P LOW & REVERSE CLUTCH SNAP RING, SPRING RETAINER AND RETURN SPRINGS ● ● ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. Replace if necessary. When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace them as a set. LOW & REVERSE BRAKE DRIVE PLATES ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) Wear limit : 1.8 mm (0.071 in) ● If not within wear limit, replace. SAT162D Assembly 1. ECS0060Q Install D-ring and oil seal on piston. ● Take care with the direction of the oil seal. ● Apply ATF to both parts. SAT235DA 2. 3. Stand transmission case. Install piston assembly on transmission case while turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case. SAT239D AT-334 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4F03B] 4. Install return springs and spring retainer on piston. Return spring A :Refer to AT-388, "Clutch and Brake Return Springs" . B AT SAT241D D 5. Install snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly above return springs. E F G AAT687 6. H Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plates and dished plates. ● Do not align the projections on the two dished plates. ● Make sure to put the plates in the correct order and direction. I J SAT254E 7. Install snap ring. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. K L M SAT231D AT-335 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4F03B] 8. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate (front side). Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate : 1.4 - 1.8 mm (0.055 - 0.071 in) : 2.8 mm (0.110 in) : Refer to AT-387, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" . SAT246D 9. Check operation of low and reverse brake. Refer to AT-332, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" . SAT230D AT-336 REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB [RE4F03B] REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB PFP:31450 Components A ECS0060R B AT D E F G SAT875J Disassembly 1. 2. ECS0060S H Remove snap ring from overrun clutch hub. Remove overrun clutch hub from forward clutch hub. I J K SAT249D 3. L Remove thrust washer from forward clutch hub. M SAT250D AT-337 REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB [RE4F03B] 4. Remove forward clutch hub from rear internal gear. SAT251D 5. Remove end bearing from rear internal gear. SAT252D 6. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear. SAT253D 7. Remove end bearing from forward one-way clutch. SAT254D AT-338 REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB [RE4F03B] 8. Remove one-way clutch from forward clutch hub. A B AT SAT255D D Inspection ECS0060T REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB ● Check rubbing surfaces for wear or damage. E F G SAT256D H SNAP RING, END BEARINGS AND FORWARD ONE-WAY CLUTCH ● ● Check snap ring and end bearings for deformation and damage. Check forward one-way clutch for wear and damage. I J K SAT257D L Assembly 1. ECS0060U Install forward one-way clutch on forward clutch. ● Take care with the direction of forward one-way clutch. M SAT976H AT-339 REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB [RE4F03B] 2. Install end bearing on forward one-way clutch. ● Apply petroleum jelly to end bearing. SAT259D 3. Install thrust washer on rear internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. ● Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of rear internal gear. SAT260D 4. Install end bearing on rear internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to end bearing. SAT261D 5. Install forward clutch hub on rear internal gear. ● Check operation of forward one-way clutch. Hold rear internal gear and turn forward clutch hub. Check forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlocking directions. ● If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of forward one-way clutch. SAT713H AT-340 REAR INTERNAL GEAR, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB AND OVERRUN CLUTCH HUB [RE4F03B] 6. Install thrust washer and overrun clutch hub. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. ● Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of overrun clutch hub. A B AT SAT263D D 7. Install overrun clutch hub on rear internal gear. ● Align projections of rear internal gear with holes of overrun clutch hub. E F G SAT264D 8. H Install snap ring to groove of rear internal gear. I J K SAT248D L M AT-341 OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER [RE4F03B] OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER PFP:31480 Components ECS0060V WCIA0224E Disassembly 1. ECS0060W Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer. SAT644D AT-342 OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER [RE4F03B] 2. Remove output shaft bearing with screwdrivers. ● Always replace bearing with a new one when removed. ● Do not damage output shaft. A B AT SAT645D D 3. Remove snap ring from bearing retainer. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. E F G WCIA0225E 4. H Remove needle bearing from bearing retainer. I J K AAT539 5. Remove idler gear bearing inner race from idler gear. L M SAT648D AT-343 OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER [RE4F03B] 6. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transmission case. AAT495 7. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing from reduction pinion gear. WAT235 8. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from transmission case. SAT651D Inspection ECS0060X OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR AND REDUCTION PINION GEAR ● ● Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending. Check gears for wear, chips and cracks. BEARING ● ● Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner race as a set. SPD715 AT-344 OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER [RE4F03B] SEAL RING CLEARANCE ● ● A Install new seal rings to output shaft. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of output shaft. B Standard clearance : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) Allowable limit : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) ● ● ● If not within allowable limit, replace output shaft. Install new seal rings to bearing retainer. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bearing retainer. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● SAT652D : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) D E If not within allowable limit, replace bearing retainer. Assembly 1. AT ECS0060Y F Press reduction pinion gear bearing on reduction pinion gear. G H I AAT688 2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transmission case. J K L SAT654D 3. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear. AAT689 AT-345 M OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER [RE4F03B] 4. Install idler gear bearing outer race on transmission case. SAT901D 5. Press output shaft bearing on output shaft. SAT939D 6. Press needle bearing on bearing retainer. SAT658D 7. Install snap ring to bearing retainer. WCIA0226E AT-346 OUTPUT SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, REDUCTION PINION GEAR AND BEARING RETAINER [RE4F03B] 8. After packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly, carefully install new seal rings on output shaft and bearing retainer. NOTE: Do not align gaps in seal rings. A B AT SAT660D D ● Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading. E F G SAT661D H I J K L M AT-347 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31615 ECS0060Z WCIA0227E Disassembly 1. ECS00610 Remove band servo piston snap ring. SAT288D 2. Apply compressed air to oil hole in transmission case to remove OD servo piston retainer and band servo piston assembly. ● Hold band servo piston assembly with a rag or nylon waste. SAT289D AT-348 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 3. Apply compressed air to oil hole in OD servo piston retainer to remove OD servo piston from retainer. ● Hold OD servo piston while applying compressed air. A B AT SAT290DB D 4. Remove D-ring from OD servo piston. E F G SAT593GB 5. H Remove O-rings from OD servo piston retainer. I J K SAT292DA 6. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer by pushing it forward. L M SAT293D AT-349 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 7. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring. SAT294D 8. Remove OD servo return spring, band servo thrust washer and band servo piston stem from band servo piston. SAT295DA 9. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer. SAT296DA 10. Remove D-rings from band servo piston. SAT594GA AT-350 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] Inspection ECS00611 A PISTONS, RETAINERS AND PISTON STEM ● Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage. B AT D SAT298DA RETURN SPRINGS ● ● E Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter. Band servo inspection standard F : Refer to AT-393, "RETURN SPRING" . G H SAT138D Assembly 1. ECS00612 I Install D-rings to band servo piston retainer. ● Apply ATF to D-rings. ● Pay attention to position of each D-ring. J K L SAT595GA 2. Install band servo piston stem, band servo thrust washer, OD servo return spring and spring retainer to band servo piston. M SAT295DA AT-351 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 3. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring. SAT301D 4. Install O-rings to servo piston retainer. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. ● Pay attention to the positions of the O-rings. SAT296DA 5. Install band servo piston assembly to servo piston retainer by pushing it inward. SAT303D 6. Install D-ring to OD servo piston. ● Apply ATF to D-ring. SAT596GB AT-352 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 7. Install O-rings to OD servo piston retainer. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. ● Pay attention to the positions of the O-rings. A B AT SAT292DA D 8. Install OD servo piston to OD servo piston retainer. E F G SAT306DA 9. H Install band servo piston assembly and 2nd servo return spring to transmission case. ● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case. I J K SAT307DA 10. Install OD servo piston assembly to transmission case. ● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case. L M AAT692 AT-353 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 11. Install band servo piston snap ring to transmission case. SAT288D AT-354 FINAL DRIVE [RE4F03B] FINAL DRIVE Components PFP:38411 A ECS00613 B AT D E F G WAT403 Disassembly 1. ECS00614 H Remove final gear. I J SMT696B 2. K Press out differential side bearings. L M SAT312D AT-355 FINAL DRIVE [RE4F03B] SMT697B 3. Remove speedometer drive gear. SAT313D 4. Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin. SAT904D 5. 6. Draw out pinion mate shaft from differential case. Remove pinion mate gears and side gears. SAT316D AT-356 FINAL DRIVE [RE4F03B] Inspection ECS00615 A GEAR, WASHER, SHAFT AND CASE ● ● Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears and pinion mate gears. Check washers for wear. B AT D WAT294 BEARINGS ● ● E Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner race as a set. F G H SPD715 Assembly 1. 2. ECS00616 I Install side gear and thrust washers in differential case. Install pinion mate gears and thrust washers in differential case while rotating them. ● When inserting, be careful not to damage pinion mate gear washers. ● Apply ATF to any parts. J K L SAT318D 3. a. b. Measure clearance between side gear and differential case with washers using the following procedure. Set Tool and dial indicator on side gear. Move side gear up and down to measure dial indicator deflection. Always measure indicator deflection on both side gears. Clearance between side gear and differential case with washers M : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) SAT902D AT-357 FINAL DRIVE [RE4F03B] c. If not within specification adjust clearance by changing thickness of side gear thrust washers. Side gear thrust washer : Refer to AT-389, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS" . SMT616 4. Install lock pin. ● Make sure that lock pin is flush with case. SAT904D 5. Install speedometer drive gear on differential case. ● Align the projection of speedometer drive gear with the groove of differential case. SAT313D 6. Install final gear and tighten fixing bolts in numerical order. : 113 - 127 N·m (11.5 - 13.0 kg-m, 83 - 94 ft-lb) SAT326D AT-358 FINAL DRIVE [RE4F03B] 7. Press on differential side bearings. A B AT SMT700B D E F G H I J K L M AT-359 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) PFP:00000 ECS00617 1. Install revolution sensor onto transmission case. Always use new sealing parts. SAT311G 2. Install differential side oil seals on transmission case and converter housing, so that “A” and “B” are within specifications. AAT695 WAT141 Unit: mm (in) 3. A B 5.5 - 6.5 (0.217 - 0.256) −0.5 to 0.5 (−0.020 to 0.020) Install parking actuator support to transmission case. ● Pay attention to direction of parking actuator support. SAT328D AT-360 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 4. Install parking pawl on transmission case and fix it with parking shaft. A B AT WAT143 D 5. Install return spring. E F G WAT144 Adjustment (1) ECS00618 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD 1. 2. Install differential side bearing outer race without adjusting shim on transmission case. Install differential side bearing outer race on converter housing. H I J K SAT947DA L 3. 4. Place final drive assembly on transmission case. Install transmission case on converter housing. Tighten transmission case fixing bolts A and B to the specified torque. M SAT027D AT-361 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 5. 6. 7. Attach dial indicator on differential case at transmission case side. Insert Tool into differential side gear from converter housing. Move Tool up and down and measure dial indicator deflection. Differential side bearing preload “T” 8. : 0.04 - 0.09 mm (0.0016 - 0.0035 in) Select proper thickness of differential side bearing adjusting shim(s) using SDS table as a guide. Differential side bearing adjusting shim : Refer to AT-389, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS" . AAT947 9. Remove converter housing from transmission case. 10. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case. 11. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission case. 12. Reinstall differential side bearing outer race and shim(s) selected from SDS table on transmission case. 13. Reinstall converter housing on transmission case and tighten transmission case fixing bolts to the specified torque. AAT477 14. Insert Tool into differential case and measure turning torque of final drive assembly. ● Turn final drive assembly in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly. Turning torque of final drive assembly (New bearing) ● ● : 0.49 - 1.08 N·m (5.0 - 11.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 9.5 in-lb) When old bearing is used again, turning torque will be slightly less than the above. Make sure torque is within the specified range. AT-362 AAT466 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD ● ● A Be sure to remove final drive assembly before doing this procedure. Using caliper and straightedge, calculate a dimension “T” (adjuster shim thickness) using the following formula. Adjust the inspection standard for preload (rotating slide torque) as shown below. T=A–E Inspection standard for preload B AT :0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb) SAT876J 1. 2. a. Remove transmission case and final drive assembly from converter housing. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim using the following procedures. Place reduction pinion gear on transmission case as shown. D E F G SAT332DA H b. c. Place idler gear bearing on transmission case. Measure dimensions “B”, “C” and “D” and calculate dimension “A”. A = D − (B + C) “A” ● ● : Distance between the surface of idler gear bearing inner race and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pinion gear. I J K SAT333DA Measure dimension “B” between the end of reduction pinion gear and the surface of transmission case. Measure dimension “B” in at least two places. L M SAT334DA AT-363 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] ● ● Measure dimension “C” between the surface of idler gear bearing inner race and the surface of transmission case. Measure dimension “C” in at least two places. SAT335D ● ● ● Measure dimension “D” between the end of reduction pinion gear and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pinion gear. Measure dimension “D” in at least two places. Calculate dimension “A”. A = D − (B + C) SAT336DA d. e. Measure dimension “E” between the end of idler gear and the idler gear bearing inner race mating surface of idler gear. ● Measure dimension “E” in at least two places. Calculate “T” and select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim using SDS table as a guide. T = A − E – 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)* Reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim 3. 4. 5. : Refer to AT-391, "REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS" . SAT337D *: Bearing preload Install reduction pinion gear and reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim selected in step 2-e on transmission case using Tool. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear. Press idler gear on reduction pinion gear. ● Press idler gear so that idler gear can be locked by parking pawl. AAT696 AT-364 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 6. Tighten idler gear lock nut to the specified torque. ● Lock idler gear with parking pawl when tightening lock nut. A B AT SAT339D D 7. Measure turning torque of reduction pinion gear. ● When measuring turning torque, turn reduction pinion gear in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly. Turning torque of reduction pinion gear E : 0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb) F G SAT340DC OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY ● ● H Measure clearance between side cover and the end of the output shaft bearing. Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that clearance is within specifications. I J K SAT341D 1. Install bearing retainer for output shaft. L M SAT347D AT-365 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 2. Install output shaft thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer. SAT438D 3. Install output shaft on transmission case. SAT439D 4. Measure dimensions “l1 ” and “l2 ” at side cover and then calculate dimension “A”. ● Measure dimension “l1 ” and “l2 ” in at least two places “A”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface and adjusting shim mating surface A = l1 − l2 l2 : Height of gauge SAT874DA 5. Measure dimensions “l2 ” and “l3 ” and then calculate dimension “B”. Measure “l2 ” and “l3 ” in at least two places. “B”: Distance between the end of output shaft bearing outer race and the side cover fitting surface of transmission case B = l2 − l3 l2 : Height of gauge SAT875DA AT-366 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 6. Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that output shaft end play (clearance between side cover and output shaft bearing) is within specifications. A Output shaft end play (A − B) : 0 - 0.5 mm (0 - 0.020 in) Output shaft end play adjust- : Refer to AT-392, "OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY ing shim ADJUSTING SHIMS" . 7. B AT Install adjusting shim on output shaft bearing. SAT440D D 8. Apply locking sealant (Loctite 5/8 or equivalent) to transmission case as shown in illustration. E F G SAT441D 9. H Install side cover on transmission case. ● Apply locking sealant to the mating surface of transmission case. I J K SAT442D 10. Tighten side cover fixing bolts to specified torque. L : 26 - 30 N·m (2.7 - 3.1 kg-m, 20 - 22 ft-lb) ● ● Do not mix bolts A and B. Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts. M SAT124E AT-367 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] Assembly (2) 1. 2. ECS00619 Remove paper rolled around bearing retainer. Install thrust washer on bearing retainer. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SAT354D 3. Install forward clutch assembly. ● Align teeth of low & reverse brake drive plates before installing. ● Make sure that bearing retainer seal rings are not spread. SAT355D 4. Install thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing. SAT356D 5. Install thrust needle bearing on rear internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing. SAT357D AT-368 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 6. Hold forward clutch hub and turn overrun clutch hub. Check overrun clutch hub for directions of lock and unlock. ● If not as shown in illustration, check installed direction of forward one-way clutch. A B AT SAT358D D 7. Install rear internal gear assembly. ● Align teeth of forward clutch and overrun clutch drive plate. E F G SAT359D 8. H Install needle bearing on rear planetary carrier. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. I J K SAT360D 9. Install rear sun gear on rear planetary carrier. ● Pay attention to direction of rear sun gear. L M SAT052D AT-369 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 10. Install rear planetary carrier on transmission case. SAT362D 11. Install thrust needle bearing on front planetary carrier. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing. SAT363D 12. Install low one-way clutch to front planetary carrier by turning it in the direction of the arrow as shown. 13. While holding front planetary carrier, turn low one-way clutch. Check low one-way clutch for correct directions of lock and unlock. SAT048D 14. Install front planetary carrier assembly on transmission case. SAT047D AT-370 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 15. Install snap ring with screwdriver. ● Forward clutch and bearings must be correctly installed for snap ring to fit groove of transmission case. A B AT SAT046D D 16. Install needle bearing on front sun gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. E F G SAT367D H 17. Install front sun gear on front planetary carrier. I J K SAT368D 18. Install needle bearing on front sun gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. L M SAT369D AT-371 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 19. Install high clutch hub on front sun gear. SAT370D 20. Install needle bearing on high clutch hub. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. SAT371D 21. Remove paper rolled around input shaft. 22. Install input shaft assembly. ● Align teeth of high clutch drive plates before installing. SAT372D 23. Install reverse clutch assembly. ● Align teeth of reverse clutch drive plates before installing. SAT373D Adjustment (2) ECS0061A When any parts listed below are replaced, adjust total end play and reverse clutch end play. Total end play Reverse clutch end play Transmission case ● ● Overrun clutch hub ● ● Rear internal gear ● ● Rear planetary carrier ● ● Part name AT-372 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] Total end play Reverse clutch end play Rear sun gear ● ● Front planetary carrier ● ● Front sun gear ● ● High clutch hub ● ● High clutch drum ● ● Oil pump cover ● ● Reverse clutch drum — ● Part name A B AT D TOTAL END PLAY ● ● Measure clearance between reverse clutch drum and needle bearing for oil pump cover. Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within specifications. E F G SAT374D 1. H Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension “J”. I J K SAT375D a. L Measure dimension “K”. M SAT376D AT-373 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] b. c. Measure dimension “L”. Calculate dimension “J”. “J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of transmission case and needle bearing mating surface of high clutch drum J=K−L SAT377D 2. Measure dimension “M”. SAT378D a. b. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly. Measure dimension “M”. “M”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface and needle bearing on oil pump cover “M1 ”: Indication of gauge SAT379D c. Measure thickness of straightedge “t”. M = M1 − t 3. Adjust total end play “T3 ”. T3 = J − M Total end play “T3 ” ● : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play is within specifications. SAT443D Bearing races : Refer to AT-393, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" AT-374 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY ● ● A Measure clearance between oil pump cover and thrust washer for reverse clutch drum. Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that end play is within specifications. B AT SAT380D 1. Measure dimensions “O” and “P” and then calculate dimension “N”. D E F G SAT381D a. H Place thrust washer on reverse clutch drum. I J K SAT382D b. c. d. L Measure dimension “O”. Measure dimension “P”. Calculate dimension “N”. “N”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of transmission case and thrust washer on reverse clutch drum M N=O−P SAT383D AT-375 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 2. Measure dimensions “R” and “S” and then calculate dimension “Q”. SAT384D a. Measure dimension “R”. SAT385D b. c. Measure dimension “S”. Calculate dimension “Q”. “Q”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface and thrust washer mating surface Q=R−S 3. Adjust reverse clutch end play “T4 ”. T4 = N − Q Reverse clutch end play ● : 0.65 - 1.00 mm (0.0256 - 0.0394 in) Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that reverse clutch end play is within specifications. Thrust washer : Refer to AT-393, "THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY" Assembly (3) 1. 2. SAT386D ECS0061B Remove reverse clutch assembly and install needle bearing on high clutch assembly. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. Install reverse clutch assembly. SAT387D AT-376 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 3. 4. Install anchor end pin and lock nut on transmission case. Place brake band on outside of reverse clutch drum. Tighten anchor end pin just enough so that brake band is evenly fitted on reverse clutch drum. A B AT SAT038D D 5. Place bearing race selected in total end play adjustment step on oil pump cover. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. E F G SAT389D 6. H Place thrust washer selected in reverse clutch end play step on reverse clutch drum. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. I J K SAT390D 7. Install oil pump assembly on transmission case. L M SAT391D AT-377 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 8. Tighten oil pump fixing bolts to specified torque. : 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.1 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb) SAT392D 9. Install O-ring to input shaft. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. SAT034D 10. Adjust brake band. a. Tighten anchor end pin to specified torque. Anchor end pin : 3.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 inlb) SAT394D b. Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns. SAT395D c. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut. SAT396D AT-378 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 11. Apply compressed air to oil holes of transmission case and check operation of brake band. A B AT SAT397D Assembly (4) 1. D ECS0061C Install final drive assembly on transmission case. E F G SAT030D 2. H Install oil tube on converter housing. I J K SAT033DA L M AT-379 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 3. 4. Install O-ring on differential oil port of transmission case. Install converter housing on transmission case. ● Apply locking sealant to mating surface of converter housing. Bolt Length mm (in) A 32.8 (1.291) B 40 (1.57) SAT405D 5. a. Install accumulator piston. Check contact surface of accumulator piston for damage. SAT406DA b. Install O-rings on accumulator piston. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. Accumulator piston Orings : Refer to AT-393, "ORING" . SAT407DA c. Install accumulator pistons and return springs on transmission case. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case. Return springs : Refer to AT-393, "RETURN SPRING" . SAT878J AT-380 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 6. Install lip seals for band servo oil holes on transmission case. A B AT SAT021D D E F G SAT022D Apply petroleum jelly to lip seals. Install control valve assembly. Insert manual valve into control valve assembly. ● Apply ATF to manual valve. ● 7. a. H I J K SAT017D b. c. Pass solenoid harness through transmission case and install terminal body on transmission case by pushing it. Install stopper ring to terminal body. L M AAT261A AT-381 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] d. Tighten bolts A , B and C . : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) AAT260A Bolt length, number and location Bolt symbol Bolt length “l” Number of bolts 8. a. A B C 40.0 mm (1.575 in) 33.0 mm (1.299 in) 43.5 mm (1.713 in) 5 6 2 Install oil pan. Attach magnet to oil pan. SAT418D b. c. d. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case. Install oil pan on transmission case. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. ● Tighten the bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket. Tighten drain plug to specified torque. SAT128E AT-382 ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] 9. a. b. c. Install PNP switch. Set manual shaft in “P” position. Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft. Move selector lever to “N” position. A B AT SAT023JB D d. e. f. Use a 4 mm (0.157 in) pin for this adjustment. 1. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole. 2. Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into hole in PNP switch. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch. E F G SAT426DB 10. Install oil charging pipe and oil cooler tube to transmission case. H I J SAT586H 11. Install torque converter. a. Pour ATF into torque converter. ● Approximately 1 liter (1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 Imp qt) of fluid is required for a new torque converter. ● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained. L M SAT428DA AT-383 K ASSEMBLY [RE4F03B] b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque converter with notches of oil pump. SAT429D c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper position. Distance “A” : 21.1 mm (0.831 in) SAT430D AT-384 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A ECS0061D Engine QG18DE Automatic transaxle model RE4F03B Automatic transaxle assembly Transaxle gear ratio Model code number 3AX60 1st 2.861 2nd 1.562 3rd 1.000 4th 0.698 Reverse 2.230 Final drive 3.827 B AT D E Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1 Recommended fluid Fluid capacity 7.0l (7-3/8 US qt, 6-1/8 Imp qt) F *1: Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Shift Schedule ECS0061E G VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS QG18DE (Calif. CA Model) Throttle position Full throttle Half throttle Shift pattern Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D 4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 12 → 1 1 Comfort 54 - 62 (34 - 39) 103 - 111 (64 - 69) 163 - 171 (101 - 106) 159 - 167 (99 - 104) 93 - 101 (58 - 63) 41 - 49 (25 - 30) 54 - 62 (34 - 39) Comfort 32 - 40 (20 - 25) 60 - 68 (37 - 42) 124 - 132 (77 - 82) 70 - 78 (43 - 48) 35 - 43 (22 - 27) 25 - 33 (16 - 21) 54 - 62 (34 - 39) Shift pattern I J QG18DE (Except Calif. CA Model) Throttle position H Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D 4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 12 → 1 1 Full throttle Comfort 52 - 60 (32 - 37) 100 - 108 (62 - 67) 158 - 166 (98 - 103) 154 - 162 (96 - 101) 70 - 98 (56 - 61) 41 - 49 (25 - 30) 52 - 60 (32 - 37) Half throttle Comfort 31 - 39 (19 - 24) 58 - 66 (36 - 41) 119 - 127 (74 - 79) 68 - 76 (42 - 47) 34 - 42 (21 - 26) 24 - 32 (15 - 20) 52 - 60 (32 - 37) K L VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING LOCK-UP QG18DE (Calif. CA Model) M Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle opening 2/8 OD switch Shift pattern Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF ON (D4 ) Comfort 97 - 105 (60 - 65) 63 - 71 (39 - 44) OFF (D3 ) Comfort 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) QG18DE (Except Calif. CA Model) Throttle opening 2/8 OD switch Shift pattern Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF ON (D4 ) Comfort 94 - 102 (58 - 63) 61 - 69 (38 - 43) OFF (D3 ) Comfort 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) Stall Revolution ECS0061F Engine model Stall revolution rpm QG18DE 2,350 - 2,800 AT-385 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] Line Pressure ECS0061G Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Engine speed rpm R position D position 2 position 1 position Idle 778 (7.9, 113) 500 (5.1, 73) 500 (5.1, 73) 500 (5.1, 73) Stall 1,816 (18.5, 263) 1,167 (11.9, 169) 1,167 (11.9, 169) 1,167 (11.9, 169) Control Valves ECS0061H CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS Unit: mm (in) No . Upper body Refer to AT-307, "CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY" . Lower body Refer to AT-311, "CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY" . Parts Part No.* Free length Outer diameter 35 3-2 timing valve spring 31736-01X00 23.29 (0.917) 6.65 (0.2618) 19 Cooler check valve spring 31742-3AX05 28.04 (1.1039) 7.15 (0.2815) 23 Pilot valve spring 31742-3AX03 38.98 (1.5346) 8.9 (0.350) 15 1-2 accumulator valve spring 31742-3AX00 20.5 (0.807) 6.95 (0.2736) 28 1-2 accumulator piston spring 31742-3AX09 55.66 (2.1913) 19.5 (0.7677) 33 1st reducing valve spring 31742-80X05 27.0 (1.063) 7.0 (0.276) 2 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-80X06 37.5 (1.476) 7.0 (0.276) 7 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-3AX04 33.3 (1.3110) 9.0 (0.354) 10 Torque converter clutch control valve spring 31742-3AX02 53.01 (2.0870) 6.5 (0.256) 34 Shuttle control valve spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.0079) 5.65 (0.2224) 18 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-80X13 45.0 (1.772) 15.0 (0.591) 23 Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 27 Accumulator control valve spring 31742-80X02 22.0 (0.866) 6.5 (0.256) 29 Shift valve A spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 2 Shift valve B spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 11 Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-41X15 30.5 (1.201) 9.8 (0.386) 7 Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-80X16 32.0 (1.260) 6.9 (0.272) — Oil cooler relief valve spring 31872-31X00 17.02 (0.6701) 8.0 (0.315) — T/C pressure spring 31742-3AX11 9.0 (0.354) 7.3 (0.287) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Clutch, Brake and Brake Band ECS0061I REVERSE CLUTCH Number of drive plates 2 Number of driven plates 2 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 2.0 (0.079) Allowable limit 1.8 (0.071) Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031) Allowable limit 1.2 (0.047) Thickness of retaining plates *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. AT-386 Thickness mm (in) Part number* 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 31537-31X00 31537-31X01 31537-31X02 31537-31X03 31537-31X04 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] HIGH CLUTCH Number of drive plates Number of driven plates Drive plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) A 3 5 Standard 2.0 (0.079) Allowable limit 1.8 (0.071) Standard B 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071) Allowable limit AT 2.4 (0.094) Thickness of retaining plates Thickness mm (in) Part number* 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 5.6 (0.220) 5.8 (0.228) 6.0 (0.236) 31537-32X05 31537-32X06 31537-32X07 31537-32X08 31537-32X09 31537-32X10 31537-32X11 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. D E F FORWARD CLUTCH Number of drive plates 5 Number of driven plates 5 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.8 (0.071) Allowable limit 1.6 (0.063) Standard G H 0.45 - 0.85 (0.0177 - 0.0335) Allowable limit 1.85 (0.0728) Thickness of retaining plate Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 31537-31X60 31537-31X61 31537-31X62 31537-31X63 31537-31X64 31537-31X65 I J K *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. OVERRUN CLUTCH Number of drive plates 3 Number of driven plates 4 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard Clearance mm (in) L M 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055) Allowable limit 2.0 (0.079) Thickness of retaining plate Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 31567-31X79 31567-31X80 31567-31X81 31567-31X82 31567-31X83 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Number of drive plates 5 Number of driven plates 4+1 AT-387 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] Drive plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 2.0 (0.079) Allowable limit 1.8 (0.071) Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071) Allowable limit 2.8 (0.110) Thickness of retaining plate Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 31667-31X16 31667-31X17 31667-31X18 31667-31X19 31667-31X20 31667-31X21 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. BRAKE BAND Anchor end pin tightening torque 3.5 - 5.9 N-m (0.35 - 0.6 kg-m, 31 - 52 in-lb) Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin 2.5±0.125 Lock nut tightening torque 31 - 36 N-m (3.2 - 3.7 kg-m, 23 - 27 ft-lb) Clutch and Brake Return Springs ECS0061J Unit: mm (in) Parts Free length Outer diameter Part number* Outer (16 pcs) 26.6 (1.047) 10.6 (0.417) 31505-31X02 Inner (16 pcs) 26.3 (1.035) 7.7 (0.303) 31505-31X03 Reverse clutch (16 pcs) 18.6 (0.732) 8.0 (0.315) 31505-31X00 High clutch (12 pcs) 19.7 (0.776) 11.1 (0.437) 31505-31X01 Low reverse brake (20 pcs) 25.1 (0.988) 7.6 (0.299) 31505-31X04 Forward clutch (Overrun clutch) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Oil Pump ECS0061K Oil pump side clearance mm (in) 0.02 - 0.04 (0.0008 - 0.0016) Inner gear Thickness mm (in) Part number* 9.99 - 10.00 (0.3933 - 0.3937) 9.98 - 9.99 (0.3929 - 0.3933) 9.97 - 9.98 (0.3925 - 0.3929) 31346-31X00 31346-31X01 31346-31X02 Thickness of inner gears and outer gears Clearance between oil pump housing and outer gear mm (in) Standard Oil pump cover seal ring clearance mm (in) Standard Outer gear Thickness mm (in) Part number* 9.99 - 10.00 (0.3933 - 0.3937) 9.98 - 9.99 (0.3929 - 0.3933) 9.97 - 9.98 (0.3925 - 0.3929) 31347-31X00 31347-31X01 31347-31X02 0.08 - 0.15 (0.0031 - 0.0059) Allowable limit 0.15 (0.0059) 0.1 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Input Shaft ECS0061L Unit: mm (in) Standard Input shaft seal ring clearance 0.08 - 0.23 (0.0031 - 0.0091) Allowable limit 0.23 (0.0091) AT-388 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] Planetary Carrier ECS0061M Unit: mm (in) Clearance between planetary carrier and pinion washer Standard A 0.15 - 0.70 (0.0059 - 0.0276) Allowable limit 0.80 (0.0315) Final Drive B ECS0061N DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE Clearance between side gear and differential case with washer 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) AT DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS Thickness mm (in) Part number* D 0.75 - 0.80 (0.0295 - 0.0315) 0.80 - 0.85 (0.0315 - 0.0335) 0.85 - 0.90 (0.0335 - 0.0354) 0.90 - 0.95 (0.0354 - 0.0374) 0.95 - 1.00 (0.0374 - 0.0394) 38424-D2111 38424-D2112 38424-D2113 38424-D2114 38424-D2115 E *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. F BEARING PRELOAD Differential side bearing preload “T” 0.04 - 0.09 mm (0.0016 - 0.0035 in) G TURNING TORQUE Turning torque of final drive assembly 0.49 - 1.08 N-m (5.0 - 11.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 9.5 in-lb) H DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.40 (0.0157) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 1.44 (0.0567) 31499-21X07 31499-21X08 31499-21X09 31499-21X10 31499-21X11 31499-21X12 31499-21X13 31499-21X14 31499-21X15 31499-21X16 31499-21X17 31499-21X18 31499-21X19 31499-21X20 31499-21X21 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. AT-389 I J K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] TABLE FOR SELECTING DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS Unit: mm (in) Dial indicator deflection Suitable shim(s) 0.31 - 0.35 (0.0122 - 0.0138) 0.35 - 0.39 (0.0138 - 0.0154) 0.39 - 0.43 (0.0154 - 0.0169) 0.43 - 0.47 (0.0169 - 0.0185) 0.47 - 0.51 (0.0185 - 0.0201) 0.51 - 0.55 (0.0201 - 0.0217) 0.55 - 0.59 (0.0217 - 0.0232) 0.59 - 0.63 (0.0232 - 0.0248) 0.63 - 0.67 (0.0248 - 0.0264) 0.67 - 0.71 (0.0264 - 0.0280) 0.71 - 0.75 (0.0280 - 0.0295) 0.75 - 0.79 (0.0295 - 0.0311) 0.79 - 0.83 (0.0311 - 0.0327) 0.83 - 0.87 (0.0327 - 0.0343) 0.87 - 0.91 (0.0343 - 0.0358) 0.91 - 0.95 (0.0358 - 0.0374) 0.95 - 0.99 (0.0374 - 0.0390) 0.99 - 1.03 (0.0390 - 0.0406) 1.03 - 1.07 (0.0406 - 0.0421) 1.07 - 1.11 (0.0421 - 0.0437) 1.11 - 1.15 (0.0437 - 0.0453) 1.15 - 1.19 (0.0453 - 0.0469) 1.19 - 1.23 (0.0469 - 0.0484) 1.23 - 1.27 (0.0484 - 0.0500) 1.27 - 1.31 (0.0500 - 0.0516) 1.31 - 1.35 (0.0516 - 0.0531) 1.35 - 1.39 (0.0531 - 0.0547) 1.39 - 1.43 (0.0547 - 0.0563) 1.43 - 1.47 (0.0563 - 0.0579) 1.47 - 1.51 (0.0579 - 0.0594) 1.51 - 1.55 (0.0594 - 0.0610) 1.55 - 1.59 (0.0610 - 0.0626) 1.59 - 1.63 (0.0626 - 0.0642) 1.63 - 1.67 (0.0642 - 0.0657) 1.67 - 1.71 (0.0657 - 0.0673) 1.71 - 1.75 (0.0673 - 0.0689) 1.75 - 1.79 (0.0689 - 0.0705) 1.79 - 1.83 (0.0705 - 0.0720) 1.83 - 1.87 (0.0720 - 0.0736) 1.87 - 1.91 (0.0736 - 0.0752) 1.91 - 1.95 (0.0752 - 0.0768) 0.40 (0.0157) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.48 (0.0189) + 0.48 (0.0189) 0.48 (0.0189) + 0.52 (0.0205) 0.52 (0.0205) + 0.52 (0.0205) 0.52 (0.0205) + 0.56 (0.0220) 0.56 (0.0220) + 0.56 (0.0220) 0.56 (0.0220) + 0.60 (0.0236) 0.60 (0.0236) + 0.60 (0.0236) 0.60 (0.0236) + 0.64 (0.0252) 0.64 (0.0252) + 0.64 (0.0252) 0.64 (0.0252) + 0.68 (0.0268) 0.68 (0.0268) + 0.68 (0.0268) 0.68 (0.0268) + 0.72 (0.0283) 1.44 (0.0567) 0.72 (0.0283) + 0.76 (0.0299) 0.76 (0.0299) + 0.76 (0.0299) 0.76 (0.0299) + 0.80 (0.0315) 0.80 (0.0315) + 0.80 (0.0315) 0.80 (0.0315) + 0.84 (0.0331) 0.84 (0.0331) + 0.84 (0.0331) 0.84 (0.0331) + 0.88 (0.0346) 0.88 (0.0346) + 0.88 (0.0346) 0.88 (0.0346) + 0.92 (0.0362) 0.92 (0.0362) + 0.92 (0.0362) 0.92 (0.0362) + 0.96 (0.0378) 0.96 (0.0378) + 0.96 (0.0378) 0.52 (0.0205) + 1.44 (0.0567) 0.56 (0.0220) + 1.44 (0.0567) Reduction Pinion Gear ECS0061O BEARING PRELOAD Reduction pinion gear bearing preload 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) TURNING TORQUE Turning torque of reduction pinion gear 0.1 - 0.69 N-m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb) AT-390 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 1.74 (0.0685) 1.78 (0.0701) 1.82 (0.0717) 1.86 (0.0732) 1.90 (0.0748) 1.92 (0.0756) 1.94 (0.0764) 1.96 (0.0772) 1.98 (0.0780) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.02 (0.0795) 2.04 (0.0803) 2.06 (0.0811) 2.08 (0.0819) 2.10 (0.0827) 2.12 (0.0835) 2.14 (0.0843) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.18 (0.0858) 2.20 (0.0866) 2.22 (0.0874) 2.24 (0.0882) 2.26 (0.0890) 2.28 (0.0898) 2.30 (0.0906) 2.34 (0.0921) 2.38 (0.0937) 2.42 (0.0953) 2.46 (0.0969) 2.50 (0.0984) 2.54 (0.1000) 2.58 (0.1016) 2.62 (0.1031) 2.66 (0.1047) 31438-31X16 31438-31X17 31438-31X18 31438-31X19 31438-31X20 31439-31X60 31438-31X21 31439-31X61 31438-31X22 31439-31X62 31438-31X23 31439-31X63 31438-31X24 31439-31X64 31438-31X60 31439-31X65 31438-31X61 31439-31X66 31438-31X62 31439-31X67 31438-31X63 31439-31X68 31438-31X64 31439-31X69 31438-31X65 31438-31X66 31438-31X67 31438-31X68 31438-31X69 31438-31X70 31438-31X71 31438-31X72 31438-31X73 31438-31X74 A B AT D E F G H I J *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. K L M AT-391 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] TABLE FOR SELECTING REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM Unit: mm (in) Dimension “T” Suitable shim(s) 1.77 - 1.81 (0.0697 - 0.0713) 1.81 - 1.85 (0.0713 - 0.0728) 1.85 - 1.89 (0.0728 - 0.0744) 1.89 - 1.93 (0.0744 - 0.0760) 1.93 - 1.96 (0.0760 - 0.0772) 1.96 - 1.98 (0.0772 - 0.0780) 1.98 - 2.00 (0.0780 - 0.0787) 2.00 - 2.02 (0.0787 - 0.0795) 2.02 - 2.04 (0.0795 - 0.0803) 2.04 - 2.06 (0.0803 - 0.0811) 2.06 - 2.08 (0.0811 - 0.0819) 2.08 - 2.10 (0.0819 - 0.0827) 2.10 - 2.12 (0.0827 - 0.0835) 2.12 - 2.14 (0.0835 - 0.0843) 2.14 - 2.16 (0.0843 - 0.0850) 2.16 - 2.18 (0.0850 - 0.0858) 2.18 - 2.20 (0.0858 - 0.0866) 2.20 - 2.22 (0.0866 - 0.0874) 2.22 - 2.24 (0.0874 - 0.0888) 2.24 - 2.26 (0.0882 - 0.0890) 2.26 - 2.28 (0.0890 - 0.0898) 2.28 - 2.30 (0.0898 - 0.0906) 2.30 - 2.32 (0.0906 - 0.0913) 2.32 - 2.34 (0.0913 - 0.0921) 2.34 - 2.37 (0.0921 - 0.0933) 2.37 - 2.41 (0.0933 - 0.0949) 2.41 - 2.45 (0.0949 - 0.0965) 2.45 - 2.49 (0.0965 - 0.0980) 2.49 - 2.53 (0.0980 - 0.0996) 2.53 - 2.57 (0.0996 - 0.1012) 2.57 - 2.61 (0.1012 - 0.1028) 2.61 - 2.65 (0.1028 - 0.1043) 2.65 - 2.69 (0.1043 - 0.1059) 2.69 - 2.73 (0.1059 - 0.1075) 1.74 (0.0685) 1.78 (0.0701) 1.82 (0.0717) 1.86 (0.0732) 1.90 (0.0748) 1.92 (0.0756) 1.94 (0.0764) 1.96 (0.0772) 1.98 (0.0780) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.02 (0.0795) 2.04 (0.0803) 2.06 (0.0811) 2.08 (0.0819) 2.10 (0.0827) 2.12 (0.0835) 2.14 (0.0843) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.18 (0.0858) 2.20 (0.0866) 2.22 (0.0874) 2.24 (0.0882) 2.26 (0.0890) 2.28 (0.0898) 2.30 (0.0906) 2.34 (0.0921) 2.38 (0.0937) 2.42 (0.0953) 2.46 (0.0969) 2.50 (0.0984) 2.54 (0.1000) 2.58 (0.1016) 2.62 (0.1031) 2.66 (0.1047) Output Shaft ECS0061P SEAL RING CLEARANCE Unit: mm (in) Output shaft seal ring clearance Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) END PLAY Output shaft end play 0 - 0.5 mm (0 - 0.020 in) OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.56 (0.0220) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.36 (0.0535) 31438-31X46 31438-31X47 31438-31X48 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Bearing Retainer ECS0061Q SEAL RING CLEARANCE Unit: mm (in) Standard Bearing retainer seal ring clearance 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) AT-392 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] Total End Play ECS0061R A Total end play “T3 ” 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY B Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.6 (0.024) 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.4 (0.055) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 2.0 (0.079) 31435-31X01 31435-31X02 31435-31X03 31435-31X04 31435-31X05 31435-31X06 31435-31X07 31435-31X08 AT D *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. E Reverse Clutch End Play ECS0061S Reverse clutch end play “T4 ” 0.65 - 1.00 mm (0.0256 - 0.0394 in) F THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY Thickness mm (in) Part number* G 0.65 (0.0256) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.95 (0.0374) 1.10 (0.0433) 1.25 (0.0492) 1.40 (0.0551) 31508-31X10 31508-31X11 31508-31X12 31508-31X13 31508-31X14 31508-31X15 H I *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Accumulator ECS0061T O-RING Unit: mm (in) Accumulator Diameter (Small) Part number* Diameter (Large) Part number* Servo release accumulator 26.9 (1.059) 31526-41X03 44.2 (1.740) 31526-41X02 N-D accumulator 34.6 (1.362) 31526-31X08 39.4 (1.551) 31672-21X00 J K *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. L RETURN SPRING Unit: mm (in) Accumulator Free length Outer diameter Part number* Servo release accumulator spring 52.5 (2.067) 20.1 (0.791) 31605-80X00 N-D accumulator spring 45.0 (1.772) 27.6 (1.087) 31605-33X01 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Band Servo ECS0061U RETURN SPRING Unit: mm (in) Return spring Free length Outer diameter Part number* 2nd servo return spring 32.5 (1.280) 25.9 (1.020) 31605-31X20 OD servo return spring 38.52 (1.5165) 22.0 (0.866) 31605-31X21 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Removal and Installation ECS0061V Unit: mm (in) Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter AT-393 21.1 (0.831) M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F03B] Shift Solenoid Valves Gear ECS0061W Solenoid A Solenoid B 1st ON ON 2nd OFF ON 3rd OFF OFF 4th ON OFF Solenoid Valve ECS0061X Solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal number Shift solenoid A 20 - 30Ω 2 Shift solenoid B 5 - 20Ω 1 Ovr. clutch sol. 20 - 30Ω 3 Line pres. sol. 2.5 - 5Ω 4 T/conv. clutch sol. 5 - 20Ω 5 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ECS0061Y Monitor Item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] Specification (Approx.) 1.5V ↓ 0.5V Revolution Sensor 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ ECS0061Z Condition Judgement standard When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. *1 CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. When vehicle not moving. Approximately 150 Hz Under 1.3V or over 4.5V Dropping Resistor ECS00620 Resistance 10 - 15Ω AT-394 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC PFP:00000 A ECS00621 ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) B CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-509 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-514 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-519 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-524 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-536 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-494 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-505 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-544 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-565 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-488 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 P0750 AT-550 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-555 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-531 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-560 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 P0720 AT-500 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AT-587 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-395 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX [RE4F04B] P NO. INDEX FOR DTC DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-488 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-494 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-500 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-505 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-509 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-514 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-519 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-524 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-531 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-536 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-544 P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-550 P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-555 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-560 P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-565 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-587 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. AT-396 PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ECS00622 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. AT WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. F Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ECS00623 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM or ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precautions ● ECS00624 Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM, because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned off. H I J K L M SEF289H AT-397 G PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. AAT470A ● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and verify whether TCM functions properly or not. Refer to AT-419, "INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM". MEF040DA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common SAT964I shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transaxle. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to AT-399, "ATF COOLER SERVICE" . After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . AT-398 PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] Service Notice or Precautions ECS00625 A FAIL-SAFE The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major electrical input/output device circuit is damaged. Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of 1, 2 or D. The cus- B tomer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration. When the ignition key is turned ON following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about 8 seconds. [Or, refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ]. AT The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions. Always follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-448, "Work Flow" . D The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows: ● The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor. ● During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated. E TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ● External leaks in the hub weld area. ● Converter hub is scored or damaged. ● Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft. ● Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines. ● Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter. ● Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.) ● Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze. ● Internal failure of stator roller clutch. ● Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter). ● Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter. The torque converter should not be replaced if: ● The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles. ● The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged. ● Transaxle failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter. ● Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such as taxi, delivery or police use. ATF COOLER SERVICE If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-32, "RADIATOR" . OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS ● ● ● – ● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on AT-432 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories. Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-429 to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions. park/neutral position (PNP) switch *: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-689, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. AT-399 F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] For description and how to disconnect, refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" . Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" AT-400 ECS00626 PREPARATION [RE4F04B] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS00627 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name KV381054S0 (J34286) Puller ● Removing differential side oil seals ● Removing differential side bearing outer race ● Removing idler gear bearing outer race a: 250 mm (9.84 in) b: 160 mm (6.30 in) B AT D NT414 ST33400001 (J26082) Drift ● Installing differential side oil seal F04B and F04W (RH side) ● Installing oil seal on oil pump housing a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. NT086 (J34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 (J34301-1) Oil pressure gauge 2 (J34301-2) Hoses 3 (J34298) Adapter 4 (J34282-2) Adapter 5 (790-301-1230-A) 60° Adapter 6 (J34301-15) Square socket E F G ● Measuring line pressure H I AAT896 ST27180001 (J25726-A) Puller J ● Removing idler gear a: 100 mm (3.94 in) b: 110 mm (4.33 in) c: M8 x 1.25P NT424 ST23540000 (J25689-A) Pin punch Removing and installing parking rod plate and manual plate pins a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia. b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. NT442 ● Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of transmission case a: 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. NT410 AT-401 L M ● ST25710000 (J25689-A) Pin punch K PREPARATION [RE4F04B] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV32101000 (J25689-A) Pin punch ● Removing and installing manual shaft retaining pin ● Removing and installing pinion mate shaft lock pin a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. NT410 KV31102400 (J34285 and J34285-87) Clutch spring compressor ● Removing and installing clutch return springs ● Installing low and reverse brake piston a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) NT423 KV40100630 (J26092) Drift ● Installing reduction gear bearing inner race ● Installing idler gear bearing inner race a: 67.5 mm (2.657 in) dia. b: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia. c: 38.5 mm (1.516 in) dia. NT107 ST30720000 (J25405 and J34331) Bearing installer ● Installing idler gear bearing outer race a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. NT115 ST35321000 ( — Drift ● ) Installing output shaft bearing a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. NT073 (J34291-A) Shim setting gauge set ● Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil pump thrust washer ● Selecting side gear thrust washer ● Installing differential side bearing inner race (RH side) NT101 ST33230000 (J25805-01) Drift a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. NT084 AT-402 PREPARATION [RE4F04B] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J34290) Shim selecting tool set ● Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim A B AT NT080 ST3306S001 (J22888-D) Differential side bearing puller set 1 ST33051001 (J22888-D) Puller 2 ST33061000 (J8107-2) Adapter ST3127S000 (J25765-A) Preload gauge 1 GG91030000 (J25765-A) Torque wrench 2 HT62940000 ( — ) Socket adapter 3 HT62900000 ( — ) Socket adapter ● Removing differential side bearing inner race a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. c: 130 mm (5.12 in) d: 135 mm (5.31 in) e: 100 mm (3.94 in) AMT153 D E F ● Checking differential side bearing preload G H NT124 I ST35271000 (J26091) Drift ● Installing idler gear a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. J K NT115 (J39713) Preload adapter ● Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim ● Checking differential side bearing preload L M NT087 J45816 E20 TORX socket ● LCIA0258E AT-403 Removing flex plate bolts on vehicles equipped with QR25DE engines PREPARATION [RE4F04B] Commercial Service Tools ECS00628 Tool name Description Puller ● Removing idler gear bearing inner race ● Removing and installing band servo piston snap ring ● Removing reduction gear bearing inner race NT077 Puller a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. NT411 Drift ● Installing needle bearing on bearing retainer a: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia. NT083 Drift ● Removing needle bearing from bearing retainer a: 33.5 mm (1.319 in) dia. NT083 Drift ● Installing differential side bearing outer race (RH side) a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia. NT083 AT-404 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] OVERALL SYSTEM A/T Electrical Parts Location PFP:00000 A ECS00629 B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0131E AT-405 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Circuit Diagram ECS0062A WCWA0127E AT-406 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Cross-sectional View ECS0062B A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT488K 1. Band servo piston 2. Reverse clutch drum 3. Converter housing 4. Oil pump 5. Brake band 6. Reverse clutch 7. High clutch 8. Front planetary gear 9. Low one-way clutch 10. Rear planetary gear 11. Forward clutch 13. Low & reverse brake 14. Output gear 15. Idler gear 16. Forward one-way clutch 17. Pinion reduction gear 18. Final gear 19. Differential case 20. Input shaft 21. Torque converter 22. Side cover AT-407 12. Overrun clutch OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Hydraulic Control Circuit ECS0062C LCIA0040E AT-408 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Shift Mechanism ECS0062D A CONSTRUCTION B AT D E F SAT998I 1. Torque converter 2. Oil pump 3. 4. Brake band 5. Reverse clutch 6. High clutch 7. Front sun gear 8. Front pinion gear 9. Front internal gear G Input shaft H 10 Front planetary carrier . 11 Rear sun gear . 12 Rear pinion gear . 13 Rear internal gear . 14 Rear planetary carrier . 15 Forward clutch . 16 Forward one-way clutch . 17 Overrun clutch . 18 Low one-way clutch . 19 Low & reverse brake . 20 Parking pawl . 21 Parking gear . 22 Output shaft . 23 Idle gear . 24 Output gear . K Function L I J FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Clutch and brake components Abbr. Reverse clutch 5 R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 7 . High clutch 6 H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 10 . Forward clutch 15 F/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with forward one-way clutch 16 . Overrun clutch 17 O/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with rear internal gear 13 . Brake band 4 B/B To lock front sun gear 7 . Forward one-way clutch 16 F/O.C When forward clutch 15 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 13 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. Low one-way clutch 18 L/O.C To stop front planetary carrier 10 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. Low & reverse brake 19 L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 10 . AT-409 M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] CLUTCH AND BAND CHART Band servo Shift position Reverse clutch 5 High clutch 6 Forward clutch 15 Overrun clutch 17 2nd apply 3rd release 4th apply Forward oneway clutch 16 Low oneway clutch 18 Low & reverse brake 19 Lockup PARK POSITION P R O REVERSE POSITION O NEUTRAL POSITION N D*4 2 1 Remarks 1st O *1 D 2nd O *1 A O *1 A *2 C C *3 C C 3rd O O 4th O C B B B O B *4 O B O 1st O O 2nd O O B 3rd O O B 1st O O B 2nd O O O B 3rd O O *2 C B O B Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3 ⇔4 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇐3 B O Locks (held stationary) in 1st speed 1⇐2⇐3 *1: Operates when overdrive control switch is set in OFF position. *2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side. *3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts. *4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in OFF position. O: Operates A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake. B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration. C: Operates but does not affect power transmission. D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake. AT-410 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] POWER TRANSMISSION P and N Positions ● ● A P position Similar to the N position, the clutches do not operate. The parking pawl engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the powertrain is locked. N position Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the clutches do not operate. B AT D E F G H SAT991I I J K L M AT-411 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] 11 Position AAT537A ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Overrun clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse brake. This is different from that of D1 and 21 . Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-412 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D1 and 21 Positions A B AT D E F G H I J AAT532A ● Forward one-way clutch ● Forward clutch ● Low one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions (Engine brake) Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these three clutches. D1 : Overdrive control switch OFF and throttle opening is less than 3/16 21 : Always engaged At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way clutch. K L M AT-413 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D2 , 32 , 22 and 12 Positions AAT533A ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Brake band Overrun clutch engagement conditions Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier. As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed. D2 : Overdrive control switch OFF and throttle opening is less than 3/16 22 and 12 : Always engaged AT-414 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D3 and 33 Positions A B AT D E F G H I J AAT534A ● High clutch ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch. This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed. D3 : Overdrive control switch OFF and throttle opening is less than 3/16 K L M AT-415 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D4 (O/D) Position AAT536A ● High clutch ● Brake band ● Forward clutch (Does not affect power transmission) Engine brake Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch. This front carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes front internal gear (output) turn faster. At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-416 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] R Position A B AT D E F G H I J AAT535A ● Reverse clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake. Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction. As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. K L M AT-417 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Control System ECS0062E OUTLINE The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Vehicle speed sensor Overdrive control switch ASCD control unit Stop lamp switch Turbine revolution sensor Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Overrun clutch control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-II communication line control Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Overrun clutch solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve O/D OFF indicator lamp CONTROL SYSTEM WCIA0113E AT-418 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] TCM FUNCTION A The function of the TCM is to: ● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. ● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. ● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. B INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM Sensors and solenoid valves Input Output AT Function Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Detects accelerator pedal position and requested throttle opening and sends a signal to TCM. Engine speed signal Receives signal from ECM and controls lock-up control solenoid valve. A/T fluid temperature sensor Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM. Revolution sensor Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM. Vehicle speed sensor Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal which is used if revolution sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions. Overdrive control switch Sends a signal to the TCM which prohibits a shift to D4 (overdrive) position. ASCD control unit Sends the cruise signal and D4 (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD control unit to TCM. Stop lamp switch Send the lock-up release signal to the TCM at time of D4 (lock-up). CAN communication Control units are connected to two communication lines (CAN H and CAN L) allowing a high rate of information transmission. Shift solenoid valve A/B Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Line pressure solenoid valve Regulates line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Regulates lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Overrun clutch solenoid valve Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. O/D OFF indicator lamp Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction. CAN communication Control units are connected to two communication lines (CAN H and CAN L) allowing a high rate of information transmission. D E F G H I J K L CAN Communication ECS006H8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. AT-419 M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT System diagram LKIA0132E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM TCM Accelerator pedal position signal T R Output shaft revolution signal R T A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Wide open throttle position signal T R Overdrive cancel signal T R AT-420 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Control Mechanism ECS0062F A LINE PRESSURE CONTROL TCM has various line pressure control characteristics to meet the driving conditions. An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics. Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation. B Normal Control AT The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable clutch operation. D E SAT003J F Back-up Control (Engine brake) If the selector lever is shifted to 2 position while driving in D4 (O/D) or D3 , great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to deal with this driving force. G H I SAT004J J During Shift Change The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock. K L M SAT005J At Low Fluid Temperature ● Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize shifting quality. AT-421 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] ● The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission fluid when temperature is low. SAT006J ● Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F). This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low temperature. SAT007J SHIFT CONTROL The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and the ECM (throttle opening). This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy. Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the ECM (throttle opening) and revolution sensor to select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM. The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When set to ON, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the shift valve. SAT008J AT-422 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions A Gear position Shift solenoid valve D 1 , 21 , 11 D 2 , 22 , 12 D3 D4 (O/D) N-P A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Control of Shift Valves A and B B AT D E SAT009J Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B. The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward. F G LOCK-UP CONTROL H The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to an oil pressure signal which controls the lock-up piston. I Conditions for Lock-up Operation When vehicle is driven in 3rd and 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up occurs. Overdrive control switch ON Selector lever Gear position OFF K D position D4 D3 Vehicle speed sensor More than set value ECM (throttle opening) Less than set opening A/T fluid temperature sensor J L More than 40°C (104°F) M Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the OFF period, and opens the circuit during the ON period. If the percentage of OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and pilot pressure remains high. SAT010J AT-423 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock. OFF-time INCREASING ↓ Amount of drain DECREASING ↓ Pilot pressure HIGH ↓ Lock-up RELEASING SAT011J Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation AAT155A Lock-up released The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked. Lock-up applied When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch piston applied. Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up. OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL) Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective. The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed. Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions SAT014J Gear position D position D1 , D2 , D3 gear position 2 position 21 , 22 gear position 1 position 11 , 12 gear position AT-424 Throttle opening Less than 3/16 At any position OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control A The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control (engine brake control). When this solenoid valve is ON, the pilot pressure drain port closes. When it is OFF, the drain port opens. During the solenoid valve ON pilot pressure is applied to the end face of the overrun clutch control valve. B AT SAT015J D Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation When the solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure is applied to the overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does not engage. When the solenoid valve is OFF, pilot pressure is not generated. At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun clutch to engage. In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times. E F G H I J K SAT016J Control Valve ECS0062G FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES Valve name Function Pressure regulator valve, plug and sleeve plug Regulates oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Pressure modifier valve and sleeve Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, shift timing. Accumulator control valve Regulates accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions. Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions. Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral. Shift valve A Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B. AT-425 L M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Valve name Function Shift valve B Simultaneously switches two oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A. Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with application of the brake band in D4 . (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during D4 .) “1” reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when down-shifting from the 1 position 12 to 11 . Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock. In 1 and 2 positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability. Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure. Torque converter clutch control valve, plug and sleeve Activates or inactivates the lock-up function. Also provides smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system. 1-2 accumulator valve and piston Dampens the shock encountered when 2nd gear band servo contracts, and provides smooth shifting. 3-2 timing valve Switches the pace that oil pressure is released depending on vehicle speed; maximizes the high clutch release timing, and allows for soft down shifting. Shuttle valve Determines if the overrun clutch solenoid valve should control the 3-2 timing valve or the overrun clutch control valve and switches between the two. Cooler check valve At low speeds and with a small load when little heat is generated, saves the volume of cooler flow, and stores the oil pressure for lock up. AT-426 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Introduction PFP:00000 A ECS0062H The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM (transmission B control module) in combination with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For details, AT refer to AT-427, "OBD-II Function for A/T System" . OBD-II Function for A/T System ECS0062I The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II D E F ECS0062J ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. G TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below. I MIL Items One trip detection Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 X Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 X Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] — DTC: P1705 X Except above J Two trip detection K X L The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) M ECS0062K HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. ( With CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720, P0725, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. AT-427 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown in the following page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. SAT014K If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. SAT015K If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”. SAT016K Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-694, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 2 3 Items Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. AT-428 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as A described in the following. ● If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. ● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode B selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-690, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" AT . ● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) D ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data E ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. Touch “ENGINE”. Touch “SELF DIAGNOSIS”. F G H I J K L M AT-429 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) WCIA0365E HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Perform TCM self-diagnostic procedure. Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-704, "How to Erase DTC" . HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Perform TCM self-diagnostic procedure. Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Perform OBD-II self-diagnostic procedure. Refer to AT-440, "OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) AT-430 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 1. 2. ECS0062L A The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking the lamp. ● If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to DI26, "WARNING LAMPS" . (Or see AT-431, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .) When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp should go off. If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For details, refer to AT-427, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" . B AT D SAT964I CONSULT-II ECS0062M After performing AT-431, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" , place check marks for results on the AT-445, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items. NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: – Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, – Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and – Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). 4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit. FUNCTION F G H I J K Diagnostic test mode Function Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-II. Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. Reference page AT-431 L — AT-434 M — AT-436 — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. E Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis. If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-485, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY" . If result is NG, refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . SAT014K AT-431 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 2. Touch “SELF DIAGNOSIS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. CONSULT-II performs “Real Time Diagnosis”. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. SAT987J SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” test mode) “A/T” OBD-II (DTC) Available by O/D OFF indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2, “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on the gear position) from the switch. — P0705 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X P0720 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X — ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0731*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0732*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0733*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0734*1 ● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. — P0744*1 ● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0750 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0755 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P1760 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0740 Malfunction is detected when ... “ENGINE” Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit — TCM self-diagnosis ● PNP SW/CIRC Revolution sensor VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T VEH SPD SEN/ CIR AT Vehicle speed sensor (Meter) VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR — A/T 1st gear function A/T 1ST GR FNCTN A/T 1ST GR FNCTN A/T 2nd gear function A/T 2ND GR FNCTN ● A/T 2ND GR FNCTN A/T 3rd gear function A/T 3RD GR FNCTN ● A/T 3RD GR FNCTN A/T 4th gear function A/T 4TH GR FNCTN ● A/T 4TH GR FNCTN A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) A/T TCC S/V FNCTN A/T TCC S/V FNCTN Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT SOLENOID/V A SFT SOL A/CIRC Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT SOLENOID/V B ● SFT SOL B/CIRC Overrun clutch solenoid valve OVERRUN CLUTCH S/ V T/C clutch solenoid valve T/C CLUTCH SOL/V ● O/R CLUCH SOL/ CIRC ● TCC SOLENOID/ CIRC AT-432 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” test mode) “A/T” OBD-II (DTC) Available by O/D OFF indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2, “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0745 TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from this sensor. X TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the ECM. X Malfunction is detected when ... “ENGINE” Line pressure solenoid valve LINE PRESSURE S/V TCM self-diagnosis ● L/PRESS SOL/ CIRC Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] signal ● THROTTLE POSI SEN TP/SEN/CIRC A/T Engine speed signal ● ENGINE SPEED SIG P1705 D P0725 E ● TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. ● The ECM-A/T communication line is open or shorted. X U1000 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X P0710 ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning — — ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning — — ● TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. — — ● This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen.) X — ATF TEMP SEN/ CIRC Engine control A/T COMM LINE X P0710 F — Turbine revolution sensor TURBINE REV TCM (RAM) CONTROL UNIT (RAM) — TCM (ROM) CONTROL UNIT (ROM) — TCM (EEP ROM) CONT UNIT(EEP ROM) — Initial start INITIAL START B AT A/T fluid temperature sensor BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN A — No failure (NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDICATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED**) G H I J K L ● No failure has been detected. X X M X: Applicable −: Not applicable *1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. *2: Refer to EC-706, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . AT-433 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) Monitor item Item Display Vehicle speed sensor 1 (A/T) (Revolution sensor) VHCL/S SE·A/T [km/h] or [mph] Vehicle speed sensor 2 (Meter) VHCL/S SE·MTR [km/h] or [mph] Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] THRTL POS SEN [V] A/T fluid temperature sensor FLUID TEMP SE [V] TCM Input signals X Battery voltage BATTERY VOLT [V] — X — Engine speed ENGINE SPEED [rpm] X X Turbine revolution sensor Overdrive control switch PN position (PNP) switch R position switch D position switch 2 position switch 1 position switch ASCD cruise signal — Vehicle speed computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed. When racing engine in N or P with vehicle stationary, CONSULT-II data may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph). ● Vehicle speed computed from signal of vehicle speed sensor is displayed. Vehicle speed display may not be accurate under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when vehicle is stationary. ● Throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● A/T fluid temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● Signal voltage lowers as fluid temperature rises. ● Source voltage of TCM is displayed. ● Engine speed, computed from engine speed signal, is displayed. ● Checks changing speed then performs oil pressure control and torque down control. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of overdrive control SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of PN position SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of R position SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of D position SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2 position SW, is displayed. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1 position SW, is displayed. ● Status of ASCD cruise signal is displayed. ON ... Cruising state OFF ... Normal running state X X — X — PN POSI SW [ON/OFF] X — R POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — D POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — 2 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — 1 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — ASCD·CRUISE [ON/OFF] X ● — TURBINE REV OVERDRIVE SW [ON/OFF] Remarks — X X Description Main signals — AT-434 Engine speed display may not be accurate under approx. 800 rpm. It may not indicate 0 rpm even when engine is not running. ● This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Monitor item Item ASCD OD cut signal Display TCM Input signals ASCD·OD CUT [ON/OFF] ● X Kickdown switch Gear position KICKDOWN SW [ON/OFF] ● VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [mph] THROTTLE POSI [/8] Stop lamp switch BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] ● LINE PRES DTY [%] Shift solenoid valve B Overrun clutch solenoid valve Self-diagnosis display lamp (O/D OFF indicator lamp) X ● — X ● — ● — X TCC S/V DUTY [%] ● — Shift solenoid valve A X ● — X Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty X SLCT LVR POSI Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Line pressure duty — GEAR — Vehicle speed — ● X — Selector lever position A SHIFT S/V A [ON/OFF] SHIFT S/V B [ON/OFF] Description Main signals — — X — X SELF-D DP LMP [ON/OFF] — X X: Applicable —: Not applicable AT-435 ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of kickdown SW, is displayed. ● This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted. Selector lever position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. This is displayed even when no kickdown switch is equipped. ● A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error. ● A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error. J K Control value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of overrun clutch solenoid valve computed by TCM from each input signal is displayed. ● Control status of O/D OFF indicator lamp is displayed. H I Control value of line pressure solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. Control value of shift solenoid valve B, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. F G ON/OFF status is displayed. ON ... Brake pedal is depressed. OFF ... Brake pedal is released. ● D E Vehicle speed data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. Throttle position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. B AT Gear position data used for computation by TCM, is displayed. Control value of shift solenoid valve A, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. X OVERRUN/C S/ V [ON/OFF] Status of ASCD OD release signal is displayed. ON ... OD released OFF ... OD not released ● X Remarks L Control value of solenoid is displayed even if solenoid circuit is disconnected. The OFF signal is displayed if solenoid circuit is shorted. M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II CONSULT-II Setting Procedure 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector, which is located in left side dash panel. LAT136 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START”. SAT586J 5. Touch “A/T”. SAT014K 6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”. WCIA0366E AT-436 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.). A B AT SAT018K D 8. Touch “START”. E F G SAT589J 9. H Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. I J K SAT019K ● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. L M SAT591J AT-437 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. SAT592J SAT593J 11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed. SAT594J 12. Touch “YES” or “NO”. SAT595J AT-438 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 13. CONSULT-II procedure ended. A B AT SAT596J D E F G SAT593J If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. H DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE DTC work support item Description Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed. 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed. 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed. 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit I J K L Shift solenoid valve A ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can be confirmed. ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) ● ● M Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed. TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 ● ● ● 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 Check item Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST) Refer to EC-767, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" . AT-439 ECS0062N ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Refer to EC-706, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) 1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. Move selector lever to P position. Start engine and warm it up to normal engine operating temperature. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) SAT967I 5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? WCIA0129E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop procedure. Perform AT-598, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" before proceeding. AT-440 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 A Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Turn ignition switch to ACC position. B Move selector lever from P to D position. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 5. Depress and hold overdrive control switch in OFF position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON) until AT directed to release the switch. (If O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on, refer to “Steps 3 and 4” in AT598, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" ). D 6. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 7. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Do not start engine.) 8. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator E lamp will be OFF). 9. Wait 2 seconds. 10. Move selector lever to 2 position. F 11. Depress and release overdrive control switch in ON position until next step is completed (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON). G SAT968I 1. 2. 3. 4. 12. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF) until directed to release the switch. H >> GO TO 3. I J SAT969I 3. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Move selector lever to 1 position. Release the overdrive control switch. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON). Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF). Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON) until directed to release the switch. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will begin to flash ON and OFF). >> GO TO 4. SAT970I AT-441 K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC CODE Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to AT-442, "JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE" . WCIA0129E >> DIAGNOSIS END JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE O/D OFF indicator lamp: All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0114E WCIA0115E All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-500, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . 2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0116E WCIA0117E Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-577, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-560, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . 4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others. WCIA0118E WCIA0119E Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-550, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-555, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . AT-442 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] O/D OFF indicator lamp: 7th judgement flicker is longer than others. 6th judgement flicker is longer than others. A B AT WCIA0120E WCIA0121E Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-565, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-531, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . 8th judgement flicker is longer than others. 9th judgement flicker is longer than others. D E F WCIA0122E WCIA0123E A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power source circuit is damaged. Þ Go to AT-494, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-505, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . G 10th judgement flicker is longer than others. 11th judgement flicker is longer than others. H I WCIA0124E SAT599J Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-544, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . The ECM-A/T communication line is open or shorted. Þ Go to AT-587, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Lamp comes on. Flickers as shown below. J K L M WCIA0126E WCIA0127E Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged. Þ Go to AT-628, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" . Battery power is low. Battery has been disconnected for a long time. Battery is connected conversely. (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.) t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second AT-443 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION Introduction The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, ECM (throttle opening) or park/neutral position (PNP) switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc. PFP:00000 ECS0062O SAT631IA It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only, may not find the cause of the problems. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-448, "Work Flow" . SAT632I Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” like the example referenced at AT-445 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins for information. SEF234G AT-444 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information from Customer A KEY POINTS WHAT ........ Vehicle & A/T model WHEN ........ Date, Frequencies WHERE ..... Road conditions HOW .......... Operating conditions, Symptoms B Customer name MR/MS AT Model & Year VIN Trans. model Engine Mileage Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. ❏ No up-shift ❏ Intermittent ( (❏ Any position (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ No down-shift times a day) ❏ 2nd → 3rd (❏ O/D → 3rd D ❏ Particular position) ❏ 3rd → O/D) ❏ 3rd → 2nd E ❏ 2nd → 1st) ❏ Lockup malfunction F ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lockup ❏ Any drive position) ❏ Noise or vibration G ❏ No kickdown ❏ No pattern select H ❏ Others ( O/D OFF indicator lamp Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ) Blinks for about 8 seconds. ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit I J K L M AT-445 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Worksheet 1. ❏ Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints. AT-399 2. ❏ CHECK A/T FLUID AT-450 ❏ Leakage (Follow specified procedure) ❏ Fluid condition ❏ Fluid level 3. ❏ Perform STALL TEST and PRESSURE TEST. ❏ Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others. ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Reverse clutch ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Overrun clutch ❏ Forward one-way clutch AT-450, AT454 ❏ Low & reverse brake ❏ Low one-way clutch ❏ Engine ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Clutches and brakes except high clutch and brake band are OK ❏ Pressure test — Suspected parts: 4. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-455 41. AT-457 Check before engine is started. ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items. ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-488 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-570 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-500 . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-505 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor, AT-582 . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-531 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-544 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-550 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-555 . ❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor, AT-560 . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-565 . ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP), overdrive control and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit checks, AT-628 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-485 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-577 . ❏ A/T communication line, AT-587 . ❏ Control unit (RAM), Control unit (ROM), AT-590 . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-592 . ❏ Battery ❏ Others AT-446 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] 42. 43. Check at idle AT-457 A ❏ 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-598 . ❏ 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position, AT-599 . ❏ 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed, AT-601 . ❏ 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-601 . ❏ 5. Large Shock. N → R Position, AT-603 . ❏ 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position, AT-605 . ❏ 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 or 1 Position, AT-608 . Cruise test B AT-460 AT-463 Part-1 ❏ 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 , AT-610 . ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-613 . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 , AT-615 . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 , AT-618 . ❏ 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-620 . ❏ 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-621 . ❏ 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-622 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ), AT-623 . Part-2 D E AT-466 ❏ 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 , AT-625 . ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-613 . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 , AT-615 . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 , AT-618 . Part-3 4. AT F G AT-468 H ❏ 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF, AT-626 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3 ), AT-623 . ❏ 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position, AT-626 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22 ), AT-623 . ❏ 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position, AT-627 . ❏ 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-628 . ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items. I J ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-488 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-494 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-500 . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-505 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor, AT-582 . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-531 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-544 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-550 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-555 . ❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-560 . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-565 . ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP), overdrive control and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit checks, AT-628 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-485 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-577 . ❏ A/T communication line, AT-587 . ❏ Control unit (RAM), Control unit (ROM), AT-590 . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-592 . ❏ Battery ❏ Others K L M 5. ❏ For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-640 6. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-455 7. ❏ Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items. Refer to EC-690 , “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”. EC-690 ❏ DTC (P0731) A/T 1st gear function, AT-509 . ❏ DTC (P0732) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-514 . ❏ DTC (P0733) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-519 . ❏ DTC (P0734) A/T 4th gear function, AT-524 . ❏ DTC (P0744) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-536 . AT-447 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] 8. ❏ Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts. Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible symptoms and the component inspection orders.) AT-431 AT-439 9. ❏ Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories. AT-429 Work Flow ECS0062P HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, AT-445, "Information from Customer" and AT-446, "Diagnostic Worksheet" , to perform the best troubleshooting possible. AT-448 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] WORK FLOW CHART A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT086JI *1: AT-445 *2: AT-446 *3: AT-399 *4: AT-450 *5: AT-450, AT-454 *6: AT-455 *7: AT-431 *8: AT-427 *9: AT-444 *10: AT-488 *11: AT-594 *12: AT-594 *13: AT-633 *14: AT-471 *15: AT-429 *16: AT-488 *17: AT-590 *18: EC-690 AT-449 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION A/T Fluid Check PFP:00000 ECS0062Q FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK 1. 2. 3. Clean area suspected of leaking. For example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission case. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D position and wait a few minutes. Stop engine. SAT767B 4. Check for fresh leakage. SAT288G FLUID CONDITION CHECK Fluid color Suspected problem Dark or black with burned odor Wear of frictional material Milky pink Water contamination — Road water entering through filler tube or breather Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and tacky Oxidation — Over or under filling, — Overheating SAT638A FLUID LEVEL CHECK Refer to MA-31, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Stall Test ECS0062R STALL TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature :50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) SAT647B AT-450 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 3. 4. Set parking brake and block wheels. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test. ● It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine rpm on indicator. A B AT SAT513G D 5. 6. 7. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D position. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot brake. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release throttle. ● During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5 seconds. Stall revolution E F G :2,350 - 2,800 rpm SAT514G H 8. 9. Move selector lever to N position. Cool off ATF. ● Run engine at idle for at least one minute. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R positions. I J SAT771B K JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST The test result and possible damaged components relating to each result are shown in the illustrations on next page. In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, follow the procedure shown in AT-449, "WORK FLOW CHART" . NOTE: Stall revolution is too high in D, 2 or 1 position: ● Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. ..... Low one-way clutch slippage ● Slippage occurs in the following gears: 1st through 3rd gears in D position and engine brake functions with overdrive control switch set to OFF. 1st and 2nd gears in 2 position and engine brake functions with accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle). ..... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage Stall revolution is too high in R position: ● Engine brake does not function in 1 position. ..... Low & reverse brake slippage ● Engine brake functions in 1 position. ..... Reverse clutch slippage Stall revolution within specifications: ● Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing CAUTION: Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally. ● Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in D position. ..... High clutch slippage AT-451 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in D position. ..... Brake band slippage ● Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in D position, 2nd gear in 2 position, and 1st gear in 1 position with overdrive control switch set to OFF. ..... Overrun clutch slippage Stall revolution less than specifications: ● Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter ● AT-452 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT499K AT-453 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Line Pressure Test ECS0062S LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS Location of line pressure test ports are shown in the illustration. ● Always replace pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts. SAT301FA LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature :50 - 80°C (122 176°F) SAT647B 3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port. AAT898 4. Set parking brake and block wheels. ● Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure test is being performed at stall speed. SAT513G AT-454 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed. ● When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the stall test procedure. AT-454, "Line Pressure Test" A : Refer to SDS, AT-749, "Line Pressure" B AT SAT493G D JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST Judgement Suspected parts Line pressure is low in all positions. Line pressure is low in particular position. ● Oil pump wear ● Control piston damage ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged ● Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve ● Clogged strainer ● Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch ● For example, line pressure is: − Low in R and 1 positions, but − Normal in D and 2 positions. Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit. Refer to AT-410, "CLUTCH AND BAND CHART" . At idle Line pressure is high. Line pressure is low. At stall speed E F G ● A/T fluid temperature sensor damaged ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Open in dropping resistor circuit ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pilot valve sticking Road Test ● 1. 2. 3. K L M ECS0062T The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of A/ T and analyze causes of problems. The road test consists of the following three parts: Check before engine is started Check at idle Cruise test SAT786A AT-455 I J DESCRIPTION ● H TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] ● ● Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and items to check. Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found. Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test. Refer to AT-427, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" and AT-594, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS" . SAT496G AT-456 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED A 1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP B 1. Park vehicle on flat surface. 2. Move selector lever to P position. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop ROAD TEST. Go to AT-598, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . AT D E SAT967I 2. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP F Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> TCM is in fail-safe mode. Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET, AT-446 . Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . No >> 1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items. Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . 3. Go to AT-457, "2. CHECK AT IDLE" . G H I WCIA0129E J 2. CHECK AT IDLE 1. CHECK ENGINE START K 1. Park vehicle on flat surface. 2. Move selector lever to P position. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 4. Turn ignition switch to START position. 5. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> Stop ROAD TEST. No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-599, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . L M SAT769B AT-457 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK ENGINE START 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC position. 2. Move selector lever to D, 1, 2 or R position. 3. Turn ignition switch to START position. 4. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> Stop ROAD TEST. Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-599, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . No >> GO TO 3. SAT770B 3. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. 2. 3. Move selector lever to P position. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Release parking brake. SAT768B 4. Push vehicle forward or backward. 5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward? 6. Apply parking brake. Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-601, "3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 4. SAT796A 4. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. Start engine. 2. Move selector lever to N position. 3. Release parking brake. 4. Does vehicle move forward or backward? Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-601, "4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 5. SAT771B AT-458 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK SHIFT LOCK 1. A Apply foot brake. B AT D SAT797A E 2. Move selector lever to R position. 3. Is there large shock when changing from N to R position? Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-603, "5. Large Shock N → R Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 6. F G SAT772B H 6. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE I 1. Release foot brake for several seconds. 2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-605, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. J K L SAT799A 7. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE M 1. Move selector lever to D, 2 and 1 positions and check if vehicle creeps forward. 2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-460, "3. CRUISE TEST" . No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-608, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 2 or 1 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT773B AT-459 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 3. CRUISE TEST ● Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3. SAT601J With CONSULT-II ● ● Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result. Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per Shift Schedule. Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" CONSULT-II Setting Procedure CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. LAT136 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. WKIA1606E 3. Touch “A/T”. SAT014K AT-460 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 4. Touch “DATA MONITOR”. A B AT WCIA0366E D 5. 6. Touch “MAIN SIGNAL” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”. See “NUMERICAL DISPLAY”, “BARCHART DISPLAY” or “LINE GRAPH DISPLAY”. E F G SAT175K 7. 8. H Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”. Touch “START”. I J K SAT973J 9. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”. L M SAT134K AT-461 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 10. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”. SAT135K 11. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”. SAT987J 12. 13. 14. 15. Touch “DISPLAY”. Touch “PRINT”. Check the monitor data printed out. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3. SAT975J AT-462 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Cruise Test — Part 1 A 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. ATF operating temperature 2. 3. 4. 5. B Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature. :50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) AT Park vehicle on flat surface. Set overdrive control switch to ON position. Move selector lever to P position. Start engine. D E F SAT001J 6. G Move selector lever to D position. H I J SAT775B K 7. 8. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal half-way. Does vehicle start from D1 ? L Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-610, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . Continue ROAD TEST. M SAT495G AT-463 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2 ) Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2 :Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-613, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT954I 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 :Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-615, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT955I 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D3 to D4 :Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-618, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT956I AT-464 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U) A Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Read vehicle speed, throttle opening when lock-up duty becomes 94%. Specified speed when lock-up occurs B :Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-620, "12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D SAT957I E 6. CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP F Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Go to AT-621, "13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" . 7. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 G L/U TO D4 ) H 1. Release accelerator pedal. 2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Go to AT-622, "14. Lock-up Is Not Released" . Continue ROAD TEST. I J K SAT958I 8. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 1. 2. TO D3 ) L Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3 ? M Read gear position and engine speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go to AT-466, "Cruise Test — Part 2" . No >> Go to AT-623, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT959I AT-465 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Cruise Test — Part 2 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. 2. 3. 4. Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position. Confirm selector lever is in D position. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again. Does vehicle start from D1 ? Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-625, "16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT495G 2. CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 1. 2. 3. TO D4 TO D2 ) Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully? Read gear position and throttle opening. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-613, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT404H 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 :Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-615, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT960I AT-466 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) AND ENGINE BRAKE A Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3 . Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? B Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go to AT-468, "Cruise Test — Part 3" . No >> Go to AT-618, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D SAT405H E F G H I J K L M AT-467 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Cruise Test — Part 3 1. VEHICLE SPEED (D4 ) POSITION 1. 2. 3. Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position. Confirm selector lever is in D position. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4 . SAT812A 4. 5. 6. Release accelerator pedal. Set overdrive control switch to OFF position while driving in D4 . Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)? Read gear position and vehicle speed. SAT813A SAT999I Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-626, "17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT-468 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE A Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-623, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. B AT D SAT999I 3. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3 1. 2. TO D2 ) E Move selector lever from D to 2 position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF). Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22 ? F Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-626, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. G H I SAT791GA 4. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE J Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-623, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. K L M SAT791GA 5. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (22 TO 11 ) Move selector lever from 2 to 1 position while driving in 22 . Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position? Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-627, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. 1. 2. SAT778B AT-469 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 6. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . No >> Go to AT-628, "20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT778B AT-470 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Chart Numbers are arranged in order of inspection. Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. Items Symptom Condition Torque converter is not locked up. ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Lock-up Engagement/ TCC Inoperative Torque converter clutch piston slip. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Lock-up point is extremely high or low. Shift Shock Sharp shock in shifting from N to D position. ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item PFP:00000 A ECS0062U Reference Page 1. Throttle position sensor {accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 3. Engine speed signal AT-505 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-570 5. Line pressure test AT-454 6. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-531 AT 7. Control valve assembly AT-640 8. Torque converter AT-653 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor {accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-531 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 6. Control valve assembly AT-640 7. Torque converter AT-653 1. Throttle position sensor {accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-531 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 1. Engine idling rpm EC-662 2. Throttle position sensor {accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-570 5. Engine speed signal AT-505 6. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 7. Control valve assembly AT-640 8. Accumulator N-D AT-653 9. Forward clutch AT-698 AT-471 B D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Too sharp a shock in change from D1 to D2 . Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Too sharp a shock in change from D2 to D3 . ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Accumulator servo release AT-653 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-570 6. Brake band AT-653 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Control valve assembly AT-640 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-494 5. High clutch AT-693 6. Brake band AT-653 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Control valve assembly AT-640 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-494 5. Brake band AT-653 6. Overrun clutch AT-698 7. Forward one-way clutch AT-653 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-565 OFF vehicle Shift Shock ON vehicle Too sharp a shock in change from D3 to D4 . OFF vehicle Gear change shock felt during deceleration by releasing accelerator pedal. Large shock changing from 12 to 11 in 1 position. Too high a gear change point from D1 to D2 , from D2 to D3 , from D3 to D4 . Improper Shift Timing Gear change directly from D1 to D3 occurs. Too high a change point from D4 to D3 , from D3 to D2 , from D2 to D1 . ON vehicle 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-640 ON vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-704 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Accumulator servo release AT-653 3. Brake band AT-653 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle AT-472 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Kickdown does not operate when depressing pedal in D4 within kickdown vehicle speed. Improper Shift Timing Condition ON vehicle Kickdown operates or engine overruns when depressing pedal in D4 beyond kickdown vehicle speed limit. ON vehicle Gear change from 22 to 23 in 2 position. ON vehicle Gear change from 11 to 12 in 1 position. Failure to change gear from D4 to D3 . No Down Shift ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from D2 to D1 or from D3 to D1 . Reference Page A 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 2. Control cable adjustment AT-643 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 2. Control cable adjustment AT-643 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-565 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 6. Control valve assembly AT-640 7. Brake band AT-653 8. Overrun clutch AT-698 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 5. Control valve assembly AT-640 6. High clutch AT-693 7. Brake band AT-653 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 5. Control valve assembly AT-640 6. Low one-way clutch AT-653 7. High clutch AT-693 8. Brake band AT-653 B AT D E F OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from D3 to D2 or from D4 to D2 . Diagnostic Item ON vehicle OFF vehicle AT-473 G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Failure to change from D3 to 22 when changing lever into 2 position. AT-626 Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Down Shift ON vehicle Does not change from 12 to 11 in 1 position. OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from D1 to D2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Up Shift Failure to change gear from D2 to D3 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Up Shift Failure to change gear from D3 to D4 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 3. Control valve assembly AT-640 4. Control cable adjustment AT-643 5. Brake band AT-653 1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 2. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 3. Control valve assembly AT-640 4. Overrun clutch AT-698 5. Brake band AT-653 6. Low & reverse brake AT-704 1. Control cable adjustment AT-643 2. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 3. Control valve assembly AT-640 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 5. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 6. Brake band AT-653 1. Control cable adjustment AT-643 2. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 3. Control valve assembly AT-640 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 5. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 6. High clutch AT-693 7. Brake band AT-653 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 2. Overdrive control switch AT-628 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 5. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-642 6. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-570 7. Brake band AT-653 AT-474 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items No Up Shift Symptom A/T does not shift to D4 when driving with overdrive control switch ON. Condition Slips/Will Not Engage Vehicle will not run in D and 2 positions (but runs in 1 and R positions). Slips/Will Not Engage Vehicle will not run in D, 1, 2 positions (but runs in R position). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. AT-608 Reference Page A 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 3. Overdrive control switch AT-628 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 6. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-565 7. Control valve assembly AT-640 8. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-570 9. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 10. Brake band AT-653 11. Overrun clutch AT-698 1. Control cable adjustment AT-643 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Stall test AT-450 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 5. Control valve assembly AT-640 6. Reverse clutch AT-690 7. High clutch AT-693 8. Forward clutch AT-698 9. Overrun clutch AT-698 10. Low & reverse brake AT-704 ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-643 OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-653 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Stall test AT-450 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 5. Control valve assembly AT-640 6. Accumulator N-D AT-653 7. Reverse clutch AT-690 8. High clutch AT-693 9. Forward clutch AT-698 10. Forward one-way clutch AT-653 11. Low one-way clutch AT-653 ON vehicle OFF vehicle Vehicle will not run in R position (but runs in D, 2 and 1 positions). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. AT-605 Diagnostic Item ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle AT-475 B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Clutches or brakes slip somewhat in starting. OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage ON vehicle No creep at all. AT-605, AT-608 OFF vehicle Almost no shock or clutches slipping in change from D1 to D2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Control cable adjustment AT-643 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 4. Line pressure test AT-454 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 6. Control valve assembly AT-640 7. Accumulator N-D AT-653 8. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 9. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 10. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-565 11. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-531 12. Forward clutch AT-698 13. Reverse clutch AT-690 14. Low & reverse brake AT-704 15. Oil pump AT-671 16. Torque converter AT-653 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Control valve assembly AT-640 4. Forward clutch AT-698 5. Oil pump AT-671 6. Torque converter AT-653 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Accumulator servo release AT-653 5. Control valve assembly AT-640 6. Brake band AT-653 AT-476 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Almost no shock or slipping in change from D2 to D3 . Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Almost no shock or slipping in change from D3 to D4 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 to D3 when depressing pedal. Slips/Will Not Engage ON vehicle OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 to D2 when depressing pedal. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D3 to D2 when depressing pedal. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 5. High clutch AT-693 6. Forward clutch AT-698 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 5. Brake band AT-653 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-550 6. Control valve assembly AT-640 B AT D 7. Brake band AT-653 8. Forward clutch AT-698 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-550 7. Control valve assembly AT-640 8. Brake band AT-653 9. High clutch AT-693 10. Forward clutch AT-698 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 5. Control valve assembly AT-640 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-550 7. Brake band AT-653 8. High clutch AT-693 AT-477 A E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 or D3 to D1 when depressing pedal. Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage ON vehicle Vehicle will not run in any position. OFF vehicle Engine cannot be started in P and N positions. AT-599 Engine starts in positions other than P and N. AT-599 NOT USED Transaxle noise in P and N positions. ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Vehicle moves when changing into P position or parking gear does not disengage when shifted out of P position. AT-601 Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-550 7. Control valve assembly AT-640 8. Forward clutch AT-698 9. Forward one-way clutch AT-653 10. Low one-way clutch AT-653 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Control cable adjustment AT-643 3. Line pressure test AT-454 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 5. Oil pump AT-671 6. High clutch AT-693 7. Brake band AT-653 8. Low & reverse brake AT-704 9. Torque converter AT-653 10. Parking components AT-668 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-3, SC-9 2. Control cable adjustment AT-643 3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 1. Control cable adjustment AT-643 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] (Adjustment) EC-684 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 5. Oil pump AT-671 6. Torque converter AT-653 ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-643 OFF vehicle 2. Parking components AT-668 AT-478 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Vehicle runs in N position. AT-601 Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Vehicle braked when shifting into R position. OFF vehicle Excessive creep. NOT USED Engine stops when shifting lever into R, D, 2 and 1. Vehicle braked by gear change from D1 to D2 . Vehicle braked by gear change from D2 to D3 . Vehicle braked by gear change from D3 to D4 . Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Control cable adjustment AT-643 2. Forward clutch AT-698 3. Reverse clutch AT-690 4. Overrun clutch AT-698 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Line pressure test AT-454 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 5. High clutch AT-693 6. Brake band AT-653 7. Forward clutch AT-698 8. Overrun clutch AT-698 1. Engine idling rpm EC-662 1. Engine idling rpm EC-662 2. Fluid level AT-450 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-531 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 OFF vehicle 5. Torque converter AT-653 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Reverse clutch AT-690 3. Low & reverse brake AT-704 4. High clutch AT-693 5. Low one-way clutch AT-653 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-450 OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-653 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Overrun clutch AT-698 3. Forward one-way clutch AT-653 4. Reverse clutch AT-690 ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle OFF vehicle A B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-479 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Condition AT-450 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 3. Overdrive control switch AT-628 4. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-550 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-555 8. Control valve assembly AT-640 9. Reverse clutch AT-690 10. High clutch AT-693 11. Brake band AT-653 12. Low & reverse brake AT-704 13. Oil pump AT-671 14. Torque converter AT-653 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-450 ON vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-653 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-642 2. Control cable adjustment AT-643 3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-500, AT-577 4. Control valve assembly AT-640 5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-565 6. Overrun clutch AT-698 7. Low & reverse brake AT-704 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Engine idling rpm EC-662 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] AT-560 4. Line pressure test AT-454 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-544 6. Control valve assembly AT-640 7. Oil pump AT-671 8. Reverse clutch AT-690 9. High clutch AT-693 10. Brake band AT-653 11. Forward clutch AT-698 12. Overrun clutch AT-698 13. Low & reverse brake AT-704 14. Torque converter AT-653 Maximum speed not attained. Acceleration poor. OFF vehicle NOT USED Engine brake does not operate in “1” position. AT-628 Reference Page 1. Fluid level ON vehicle Transaxle noise in D, 2, 1 and R positions. Diagnostic Item ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Transaxle overheats. OFF vehicle AT-480 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle ATF shoots out during operation. White smoke emitted from exhaust pipe during operation. OFF vehicle ON vehicle NOT USED Offensive smell at fluid charging pipe. OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Reverse clutch AT-690 3. High clutch AT-693 4. Brake band AT-653 5. Forward clutch AT-698 6. Overrun clutch AT-698 7. Low & reverse brake AT-704 1. Fluid level AT-450 2. Torque converter AT-653 3. Oil pump AT-671 4. Reverse clutch AT-690 5. High clutch AT-693 6. Brake band AT-653 7. Forward clutch AT-698 8. Overrun clutch AT-698 9. Low & reverse brake AT-704 A B AT D E F G TCM Terminals and Reference Value ECS0062V PREPARATION H I J AAT475A ● Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48 by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”. K TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT L M WAT158 TCM INSPECTION TABLE (Data are reference values.) AT-481 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Terminal No. 1 2 Wire color R/W P/B Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 1.5 - 3.0V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Line pressure solenoid valve (with dropping resistor) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 4 - 14V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Torque converter clutch solenoid valve When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V Line pressure solenoid valve 3 Y/G 5* L CAN-H — — — 6* Y CAN-L — — — 10 11 12 19 20 BR/R L/W L/Y BR/R L/B 25 B 26 BR/Y 27 28 B/R R/B When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to OFF. 0V When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 .) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 .) 0V When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in D1 or D2 .) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in D3 or D4 .) 0V With ignition switch ON. Battery voltage With ignition switch OFF. 0V When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. Battery voltage When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate. 0V Power source Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Power source Overrun clutch solenoid valve Ground PNP switch 1 position PNP switch 2 position — — — When setting selector lever to 1 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to 2 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V With ignition switch OFF. Battery voltage With ignition switch ON. Battery voltage Power source (Memory back-up) AT-482 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Terminal No. Wire color Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 29 W Revolution sensor CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. When vehicle is parked. 30** 31** A B 450 Hz AT Under 1.3V or over 4.5V G/B Data link connector (RX) — — GY/L Data link connector (TX) — — D E F 32 R Ignition switch ON. 4.5 - 5.5V Ignition switch OFF. 0V When setting selector lever to D position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to R position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to P or N position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V Sensor power G 34 35 36 W/G G/Y LG PNP switch D position PNP switch R position PNP switch P or N position 38 G CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. When vehicle is parked. 39 40 L/OR PU/R Engine speed signal Vehicle speed sensor 240 Hz AT-483 J L M Under 1.3V or over 4.5V Refer to EC-746, "ECM INSPECTION TABLE" . When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. I K When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 Turbine revolution sensor H Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Terminal No. Wire color Item 41 GY Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] 42 B/W Sensor ground 47 BR A/T fluid temperature sensor 48 B Ground Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine. (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) Fully-closed throttle: 0.5V Fully-open throttle: 4V — — — When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F). 1.5V When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F). 0.5V — — — *: These terminals are connected to the ECM. **: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector. System Description ECS0062W CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. LKIA0107E INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM TCM Accelerator pedal position signal T R Output shaft revolution signal R T A/T self-diagnosis signal R T AT-484 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN PFP:00000 A ECS0062X B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0174E AT-485 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 10 BR/R POWER SOURCE 19 BR/R POWER SOURCE 25 B 28 R/B 48 B IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF APPROX. 0V GROUND POWER SOURCE (MEMORY BACKUP) — — IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE GROUND — — Diagnostic Procedure ECS0062Y 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10 (BR/R), 19 (BR/R), 28 (R/B) and ground. SAT611J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 (R/B) and ground. WCIA0043E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. AT-486 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F04B] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28 (Main harness) ● Fuse ● Ignition switch Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT D 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to AT-485, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . E F Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H I J K L M AT-487 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Description ● ● PFP:32006 ECS0062Z The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. WCIA0066E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00630 Diagnostic trouble code PNP SW/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position. Possible Cause ECS00631 Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00632 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. SAT014K SEF949Y 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. AT-488 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] 3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON or OFF) WITH GST A B Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-489 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ECS00633 WCWA0129E AT-490 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 26 27 34 35 36 BR/Y BR W/G G/Y LG PNP SWITCH 1 POSITION PNP SWITCH 2 POSITION PNP SWITCH D POSITION PNP SWITCH R POSITION PNP SWITCH P OR N POSITION IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN 1 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN 2 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN D POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN R POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN P OR N POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V A B AT D E F G Diagnostic Procedure ECS00634 1. INSPECTION START H I Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 6. J 2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) K With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. L 1. AT-491 M SAT701J DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following item: ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch F29 terminals 1 (G/OR) and 2 (B) and between terminals 3 (Y) and 4 (BR/Y), 5 (B/R), 6 (W/G), 7 (G), 8 (G/Y) and 9 (W/L) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position Terminal No. P 3-7 R 3-8 N 3-9 D 3-6 2 3-5 1 3-4 1-2 1-2 WCIA0096E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK MANUAL CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT Check PNP switch again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to test group 1. OK or NG OK >> Adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" . NG >> Repair or replace PNP switch. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Fuse ● Ignition switch Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-492 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] 6. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26 (BR/Y), 27 (B/R), 34 (W/G), 35 (G/Y), 36 (LG) and ground while moving selector lever through each position. B AT D E SAT840J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. F G 7. CHECK DTC Perform AT-488, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. H I 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J K L M AT-493 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description PFP:31940 ECS00635 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. SAT283HB SAT021J CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Specification (Approximately) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ ECS00636 Diagnostic trouble code ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0710 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. Possible Cause ECS00637 Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00638 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. AT-494 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. A Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. B AT SAT014K D E F G SEF949Y 2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.) CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) H I J WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. K L M AT-495 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ECS00639 WCWA0130E AT-496 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 42 47 B/W SENSOR GROUND BR A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR — A — IGNITION ON AND ATF TEMPERATURE IS 20°C (68°F) APPROX. 1.5V IGNITION ON AND ATF TEMPERATURE IS 80°C (176°F) APPROX. 0.5V B AT Diagnostic Procedure ECS0063A 1. INSPECTION START D Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 6. E 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) F 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. G H I J K SAT614J Voltage :Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] :Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. L M AT-497 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminals 6 and 7 (component side) when A/T is cold. WCIA0007E 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to AT-485, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. – Remove oil pan. Check the following items: A/T fluid temperature sensor Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown in figure. Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 20°C (68°F) 2.5kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.3kΩ – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-498 SAT298F DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] 6. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) A Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector F57 terminal 47 (BR) and ground while warming up A/T. Voltage B :Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] :Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. D E WCIA0049E 7. CHECK DTC F Perform AT-494, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION G H 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M AT-499 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description PFP:32702 ECS0063B The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. LCIA0070E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0063C Diagnostic trouble code VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT with CONSULT-II or P0720 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. Possible Cause ECS0063D Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Revolution sensor Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0063E CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. SAT014K WCIA0366E AT-500 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value. If the check result is NG, go to AT-503, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. A B AT D SAT014K E F G H SEF949Y 4. 5. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-503, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. I J K L M WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-501 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ECS0063F WCWA0175E AT-502 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 10 29 42 BR/R W B/W POWER SOURCE REVOLUTION SENSOR DATA (DC) IGNITION OFF APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE B VEHICLE MOVING AT 20 KM/H (12 MPH). USE THE CONSULT-II PULSE FREQUENCY MEASURING FUNCTION. A CIRCUIT TESTER CANNOT BE USED TO TEST THIS ITEM. CAUTION: CONNECT THE DIAGNOSIS DATA LINK CABLE TO THE VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR. 450 HZ VEHICLE NOT MOVING. LESS THAN 1.3V OR GREATER THAN 4.5V SENSOR GROUND A AT D — Diagnostic Procedure E — F ECS0063G G 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. H I J K L SAT614J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. M AT-503 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. MTBL0594 Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution sensor ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and revolution sensor OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-500, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-504 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL Description PFP:24825 A ECS0063H The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0063I Diagnostic trouble code ENGINE SPEED SIG with CONSULT-II or P0725 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM. AT Possible Cause ECS0063J Check harness or connectors. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure D ECS0063K CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. E F WITH CONSULT-II 1. G Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. H I SAT014K J K L M SEF949Y 2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-505 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ECS0063L WCWA0132E AT-506 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 39 L/OR ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL WITH ENGINE RUNNING AT IDLE SPEED APPROX. 0.6V WITH ENGINE RUNNING AT 3,000 RPM APPROX. 2.2V Diagnostic Procedure A B ECS0063M AT 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Refer to EC-706, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . OK or NG OK (with CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. NG >> Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-1237, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . D ● 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) E F G With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”. Check engine speed changes according to throttle position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. H I J K SAT645J L 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM ● Resistor and ignition coil Refer to EC-1237, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-507 M DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector F57 terminal 39 (L/OR) and ground. Voltage :0.6 (Idle speed) - 2.2V (3,000 rpm) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. LCIA0099E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM ● Resistor and ignition coil Refer to EC-1237, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 6. CHECK DTC Perform AT-505, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-508 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS0063N This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic D ECS0063O This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1 , 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open: 2* , 2, 3 and 3 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4* , 3, 3 and 4 positions to each gear position above *: P0731 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 1ST GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0731 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause E F G H I J ECS0063P Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit K L Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0063Q CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. AT-509 M DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. SAT014K 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) WCIA0366E If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT512, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists. Malfunction for P0731 exists. 8. 1→2→3→4 2→2→3→3 4→3→3→4 Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-512, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-510 SAT021J DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST ECS0063R A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0021E AT-511 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 11 12 L/W L/Y SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3) APPROX. 0V WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4) APPROX. 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0063S 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminals 1 and 2, and ground. WCIA0028E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-512 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. – – 2. A Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. B AT D E WCIA0029E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. F G 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE H 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. I J K SAT367H L 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-509, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-513 M DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 ECS0063T This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0063U This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2 , 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4, 3* , 3 and 4 positions to each gear position above *: P0732 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 2ND GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0732 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ECS0063V Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0063W CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. AT-514 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. A Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. B AT SAT014K 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 63 to 68 km/h (39 to 42 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 63 to 68 km/h (39 to 42 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT517, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0732 exists. 4→3→3→4 8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-517, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-515 D E F G WCIA0366E H I J K SAT021J L M DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND ECS0063X WCWA0022E AT-516 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 12 L/Y SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4) APPROX. 0V Diagnostic Procedure A B AT ECS0063Y D 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve B Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminal 1 and ground. E F G H WCIA0026E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. I J 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve B Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. K L M WCIA0027E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. AT-517 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-514, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). AT-518 SAT367H DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS0063Z This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band, AT etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00640 This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed: 1, 1, 4* and 4 positions to each gear position above *: P0733 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 3RD GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0733 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. D E F G H I J Possible Cause ECS00641 Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit K Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure L ECS00642 CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. AT-519 M DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. SAT014K 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 80 to 95 km/h (50 to 59 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 80 to 95 km/h (50 to 59 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT522, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists. 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1→1→4→4 8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-522, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-520 WCIA0366E SAT021J DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD ECS00643 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0023E AT-521 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 11 L/W SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3) APPROX. 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS00644 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve A Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminal 2 and ground. WCIA0030E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve A Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. WCIA0031E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. AT-522 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE A 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. B AT D SAT367H E 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-519, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). F G H I J K L M AT-523 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 ECS00645 This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position as instructed by the TCM, or if the line pressure is low. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Specification Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON Approximately 4% ↓ Approximately 94% Line pressure solenoid valve duty Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) Approximately 24% ↓ Approximately 95% On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00646 This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear position above *: P0734 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 4TH GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0734 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ECS00647 Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00648 CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before continuing. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. AT-524 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. A B WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. AT D E SAT014K 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 60 to 70 km/h (37 to 43 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 60 to 70 km/h (37 to 43 MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT527, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0734 exists. 1→2→2→1 8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-525 F G H I WCIA0366E J K L M SAT021J DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH ECS00649 WCWA0024E AT-526 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 1 2 11 12 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE R/W LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR) P/B L/W SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A L/Y SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B APPROX. 1.5 - 3.0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 4 - 14V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 0V WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3 ) APPROX. 0V WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE F WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE BE IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4 ) APPROX. 0V G Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 A WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING B AT D E ECS0064A H TO D4 ) I During AT-463, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 2. J K L SAT988H 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE M Perform line pressure test. Engine Speed RPM Line Pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D, 2 and 1 Position R Position Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113) Stall 1,223 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278) Refer to AT-454, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 7. AT-527 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminals 1 and 2 and ground. WCIA0028E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 4. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. – – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. WCIA0029E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. AT-528 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK CONTROL VALVE A 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair control valve. 6. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 B AT D SAT367H E TO D4 ) F Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). G 7. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. H Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Line pressure solenoid valves Check resistance between the terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 4 and ground. I J K L WCIA0032E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. M AT-529 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 8. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Line pressure solenoid valves Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. WCIA0033E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 9. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair control valve. SAT367H 10. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). 11. CHECK DTC Perform AT-524, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group. AT-530 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS0064B The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed and the ECM (throttle opening). Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. B AT D SAT283HB E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Specification Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON F Approximately 4% ↓ Approximately 94% G On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0064C Diagnostic trouble code TCC SOLENOID/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0740 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS0064D Check the following items. ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) I J Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0064E NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. H Turn ignition switch ON. M SAT014K AT-531 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II and wait at least 1 second. SEF949Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-532 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ECS0064F A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0133E AT-533 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 3 Y/G TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE WITH TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP APPROX. 8 - 15V WITHOUT TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP APPROX. 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0064G 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 5 and ground. WCIA0034E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. – • Remove oil pan. Check the following items: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. WCIA0035E – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-534 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector F30 terminal 5 and TCM harness connector F56 terminal 3. Refer to AT-533, "Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV" . Continuity should exist. B AT 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK DTC D E Perform AT-531, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. F 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION G 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I J K L M AT-535 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS0064H This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Specification Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON Approximately 4% ↓ Approximately 94% On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0064I This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear position above *: P0744 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T TCC S/V FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ECS0064J Check the following items. ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0064K CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. AT-536 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. A Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive vehicle to decrease voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. B AT SAT014K 4. – – – 5. Accelerate vehicle to more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.) THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94% VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) Check that “GEAR” shows “4”. WCIA0366E For shift schedule, refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-748, "Shift Schedule" . D E F G H I J K L SAT021J WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. M AT-537 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ECS0064L WCWA0134E AT-538 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 1 2 3 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE R/W LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR) P/B TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Y/G WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 1.5 - 3.0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 4 - 14V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 0V WITH TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP APPROX. 8 - 15V WITHOUT TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP APPROX. 0V Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 A B AT D E ECS0064M F TO D4 ) During AT-463, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 2. G H I SAT988H J 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Perform line pressure test. Engine Speed RPM K Line Pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D, 2 and 1 Position R Position Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113) Stall 1,223 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278) L M Refer to AT-454, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. AT-539 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve. 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 SAT367H TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). 5. CHECK DTC Perform AT-536, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. Check for proper lock-up. 6. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Line pressure solenoid valve Check resistance to the terminal and ground. WCIA0032E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. AT-540 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. – 2. A Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Line pressure solenoid valve Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. B AT D E WCIA0033E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. G 8. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair control valve. H I J SAT367H 9. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 K TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). 10. CHECK DTC Perform AT-536, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. Check for proper lock-up. AT-541 L M DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 11. CHECK LOCK-UP During AT-463, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group. No >> GO TO 12. SAT989H 12. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 5 and ground. WCIA0036E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 13. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. WCIA0035E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. AT-542 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 14. CHECK CONTROL VALVE A 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-675, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check control valves for sticking. – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter clutch relief valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair control valve. B AT D SAT367H 15. CHECK LOCK-UP E Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 16. No >> Check transaxle internal components (clutch, brake, etc.). F 16. CHECK DTC G Perform AT-536, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group. H I J K L M AT-543 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ECS0064N The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. SAT283HB CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Line pressure solenoid valve duty Specification Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) On Board Diagnosis Logic Approximately 24% ↓ Approximately 95% ECS0064O Diagnostic trouble code L/PRESS SOL/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS0064P Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Line pressure solenoid valve Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0064Q NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. SAT014K AT-544 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 2. Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 5 seconds. A B AT SEF949Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. E F G H I J K L M AT-545 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ECS0064R WCWA0027E AT-546 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 1 2 R/W P/B LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR) WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 1.5 - 3.0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 4 - 14V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING APPROX. 0V Diagnostic Procedure A B AT ECS0064S 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. D E Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 4 and ground. F G H I WCIA0037E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION K 1. 2. – • Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: Line pressure solenoid valve Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. WCIA0038E Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – AT-547 L M DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE AND DROPPING RESISTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness connector F30 terminal 4 and TCM harness connector F56 terminal 2. Resistance : Approximately 12Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. WCIA0130E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Dropping resistor ● Check resistance between two terminals. Resistance : Approximately 12Ω Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● WCIA0040E 5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 4 and TCM harness connector F56 terminal 1. Refer to AT-546, "Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV" . Continuity should exist. 3. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK DTC Perform AT-544, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. AT-548 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION A 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-549 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Description PFP:31940 ECS0064T Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch, vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. SAT283HB Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0064U Diagnostic trouble code SFT SOL A/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0750 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS0064V Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Shift solenoid valve A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0064W CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. SAT014K AT-550 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Start engine. Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift 1 → 2 (“GEAR”). A B AT SEF949Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. E F G H I J K L M AT-551 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ECS0064X WCWA0028E AT-552 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 11 L/W SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3) APPROX. 0V A B Diagnostic Procedure AT ECS0064Y D 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 2 and ground. E F G H WCIA0041E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. I J 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. – – • Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: Shift solenoid valve A Operation check Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. K L M WCIA0031E Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – AT-553 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector F30 terminal 2 and TCM harness connector F56 terminal 11. Refer to AT-552, "Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A" . Continuity should exist. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-550, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-554 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Description PFP:31940 A ECS0064Z Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch, vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. B AT D SAT283HB E Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic F ECS00650 Diagnostic trouble code SFT SOL B/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0755 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS00651 Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Shift solenoid valve B G H I Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00652 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. J K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. M SAT014K AT-555 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Start engine. Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift 1 → 2 → 3 (“GEAR”). SEF949Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-556 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ECS00653 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0029E AT-557 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 12 L/Y SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE BE IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4) APPROX. OV Diagnostic Procedure ECS00654 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 1 and ground. WCIA0042E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. – – • Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: Shift solenoid valve B Operation check Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. WCIA0027E – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-558 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector F30 terminal 1 and TCM harness connector F56 terminal 12. Refer to AT-557, "Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B" . Continuity should exist. B AT 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK DTC D E Perform AT-555, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. F 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION G 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I J K L M AT-559 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] PFP:22560 Description ECS00655 The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls throttle position. This system also uses an electric throttle control actuator which consists of a throttle control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM. CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Condition Specification Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00656 Diagnostic trouble code TP SEN/CIRC A/T with CONSULT-II or P1705 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the ECM. Possible Cause ECS00657 Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00658 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Accelerator pedal condition THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW Fully released Less than 4.7V ON OFF Partially depressed 0.1 - 4.6V OFF OFF Fully depressed 1.9 - 4.6V OFF ON 2. 3. If the check result is NG, go to AT-563, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) If the check result is NG, go to AT-563, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. SAT014K WCIA0366E 4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. AT-560 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) A B AT D SAT014K E F G SEF949Y WITH GST H I Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. J K L M AT-561 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ECS00659 WCWA0135E AT-562 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 32 41 42 R GY B/W A IGNITION SWITCH ON 4.5 - 5.5V IGNITION SWITCH OFF 0V THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] IGNITION ON AND ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED SLOWLY AFTER WARMING UP ENGINE FULLY CLOSED THROTTLE: 0.5V SENSOR GROUND — — SENSOR POWER WIDE OPEN THROTTLE: 4.0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0065A 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM B AT D E Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Refer to EC-706, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . OK or NG OK (with CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-913, "DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR" and EC-1230, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR" . ● 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) F G H I With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”. J K L M SAT614J Voltage: Fully-closed throttle Fully-open throttle :Approximately 0.5V :Approximately 4V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit. (Main harness) AT-563 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 (GY) and 42 (B/W) while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly. Voltage: Fully-closed throttle :Approximately 0.5V valve Fully-open throttle :Approximately 4V valve (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) WCWA0085E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit. (Main harness) 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-564 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS0065B The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled. B AT D SAT283HB E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0065C Diagnostic trouble code O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P1760 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause F ECS0065D Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Overrun clutch solenoid valve G H Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0065E CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 MPH) with D position (O/D ON). L M SAT014K 4. Release accelerator pedal completely with D position (O/D OFF). SEF949Y AT-565 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-566 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ECS0065F A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0031E AT-567 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 20 L/B OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE WHEN OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE OPERATES BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DOES NOT OPERATE APPROX. 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0065G 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminal 3 (component side) and ground. Resistance : 20 - 30Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LCIA0092E 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch solenoid valve – Operation check • Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage and ground to the solenoid. – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. LCIA0093E 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly connector F30 terminal 3 and TCM harness connector F56 terminal 20. Refer to AT-567, "Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV" . Continuity should exist. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AT-568 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-565, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION B AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M AT-569 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) PFP:31940 Description ECS0065H The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. SAT283HB SAT021J CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Specification (Approximately) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ ECS0065I Diagnostic trouble code BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. Possible Cause ECS0065J Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. AT-570 ECS0065K DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. A B AT SAT014K D 3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH). E F G WCIA0366E WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. H Start engine. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH). Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . I J K L SAT335HB M AT-571 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ECS0065L WCWA0176E AT-572 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 10 BR/R POWER SOURCE 19 BR/R 28 R/B POWER SOURCE (MEMORY BACKUP) 42 B/W SENSOR GROUND 47 BR POWER SOURCE A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR DATA (DC) IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE — A B AT — D IGNITION ON WITH ATF TEMPERATURE AT 20°C (68°F) APPROX. 1.5V IGNITION ON WITH ATF TEMPERATURE AT 80°C (176°F) APPROX. 0.5V Diagnostic Procedure E ECS0065M F 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) G With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. H I J K SAT614J Voltage :Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] :Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 2. L M 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to EC-782, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-573 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. SAT611J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. 4. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground. WCIA0043E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM (Main harness) ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-574 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 6. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminals 6 and 7 (component side) when A/T is cold. B AT D E LCIA0027E F 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK (without CONSULT-II) >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. G 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H 1. 2. – • Remove oil pan. Check the following items: A/T fluid temperature sensor Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown. Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 20°C (68°F) 2.5kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.3kΩ I J K Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK (without CONSULT-II) >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – L SAT298F M AT-575 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 8. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T. Voltage 3. 4. 5. :Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] :Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector terminal 42 and ground. Refer to AT-572, "Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS" . Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10. CHECK DTC Perform AT-570, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. 11. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-576 WCIA0044E DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR Description PFP:24814 A ECS0065N The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR. B AT D SAT639J E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0065O Diagnostic trouble code VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. Possible Cause F ECS0065P Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Vehicle speed sensor G H Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0065Q CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC Confirmation Procedure” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before continuing. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. K L M SAT014K 2. Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 16 MPH). WCIA0366E WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. AT-577 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16 MPH). Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . SAT329H AT-578 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ECS0065R A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0137E AT-579 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 40 PU/R VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR WHEN MOVING VEHICLE AT 2 TO 3 KM/H (1 TO 2 MPH) FOR 1 M (3 FT) VOLTAGE VARIES BETWEEN LESS THAN 1V AND MORE THAN 4.5V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0065S 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II SAT614J 1. 2. 3. Start engine. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. Voltage :Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SAT356JA 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor Refer to DI-3, "METERS AND GAUGES" . ● Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-580 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-577, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION B AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M AT-581 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR Description PFP:31935 ECS0065T The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transaxle. The vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) is located on the output side of the automatic transaxle. With the two sensors, input and output shaft rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting. LCIA0019E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : TURBINE REV Malfunction is detected when... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. : 10th judgement flicker Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Turbine revolution sensor DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before continuing. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. SAT014K 2. 3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25 MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in “D” and vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25 MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds. AT-582 WCIA0366E DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] 3. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-440, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . A B AT SAT455F D E F G H I J K L M AT-583 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ECS0065U WCWA0177E AT-584 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) A BR/R TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (POWER) IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE 38 G TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (SIGNAL) WITH ENGINE RUNNING AT 1,000 RPM APPROX. 1.2V VOLTAGE SHOULD INCREASE WITH ENGINE RPM 42 B/W 10 SENSOR GROUND — Diagnostic Procedure — B AT ECS0065V D 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL E With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “TURBINE REF” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. F G H I SAT740J J Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 38 and ground (measure in AC range). K L M LCWA0004E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check harness for short or open between TCM and turbine revolution sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-585 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK DTC Perform DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION, AT-582, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminal for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection ECS0065W TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR ● Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) 1 2 2.4 - 2.8kΩ 1 3 No continuity 2 3 No continuity LCIA0077E AT-586 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F04B] DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 A ECS0065X CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- B tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. AT Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS0065Y This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control unit. E Possible Cause ECS0065Z Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) F DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00660 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. D Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-589, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K WITH GST L Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. M AT-587 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ECS00661 WCWA0139E AT-588 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS00662 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and start engine. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. Is any malfunction of the "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" indicated? YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section. Refer to LAN - LAN-4, "CAN Communication Unit" NO >> INSPECTION END. B AT D E PCIA0061E F G H I J K L M AT-589 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4F04B] DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) Description PFP:31036 ECS00663 The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. SAT574J On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00664 Diagnostic trouble code CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM). Possible Cause ECS00665 Check TCM. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00666 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. Start engine. SAT014K 3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. WCIA0366E AT-590 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS00667 A 1. INSPECTION START B With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Touch “ERASE”. 3. Perform AT-590, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . 4. Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-591 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4F04B] DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) Description PFP:31036 ECS00668 The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. SAT574J ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) Malfunction is detected when... TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. Check item (Possible cause) ● TCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. 1. SAT014K 3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. WCIA0366E AT-592 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS00669 A 1. CHECK DTC B With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position). 4. Touch “ERASE”. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF position for 10 seconds. Perform AT-592, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again? Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-593 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC PFP:00007 ECS0066A WCWA0140E AT-594 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 26 27 34 35 36 BR/Y B/R W/G G/Y LG PNP SWITCH 1 POSITION PNP SWITCH 2 POSITION PNP SWITCH D POSITION PNP SWITCH R POSITION PNP SWITCH P OR N POSITION IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN 1 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN 2 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN D POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN R POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN P OR N POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS APPROX. 0V A B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-595 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] WCWA0141E AT-596 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0142E AT-597 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 5 L CAN-H — — 6 Y CAN-L — — 30 G/B DATA LINK CONNECTOR (RX) — — 31 GY/L DATA LINK CONNECTOR (TX) — — 32 R SENSOR POWER IGNITION SWITCH ON APPROX. 4.5 - 5.5v IGNITION SWITCH OFF APPROX. 0V 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ECS0066B SYMPTOM: O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to ON. 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. SAT611J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE STEP 2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground. WCIA0043E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. AT-598 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness) Refer to AT-485, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM (Main harness) Refer to AT-485, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. F Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Refer to AT-485, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . H I SAT515J 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM J Check the following items: ● Harness and fuse for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF indicator lamp (Main harness) Refer to PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . ● Harness for short or open between O/D OFF indicator lamp and TCM. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM K L M Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position SYMPTOM: AT-599 ECS0066C TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] ● ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P or N position. Engine can be started with selector lever in D, 2, 1 or R position. 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. SCIA0706E 2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Check for short or open of park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2. Refer to AT-490, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. 3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Check control cable. Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" SAT023JB 4. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-600 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed ECS0066D A SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in P position. B 1. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS Check parking components. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" and AT725, "ASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT D E SAT282F 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves F ECS0066E SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting N position. G 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT H With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT367J 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check control cable. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. AT-601 I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 3. ADJUST CONTROL CABLE Adjust control cable. >> Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" . SAT023JA 4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Disassemble A/T. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Overrun clutch assembly – Reverse clutch assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-602 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. B 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E 5. Large Shock N → R Position ECS0066F SYMPTOM: There is large shock when changing from N to R position. F 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS G Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. H I J SAT345HA 2. CHECK DAMAGED CIRCUIT K Check damaged circuit. L >> Refer to AT-494, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-544, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" , and AT-560, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to EC-913, "DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR" , and EC1210, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E AT-603 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-454, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-604 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position ECS0066G A SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting R position. B 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. AT D E SAT638A F 2. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION G Check stall revolution with selector lever in 1 and R positions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. OK in 1 position, NG in R position>>GO TO 3. NG in both 1 and R positions>>GO TO 4. H I SAT493G J 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Torque converter – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-605 K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Torque converter – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly – Low & reverse brake assembly – Low one-way clutch OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position. Refer to AT-454, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT494G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following item: – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-606 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. B AT D SAT171B E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Torque converter – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly – Low & reverse brake assembly – Low one-way clutch OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 9. CHECK SYMPTOM F G H I J K L Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. M 10. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-607 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 2 or 1 Position ECS0066H SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting D, 2 or 1 position. 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 2. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION Check stall revolution with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT450, "Stall Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. SAT493G 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – Low & reverse brake assembly – Torque converter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-608 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-454, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. B AT D SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following item: – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G H I 6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION J 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. K L M SAT171B AT-609 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – Low & reverse brake assembly – Torque converter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 SYMPTOM: Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise test — Part 1. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-605, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . AT-610 ECS0066I TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS A Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-500, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-550, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , or AT-555, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . No >> GO TO 3. B AT D SAT934FB 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-832, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC1210, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. E F G H LCIA0110E 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE I Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-454, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. J K L SAT494G M AT-611 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – High clutch assembly – Torque converter – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT171B 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damage parts. 1. 2. AT-612 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 8. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. B 9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ECS0066J SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed. A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed. F G 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-608, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-610, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . H I 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS J With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? K Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 3. L M SAT367J 3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-500, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" and AT-577, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuits. AT-613 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-832, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC1210, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-614 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D 8. CHECK SYMPTOM E Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. F 9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION G 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 H I ECS0066K at the specified speed. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM J K Are "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position" and "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 " OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-608, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-610, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . AT-615 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 3. SAT367J 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-832, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC1210, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT171B AT-616 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – High clutch assembly – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D E F 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. G H I J 7. CHECK SYMPTOM K Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. L 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION M 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-617 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ECS0066L SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed. ● A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-608, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-610, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS With CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits? ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch ● Overdrive control switch ● A/T fluid temperature sensor ● Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) ● Shift solenoid valve A or B ● Vehicle speed sensor·MTR Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-494, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-500, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-550, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-555, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , or AT-577, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . No >> GO TO 3. SAT363HC 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-832, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC1230, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E AT-618 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. B AT D SAT171B E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band – Torque converter – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F G H I J K L Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. AT-619 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ECS0066M SYMPTOM: A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-531, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT346H 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-913, "DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR" and EC1230, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter relief valve – Torque converter clutch solenoid valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-620 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. B 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition D E ECS0066N SYMPTOM: A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds. F 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS G Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-505, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . No >> GO TO 2. H I J SAT347H 2. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION K 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. L M SAT171B AT-621 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ECS0066O SYMPTOM: Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released. AT-622 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 1. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] CIR- A CUIT B With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to the throttle position switch [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit? AT Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to the throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit? Yes or No D Yes >> Check the throttle position switch [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit. Refer to EC-832, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC-1230, "DTC E P2138 APP SENSOR" . No >> GO TO 2. F SAT367J 2. CHECK SYMPTOM G Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. H 3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION I 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) J K ECS0066P SYMPTOM: ● Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D4 to D3 . ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning overdrive control switch OFF. ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting A/T from D to 2 position. L M 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT565, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT348H AT-623 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-832, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC1230, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0110E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SAT171B 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Overrun clutch assembly – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-640, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-624 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 6. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. B 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 D E ECS0066Q SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2. F 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS G Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-500, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-550, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-555, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" or AT-577, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . No >> GO TO 2. H I J SAT934FA 2. CHECK SYMPTOM K Check again. OK or NG OK >> Go to AT-610, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . NG >> GO TO 3. L M 3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-625 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF ECS0066R SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive control switch to OFF position. 1. CHECK OVERDRIVE SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to overdrive control switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-628, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks}" . No >> Go to AT-615, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . SAT344H 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position ECS0066S SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever from D to 2 position. 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> Go to AT-613, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . SAT367J AT-626 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position ECS0066T A SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever from 2 to 1 position. B 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II AT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F G SAT367J 2. CHECK SYMPTOM H Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. I J K SAT778B 3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION L 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-627 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ECS0066U SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 22 (12 ) to 11 . 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-623, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . No >> Go to AT-605, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate {Park/neutral Position (PNP), Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Switches Circuit Checks} ECS0066V SYMPTOM: O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is good. DESCRIPTION ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. WCIA0066E ● Overdrive control switch Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and sends a signal to the TCM. SAT360H ● Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls the throttle position. This system also uses an electric throttle control actuator, which consists of a throttle control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM. LCIA0110E AT-628 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NOTE: The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive control switch circuits. A 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) B With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out P/N, R, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. AT D E F G SAT701J H 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch – Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch F29 terminals 1 (G/OR) and 2 (B) and between terminals 3 (Y) and 4 (OR), 5 (L), 6 (W/G), 7 (BR/W), 8 G/W), 9 (G) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position I J Terminal No. P 3-7 R 3-8 N 3-9 D 3-6 2 3-5 1 3-4 K 1-2 L 1-2 WCIA0096E M If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step a. – If OK on step b, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" . – If NG on step b, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals. Refer to step a. – If OK on step d, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-642, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . – If NG on step d, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – AT-629 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26 (OR), 27 (L), 34 (W/ G), 35 (G/W), 36 (BR/W) and ground while moving selector lever through each position. Terminal No. Lever position 36 35 34 27 26 P,N B 0 0 0 0 R 0 B 0 0 0 D 0 0 B 0 0 2 0 0 0 B 0 1 0 0 0 0 B Voltage: B : Battery voltage 0 : 0V SAT361J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 4. AT-630 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the following items: ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch – Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch F29 terminals 1 (G/OR) and 2 (B) and between terminals 3 (Y) and 4 (OR), 5 (L), 6 (W/G), 7 (BR/W), 8 G/W), 9 (G) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position B AT Terminal No. P 3-7 R 3-8 N 3-9 D 3-6 2 3-5 1 3-4 1-2 D 1-2 WCIA0096E If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step a. – If OK on step b, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" . – If NG on step b, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals. Refer to step a. – If OK on step d, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-642, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . – If NG on step d, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E F – 5. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) H I J K With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SW”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly. (Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive “OFF”.) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. L M SAT645J AT-631 G TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Overdrive control switch M44. ● Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. Switch position Continuity ON No OFF Yes Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness) ● Harness of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness) for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● WCIA0155E 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Perform throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] inspection. Refer to AT-560, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output inspection. Refer to AT-484, "Input/Output Signal Chart" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Inspect TCM terminals and related wiring harnesses for damage or loose connections. Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-632 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:34950 A ECS0066W The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other posi- B tion unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. AT The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder. Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ECS0066X D E F G H I J K L M SAT862J AT-633 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ECS0066Y WCWA0076E AT-634 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS0066Z A SYMPTOM 1: ● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied. B ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released. ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder. SYMPTOM 2: AT Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position. It can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”. D 1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Check key interlock cable for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-638, "Components" . E F 2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION G Check selector lever position for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-643, "Control Cable Adjustment" . H 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE I Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. (Do not start engine.) ● Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M44 terminal 7 (G) and ground. Voltage: Brake pedal depressed: Brake pedal released: J K Battery voltage 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. L SCIA1166E AT-635 M A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items. 1. Harness for open or short between fuse block (J/B) connector M1 terminal 12K and stop lamp switch harness connector M26 terminal 3. 2. Harness for open or short stop lamp switch harness connector M26 terminal 4 and A/T device harness connector M44 terminal 7 (G). 3. 10A fuse [10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. 4. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector M26 terminals 3 (G) and 4 (G). Condition Continuity When brake pedal is depressed Yes When brake pedal is released No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal —refer to BR-12, "STOP LAMP SWITCH AND ASCD CANCEL SWITCH CLEARANCE" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. WCIA0156E 5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to "OFF" position. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Check continuity between A/T device harness M44 terminal 6 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness. SCIA0784E 6. CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH Check continuity between A/T device harness conector M44 terminals 6 (B) and 7 (G). Brake pedal Operation sound Depressed No Released Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace park position switch. LAT232 AT-636 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID 1. 2. 3. A Connect A/T device harness connector. Turn ignition switch to "ON" position. Check operation sound. Condition When ignition switch is turned to "ON" position and selector lever is in the "P" position. B Brake pedal Operation sound Depressed Yes Released No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace shift lock solenoid. AT D 8. CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION E 1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 3. Recheck shift lock operation. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. CHECK A/T DEVICE INSPECTION F G H 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test. 2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M AT-637 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE [RE4F04B] KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Components PFP:34908 ECS00670 WAT242 CAUTION: ● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. Removal 1. ECS00671 Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder and remove interlock rod from cable. SAT853J AT-638 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE [RE4F04B] 2. Remove lock plate from steering lock assembly and remove key interlock cable. A B AT SAT854J D Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. ECS00672 Turn ignition key to lock position. Set A/T selector lever to P position. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install lock plate. Clamp cable to steering column and attach to control cable with band. E F G SAT854J H 5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. I J K SAT804E 6. 7. L Install casing cap to bracket. Move slider in order to connect adjuster holder to interlock rod. M SAT805E AT-639 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators PFP:00000 ECS00673 REMOVAL 1. 2. Drain ATF from transaxle. Remove oil pan and gasket. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. SAT031J 3. Disconnect A/T solenoid harness connector. SAT327F 4. 5. Remove snap ring from terminal cord assembly harness terminal body. Remove terminal cord assembly harness from transmission case by pushing on terminal body. SAT995C AT-640 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] 6. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts I , X and ● . Bolt length, number and location are shown in the illustration. ● Be careful not to drop manual valve and servo release accumulator return spring. 7. Disassemble and inspect control valve assembly if necessary. Refer to AT-675, "Control Valve Assembly" . A B AT D E F G SAT004F 8. Remove servo release and N-D accumulators by applying compressed air if necessary. ● Hold each piston with a rag. H I J AAT279 INSTALLATION ● ● Set manual shaft in Neutral, then align manual plate with groove in manual valve. After installing control valve assembly, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all positions. K L M SAT091J AT-641 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. 2. 3. ECS00674 Remove under cover. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. ● Always use new sealing parts. AAT189 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. 2. 3. ECS00675 Remove control cable from manual shaft. Set manual shaft in N position. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch fixing bolts. SAT033J 4. 5. 6. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both park/neutral position (PNP) switch and manual shaft as near vertical as possible. Reinstall any part removed. Check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-491, "Diagnostic Procedure" . AAT469A AT-642 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] Control Cable Adjustment ECS00676 A Move selector lever from the P position to the 1 position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in P position. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in P position. CAUTION: Turn wheels more than 1/4 rotations and apply the park lock. 3. Push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration by specified force. Specified force 4. 5. B AT D E : 4.9 - 9.8 N (0.5 - 1.0 kg, 1.1 - 2.2 lb) Tighten control cable lock nut. Move selector lever from P to 1 position again. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. ● Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position. ● Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position. F G SAT763J Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement 1. 2. H ECS00677 Remove drive shaft assembly. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . Remove oil seal. I J K SAT781-C 3. L Install oil seal. ● Apply ATF before installing. M SAT782 AT-643 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] ● Install oil seals so dimension A is within specification A 4. : −0.5 mm (−0.02 in) to 0.5 mm (0.02 in) Reinstall any part removed. AAT531A AT-644 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F04B] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal PFP:00000 A ECS00678 1. 2. 3. Remove battery and bracket. Remove air duct and air cleaner assembly, refer to EM-101, "REMOVAL" . B Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connectors. 4. Disconnect harness connectors of mass air flow sensor, intake air temperature sensor, revolution sensor, AT turbine revolution sensor, vehicle speed sensor and ground cable. 5. Remove LH mounting bracket from transaxle and body. D 6. Disconnect control cable at transaxle side. 7. Remove drive shafts, refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . 8. Drain ATF. E 9. Remove push clips and engine undercover. 10. Disconnect fluid cooler piping. 11. Disconnect and remove starter motor from transaxle, refer to F SC-21, "Removal" . LCIA0086E G 12. Support engine by placing a jack under oil pan. ● Do not place jack under oil pan drain plug. 13. Remove center member. 14. Remove rear cover plate and bolts securing torque converter to drive plate. ● Rotate crankshaft for access to securing bolts. H I J K SAT944CA L M SAT615E AT-645 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F04B] 15. Support transaxle with a jack. 16. Remove bolts fixing A/T to engine. 17. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack. SAT947C Installation ● ECS00679 Drive plate runout CAUTION: Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear teeth. Maximum allowable runout: EM-184, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)". ● If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear. SAT977H ● When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled. Distance “A” : 14 mm (0.55 in) or more SAT044A ● ● Install bolts fixing converter to drive plate. With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that transaxle rotates freely without binding. SAT946C AT-646 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F04B] ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Tighten bolts securing transaxle. Tighten LH mounting bracket bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-155, "Removal and Installation" . Tighten center member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-155, "Removal and Installation" . Tighten rear plate cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-110, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" . A B AT Bolt No. Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) l mm (in) 1 70 - 79 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 58) 65 (2.56) 2 70 - 79 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 58) 52 (2.05) 3 70 - 79 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 58) 40 (1.57) 4 78 - 98 (7.9 - 10.0, 58 - 72) 124 (4.88) SAT764J D E Reinstall any part removed. Check fluid level in transaxle. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transaxle operates correctly. With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R position. A slight shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transaxle is shifted. Perform road test. Refer to AT-455, "Road Test" . F G H SAT638A I J K L M AT-647 OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 ECS0067A LCIA0103E AT-648 OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT949IA AT-649 OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] LCIA0104E AT-650 OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] Oil Channel ECS0067B A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT573K AT-651 OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ECS0067C SAT565K AT-652 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY Disassembly 1. 2. PFP:31020 A ECS0067D Drain ATF through drain plug. Remove torque converter. B AT D SAT008D 3. a. b. c. E Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into one-way clutch outer race. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one- way clutch spline using screwdriver. Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace torque converter assembly. F G H I J K SAT009D L 4. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube. M SAT768J AT-653 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 5. 6. Set manual shaft to position P. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch. SAT023JA 7. 8. 9. a. b. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. ● If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-32, "RADIATOR" . Remove control valve assembly according to the following procedures. Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts I , X and ● . Remove snap ring from terminal cord assembly connector. SAT003F SAT004F c. Push terminal body into transmission case and draw out solenoid harness. SAT016D AT-654 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 10. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly. A B AT SAT005F D 11. Remove return spring from servo release accumulator piston. E F G SAT018DA 12. Remove servo release accumulator piston with compressed air. H I J SAT019DA 13. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston. 14. Remove N-D accumulator piston and return spring with compressed air. K L M SAT020D 15. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston. AT-655 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 16. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transmission case for damage. SAT023DA 17. Check accumulator return springs for damage and free length. 18. Remove lip seals. SAT006F 19. Remove L & R oil tube and oil sleeve. SAT862HA 20. Remove converter housing according to the following procedures. a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts. b. Remove converter housing by tapping it lightly. SAT008F AT-656 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. Remove O-ring from differential oil port. A B AT SAT235F D 21. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case. E F G SAT228F 22. Remove differential side bearing outer race and side bearing adjusting shim from transmission case. H I J SAT010FB K 23. Remove differential side bearing adjusting shim from transmission case. L M SAT031D 24. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter housing. SAT011FB AT-657 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 25. Remove oil seal with screwdriver from converter housing. ● Be careful not to damage case. SAT032D 26. Remove differential lubricant tube from converter housing. SAT063K 27. Remove oil pump according to the following procedures. a. Remove O-ring from input shaft. SAT225F b. Remove oil pump assembly, baffle plate and gasket from transmission case. SAT012F c. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump assembly. SAT013F AT-658 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 28. Remove brake band according to the following procedures. a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin. ● Do not reuse anchor end pin. A B AT SAT014FA b. D Remove brake band and strut from transmission case. E F G SAT196F ● H To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown. Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. I J SAT039D c. K Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns. L M SAT040D 29. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) and reverse clutch according to the following procedures. a. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) with reverse clutch. SAT549F AT-659 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] b. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) from reverse clutch. SAT566F c. Remove needle bearings from high clutch drum and check for damage or wear. SAT567F d. Remove high clutch hub and front sun gear from transmission case. SAT568F e. f. Remove front sun gear and needle bearing from high clutch hub and check for damage or wear. Remove bearing race from front sun gear and check for damage or wear. SAT019F 30. Remove needle bearing from transmission case and check for damage or wear. SAT020F AT-660 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 31. Apply compressed air and check to see that low and reverse brake operates. A B AT SAT138F 32. Remove low one-way clutch and front planetary carrier assembly according to the following procedures. a. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver. D E F G SAT046D b. Remove low one-way clutch with a hook made of wire. H I J K L M AAT889 c. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver. SAT022F AT-661 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] d. Remove front planetary carrier with low and reverse brake piston and retainer. SAT023F e. Remove low and reverse brake spring retainer. ● Do not remove return springs from spring retainer. SAT148F f. Check that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of the arrow and locks in the opposite direction. SAT048D g. h. Remove needle bearing, low and reverse brake piston and retainer from front planetary carrier. Check front planetary carrier, low one-way clutch and needle bearing for damage or wear. SAT024F i. Check clearance between planetary gears and planetary carrier with feeler gauge. Standard clearance Allowable limit : 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.0079 - 0.0276 in) : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) Replace front planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit. SAT025F AT-662 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 33. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear according to the following procedures. a. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly from transmission case. A B AT SAT026F b. D Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary carrier. E F G SAT027F c. Remove needle bearings from rear planetary carrier assembly. H I J SAT028F d. e. Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle bearings for damage or wear. Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary carrier with feeler gauge. Standard clearance Allowable limit L : 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.0079 - 0.0276 in) : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) Replace rear planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit. M SAT054D 34. Remove rear internal gear and forward clutch hub from transmission case. SAT029F AT-663 K DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 35. Remove overrun clutch hub from transmission case. SAT030F 36. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub and check for damage or wear. SAT031F 37. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case. SAT032F 38. Remove needle bearing from transmission case. SAT033F 39. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following procedures. a. Remove side cover bolts. ● Do not mix bolts A and B. ● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts. AAT850 AT-664 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] b. Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop output shaft assembly. It might come out when removing side cover. A B AT SAT434D c. D Remove adjusting shim. E F G SAT440D d. Remove output shaft assembly. H I J SAT035F ● If output shaft assembly came off with side cover, tap cover with a soft hammer to separate. K L M SAT435D e. Remove needle bearing. SAT036F AT-665 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 40. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following procedures. a. Set manual shaft to position P to fix idler gear. b. Unlock idler gear lock nut using a pin punch. SAT037F c. Remove idler gear lock nut. ● Do not reuse idler gear lock nut. SAT061D d. Remove idler gear with puller. SAT841DB e. f. Remove reduction pinion gear. Remove adjusting shim from reduction pinion gear. SAT916D 41. Remove return spring from parking shaft with screwdriver. 42. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pawl from transmission case. 43. Check parking pawl and shaft for damage or wear. SAT039F AT-666 DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 44. Remove parking actuator support from transmission case. 45. Check parking actuator support for damage or wear. A B AT SAT066D D 46. Remove side oil seal with screwdriver from transmission case. E F G SAT040F H I J K L M AT-667 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Manual Shaft PFP:00000 ECS0067E COMPONENTS SAT769J REMOVAL 1. Remove detent spring from transmission case. SAT042F 2. Drive out manual plate retaining pin. SAT842DB AT-668 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. 4. 5. Drive and pull out parking rod plate retaining pin. Remove parking rod plate from manual shaft. Draw out parking rod from transmission case. A B AT SAT043FB D 6. 7. Pull out manual shaft retaining pin. Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transmission case. E F G SAT049F 8. Remove manual shaft oil seal. H I J SAT080D K INSPECTION ● Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary. L INSTALLATION 1. Install manual shaft oil seal. ● Apply ATF to outer surface of oil seal. M SAT081D AT-669 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install manual shaft and manual plate. SAT044F 3. 4. Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transmission case. Install manual shaft retaining pin up to bottom of hole. SAT045FB 5. 6. Install parking rod to parking rod plate. Set parking rod assembly onto manual shaft and drive retaining pin. ● Both ends of pin should protrude. SAT034J 7. Drive manual plate retaining pin. ● Both ends of pin should protrude. SAT047FB 8. Install detent spring. Tighten detent spring bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-668, "COMPONENTS" . SAT042F AT-670 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Oil Pump ECS0067F A COMPONENTS B AT D E F SAT050FC G DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove seal rings. H I J SAT699H K 2. Loosen bolts in a crisscross pattern and remove oil pump cover. L M SAT051F 3. Remove inner and outer gear from oil pump housing. SAT092D AT-671 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing. SAT093D 5. Remove oil pump housing oil seal. SAT094D INSPECTION Oil Pump Housing, Oil Pump Cover, Inner Gear and Outer Gear ● Check for wear or damage. Side Clearances ● Measure side clearance of inner and outer gears in at least four places around each outside edge. Maximum measured values should be within specified positions. Standard clearance ● If clearance is less than standard, select inner and outer gear as a set so that clearance is within specifications. Inner and outer gear ● : 0.030 - 0.050 mm (0.0012 - 0.0020 in) : Refer to AT-753, "OIL PUMP" . If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump assembly except oil pump cover. SAT095D AT-672 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ● Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● A : 0.111 - 0.181 mm (0.0044 - 0.0071 in) : 0.181 mm (0.0071 in) B If not within allowable limit, replace whole oil pump assembly except oil pump cover. AT SAT096D D SEAL RING CLEARANCE ● Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● E : 0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) F If not within allowable limit, replace oil pump cover assembly. G SAT097D H ASSEMBLY 1. Install oil seal on oil pump housing. I J K SAT900DB 2. L Install O-ring on oil pump housing. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. M SAT093D AT-673 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Install inner and outer gears on oil pump housing. ● Be careful of direction of inner gear. SAT092D 4. a. b. Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly on oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape. Tighten bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten oil pump cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-671, "COMPONENTS" . SAT051F 5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove with petroleum jelly. ● Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. The ring may be deformed. SAT699H AT-674 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Control Valve Assembly ECS0067G A COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I J SAT537K 1. 7. Oil strainer 2. O-ring 3. Snap ring Terminal body 5. O-rings 6. Control valve lower body 8. Check ball 9. Separating plate Oil cooler relief valve spring 10 Support plate . 11 Steel ball . 12 Control valve inter body . 13 Pilot filter . 14 Separating plate . 15 Steel ball . 16 Control valve upper body . DISASSEMBLY Disassemble upper, inter and lower bodies. AT-675 K L M REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “ ” mm (in) Number of bolts a b c d e f g 13.5 (0.531) 58.0 (2.283) 40.0 (1.575) 66.0 (2.598) 33.0 (1.299) 78.0 (3.071) 18.0 (0.709) 6 3 6 11 2 2 1 f: Reamer bolt and nut. SAT704J 1. Remove bolts a , d and nut f and remove oil strainer from control valve assembly. AAT780 2. Remove solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve from control valve assembly. SAT062F AT-676 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Remove O-rings from solenoid valves and terminal body. A B AT SCIA0804E D 4. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts b , c and nut f . E F G SAT064FA 5. Remove inter body from lower body. H I J SAT432D 6. K Turn over lower body, and remove accumulator support plate. L M SAT109D 7. 8. Remove bolts e , separating plate and separating gasket from lower body. Remove check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs from lower body. ● Be careful not to lose check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs. SAT110DA AT-677 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 9. Remove inter body from upper body. SAT065F 10. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in inter body and then remove them. ● Be careful not to lose steel balls. SAT705J 11. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body and then remove them. ● Be careful not to lose steel balls. SAT771J INSPECTION Lower and Upper Bodies ● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in lower body. SAT550G AT-678 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ● ● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in upper body. Be careful not to lose these parts. A B AT SAT551G D Oil Strainer ● Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage. Shift Solenoid Valves “A” and “B”, Line Pressure Solenoid Valve, Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve and Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve ● ● ● ● ● ● Measure resistance. For shift solenoid valve A, refer to AT-553 . For shift solenoid valve B, refer to AT-558 . For line pressure solenoid valve, refer to AT-547 . For torque converter clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-534 . For overrun clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-568 . E F G H SAT283HB I Oil Cooler Relief Valve Spring ● ● Check springs for damage or deformation. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard J : Refer to AT-749, "CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS" . K L SAT138D ASSEMBLY 1. a. M Install upper, inter and lower body. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their proper positions. SAT771J AT-679 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] b. Install upper separating gasket, upper inter separating gasket and upper separating plate in order shown in illustration. SAT072F c. Install reamer bolts f from bottom of upper body. Using reamer bolts as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set. SAT073FA d. Install pilot filter. SAT074F e. Place lower body as shown in illustration (side of inter body face up). Install steel balls in their proper positions. SAT705J f. Install inter body on upper body using reamer bolts f as guides. ● Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls. SAT076FA AT-680 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] g. Install check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs in their proper positions in lower body. A B AT SAT110DA h. D Install lower separating gasket, lower inter separating gasket and lower separating plate in order shown in illustration. E F G BAT002 i. Install bolts e from bottom of lower body. Using bolts e as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set. H I J SAT078FA j. k. Temporarily install support plates on lower body. Install lower body on inter body using reamer bolts f as guides and tighten reamer bolts f slightly. K L M SAT126DA AT-681 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install O-rings to solenoid valves and terminal body. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. SAT063F 3. Install and tighten bolts. Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “ ” mm (in) Number of bolts a b c d e f g 13.5 (0.531) 58.0 (2.283) 40.0 (1.575) 66.0 (2.598) 33.0 (1.299) 78.0 (3.071) 18.0 (0.709) 6 3 6 11 2 2 1 SAT704J a. Install and tighten bolts b to specified torque. : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) SAT081FA AT-682 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] b. Install solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve to lower body. A B AT SAT062F D c. Set oil strainer, then tighten bolts a , c , d and nuts f to specified torque. : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) E F G SAT083FA d. Tighten bolts e to specified torque. H : 3.4 - 4.4 N·m (0.35 - 0.45 kg-m, 30.4 - 39.1 in-lb) I J SAT084F Control Valve Upper Body K ECS0067H COMPONENTS Apply ATF to all components before installation. L M AT-683 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] SAT772J 1. Upper body 2. Cooler check valve 3. Return spring 4. Plug 5. Retainer plate 6. 1-2 accumulator valve 7. Return spring 8. Plug 9. Retainer plate 10 Torque converter clutch control valve 11 Return spring . . 12 Torque converter clutch control plug . 13 Torque converter clutch control . sleeve 14 Retainer plate . 15 Torque converter relief valve . 16 Return spring . 17 Retainer plate . 18 Return spring . 19 Overrun clutch reducing valve . 20 Plug . 21 Retainer plate . 22 Retainer plate . 23 Return spring . 24 Pilot valve . 25 Retainer plate . 26 Plug . 27 1-2 accumulator piston . 28 Return spring . 29 1-2 accumulator retainer plate . 30 Retainer plate . 31 Plug . 32 1st reducing valve . 33 Return spring . 34 Retainer plate . 35 Return spring . 36 3-2 timing valve . AT-684 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. A Remove valves at retainer plates. ● Do not use a magnetic pick-up tool. B AT SAT551G a. D Use a screwdriver to remove retainer plates. E F G SAT553G b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs or sleeves. ● Remove plugs slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out. H I J K SAT554G c. Place mating surface of valve body face down, and remove internal parts. ● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down and lightly tap it with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves. L M SAT137D AT-685 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] INSPECTION Valve Spring ● Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-749, "CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS" . Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. SAT138D Control Valves ● Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. ASSEMBLY ● Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do not stand the control valve body upright. SAT139D 1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores. ● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body. SAT140DA ● Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into their proper positions. SAT141D AT-686 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 1-2 Accumulator Valve A Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2 accumulator retainer plate from opposite side of control valve body. Install return spring, 1-2 accumulator piston and plug. ● ● B AT SAT142D 1. Install retainer plates. ● While pushing plug or return spring, install retainer plate. D E F G SAT143D H Retainer Plate (Upper Body) Unit: mm (in) No. ● Name of control valve 22 Pilot valve 30 1st reducing valve 34 3-2 timing valve 17 Torque converter relief valve 9 1-2 accumulator valve 25 1-2 accumulator piston valve 21 Overrun clutch reducing valve 5 Cooler check valve 14 Torque converter clutch control valve Width A Length B I 21.5 (0.846) J 38.5 (1.516) K 6.0 (0.236) SAT086F 24.0 (0.945) L 28.0 (1.102) Install proper retainer plates. Refer to AT-683, "Control Valve Upper Body" . Control Valve Lower Body M ECS0067I COMPONENTS Apply ATF to all components before installation. AT-687 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] SAT773J 1. Lower body 2. Retainer plate 3. Return spring 4. Piston 5. Parallel pin 6. Sleeve 7. Return spring 8. Pressure modifier valve 9. Retainer plate 10 Plug . 11 Shift valve B . 12 Return spring . 13 Manual valve . 14 Pressure regulator valve . 15 Return spring . 16 Spring seat . 17 Plug . 18 Sleeve . 19 Retainer plate . 20 Return spring . 21 Overrun clutch control valve . 22 Plug . 23 Retainer plate . 24 Return spring . 25 Accumulator control valve . 26 Plug . 27 Retainer plate . 28 Shift valve A . 29 Return spring . 30 Retainer plate . 31 Shuttle valve . 32 Return spring . 33 Plug . 34 Plug . 35 Retainer plate . AT-688 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY A Remove valves at retainer plate. For removal procedures, refer to AT-685, "DISASSEMBLY" . ● B AT SAT550G INSPECTION Valve Springs D E Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter. ● Inspection standard F : Refer to AT-749, "CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS" . G Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. ● H SAT138D Control Valves I Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage. ● ASSEMBLY Install control valves. For installation procedures, refer to AT-686, "ASSEMBLY" . ● J K L SAT550A Retainer Plate (Lower Body) Unit: mm (in) No. ● Name of control valve and plug 19 Pressure regulator valve 27 Accumulator control valve 30 Shift valve A 23 Overrun clutch control valve 2 Pressure modifier valve 35 Shuttle valve 9 Shift valve B Width A Length B Type 6.0 (0.236) 28.0 (1.102) I — — II Install proper retainer plates. Refer to AT-687, "Control Valve Lower Body" . AT-689 SAT089F M REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Reverse Clutch ECS0067J COMPONENTS SAT430IA DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. Check operation of reverse clutch Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and install reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil hole. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. SAT092F 2. 3. Remove snap ring. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish plates. SAT093F 4. 5. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from reverse clutch drum while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly over springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return springs. SAT094F AT-690 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 6. 7. Remove piston from reverse clutch drum by turning it. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. A B AT SAT096F D INSPECTION Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace. E Reverse Clutch Drive Plates ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. F Thickness of drive plate: Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● G H If not within wear limit, replace. SAT162D I Reverse Clutch Dish Plates ● ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure thickness of dish plate. Thickness of dish plate ● J : 3.08 mm (0.1213 in) K If deformed or fatigued, replace. L SAT163D Reverse Clutch Piston ● ● ● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure that air leaks past ball. ASSEMBLY 1. Install D-ring and oil seal on piston. ● Take care with the direction of oil seal. ● Apply ATF to both parts. SAT097FB AT-691 M REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. SAT096F 3. Install return springs and spring retainer on piston. SAT094F 4. 5. 6. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly over return springs. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plates. ● Take care with order of plates. Install snap ring. SAT093F 7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate : 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in) : 1.2 mm (0.047 in) : Refer to AT-750, "REVERSE CLUTCH" . SAT105F AT-692 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 8. Check operation of reverse clutch. Refer to AT-690, "DISASSEMBLY" . A B AT SAT092F D High Clutch ECS0067K COMPONENTS E F G H I J SAT774J DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. K Check operation of high clutch. Apply compressed air to oil hole of input shaft with nylon cloth. ● Stop up hole on opposite side of input shaft with nylon cloth. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. L M SAT176D 2. Remove seal rings from input shaft. ● Always replace when removed. SAT177D AT-693 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. 4. Remove snap ring. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. SAT095F 5. 6. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from high clutch drum while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly over springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return springs. SAT108F 7. Remove piston from high clutch drum by turning it. SAT111F 8. Remove D-rings from piston. SAT371FA INSPECTION High Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs ● ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace. When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace them as a set. AT-694 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] High Clutch Drive Plates ● ● A Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate: Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● B AT If not within wear limit, replace. SAT162D D High Clutch Piston ● ● ● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure that air leaks past ball. E F G SAT186D H Seal Ring Clearance ● ● Install new seal rings onto input shaft. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● I : 0.08 - 0.23 mm (0.0031 - 0.0091 in) : 0.23 mm (0.0091 in) J If not within allowable limit, replace input shaft assembly. K SAT187D ASSEMBLY 1. Install D-rings on piston. ● Apply ATF to both parts. L M SAT371FA AT-695 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. SAT111F 3. Install return springs and spring retainer on piston. SAT109F 4. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly over return springs. SAT108F ● Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. SAT113F 5. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. ● Take care with the order and direction of plates. SAT095F AT-696 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 6. 7. Install snap ring. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate A B : 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in) : 2.8 mm (0.110 in) : Refer to AT-750, "HIGH CLUTCH" . AT D SAT116F 8. Check operation of high clutch. Refer to AT-693, "DISASSEMBLY" . E F G SAT196D 9. H Install seal rings to input shaft. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. ● Always replace when removed. I J K SAT197D ● Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading. L M SAT198D AT-697 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Forward And Overrun Clutches ECS0067L COMPONENTS SAT962I DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. d. Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch. Install bearing retainer on forward clutch drum. Apply compressed air to oil hole of forward clutch drum. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. SAT123F 2. 3. Remove snap ring for forward clutch. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for forward clutch. SAT203D AT-698 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. 5. Remove snap ring for overrun clutch. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for overrun clutch. A B AT SAT204D D 6. 7. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from forward clutch drum while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly over return springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return springs. ● Do not remove return springs from spring retainer. E F G SAT124FB 8. Remove forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston from forward clutch drum by turning it. H I J SAT125F 9. K Remove overrun clutch piston from forward clutch piston by turning it. L M SAT126F 10. Remove D-rings and oil seals from forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston. SAT127FB AT-699 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] INSPECTION Snap Rings, Spring Retainer and Return Springs ● ● ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. Replace if necessary. When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace them as a set. Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Drive Plates ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate: Forward clutch Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) Overrun clutch Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● SAT162D If not within wear limit, replace. Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Dish Plates ● ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure thickness of dish plate. Thickness of dish plate Forward clutch Overrun clutch ● : 2.7 mm (0.106 in) : 2.7 mm (0.106 in) If deformed or fatigued, replace. SAT163D Forward Clutch Drum ● ● ● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole from outside of forward clutch drum. Make sure air leaks past ball. Apply compressed air to oil hole from inside of forward clutch drum. Make sure there is no air leakage. SAT213D Overrun Clutch Piston ● ● ● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side. Make sure that air leaks past ball. SAT212D AT-700 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ASSEMBLY 1. A Install D-rings and oil seals on forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston. ● Take care with direction of oil seal. ● Apply ATF to both parts. B AT SAT127FB 2. Install overrun clutch piston assembly on forward clutch piston by turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston. D E F G SAT126F 3. H Install forward clutch piston assembly on forward clutch drum by turning it slowly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. I J K SAT125F 4. Install return spring on overrun clutch piston. L M SAT131F AT-701 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ● Align the mark on spring retainer with check ball in overrun clutch piston. SAT133F 5. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs. ● Set Tool directly over return springs. SAT124FB ● Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. SAT134F 6. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for overrun clutch. ● Take care with order of plates. SAT204D 7. Install snap ring for overrun clutch. AT-702 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 8. Measure clearance between overrun clutch retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Overrun clutch retaining plate A B : 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in) : 1.7 mm (0.067 in) Refer to AT-751, "OVERRUN CLUTCH" . AT SAT135F D 9. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for forward clutch. ● Take care with order of plates. 10. Install snap ring for forward clutch. E F G SAT203D 11. Measure clearance between forward clutch retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Forward clutch retaining plate H I : 0.45 - 0.85 mm (0.0177 - 0.0335 in) : 1.85 mm (0.0728 in) : Refer to AT-750, "FORWARD CLUTCH" . J SAT228D 12. Check operation of forward clutch. Refer to AT-698, "DISASSEMBLY" . 13. Check operation of overrun clutch. Refer to AT-698, "DISASSEMBLY" . K L M SAT123F AT-703 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Low & Reverse Brake ECS0067M COMPONENTS WCIA0128E DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. Check operation of low & reverse brake. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transmission case. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. SAT147F 2. In order to remove piston, apply compressed air to oil hole of retainer while holding piston. ● Apply air gradually and allow piston to come out evenly. SAT149F 3. Remove D-rings from piston. SAT150F AT-704 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] INSPECTION Low and Reverse Brake Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs ● ● A Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace. When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace them as a set. B Low and Reverse Brake Drive Plate ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. AT Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 1.8 mm (0.071 in) Wear limit : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) ● D If not within wear limit, replace. E SAT162D F ASSEMBLY 1. Install D-rings on piston. ● Apply ATF to both parts. G H I SAT150F J 2. Set and align piston with retainer. ● This operation is required in order to engage the protrusions of piston to return springs correctly. Further procedures are given in “ASSEMBLY”. Refer to AT-725, "ASSEMBLY" . K L M SAT323F 3. Install driven plates, drive plates, retaining plate and dish plate on transmission case. ● Take care with order of plates and direction of dish plate. SAT923H AT-705 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. Install snap ring. SAT546G 5. Measure clearance between driven plate and transmission case. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. (front side) Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate : 1.7 - 2.1 mm (0.067 - 0.083 in) : 3.3 mm (0.130 in) Refer to AT-751, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" . SAT155F Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub ECS0067N COMPONENTS SAT975H AT-706 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. A Remove overrun clutch hub and thrust washer from forward clutch hub. B AT SAT157F 2. D Remove forward clutch hub from rear internal gear. E F G SAT251D 3. H Remove bearing from rear internal gear. I J K SAT252DA 4. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear. L M SAT253D AT-707 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Remove bearing from forward one-way clutch. SAT254DA 6. Remove forward one-way clutch from forward clutch hub. SAT255D INSPECTION Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub ● Check rubbing surfaces for wear or damage. SAT256D Bearings and Forward One-Way Clutch ● ● Check bearings for deformation and damage. Check forward one-way clutch for wear and damage. SAT158FA AT-708 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ASSEMBLY 1. A Install forward one-way clutch on forward clutch. ● Take care with the direction of forward one-way clutch. B AT SAT976H 2. Install bearing on forward one-way clutch. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing. D E F G SAT159FA H 3. Install thrust washer on rear internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. ● Align hooks of thrust washer with holes of rear internal gear. I J K SAT160F 4. L Install bearing on rear internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing. M SAT161FA AT-709 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Install thrust washer and overrun clutch hub. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. ● Align hooks of thrust washer with holes of overrun clutch hub. ● Align projections of rear internal gear with holes of overrun clutch hub. SAT157F 6. Install forward clutch hub on rear internal gear. ● Check operation of forward one-way clutch. Hold rear internal gear and turn forward clutch hub. Check forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlocking directions. ● If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of forward one-way clutch. AAT426 Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer ECS0067O COMPONENTS SAT291K AT-710 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. A Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer. B AT SAT164F 2. Remove output shaft bearing with screwdrivers. ● Always replace bearing with a new one when removed. ● Do not damage output shaft. D E F G SAT165F 3. H Remove snap ring from bearing retainer. I J K SAT166F 4. Remove needle bearing from bearing retainer. L M SAT167F AT-711 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Remove idler gear bearing inner race from idler gear. SAT168F 6. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transmission case. SAT859DC 7. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing inner race from reduction pinion gear. SAT169F 8. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from transmission case. SAT319K INSPECTION Output Shaft, Idler Gear and Reduction Pinion Gear ● ● Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending. Check gears for wear, chips and cracks. AT-712 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Bearing ● ● A Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner race as a set. B AT SPD715 D Seal Ring Clearance ● ● Install new seal rings to output shaft. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of output shaft. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● ● ● Allowable limit ● F : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) If not within allowable limit, replace output shaft. Install new seal rings to bearing retainer. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bearing retainer. Standard clearance E G SAT171F : 0.10 - 0.30 mm (0.0039 - 0.0118 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) H I If not within allowable limit, replace bearing retainer. J ASSEMBLY 1. Press reduction pinion gear bearing inner race on reduction pinion gear. K L M SAT172FB 2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transmission case. : 109 - 123 N·m (11.1 - 12.5 kg-m, 80 - 90 ft-lb) SAT319K AT-713 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear. SAT174FB 4. Install idler gear bearing outer race on transmission case. SAT175FC 5. Press output shaft bearing on output shaft. SAT863D 6. Press needle bearing on bearing retainer. SAT176F 7. Install snap ring to bearing retainer. SAT166F AT-714 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 8. After packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly, carefully install new seal rings on output shaft and bearing retainer. A B AT SAT164F ● Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading. D E F G SAT179F Band Servo Piston Assembly ECS0067P H COMPONENTS I J K L M AAT293A DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove band servo piston fixing bolts. AAT879 AT-715 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Apply compressed air to oil hole in transmission case to remove O/D servo piston retainer and band servo piston assembly. ● Hold band servo piston assembly with a rag or nylon waste. SAT093J 3. Apply compressed air to oil hole in O/D servo piston retainer to remove O/D servo piston from retainer. ● Hold O/D band servo piston while applying compressed air. AAT880 4. Remove D-ring from O/D servo piston. AAT881 5. Remove O-rings from O/D servo piston retainer. AAT882 6. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer by pushing it forward. SAT293D AT-716 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 7. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring. A B AT SAT294D 8. D Remove O/D servo return spring, band servo thrust washer and band servo piston stem from band servo piston. E F G AAT883 9. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer. H I J SAT296DA K 10. Remove D-rings from band servo piston. L M SAT297D INSPECTION Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem ● Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage. AT-717 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Return Springs ● ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-754, "RETURN SPRING" . AAT884 ASSEMBLY 1. Install D-rings to servo piston retainer. ● Apply ATF to D-rings. ● Pay attention to position of each O-ring. SAT297D 2. Install band servo piston stem, band servo thrust washer, O/D servo return spring and spring retainer to band servo piston. AAT883 3. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring. SAT301D AT-718 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. Install O-rings to servo piston retainer. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. ● Pay attention to position of each O-ring. A B AT SAT296DA D 5. Install band servo piston assembly to servo piston retainer by pushing it inward. E F G SAT303D 6. Install D-ring to O/D servo piston. ● Apply ATF to D-ring. H I J AAT881 7. Install O-rings to O/D servo piston retainer. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. ● Pay attention to position of each O-ring. K L M AAT882 8. Install O/D servo piston to O/D servo piston retainer. AAT886 AT-719 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 9. Install band servo piston assembly and 2nd servo return spring to transmission case. ● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case. SAT865H 10. Install O/D servo piston assembly to transmission case. ● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case. AAT885 11. Install O/D servo piston retainer to transmission case. Refer to AT-718, "ASSEMBLY" . AAT879 Final Drive ECS0067Q COMPONENTS SAT542K AT-720 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. A Remove final gear. B AT SMT505B 2. Press out differential side bearings. ● Be careful not to mix up the right and left bearings. D E F G AAT662 3. H Remove differential side bearing outer race and side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case. I J K SAT010FA 4. Remove speedometer drive gear. L M SAT313D AT-721 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin. SAT904D 6. 7. Draw out pinion mate shaft lock pin. Remove pinion mate gears and side gears. SAT316D INSPECTION Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case ● ● Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears and pinion mate gears. Check washers for wear. SAT544F Bearings ● ● Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner race as a set. SPD715 AT-722 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ASSEMBLY 1. A Attach side gear thrust washers to side gears, then install pinion mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears in place. ● Apply ATF to any parts. B AT SMT839 2. Insert pinion mate shaft. ● When inserting, be careful not to damage pinion mate thrust washers. D E F G SMT087A 3. a. H Measure clearance between side gear and differential case with washers following the procedure below: Set Tool and dial indicator on side gear. I J K AAT782 b. Move side gear up and down to measure dial indicator deflection. Always measure indicator deflection on both side gears. Clearance between side gear and differential case with washer c. L : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) M If not within specification, adjust clearance by changing thickness of differential side gear thrust washers. Differential side gear thrust washers : Refer to AT-752, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS" . AT-723 SMT611A REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. Install lock pin. ● Make sure that lock pin is flush with case. SMT699B 5. Install speedometer drive gear on differential case. ● Align the projection of speedometer drive gear with the groove of differential case. SAT313D 6. Press on differential side bearings. AAT663 7. Install final gear and tighten fixing bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten final gear bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-720, "COMPONENTS" . SAT546F AT-724 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. PFP:00000 A ECS0067R Install differential side oil seals on transmission case and converter housing. B AT D SAT181FB E F G H SAT182F 2. I Install parking actuator support to transmission case. Tighten parking actuator support bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . ● Pay attention to direction of parking actuator support. J K L SAT183F 3. 4. Install parking pawl on transmission case and fix it with parking shaft. Install return spring. M SAT039F AT-725 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] Adjustment (1) ECS0067S DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD 1. 2. Install differential side bearing outer race without adjusting shim on transmission case. Install differential side bearing outer race on converter housing. SAT870D 3. 4. Place final drive assembly on transmission case. Install transmission case on converter housing. Tighten transmission case fixing bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT648, "OVERHAUL" . SAT008F 5. 6. 7. 8. Attach dial indicator on differential case at converter housing side. Insert Tool into differential side gear from transmission case side. Move Tool up and down and measure dial indicator deflection. Select proper thickness of differential side bearing adjusting shim(s). Suitable shim thickness = Dial indicator deflection + Specified bearing preload Differential side bearing preload adjusting shim Bearing preload : Refer to AT-752, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS" . : 0.05 - 0.09 mm (0.0020 - 0.0035 in) AAT665 AT-726 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 9. Remove converter housing from transmission case. 10. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case. 11. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission case. 12. Reinstall differential side bearing outer race and shim(s) selected from SDS table on transmission case. 13. Reinstall converter housing on transmission case and tighten transmission case fixing bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . A B AT SAT010FB D 14. Insert Tool and measure turning torque of final drive assembly. ● Turn final drive assembly in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly. Turning torque of final drive assembly (New bearing) ● ● E : 0.78 - 1.37 N·m (8.0 - 14.0 kg-cm, 6.9 - 12.2 in-lb) F When old bearing is used again, turning torque will be slightly less than the above. Make sure torque is close to the specified range. G SAT188FE Preload adapter : J39713 H REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD 1. 2. a. Remove transmission case and final drive assembly from converter housing. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim using the following procedures. Place reduction pinion gear on transmission case as shown. I J K SAT332DA b. c. L Place idler gear bearing on transmission case. Measure dimensions “B” “C” and “D” and calculate dimension “A”. A = D − (B + C) “A” : Distance between the surface of idler gear bearing inner race and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pinion gear. AT-727 M SAT333DA ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] ● ● Measure dimension “B” between the end of reduction pinion gear and the surface of transmission case. Measure dimension “B” in at least two places. SAT334DA ● ● Measure dimension “C” between the surface of idler gear bearing inner race and the surface of transmission case. Measure dimension “C” in at least two places. SAT335D ● ● ● Measure dimension “D” between the end of reduction pinion gear and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pinion gear. Measure dimension “D” in at least two places. Calculate dimension “A”. A = D − (B + C) SAT336DA d. e. Measure dimension “E” between the end of idler gear and the idler gear bearing inner race mating surface of idler gear. ● Measure dimension “E” in at least two places. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim. Proper shim thickness = A − E − 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)* (*: Bearing preload) Reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim : Refer to AT-753, "REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS" . AT-728 SAT337D ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 3. 4. 5. Install reduction gear and reduction gear bearing adjusting shim selected in step 2-e on transmission case. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear. Press idler gear on reduction gear. ● Press idler gear until idler gear fully contacts adjusting shim. A B AT SAT873DD D 6. Tighten idler gear lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to AT648, "OVERHAUL" . ● Lock idler gear with parking pawl when tightening lock nut. E F G SAT189F 7. H Measure turning torque of reduction pinion gear. ● When measuring turning torque, turn reduction pinion gear in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly. Turning torque of reduction pinion gear ● I : 0.05 - 0.39 N·m (0.5 - 4.0 kg-cm, 0.43 - 3.47 in-lb) J If turning torque is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim. K SAT190FA 8. After properly adjusting turning torque, clinch idler gear lock nut as shown. L M SAT699D AT-729 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY ● ● Measure clearance between side cover and the end of the output shaft bearing. Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that clearance is within specifications. SAT341D 1. Install bearing retainer for output shaft. SAT191F 2. Install output shaft thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer. SAT438D 3. Install output shaft on transmission case. SAT035F AT-730 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 4. Measure dimensions “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” at side cover and then calculate dimension “A”. ● Measure dimension “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” in at least two places. “A” A= A : Distance between transmission case fitting surface and adjusting shim mating surface. 1 − B AT 2 : Height of gauge 2 SAT374F D 5. Measure dimensions “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” and then calculate dimension “B”. ● Measure “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” in at least two places. “B” B= : Distance between the end of output shaft bearing outer race and the side cover fitting surface of transmission case. 2 − G : Height of gauge SAT375F Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that output shaft end play (clearance between side cover and output shaft bearing) is within specifications. Output shaft end play (A − B) Output shaft end play adjusting shims 7. F 3 2 6. E H : 0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in) I : Refer to AT-755, "OUTPUT SHAFT ADJUSTING SHIMS" . J Install adjusting shim on output shaft bearing. SAT440D Assembly (2) 1. K ECS0067T Apply anaerobic liquid gasket to transmission case as shown in illustration. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" L M SAT441D AT-731 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 2. Set side cover on transmission case. ● Apply locking sealant to the mating surface of transmission case. SAT442D 3. Tighten side cover fixing bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT648, "OVERHAUL" . ● Do not mix bolts A and B. ● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts. AAT850 4. 5. Remove paper rolled around bearing retainer. Install thrust washer on bearing retainer. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SAT033F AT-732 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 6. Install forward clutch assembly. ● Align teeth of low & reverse brake drive plates before installing. ● Make sure that bearing retainer seal rings are not spread. ● If forward clutch assembly is correctly seated, points 1 and 2 are at almost same level. A B AT D E F G SAT194F 7. Install thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing. H I J SAT195F 8. Install overrun clutch hub. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washers. ● Align teeth of overrun clutch drive plates before installing. K L M SAT030F AT-733 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 9. Hold forward clutch hub and turn rear internal gear. Check overrun clutch hub for correct directions of lock and unlock. ● If not shown as illustrated, check installed direction of forward one-way clutch. SAT198F 10. Install forward clutch hub and rear internal gear assembly. ● Align teeth of forward clutch drive plates before installing. ● Check that three hooks of thrust washer are correctly aligned after installing. SAT199F 11. Install rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear according to the following procedures. a. Install needle bearings on rear planetary carrier. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearings. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearings. SAT028F b. Install rear sun gear on rear planetary carrier. ● Pay attention to direction of rear sun gear. SAT027F AT-734 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. Install rear planetary carrier on transmission case. A B AT SAT026F 12. Install thrust needle bearing on front planetary carrier, then install them together on transmission case. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing. D E F G SAT380F H 13. Install low and reverse brake piston according to the following procedures. a. Set and align return springs to transmission case gutters as shown in illustration. I J K SAT322F b. Set and align piston with retainer. L M SAT323F AT-735 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. Install piston and retainer assembly on the transmission case. ● Align bracket to specified gutter as indicated in illustration. SAT324F d. Check that each protrusion of piston is correctly set to corresponding return spring as follows. ● Push piston and retainer assembly evenly and confirm they move smoothly. ● If they can not move smoothly, remove piston and retainer assembly and align return spring correctly as instructed in step “a”. SAT325F e. Push down piston and retainer assembly and install snap ring. SAT326FB 14. Install low one-way clutch to front planetary carrier by turning carrier in the direction of the arrow shown. SAT206F AT-736 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 15. Install snap ring with screwdriver. ● Forward clutch and bearing must be correctly installed for snap ring to fit into groove of transmission case. A B AT SAT046D 16. Install needle bearing on transmission case. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. D E F G SAT020F H 17. Install bearing race, needle bearing and high clutch hub on front sun gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. I J K SAT019F L 18. Install needle bearing and high clutch drum on high clutch hub. M SAT018F AT-737 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 19. Install needle bearing on high clutch drum. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. SAT017F 20. Remove paper rolled around input shaft. 21. Install input shaft assembly in reverse clutch. ● Align teeth of reverse clutch drive plates before installing. SAT016F 22. Install reverse clutch assembly on transmission case. ● Align teeth of high clutch drive plates before installing. SAT015F Adjustment (2) ECS0067U When any parts listed below are replaced, adjust total end play and reverse clutch end play. Total end play Reverse clutch end play Transmission case ● ● Overrun clutch hub ● ● Rear internal gear ● ● Rear planetary carrier ● ● Rear sun gear ● ● Front planetary carrier ● ● Front sun gear ● ● High clutch hub ● ● High clutch drum ● ● Oil pump cover ● ● Reverse clutch drum — ● Part name AT-738 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] TOTAL END PLAY 1. A Adjust total end play “T1 ”. B AT SAT213F a. With original bearing race installed, place Tool onto oil pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder should rest on top of bearing race. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set screw. D E F G SAT214FB b. H Install gauging plunger into cylinder. I J K SAT215FA c. d. With needle bearing installed on high clutch drum, place Tool legs on machined surface of transmission case (with gasket). Then allow plunger to rest on needle bearing. Measure gap between cylinder and plunger. This measurement should give exact total end play. Total end play “T1 ” ● L M : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of bearing race as necessary. Available bearing race for adjusting total end play : Refer to AT-755, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" . AT-739 SAT216F ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 2. Adjust reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ”. SAT218F a. Place Tool on machined surface of transmission case (with gasket). Then allow gauging cylinder to rest on reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw. SAT219FA b. Install gauging plunger into cylinder. SAT314F SAT221F c. d. With original thrust washer installed on oil pump, place Tool legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Then allow plunger to rest on thrust washer. Measure gap between cylinder and plunger with feeler gauge. This measurement should give exact reverse clutch drum end play. Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” ● : 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in) If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of thrust washer as necessary. AT-740 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] Available thrust washer for adjusting reverse clutch drum end play : Refer to AT-755, "THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM END PLAY" . Assembly (3) 1. 2. A B ECS0067V AT Install anchor end pin and lock nut on transmission case. Place brake band on outside of reverse clutch drum. Tighten anchor end pin just enough so that brake band is evenly fitted on reverse clutch drum. D E SAT196F 3. 4. Place bearing race selected in total end play adjustment step on oil pump cover. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. Place thrust washer selected in reverse clutch end play step on reverse clutch drum. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. F G H I SAT013F 5. 6. Install oil pump assembly, baffle plate and gasket on transmission case. Tighten oil pump fixing bolts to the specified torque. J K L M SAT012F 7. Install O-ring to input shaft. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. SAT225F AT-741 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 8. a. Adjust brake band. Tighten anchor end pin to the specified torque. Anchor end pin b. c. : Refer to AT-752, "BRAKE BAND" . Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut. Lock nut : Refer to AT-752, "BRAKE BAND" . SAT014FA 9. Apply compressed air to oil holes of transmission case and check operation of brake band. SAT397D 10. Install final drive assembly on transmission case. SAT228F 11. Install differential lubricant tube on converter housing. Tighten differential lubricant tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . SAT063K AT-742 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 12. Install O-ring on differential oil port of transmission case. A B AT SAT235F D 13. Install converter housing on transmission case. ● Apply locking sealant to mating surface of converter housing. E F G SAT371H ● H Tighten converter housing bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . I J K SAT008F 14. Install accumulator piston. a. Check contact surface of accumulator piston for damage. L M SAT406DA AT-743 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] b. Install O-rings on accumulator piston. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. Accumulator piston O-rings : Refer to AT-749, "O-RING" . SAT236FA c. Install accumulator pistons and return springs on transmission case. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case. Return springs : Refer to AT-750, "RETURN SPRING" . SAT237FA 15. Install lip seals for band servo oil holes on transmission case. ● Apply petroleum jelly to lip seals. SAT006F 16. Install L & R oil tube and oil sleeve. Tighten L & R oil tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . SAT862HA AT-744 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 17. Install control valve assembly. a. Insert manual valve into control valve assembly. ● Apply ATF to manual valve. A B AT SAT005F D b. c. d. e. Set manual shaft in Neutral position. Install control valve assembly on transmission case while aligning manual valve with manual plate. Pass terminal cord assembly connector through transmission case and install terminal body on transmission case by pushing it. Install snap ring to terminal cord assembly connector. E F G SAT094J f. Tighten bolts I , X and ● . H I J K L M SAT004F AT-745 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] Bolt length, number and location: Bolt Bolt length “ ” Number of bolts 18. a. b. c. d. mm (in) I X ● 40 (1.57) 33 (1.30) 43.5 (1.713) 5 6 2 Install oil pan. Attach a magnet to oil pan. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case. Install oil pan on transmission case. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. ● Tighten four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket. Tighten oil pan bolts and drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . SAT003F 19. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch. a. Set manual shaft in P position. b. Temporarily install park/neutral position (PNP) switch on manual shaft. c. Move selector lever to N position. SAT033J d. i. ii. e. f. Use a 4 mm (0.16 in) pin for this adjustment. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole. Rotate park/neutral position (PNP) switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into hole in park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch fixing bolts. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting park/neutral position (PNP) switch. AAT469A 20. Install A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube to transmission case. Tighten A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-648, "OVERHAUL" . SAT768J AT-746 ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 21. Install torque converter. a. Pour ATF into torque converter. ● Approximately 1 liter (1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 Imp qt) of fluid is required for a new torque converter. ● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained. A B AT SAT428DA D b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque converter with notches of oil pump. E F G SAT429D c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper position. Distance A H : 14 mm (0.55 in) or more I J SAT430D K L M AT-747 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS0067W Engine QR25DE Automatic transaxle model RE4F04B Automatic transaxle assembly Transaxle gear ratio Model code number 85X63 1st 2.785 2nd 1.545 3rd 1.000 4th 0.694 Reverse 2.272 Final drive 4.087 Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid* Recommended fluid Fluid capacity 8.5 (9, 7.5) (US qt, Imp qt) *: Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Shift Schedule ECS0067X VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION Throttle position Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Shift pattern D1 → D2 D2 → D 3 D3 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 Comfort 52 - 60 (32 - 37) 97 - 105 (60 - 66) 153 - 161 (95 - 100) 149 - 157 (93 - 98) 87 - 95 (41 - 54) 41 - 49 (25 - 30) Auto power 52 - 60 (32 - 37) 97 - 105 (60 - 66) 153 - 161 (95 - 100) 149 - 157 (93 - 98) 87 - 95 (41 - 54) 41 - 49 (25 - 30) Comfort 37 - 45 (23 - 28) 67 - 75 (42 - 47) 119 - 127 (74 - 79) 90 - 98 (56 - 61) 39 - 47 (24 - 27) 24 - 32 (15 - 20) Auto power 39 - 47 (24 - 29) 73 - 81 (45 - 50) 119 - 127 (74 - 79) 90 - 98 (56 - 61) 46 - 54 (26 - 34) 24 - 32 (15 - 20) Full throttle Half throttle VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP Unit: km/h (MPH) Selector lever position Shift pattern D4 (O/D ON) position D3 (O/D OFF) position Comfort Auto power Comfort Auto power Lock-up "ON" 62 - 70 (38 - 43) 62 - 70 (38 - 43) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) Lock-up "OFF" 51 - 59 (31 - 36) 51 - 59 (31 - 36) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) NOTE: ● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D4 (O/D ON) position. ● Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine. ● Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. Stall Revolution ECS0067Y Engine Stall revolution rpm QR25DE 2,350 - 2,800 AT-748 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Line Pressure ECS0067Z A Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Engine speed rpm D, 2 and 1 positions R position Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113) Stall 1,223 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278) Control Valves B ECS00680 AT CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS Unit: mm (in) Item Parts Upper body Lower body D Part No.* Free length Outer diameter 23 Pilot valve spring 31742-80L13 38.98 (1.535) 8.9 (0.350) 7 1-2 accumulator valve spring 31742-80L15 20.5 (0.807) 6.95 (0.274) 28 1-2 accumulator piston spring 31742-80L14 55.26 (2.176) 19.6 (0.772) 33 1st reducing valve spring 31742-80L08 27.0 (1.063) 7.0 (0.276) 35 3-2 timing valve spring 31736-01X00 23.0 (0.906) 6.65 (0.262) 18 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-80L09 37.5 (1.476) 6.9 (0.272) 16 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-80L10 31.0 (1.220) 9.0 (0.354) 11 Torque converter clutch control valve 31742-80L16 56.98 (2.243) 6.5 (0.256) 3 Cooler check valve spring 31742-85X01 29.4 (1.157) 6.0 (0.236) 15 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-80L01 45.0 (1.772) 15.0 (0.591) 20 Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-80L00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 24 Accumulator control valve spring 31742-80L02 22.0 (0.866) 6.5 (0.256) 29 Shift valve A spring 31762-80L00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 32 Shuttle valve spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.008) 5.65 (0.222) 12 Shift valve B spring 31762-80L00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 31742-80L13 30.5 (1.201) 9.8 (0.386) 31742-80L04 32.0 (1.260) 6.9 (0.272) 31742-80L12 17.02 (0.670) 8.0 (0.315) 7 Pressure modifier valve spring 3 — Oil cooler relief valve spring E F G H I J K *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. L Accumulator ECS00681 O-RING Unit: mm (in) Part No.* Inner diameter (Small) Part No.* Inner diameter (Large) Servo release accumulator 31526-41X03 26.9 (1.059) 31526-41X02 44.2 (1.740) N-D accumulator 31526-31X08 34.6 (1.362) 31672-21X00 39.4 (1.551) Accumulator *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. AT-749 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] RETURN SPRING Unit: mm (in) Accumulator Part number* Free length Outer diameter Servo release accumulator 31605-85X00 62.8 (2.473) 21 (0.827) N-D accumulator 31605-80L03 43.5 (1.713) 28.0 (1.102) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Clutch and Brakes ECS00682 REVERSE CLUTCH Model code number 85X63 Number of drive plates 2 Number of driven plates 2 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard 1.8 (0.070) Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031) Allowable limit 1.2 (0.047) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 6.6 (0.260) 6.8 (0.268) 7.0 (0.276) 7.2 (0.283) 7.4 (0.291) 7.6 (0.299) 7.8 (0.307) Thickness of retaining plates 31537-80L00 31537-80L01 31537-80L02 31537-80L03 31537-80L04 31537-80L05 31537-80L06 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. HIGH CLUTCH Model code number 85X63 Number of drive plates 3 Number of driven plates 7*2 + 1*3 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard *2 *3 1.4 (0.055) 2.0 (0.079) Standard Clearance mm (in) 1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087) Allowable limit 2.8 (0.110) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) Thickness of retaining plates 31537-80L20 31537-80L21 31537-80L22 31537-80L23 31537-80L24 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. FORWARD CLUTCH Model code number 85X63 Number of drive plates 5 Number of driven plates 5 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) AT-750 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.8 (0.071) Standard 0.45 - 0.85 (0.0177 - 0.0335) Allowable limit A 1.85 (0.0728) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) Thickness of retaining plates 31537-80L18 31537-80L17 31537-80L12 31537-80L13 31537-80L14 31537-80L15 31537-80L16 B AT D *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. OVERRUN CLUTCH Model code number E 85X63 Number of drive plates 3 Number of driven plates 5 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) F Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard 1.8 (0.071) Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) Allowable limit G 1.7 (0.067) Thickness of retaining plates H Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.0 (0.118) 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 31537-80L07 31537-80L08 31537-80L09 31537-80L10 31537-80L11 I J *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Model code number Number of drive plates 6 Number of driven plates 6 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance K 85X63 mm (in) L Standard 1.8 (0.071) Allowable limit 1.6 (0.063) Standard 1.8 (0.071) Standard 1.7 - 2.1 (0.067 - 0.083) Allowable limit M 3.3 (0.130) Thickness mm (in) 2.0 (0.079) 2.2 (0.087) 2.4 (0.094) 2.6 (0.102) 2.8 (0.110) 3.0 (0.118) 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) Thickness of retaining plates *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. AT-751 Part number* 31667-80L00 31667-80L01 31667-80L02 31667-80L03 31667-80L04 31667-80L05 31667-80L06 31667-80L07 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] CLUTCH AND BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS Unit: mm (in) Parts Part number* Free length Outer diameter Forward clutch (Overrun clutch) (22 pcs) 31505-80L00 21.4 (0.843) 10.3 (0.406) High clutch (10 pcs) 31505-80L02 22.5 (0.886) 10.8 (0.425) Low & reverse brake (24 pcs) 31505-80L01 24.1 (0.949) 6.6 (0.260) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. BRAKE BAND Anchor end pin tightening torque N-m (kg-m, in-lb) 4.0 - 5.8 (0.4 - 0.6, 36 - 52) Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin Lock nut tightening torque 2.5 N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) 31 - 36 (3.2 - 3.7, 23 - 27) Final Drive ECS00683 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE Clearance between side gear and differential case with washer mm (in) 0.1 - 0.2 (0.004 - 0.008) DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.75 (0.0295) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.85 (0.0335) 0.90 (0.0354) 0.95 (0.0374) 38424-81X00 38424-81X01 38424-81X02 38424-81X03 38424-81X04 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 31438-80X00 31438-80X01 31438-80X02 31438-80X03 31438-80X04 31438-80X05 31438-80X06 31438-80X07 31438-80X08 31438-80X09 31438-80X10 31438-80X11 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. BEARING PRELOAD Differential side bearing preload mm (in) 0.05 - 0.09 (0.0020 - 0.0035) TURNING TORQUE Turning torque of final drive assembly N-m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.78 - 1.37 (8.0 - 14.0, 6.9 - 12.2) Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump ECS00684 PLANETARY CARRIER Clearance between planetary carrier and pinion washer mm (in) Standard 0.20 - 0.70 (0.0079 - 0.0276) Allowable limit 0.80 (0.0315) AT-752 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] OIL PUMP Oil pump side clearance mm (in) A 0.030 - 0.050 (0.0012 - 0.0020) Inner gear Thickness mm (in) Part number* 11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724) 11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720) 11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717) Thickness of inner gears and outer gears B 31346-80L00 31346-80L01 31346-80L02 AT Outer gear Thickness mm (in) Part number* 11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724) 11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720) 11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717) Clearance between oil pump housing and outer gear mm (in) Standard Oil pump cover seal ring clearance mm (in) Standard D 31347-80L00 31347-80L01 31347-80L02 0.111 - 0.181 (0.0044 - 0.0071) Allowable limit E 0.181 (0.0071) 0.1 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit F 0.25 (0.0098) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Input Shaft ECS00685 G SEAL RING CLEARANCE Input shaft seal ring clearance (in) Standard mm 0.08 - 0.23 (0.0031 - 0.0091) Allowable limit H 0.23 (0.0091) SEAL RING Outer diameter mm (in) Inner diameter mm (in) Width mm (in) Part number* 26 (1.024) 22.4 (0.882) 1.971 (0.078) 31525-80X02 I *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. J Reduction Pinion Gear ECS00686 TURNING TORQUE Turning torque of reduction pinion gear N-m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.05 - 0.39 (0.5 - 4.0, 0.43 - 3.47) K REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number* 1 5.00 (0.1969) 31439-81X00 18 5.34 (0.2102) 31439-81X17 2 5.02 (0.1976) 31439-81X01 19 5.36 (0.2110) 31439-81X18 3 5.04 (0.1984) 31439-81X02 20 5.38 (0.2118) 31439-81X19 4 5.06 (0.1992) 31439-81X03 21 5.40 (0.2126) 31439-81X20 5 5.08 (0.2000) 31439-81X04 22 5.42 (0.2134) 31439-81X21 6 5.10 (0.2008) 31439-81X05 23 5.44 (0.2142) 31439-81X22 7 5.12 (0.2016) 31439-81X06 24 5.46 (0.2150) 31439-81X23 8 5.14 (0.2024) 31439-81X07 25 5.48 (0.2157) 31439-81X24 9 5.16 (0.2031) 31439-81X08 26 5.50 (0.2165) 31439-81X46 10 5.18 (0.2039) 31439-81X09 27 5.52 (0.2173) 31439-81X47 11 5.20 (0.2047) 31439-81X10 28 5.54 (0.2181) 31439-81X48 12 5.22 (0.2055) 31439-81X11 29 5.56 (0.2189) 31439-81X49 13 5.24 (0.2063) 31439-81X12 30 5.58 (0.2197) 31439-81X60 14 5.26 (0.2071) 31439-81X13 31 5.60 (0.2205) 31439-81X61 15 5.28 (0.2079) 31439-81X14 32 5.62 (0.2213) 31439-81X62 AT-753 L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number* 16 5.30 (0.2087) 31439-81X15 33 5.64 (0.2220) 31439-81X63 17 5.32 (0.2094) 31439-81X16 34 5.66 (0.2228) 31439-81X64 35 5.68 (0.2236) 31439-81X65 50 4.70 (0.1850) 31439-83X10 36 5.70 (0.2244) 31439-81X66 51 4.72 (0.1858) 31439-83X11 37 5.72 (0.2252) 31439-81X67 52 4.74 (0.1866) 31439-83X12 38 5.74 (0.2260) 31439-81X68 53 4.76 (0.1874) 31439-83X13 39 5.76 (0.2268) 31439-81X69 54 4.78 (0.1882) 31439-83X14 40 5.78 (0.2276) 31439-81X70 55 4.80 (0.1890) 31439-83X15 41 5.80 (0.2283) 31439-81X71 56 4.82 (0.1898) 31439-83X16 42 5.82 (0.2291) 31439-81X72 57 4.84 (0.1906) 31439-83X17 43 5.84 (0.2299) 31439-81X73 58 4.86 (0.1913) 31439-83X18 44 5.86 (0.2307) 31439-81X74 59 4.88 (0.1921) 31439-83X19 45 4.60 (0.1811) 31439-85X05 60 4.90 (0.1929) 31439-83X20 46 4.62 (0.1819) 31439-85X06 61 4.92 (0.1937) 31439-83X21 47 4.64 (0.1827) 31439-85X07 62 4.94 (0.1945) 31439-83X22 48 4.66 (0.1835) 31439-85X08 63 4.96 (0.1953) 31439-83X23 49 4.68 (0.1843) 31439-85X09 64 4.98 (0.1961) 31439-83X24 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Band Servo ECS00687 RETURN SPRING Unit: mm (in) Return spring Part number* Free length Outer diameter 2nd servo return spring 31605-80L05 32.5 (1.280) 25.9 (1.020) OD servo return spring 31605-80L06 62.6 (2.465) 21.7 (0.854) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Output Shaft ECS00688 SEAL RING CLEARANCE Output shaft seal ring clearance (in) mm Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) SEAL RING Outer diameter mm (in) Inner diameter mm (in) Width mm (in) Part number* 33.71 (1.327) 30.25 (1.191) 1.95 (0.077) 31525-80809 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. END PLAY Output shaft end play mm (in) 0 - 0.15 (0 - 0.0059) AT-754 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] OUTPUT SHAFT ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) A Part number* 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) 1.12 (0.0441) 1.16 (0.0457) 1.20 (0.0472) 31438-80X60 31438-80X61 31438-80X62 31438-80X63 31438-80X64 31438-80X65 31438-80X66 31438-80X67 31438-80X68 31438-80X69 31438-80X70 B AT D *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Bearing Retainer ECS00689 E SEAL RING CLEARANCE Standard Bearing retainer seal ring clearance mm (in) 0.10 - 0.30 (0.0039 - 0.0118) Allowable limit Total End Play Total end play F 0.30 (0.0118) ECS0068A mm (in) G 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217) BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY Thickness mm (in) H Part number* 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.4 (0.055) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 2.0 (0.079) 0.9 (0.035) 1.1 (0.043) 1.3 (0.051) 1.5 (0.059) 1.7 (0.067) 1.9 (0.075) 31435-80X00 31435-80X01 31435-80X02 31435-80X03 31435-80X04 31435-80X05 31435-80X06 31435-80X09 31435-80X10 31435-80X11 31435-80X12 31435-80X13 31435-80X14 I J K L *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Reverse Clutch End Play Reverse clutch end play ECS0068B mm (in) M 0.55 - 0.90 (0.0217 - 0.0354) THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM END PLAY Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.80 (0.0315) 0.95 (0.0374) 1.10 (0.0433) 1.25 (0.0492) 1.40 (0.0551) 1.55 (0.0610) 1.70 (0.0669) 1.85 (0.0728) 31508-80X13 31508-80X14 31508-80X15 31508-80X16 31508-80X17 31508-80X18 31508-80X19 31508-80X20 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Removal and Installation ECS0068C Unit: mm (in) Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter AT-755 14 (0.55) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Shift Solenoid Valves ECS0068D Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) Solenoid Valves ECS0068E Solenoid valves Resistance (Approx.) Ω Terminal No. Shift solenoid valve A 20 - 30 2 Shift solenoid valve B 5 - 20 1 Overrun clutch solenoid valve 20 - 30 3 Line pressure solenoid valve 2.5 - 5 4 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 5 - 20 5 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ECS0068F Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Specification (Approximately) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ Revolution Sensor ECS0068G Condition Judgement standard When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. 450 Hz (Approx.) When vehicle is parked. 0V Dropping Resistor ECS0068H Resistance Approx. 12Ω Turbine Revolution Sensor ECS0068I Condition Judgement standard When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. When vehicle is parked. 240 Hz (Approx.) Under 1.3V or over 4.5V AT-756 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION AUDIO, VISUAL & TELEPHONE SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS AUDIO ......................................................................... 2 System Description .................................................. 2 BASE SYSTEM ..................................................... 2 MID LEVEL SYSTEM ............................................ 2 PREMIUM SYSTEM ............................................. 2 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — /Base and Mid Level System ..................................................................... 4 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — /Premium System ..... 6 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................... 9 AUDIO UNIT ......................................................... 9 BASE AND MID LEVEL SYSTEM ........................ 9 PREMIUM SYSTEM ............................................ 10 Inspection ............................................................... 10 AUDIO UNIT ........................................................ 10 ANTENNA ........................................................... 10 Audio Unit/CD Changer (If Equipped) Removal and Installation .............................................................. 11 LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM ... 11 Subwoofer (With Premium Audio System) Removal and Installation ....................................................... 11 Location of Antenna ................................................ 13 Antenna Removal and Installation .......................... 13 E F G H I J AV L M AV-1 AUDIO AUDIO System Description PFP:28111 EKS003AI BASE SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 15A fuse (No. 32, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to audio unit terminal 6. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Audio signals are supplied: ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH. MID LEVEL SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 15A fuse (No. 32, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to audio unit terminal 6. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is supplied to subwoofer amp. terminal 7 through body grounds B13 and B19. Audio signals are supplied: ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of pillar tweeter LH and RH and ● to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of subwoofer amp. PREMIUM SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 15A fuse (No. 32, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to audio unit terminal 6 ● through 20A fuse (No. 42, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to audio amplifier terminals 1 and 2. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is supplied ● to audio amplifier terminals 3 and 4 ● through body grounds B13 and B19. Audio signals are supplied: ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, and 12 ● to audio amplifier terminals 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 and 24 ● through audio unit terminals 13, 14, 15 and 16 AV-2 AUDIO to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH. The audio signals are amplified by the audio amplifier and then supplied: ● through audio amplifier terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12. ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of pillar tweeter LH and RH and ● to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of subwoofer. ● Satellite Radio Tuner (Pre-wiring) A B C The satellite radio tuner pre-wiring allows connection of a satellite radio tuner. Power is supplied at all times ● through 15A fuse [No. 32, located in the fuse and fusible link box] ● to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 32. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 36. Ground is supplied through the case of the satellite radio tuner. Then audio signals are supplied ● through satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminals 21, 22, 23 and 24 ● to audio unit terminals 41, 42, 43 and 44. D E F G H I J AV L M AV-3 AUDIO Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — /Base and Mid Level System EKS003AJ WKWA1461E AV-4 AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1142E AV-5 AUDIO Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — /Premium System EKS003AK WKWA1462E AV-6 AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA0520E AV-7 AUDIO WKWA1144E AV-8 AUDIO Trouble Diagnoses EKS003AL A AUDIO UNIT Symptom Audio unit inoperative (no digital display and no sound from speakers). Audio unit presets are lost when ignition switch is turned OFF. Possible causes Repair order 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Turn ignition switch ON and verify that battery positive voltage is present at terminal 10 of audio unit. 2. Poor audio unit case ground 3. Audio unit B 2. Check audio unit case ground. 1. 15A fuse 2. Audio unit 3. Remove audio unit for repair. C 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 32, located in fuse and fusible link box] and verify that battery positive voltage is present at terminal 6 of audio unit. D 2. Remove audio unit for repair. AM/FM stations are weak or noisy. Audio unit generates noise in AM and FM modes with engine running. Audio unit generates noise in AM and FM modes with accessories on (switch pops and motor noise). 1. Antenna 1. Check antenna. 2. Poor audio unit case ground 2. Check audio unit case ground. 3. Audio unit 3. Remove audio unit for repair. 1. Poor audio unit case ground 1. Check audio unit case ground. 2. Loose or missing ground bonding straps 2. Check ground bonding straps. 3. Ignition condenser or rear window defogger noise suppressor condenser 3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger noise suppressor condenser. 4. Ignition coil(s) 4. Check ignition coil(s). 5. Audio unit 5. Remove audio unit for repair. 1. Poor audio unit case ground 1. Check audio unit case ground. 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna. 3. Accessory ground 3. Check accessory ground. 4. Faulty accessory 4. Replace accessory. E F G H I BASE AND MID LEVEL SYSTEM Symptom Individual speaker is noisy or inoperative. Possible causes Repair order 1. Speaker 1. Check speaker. 2. Audio unit output 2. Check audio unit output voltages. 3. Speaker circuit 3. Check circuits for open or short between the audio unit and the speaker. 4. Audio unit J AV 4. Remove audio unit for repair. Audio unit controls are operational, but no sound is heard from any speaker. 1. Speaker 1. Check speaker. 2. Speaker circuit 2. Check circuits for open or short between the audio unit and the speaker. 3. Audio unit L 3. Remove audio unit for repair. M AV-9 AUDIO PREMIUM SYSTEM Symptom Audio unit controls are operational, but no sound is heard from any speaker. Possible causes Repair order 1. 20A fuse 1. Check 20A fuse (No. 42, located in fuse and fusible link box). Verify that battery positive voltage is present at audio amplifier terminals 1 and 2. 2. Amp. ON/OFF signal circuit 3. Audio amplifier ground 2. Check harness continuity between audio unit terminal 12 and audio amplifier terminal 24. 4. Audio unit 5. Audio amplifier 3. Check harness continuity between audio amplifier terminals 3 and 4 and ground. 4. Remove audio unit for repair. 5. Remove audio amplifier for repair. Individual speaker is noisy or inoperative. 1. Speaker 1. Check speaker. 2. Output circuit to individual speaker 2. Check the output circuits to individual speaker 3. Audio unit – between audio unit and audio amplifier. – between audio amplifier and speaker. 4. Audio amplifier 3. Remove audio unit for repair. 4. Remove audio amplifier for repair. Subwoofer does not operate. 1. Output circuit to subwoofer 2. Subwoofer 1. Check circuits for open or short between the audio amplifier and the subwoofer. 3. Audio amplifier 2. Check subwoofer. 3. Remove audio amplifier for repair. Inspection EKS003AM AUDIO UNIT All voltage inspections are made with: ● Ignition switch ON or ACC ● Audio unit ON ● Audio unit connected (If audio unit is removed for inspection, supply a ground to the case using a jumper wire.) ANTENNA Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body. ● If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface). ● If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit. AV-10 AUDIO Audio Unit/CD Changer (If Equipped) Removal and Installation EKS003AN CAUTION: Prior to removing a malfunctioning CD changer unit that will be shipped for repair, the changer mechanism MUST BE LOCKED to prevent the mechanism from being damaged during shipping. Refer to AV-11, "LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM" . 1. Remove upper cluster lid C by firmly grasping and carefully pulling rearward from instrument panel. 2. Remove lower cluster lid C by firmly grasping and carefully pulling rearward from instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove six screws and remove audio unit and storage bin or CD changer (if equipped) as an assembly. A B C D E F LEL662 4. 5. 6. 7. G Disconnect audio unit connectors and CD changer connectors (if equipped). CAUTION: Be sure to disconnect the harness connectors before disconnecting the antenna connector or damage may result to audio unit. H Release two tabs using a screwdriver and carefully remove heater A/C control bezel from audio unit face plate. CAUTION: I Do not pry or forcibly remove heater A/C control bezel from audio unit face plate or audio unit damage could result. Remove brackets from audio unit and CD changer (if equipped). J Install in reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Be sure to connect the antenna connector before connectAV ing the harness connectors or damage may result to audio LEL663 unit. LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM L CAUTION: ● Prior to removing a malfunctioning CD changer unit that will be shipped for repair, the changer mechanism MUST BE LOCKED to prevent the mechanism from being damaged during shipping. ● If a CD is jammed or unable to be removed from the unit, do NOT lock the changer mechanism. If the unit is to be shipped for repair, carefully package the unit to prevent vibration and shock. 1. Eject and remove any CDs from the CD changer unit. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait until CD changer unit display is off and mechanism stops moving (mechanism sound stops). 3. Press any one of the disc selection buttons once. When a display shows on the CD changer unit, press the same disc selection button again within 5 seconds. ● The changer mechanism will lock itself within 10 seconds. 4. After mechanism stops moving (mechanism sound stops), disconnect the CD changer unit connectors. 5. Remove the CD changer unit. NOTE: After installing a new or remanufactured CD changer unit, switching the CD changer unit ON will automatically unlock the mechanism. A special unlocking procedure is not required. Subwoofer (With Premium Audio System) Removal and Installation 1. Partially remove RH trunk room trim. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" . AV-11 EKS003KW M AUDIO 2. 3. Pull cable to release RH rear seat back. Remove rear seat bottom. Refer to SE-5, "Removal and Installation" . LKIA0138E 4. Fold RH rear seatback forward. NOTE: When using the fold down rear seatback, the rear center seat belt retractor may lock up and prevent folding down the seatback. If the rear center seat belt retractor has inadvertently locked up, push the seat belt webbing toward the retractor as shown. This will unlock the seat belt retractor and allow the rear seatback to fold down. LKIA0141E 5. 6. Remove 2 upper subwoofer bolts. Disconnect subwoofer connector. LKIA0139E 7. 8. 9. Remove 2 bolts from rear seatback center hinge. Refer to SE-5, "Removal and Installation" . Remove subwoofer through trunk. Install in reverse order of removal. AV-12 AUDIO Location of Antenna EKS003AO A B C D E F LEL584 Antenna Removal and Installation EKS003KX G H I J AV L LKIA0162E AV-13 M AUDIO AV-14 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION BODY CONTROL SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 2 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT ...................... 3 Description ............................................................... 3 OUTLINE ............................................................... 3 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL .............................. 3 INPUT/OUTPUT .................................................... 3 CONSULT-II ............................................................. 5 DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION ................... 5 DIAGNOSTIC ITEM DESCRIPTION ..................... 5 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ............ 6 Schematic ................................................................. 7 Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table .......... 9 TIME CONTROL UNIT .............................................. 10 Description (Without Power Door Locks) ................ 10 OUTLINE ............................................................. 10 INPUT/OUTPUT .................................................. 10 Schematic (Without Power Door Locks) ................. 11 Time Control Unit Inspection Table (Without Power Door Locks) ............................................................ 12 E F G H I J BCS L M BCS-1 PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS003A0 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams", and ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES", and ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. BCS-2 EKS003A1 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Description PFP:28596 A EKS003A2 OUTLINE The smart entrance control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations. ● Warning chime ● Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger ● Power door locks ● Remote keyless entry system ● Vehicle security system ● Interior lamp ● Battery saver control BATTERY SAVER CONTROL Interior Lamp/Map Lamp/Vanity Lamps B C D E The lamps turn off automatically when the interior lamp, map lamp or/and vanity lamps are illuminated with the ignition key in the OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the lamp switch is in the ON position for approximately 10 minutes. After lamps are turned off by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when: ● Driver's door is locked or unlocked, ● Door is opened or closed, ● Key is inserted into or removed from the ignition key cylinder. F G H Rear Window Defogger/Door Mirror Defogger Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger are turned off approximately 15 minutes after the rear window defogger switch is turned on. I INPUT/OUTPUT System Input Output J Power door lock Door lock and unlock switch LH and RH Key switch (Insert) Door switches Door key cylinder switch Door lock actuator Remote keyless entry Key switch (Insert) Ignition switch (ACC) Door switches Front door unlock sensor LH Keyfob signal Vehicle security lamp relay Vehicle security horn relay Interior lamp Remote keyless entry relay Door lock actuator Trunk lid opener actuator Warning chime Key switch (Insert) Ignition switch (ON) Lighting switch (1st or 2nd) Seat belt buckle switch LH Front door switch LH Warning chime (located in smart entrance control unit) Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger Ignition switch (ON) Rear window defogger switch Rear window defogger relay Vehicle security Ignition switch (ACC, ON) Door switches Door lock/unlock switches Door key cylinder switch (lock/unlock) Trunk lid key cylinder switch (unlock) Door unlock sensors Vehicle security lamp relay Horn relay Security indicator lamp BCS L M BCS-3 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT System Input Output Interior lamp Door switches Front door unlock sensor LH Ignition switch (ON) Key switch (Insert) Interior lamp Battery saver control for interior lamp/map lamp/vanity lamps Ignition switch (ON) Door switches Lamp switches Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Interior lamp Map lamp Vanity lamps BCS-4 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONSULT-II EKS003A3 A DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION Item (CONSULT-II screen terms) Diagnosed system DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST WORK SUPPORT B DOOR LOCK Power door lock X X REAR DEFOGGER Rear window defogger X X KEY WARN ALM Warning chime X X LIGHT WARN ALM Warning chime X X SEAT BELT ALM Warning chime X X INT LAMP Interior lamps X X BATTERY SAVER Battery saver control for interior lamp X X THEFT WAR ALM Vehicle security system X X X MULTI REMOTE ENT Remote keyless entry system X X X C D X: Applicable For diagnostic item in each control system, refer to the relevant pages for each system. DIAGNOSTIC ITEM DESCRIPTION F G MODE Description DATA MONITOR Input/output data in the smart entrance control unit can be read. ACTIVE TEST Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some systems apart from the smart entrance control unit. WORK SUPPORT for THEFT WAR ALM The recorded trigger signal when vehicle security system was activated can be checked. WORK SUPPORT for MULTI REMOTE ENT E H I ID code of keyfob can be registered and erased. J BCS L M BCS-5 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn the ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector. LAT136 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. SAIA0450E 5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. WKIA0212E 6. Perform each diagnostic item according to “DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION”. Refer to BCS-5, "DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION" . LEL643 BCS-6 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Schematic EKS003A4 A B C D E F G H I J BCS L M WKWA0230E BCS-7 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT WKWA0649E BCS-8 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table EKS003A5 A Terminal No. Wire color 2 G/R Rear window defogger relay OFF → ON (Ignition key is in “ON” position) 0V → 12V 4 SB Horn relay and vehicle security lamp relay When panic alarm is operated using Keyfob or when alarm is activated 12V → 0V 7 OR/B Remote keyless entry relay When doors are locked using Keyfob 12V → 0V When interior lamp is operated using Keyfob (Lamp switch in “DOOR” position) 0V → 12V Connections Voltage (Approx.) Operated condition 8 R/Y Interior lamp 10 PU Power source (Fuse) — 12V 11 W/L Power source (C/B) — 12V 12 P/B Trunk lid opener actuator 13 L/R Driver door lock actuator 14 W/R Passenger and rear doors lock actuators 15 R/B Door lock actuators ON (Open) → OFF (Closed) B C D 0V → 12V Free 0V Unlocked 12V Free 0V Locked 12V E Door lock & unlock switch Door lock & unlock switch 16 B 17 R/B Battery saver (Interior lamp) Ground Battery saver does not operate → Operate — 12V → 0V 19 W/G Horn relay When doors are locked using Keyfob with horn chirp mode 12V → 0V 21 P Ignition switch (ACC, ON) “ACC” or “ON” position 22 W/B Seat belt buckle switch LH Unfasten → Fasten (Ignition key is in “ON” position) 0V → 5V 23 GY Door lock & unlock switches Neutral → Locks 5V → 0V 24 G/B Data link connector — — 25 GY/L Data link connector — — 28 R/W Other door switches OFF (Closed) → ON (Open) 5V → 0V 29 R Front door switch LH OFF (Closed) → ON (Open) 5V → 0V 30 W/L Door key cylinder unlock switch OFF (Neutral) → ON (Unlocked) 5V → 0V 31 GY/R Vehicle security indicator Goes off → Illuminates 12V → 0V 32 L/W Ignition key switch (Insert) Key inserted → Key removed from IGN key cylinder 12V → 0V 33 G Ignition switch (ON,START) Ignition key is in “ON” or "START" position 34 R/G Combination switch (Lighting switch) 1ST, 2ND positions: ON → OFF 12V → 0V 35 PU/R Door lock & unlock switches Neutral → Unlocks 5V → 0V 36 Y/G Door unlock sensor LH Driver door: Locked → Unlocked 5V → 0V 37 Y Door unlock sensor RH Passenger door: Locked → Unlocked 5V → 0V 38 R/B Trunk room lamp switch ON (Open) → OFF (Closed) 0V → 12V 39 G/B Air control (Rear window defogger switch) OFF → ON 5V → 0V 41 LG/R Door key cylinder lock switch OFF (Neutral) → ON (Locked) 5V → 0V 42 L/OR Trunk lid key cylinder switch OFF (Neutral) → ON (Unlock) 5V → 0V BCS-9 — 12V 12V F G H I J BCS L M TIME CONTROL UNIT TIME CONTROL UNIT Description (Without Power Door Locks) PFP:28491 EKS003A6 OUTLINE The time control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations. ● Warning chime ● Rear window defogger INPUT/OUTPUT System Input Output Warning chime Key switch (Insert) Ignition switch (ON) Lighting switch (1st or 2nd) Seat belt buckle switch LH Front door switch LH Warning chime (located in time control unit) Rear window defogger Ignition switch (ON) Rear window defogger switch Rear window defogger relay BCS-10 TIME CONTROL UNIT Schematic (Without Power Door Locks) EKS003A7 A B C D E F G H I J BCS L M LEL553 BCS-11 TIME CONTROL UNIT Time Control Unit Inspection Table (Without Power Door Locks) Terminal No. Wire color 1 W/B 2 R 3 Connections Operated condition EKS003A8 Voltage (Approx.) Seat belt buckle switch LH Unfasten → Fasten (Ignition key is in “ON” position) 0V → 5V Front door switch LH OFF (Closed) → ON (Open) 5V → 0V G/B Air control (Rear window defogger switch) OFF → ON 5V → 0V 4 L/W Ignition key switch (Insert) Key inserted → Key removed from IGN key cylinder 12V → 0V 5 R/G Combination switch (Lighting switch) 1ST, 2ND positions: ON → OFF 12V → 0V 7 PU Power source (Fuse) — 12V 8 B Ground — — 9 G Ignition switch (ON, START) Ignition key is in “ON” or "START" position 10 G/R Rear window defogger relay OFF → ON (Ignition key is in “ON” position) BCS-12 12V 0V → 12V I BODY A SECTION BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5 Work Flow ................................................................ 5 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7 DOORS ................................................................. 7 TRUNK .................................................................. 8 SUNROOF/HEADLINER ....................................... 8 SEATS ................................................................... 8 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9 POWER DOOR LOCK ...............................................11 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location....11 System Description ................................................ 12 OPERATION ....................................................... 12 Schematic .............................................................. 13 Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — ............................... 14 FIG. 1 ................................................................... 14 FIG. 2 ................................................................... 15 FIG. 3 ................................................................... 16 FIG. 4 ................................................................... 17 FIG. 5 ................................................................... 18 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ........................ 19 “DOOR LOCK” .................................................... 19 CONSULT-II Application Items ............................... 20 “DOOR LOCK” .................................................... 20 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 21 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 21 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ...................................................... 22 DOOR SWITCH CHECK ..................................... 23 KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK ........................ 24 DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK .......... 25 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK ................................................................ 27 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK ..................... 28 DOOR ........................................................................ 30 Front Door .............................................................. 30 Rear Door ............................................................... 30 TRUNK LID OPENER ............................................... 32 Wiring Diagram — TLID — ..................................... 32 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ..................... 33 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 33 System Description ................................................. 34 INPUTS ............................................................... 34 OPERATED PROCEDURE ................................. 34 Schematic ............................................................... 37 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — ............................... 38 FIG. 1 ................................................................... 38 FIG. 2 ................................................................... 39 FIG. 3 ................................................................... 40 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ......................... 41 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 41 CONSULT-II Application Items ............................... 42 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 42 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 43 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 43 KEYFOB BATTERY AND FUNCTION CHECK ... 45 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ................................................................ 46 DOOR SWITCH CHECK ..................................... 48 KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK ........................ 49 DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH CHECK ..... 50 FRONT LH DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK... 52 TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CHECK ....... 54 BL-1 E F G H BL J K L M HAZARD REMINDER CHECK ............................ 55 HORN REMINDER CHECK ................................ 57 INTERIOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK ............. 58 ID Code Entry Procedure ....................................... 59 KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II ............ 59 KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II ..... 61 Keyfob Battery Replacement .................................. 62 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM... 63 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 63 System Description ................................................. 65 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 65 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND ....................... 65 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM ..................................................................... 66 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ACTIVATION ... 66 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION .................................................................. 67 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION... 67 PANIC ALARM OPERATION ............................... 67 Schematic ............................................................... 69 Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — .............................. 70 FIG. 1 ................................................................... 70 FIG. 2 ................................................................... 71 FIG. 3 ................................................................... 72 FIG. 4 ................................................................... 73 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ......................... 74 “THEFT WAR ALM” ............................................. 74 CONSULT-II Application Item ................................. 75 “THEFT WAR ALM” ............................................. 75 Trouble Diagnoses .................................................. 76 PRELIMINARY CHECK ....................................... 76 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 77 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ................................................................ 78 DOOR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CHECK ................................................................ 79 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK .............. 82 FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK ....... 84 DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK ..........85 TRUNK LID KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK...86 DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK ...........87 HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK ..........89 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................91 VEHICLE SECURITY LAMP RELAY ...................91 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) ....................................................................92 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...92 System Description .................................................93 System Composition ...............................................93 Wiring Diagram — NATS — ....................................94 CONSULT-II ............................................................95 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ..........95 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION ....................................................................96 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...96 NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART .......................................................97 Trouble Diagnoses ..................................................98 WORK FLOW ......................................................98 SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 (SELF-DIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM) ...........................................99 SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 (NON SELFDIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM) .............................99 DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM ................... 100 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 .......................... 100 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 .......................... 101 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 .......................... 105 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 .......................... 106 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 .......................... 107 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 .......................... 108 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 .......................... 110 How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU .................... 111 BODY (ALIGNMENT) .............................................. 112 Alignment .............................................................. 112 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................ 113 UNDERBODY .................................................... 116 BL-2 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EIS0014O The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. B C D E F G H BL J K L M BL-3 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EIS0014P The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear Locating the noise SIIA0993E — (J-43980) Nissan Squeak and Rattle kit Repairing the cause of noise SIIA0994E — (J-43241) Remote Keyless Entry Tester Used to test keyfobs LEL946A Commercial Service Tools EIS0014Q Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Engine ear (J-39565) Locating the noise SIIA0995E BL-4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00003 A EIS0014R B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to BL-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. BL ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer J is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when K defining the noise. – Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping – Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. M – Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. – Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. – Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. – Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. – Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. BL-5 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1. Close a door. 2. Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3. Rev the engine. 4. Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5. At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: ● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. ● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. ● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. ● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. ● Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to BL-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. ● ● BL-6 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0014S A B C D E F G Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL H Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing BL 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield J 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by K pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. L CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. M CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and upper/lower cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops BL-7 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINER Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. SEATS When isolating seat noises it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holders 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seat back lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noises may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noises include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. BL-8 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS0014T A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIWA0276E BL-9 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SBT844 BL-10 POWER DOOR LOCK POWER DOOR LOCK Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 A EIS0014U B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0005E BL-11 POWER DOOR LOCK System Description EIS0014V OPERATION ● ● ● The lock/unlock switches (LH and RH) on door trim can lock and unlock all doors. With the door key inserted in the key cylinder on front LH, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock all doors; turning it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the corresponding door; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within 5 seconds after the first unlock operation unlocks all of the other doors. (Signals from door key cylinder switch.) If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and one or more of the doors are open, setting the lock/ unlock switch (LH or RH) to “LOCK” locks the doors once but then immediately unlocks them (KEY REMINDER DOOR SYSTEM). BL-12 POWER DOOR LOCK Schematic EIS0014W A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0014E BL-13 POWER DOOR LOCK Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — EIS0014X FIG. 1 WIWA0066E LEL606 BL-14 POWER DOOR LOCK FIG. 2 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0067E LEL607 BL-15 POWER DOOR LOCK FIG. 3 WIWA0021E LEL608 BL-16 POWER DOOR LOCK FIG. 4 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0022E LEL609 BL-17 POWER DOOR LOCK FIG. 5 WIWA0068E BL-18 POWER DOOR LOCK CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure EIS0014Y A “DOOR LOCK” CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to the data link connector. B C D E LAT136 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. F G H SAIA0450E 5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. If "SMART ENTRANCE" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BL J K L LEL642 6. Touch “DOOR LOCK”. LIIA1137E BL-19 M POWER DOOR LOCK 7. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available. LIIA1138E CONSULT-II Application Items EIS0014Z “DOOR LOCK” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder. KEY CYL UN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder. DOOR SW-ALL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (All). LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of second unlock signal from keyfob within 5 seconds after first unlock operation. Active Test Test Item Description ALL D/LK MTR This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. DR D/UN MTR This test is able to check front door lock actuator LH unlock operation. The actuator unlocks when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. NON DR D/UN This test is able to check door lock actuators (except front door lock actuator LH) unlock operation. These actuators unlock when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. BL-20 POWER DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses EIS00150 A SYMPTOM CHART BL-23 BL-24 KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK BL-22 DOOR SWITCH CHECK Key reminder door system does not operate properly. X X X Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X Power door lock does not operate with door lock and unlock switch (LH and RH) on door trim. X Power door lock does not operate with front door key cylinder operation. X BL-27 BL-28 B C DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK SYMPTOM BL-25 DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK ) MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK REFERENCE PAGE (BL- D E F G X H X X BL X X: Applicable J K L M BL-21 POWER DOOR LOCK MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Main Power Supply Circuit Check Terminals (+) Ignition switch position (-) 10 11 Ground OFF Battery voltage ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage WEL466 Ground Circuit Check Terminals Continuity 16 - Ground Yes WEL467 BL-22 POWER DOOR LOCK DOOR SWITCH CHECK A 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II Check door switches (“DOOR SW-ALL”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C D E SEL323W F Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminals 28 or 29 and ground. G H BL WEL500 Refer to BL-14, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> Door switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. J L Disconnect door switch harness connector. Check continuity between door switch connector terminals. M WEL491 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch NG >> Replace door switch. BL-23 POWER DOOR LOCK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL315W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 32 and ground. LEL454 Refer to BL-14, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> Key switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH Check continuity between key switch connector terminals 1 and 2. LEL449 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch NG >> Replace key switch. BL-24 POWER DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK A 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B C D E SEL341W 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 23 or 35 and ground. F G H BL J WEL501 Refer to BL-16, "FIG. 3" . OK or NG OK >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M BL-25 POWER DOOR LOCK 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH 1. 2. – Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch – Door lock/unlock switch RH WEL494 WEL495 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch ● Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control unit connector NG >> Replace door lock/unlock switch. BL-26 POWER DOOR LOCK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK A 1. CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL) With CONSULT-II Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B C D E SEL342W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminals 30 or 41 and ground. F G H BL J WEL502 Refer to BL-15, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> Door key cylinder switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH L 1. 2. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch connector D8 terminals L, E, and U, E. M LEL101A OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door key cylinder switch ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door key cylinder switch NG >> Replace door key cylinder switch. BL-27 POWER DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “DOOR LOCK” with CONSULT-II. Select “ALL D/LK MTR” and touch “ON”. Then, select “DR D/UN MTR” and touch “ON”. Select “NON DR D/UN” and touch “ON”. SEL343W NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. OK or NG OK >> Door lock actuator is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. BL-28 POWER DOOR LOCK 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT A Check voltage for door lock actuator. ● Door lock actuator front LH B C D WEL504 ● E Door lock actuator front RH and rear F G H WEL505 Refer to BL-17, "FIG. 4" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace smart entrance control unit. (Before replacing the smart entrance control unit, perform BL-25, "DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK" .) BL J 3. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR K 1. 2. L Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation. M WEL499 OK or NG OK >> Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit connector and door lock actuator. NG >> Replace door lock actuator. BL-29 DOOR DOOR Front Door ● ● PFP:80100 EIS00151 For removal of door finisher, refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" . After adjusting the door or door lock, check the door lock operation. WIIA0006E Rear Door ● EIS00152 For removal of door finisher, refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" . BL-30 DOOR ● After adjusting the door or door lock, check the door lock operation. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0002E BL-31 TRUNK LID OPENER TRUNK LID OPENER Wiring Diagram — TLID — PFP:84640 EIS00153 WIWA0077E BL-32 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28596 A EIS00154 B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0007E BL-33 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM System Description EIS00155 INPUTS Power is supplied at all times: ● to key switch terminal 2 ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the key switch is ON (ignition key is inserted in key cylinder), power is supplied: ● through key switch terminal 1 ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 32. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied: ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 29 ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● to front door switch LH terminal 3 ● through body grounds B13 and B19. When the front door switch RH and rear door switches are ON (doors are OPEN), ground is supplied: ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 28 ● through front door switch RH terminal 1 and rear door switches terminal + ● to front door switch RH case ground and rear door switches case grounds. When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is LOCKED, ground is supplied: ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 23 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 and ● through body grounds M28 and M54. When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is UNLOCKED, ground is supplied: ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 35 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 and ● through body grounds M28 and M54. When front door unlock sensor LH is UNLOCKED, ground is supplied: ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 36 ● through front door unlock sensor LH terminal 2 ● to front door unlock sensor LH terminal 4 ● through body grounds M28 and M54. Keyfob signal is input to smart entrance control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with smart entrance control unit). The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the: ● power door locks ● trunk lid opener ● interior lamp ● panic alarm ● hazard and horn reminder. OPERATED PROCEDURE Power Door Lock Operation Smart entrance control unit receives a LOCK signal from keyfob. Smart entrance control unit locks all doors with input of LOCK signal from keyfob. When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver door will be unlocked. Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be unlocked. Hazard and Horn Reminder Power is supplied at all times: ● to remote keyless entry relay terminals 1, 3 and 6 ● through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and ● to horn relay terminals 1 and 5 BL-34 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM through 10A fuse (No. 33, located in the fuse and fusible link box). When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob, ground is supplied: ● to remote keyless entry relay terminal 2 ● through smart entrance control unit terminal 7, and ● to horn relay terminal 2 ● through smart entrance control unit terminal 19. Remote keyless entry relay and horn relay are now energized, and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as a reminder. The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode). ● Operating function of hazard and horn reminder A B C D C mode (Horn chirp mode) S mode (Non-horn chirp mode) Hazard warning lamp flash Horn sound Hazard warning lamp flash Horn sound Lock Twice Once Twice — Unlock Once — — — E F How to change hazard and horn reminder mode With CONSULT-II Hazard and horn reminder can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. G Without CONSULT-II When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the keyfob for more than 2 seconds at the same time, the hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as follows: H BL J K SEL153WA Interior Lamp Operation When the following input signals are both supplied: ● front door switch LH CLOSED (when driver door is closed); ● driver door LOCKED; remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp (for 30 seconds) with input of UNLOCK signal from keyfob. For detailed description, refer to LT-35, "INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS" . Panic Alarm Operation When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob. The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal from keyfob. For detailed description, refer to BL-67, "PANIC ALARM OPERATION" . Trunk Lid Operation Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to trunk lid opener actuator terminal +. When a TRUNK OPEN signal is sent with key OFF (ignition key removed from key cylinder) from keyfob, ground is supplied: ● to trunk lid opener actuator terminal - BL-35 L M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM through smart entrance control unit terminal 12. Then power and ground are supplied, trunk lid opener actuator opens trunk lid. ● BL-36 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Schematic EIS00156 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0069E BL-37 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — EIS00157 FIG. 1 WIWA0070E LEL610 BL-38 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FIG. 2 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0071E LEL611 BL-39 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FIG. 3 WIWA0072E WEL104A BL-40 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure EIS00158 A “MULTI REMOTE ENT” CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to the data link connector. B C D E LAT136 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. F G H SAIA0450E 5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BL J K L LEL642 6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. LIIA0194E BL-41 M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 7. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available. SEL274W CONSULT-II Application Items EIS00159 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-ALL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (All). LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch. LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob. PANIC BTN Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of second unlock signal from keyfob within 5 seconds after first unlock operation. LK/UN BTN ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob. Active Test Test Item Description INT/IGN ILLUM This test is able to check interior lamp operation. The interior lamp is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. HAZARD This test is able to check hazard reminder operation. The hazard lamps turn on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. ALARM This test is able to check panic alarm operation. The alarm activates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. MULTI REM HRN This test is able to check horn reminder operation. The horn sounds for 0.02 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. TRUNK OUTPUT This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation. The trunk is unlocked when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Work Support Test Item Description REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode. REMO CONT ID REGIST Keyfob ID code can be registered. REMO CONT ID ERASUR Keyfob ID code can be erased. HZRD REM SET Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed when “MODE SET” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. BL-42 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses EIS0015A A SYMPTOM CHART NOTE: ● Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob. ● The panic alarm operation and trunk lid opener operation of remote keyless entry system do not activate with the ignition key inserted in the ignition key cylinder. ● Use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241 (follow instructions on tester) to check operation of keyfob before replacing keyfob. Symptom All functions of remote keyless entry system do not operate. The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered. Door lock or unlock does not function. [If the power door lock system does not operate manually, check power door lock system. Refer to BL-21, "Trouble Diagnoses" .) Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. Interior lamp illumination operations do not activate properly. Diagnoses/service procedure Reference page (BL- ) 1. Keyfob battery and function check Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-45 2. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control unit check BL-46 3. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-59 1. Keyfob battery and function check Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-45 2. Key switch (insert) check BL-49 3. Door switch check BL-48 4. Door lock/unlock switch LH check BL-50 5. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control unit check BL-46 6. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-59 1. Keyfob battery and function check Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-45 2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-59 1. Keyfob battery and function check Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-45 2. Hazard reminder check BL-55 3. Horn reminder check* *: Horn chirp can be activated or deactivated. First check the horn chirp setting. Refer to BL-34, "Hazard and Horn Reminder" . BL-57 4. Door switch check BL-48 5. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-59 1. Interior lamp operation check BL-58 2. Door switch check BL-48 3. Front LH door unlock sensor check BL-52 BL-43 B C D E F G H BL J K L M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Symptom Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not activate when panic alarm button is continuously pressed. Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J43241). Trunk lid does not open when trunk opener button is continuously pressed. Diagnoses/service procedure Reference page (BL- ) 1. Keyfob battery and function check BL-45 2. Vehicle security operation check. Refer to BL-76, "PRELIMINARY CHECK" . BL-76 3. Key switch (insert) check BL-49 4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-59 1. Keyfob battery and function check BL-45 2. Trunk lid opener actuator check BL-54 3. Key switch (insert) check BL-49 4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. Keyfob check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). BL-59 BL-44 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM KEYFOB BATTERY AND FUNCTION CHECK A 1. CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY Remove battery (refer to BL-62, "Keyfob Battery Replacement" ) and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−). Voltage [V] B : 2.5 - 3.0 C NOTE: Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace battery. D E F SEL237W 2. CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION G With CONSULT-II Check keyfob function (“LK BUTTON/SIG”, “UN BUTTON/SIG”, “TRUNK BTN/SIG”, “PANIC BTN”, “UN BUTTON ON” and “LK/UN BTN ON”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. When pushing each button of keyfob, the corresponding monitor item should be turned as follows. Condition H BL Monitor item Pushing LOCK LK BUTTON/SIG ON Pushing UNLOCK UN BUTTON/SIG ON Pushing TRUNK TRUNK BTN/SIG ON Pushing PANIC PANIC BTN/SIG ON Pushing UNLOCK within 5 seconds after pushing UNLOCK UN BUTTON ON ON Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK at the same time LK/UN BTN ON ON J WIIA0008E K L M OK or NG OK >> Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-43, "SYMPTOM CHART" . NG >> Replace keyfob. Refer to BL-59, "ID Code Entry Procedure" . BL-45 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 1. 2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminals 10, 11 and ground. LEL511 Refer to BL-38, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 30A fusible link (letter d , located in fuse and fusible link box) ● 10A fuse (No. 37, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● M6 circuit breaker ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse 2. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH “ACC” CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 21 and ground while ignition switch is “ACC”. LEL512 Refer to BL-38, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse BL-46 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT A Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 16 and ground. B C D LEL510 Refer to BL-38, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuits are OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E F G H BL J K L M BL-47 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DOOR SWITCH CHECK 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door switches (“DOOR SW-ALL”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL323W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminals 28 or 29 and ground. WEL500 Refer to BL-38, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> Door switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect door switch harness connector. Check continuity between door switch terminals. WEL491 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch NG >> Replace door switch. BL-48 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK A 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C D E SEL315W F Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between control unit terminal 32 and ground. G H BL LEL454 Refer to BL-38, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> Key switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. J K 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH L Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2. M LEL449 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch NG >> Replace key switch. BL-49 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH CHECK 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL341W 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 23 or 35 and ground. WEL501 Refer to BL-39, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. BL-50 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH 1. 2. A Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector. Check continuity between door lock/unlock switch LH terminals. B C D WEL494 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch ● Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control unit connector NG >> Replace door lock/unlock switch. E F G H BL J K L M BL-51 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FRONT LH DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK 1. CHECK FRONT LH DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Select “DATA MONITOR” mode in “INT LAMP” with CONSULT-II. Check front LH door unlock sensor (“LOCK SIG DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode. SEL344W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 36 and ground. LEL452 Refer to BL-39, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> Door unlock sensor is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. BL-52 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK FRONT LH DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR 1. 2. A Disconnect front LH door unlock sensor harness connector. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals. B C D WEL497 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door unlock sensor ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door unlock sensor NG >> Replace door unlock sensor. E F G H BL J K L M BL-53 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CHECK 1. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER Check trunk lid opener operation with trunk lid opener switch. NOTE: First check trunk lid opener cancel lever position. Does trunk lid open? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check trunk lid opener actuator and the circuit. 2. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II. 2. Select “TRUNK OUTPUT” and touch “ON”. SEL345W NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. OK or NG OK >> Trunk lid opener actuator circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 12. LEL509 Refer to BL-38, "FIG. 1" . Does trunk lid open? Yes >> Replace smart entrance control unit. No >> Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk lid opener actuator. BL-54 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM HAZARD REMINDER CHECK A 1. CHECK HAZARD INDICATOR B Check if hazard indicator flashes with hazard switch. Does hazard indicator operate? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check hazard indicator circuit. C 2. CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION D With CONSULT-II 1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II. 2. Select “HAZARD” and touch “ON”. E F G H LEL659 NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. OK or NG OK >> Hazard reminder operation is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. BL J 3. CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION 1. 2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 7. K L M LEL508 Refer to BL-40, "FIG. 3" . OK or NG OK >> Replace smart entrance control unit. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RELAY Check remote keyless entry relay. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace remote keyless entry relay. BL-55 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 5. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RELAY 1. 2. Disconnect remote keyless entry relay harness connector. Check voltage between remote keyless entry relay harness connector M11 terminal 1 (W/G) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following. ● 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between remote keyless entry relay and fuse WIIA0009E 6. CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RELAY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect remote keyless entry relay harness connector. Check voltage between remote keyless entry relay harness connector M11 terminals 3 (W/G) and 5 (G/B). Check voltage between remote keyless entry relay harness connector M11 terminals 6 (W/G) and 7 (G/Y). Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and remote keyless entry relay. NG >> Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between remote keyless entry relay and fuse ● Harness for open or short between remote keyless entry relay and turn signal lamps BL-56 WIIA0010E REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM HORN REMINDER CHECK A 1. CHECK HORN B Check if horn sounds with horn switch. Does horn operate? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check horn circuit. C 2. CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION D With CONSULT-II 1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II. 2. Select “MULTI REM HRN” and touch “ON”. E F G H SEL348W NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. OK or NG OK >> Horn reminder operation is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. BL J 3. CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION 1. 2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 19. K L M LEL507 Refer to BL-40, "FIG. 3" . Does horn sound? Yes >> Replace smart entrance control unit. No >> Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and horn relay. BL-57 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM INTERIOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK 1. CHECK INTERIOR LAMP Check if the interior lamp switch is in the “ON” position and the lamp illuminates. Does interior lamp illuminate? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior lamp ● Interior lamp 2. CHECK INTERIOR LAMP OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II. 2. Select “INT/IGN ILLUM” and touch “ON”. SEL349W Without CONSULT-II Push unlock button of keyfob with all doors closed, and check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 8 and ground. LEL506 Refer to BL-39, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> Check harness open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior lamp. BL-58 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ID Code Entry Procedure EIS0015B A KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II NOTE: If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. When the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to the data link connector. B C D E F LAT136 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. H BL J SAIA0450E 5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . K L M LEL642 6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. LIIA0194E BL-59 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”. SEL274W 8. The items are shown that can be set up. ● “REMO CONT ID CONFIR” Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or not. ● “REMO CONT ID REGIST” Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code. NOTE: Register the ID code when keyfob or smart entrance control unit is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required. ● “REMO CONT ID ERASUR” Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code. ● “HZRD REM SET” Use this mode to activate or deactivate the hazard and horn reminder. BL-60 SEL277W REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0011E BL-61 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM NOTE: ● If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) four times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. ● When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If four ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than four ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. ● If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfobs, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code entry” for each new keyfob. ● Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed. When more than four ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. ● Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an additional code. Keyfob Battery Replacement EIS0015C WIIA0012E BL-62 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:00100 A EIS0015D B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA0845E BL-63 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM LIIA0846E BL-64 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM System Description EIS0015E A DESCRIPTION 1. Operation Flow B C D E F G SEL334W 2. Setting The Vehicle Security System H Initial condition 1. Ignition switch is in OFF position. Disarmed phase When the vehicle security system is in the disarmed phase, the security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 sec- BL onds. Pre-armed phase and armed phase When the following operation 1 or 2 is performed, the vehicle security system turns into the “pre-armed” J phase. (The security indicator lamp illuminates.) 1. Smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob after hood, trunk lid and all doors are closed. K 2. Trunk lid and all doors are closed after front doors are locked by key, lock/unlock switch or keyfob. After about 30 seconds, the system automatically shifts into the “armed” phase (the system is set). (The security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.) L 3. Canceling The Set Vehicle Security System When the following 1 or 2 operation is performed, the armed phase is canceled. 1. Unlock the doors with the key or keyfob. 2. Open the trunk lid with the key or keyfob. 4. Activating The Alarm Operation of The Vehicle Security System Make sure the system is in the armed phase. (The security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.) When the following operation 1 or 2 is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps for about 50 seconds. 1. Trunk lid or any door is opened during armed phase. 2. Disconnecting and connecting the battery connector before canceling armed phase. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to security indicator lamp terminal 1 and ● to key switch terminal 2. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse (No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link box) BL-65 M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM to smart entrance control unit terminal 10. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 33. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 21. Ground is supplied: ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 16 ● through body grounds M28 and M54. ● INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors, hood and trunk lid. Pattern A To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signals indicating the doors, hood and trunk lid are closed. When a door is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 28 or 29 receives a ground signal from each door switch. When the trunk lid is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 38 receives a ground signal: ● from terminal + of the trunk room lamp switch ● to terminal - of the trunk room lamp switch ● through body grounds B13 and B19. When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob and none of the described conditions exist, the vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode. Pattern B To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signal indicating any door (including trunk lid) is opened. When the front doors are locked with key, lock/unlock switch or keyfob and then all doors are closed, the vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ACTIVATION Pattern A With all doors closed (including trunk lid), if the key is used to lock doors, smart entrance control unit terminal 41 receives a ground signal: ● from terminal L of the front door key cylinder switch LH ● to terminal E of the front door key cylinder switch LH ● through body grounds M28 and M54. If this signal, or lock signal from keyfob is received by the smart entrance control unit, the vehicle security system will activate automatically. NOTE: Vehicle security system can be set even though all doors are not locked. Pattern B With any door open, if lock/unlock switch is used to lock doors, smart entrance control unit terminal 23 receives a ground signal: ● from terminal 14 of main power window and door lock/unlock switch ● to terminal 3 of main power window and door lock/unlock switch, or ● from terminal 1 of door lock/unlock switch RH ● to terminal 5 of door lock/unlock switch RH ● through body grounds M28 and M54. With any door open, if the key is used to lock doors, smart entrance control unit terminal 41 receives a ground signal: ● from terminal L of the front door key cylinder switch LH BL-66 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM to terminal E of the front door key cylinder switch LH ● through body grounds M28 and M54. If these signals and lock signal from keyfob are received by the smart entrance control unit and ground signals of terminals 36 and 37 are interrupted (both front doors locked), the vehicle security system will activate automatically. NOTE: Vehicle security system can be set even though the rear door is not locked. Once the vehicle security system has been activated, smart entrance control unit terminal 31 supplies ground to terminal 2 of the security indicator lamp. The security indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds and then blink every 2.6 seconds. Now the vehicle security system is in armed phase. ● A B C D VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION The vehicle security system is triggered by: E ● opening a door ● opening the trunk lid ● detection of battery disconnect and connect. Once the vehicle security system is in armed phase, if the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal F at terminal 28 or 29 (door switch) or 38 (trunk room lamp switch), the vehicle security system will be triggered. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently. Power is supplied at all times: G ● through 15A fuse (No. 39, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● to vehicle security lamp relay terminal 3, H ● through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● to vehicle security lamp relay terminal 6, ● through 10A fuse (No, 35 located in fuse and fusible link box) BL ● to vehicle security lamp relay terminal 1 ● through 10A fuse (No. 33, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● to horn relay terminals 1 and 5. J When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently: ● from smart entrance control unit terminal 4 ● to horn relay terminal 2 and K ● to vehicle security lamp relay terminal 2. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after about 50 seconds but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with L again. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door or trunk lid must be unlocked with the key or keyfob. When the key is used to unlock the door, smart entrance control unit terminal 30 receives a ground signal: ● from terminal U of front door key cylinder switch LH ● to terminal E of front door key cylinder switch LH ● through body grounds M28 and M54. When the key is used to open the trunk lid, smart entrance control unit terminal 42 receives a ground signal: ● from terminal + of the trunk lid key cylinder switch (unlock switch) ● to terminal - of the trunk lid key cylinder switch (unlock switch) ● through body grounds B13 and B19. When the smart entrance control unit receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob, the vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase) PANIC ALARM OPERATION When the remote keyless entry system (panic alarm) is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently: ● from smart entrance control unit terminal 4 ● to vehicle security lamp relay terminal 2 and BL-67 M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM to horn relay terminal 2. The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal from keyfob. ● BL-68 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Schematic EIS0015F A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIWA0197E BL-69 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — EIS0015G FIG. 1 WIWA0074E WEL109A BL-70 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FIG. 2 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIWA0198E LIIA0847E BL-71 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FIG. 3 WIWA0039E LEL615 BL-72 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FIG. 4 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0076E WEL114A BL-73 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure EIS0015H “THEFT WAR ALM” CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to the data link connector. LAT136 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. SAIA0450E 5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . LEL642 6. Touch “THEFT ALM” on the “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. LIIA0194E BL-74 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 7. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available. A B C SEL274W D CONSULT-II Application Item EIS0015I “THEFT WAR ALM” Data Monitor E Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch. KEY CYL UN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch. DOOR SW-ALL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (All). LOCK SIG DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door unlock sensor LH. LOCK SIG AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door unlock sensor RH. TRUNK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk switch. TRUNK KEY SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk key cylinder switch. LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH. UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH. LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob. G H BL J K Active Test Test Item Description THEFT IND This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. THEFT WAR ALM This test is able to check theft warning alarm operation. The alarm will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Work Support Test Item THEFT ALM TRG F Description The switch which triggered theft warning alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of theft warning alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” on CONSULT-II screen. BL-75 L M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses EIS0015J PRELIMINARY CHECK The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED in the following flow chart. LIIA0848E For details of “Pattern A” and “Pattern B” vehicle security system settings, refer to BL-66, "INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM" . *: Refer to BL-92, "NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)" . After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart on next page. BL-76 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM X BL-33 B X X A C D E F G H X X BL X X J One of the doors is opened Vehicle security alarm does not activate. Horn or headlamp alarm X Door outside key X Trunk lid key X Keyfob X Vehicle security system cannot be canceled by.... *1 Vehicle security system does not alarm when... 4 Vehicle security system cannot be set by.... 3 BL-89 Check “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM” system. Keyfob BL-87 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK X BL-86 TRUNK LID KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK Lock/unlock switch BL-85 DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK X X BL-84 FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK X Door outside key BL-82 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK All items BL-79 DOOR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CHECK X Security indicator lamp does not illuminate for 30 seconds. 2 BL-78 X SYMPTOM 1 BL-76 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ) PRELIMINARY CHECK REFERENCE PAGE (BL- DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK SYMPTOM CHART X X K L X X M X X X X: Applicable *1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase. Before starting trouble diagnoses above, perform BL-76, "PRELIMINARY CHECK" . Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of preliminary check. BL-77 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Power Supply Circuit Check Terminals Ignition switch position (+) (-) OFF ACC ON 10 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 21 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 33 Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage LEL527 Ground Circuit Check Terminals Continuity 16 - Ground Yes WEL467 BL-78 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM DOOR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CHECK Door Switch Check A 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II Check door switches (“DOOR SW-ALL”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C D E F SEL323W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminals 28 or 29 and ground. G H BL J WEL500 Refer to BL-70, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> Door switch is OK. Check hood switch. Refer to BL-81, "Trunk Room Lamp Switch Check" . NG >> GO TO 2 K L M BL-79 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect door switch connector. Check continuity between door switch terminals. WEL491 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door switch ground circuit (Front, rear door) or door switch ground condition ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch NG >> Replace door switch. BL-80 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Trunk Room Lamp Switch Check A 1. CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II Check trunk room lamp switch (“TRUNK SW”), in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C D E SEL355W F Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 38 and ground. G H BL LEL530 Refer to BL-71, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> Trunk room lamp switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. J L Disconnect trunk room lamp switch connector. Check continuity between trunk room lamp switch terminals + and −. M LEL531 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Trunk room lamp switch ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk room lamp switch NG >> Replace trunk room lamp switch. BL-81 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK 1. CHECK INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II. Select “THEFT IND” and touch “ON”. Security indicator lamp should illuminate. LIIA0044E Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. 2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 31 and ground. LEL532 Refer to BL-70, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> Security indicator lamp is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP Refer to BL-70, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace security indicator lamp. BL-82 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. A Disconnect security indicator lamp connector. Check voltage between security indicator lamp terminal 1 and ground. B C D LEL533 Does battery voltage exist? Yes >> Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and smart entrance control unit. No >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse E F G H BL J K L M BL-83 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK 1. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check front unlock sensor (“LOCK SIG DR”, “LOCK SIG AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” with CONSULT-II. SEL357W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 36 or 37 and ground. LEL534 Refer to BL-72, "FIG. 3" . OK or NG OK >> Door unlock sensor is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR 1. 2. Disconnect door lock actuator connector. Check continuity between door lock actuator terminals. LEL535 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door unlock sensor ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door unlock sensor NG >> Replace door lock actuator. BL-84 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK A 1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL) With CONSULT-II Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B C D E SEL342W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 30 or 41 and ground. F G H BL J WEL502 Refer to BL-72, "FIG. 3" . OK or NG OK >> Door key cylinder switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH L 1. 2. Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch connector D8 terminals. M LEL101A OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door key cylinder switch ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door key cylinder switch NG >> Replace door key cylinder switch. BL-85 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM TRUNK LID KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK 1. CHECK TRUNK LID KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (UNLOCK SIGNAL) With CONSULT-II Check trunk lid key cylinder switch (“TRUNK KEY SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL358W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 42 and ground. LEL536 Refer to BL-71, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> Trunk lid key cylinder switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TRUNK LID KEY CYLINDER SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect trunk lid key cylinder switch connector. Check continuity between trunk lid key cylinder switch terminals. LEL537 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Trunk lid key cylinder switch ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk lid key cylinder switch NG >> Replace trunk lid key cylinder switch. BL-86 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK A 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B C D E SEL341W 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 23 or 35 and ground. F G H BL J WEL501 Refer to BL-71, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M BL-87 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH 1. 2. – Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminal. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch – Door lock/unlock switch RH WEL494 WEL495 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch ● Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control unit NG >> Replace door lock/unlock switch. BL-88 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK A 1. CHECK BASE HORN SYSTEM OPERATION B Operate vehicle horn. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check base horn system. Refer to WW-9, "Wiring Diagram — HORN —" . C 2. CHECK HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION D With CONSULT-II 1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II. 2. Select “THEFT WAR ALM” and touch “ON”. E F G H WEL610A Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. 2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 4. BL J K L WEL611A Refer to BL-73, "FIG. 4" . OK or NG OK >> Horn and headlamp alarm is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY LAMP RELAY Check vehicle security lamp relay. Refer to BL-91, "VEHICLE SECURITY LAMP RELAY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace relay. BL-89 M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLE SECURITY LAMP RELAY 1. 2. Disconnect vehicle security lamp relay connector. Check voltage between vehicle security lamp relay connector E43 terminal 1 (G/R) and ground. WEL609A Does battery voltage exist? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse (No. 35 located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between relay and fuse 5. CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY LAMP RELAY CIRCUIT 1. Check voltage between terminals of vehicle security lamp relay connector E43. WEL117A OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Harness for open between smart entrance control unit terminal 4 and relay ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit terminal 4 and horn relay ● Diode-4 for open ● Replace smart entrance control unit NG >> Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between vehicle security lamp relay and fuses ● Harness for open or short between vehicle security lamp relay and headlamp system BL-90 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Electrical Components Inspection EIS0015K A VEHICLE SECURITY LAMP RELAY Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No B C D SEC202B E F G H BL J K L M BL-91 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:25386 EIS0015L WIIA0195E NOTE: If the customer reports a “No Start” condition, request ALL KEYS be brought to Dealer in case of NATS malfunction. BL-92 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) System Description EIS0015M NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System—NATS) has the following immobilizer functions: ● Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose ID nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of NVIS (NATS), allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NVIS (NATS) registered key is prevented by NVIS (NATS). That is to say, NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS (NATS). ● All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS (NATS) registered. If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS) components. ● The security indicator lamp blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. Therefore, NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the system. ● When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position. ● NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration for other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software. Regarding the procedures for NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS. ● When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or registering another NVIS ignition key ID no., it is necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner. System Composition EIS0015N The immobilizer function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following: ● NVIS (NATS) ignition key ● NVIS (NATS) immobilizer control unit (IMMU) located in the ignition key cylinder ● ECM ● Security indicator lamp A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WEL122A BL-93 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) Wiring Diagram — NATS — EIS0015P WIWA0189E BL-94 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 4 B 5 GY/R 7 GROUND — — VEHICLE SECURITY INDICATOR GOES OFF 12V ILLUMINATES 0V IGNITION SWITCH (ON) IGNITION KEY IS IN ON POSITION 12V IGNITION SWITCH (START) IGNITION KEY IS IN START POSITION 12V POWER SOURCE (FUSE) — 12V G/W 8 W/L CONSULT-II A B C D EIS0015Q CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II. Program card 3. : NATS (AEN02C) E F G Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to data link connector. H LAT136 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START”. BL J K L PBR455D 6. M Touch “OTHER” LIIA0556E BL-95 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) 7. Select “NATS V.5.0”. If “NATS V5.0” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . SEL027X 8. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. SEL150X CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE Description C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following three components, C/U initialization is necessary. [NVIS (NATS) ignition key/IMMU/ECM] SELF DIAGNOSIS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart below. NOTE: ● When any initialization is performed, all IDs previously registered will be erased and all NVIS (NATS) ignition keys must be registered again. ● The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system may show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen. ● In rare cases, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS WEL125A BL-96 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART Malfunction is detected when..... Detected items (NATS program card screen terms) P No. Code (Self-diagnostic result of “ENGINE” The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU communication line is detected. ECM INT CIRC-IMMU NATS MALFUNCTION P1613 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU NATS MALFUNCTION P1612 Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU (In rare cases, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.) IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID verification between key ID and IMMU is NG. DIFFERENCE OF KEY NATS MALFUNCTION P1615 IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal. CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY NATS MALFUNCTION P1614 The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is NG. System initialization is required. ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM NATS MALFUNCTION P1611 LOCK MODE NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG — A Reference page B C BL-100 D BL-101 E F BL-105 G BL-106 H BL-107 When the starting operation is carried out five or more times consecutively under the following conditions, NVIS (NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the engine from being started. ● Unregistered ignition key is used. ● IMMU or ECM is malfunctioning. Any engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble codes have been detected in ECM. BL J BL-110 BL-98 K L M BL-97 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) Trouble Diagnoses EIS0015R WORK FLOW WEL126A BL-98 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 (SELF-DIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM) Displayed “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on CONSULT-II screen. SYMPTOM ECM INT CIRC-IMMU CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU ● Security indicator lighting up* ● Engine hard to start ● Security indicator lighting up* PROCEDURE 2 BL-101 PROCEDURE 3 BL-105 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY PROCEDURE 4 BL-106 LOCK MODE MIL staying ON PROCEDURE 1 BL-100 DIFFERENCE OF KEY ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM ● DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Reference page) DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG PROCEDURE 5 BL-107 PROCEDURE 7 BL-110 WORK FLOW BL-98 SYSTEM (Malfunctioning part or mode) REFERENCE PART NO. OF ILLUSTRATION ON NEXT PAGE ECM B — Open circuit in battery voltage line of IMMU circuit C1 Open circuit in ignition line of IMMU circuit C2 Open circuit in ground line of IMMU circuit C3 Open circuit in communication line between IMMU and ECM C4 G Short circuit between IMMU and ECM communication line and battery voltage line C4 H Short circuit between IMMU and ECM communication line and ground line C4 C D E ECM B IMMU A Unregistered key D IMMU A Malfunction of key ID chip E IMMU A System initialization has not yet been completed. F ECM F LOCK MODE D Engine trouble data and NVIS (NATS) trouble data have been detected in ECM — SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 (NON SELF-DIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Reference page) SYSTEM (Malfunctioning part or mode) Security indicator lamp Security indicator lamp does not light up. PROCEDURE 6 BL-108 Open circuit between fuse and IMMU Continuation of initialization mode IMMU BL-99 B In rare cases, "CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU" might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. *: When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position. SYMPTOM A F BL J K L M NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM WEL127A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Self-diagnostic results: “ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Ref. part No. B. 2. Replace ECM. 3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. SEL314W BL-100 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen A 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. NOTE: In rare cases, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-99, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 (SELFDIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM)" . C D E F SEL292W 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR NVIS (NATS) IMMU G 1. 2. H Disconnect NVIS (NATS) IMMU. Check voltage between terminal 8 of NVIS (NATS) IMMU and ground. BL J K LEL545 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following ● 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between fuse and NVIS (NATS) IMMU connector Ref. Part No. C1 BL-101 L M NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) 3. CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NVIS (NATS) IMMU harness connector E111 terminal 7 (G/W) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following ● 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between fuse and NVIS (NATS) IMMU connector Ref. part No. C2 WIIA0014E 4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR NVIS (NATS) IMMU 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between NVIS (NATS) IMMU terminal 4 and ground. LEL547 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness. Ref. part No. C3 BL-102 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) 5. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM connector. Check harness continuity between ECM harness connector F59 terminal 88 (BR/Y) and NVIS (NATS) IMMU connector E111 terminal 1 (BR/Y). B Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> ● Repair or replace harness. ● Ref. part No. C4 D E F G H WIIA0192E 6. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. BL Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM harness connector F59 terminal 88 (BR/Y) or NVIS (NATS) IMMU harness connector E111 terminal 1 (BR/Y) and ground. Voltage J : 0V K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> ● Communication line is short-circuited with battery voltage line or ignition switch ON line. ● Repair or replace harness. ● Ref. part No. C4 L M WIIA0193E BL-103 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) 7. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F59 terminal 88 (BR/Y) or NVIS (NATS) IMMU connector E111 terminal 1 (BR/Y) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> ● Communication line is short-circuited with ground line. ● Repair or replace harness. ● Ref. part No. C4 WIIA0194E 8. SIGNAL FROM ECM TO NVIS (NATS) IMMU CHECK 1. 2. Check the signal between ECM terminal 88 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when ignition switch is turned ON. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 750 msec. just after ignition switch is turned ON. LEL641 OK or NG OK >> ● NVIS (NATS) IMMU is malfunctioning. ● Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU. Ref. part No. A ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. NG >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. BL-104 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Self-diagnostic results: “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen A 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. C D E SEL293W Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1. F G 2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II H Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. BL J K SEL297W NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> ● Start engine. (END) ● (Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D ) No >> ● NVIS (NATS) IMMU is malfunctioning. ● Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU. Ref. part No. A ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. BL-105 L M NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. SEL294W Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-99, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 (SELF-DIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM)" . 2. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP Start engine with another registered NVIS (NATS) ignition key. Does the engine start? Yes >> ● Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning. ● Replace the ignition key. ● Ref. part No. E ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IMMU INSTALLATION Check NVIS (NATS) IMMU installation. Refer to BL-111, "How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU" . OK or NG OK >> ● NVIS (NATS) IMMU is malfunctioning. ● Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU. Ref. part No. A ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. NG >> Reinstall NVIS (NATS) IMMU correctly. BL-106 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 Self-diagnostic results: “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen A 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. C D E SEL298W NOTE: “ID DISCORD IMM-ECM”: Registered ID of NVIS (NATS) IMMU is in discord with that of ECM. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-99, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 (SELF-DIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM)" . F G H 2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II BL Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. J K L SEL297W NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> ● Start engine. (END) ● (System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. F ) No >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. F ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. BL-107 M NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 “SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” 1. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Is 10A fuse OK? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Replace fuse. 2. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. Install 10A fuse. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Check the security indicator lamp lighting. Security indicator lamp should light up. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector. Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector terminal 1 and ground. LEL551 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for open or short between fuse and security indicator lamp. 4. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP Check security indicator lamp. Is security indicator lamp OK? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Replace security indicator lamp. BL-108 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) 5. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IMMU FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. A Connect NVIS (NATS) IMMU connector. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector. Check continuity between NVIS (NATS) IMMU terminal 5 and ground. B C D E LEL552 OK or NG OK >> Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and NVIS (NATS) IMMU. NG >> ● NVIS (NATS) IMMU is malfunctioning. ● Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU. ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. F G H BL J K L M BL-109 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 Self-diagnostic results: “LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. SEL295W Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-99, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 (SELF-DIAGNOSIS RELATED ITEM)" . 2. ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds. 3. Return the key to OFF position. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles). 5. Start the engine. Does engine start? Yes >> ● System is OK. ● (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”.) No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IMMU INSTALLATION Check NVIS (NATS) IMMU installation. Refer to BL-111, "How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Reinstall NVIS (NATS) IMMU correctly. BL-110 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) 4. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II A Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. B C D E SEL297W NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> System is OK. No >> Check “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”. Refer to BL-106, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4" . F G How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU EIS0015S NOTE: ● If NVIS (NATS) IMMU is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”. H BL J SEL096WA K L M BL-111 BODY (ALIGNMENT) BODY (ALIGNMENT) Alignment ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:74312 EIS0015T All dimensions indicated in figures are actual ones. When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself to make sure there is no free play. When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending. Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes. An asterisk (*) indicates the measuring point value is the same on both sides. The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of “X”, “Y” and “Z”. SBF874GC BL-112 BODY (ALIGNMENT) ENGINE COMPARTMENT Measurement A B C D E F G H BL WBT062 J K L M BL-113 BODY (ALIGNMENT) WBT071 BL-114 BODY (ALIGNMENT) Measurement Points A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WBT063 BL-115 BODY (ALIGNMENT) UNDERBODY Measurement WBT064 BL-116 F BRAKES A SECTION BRAKE SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ............................................. 6 Checking Brake Fluid Level ..................................... 6 Checking Brake Line ................................................ 6 Changing Brake Fluid ............................................... 6 Bleeding Brake System ............................................ 7 Brake Burnishing Procedure .................................... 7 BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE ........................................ 8 Hydraulic Circuit ....................................................... 8 Removal ................................................................... 8 Inspection ................................................................. 9 Installation ................................................................ 9 DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE ............................ 10 Inspection ............................................................... 10 BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET ..............................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 Inspection ................................................................11 Adjustment ............................................................. 12 BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT ..................................... 12 STOP LAMP SWITCH AND ASCD CANCEL SWITCH CLEARANCE ....................................... 12 MASTER CYLINDER ................................................ 13 Removal ................................................................. 13 Disassembly ........................................................... 14 Inspection ............................................................... 14 Assembly ................................................................ 14 Installation .............................................................. 15 BRAKE BOOSTER ................................................... 16 On-vehicle Service ................................................. 16 OPERATING CHECK .......................................... 16 AIRTIGHT CHECK .............................................. 16 Removal ................................................................. 16 Inspection ............................................................... 17 OUTPUT ROD LENGTH CHECK ........................ 17 Installation .............................................................. 17 VACUUM HOSE ........................................................ 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 Inspection ............................................................... 18 HOSES AND CONNECTORS ............................. 18 CHECK VALVE .................................................... 18 FRONT DISC BRAKE (CL25VA/CL25VB TYPE) ..... 19 On-board Inspection ............................................... 19 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 19 Component ............................................................. 19 Pad Replacement ................................................... 19 Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor ............................................................... 20 REMOVAL ........................................................... 20 INSTALLATION ................................................... 21 Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly ... 21 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 21 CALIPER INSPECTION ...................................... 21 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 22 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 22 FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) ................ 23 On-board Inspection ............................................... 23 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 23 Component ............................................................. 23 Pad Replacement ................................................... 24 REMOVAL ........................................................... 24 HOW TO APPLY GREASE TO THE BRAKE PAD... 25 INSTALLATION ................................................... 25 Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor ............................................................... 26 REMOVAL ........................................................... 26 BR-1 E BR G H I J K L M INSTALLATION .................................................... 26 Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly ... 26 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 26 CALIPER INSPECTION ...................................... 27 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 27 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 28 REAR DISC BRAKE ................................................. 29 On-board Inspection ............................................... 29 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 29 Component ............................................................. 29 Pad Replacement ................................................... 30 Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor ............................................................... 31 REMOVAL ........................................................... 31 INSTALLATION .................................................... 31 Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly ... 32 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 32 CALIPER INSPECTION ...................................... 33 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 34 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 34 REAR DRUM BRAKE ...............................................38 Components ............................................................38 Removal ..................................................................38 Inspection ................................................................40 WHEEL CYLINDER .............................................40 WHEEL CYLINDER OVERHAUL ........................40 DRUM ..................................................................40 LINING .................................................................40 Installation ...............................................................41 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......42 General Specifications ............................................42 Brake Pedal ............................................................42 Front Disc Brake .....................................................42 Rear Disc Brake ......................................................43 Drum Brake .............................................................43 BR-2 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EFS0022M The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. C WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connecBR tors. Precautions for Brake System EFS0022N Recommended fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder, disc brake caliper and wheel cylinder, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. SBR686C ● Always torque brake lines when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-7, "Brake Burnishing Procedure". WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. ● Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" BR-3 G H I J K L EFS0022O M PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools PFP:00002 EFS0022P Tool name Description 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) S-NT360 Brake fluid pressure gauge Measuring brake fluid pressure NT151 BR-4 Symptom BRAKE Noise X X X Shake X Shimmy, Judder X BR-5 X X X X X AXLE SUSPENSION TIRES ROAD WHEEL STEERING X DRIVE SHAFT Rotor thickness variation Rotor rust Rotor deflection Rotor deformation Rotor runout Rotor damage Rotor imbalance Shims damaged Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Pads - uneven wear PS-6, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-22, BR-27 , BR-34 BR-7 BR-22, BR-27 , BR-34 BR-22, BR-27 , BR-34 BR-22, BR-27 , BR-34 BR-22, BR-27 , BR-34 BR-22, BR-27 , BR-34 BR-19, BR-23 , BR-29 BR-19, BR-24 , BR-30 BR-19, BR-24 , BR-30 Reference page Pads - damaged NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 EFS0022Q A Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X B C D E BR G H I X: Applicable J K L M ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Checking Brake Fluid Level ● ● ● PFP:00000 EFS0022R Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between the "Max" and "Min" lines on reservoir tank. If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system for leaks. SBR451D Checking Brake Line EFS0022S CAUTION: If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. 2. Check for oil leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while engine is running. SBR389C Changing Brake Fluid EFS0022T CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to each air bleeder valve. 3. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 4. Refill brake fluid reservoir until brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. 5. Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill brake fluid. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . SBR419C BR-6 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Bleeding Brake System EFS0022V CAUTION: ● Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation. ● Fill reservoir with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system. ● Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid. ● For models with ABS, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connectors or battery ground cable. ● Bleed air in the following order. Right rear brake → Left front brake → Left rear brake → Right front brake 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A B C D SBR995 E Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. Fully depress brake pedal several times. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. Close air bleeder valve. Release brake pedal slowly. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of air bleeder valve. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification. BR G H SBR419C Air bleeder valve Front and rear disc brake (CL25VA/ CL25VB/CL9HC type) Front disc brake (OPB27VA type) Rear drum brake I : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) J : 12 - 15 N·m (1.3 - 1.5 kg-m, 9 - 11 ft-lb) : 6.9 - 8.8 N·m (0.71 - 0.89 kg-m, 61 - 77 in-lb) Brake Burnishing Procedure K EFS0022U Burnish the brake contact surfaces according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal/foot pressure so that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. BR-7 L M BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE Hydraulic Circuit PFP:46210 EFS0022W WBR074 Removal EFS0022X CAUTION: ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. BR-8 BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring. Cover openings to prevent entrance of dirt whenever disconnecting brake line. A B C SBR992 D Inspection EFS0022Y Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. Installation 1. EFS0022Z E Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts. Specification Flare nut : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) Connect: 17 - 20 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 ft-lb) ing bolt 2. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 3. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . BR G H SBR686C I J K L M BR-9 DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE Inspection PFP:46400 EFS00230 CAUTION: ● Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder. ● Use new brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on paint areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Connect Tool to air bleeders of front and rear brakes on either LH and RH side. 2. Bleed air from the Tool. 3. Check fluid pressure by depressing brake pedal. Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) All QG18DE QR25DE without ABS QR25DE with ABS Applied pressure (Front brake) 7,355 (75, 1,067) 6,374 (65, 924) 6,374 (65, 924) Output pressure (Rear brake) 5,099 - 5,492 (52 - 56, 740 - 796) 3,775 - 4,168 (38 - 42, 548 - 604) 4,119 - 4,511 (42 - 46, 597 - 654) Applied model SBR822BA If output pressure is out of specification, replace dual proportioning valve. Bleed air after disconnecting the Tool. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . ● 4. SBR823BA BR-10 BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET Removal and Installation PFP:46501 A EFS00231 B C D E BR G WBR022 Inspection ● – – – – EFS00232 H Check brake pedal for following items: Brake pedal bend Clevis pin deformation Crack of any welded portion Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper I J SBR997 K L M BR-11 BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET Adjustment EFS00233 BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT ● Check brake pedal free height from metal panel and adjust if necessary. H : Free height Refer to BR-42, "Brake Pedal" . D : Depressed height 90 mm (3.54 in) Under force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running A : Pedal free play at pedal pad 1.0 - 3.0 mm (0.039 - 0.118 in) WBR075 1. 2. 3. Loosen lock nut and adjust pedal free height by turning brake booster input rod. Then tighten lock nut. Check pedal free play. CAUTION: Make sure that stop lamps go off when pedal is released. Check brake pedal's depressed height while engine is running. If lower than specification, check brake system for leaks, accumulation of air or any damage to components (master cylinder, wheel cylinder, etc.); then make necessary repairs. SBR229E STOP LAMP SWITCH AND ASCD CANCEL SWITCH CLEARANCE 1. Twist and pull to remove switch. 2. Pull up on brake pedal pad and hold. 3. Insert switch into retainer until switch plunger is completely depressed. 4. Turn the switch until it locks into place in the brake pedal bracket. NOTE: When turning the switch to lock into place, the switch backs off the stopper to the correct clearance automatically. 5. Release the brake pedal pad. BR-12 MASTER CYLINDER MASTER CYLINDER Removal PFP:46010 A EFS00234 B C D E BR G H I J WFIA0132E 1. Reservoir cap 2. Oil filter 3. Float 4. Reservoir tank 5. Seal 6. Cylinder body 7. Spring pin (with ABS) 8. Piston stopper pin (with ABS) 9. Secondary piston assembly 10. Primary piston assembly 11. Stopper cap L 12. Proportioning valve (without ABS) CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve, depressing brake pedal to empty fluid from master cylinder. 3. Remove brake line flare nuts from master cylinder. 4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts. BR-13 K M MASTER CYLINDER Disassembly 1. EFS00235 Bend claws of stopper cap outward and remove stopper cap. SBR234E 2. 3. Drive out spring pin from cylinder body (with ABS). Draw out reservoir tank and seals. SBR231E 4. 5. Remove piston stopper pin while piston is pushed into cylinder (with ABS). Remove piston assemblies. ● If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly, gradually apply compressed air through fluid outlet. SBR232E Inspection EFS00236 Check for the following items. Replace any part if damaged. Master cylinder: ● Pin holes or scratches on inner wall. Piston: ● Deformation of or scratches on piston cups. Assembly 1. EFS00237 Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston assembly. ● Lubricate with brake fluid. ● Pay attention to alignment of secondary piston slit with valve stopper mounting hole of cylinder body (with ABS). WBR068 BR-14 MASTER CYLINDER A B C SBR221BA 2. 3. 4. D Install piston stopper pin while piston is pushed into cylinder (with ABS). Push reservoir tank seals and reservoir tank into cylinder body. ● Lubricate with brake fluid. Install spring pin (with ABS). E BR G SBR232E 5. ● Install stopper cap. Before installing stopper cap, ensure that claws are bent inward. H I J SBR235E Installation 1. 2. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and secure mounting nuts lightly. Tighten master cylinder mounting nuts. Master cylinder 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. L : 12 - 15 N·m (1.2 - 1.5 kg-m, 9 - 11 ft-lb) Fill reservoir tank with new brake fluid. CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. Plug all ports on master cylinder with fingers to prevent air suction while releasing brake pedal. Have driver depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air comes out of master cylinder. Fit brake lines to master cylinder. Tighten flare nuts. Flare nuts K EFS00238 : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . BR-15 M SBR236E BRAKE BOOSTER BRAKE BOOSTER On-vehicle Service PFP:47200 EFS00239 OPERATING CHECK 1. 2. Stop engine and depress brake pedal several times. Check that pedal stroke does not change. Depress brake pedal, then start engine. If pedal goes down slightly, operation is normal. SBR002A AIRTIGHT CHECK 1. 2. Start engine, and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress brake pedal several times slowly. The pedal should go further down the first time, and then it should gradually rise thereafter. Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. SBR365AA Removal EFS0023A CAUTION: ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● Be careful not to deform or bend brake lines, during removal of booster. ● Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. ● Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, the dash panel may damage the threads. ● Attach the check valve in the correct orientation. 1. Remove strut tower bar, if equipped. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . 2. Remove air cleaner and inlet duct. Refer to EM-101, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove the brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-13, "Removal" . 4. Remove vacuum hose from the brake booster. Refer to BR-18, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 6. Remove the brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 7. Remove the nuts on the brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 8. Remove brake booster assembly from the engine compartment side. BR-16 SBR232CB BRAKE BOOSTER Inspection EFS0023B A OUTPUT ROD LENGTH CHECK 1. 2. 3. Apply vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.69 inHg) to brake booster with a hand vacuum pump. Add preload of 19.6 N (2 kg, 4.4 lb) to output rod. Check output rod length. Specified length B : 10.275 - 10.525 mm (0.4045 - 0.4144 in) C D SBR208E Installation EFS0023C E CAUTION: ● Be careful not to deform or bend brake lines, during installation of booster. ● Replace clevis pin if damaged. BR ● Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Take care not to damage brake booster mounting bolt thread when installing. Due to the acute G angle of installation, the threads can be damaged with the dash panel. 1. Before fitting booster, temporarily adjust clevis to dimension H shown. 2. Fit booster, then secure mounting nuts (brake pedal bracket to master cylinder) lightly. I 3. Connect brake pedal and booster input rod with clevis pin. 4. Install and tighten brake booster mounting nuts to specification. Brake booster 5. 6. 7. 8. : 13 - 16 N·m (1.3 - 1.6 kg-m, 9 - 12 ft-lb) Install master cylinder. Refer to BR-15, "Installation" . Connect brake booster vacuum hose. Adjust brake pedal height. Refer to BR-12, "BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT" . Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . J WFIA0042E K L M BR-17 VACUUM HOSE VACUUM HOSE Removal and Installation PFP:41920 EFS0023D CAUTION: When installing vacuum hoses, pay attention to the following points: ● Do not apply any oil or lubricants to vacuum hose with check valve. ● Insert vacuum tube into vacuum hose as shown. ● Install vacuum hose with the internal check valve oriented in the correct direction. The arrow on the hose should point to the engine connection. SBR225B Inspection EFS0023E HOSES AND CONNECTORS Check vacuum lines and connections for airtightness, improper attachment, chafing and deterioration. CHECK VALVE Check vacuum with a vacuum pump. Connect to booster side Vacuum should exist Connect to engine side Vacuum should not exist SBR844B BR-18 FRONT DISC BRAKE (CL25VA/CL25VB TYPE) FRONT DISC BRAKE (CL25VA/CL25VB TYPE) On-board Inspection PFP:41000 A EFS00321 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Inspect the thickness of the pad through the caliper inspection hole. Use a ruler or caliper for inspection if necessary. Standard Standard thickness Repair limit thickness B C : 11 mm (0.433 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) D BRA0010D Component E EFS0031R BR G H I J K L M WFIA0284E 1. Main pin 2. Pin boot 3. Torque member fixing bolt 4. Torque member 5. Shim cover 6. Inner shim 7. Inner pad 8. Pad retainer 9. Outer pad 10. Outer shim 11. Connecting bolt 12. Copper washer 13. Main pin bolt 14. Air bleeder valve 15. Cylinder body 16. Piston seal 17. Piston 18. Piston boot Pad Replacement EFS0031S WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ● When cylinder body is open, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. BR-19 FRONT DISC BRAKE (CL25VA/CL25VB TYPE) 1. Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on rotor. Always replace shims when replacing pads. If shims are rusted or show peeling of the rubber coat, replace them with new shims. Remove master cylinder reservoir cap. 2. 3. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to MA-32, "Tire Rotation" . Remove pin bolt. ● ● SBR976B 4. 5. Open cylinder body upward. Then remove pad with retainers, inner and outer shims. ● It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. Reverse the removal procedure to install. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-7, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . SBR932C NOTE: Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back piston. Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor EFS00322 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to MA-32, "Tire Rotation" . Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-6, "Changing Brake Fluid" . Remove torque member fixing bolts and brake hose connecting bolt. WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. ● It is not necessary to remove brake hose connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. Remove disc rotor. SBR979B BR-20 FRONT DISC BRAKE (CL25VA/CL25VB TYPE) INSTALLATION A CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install brake hose to caliper and tighten connecting bolt to specification. Refer to BR-19, "Component" . CAUTION: Install new copper washers. 3. Install all parts and tighten all bolts. Refer to BR-19, "Component" . 4. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . B C D E SBR980B Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly EFS00323 BR DISASSEMBLY 1. Push out piston with piston boot with compressed air. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of piston. G H I SBR772 2. 3. J Remove piston seal with a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or score cylinder wall. Remove the pad retainer. CAUTION: When removing the pad retainer from the torque member, lift it up and out in the direction of the arrows in the figure. K L M SBR556E CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: ● Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. ● Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Use brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oil. BR-21 FRONT DISC BRAKE (CL25VA/CL25VB TYPE) Piston CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. ● Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. Slide Pin, Pin Bolt and Pin Boot Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Rubbing Surface Check rotor for roughness, cracks or chips. Runout 1. 2. Secure rotor to wheel hub with at least two nuts (M12 x 1.25). Check runout using a dial indicator. CAUTION: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring. Refer to FAX-5, "Front Wheel Bearing" Maximum runout 3. a. b. c. d. 4. : 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) If the runout is out of specification, find minimum runout mounting position as follows: SBR219C Remove nuts and rotor from wheel hub. Shift the rotor one hole and secure rotor to wheel hub with nuts. Measure runout. Repeat steps a. to c. so that minimum runout position can be found. If the runout is still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe (“MAD, DL-8700”, “AMMCO 700 and 705” or equivalent). Thickness Thickness variation (At least 8 positions) ● :Maximum 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) If rotor thickness variation exceeds the specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. Rotor thickness repair limit : 20 mm (0.79 in) ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Insert piston seal into groove in cylinder body. With piston boot fitted to piston, insert piston boot into groove on cylinder body and install piston. Properly secure piston boot. SBR574 BR-22 FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) On-board Inspection PFP:41000 A EFS0031J PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Inspect the thickness of the pad through the caliper inspection hole. Use a ruler or caliper for inspection if necessary. Standard Standard thickness Repair limit thickness B C : 9.3 mm (0.366 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) D PFIA0228J Component E EFS0031K NOTE: Refer to BR-25, "HOW TO APPLY GREASE TO THE BRAKE PAD" for how to apply grease to brake pads. BR G H I J K L M WFIA0285E 1. Piston 2. Piston seal 3. Piston boot 4. Cap 5. Air bleeder 6. Bolt 7. Clips 8. Pad pins 9. Caliper 10. Inner pad 11. Cross spring 12. Outer pad 13. Pad wear sensor 14. Pad wear sensor BR-23 FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) CAUTION: ● Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. ● While the brake pad and cylinder body are separated, the piston may suddenly jump out, so do not depress the brake pedal. ● Apart from caliper assembly, disassembly or replacement, there is no need to remove caliper bolts or brake hose or tube. ● Do not damage piston boot. ● Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid. Pad Replacement EFS0031L REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove wheels and tires from vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . Remove the clips from the pad pins using a suitable tool. PFIA0274E 3. Remove the pad pins while holding down the cross spring, then remove the cross spring from the caliper. BRB0328D 4. Remove the pad from the caliper. BRB0329D BR-24 FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) HOW TO APPLY GREASE TO THE BRAKE PAD Pad Side A Apply Molykote AS880N grease or silicone-based grease about 0.5 g (0.018 oz) per surface equally to back plate side of Inner Pad and Outer Pad as shown. CAUTION: Make sure no foreign material contaminates the grease. B C D PFIA0235E INSTALLATION 1. 2. E Insert the piston to the position where the pad is attached. CAUTION: By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the BR level of the surface of the reservoir tank. NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), etc., makes it easier to push in the piston. G Install pad as shown. CAUTION: ● Attach the pad with wear sensor to the outer side. H ● The side of the shim with the larger cutouts should be on the entry side of the disc rotor rotation. I J PFIA0275E 3. 4. 5. 6. Insert the upper pad pin from the inner cylinder side, then insert firmly to the outer cylinder side through the hole in the top of the pad. Place the top of the cross spring over the top pad pin, press in the cross spring, push the lower pad pin from the inner cylinder side to the outer cylinder side, and secure the cross spring as shown. Insert the clips in the small hole at the end of the pad pins. CAUTION: If the clip is not fully attached, the pad pin or the pad could fall out while the vehicle is in motion. Install the wheels and tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . BR-25 K L M PFIA0276E FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor EFS0031M REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove wheels and tires from vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-6, "Changing Brake Fluid" . Remove the brake pad. Refer to BR-24, "Pad Replacement" . Remove the brake tube flare nut using a flare wrench. LFIA0200E 5. 6. Remove the caliper bolt and remove the caliper assembly from the vehicle. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid “DOT3” ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Install new copper washers. 2. Install caliper assembly to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: When attaching the caliper assembly to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle washers and caliper assembly attachment surfaces. 3. Attach the brake tube to the caliper assembly and partially tighten the flare nut. 4. Using a flare nut torque wrench, tighten the caliper assembly and brake tube connection flare nut to the specified torque. 5. Attach brake pad. Refer to BR-24, "Pad Replacement" . 6. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . 7. Install the wheels and tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly LFIA0200E EFS0031N DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Insert a piece of wood as shown, blow air in through the flare nut mounting hole, and remove the piston and piston boot. If the four pistons do not all come out at the same time, press the piston(s) that have come out a ways into the cylinder body and blow air in again. WARNING: Do not get your fingers caught in the piston. Remove the piston boot from the piston. BRB0261D BR-26 FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) 3. Using a screwdriver, remove the piston seal. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. ● Never remove the four bolts from the inner and outer sides of the caliper and do not tighten them further. A B C PFIA0270E D CALIPER INSPECTION Caliper CAUTION: ● Use new brake fluid to clean the caliper. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. ● Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper as necessary. E BR Piston CAUTION: ● The piston surface is plated, do not repair the piston using sandpaper. ● Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage, and replace the caliper as necessary. G DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection H Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. I Runout Inspection 1. 2. Using wheel nuts, attach disc rotor to the wheel hub using at least two wheel nuts. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. J Standard value (measured at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge) Runout limit : 0.050 mm (0.0020 (with it attached to the vehicle) in) or less Runout limit (just the disc rotor) : 0.040 mm (0.0016 in) or less 3. K L CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle endplay is 0 mm (0 BRA0580D in). If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is outside the standard, replace disc rotor. Standard Standard thickness Wear limit Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) : 22 mm (0.87 in) : 20 mm (0.79 in) : 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or less SBR020B BR-27 M FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE) ASSEMBLY 1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . CAUTION: Do not use Nissan Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. PFIA0271E 2. 3. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. Insert the piston into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. PFIA0277E 4. Attach the shim and shim cover to the pad and attach to the caliper. BR-28 REAR DISC BRAKE REAR DISC BRAKE On-board Inspection PFP:44000 A EFS0037T PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Inspect the thickness of the pad through the caliper inspection hole. Use a ruler or caliper for inspection if necessary. Standard Standard thickness Repair limit thickness B C : 10 mm (0.39 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) D BRA0010D Component E EFS0023M BR G H I J K L M WBR076 1. Nut 4. Toggle lever 5. Cam 6. Cam boot 7. Brake hose 8. Connecting bolt 9. Copper washers 10. Air bleeder valve 2. Washer 3. 11. Pin bolt Return spring 12. Cable guide 13. Cylinder body 14. Strut 15. O-ring 16. Push rod 17. Key plate 18. Ring C 19. Seat 20. Spring 21. Spring cover 22. Ring B 23. Piston seal 24. Ring A 25. Spacer 26. Wave washer 27. Spacer 28. Ball bearing 29. Adjuster 30. Cup 31. Piston 32. Piston boot 33. Inner shim 34. Inner pad 35. Outer pad 36. Outer shim BR-29 REAR DISC BRAKE 37. Pin 38. Pin boot 40. Torque member 41. Torque member fixing bolt 39. Pad retainer Pad Replacement EFS0023N WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ● When cylinder body is open, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ● Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on rotor. Always replace shims in replacing pads. ● If shims are rusted or show peeling of rubber coat, replace them with new shims. ● It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-7, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . 1. Remove master cylinder reservoir cap. 2. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to MA-32, "Tire Rotation" . 3. Remove brake cable mounting bolt and lock spring. SBR938C 4. 5. 6. Release parking brake control lever, then disconnect cable from the caliper. Remove upper pin bolt. Open cylinder body downward and secure with wire as shown. Then remove pad retainers, and inner and outer shims. Standard pad thickness Pad wear limit : 10 mm (0.39 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) SBR916C 7. When installing new pads, push piston into cylinder body by gently turning piston clockwise using suitable commercial service tool or long nose pliers, as shown. NOTE: Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back piston. SBR641 BR-30 REAR DISC BRAKE A B C SBR868C 8. D Adjust the piston to the right angle as shown. E BR G SBR306E 9. Install caliper assembly. ● As shown in the figure, align the piston's concave to the pad's convex, then install the cylinder body to the torque member. H I J SBR307E Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor K EFS0023O REMOVAL WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. 1. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to MA-32, "Tire Rotation" . 2. Remove brake cable mounting bolt and lock spring. 3. Release parking brake control lever, then disconnect cable from the caliper. 4. Remove torque member fixing bolts and brake hose connecting bolt. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove brake hose connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. SBR939C 5. Remove caliper assembly. 6. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install disc rotor. Install brake hose to caliper securely.Tighten connectiong bolt to specification. Refer to BR-29, "Component" . BR-31 L M REAR DISC BRAKE CAUTION: Install new copper washers. 3. Install caliper assembly. ● As shown in the figure, align the piston's concave to the pad's convex, then install the cylinder body to the torque member. 4. Install all parts and tighten all bolts to specification. Refer to BR29, "Component" . 5. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly SBR307E EFS0023P DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove piston by turning it counterclockwise with suitable commercial service tool or long nose pliers. SBR868C SBR646 2. Pry off ring A from piston with suitable pliers and remove cup, adjuster, bearing, spacers, and wave washer. SBR889 BR-32 REAR DISC BRAKE 3. a. b. Disassemble cylinder body. Pry off ring B with suitable pliers, then remove spring cover, spring and seat. Pry off ring C, then remove key plate, push rod and rod. A B C SBR088B D c. Remove piston seal with a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder body. E BR G SBR656 4. Remove return spring, toggle lever and cable guide. H I J SBR877 K CALIPER INSPECTION CAUTION: Use brake fluid to clean cylinder. Never use mineral oil. L Cylinder Body ● ● ● Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if necessary. Piston CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign matter is stuck to sliding surface. Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. Pin and Pin Boot Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. BR-33 M REAR DISC BRAKE DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Rubbing Surface Check rotor for roughness, cracks or chips. Runout 1. 2. 3. Secure rotor to wheel hub with two nuts (M12 x 1.25). Check runout using a dial indicator. CAUTION: Make sure that axial end play is within the specifications before measuring. Refer to RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Change relative positions of rotor and wheel hub so that runout is minimized. Maximum runout : 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) SBR219C Thickness Rotor repair limit Standard thickness Standard thickness (with Spec V brake package) Minimum thickness Minimum thickness (with Spec V brake package) Maximum thickness variation (At least 8 portions) : 9 mm (0.35 in) : 7 mm (0.28 in) : 8 mm (0.31 in) : 6 mm (0.24 in) : 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) ASSEMBLY 1. Insert cam with depression facing toward open end of cylinder. SBR247B 2. Generously apply rubber grease to strut and push rod to make insertion easy. SBR248B BR-34 REAR DISC BRAKE 3. Fit push rod into square hole in key plate. Also match convex portion of key plate with concave portion of cylinder. A B C SBR893 D 4. Install ring C with a suitable tool. E BR G WFIA0077E 5. Install seat, spring, spring cover and ring B with snap ring pliers and a suitable press and drift. H I J SBR869C K L M SBR879 6. Install cup in the specified direction. SBR892 BR-35 REAR DISC BRAKE 7. 8. Install cup, adjuster, bearing, spacers, washer and ring A with a suitable tool. Insert piston seal into groove on cylinder body. SBR100B 9. With piston boot fitted to piston, insert piston boot into groove on cylinder body and fit piston by turning it clockwise with long nose pliers, or suitable commercial service tool. SBR646 SBR868C 10. Install toggle lever, return spring and cable guide. SBR027D BR-36 REAR DISC BRAKE 11. Adjust the piston to the right angle as shown. A B C SBR306E D E BR G H I J K L M BR-37 REAR DRUM BRAKE REAR DRUM BRAKE Components PFP:43206 EFS0023T LBR139 1. Air bleeder valve 2. Cylinder body 3. Wheel cylinder 4. Shoe 5. Shoe hold-down spring 6. Brake drum 7. Return spring 8. Return spring 9. Shoe 10. Adjuster spring 11. Adjuster 12. Shoe hold-down pin 13. Adjuster plug 14. Back plate 15. Retainer 16. Adjusting lever 17. Washer 18. Toggle lever 19. Dust cover 20. Piston 21. Piston cap 22. Spring Removal EFS0023U WARNING: Clean brake lining with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne materials or other materials. CAUTION: Make sure parking brake lever is completely released. 1. Remove wheel and tire. Refer to MA-32, "Tire Rotation" . BR-38 REAR DRUM BRAKE 2. Release parking brake lever fully, then remove drum. ● If drum is hard to remove, remove adjuster plug. Shorten adjuster as shown to make clearance between brake shoe and drum. Install two bolts as shown. Tighten the two bolts gradually. A B C LBR027 D E BR G LBR030 3. 4. 5. After removing retainer, remove spring by rotating shoes. NOTE: Be careful not to damage parking brake cable when separating it. Remove adjuster. Disconnect parking brake cable from toggle lever. H I J ABR015 6. Remove retainer ring with a suitable tool. Then separate toggle lever and adjusting lever from the brake shoe. K L M ABR016 BR-39 REAR DRUM BRAKE Inspection EFS0023V WHEEL CYLINDER ● ● Check wheel cylinder for leakage. Check for wear, damage and loose conditions. Replace if any such condition exists. SBR330C WHEEL CYLINDER OVERHAUL ● ● Check all internal parts for wear, rust and damage. Replace if necessary. Be careful not to scratch cylinder body when installing pistons. LBR028 DRUM Maximum inner diameter Out-of-roundness ● ● ● : 204.5 mm (8.05 in) : 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) or less Contact surface should be fine finished with No. 120 to 150 emery paper. Using a drum lathe, resurface brake drum if it shows score, partial wear or stepped wear. After brake drum has been completely reconditioned or replaced, check drum and shoes for proper contact pattern. LBR031 LINING Check lining thickness. Standard lining thickness Lining wear limit : 4.5 mm (0.177 in) : 1.5 mm (0.059 in) WBR186 BR-40 REAR DRUM BRAKE Installation ● ● 1. 2. EFS0023W Always perform shoe clearance adjustment. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" . Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums, after replacing linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-7, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . Fit toggle lever and adjusting lever to brake shoe with retainer ring. Apply brake grease to the contact areas shown. A B C D E LBR029 BR 3. Shorten adjuster by rotating it. ● Pay attention to direction of adjuster. G Wheel Left Right Screw Left-hand thread H Right-hand thread I LBR026 4. Connect parking brake cable to toggle lever. 5. Install all parts. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage wheel cylinder piston boots. 6. Check that all parts are installed properly. CAUTION: Pay attention to direction of adjuster assembly. 7. Install brake drum. 8. When installing new wheel cylinder or overhauling wheel cylinder, bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . 9. Adjust parking brake. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" . 10. Install wheel and tire. Refer to MA-32, "Tire Rotation" . BR-41 J K L LBR032 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 EFS0023X Unit: mm (in) Applied Model QG18DE Brake model CL25VA Pad length × width × thickness 125.6 × 46.0 × 11.0 (4.94 × 1.811 × 0.433) 117.1 × 53.3 × 9.3 (4.61 × 2.098 × 0.366) Rotor outer diameter × thickness 257 × 22 (10.12 × 0.87) Cylinder bore diameter/caliper bore diameter 15.87 (5/8) type a 17.45 (11/16) type b 33.96 (1 11/32) Lining length × width × thickness 219.4 × 35 × 4.5 (8.64 × 1.38 × 0.177) 89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.39) 203.2 (8) Cylinder bore diameter Brake fluid 232 × 7 (9.13 × 0.28) or 278 × 9 (10.94 × 0.35)* 232 × 7 (9.13 × 0.28) 23.81 (15/16) Dual proportioning valve Split point [kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)] × reducing ratio 1,961 (20,284) × 0.2 Booster model Brake booster 305 × 22 (12.01 × 0.87) CL9HC Valve model Control valve 280 × 22 (11.02 × 0.87) LT20G Drum inner diameter/Disc diameter × thickness Master cylinder OPB27VA 38 (1.50) × 2 + 44 (1.73) × 2 Brake model Rear brake CL25VB 57.2 (2.252) Cylinder bore diameter Front brake QR25DE 2,942 (30,427) × 0.2 M215T Primary: 230 (9.06) Secondary: 205 (8.07) Diaphragm diameter Recommended brake fluid DOT 3 *: With Spec V brake package. Brake Pedal EFS00240 Unit: mm (in) Free height “H”* M/T 156 - 166 (6.14 - 6.54) A/T 164.9 - 174.9 (6.49 - 6.89) Depressed height "D" [under force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] 90 (3.54) Pedal free play "A" 1.0 - 3.0 (0.039 - 0.118) *: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel. Front Disc Brake EFS0023Y Unit: mm (in) Brake model CL25VA/CL25VB OPB27VA Pad wear limit Minimum thickness 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) Rotor repair limit Minimum thickness 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) BR-42 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Rear Disc Brake EFS00320 Unit: mm (in) Brake model CL9HC Pad wear limit Minimum thickness 2.0 (0.079) Rotor repair limit Minimum thickness 8.0 (0.31) or 6.0 (0.24)* B C *: With Spec V brake package. Drum Brake EFS0023Z Unit: mm (in) Brake model Lining wear limit Drum repair limit A D LT20G Minimum thickness 1.5 (0.059) Maximum inner diameter 204.5 (8.05) Maximum out-of round 0.03 (0.0012) E BR G H I J K L M BR-43 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) BR-44 F BRAKES A SECTION BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS ABS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 5 Purpose .................................................................... 5 Operation ................................................................. 5 ABS Hydraulic Circuit ............................................... 5 System Components ................................................ 6 System Description .................................................. 6 SENSOR ............................................................... 6 CONTROL UNIT (BUILT-IN ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT) ......................................... 6 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT .............. 7 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 8 Schematic ................................................................ 9 Wiring Diagram — ABS — ..................................... 10 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 14 Self-diagnosis ......................................................... 14 FUNCTION .......................................................... 14 SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 14 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) .................................. 15 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) ................. 15 CONSULT-II ........................................................... 16 CONSULT-II APPLICATION TO ABS .................. 16 ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE .................................................................. 16 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ......................... 17 SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 17 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE ............... 18 DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE .......................... 19 ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ............................. 20 DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 21 ACTIVE TEST MODE ......................................... 21 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION ........... 22 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 22 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 22 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION ... 23 Preliminary Check .................................................. 23 Ground Circuit Check ............................................. 25 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND ............................................................ 25 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 26 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart .......................... 26 WHEEL SENSOR OR ROTOR ................................. 27 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 27 ABS ACTUATOR SOLENOID VALVE AND SOLENOID VALVE RELAY ................................................ 29 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 29 MOTOR RELAY OR MOTOR .................................... 31 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 31 LOW VOLTAGE ........................................................ 33 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 33 CONTROL UNIT ....................................................... 35 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 35 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 36 Symptom 1. ABS Works Frequently ....................... 36 Symptom 2. Unexpected Pedal Action ................... 36 Symptom 3. Long Stopping Distance ..................... 37 Symptom 4. ABS Does Not Work ........................... 38 Symptom 5. Pedal Vibration and Noise .................. 38 Symptom 6. Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ........................ 39 Symptom 7. Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition BRC-1 E BRC G H I J K L M Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 41 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ..............................44 Removal and Installation .........................................44 FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ...................................44 REAR WHEEL SENSOR (REAR DRUM) ............44 REAR WHEEL SENSOR (REAR DISC) ..............45 SENSOR ROTOR ................................................45 ACTUATOR .........................................................46 BRC-2 PRECAUTIONS [ABS] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EFS0037M The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. C WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or BRC harness connectors. Precautions for Brake System EFS0028O Recommended fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder, disc brake caliper and wheel cylinder, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. SBR686C ● Always torque brake lines when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-7, "Brake Burnishing Procedure". WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. ● Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" BRC-3 G H I J K L EFS0028P M PREPARATION [ABS] PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools PFP:00002 EFS0037L Tool name Description 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) S-NT360 BRC-4 DESCRIPTION [ABS] DESCRIPTION Purpose PFP:00000 A EFS00246 The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) consists of electronic and hydraulic components. It allows for control of braking force so locking of the wheels can be avoided. 1. Improves proper tracking performance through steering wheel operation. 2. Eases obstacle avoidance through steering wheel operation. 3. Improves vehicle stability. Operation ● ● ● B C EFS00247 When the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 MPH), this system does not work. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) has a self-test function. The system turns on the ABS warning lamp for 1 second each time the ignition switch is turned “ON”. After the engine is started, the ABS warning lamp turns off. The system performs a test the first time the vehicle reaches 6 km/h (4 MPH). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABS performs this self-test. This is a normal part of the self-test feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS warning lamp will stay on. While driving, a mechanical noise may be heard during ABS operation. This is a normal condition. ABS Hydraulic Circuit D E BRC EFS00248 G H I J K L M ABR752 1. Inlet solenoid valve 2. Outlet solenoid valve 3. Pump 4. Motor 5. Bypass check valve 6. Damper 7. Solenoid valve relay actuator BRC-5 DESCRIPTION [ABS] System Components EFS00249 WBR035 System Description EFS0024A SENSOR The sensor unit consists of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a bar magnet around which a coil is wound. The front sensors are installed on the front spindles and the rear sensors are installed on the rear spindles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a sine-wave pattern. The frequency and voltage increase(s) as the rotating speed increases. SBR124B CONTROL UNIT (BUILT-IN ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT) The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal current sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp to light up. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the control unit, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation. (For control unit layout, refer to BRC-7, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT" .) WBR039 BRC-6 DESCRIPTION [ABS] ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT The ABS actuator and electric unit contains: ● An electric motor and pump ● Two relays ● Eight solenoid valves, each inlet and outlet for — LH front — RH front — LH rear — RH rear ● ABS control unit This component controls the hydraulic circuit and increases, holds or decreases hydraulic pressure to all or individual wheels. The ABS actuator and electric unit is serviced as an assembly. A B C WBR040 E ABS Actuator Operation Inlet solenoid valve Outlet solenoid valve OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is directly transmitted to caliper via the inlet solenoid valve. Pressure hold ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Hydraulic circuit is shut off to hold the caliper brake fluid pressure. G Pressure decrease ON (Closed) ON (Open) Caliper brake fluid is sent to reservoir via the outlet solenoid valve. Then it is pushed up to the master cylinder by pump. H Pressure increase OFF (Open) Normal brake operation ABS operation D OFF (Closed) BRC Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is transmitted to caliper. I J K L M BRC-7 DESCRIPTION [ABS] Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EFS0024B WFIA0039E BRC-8 DESCRIPTION [ABS] Schematic EFS0024C A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0001E BRC-9 DESCRIPTION [ABS] Wiring Diagram — ABS — EFS0024D WFWA0002E LBR071 BRC-10 DESCRIPTION [ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0004E LBR072 BRC-11 DESCRIPTION [ABS] LFWA0053E BRC-12 DESCRIPTION [ABS] ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE ITEM CONDITION NO. COLOR 10 L/B ABS WARNING LAMP IN COMBINATION METER WHEN ABS LAMP IS ACTIVE WHEN ABS LAMP IS NOT ACTIVE A DATA (APPROX.) 0V 11 GY/L DATA LINK CONNECTOR — — 12 OR/B DATA LINK CONNECTOR — — 14 R/G STOP LAMP SWITCH 22 G/B DATA LINK CONNECTOR WHEN BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHEN BRAKE PEDAL IS RELEASED — B BATTERY VOLTAGE C BATTERY VOLTAGE 0V — D E BRC G H I J K L M BRC-13 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Self-diagnosis PFP:00000 EFS0024E FUNCTION ● When a problem occurs in the ABS, the warning lamp on the instrument panel comes on. To start the selfdiagnostic results mode, ground the self-diagnostic (check) terminal located on Data Link Connector. The location of the malfunction is indicated by the warning lamp flashing. SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Turn ignition switch OFF. Ground terminal 9 of Data Link Connector with a suitable harness. Turn ignition switch ON while grounding terminal 9. Do not depress brake pedal. WBR045 5. 6. 7. 8. After 3.0 seconds, the warning lamp starts flashing to indicate the malfunction code No. (See NOTE.) Verify the location of the malfunction with the malfunction code chart. Refer to BRC-26, "Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart" . Then make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures. After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the malfunction codes stored in the control unit. Refer to BRC-15, "HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)" . Rerun the self-diagnostic results mode to verify that the malfunction codes have been erased. WBR039 9. Disconnect the check terminal from the ground. The self-diagnostic results mode is now complete. 10. Check warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. 11. After making certain that warning lamp does not come on, test the ABS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly. NOTE: The indication terminates after 5 minutes. However, when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON, the indication starts flashing again. WBR045 BRC-14 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the warning lamp flashes on and off. When several malfunctions occur at one time, up to three code numbers can be stored; the latest malfunction will be indicated first. The indication begins with the start code 12. After that a maximum of three code numbers appear in the order of the latest one first. The indication then returns to the start code 12 to repeat (the indication will stay on for five minutes at most). Refer to BRC-26, "Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart" for a list of malfunction codes. A B C D E BRC SBR457D G HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the check terminal from ground (ABS warning lamp will stay lit). Within 12.5 seconds, ground the check terminal three times. Each terminal ground must last more than 1 second. The ABS warning lamp goes out after the erase operation has been completed. Perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to BRC-14, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Only the start code should appear, no malfunction codes. H I J ABR256 K L M BRC-15 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] CONSULT-II EFS0024F CONSULT-II APPLICATION TO ABS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Front right wheel sensor × × — Front left wheel sensor × × — Rear right wheel sensor × × — Rear left wheel sensor × × — ABS sensor × — — Stop lamp switch — × — Front right inlet solenoid valve × × × Front right outlet solenoid valve × × × Front left inlet solenoid valve × × × Front left outlet solenoid valve × × × Rear right inlet solenoid valve × × × Rear right outlet solenoid valve × × × Rear left inlet solenoid valve × × × Rear left outlet solenoid valve × × × Actuator solenoid valve relay × × — Actuator motor relay (ABS MOTOR is shown on the Data Monitor screen.) × × × ABS warning lamp — × — Battery voltage × × — Control unit × — — ITEM ×: Applicable —: Not applicable ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE Ignore the ECU part number displayed in the ECU PART NUMBER MODE. Refer to Parts Catalog to order the ECU. BRC-16 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure EFS0024G A SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 3. Start engine. 4. Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. B C D E LAT136 5. BRC Stop vehicle with engine running and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. G H SAIA0450E 6. Touch “ABS”. If "ABS" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULTII Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . I J K L WKIA0156E 7. ● 8. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. The screen shows the detected malfunction and how many times the ignition switch has been turned ON since the malfunction. Make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures. WFIA0043E BRC-17 M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] 9. After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the self-diagnostic results stored in the control unit by touching “ERASE”. 10. Check warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. 11. Test the ABS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly. PBR950C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE Diagnostic item Diagnostic item is detected when... Reference Page FR RH SENSOR1 [OPEN] ● Circuit for front right wheel sensor is open. (An abnormally high input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 FR LH SENSOR1 [OPEN] ● Circuit for front left wheel sensor is open. (An abnormally high input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 RR RH SENSOR1 [OPEN] ● Circuit for rear right sensor is open. (An abnormally high input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 RR LH SENSOR1 [OPEN] ● Circuit for rear left sensor is open. (An abnormally high input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 FR RH SENSOR1 [SHORT] ● Circuit for front right wheel sensor is shorted. (An abnormally low input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 FR LH SENSOR1 [SHORT] ● Circuit for front left wheel sensor is shorted. (An abnormally low input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 RR RH SENSOR1 [SHORT] ● Circuit for rear right sensor is shorted. (An abnormally low input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 RR LH SENSOR1 [SHORT] ● Circuit for rear left sensor is shorted. (An abnormally low input voltage is entered.) BRC-27 ABS SENSOR1 [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] ● Teeth damage on sensor rotor or improper installation of wheel sensor. (Abnormal wheel sensor signal is entered.) BRC-27 FR RH IN ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is open. (An abnormally low output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 FR LH IN ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is open. (An abnormally low output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 FR RH OUT ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for front right outlet solenoid valve is open. (An abnormally low output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 FR LH OUT ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for front left outlet solenoid valve is open. (An abnormally low output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 RR RH IN ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for rear right inlet solenoid valve is shorted. (An abnormally high output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 RR LH IN ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for rear left inlet solenoid valve is shorted. (An abnormally high output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 RR RH OUT ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for rear right outlet solenoid valve is shorted. (An abnormally high output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 RR LH OUT ABS SOL [OPEN, SHORT] ● Circuit for rear left outlet solenoid valve is shorted. (An abnormally high output voltage is entered.) BRC-29 ABS ACTUATOR RELAY [ABNORMAL] ● Actuator solenoid valve relay is ON, even if control unit sends off signal. ● Actuator solenoid valve relay is OFF, even if control unit sends on signal. ● Circuit for ABS motor relay is open or shorted. ● Circuit for actuator motor is open or shorted. ● Actuator motor relay is stuck. ABS MOTOR RELAY [ABNORMAL] BRC-18 BRC-29 BRC-31 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] Diagnostic item Diagnostic item is detected when... BATTERY VOLT [VB-LOW] ● Power source voltage supplied to ABS control unit is abnormally low. CONTROL UNIT ● Function of calculation in ABS control unit has failed. Reference Page A BRC-33 BRC-35 1: If one or more wheels spin on a rough or slippery road for 40 seconds or more, the ABS warning lamp will illuminate. This does not indicate a malfunction. Only in the case of the short-circuit (Code Nos. 26, 22, 32 and 36), after repair the ABS warning lamp also illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON. In this case, drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 1 minute as specified in BRC-14, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Check to ensure that the ABS warning lamp goes out while the vehicle is being driven. B C DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE D CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. E 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. BRC 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. G H SAIA0450E 5. Touch “ABS”. If "ABS" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULTII Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . I J K WKIA0156E 6. L Touch “DATA MONITOR”. M WFIA0043E BRC-19 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE When conducting Active test, vehicle must be stationary. ● When ABS warning lamp stays on, never conduct Active test. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 3. Start engine. 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. ● 5. SAIA0450E Touch “ABS”. If "ABS" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULTII Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . WKIA0156E 6. Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. WFIA0043E 7. Select active test item by touching screen. PBR976C BRC-20 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] 8. 9. Touch “START”. Carry out the active test by touching screen key. A B C PBR934C D DATA MONITOR MODE MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION FR LH SENSOR FR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR Drive vehicle. (Each wheel is rotating.) Wheel speed signal (Almost the same speed as speedometer.) WARNING LAMP Ignition switch is ON or engine is running. ABS warning lamp is turned on: ON ABS warning lamp is turned off: OFF STOP LAMP SW Brake is depressed. Depress the pedal: ON Release the pedal: OFF G MOTOR RELAY 1. Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least 1 minute. 2. Engine is running. ABS is not operating: OFF ABS is operating: ON H ACTUATOR RELAY Ignition switch is ON or engine is running. Ignition switch ON (Engine stops): OFF Engine running: ON FR LH OUT SOL FR LH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL FR RH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL 1. Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least 1 minute. 2. Engine is running. Operating conditions for each solenoid valve are indicated. ABS is not operating: OFF BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch is ON or engine is running. E BRC I J K Power supply voltage for control unit L ACTIVE TEST MODE TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT M Brake fluid pressure control operation FR RH SOL FR LH SOL RR RH SOL RR LH SOL ABS MOTOR Engine is running. IN SOL OUT SOL UP (Increase): OFF OFF KEEP (Hold): ON OFF DOWN (Decrease): ON ON ABS actuator motor ON: Motor runs (ABS motor relay ON) OFF: Motor stops (ABS motor relay OFF) NOTE: Active test will automatically stop ten seconds after the test starts. (TEST IS STOPPED monitor shows ON.) BRC-21 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00000 EFS0024H INTRODUCTION The ABS system has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives the actuators. It is essential that both kinds of signals are proper and stable. It is also important to check for conventional problems: such as air leaks in booster lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems; especially intermittent ones. By talking to the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS controlled vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins for information. BRC-22 SEF233G SEF234G TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION Preliminary Check PFP:00000 A EFS0024I 1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID B Check brake fluid for contamination. Has brake fluid been contaminated? Yes >> Replace. GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 2. C D 2. CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank. Low fluid level may indicate brake pad wear or leakage from brake line. Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Fill brake fluid. GO TO 3. E BRC G SBR451D H 3. CHECK BRAKE LINE I Check brake line for leakage. Is leakage present at or around brake lines, tubes or hoses or are any of these parts cracked or damaged? Yes >> Repair or replace as required. GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 4. J K L SBR389C 4. CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATION M Check brake booster for operation. Refer to BR-16, "OPERATING CHECK" . Also, check air tightness. Refer to BR-16, "AIRTIGHT CHECK" . Is brake booster airtight and functioning properly? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Replace. GO TO 5. SBR058C BRC-23 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [ABS] 5. CHECK BRAKE PAD, ROTOR, SHOE AND DRUM Check brake pad, rotor, shoe and drum. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT DISC BRAKE (CL25VA/CL25VB TYPE)" , BR-23, "FRONT DISC BRAKE (OPB27VA TYPE)" , BR-29, "REAR DISC BRAKE" or BR-38, "REAR DRUM BRAKE" . Are brake pads, rotors, shoes and drums functioning properly? Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Replace. SBR059C 6. RECHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank again. Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Fill brake fluid reservoir to specification. SBR451D 7. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Check warning lamp activation. Does warning lamp turn on when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Check fuse, warning lamp bulb and warning lamp circuit. WBR039 8. CHECK WARNING LAMP DEACTIVATION Check warning lamp for deactivation after engine is started. Does warning lamp turn off when engine is started? Yes >> GO TO 9. No (with CONSULT-II)>> Refer to BRC-17, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . No (without CONSULT-II)>> Refer to BRC-17, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . 9. DRIVE VEHICLE Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Does warning lamp remain off after vehicle has been driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute? Yes >> INSPECTION END No (with CONSULT-II)>> Refer to BRC-17, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . No (without CONSULT-II)>> Refer to BRC-17, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . BRC-24 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [ABS] Ground Circuit Check EFS0024J A ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND ● Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit connector terminals and ground. Resistance B : Approximately 0Ω C D LBR047 E BRC G H I J K L M BRC-25 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart Code No. Malfunctioning Part PFP:00000 EFS0024K Reference Page 12 Self-diagnosis could not detect any malfunctions. 45 Actuator front left outlet solenoid valve BRC-29 46 Actuator front left inlet solenoid valve BRC-29 41 Actuator front right outlet solenoid valve BRC-29 42 Actuator front right inlet solenoid valve BRC-29 51 Actuator rear right outlet solenoid valve BRC-29 52 Actuator rear right inlet solenoid valve BRC-29 55 Actuator rear left outlet solenoid valve BRC-29 56 Actuator rear left inlet solenoid valve BRC-29 25 *1 Front left sensor (open-circuit) BRC-27 26 *1 Front left sensor (short-circuit) BRC-27 21 *1 Front right sensor (open-circuit) BRC-27 22 *1 Front right sensor (short-circuit) BRC-27 31 *1 Rear right sensor (open-circuit) BRC-27 32 *1 Rear right sensor (short-circuit) BRC-27 35 *1 Rear left sensor (open-circuit) BRC-27 36 *1 Rear left sensor (short-circuit) BRC-27 18 *1 Sensor rotor BRC-27 61 *3 Actuator motor or motor relay BRC-31 Solenoid valve relay BRC-29 Power supply (Low voltage) BRC-33 Control unit BRC-35 Control unit power supply circuit Warning lamp bulb circuit Control unit or control unit connector Solenoid valve relay stuck Power supply for solenoid valve relay coil BRC-41 Fuse, warning lamp bulb or warning lamp circuit Control unit BRC-39 63 57 *2 71 Warning lamp stays on when ignition switch is turned ON. Warning lamp does not come on when ignition switch is turned ON. — Pedal vibration and noise — BRC-38 Long stopping distance — BRC-37 Unexpected pedal action — BRC-36 ABS does not work — BRC-38 ABS works frequently — BRC-36 ● *1: If one or more wheels spin on a rough or slippery road for 40 seconds or more, the ABS warning lamp will illuminate. This does not indicate a malfunction. Only in the case of the short-circuit (Code Nos. 26, 22, 32 and 36), after repair the ABS warning lamp also illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON. In this case, drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 1 minute as specified in BRC-14, "Self-diagnosis" . Check to ensure that the ABS warning lamp goes out while the vehicle is being driven. ● *2: The trouble code “57”, which refers to a low power supply voltage, does not indicate that the ABS control unit is malfunctioning. Do not replace the ABS control unit with a new one. ● *3: The trouble code “61” can sometimes appear when the ABS motor is not properly grounded. If it appears, be sure to check the condition of the ABS motor ground circuit connection. BRC-26 WHEEL SENSOR OR ROTOR [ABS] WHEEL SENSOR OR ROTOR Diagnostic Procedure PFP:47910 A EFS0024L Malfunction code No. 21, 22, 25, 26, 31, 32, 35, 36 or 18 NOTE: Wheel position should be distinguished by code No. except code No. 18 (sensor rotor). B 1. INSPECTION START C Wheel sensor inspection D >> GO TO 2. E BRC WFIA0074E G 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect connectors from ABS actuator and electric unit and wheel sensor of malfunction code No. Check terminals for damage or loose connection, then reconnect connectors. 2. Carry out self-diagnosis again. Does warning lamp activate again? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> INSPECTION END 3. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR ELECTRICAL 1. 2. I J Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminals. Code No. 21 or 22 (Front RH wheel) Terminals 4 (B) and 5 (W) Code No. 25 or 26 (Front LH wheel) Terminals 6 (G) and 7 (R) Code No. 31 or 32 (Rear RH wheel) Terminals 1 (LG) and 3 (PU) Code No. 35 or 36 (Rear LH wheel) Terminals 8 (L) and 9 (P) Resistance Front Rear H K L M : 1.45 - 1.85kΩ : 1.05 - 1.35kΩ Is resistance within specification? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> GO TO 4. WFIA0034E BRC-27 WHEEL SENSOR OR ROTOR [ABS] 4. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR Check each sensor for resistance. Resistance Front Rear : 1.45 - 1.85kΩ : 1.05 - 1.35kΩ Is resistance within specification? Yes >> Check the following. ● If resistance is within specification range, repair harness or connectors. – Harness connectors E11, E53, E55, B102, B103 – Harness for open or short between wheel sensor connectors and ABS actuator and electric unit No >> Replace wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR" WHEEL SENSOR (REAR DRUM)" . WFIA0040E or BRC-44, "REAR 5. CHECK TIRE Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. (See NOTE) Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). (See NOTE) 6. CHECK WHEEL BEARING Check wheel bearing axial end play. (See NOTE) Is wheel bearing axial end play within specifications? Refer to FAX-5, "Front Wheel Bearing" , or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Check wheel bearing. Refer to FAX-5, "Front Wheel Bearing" , or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . 7. CHECK SENSOR ROTOR Check sensor rotor for teeth damage. (See NOTE) Is sensor rotor free from damage? Yes >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit pin terminals for damage or the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector. Then retest. No >> Replace sensor rotor. Refer to BRC-45, "SENSOR ROTOR" . (See NOTE) BRC-28 ABS ACTUATOR SOLENOID VALVE AND SOLENOID VALVE RELAY [ABS] ABS ACTUATOR SOLENOID VALVE AND SOLENOID VALVE RELAY Diagnostic Procedure PFP:47600 A EFS0024M Malfunction code No. 41, 42, 45, 46, 51, 52, 55, 56, 63 B 1. INSPECTION START C Solenoid valve relay inspection D E BRC G H I J K WBR051 L >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK FUSE M Check 40A fusible link f . For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Is fusible link OK? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 6. 3. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect connector from ABS actuator and electric unit. Check terminals for damage or loose connection. Then reconnect connector. 2. Carry out self-diagnosis again. Does warning lamp activate again? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> INSPECTION END BRC-29 ABS ACTUATOR SOLENOID VALVE AND SOLENOID VALVE RELAY [ABS] 4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Repair harness or connector. 5. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 18 (Y) and ground. LBR052 Does battery voltage exist? Yes >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . No >> Check the following. ● If NG, repair harness or connectors. – Harness connector E55 – Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link. 6. REPLACE FUSE Replace 40A fusible link f . For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Does the fusible link blow when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 18 (Y) and ground. Continuity should not exist. Does continuity exist? Yes >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E55 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link. No >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC46, "ACTUATOR" . BRC-30 WFIA0012E MOTOR RELAY OR MOTOR [ABS] MOTOR RELAY OR MOTOR Diagnostic Procedure PFP:47600 A EFS0024N Malfunction code No. 61 B 1. INSPECTION START C ABS motor relay inspection D E BRC G H WBR054 I >> GO TO 2. J 2. CHECK FUSIBLE LINK Check 40A fusible link g . For fusible link layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Is fusible link OK? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 6. K L 3. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check terminals for damage or loose connection. Then reconnect connector. 2. Carry out self-diagnosis again. Does warning lamp activate again? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> INSPECTION END 4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Repair harness or connector. BRC-31 M MOTOR RELAY OR MOTOR [ABS] 5. CHECK MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground. LBR055 Does battery voltage exist? Yes >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . No >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E55 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link 6. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK Replace 40A fusible link g . For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Does the fusible link blow when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground. LBR056 Continuity should not exist. Does continuity exist? Yes >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E55 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link No >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . BRC-32 LOW VOLTAGE [ABS] LOW VOLTAGE Diagnostic Procedure PFP:00004 A EFS0024O Malfunction code No. 57 B 1. INSPECTION START C ABS actuator and electric unit power supply and ground circuit inspection D E BRC LBR057 G >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK FUSE H Check 10A fuse No. 31. For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Is fuse OK? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 6. 3. CHECK CONNECTOR I J 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check terminals for damage or loose connections. Then reconnect connector. 2. Carry out self-diagnosis again. Does warning lamp activate again? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> INSPECTION END K L 4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Repair harness or connector. BRC-33 M LOW VOLTAGE [ABS] 5. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 15 (GY) and ground. LBR058 Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . No >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E55 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse 6. REPLACE FUSE Replace 10A fuse 31. For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Does the fuse blow when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 15 (GY) and ground. LBR059 Continuity should not exist. Does continuity exist? Yes >> Check the following. ● If continuity exists, repair harness or connector. Harness connector E55 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse No >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . BRC-34 CONTROL UNIT [ABS] CONTROL UNIT Diagnostic Procedure PFP:27500 A EFS0024P Malfunction code No. 71 B 1. INSPECTION START C ABS actuator and electric unit power supply and ground circuit inspection D E BRC LBR057 G >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK CONNECTOR H 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check terminals for damage or loose connection. Then reconnect connector. 2. Carry out self-diagnosis again. Does warning lamp activate again? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> INSPECTION END I J 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage. Refer to BRC-33, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse K 4. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION M Does warning lamp indicate code No. 71 again? Yes or No Yes >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . No >> Inspect the system according to the code No. BRC-35 L TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS Symptom 1. ABS Works Frequently PFP:00007 EFS0024Q 1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BR-10, "Inspection" . Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> ● Repair. Then perform Preliminary Check. ● Refer to BR-11, "Inspection" . 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR 1. 2. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections. Perform wheel sensor check. Refer to BRC-27, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Is wheel sensor mechanism OK? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Repair. 3. CHECK FRONT AXLE Check front axles for excessive looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "Front Wheel Bearing" . Is front axle installed properly? Yes >> Go to BRC-36, "Symptom 2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . No >> Repair. Symptom 2. Unexpected Pedal Action EFS0024R 1. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE Check brake pedal stroke. Is brake pedal stroke excessive? Yes >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" . No >> GO TO 2. SBR540A 2. CHECK MECHANICAL BRAKE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector and check whether brake is effective. Does brake system function properly when brake pedal is depressed? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" . BRC-36 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION A Ensure warning lamp remains off while driving. Is warning lamp turned off? Yes >> GO TO 4. No (with CONSULT-II)>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC17, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . No (without CONSULT-II)>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-14, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . B C D WBR039 4. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR E 1. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connection. 2. Perform wheel sensor check. Refer to BRC-27, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BRC Is wheel sensor mechanism OK? Yes >> ● Check ABS actuator and electric unit pin terminals for damage, or the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector. G ● Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector. ● Retest. No >> Repair. H Symptom 3. Long Stopping Distance 1. CHECK MECHANICAL BRAKE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector and check whether stopping distance is still long. Does brake system function properly when brake pedal is depressed? Yes >> Perform Preliminary Check and air bleeding (if necessary). No >> Go to BRC-38, "Symptom 4. ABS Does Not Work" . NOTE: Stopping distance may be longer for vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. EFS0024S I J K L M BRC-37 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] Symptom 4. ABS Does Not Work EFS0024T 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION Does the ABS warning lamp activate? Yes or No Yes (with CONSULT-II)>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-17, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Yes (without CONSULT-II)>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-14, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . No >> Go to BRC-36, "Symptom 2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NOTE: ABS does not work when vehicle speed is under 10 km/h (6 MPH). Symptom 5. Pedal Vibration and Noise EFS0024U 1. INSPECTION START Pedal vibration and noise inspection. >> GO TO 2. SAT797A 2. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom appear only when engine is started? Yes (with CONSULT-II)>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-17, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Yes (without CONSULT-II)>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-14, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . No >> Go to BRC-36, "Symptom 2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NOTE: ABS may operate and cause vibration under any of the following conditions. ● Low friction (slippery) road. ● High speed cornering. ● Driving over bumps and potholes. BRC-38 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] Symptom 6. Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On A 1. INSPECTION START B EFS0024V Warning lamp circuit inspection. C D E BRC G LFIA0203E H >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK FUSE I Check 10A fuse No. 30. For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Is fuse OK? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 3. J 3. REPLACE FUSE K Replace 10A fuse No. 30. For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Does the fuse blow when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> Check wiring for short between fuse and combination meter. Repair as required. No >> INSPECTION END L M 4. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Does the warning lamp activate? Yes >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC46, "ACTUATOR" . No >> GO TO 5. WBR039 BRC-39 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector and combination meter connector M30. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 10 (L/B) and ground. LBR061 Does continuity exist? Yes >> Repair harness or connectors. No >> Check combination meter. ● Refer to DI-27, "WITH TACHOMETER" . BRC-40 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] Symptom 7. Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS0024W A 1. INSPECTION START B ABS control unit inspection. >> GO TO 2. C D E WBR039 2. CHECK FUSE BRC Check 10A fuse No. 31. For fuse layout, refer to PG-3, "Schematic" . Is fuse OK? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 8. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR G H Check ABS actuator and electric unit pin terminals for damage or bad connection of ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector. Then retest. Does warning lamp stay on when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> INSPECTION END 4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Repair harness or connector. I J K L M BRC-41 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 5. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 15 (GY) and ground. LBR063 Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E55 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse 6. CHECK WARNING LAMP 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Connect suitable wire between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 10 (L/B) and ground. LBR064 Does the warning lamp deactivate? Yes >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . No >> GO TO 7. BRC-42 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 7. CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector M30. Check continuity between combination meter connector M30 (body side) terminal 34 (L/B) and ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 10 (L/B). NOTE: Connect positive lead of multimeter to combination meter connector M30 (body side) terminal 34 (L/B) and negative lead to ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 10 (L/B). B C D Continuity should exist. Does continuity exist? Yes >> Check combination meter. ● Refer to DI-27, "WITH TACHOMETER" . No >> GO TO 8. E WFIA0013E BRC 8. REPLACE FUSE Replace fuse. Does the fuse blow when ignition switch is turned ON? Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> INSPECTION END G H 9. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E55 (body side) terminal 15 (GY) and ground. I J K L LBR066 Continuity should not exist. Does continuity exist? Yes >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E55 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse No >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-46, "ACTUATOR" . BRC-43 M REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [ABS] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal and Installation PFP:00000 EFS0024X CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly and move it away. FRONT WHEEL SENSOR WFIA0041E REAR WHEEL SENSOR (REAR DRUM) WFIA0090E BRC-44 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [ABS] REAR WHEEL SENSOR (REAR DISC) A B C D E BRC G H WFIA0091E SENSOR ROTOR Removal 1. I J Remove the drive shaft or rear wheel hub. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" , or RAX-6, "Removal" respectively. K L M SBR984C SBR873CA 2. Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller, drift and bearing replacer. BRC-45 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [ABS] Installation Install the sensor rotor. For front sensor rotor, use hammer and wooden block. For rear sensor rotor, use suitable drift and press. ● Always replace sensor rotor with new one. SBR985C ● Pay attention to the dimension of rear sensor rotor as shown in figure. Dimension h Rear Disc : 1.5 - 2.5 mm (0.06 - 0.10 in) Rear Drum : 17.7 - 18.7 mm (0.70 - 0.74 in) SBR986C ACTUATOR WFIA0092E Removal 1. 2. 3. Disconnect negative battery cable. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-6, "Changing Brake Fluid" . Remove the A/C high pressure and A/C low pressure lines. Refer to MTC-84, "Removal and Installation" . BRC-46 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [ABS] 4. 5. 6. Remove strut tower bar (if equipped). Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . Remove mounting bracket bolts. Disconnect harness connector and brake lines. Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Connect brake lines temporarily. Tighten bolts. Tighten brake lines. Connect harness connector and negative battery cable. Install strut tower bar (if equipped). Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . Refill and bleed the brake fluid. Then bleed air. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . Install the A/C high pressure and A/C low pressure lines. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" . A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M BRC-47 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [ABS] BRC-48 C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE A B SECTION CLUTCH CL D E CONTENTS QG18DE PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions .............................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5 CLUTCH SYSTEM ...................................................... 6 Components ............................................................. 6 Inspection and Adjustment ....................................... 7 CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................................................................... 7 BLEEDING PROCEDURE .................................... 7 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 9 Components ............................................................. 9 Removal ................................................................... 9 Disassembly ............................................................. 9 Inspection ............................................................... 10 Assembly ................................................................ 10 Installation .............................................................. 10 OPERATING CYLINDER ...........................................11 Components ............................................................11 Removal ..................................................................11 Disassembly ............................................................11 Inspection ................................................................11 Assembly ................................................................ 12 Installation .............................................................. 12 PIPING ...................................................................... 13 Removal ................................................................. 13 Installation .............................................................. 13 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM .......................... 14 Components ........................................................... 14 Removal ................................................................. 14 Inspection ............................................................... 14 Installation .............................................................. 14 CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL... 17 Components ........................................................... 17 Removal ................................................................. 17 Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 17 CLUTCH DISC .................................................... 17 CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL ................... 18 FLYWHEEL INSPECTION .................................. 18 Installation .............................................................. 18 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 19 Clutch Control System ............................................ 19 Clutch Master Cylinder ........................................... 19 Clutch Operating Cylinder ...................................... 19 Clutch Disc ............................................................. 19 Clutch Cover ........................................................... 19 Clutch Pedal ........................................................... 19 QR25DE PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 20 Precautions ............................................................. 20 PREPARATION ......................................................... 21 Special Service Tools ............................................. 21 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 21 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 22 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ................................... 22 CLUTCH SYSTEM .................................................... 23 Components ........................................................... 23 Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 24 CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................................................................. 24 BLEEDING PROCEDURE .................................. 24 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ................................ 26 Components ........................................................... 26 Removal ................................................................. 26 Disassembly ........................................................... 26 Inspection ............................................................... 26 Assembly ................................................................ 27 Installation .............................................................. 27 OPERATING CYLINDER .......................................... 28 Components ........................................................... 28 Removal ................................................................. 28 Disassembly ........................................................... 28 CL-1 F G H I J K L M Inspection ............................................................... 28 Assembly ................................................................ 29 Installation ............................................................... 29 PIPING ....................................................................... 30 Removal ................................................................. 30 Installation ............................................................... 30 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM ........................... 31 Components ........................................................... 31 Removal ................................................................. 31 Inspection After Removal ....................................... 31 Installation ............................................................... 32 CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL... 33 Components ........................................................... 33 Removal ..................................................................33 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................33 CLUTCH DISC .....................................................33 CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL ....................34 FLYWHEEL INSPECTION ...................................34 Installation ...............................................................34 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......35 Clutch Control System ............................................35 Clutch Master Cylinder ............................................35 Clutch Operating Cylinder .......................................35 Clutch Disc ..............................................................35 Clutch Cover ...........................................................35 Clutch Pedal ............................................................35 CL-2 PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 A ECS005RJ The recommended clutch system hydraulic fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”. B Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If any brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. CL Use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool) when removing or installing the clutch hydraulic tubes. Use new brake fluid to clean or wash any parts of the clutch master cylinder and operating cylinder. D Never use any type of mineral oil such as gasoline or kerosene to clean or wash any parts of the clutch system. It will ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system. E SBR686C WARNING: After cleaning the clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Do not use compressed air. F G H I J K L M CL-3 PREPARATION [QG18DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ECS005RK The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV30101600 (New) KV30101000 (Former) (J33213) Clutch aligning bar Installing clutch cover and clutch disc a: 15.9 mm (0.626 in) dia. b: 17.9 mm (0.705 in) dia. c: 40 mm (1.57 in) NT641 ST20050240 ( — ) Diaphragm spring adjusting wrench Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring of clutch cover a: 150 mm (5.91 in) b: 25 mm (0.98 in) S-NT404 KV32101000 (J25689-A) Pin punch Removing and installing spring pin a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. S-NT410 Commercial Service Tools ECS005RL Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing clutch piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) S-NT360 CL-4 Symptom Suspected parts (Possible cause) Clutch pedal spongy Clutch grabs/chatters 1 1 Clutch noisy 1 1 2 3 4 CL-5 5 5 5 5 Clutch disc (Dirty or burned) Clutch disc (Lining broken) Clutch disc (Runout is excessive) Clutch disc (Out of true) Release bearing (Worn, dirty or damaged) Engine mounting (Loose) Operating cylinder piston cup (Damaged) Master cylinder piston cup (Damaged) 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 6 3 4 6 Flywheel (Distortion) CL-18 CL-18 CL-17 CL-17 CL-14 EM-62, "Removal and Installation" CL-11 CL-9 CL-7 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart Clutch cover (Distortion) Diaphragm spring (Out of tip alignment) Diaphragm spring (Damaged) Clutch disc (Lack of spline grease) Clutch disc (Hardened) Clutch does not disengage 2 Clutch disc (Worn out) 1 2 2 Clutch disc (Oily) Clutch slips Clutch line (Air in line) CL-7 Reference page Clutch pedal (Inspection and adjustment) NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QG18DE] PFP:00003 ECS005RM A Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of inspection. Check each part in order. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. 2 5 B CL D E F G H I J K 7 L M CLUTCH SYSTEM [QG18DE] CLUTCH SYSTEM Components PFP:30502 ECS005RN WCL005 1. Clutch pedal bracket 2. ASCD clutch switch (if equipped) 3. Clutch interlock switch 4. Clutch pedal 5. Clutch master cylinder 6. Nipple 7. Clutch damper (not serviceable) 8. Clevis 9. Hose clamp 10. Reservoir hose 11. Reservoir tank 13. Clutch disc 14. Clutch cover 15. Withdrawal lever 16. Clutch lever 17. Spring pin 18. Release bearing 19. Operating cylinder 20. Clutch hose 21. Spacer 22. Release bearing spring 23. Clutch tube CL-6 12. Reservoir cap CLUTCH SYSTEM [QG18DE] Inspection and Adjustment ECS005RO A CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. a. b. c. d. 2. a. b. Check to see if the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch pedal. If the pin is not free, check that the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt is not applying pressure to the clutch pedal causing the pin to bind. To adjust, loosen the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt lock nut and turn the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt. Tighten the lock nut. Verify that the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch pedal. If the pin is still not free, remove the pin and check for deformation or damage. Replace the pin if necessary. Leave the pin removed for step 2. Check the clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement. With the clutch pedal clevis pin removed, manually move the pedal up and down to determine if it moves freely. If any sticking is noted, replace the related parts (clutch pedal, pedal bracket, assist spring, bushing, etc.). Reassemble the pedal and re-verify that the clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the pedal. B CL D E F G WCIA0146E 3. Adjust the clearance “C” while fully depressing the clutch pedal (with the clutch interlock switch) as shown. Clearance "C" 4. a. b. H I : 0.1 - 1.0 mm (0.004 - 0.039 in) Check the clutch hydraulic system components (clutch master cylinder, clutch operating cylinder, Clutch withdrawal lever, clutch release bearing, etc.) for sticking or binding. If any sticking or binding is noted, repair or replace the related parts as necessary. If any hydraulic system repair was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or power bleeder will not purge all of the air from the system. J K L M SCL800 BLEEDING PROCEDURE CAUTION: Carefully monitor the fluid level at the clutch master cylinder during the bleeding operation. NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or power bleeder will not purge all of the air from the system. CL-7 CLUTCH SYSTEM [QG18DE] 1. 2. 3. 4. Top off the clutch master cylinder reservoir with the recommended brake fluid "DOT 3". Then attach the additional supply tank as shown. CAUTION: Do not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to the air bleeder valve as shown. Slowly depress the clutch pedal to its full stroke and release it completely. Repeat this operation several times at 2 to 3 seconds intervals. Open the air bleeder valve with the clutch pedal fully depressed. WCL008 5. Close the air bleeder valve and tighten to specification. Air bleeder valve 6. 7. : 5.9 - 9.8 N·m (0.6 - 1.0 kg-m, 52 - 87 in-lb) Release the clutch pedal and wait at least 5 seconds. Repeat steps 3 through 6 above until no more air bubbles are in the brake fluid coming out of the vinyl tube attached to the air bleeder valve. CL-8 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER [QG18DE] CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER Components PFP:30610 A ECS005RP B CL D E F G WCIA0137E 1. Cylinder body 2. Return spring 3. Piston assembly seals 4. Push rod 5. Stopper 6. Stopper ring 7. Dust cover 8. Clevis 9. Hose clamps 10. Reservoir hose 11. Reservoir cap 12. Reservoir tank 13. Bracket 14. Clutch damper (not serviceable) 15. Clutch tube 16. Seal 17. Pin 18. Nipple Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. I ECS005RQ Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove the clutch tube flare nut using a flare nut wrench. Remove the reservoir hose. Remove the snap pin from the clevis pin and remove the clutch pedal from the clevis. Remove the master cylinder assembly mounting nuts and reservoir tank bracket mounting nuts to remove master cylinder assembly. Disassembly 1. H ECS005RS Loosen the push rod lock nut "A" to remove the clevis and the lock nut "A". Remove the dust cover. Remove the stopper ring and stopper, then remove the push rod from the cylinder body. During removal, keep the push rod depressed, to prevent the piston inside the master cylinder from popping out. NOTE: Discard the stopper ring and use a new ring for assembly. Remove the piston assembly from the cylinder body. Remove the return spring. Remove the pin using a pin punch, then remove the nipple and seal. CL-9 SCL725 J K L M CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER [QG18DE] Inspection ECS005RT Inspect for the following conditions and replace any parts as necessary. ● Damage, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner wall ● Damage and deformation of the reservoir tank ● Weak return spring ● Crack or deformation of the dust cover Assembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install the return spring. Apply rubber lubricant to the sliding parts of the piston assembly, and insert the piston assembly into the cylinder body. After installing the stopper to push rod, install a new stopper ring while keeping the piston assembly depressed by hand, so that the piston assembly will not pop out. CAUTION: The stopper ring cannot be reused. Always use a new stopper ring for assembly. Apply silicone grease, and install the dust cover. Install the clevis to push rod, and tighten lock nut "A" to specification. Lock nut "A" 6. ECS005RU : 7.8 - 11.8 N·m (0.8 - 1.2 kg-m, 69 - 104 in-lb) Install the seal and nipple to the cylinder body, and install the pin using a pin punch. SCL725 Installation 1. 2. 3. ECS005RR Install the reservoir hose. Connect the clutch tube to the master cylinder assembly, and hand-tighten the flare nut. Install the master cylinder assembly to the cowl, and tighten the mounting nuts to specification. Master cylinder mounting nuts 4. : 10.8 - 14.6 N·m (1.1 - 1.4 kg-m, 8 - 10 ft-lb) Tighten the reservoir tank bracket mounting nuts to specification. Reservoir tank bracket mounting nuts 5. Tighten the clutch tube flare nut to specification, using a flare nut torque wrench. Clutch tube flare nut 6. 7. : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb) : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) After installing the clevis pin, install the snap pin to connect the clutch pedal to the push rod. After finishing the component installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . CL-10 OPERATING CYLINDER [QG18DE] OPERATING CYLINDER Components PFP:30620 A ECS005RV B CL D E F G WCIA0138E 1. Cylinder body 2. Piston spring 3. Piston cup 4. Piston 5. Push rod 6. Dust cover 7. Air bleeder 8. Spacer 9. Union bolt 10. Copper washer 11. Clutch hose Removal 1. 2. 3. H ECS005RW Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove the union bolt, the two copper washers, and the clutch hose from the operating cylinder. Discard the copper washers. Remove the operating cylinder bolts, and remove the operating cylinder. I J K L M WCL009 Disassembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ECS005RX Remove the dust cover from the operating cylinder body. Remove the push rod. Remove the piston. Remove the piston cup. Remove the piston spring. Remove the air bleeder. Inspection ECS005RY Inspect for the following, and replace any parts as necessary. ● Damage, foreign material, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner surface, piston, and sliding part of piston cup CL-11 OPERATING CYLINDER [QG18DE] ● ● Weak piston spring Crack or deformation of dust cover Assembly ECS005RZ CAUTION: To assemble the operating cylinder use the specified rubber grease and rubber lubricant. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . 1. Apply rubber lubricant to the overall inside surface of the operating cylinder body. 2. Install the air bleeder, tighten to specification. Air bleeder 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. : 6 - 10 N·m (0.6 - 1.0 kg-m, 52 - 87 in-lb) Install the piston spring with the tapered spring end pointing toward the piston cup. Apply rubber grease and install the piston cup. Apply rubber grease and install the piston. Install the push rod. Apply rubber grease and install the dust cover. Installation ECS005S0 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Install the clutch hose without twisting it. ● The two copper washers for the union bolt cannot be reused. Use two new copper washers for installation. ● After finishing the installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . CL-12 PIPING [QG18DE] PIPING Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PFP:00000 A ECS005S1 Remove the engine air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. B CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas, it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. CL Remove the flare nut from the operating cylinder body using a flare nut wrench. Remove the union bolt and two copper washers attaching the clutch hose from the operating cylinder. Discard the two copper washers. D Remove the clutch hose from the bracket by removing the lock plate. Installation 1. 2. When installing the clutch hose into the bracket, position the lock plate in the specified direction as shown to secure the clutch hose. CAUTION: Install the clutch hose without twisting or bending it. Tighten the flare nut to specification, using a flare nut wrench. Flare nut 3. E F G : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the flare nut and clutch tube. Position the clutch hose and install the union bolt and two new copper washers on to the operating cylinder, and tighten the union bolt to specification. Union bolt 4. 5. ECS005S2 H SCL730 I : 17 - 19 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb) Bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . Install the engine air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . J K L M CL-13 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM [QG18DE] CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM Components PFP:30502 ECS005S3 SCL819 Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. ECS005S4 Remove the manual transaxle. Refer to MT-15, "Removal and Installation" (RS5F70A). Move the withdrawal lever enough to remove the release bearing and release bearing spring, and remove the release bearing from the clutch lever. Support the clutch lever claws with an appropriate wood block, align the retaining pin with "A" as shown, and drive out the spring pins using a pin punch. Pull out the withdrawal lever and remove the clutch lever from the clutch housing. WCL018 Inspection ● ● ● ECS005S5 Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor alignment. Replace the withdrawal lever if the contact surface is worn excessively. Replace the clutch lever if its contact surface is worn excessively. SCL733 Installation ECS005S6 CAUTION: ● Apply grease to the clutch components. Otherwise, abnormal noise, poor clutch disengagement, or clutch damage may occur. Wipe the excess grease off completely, as it may cause the clutch components to slip and shudder. ● Keep the clutch disc facing, pressure plate, and flywheel free of oil and grease. CL-14 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM [QG18DE] ● ● ● ● ● Clean any old grease and abrasive materials off of the grease application areas as shown. Apply approximately a 1 mm (0.04 in) thick coating of clutch sleeve grease evenly on the sliding part of the clutch lever and the release bearing spring. Apply just enough clutch sleeve grease to fill up the release bearing inner groove. Apply the clutch grease to the clutch disc and the input shaft spline. Install the clutch disc to the input shaft, remove the excess grease around the shaft, and remove the clutch disc. Lightly and evenly apply the clutch sleeve grease on the sliding part of the release bearing. Install the release bearing and remove any excess grease around the bearing, then remove the release bearing. A B CL D E F G SCL821 1. 2. Assemble the clutch lever to clutch housing, and insert the withdrawal lever. Support the clutch lever claws with an appropriate wood block, and install new spring pins using a pin punch as shown. CAUTION: Spring pins cannot be reused. H I J K WCL015 3. Install the release bearing springs on to the release bearing as shown. L M SCL736 CL-15 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM [QG18DE] 4. Operate the withdrawal lever manually, press the release bearing spring from both sides, and install the release bearing onto the clutch lever securely. CAUTION: Make sure a click is heard when the release bearing spring is pressed from both sides. SCL823 5. Check that all parts operate smoothly when operating the withdrawal lever. CAUTION: Remove any excess grease. SCL738 6. Install the manual transaxle. Refer to MT-15, "Removal and Installation" (RS5F70A). CL-16 CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL [QG18DE] CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL Components PFP:30100 A ECS005S7 B CL D E F G LCL049 Removal 1. 2. ECS0077Y H Remove the manual transaxle. Refer to MT-15, "Removal and Installation" (RS5F70A). Evenly loosen the clutch cover bolts, then remove the clutch cover and clutch disc. Inspection and Adjustment ECS005S8 CLUTCH DISC ● Check the clutch disc for wear on the facing surface at the rivets as shown. Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head I J : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) K L LCL050 ● M Check the clutch disc for backlash on the spline and runout on the facing. Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of disc) Runout limit Distance of runout check point (from hub center) : 0.9 mm (0.035 in) : 1.0 mm (0.039 in) : 102.5 mm (4.04 in) LCL051 ● Check the clutch disc for burns, discoloration, and oil or grease leakage. Replace if necessary. CL-17 CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL [QG18DE] CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL ● Check the clutch cover installed for unevenness of the diaphragm spring toe heights. Uneven limit : 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) If the toe heights are greater than the uneven limit, adjust the height with Tool as shown. WCL016 FLYWHEEL INSPECTION ● ● Check the contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. Clean the flywheel contact surface with emery paper. Check the flywheel runout using a dial gauge as shown. Maximum allowable runout : Refer to EM-76, "Flywheel Runout" . SCL349 Installation ECS005S9 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent. ● When installing the clutch disc, do not to allow grease from the main driveshaft to contact the clutch disc friction surface. ● Insert Tool into clutch disc hub for proper alignment when installing the clutch cover and disc as shown. ● Tighten the clutch cover bolts in numerical order in two steps as shown. First step Final step : 10 - 20 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 7 - 14 ft-lb) : 22 - 29 N·m (2.2 - 3.0 kg-m, 16 - 22 ft-lb) WCL017 CL-18 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Clutch Control System Type of clutch control PFP:00030 A ECS005SA Hydraulic B Clutch Master Cylinder ECS005SB Unit: mm (in) Inner diameter 15.87 (5/8) CL Clutch Operating Cylinder ECS005SC Unit: mm (in) Inner diameter D 19.05 (3/4) Clutch Disc ECS005SD Unit: mm (in) Engine model E QG18DE Model 215 Facing size (Outer dia. × inner dia. × thickness) 215 × 145 × 3.5 (8.46 × 5.71 × 0.138) 7.7 - 8.3 (0.303 - 0.327) with 4,900 N (499.8 kg, 1,101.5 lb) Thickness of disc assembly with load Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head 0.3 (0.012) Runout limit of facing 1.0 (0.039) Distance of runout check point (from the hub center) 102.5 (4.04) Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of disc) 0.9 (0.035) F G H Clutch Cover ECS005SE I Unit: mm (in) Engine model QG18DE Model J 215 Full-load 4,900 N (499.8 kg, 1,101.5 lb) Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height 0.88 (0.0346) K Clutch Pedal ECS005SF Unit: mm (in) Clearance “C” between pedal stopper rubber and clutch interlock switch threaded end while clutch pedal is fully depressed. L 0.1 - 1.0 (0.004 - 0.039) M CL-19 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 ECS005SG Recommended fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”. Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Use a flare nut wrench when removing or installing the clutch hydraulic tubes. Use new brake fluid to clean or wash all parts of the master cylinder and operating cylinder. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. It will ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system. WARNING: After cleaning the clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Do not use compressed air. CL-20 SBR686C PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS005SH The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name ST20630000 (J26366) Clutch aligning bar B Installing clutch cover and clutch disc a: 15.8 mm (0.622 in) dia. b: 22.9 mm (0.902 in) dia. c: 45.0 mm (1.772 in) CL D NT405 ST20050240 ( — ) Diaphragm spring adjusting wrench Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring of clutch cover a: 150 mm (5.91 in) b: 25 mm (0.98 in) S-NT404 KV32101000 (J25689-A) Pin punch E F G Removing and installing spring pin a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. H I S-NT410 Commercial Service Tools ECS005SI Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing clutch piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) J K L S-NT360 M CL-21 Symptom Clutch grabs/chatters Clutch pedal spongy 1 1 Clutch noisy 1 2 3 4 CL-22 5 5 5 5 CL-28 Operating cylinder piston cup (Damaged) Clutch disc (Dirty or burned) Clutch disc (Lining broken) Clutch disc (Runout is excessive) Clutch disc (Out of true) Release bearing (Worn, dirty or damaged) 2 2 2 5 2 2 5 6 2 3 6 Flywheel (Distortion) CL-34 CL-34 CL-33 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart Clutch cover (Distortion) Diaphragm spring (Out of tip alignment) Diaphragm spring (Damaged) Clutch disc (Lack of spline grease) CL-33 CL-31 EM-62, "Removal and Installation" CL-26 Master cylinder piston cup (Damaged) Clutch disc (Hardened) 1 2 Clutch disc (Worn out) 1 Clutch does not disengage 2 Clutch disc (Oily) Clutch slips 2 Engine mounting (Loose) CL-24 Clutch line (Air in line) Suspected parts (Possible cause) CL-24 Reference page Clutch pedal (Inspection and adjustment) NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QR25DE] PFP:00003 ECS005SJ Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of inspection. Check each part in order. If necessary, repair or replace the parts. 7 4 5 CLUTCH SYSTEM [QR25DE] CLUTCH SYSTEM Components PFP:30502 A ECS005SK B CL D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0139E 1. Reservoir cap 2. Hose clamp 3. Reservoir tank 4. Reservoir hose 5. Clutch tube 6. Nipple 7. Clutch master cylinder 8. Clevis 9. Clutch pedal bracket 10. Clutch interlock switch 11. ASCD clutch switch (if equipped) 13. Clutch cover 14. Withdrawal lever 15. Spacer 16. Clutch lever 17. Spring pin 18. Release bearing spring 19. Release bearing 20. Clutch hose 21. Operating cylinder 22. Clutch disc CL-23 12. Clutch pedal CLUTCH SYSTEM [QR25DE] Inspection and Adjustment ECS006H9 CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT 1. a. b. c. d. 2. a. b. Check to see if the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch pedal. If the pin is not free, check that the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt is not applying pressure to the clutch pedal causing the pin to bind. To adjust, loosen the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt lock nut and turn the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt. Tighten the lock nut. Verify that the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch pedal. If the pin is still not free, remove the pin and check for deformation or damage. Replace the pin if necessary. Leave the pin removed for step 2. Check the clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement. With the clutch pedal clevis pin removed, manually move the pedal up and down to determine if it moves freely. If any sticking is noted, replace the related parts (clutch pedal, pedal bracket, assist spring, bushing, etc.). Reassemble the pedal and re-verify that the clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the pedal. WCIA0146E 3. Adjust the clearance “C” while fully depressing the clutch pedal (with the clutch interlock switch) as shown. Clearance "C" 4. a. b. : 0.1 - 1.0 mm (0.004 - 0.039 in) Check the clutch hydraulic system components (clutch master cylinder, clutch operating cylinder, Clutch withdrawal lever, clutch release bearing, etc.) for sticking or binding. If any sticking or binding is noted, repair or replace the related parts as necessary. If any hydraulic system repair was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-24, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or power bleeder will not purge all of the air from the system. SCL800 BLEEDING PROCEDURE CAUTION: Carefully monitor the fluid level at the clutch master cylinder during the bleeding operation. NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or power bleeder will not purge all of the air from the system. CL-24 CLUTCH SYSTEM [QR25DE] 1. 2. 3. 4. Top off the clutch master cylinder reservoir with the recommended brake fluid "DOT 3". Then attach the additional supply tank as shown. CAUTION: Do not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to the air bleeder valve as shown. Slowly depress the clutch pedal to its full stroke and release it completely. Repeat this operation several times at 2 to 3 seconds intervals. Open the air bleeder valve with the clutch pedal fully depressed. A B CL D E F G WCL008 5. Close the air bleeder valve and tighten to specification. Air bleeder valve 6. 7. H : 5.9 - 9.8 N·m (0.6 - 1.0 kg-m, 52 - 87 in-lb) Release the clutch pedal and wait at least 5 seconds. Repeat steps 3 through 6 above until no more air bubbles are in the brake fluid coming out of the vinyl tube attached to the air bleeder valve. I J K L M CL-25 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER [QR25DE] CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER Components PFP:30610 ECS005SM WCIA0140E 1. Bracket 2. Reservoir cap 3. 4. Hose clamps 5. Reservoir hose 6. Nipple 7. Piston assembly seals 8. Push rod 9. Stopper ring 10. Stopper 11. Dust cover 12. Clevis 13. Return spring 14. Pin 15. Seal 16. Cylinder body 17. Clutch tube Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ECS005SN Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove the clutch tube flare nut using a flare nut wrench. Remove the reservoir hose. Remove the snap pin from the clevis pin and remove the clutch pedal from the clevis. Unscrew the master cylinder assembly nuts and reservoir tank bracket nuts to remove the master cylinder assembly. Disassembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reservoir tank ECS005SP Loosen the push rod lock nut "A" to remove the clevis and lock nut "A". Remove the dust cover. Remove the stopper ring and stopper, and remove the push rod from the cylinder body. During removal, keep the push rod depressed, to prevent the piston inside the master cylinder from popping out. Discard the stopper ring. Remove the piston assembly from the cylinder body. Remove the return spring. Remove the pin using a pin punch, then remove the nipple and seal. Inspection SCL725 ECS005SQ Inspect for the following, and replace parts if necessary. CL-26 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER [QR25DE] ● ● ● ● Damage, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner wall Damage and deformation of the reservoir tank Weak spring Crack or deformation of the dust cover Assembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A B ECS005SR Install the return spring. Apply rubber lubricant to the sliding parts of the piston assembly, and insert the piston assembly into cylin- CL der body. After installing the stopper on to the push rod, install the new stopper ring while keeping the piston assembly depressed by hand, so that the piston assembly will not pop out. D CAUTION: The stopper ring cannot be reused. Always use a new stopper ring for assembly. E Apply silicone grease to the dust cover and install the dust cover. Install the clevis on to push rod, and tighten the lock nut "A" to specification. F Lock nut "A" : 7.8 - 11.8 N·m (0.8 - 1.2 kg-m, 69 - 104 in-lb) Install the seal and nipple on to the cylinder body, and install the pin using a pin punch. G H SCL725 Installation 1. 2. 3. Install the reservoir hose. Connect the clutch tube to the master cylinder assembly, and hand-tighten the flare nut. Install the master cylinder assembly to the cowl, and tighten the nuts to specification. Master cylinder nuts 4. ECS005SO Tighten reservoir tank bracket nuts to specification. 6. 7. K : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb) Tighten clutch tube flare nut using a flare nut torque wrench to specification. Clutch tube flare nut J : 10.8 - 14.6 N·m (1.1 - 1.4 kg-m, 8 - 10 ft-lb) Reservoir tank bracket nuts 5. I L : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) After installing the clevis pin, install the snap pin to connect the clutch pedal to the push rod. After finishing the installation, bleed the air out of the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-24, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . CL-27 M OPERATING CYLINDER [QR25DE] OPERATING CYLINDER Components PFP:30620 ECS005SS WCIA0141E 1. Cylinder body 2. Piston spring 3. Piston cup 4. Piston 5. Push rod 6. Dust cover 7. Air bleeder 8. Union bolt 9. Copper washer 10. Clutch hose Removal 1. 2. 3. ECS005ST Drain the brake fluid from clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove the union bolt, the two copper washers, and the clutch hose from the operating cylinder. Discard the copper washers. Remove the operating cylinder bolts, and remove the operating cylinder. LCIA0029E Disassembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ECS005SU Remove the dust cover from the operating cylinder body. Remove the push rod. Remove the piston. Remove the piston cup. Remove the piston spring. Remove the air bleeder. Inspection ECS005SV Inspect for the following, and replace parts as necessary. ● Damage, foreign material, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner surface, piston, and sliding part of piston cup CL-28 OPERATING CYLINDER [QR25DE] ● ● Weak piston spring Crack or deformation of dust cover A Assembly 1. 2. Apply rubber lubricant to the overall inside surface of the operating cylinder body. B CAUTION: To assemble the operating cylinder use the specified rubber grease and rubber lubricant. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . CL Install the air bleeder and tighten to specification. Air bleeder 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ECS005SW : 6 - 10 N·m (0.6 - 1.0 kg-m, 52 - 87 in-lb) D Install the piston spring. Apply rubber grease and install the piston cup. Apply rubber grease and install the piston. Install the push rod. Apply rubber grease and install the dust cover. Installation E ECS005SX Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Install the clutch hose without twisting it. ● The two copper washers for the union bolt cannot be reused. Use two new copper washers for installation. ● After finishing the installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-24, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . F G H I J K L M CL-29 PIPING [QR25DE] PIPING Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PFP:00000 ECS005SY Remove the engine air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-101, "Removal and Installation" . Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove the flare nut from the operating cylinder body using a flare nut wrench. Remove the union bolt and two copper washers attaching the clutch hose from the operating cylinder. Discard the two copper washers. Remove the clutch hose from the bracket by removing the lock plate. Installation 1. 2. When installing the clutch hose into the bracket, position the lock plate in the specified direction as shown to secure the clutch hose. CAUTION: Install the clutch hose without twisting or bending it. Tighten the flare nut to specification, using a flare nut wrench. Flare nut 3. : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the flare nut and clutch tube. Position the clutch hose and install the union bolt and two new copper washers on to the operating cylinder, and tighten the union bolt to specification. Union bolt 4. 5. ECS005SZ : 17 - 19 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb) Bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-24, "BLEEDING PROCEDURE" . Install the engine air cleaner and air duct. CL-30 SCL730 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM [QR25DE] CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM Components PFP:30502 A ECS005T0 B CL D E F LCIA0030E Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. ECS005T1 Remove the manual transaxle. Refer to MT-79, "Removal and Installation" (RS6F51H). Move the withdrawal lever enough to remove the release bearing, and remove the release bearing from the clutch lever. Remove the withdrawal lever retainer spring. Pull out the withdrawal lever and remove the dust cover. Inspection After Removal ● ● ● G ECS005T2 Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor alignment. Replace the withdrawal lever if the contact surface is worn excessively. Replace the dust seal if its deformed or cracked. H I J K L M SCL733 CL-31 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM [QR25DE] Installation ECS005T3 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Clean any old grease and abrasive materials off of the grease application areas as shown. SCL815 ● ● ● Apply approximately a 1 mm (0.04 in) thick coating of clutch sleeve grease to the withdrawal lever and holder spring friction surfaces. Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to the grooves on contact surfaces of the withdrawal lever ball pin and inner surface of the release bearing; make sure the grease is flush with the grooves. Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to the release bearing friction surface. After the grease application, install the release bearing. Wipe off any excess grease forced out from the bearing installation. CL-32 CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL [QR25DE] CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL Components PFP:30100 A ECS005T4 B CL D E F G WCIA0142E 1. Flywheel 2. Clutch disc 4. Main drive shaft 5. Clutch cover 3. Washer Removal 1. 2. H ECS0077Z Remove the transaxle. Refer to MT-79, "Removal and Installation" (RS5F51H). Evenly loosen the clutch cover bolts, then remove the clutch cover and clutch disc. Inspection and Adjustment I ECS005T5 CLUTCH DISC ● J Check clutch disc for wear of the facing surface at the rivets as shown. K Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) L M LCIA0109E ● Check the clutch disc for backlash of the spline and runout of the facing as shown. Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of disc) Runout limit Distance of runout check point (from hub center) : 0.9 mm (0.035 in) : 1.0 mm (0.039 in) : 115.0 mm (4.53 in) LCIA0108E ● Check the clutch disc for burns, discoloration, or oil and grease leakage. Replace the components as necessary. CL-33 CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL [QR25DE] CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL Check the spring toe height unevenness of the clutch cover with it installed on the vehicle. Uneven limit : 0.7 mm (0.028 in) If the measured uneven height is greater than the specified limit, adjust the spring toe height with Tool as shown. WCL016 FLYWHEEL INSPECTION ● ● Check the contact surface of the flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. Clean the flywheel contact surface with emery paper. Check the flywheel runout using a dial gauge as shown. Maximum allowable runout : Refer to EM-183, "MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL)" . SCL349 Installation ECS005T6 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent. ● When installing the clutch disc, do not allow grease from the main driveshaft to contact the clutch disc friction surface. ● Insert Tool into the clutch disc hub for correct alignment when installing the clutch cover and disc as shown. ● Tighten the bolts in numerical order in two steps as shown. First step Final step : 10 - 20 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 7 - 14 ft-lb) : 35 - 44 N·m (3.5 - 4.5 kg-m, 26 - 32 ft-lb) SCL600-C CL-34 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Clutch Control System Type of clutch control PFP:00030 A ECS005T7 Hydraulic B Clutch Master Cylinder ECS005T8 Unit: mm (in) Inner diameter 15.87 (5/8) CL Clutch Operating Cylinder ECS005T9 Unit: mm (in) Inner diameter D 19.05 (3/4) Clutch Disc ECS005TA Unit: mm (in) Engine model E QR25DE Model 240 Facing size (Outer dia. × inner dia. × thickness) 240 × 160 × 3.5 (9.45 × 6.30 × 0.138) 7.8 - 8.4 (0.307 - 0.331) with 5,884 N (600 kg, 1,322 lb) Thickness of disc assembly with load Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head 0.3 (0.012) Runout limit of facing 1.0 (0.039) Distance of runout check point (from the hub center) 115.0 (4.53) Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge disc) 0.9 (0.035) F G H Clutch Cover ECS005TB I Unit: mm (in) Engine model QR25DE Model J 240 Full-load 5,884 N (600 kg, 1,322 lb) Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height 0.7 (0.028) K Clutch Pedal ECS005TC Unit: mm (in) Clearance “C” between pedal stopper rubber and clutch interlock switch threaded end while clutch pedal is fully depressed. L 0.1 - 1.0 (0.004 - 0.039) M CL-35 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] CL-36 B ENGINE A SECTION ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM CO C D E CONTENTS QG18DE PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions For Liquid Gasket ................................. 3 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET .......................... 3 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .......................... 5 Overheating Cause Analysis .................................... 5 COOLING SYSTEM .................................................... 7 Cooling Circuit .......................................................... 7 ENGINE COOLANT .................................................... 8 System Check .......................................................... 8 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ............ 8 CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ......................... 8 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS..... 8 CHECKING RADIATOR ........................................ 8 CHECKING RADIATOR CAP ................................ 9 Refilling Engine Coolant ........................................... 9 WATER PUMP .......................................................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 Inspection ................................................................11 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING ...... 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 12 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 12 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 RADIATOR ................................................................ 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSTALLATION ................................................... 14 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 15 PREPARATION .................................................. 15 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 15 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 16 Inspection ............................................................... 18 COOLING FAN ......................................................... 19 Disassembly and Assembly Radiator Cooling Fan... 19 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 19 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 20 Capacity .................................................................. 20 Thermostat ............................................................. 20 Radiator .................................................................. 20 F G QR25DE PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 21 Precautions For Liquid Gasket ............................... 21 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET ......................... 21 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE... 21 PREPARATION ......................................................... 22 Special Service Tools ............................................. 22 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS ........................ 23 Troubleshooting Chart ............................................ 23 COOLING SYSTEM .................................................. 25 Cooling Circuit ........................................................ 25 ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 26 System Check ........................................................ 26 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ........... 26 CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ....................... 26 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS ... 26 CHECKING RADIATOR ...................................... 26 CHECKING RADIATOR CAP .............................. 27 Refilling Engine Coolant ......................................... 27 WATER PUMP .......................................................... 28 Removal and Installation ........................................ 28 REMOVAL ........................................................... 28 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 29 INSTALLATION ................................................... 29 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 29 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING ...... 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 30 REMOVAL ........................................................... 30 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 31 INSTALLATION ................................................... 31 RADIATOR ................................................................ 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 REMOVAL ........................................................... 32 INSTALLATION ................................................... 32 CO-1 H I J K L M Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 33 PREPARATION ................................................... 33 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 33 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 34 Inspection ............................................................... 36 COOLING FAN .......................................................... 37 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 37 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 37 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 37 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......38 Capacity ..................................................................38 Thermostat ..............................................................38 Water Control Valve ................................................38 Radiator ..................................................................38 CO-2 PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions For Liquid Gasket PFP:00001 A EBS00EYR REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET After removing the mounting bolts and nuts, disconnect and remove the sealant using a seal cutter. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the liquid gasket applied area. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● CO C D PBIC0275E E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. ● 2. 3. Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the application surface and the mating surface. Remove the old sealant completely from the groove of the application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the application surface and the mating surface to remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign material. Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . F G H PBIC0003E I 4. ● Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. J K L EMA0622D ● ● ● ● ● M As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating component. If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. Do not retighten after the installation. After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . SEM164F CO-3 PREPARATION [QG18DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00CH2 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name EG17650301 (J33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) via. b: 31.4 (1.236) via. c: 41.3 (1.626) via. Unit: mm (in) NT564 KV99103510 ( — ) Radiator plate pliers A Installing radiator upper and lower tanks S-NT224 KV99103520 ( — ) Radiator plate pliers B Removing radiator upper and lower tanks S-NT225 CO-4 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS [QG18DE] OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Overheating Cause Analysis PFP:00012 A EBS00CH3 Symptom Poor heat transfer Check items Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt Thermostat stuck closed Coolant circulation CO Dust contamination or paper clogging Damaged fins — C Mechanical damage Clogged radiator cooling tube Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.) D Cooling fan does not operate Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rotation E Engine cooling fans — Damaged fan blades Cooling system parts malfunction F Damaged radiator shroud — — — Improper coolant mixture ratio — — — Poor coolant quality — — — Cooling hose Loose clamp Cracked hose Water pump Radiator cap G H Poor sealing Loose I Poor sealing Coolant leaks O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting Insufficient coolant Radiator J Cracked radiator tank Cracked radiator core Reservoir tank Overflowing reservoir tank Exhaust gas leaks into cooling system Cracked reservoir tank K Cylinder head deterioration Cylinder head gasket deterioration L M CO-5 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS [QG18DE] Symptom Check items High engine RPM under no load Abusive driving Driving in low gear for extended time Driving at extremely high speed Over heating engine Overload on engine Except cooling system parts malfunction Powertrain system malfunction Installed improper size wheels and tires — Dragging brakes Improper ignition timing Blocked bumper — Installed car brassiere Blocked radiator grille Blocked or restricted air flow __ Blocked radiator — Blocked condenser Installed large fog lamp CO-6 — Mud, debris, or paper clogging COOLING SYSTEM [QG18DE] COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Circuit PFP:21020 A EBS00CH4 CO C D E F G H I WBIA0132E J K L M CO-7 ENGINE COOLANT [QG18DE] ENGINE COOLANT System Check PFP:KQ100 EBS00CH5 WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ● Improper attachment ● Leaks ● Cracks ● Damage ● Loose connections ● Chafing ● Deterioration CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ● ● Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool. Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little. SMA412B CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Testing pressure : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. SLC756A CHECKING RADIATOR Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows: ● Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ● When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing when clear water flows off the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. ● Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 300 mm (11.8 in). CO-8 ENGINE COOLANT [QG18DE] 5. 6. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. Check for leakage. A CHECKING RADIATOR CAP ● To check radiator cap, apply pressure to cap using Tool. CO Radiator cap relief pressure Standard : 78 - 98 kPa (0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 - 14 psi) Limit C : 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi) D SLC755A ● ● E Pull the negative pressure valve to open it. Check that it closes completely when released. F G H SMA967B Refilling Engine Coolant EBS00CH6 I Changing the engine coolant is part of the required maintenance of the engine. Refer to MA-16, "Changing Engine Coolant" . J K L M CO-9 WATER PUMP [QG18DE] WATER PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:21020 EBS00CH7 WLC017 CAUTION: ● When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt. ● Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. ● After installing water pump, check for leaks using radiator cap tester. Refer to CO-8, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . 1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . WLC007 SEM869F 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove front RH wheel. Remove engine side cover. Remove drive belts and idler pulley. Loosen water pump pulley bolts. Remove water pump pulley. CO-10 WATER PUMP [QG18DE] 7. 8. 9. Remove the water pump bolts. Remove the water pump. ● Remove liquid gasket from water pump and mating surface of cylinder block using a scraper. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● When applying liquid gasket to mating surface of water pump, use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● When filling radiator with coolant, refer to MA-17, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" . ● When installing drive belts, refer to MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" . Inspection 1. ● ● A CO C SEM859F D EBS00CH8 Rotate water pump shaft, replace the water pump as necessary. Check body assembly and vane for rust or corrosion. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. E F G H SEM860F I J K L M CO-11 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [QG18DE] THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING Removal and Installation PFP:21200 EBS00CH9 WBIA0134E WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. CAUTION: Be careful not to spill coolant over the engine compartment. Use a rag to absorb any spilled coolant. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Disconnect the lower radiator hose. Remove water inlet thermostat housing, then remove the thermostat. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● ● Place a string so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat (or water control valve) and suspend it in boiling water. It must be fully immersed in the water. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve plate begins to rise from the top plate causing the thermostat to fall off of the string. Continue heating the water and thermostat to check the valve lift (the full-open valve lift distance). NOTE: The valve lift standard temperature for the thermostat (or water SLC252B control valve) is the reference value. After checking the valve lift, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. Standard Values Valve opening temperature 76.5°C (170°F) Valve lift More than 9 mm/90°C (0.35 in/194°F) Valve closing temperature 71.5°C (161°F) CO-12 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [QG18DE] INSTALLATION 1. A Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: ● Before installing the thermostat, make sure the gum ring is properly seated around the thermostat. CO C D SEM862F ● E Install thermostat with jiggle valve or air bleeder at upper side. F G H SEM863F ● Refill engine coolant after installation. Run engine for a few minutes, and check for any coolant leaks. Refer to MA-17, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" I J K L M CO-13 RADIATOR [QG18DE] RADIATOR Removal and Installation PFP:21400 EBS00CHB WBIA0315E 1. Reservoir tank 2. Reservoir tank bracket 3. Radiator cap 4. Mounting bracket 5. Upper radiator hose 6. Cooling fans 7. Radiator drain plug 8. Mounting rubber 9. Oil cooler hose (A/T models) 10. Radiator 11. Lower radiator hose WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns can occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter of a turn to allow the built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it the rest of the way. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the air duct and air cleaner assembly. Disconnect the A/T oil cooler hoses (if equipped) and install a blind plug in the hoses to prevent A/T oil loss. Disconnect the upper and lower radiator hoses and mounting bracket. Remove the radiator and radiator fan assembly as one unit. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch the radiator core when removing. INSTALLATION ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CO-14 RADIATOR [QG18DE] Disassembly and Assembly EBS00CHC A CO C D E F WBIA0316E 1. Upper tank 2. Sealing rubber 3. Core 4. Oil cooler securing nut 5. O-ring 6. Oil cooler 7. Lower tank 8. Sealing rubber G H PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. Attach the spacer to the tip of the radiator plate pliers A. Spacer specification: 1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick x 18 mm (0.71 in) wide x 8.5 mm (0.335 in) long. Make sure that when radiator plate pliers A are closed dimension H′′ is approx. 7.6 mm (0.299 in). Adjust dimension H′′ with the spacer, if necessary. I J K SLC655CB L DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove tank using Tool. M SLC903-A CO-15 RADIATOR [QG18DE] Grip the crimped edge and bend it upwards so that Tool slips off. CAUTION: Do not bend excessively. ● SLC893 In areas where Tool cannot be used, use a screwdriver to bend the edge up. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage tank. ● SLC930 2. 3. Make sure the edge stands straight up. Remove oil cooler from tank (A/T model only). SLC931 ASSEMBLY 1. Install oil cooler (A/T model only). WBIA0317E CO-16 RADIATOR [QG18DE] 2. Clean contact portion of tank. A CO C SLC932 D 3. Install sealing rubber. NOTE: Push it in with fingers. CAUTION: Be careful not to twist sealing rubber. E F G SLC917A 4. H Crimp the tank rim in a specified sequence using Tool. I J K SLC904-A L M SLC896 ● Use pliers in the locations where the Tool cannot be used. SLC897 CO-17 RADIATOR [QG18DE] 5. Make sure that the tank rim is completely crimped down. Standard height “H” 6. : 8.0 - 8.4 mm (0.315 - 0.331 in) Check for any coolant leakage. Refer to CO-8, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . SLC554A Inspection 1. EBS00CHD Apply pressure using Tool. Specified pressure value : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp. Attach a hose to the oil cooler as well (A/T model only). SLC933-A 2. Check for leaks in dip tank. SLC934 CO-18 COOLING FAN [QG18DE] COOLING FAN Disassembly and Assembly Radiator Cooling Fan PFP:21486 A EBS00CHE CO C D E F G H I WBIA0319E 1. Cooling fan motors 2. Cooling fan shroud 3. Cooling fan blades J DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-14, "Removal" . Remove the cooling fan shroud assembly from the radiator. Remove the cooling fan blades from the shroud. Remove cooling fan motors from the shroud. K L ASSEMBLY ● Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. M CO-19 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Capacity PFP:00030 EBS00GJS Unit: Coolant capacity with reservoir tank (MAX level) A/T 6.6 (7, 5 7/8) M/T 6.7 (7 1/8, 5 7/8) (US qt, Imp qt) Thermostat EBS00CHF Valve opening temperature 76.5°C (170°F) Valve lift More than 9 mm/90°C (0.35 in/194°F) Valve closing temperature 71.5°C (161°F) Radiator EBS00CHG Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Cap relief pressure Standard 78 - 98 (0.8 - 1.0, 11 - 14) Limit 59 (0.6, 9) Leakage test pressure 157 (1.6, 23) CO-20 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions For Liquid Gasket PFP:00001 A EBS00CHH REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET After removing the mounting bolts and nuts, disconnect and remove the sealant using a seal cutter. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the sealant applied area. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● CO C D PBIC0275E E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. ● 2. 3. Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the application surface and the mating surface. Remove the old sealant completely from the groove of the application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the application surface and the mating surface to remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign material. Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . F G H PBIC0003E I 4. ● Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. J K L EMA0622D ● ● ● ● ● M As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating component. If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. Do not retighten after the installation. After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . SEM164F CO-21 PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00CHI The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket S-NT052 EG17650301 (J33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) diameter b: 31.4 (1.236) diameter c: 41.3 (1.626) diameter Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 KV99103510 ( — ) Radiator plate pliers A Installing radiator upper and lower tanks S-NT224 KV99103520 ( — ) Radiator plate pliers B Removing radiator upper and lower tanks S-NT225 CO-22 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS [QR25DE] OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00012 A EBS00CHJ Symptom Check items Water pump malfunction Thermostat stuck closed Poor heat transfer CO Worn or loose drive belt — Dust contamination or paper clogging Damaged fins — C Mechanical damage Clogged radiator cooling tube Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.) D Cooling fan does not operate Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rotation E Fan blades — Damaged fan blades Cooling system parts malfunction F Damaged radiator shroud — — — Improper coolant mixture ratio — — — Poor coolant quality — — — Cooling hose Loose clamp Cracked hose Water pump Radiator cap G H Poor sealing Loose I Poor sealing Coolant leaks O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting Insufficient coolant Radiator J Cracked radiator tank Cracked radiator core Reservoir tank Overflowing reservoir tank Exhaust gas leaks into cooling system Cracked reservoir tank K Cylinder head deterioration Cylinder head gasket deterioration L M CO-23 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS [QR25DE] Symptom Check items High engine rpm under no load Abusive driving Driving in low gear for extended time Driving at extremely high speed — Overload on engine Except cooling system parts malfunction Powertrain system malfunction Installed improper size wheels and tires — Dragging brakes Improper ignition timing Blocked bumper — Installed car brassiere Blocked radiator grille Blocked or restricted air flow — Blocked radiator Blocked condenser Installed large fog lamp CO-24 — — Mud, debris, or paper clogging COOLING SYSTEM [QR25DE] COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Circuit PFP:21020 A EBS00CHK CO C D E F G H I PBIC0234E J K L M PBIC0280E CO-25 ENGINE COOLANT [QR25DE] ENGINE COOLANT System Check PFP:KQ100 EBS00EYS WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ● Improper attachment ● Leaks ● Cracks ● Damage ● Loose connections ● Chafing ● Deterioration CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ● ● Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool. Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little. SMA412B CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Testing pressure : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. SLC756A CHECKING RADIATOR Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows: ● Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ● When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing when clear water is flowing off the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. ● 5. Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. CO-26 ENGINE COOLANT [QR25DE] 6. Check for leaks. A CHECKING RADIATOR CAP ● ● ● ● Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of the radiator cap negative-pressure valve. Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and closing conditions of the negative-pressure CO valve. Pull the negative pressure valve to open it. Check that it closes completely when released. C D E SMA967B ● ● ● F Check radiator cap relief pressure using Tool. Standard : 78 - 98 kPa (0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 - 14 psi) Limit : 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi) G When connecting the radiator cap to the tester, apply water to the cap seal surface. Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the standard values. H I SLC135B Refilling Engine Coolant EBS00EYT Changing the engine coolant is part of the required maintenance of the engine. Refer to MA-23, "Changing Engine Coolant" . J K L M CO-27 WATER PUMP [QR25DE] WATER PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:21020 EBS00CHN KBIA0154E 1. Water pump 4. Water pipe 2. Gasket 3. Water pump housing WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL Water Pump 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. Remove the generator. Refer to SC-32, "Removal" . Remove the water pump. ● Coolant will leak from the cylinder block, have a drain pan in position. CAUTION: ● Handle the water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts. ● The water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. Remove the water pipe mounting bolts. Remove the water pump housing from the engine block. Use a new gasket for installation. Water Pipe 1. 2. 3. Remove the water pump. Remove the exhaust manifold. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the water pipe from the thermostat housing. CO-28 WATER PUMP [QR25DE] INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● A Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane. Check that there is no play when rotating the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by hand. If necessary, replace the water pump as an assembly. CO C KBIA0155E D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When inserting the water pipe end into the thermostat housing, apply coolant to the O-ring seal and install immediately. E F INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing the water pump and pipe, check for leaks using the radiator cap tester. Refer to CO-26, "CHECKING RADIATOR" . G H I J K L M CO-29 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [QR25DE] THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING Removal and Installation PFP:21200 EBS00CHO WBIA0010E 1. Thermostat 2. Water inlet housing 3. Water control valve 4. Water outlet housing 5. Heater hose 6. Water temperature sensor 7. Heater pipe 8. Throttle body coolant inlet 9. Throttle body coolant outlet WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. CAUTION: Be careful not to spill coolant over the engine compartment. Use a rag to absorb any spilled coolant. REMOVAL Thermostat 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the lower radiator hose from the water inlet housing. Remove the water inlet housing. Remove the thermostat. Water Control Valve 1. 2. 3. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the upper radiator hose, heater pipe, and heater hose. Remove the water outlet housing. CO-30 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [QR25DE] 4. Remove the water control valve. A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● ● Place a string so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat (or water control valve) and suspend it in boiling water. It must be fully immersed in the water. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve plate begins to rise from the top plate causing the thermostat to fall off of the string. Continue heating the water and thermostat to check valve lift (the full-open valve lift distance). NOTE: The valve lift standard temperature for the thermostat (or water SLC252B control valve) is the reference value. After checking the valve lift, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. CO C D E Standard Values Component Thermostat Water control valve Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F) 93.5 - 96.5°C (200 - 206°F) Valve lift More than 8 mm/95°C (0.315 in/203°F) More than 8 mm/108°C (0.315 in/226° F) Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F) 90°C (194° F) F G INSTALLATION ● H Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Thermostat and Water Control Valve ● Install the thermostat and water control valve with the whole circumference of each flange fitting securely inside the rubber ring. (The example in the figure shown is the thermostat.) I J K PBIC0157E ● ● Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. (The position deviation may be within the range of ±10°.) Install the water control valve with the up-mark facing up and the frame center part facing upwards. The position deviation may be within the range of ±10° of vertical. M PBIC0158E Heater Pipe ● Apply clean coolant to the heater pipe O-ring, and immediately install the heater pipe into the installation holes. CO-31 L RADIATOR [QR25DE] RADIATOR Removal and Installation PFP:21400 EBS00CHP WBIA0322E 1. Radiator 2. Bracket 3. Mounting rubber 4. A/T oil cooler hose (if equipped) 5. Radiator hose (lower) 6. Cooling fan assembly 7. Reservoir tank 8. Radiator hose (upper) 9. Radiator cap 10. Drain plug WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it three-quarters around. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the air duct with air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-101, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect A/T oil cooler hoses (if equipped). ● Install a blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T oil. 4. Disconnect the radiator upper hose, lower hose, and mounting bracket. 5. Remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly CAUTION: ● Do not damage or scratch radiator core when removing. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● After installation, run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature and check for any cooling system leaks. Repair any leaks as necessary. CO-32 RADIATOR [QR25DE] Disassembly and Assembly EBS00CHQ A CO C D E F WBIA0316E 1. Upper tank 2. Sealing rubber 3. Core 4. Oil cooler securing nut 5. O-ring 6. Oil cooler 7. Lower tank 8. Sealing rubber G H PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. Attach the spacer to the tip of the radiator plate pliers A. Spacer specification: 1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick x 18 mm (0.71 in) wide x 8.5 mm (0.335 in) long. Make sure that when radiator plate pliers A are closed dimension H′′ is approx. 7.6 mm (0.299 in). Adjust dimension H′′ with the spacer, if necessary. I J K SLC655C L DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove tank using Tool. M SLC903 CO-33 RADIATOR [QR25DE] ● Grip the crimped edge and bend it upwards so that the Tool slips off. CAUTION: Do not bend excessively. SLC893 ● In areas where Tool cannot be used, use a screwdriver to bend the edge up. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage tank. SLC930 2. 3. Make sure the edge stands straight up. Remove oil cooler from tank (A/T model only). SLC931 ASSEMBLY 1. Install oil cooler (A/T model only). WBIA0317E CO-34 RADIATOR [QR25DE] 2. Clean contact portion of tank. A CO C SLC932 D 3. Install sealing rubber. NOTE: Push it in with fingers. CAUTION: Be careful not to twist sealing rubber. E F G SLC917A 4. H Crimp tank in specified sequence using Tool. I J K SLC904 L M SLC896 ● Use pliers in the locations where Tool cannot be used. SLC897 CO-35 RADIATOR [QR25DE] 5. Make sure that the rim is completely crimped down. Standard height “H” 6. : 8.0 - 8.4 mm (0.315 - 0.331 in) Confirm that there is no leakage. Refer to CO-26, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . ● SLC554A Inspection 1. EBS00CHR Apply pressure using Tool. Specified pressure value : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp. Attach a hose to the oil cooler as well (A/T model only). SLC933 2. Check for leaks in dip tank. SLC934 CO-36 COOLING FAN [QR25DE] COOLING FAN Disassembly and Assembly PFP:21060 A EBS00CHS CO C D E F G H I WBIA0323E 1. Cooling fan motor 4. Cooling fan blade 2. Insulator 3. Cooling fan shroud DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-32, "REMOVAL" . Remove the cooling fan shroud from the radiator. Remove the cooling fan blades from the cooling fan motors. Remove the insulator. Remove the cooling fan motors from the fan shroud. K L M ASSEMBLY ● J Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. CO-37 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Capacity PFP:00030 EBS00CHT Unit: Coolant capacity with reservoir tank (MAX level) A/T 6.7 (7 1/8, 5 7/8) M/T 6.8 (7 3/16, 6) (US qt, Imp qt) Thermostat EBS00CHU Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F) Valve lift More than 8 mm/95°C (0.315 in/203°F) Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F) Water Control Valve EBS00CHV Valve opening temperature 93.5 - 96.5°C (200 - 206°F) Valve lift More than 8 mm/108°C (0.315 in/226°F) Valve closing temperature 90°C (194°F) Radiator EBS00CHW Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Cap relief pressure Standard 78- 98 (0.8 -1.0, 11-14) Limit 59 (0.6, 9) Leakage test pressure 157 (1.6, 23) CO-38 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS METERS AND GAUGES ............................................ 3 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 3 System Description .................................................. 4 UNIFIED CONTROL METER ................................ 4 HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/ TRIP METER (WITHOUT TRIP COMPUTER) ..... 4 HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/ TRIP METER (WITH TRIP COMPUTER) ............. 4 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 4 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 5 TACHOMETER ..................................................... 5 FUEL GAUGE ....................................................... 5 SPEEDOMETER ................................................... 5 CAN Communication System Description ................ 5 Combination Meter ................................................... 6 WITHOUT TACHOMETER ................................... 6 WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) ......... 7 QR25DE ................................................................ 8 Schematic ................................................................ 9 WITHOUT TACHOMETER ................................... 9 WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) ....... 10 WITH TACHOMETER (QR25DE MODELS) ........11 Wiring Diagram — METER — ................................ 12 WITHOUT TACHOMETER ................................. 12 WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) ....... 13 WITH TACHOMETER (QR25DE MODELS) ....... 14 Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode ............................. 15 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .......................... 15 HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE ....... 15 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 16 PRELIMINARY CHECK ...................................... 16 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 17 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ................................................................ 17 INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ........ 20 INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL... 21 INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT AND FUEL PUMP ............................................... 22 INSPECTION/WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ............................................................... 24 Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 25 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK ................ 25 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK ... 25 WARNING LAMPS .................................................... 26 Schematic ............................................................... 26 WITHOUT TACHOMETER .................................. 26 WITH TACHOMETER ......................................... 27 Wiring Diagram — WARN — .................................. 28 WITHOUT TACHOMETER .................................. 28 WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) ....... 31 WITH TACHOMETER (QR25DE MODELS) ....... 35 Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 39 FUEL WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK ... 39 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK ..................... 39 DIODE CHECK ................................................... 39 WARNING CHIME ..................................................... 40 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 40 System Description ................................................. 41 WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS .................... 41 WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS ............................ 41 Wiring Diagram — CHIME — ................................. 43 WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS .................... 43 WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS ............................ 44 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (With Power Door Locks) ............................................................ 45 “KEY WARN ALM”/“LIGHT WARN ALM”/“SEAT BELT ALM” .......................................................... 45 CONSULT-II Application Items (With Power Door Locks) ..................................................................... 46 “KEY WARN ALARM” .......................................... 46 “LIGHT WARN ALM” ........................................... 46 “SEAT BELT ALM” ............................................... 46 Trouble Diagnoses (Without Power Door Locks) ... 47 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 47 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ................................................................ 47 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) ...................... 48 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH DI-1 E F G H I J DI L M INSERT SIGNAL CHECK) .................................. 48 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH CHECK) ........................... 49 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 ........................... 50 Trouble Diagnoses (With Power Door Locks) ......... 52 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 52 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ................................................................ 52 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) ...................... 53 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT SIGNAL CHECK) .................................. 54 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH CHECK) ........................... 55 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 ........................... 56 BOARD COMPUTER ................................................ 59 System Description ................................................. 59 DI-2 FUNCTION ..........................................................59 OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATION .....59 DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION ........59 TRIP DISTANCE ..................................................59 TRIP TIME ...........................................................59 AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION ......................59 AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED ..............................59 HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION ...........59 CAN Communication System Description ..............60 Wiring Diagram — B/COMP — ...............................61 Trouble Diagnoses ..................................................62 SEGMENT CHECK ..............................................62 PRELIMINARY CHECK .......................................62 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE .................................62 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................63 AMBIENT SENSOR .............................................63 METERS AND GAUGES METERS AND GAUGES Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 A EKS00399 B C D E F G H I J WKIA1094E DI L M DI-3 METERS AND GAUGES System Description EKS0039A UNIFIED CONTROL METER ● ● ● ● Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer (if equipped), fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled by the unified meter control unit built-in combination meter. Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.* *The record of the odometer is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter is erased when the battery cable is disconnected. Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode. Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode. HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER (WITHOUT TRIP COMPUTER) NOTE: Turn ignition switch to the ON position to operate odo/trip meter. SEL253V HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER (WITH TRIP COMPUTER) NOTE: Turn ignition switch to the ON position to operate odo/trip meter. SEL175W POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Power is supplied at all times: DI-4 METERS AND GAUGES through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 25 (without tachometer), or 42 (QG18DE with tachometer), or 13 (QR25DE). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 30, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 26 and 20 (without tachometer), or 41 and 6 (QG18DE with tachometer), or 14 and 7 (QR25DE). Ground is supplied: ● to combination meter terminal 27 (without tachometer), or 48 (QG18DE with tachometer), or 12 (QR25DE) ● through body grounds M28 and M54. ● to combination meter terminal 31 (without tachometer), or 45 (QG18DE with tachometer), or 8 (QR25DE) ● through body grounds B19 and B13. ● A B C D E WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides a water temperature signal to combination meter for water temperature gauge with CAN communication line. F TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter for tachometer with CAN communication line. FUEL GAUGE The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied: ● to combination meter terminal 30 (without tachometer), or 44 (QG18DE with tachometer), or 21 (QR25DE) for the fuel gauge ● from terminal 2 of the fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump ● through terminal 5 of the fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump, and ● through body grounds B19 and B13. G H I J SPEEDOMETER DI The combination meter receives a voltage signal from the vehicle speed sensor for the speedometer. The voltage is supplied: ● to combination meter terminal 29 (without tachometer), or 47 (QG18DE with tachometer), or 17 L (QR25DE) for the speedometer ● from terminal 1 (with QG18DE), or terminal + (with QR25DE) of the vehicle speed sensor. The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed. M CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . DI-5 EKS003LD METERS AND GAUGES Combination Meter EKS0039B WITHOUT TACHOMETER WKIA0289E DI-6 METERS AND GAUGES WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKIA1095E DI-7 METERS AND GAUGES QR25DE WKIA1096E DI-8 METERS AND GAUGES Schematic EKS0039C A WITHOUT TACHOMETER B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0607E DI-9 METERS AND GAUGES WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) WKWA0606E DI-10 METERS AND GAUGES WITH TACHOMETER (QR25DE MODELS) A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0608E DI-11 METERS AND GAUGES Wiring Diagram — METER — EKS0039D WITHOUT TACHOMETER WKWA0603E DI-12 METERS AND GAUGES WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0604E DI-13 METERS AND GAUGES WITH TACHOMETER (QR25DE MODELS) WKWA0605E DI-14 METERS AND GAUGES Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode EKS0039E SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ● ● Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode. Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode. A B HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch to ON and change odo/trip meter to “TRIP A” or “TRIP B”. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Turn ignition switch to ON when pushing odo/trip meter switch. Release odo/trip meter switch 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. Push odo/trip meter switch three times within 7 seconds. All odo/trip meter segments should be turned on. NOTE: If some segments are not turned on, combination meter should be replaced. At this point, the unified control meter is turned to diagnosis mode. C D E F G H I WKIA1120E 7. 8. Push odo/trip meter switch. Indication of each meter/gauge should be as shown in figure during pushing odo/trip meter switch. NOTE: It takes a few seconds for indication of fuel gauge and water temperature gauge to become stable. Turn ignition switch to OFF or start engine to cancel diagnosis mode. J DI L WEL128 DI-15 M METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses EKS0039F PRELIMINARY CHECK WKIA0159E *1: DI-15 *2: DI-17 *3: DI-17 DI-16 METERS AND GAUGES SYMPTOM CHART Symptom Possible causes One meter/gauge (speedometer/tachometer/fuel gauge/water temp. gauge) is malfunctioning. Multiple meters/gauges (except odo/trip meter) are malfunctioning. Repair order 1. Sensor signal - Vehicle speed signal - Engine revolution signal - Fuel gauge - Water temp. gauge 1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge. DI-20, "INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR" DI-21, "INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL" DI-22, "INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT AND FUEL PUMP" DI-24, "INSPECTION/WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE" 2. Unified meter control unit A B C 2. Replace combination meter assembly. Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform “PRELIMINARY CHECK”, DI-16, "PRELIMINARY CHECK" . D POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. CHECK FUSE E Check for blown combination meter fuses. Unit Power source Fuse No. Combination meter Battery 12 Combination meter Ignition switch ON or START 30 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . F G H I J DI L M DI-17 METERS AND GAUGES 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector M29 (QR25DE) or M29 and M30 for (QG18DE). Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. (QG18DE WITHOUT TACHOMETER) Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) 25 (R/B) OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage M30 26 (Y) M29 Ground 20 (Y) WKIA1102E (QG18DE WITH TACHOMETER) Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) 42 (R/B) M30 41 (Y) M29 Ground 6 (Y) OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage WKIA1103E (QR25DE) Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) 13 (R/B) M29 14 (Y) 7 (Y) Ground OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse DI-18 WKIA1104E METERS AND GAUGES 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. (QG18DE WITHOUT TACHOMETER) B Terminals (+) (-) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M30 27 (B) Ground Continuity C Yes D WKIA1108E E (QG18DE WITH TACHOMETER) F Terminals (+) (-) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M30 48 (B) Ground Continuity G Yes H WKIA1109E I (QR25DE) Terminals J (+) (-) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M29 12 (B) Ground Continuity DI Yes L WKIA1110E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair harness or connector. M DI-19 METERS AND GAUGES INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT 1. 2. Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission. Check voltage between the combination meter terminal and ground while quickly turning speed sensor pinion. Terminals (+) Connector Voltage Terminal (Wire color) (-) QG18DE (WITHOUT TACHOMETER) M30 29 (R/Y) Ground Approx. 0.5V QG18DE (WITH TACHOMETER) M30 47 (R/Y) Ground Approx. 0.5V 17 (R/Y) Ground Approx. 0.5V QR25DE M29 OK or NG OK >> Vehicle speed sensor is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. WKIA1150E 2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor connector F43 terminals 1 and 2 (with QG18DE), or connector F36 terminals + and (with QR25DE). Resistance Approx. 250Ω OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Harness between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor. ● Vehicle speed sensor ground circuit. NG >> Replace vehicle speed sensor. WKIA1112E DI-20 METERS AND GAUGES INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL A 1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ECM self diagnosis. Refer to XX (QG18DE ULEV Models), XX (QG18DE SULEV Models), or XX (QR25DE). OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Go to ECM trouble diagnosis. Refer to XX (QG18DE ULEV Models), XX (QG18DE SULEV Models), or XX (QR25DE). B C D E F G H I J DI L M DI-21 METERS AND GAUGES INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT AND FUEL PUMP 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminal 5 and ground. WEL437 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. DI-22 METERS AND GAUGES 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector. Check continuity between combination meter terminal and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminal. B Terminals (+) (-) Combination meter Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump Connector Terminal (Wire color) Connector C Continuity Terminal (Wire color) D QG18DE (WITHOUT TACHOMETER) M30 30 (G) B25 2 (G) Yes 2 (G) Yes E QG18DE (WITH TACHOMETER) M30 44 (G) B25 F QR25DE M29 21 (G) B25 2 (G) Yes G H WKIA1153E 3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal and ground. I Terminals (+) Connector J Continuity Terminal (Wire color) (-) DI QG18DE (WITHOUT TACHOMETER) M30 30 (G) Ground No QG18DE (WITH TACHOMETER) M30 L 44 (G) Ground No 21 (G) Ground No QR25DE M29 M OK or NG OK >> Fuel level sensor unit is OK. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1156E DI-23 METERS AND GAUGES INSPECTION/WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE 1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ECM self diagnosis. Refer to XX (QG18DE ULEV Models), XX (QG18DE SULEV Models), or XX (QR25DE). OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Go to ECM trouble diagnosis. Refer to XX (QG18DE ULEV Models), XX (QG18DE SULEV Models), or XX (QR25DE). DI-24 METERS AND GAUGES Electrical Components Inspection EKS0039G A FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK For removal, refer to FL-3, "Removal and Installation" . Check the resistance between terminals 2 and 5. ● B Ohmmeter (+) 2 Float position mm (in) (−) 5 Resistance (Approximate) *1 Full 136.1 (5.358) 4.5 - 5.5 Ω *2 1/2 89.8 (3.535) 31.5 - 33.5 Ω *3 Empty 31.3 (1.232) 80 - 83 Ω C D *1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper. MEL372K VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. E Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission. Turn vehicle speed sensor pinion quickly and measure voltage across terminals 1 and 2 (with QG18DE), or terminals + and (with QR25DE). F G H WEL440 I J DI L M DI-25 WARNING LAMPS WARNING LAMPS Schematic PFP:24814 EKS0039H WITHOUT TACHOMETER WKWA0609E DI-26 WARNING LAMPS WITH TACHOMETER A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0610E DI-27 WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram — WARN — EKS0039I WITHOUT TACHOMETER WKWA0611E DI-28 WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0612E DI-29 WARNING LAMPS WKWA0613E DI-30 WARNING LAMPS WITH TACHOMETER (QG18DE MODELS) A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0614E DI-31 WARNING LAMPS WKWA0615E DI-32 WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0616E DI-33 WARNING LAMPS WKWA0617E DI-34 WARNING LAMPS WITH TACHOMETER (QR25DE MODELS) A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0618E DI-35 WARNING LAMPS WKWA0619E DI-36 WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0620E DI-37 WARNING LAMPS WKWA0621E DI-38 WARNING LAMPS Electrical Components Inspection EKS0039J A FUEL WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector B25. 3. Connect a resistor (80Ω) between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector terminals 2 and 5. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. The fuel warning lamp should come on. NOTE: ECM might store the 1st trip DTC P0180 and the 1st trip DTC P0464 during this inspection. WEL455 If the DTC is stored in ECM memory, erase the DTC after reconnecting fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" (QG18DE), EC704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" (QR25DE). OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK Oil pressure B C D E F kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Continuity G Engine running More than 10 - 20 (0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3) No Engine not running Less than 10 - 20 (0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3) Yes H Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch and body ground. I MEL425F DIODE CHECK ● ● ● J Check continuity using an ohmmeter. Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the figure. Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector instead of on the combination meter assembly. Refer toDI-28, "Wiring Diagram — WARN —" . NOTE: Specification may vary depending on the type of tester. Before performing this inspection, be sure to refer to the instruction manual for the tester to be used. DI L M SEL901F DI-39 WARNING CHIME WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 EKS0039K WKIA0160E DI-40 WARNING CHIME System Description EKS0039L A WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS The warning chime is controlled by the time control unit. The warning chime is located in the time control unit. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● to time control unit terminal 7 ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch terminal 2, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to lighting switch terminal 11. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to time control unit terminal 9. Ground is supplied to time control unit terminal 8 through body grounds M28 and M54. When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the time control unit, the warning chime will sound. B C D E F Ignition Key Warning Chime With the key in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in the OFF position, and the driver door open, the warning chime will sound. Power is supplied: ● from key switch terminal 1 ● to time control unit terminal 4. Ground is supplied: ● from front door switch LH terminal 2 ● to time control unit terminal 2. Front door switch LH terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B13 and B19. Light Warning Chime G H I J With ignition switch OFF, driver door open, and lighting switch in parking lamp (1ST) or ON (2ND) position, warning chime will sound. Power is supplied: DI ● from lighting switch terminal 12 ● to time control unit terminal 5. L Ground is supplied: ● from front door switch LH terminal 2 ● to time control unit terminal 2. M Front door switch LH terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B13 and B19. Seat Belt Warning Chime With ignition switch turned ON and seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH ON), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. Ground is supplied: ● from seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1 ● to time control unit terminal 1. Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B13 and B19. WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS The warning chime is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The warning chime is located in the smart entrance control unit. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse (No. 37, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 10, ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] DI-41 WARNING CHIME to key switch terminal 2, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to lighting switch terminal 11. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 33. Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 16 through body grounds M28 and M54. When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the smart entrance control unit, the warning chime will sound. ● Ignition Key Warning Chime With the key in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in the OFF position, and the driver door open, the warning chime will sound. Power is supplied: ● from key switch terminal 1 ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 32. Ground is supplied: ● from front door switch LH terminal 2 ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 29. Front door switch LH terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B13 and B19. Light Warning Chime With ignition switch OFF, driver door open, and lighting switch in parking lamp (1ST) or ON (2ND) position, warning chime will sound. Power is supplied: ● from lighting switch terminal 12 ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 34. Ground is supplied: ● from front door switch LH terminal 2 ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 29. Front door switch LH terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B13 and B19. Seat Belt Warning Chime With ignition switch turned ON and seat belt unfastened (seat belt switch ON), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. Ground is supplied: ● from seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1 ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 22. Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B13 and B19. DI-42 WARNING CHIME Wiring Diagram — CHIME — EKS0039M A WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0622E DI-43 WARNING CHIME WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS WKWA0623E DI-44 WARNING CHIME CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (With Power Door Locks) EKS0039N A “KEY WARN ALM”/“LIGHT WARN ALM”/“SEAT BELT ALM” CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. B C D E LAT136 2. F Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. G H SAIA0450E 3. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. I J DI L WKIA0156E 4. Touch “KEY WARN ALM”, “LIGHT WARN ALM” or “SEAT BELT ALM”. WKIA0157E DI-45 M WARNING CHIME 5. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available for the warning chime. SEL322W CONSULT-II Application Items (With Power Door Locks) EKS0039O “KEY WARN ALARM” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. Active Test Test Item Description This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. CHIME “LIGHT WARN ALM” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. HD/LMP 1ST SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. Active Test Test Item Description This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. CHIME “SEAT BELT ALM” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. SEAT BELT SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt buckle switch LH. Active Test Test Item CHIME Description This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime sounds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. DI-46 WARNING CHIME Trouble Diagnoses (Without Power Door Locks) EKS0039P A SYMPTOM CHART X Ignition key warning chime does not activate. X Seat belt warning chime does not activate. X All warning chimes do not activate. X DI-50 B C D E F DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 X DI-49 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH CHECK) Light warning chime does not activate. SYMPTOM DI-48 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERTSIGNAL CHECK) DI-48 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) DI-47 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK REFERENCE PAGE G H I X J X X X X DI X X: Applicable L POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Power Supply Circuit Check Terminals (+) (-) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M40 7 (PU) M40 9 (G) M Ignition switch position OFF ACC ON Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage WKIA0044E DI-47 WARNING CHIME Ground Circuit Check Terminals (+) (-) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M40 8 (B) Ground Continuity Yes WKIA0045E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) 1. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between time control unit terminal 5 and ground. Terminals Condition of lighting switch (+) Terminal (Wire color) (-) 1st position 2nd position OFF Connector M40 5 (R/G) Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V OK or NG OK >> Lighting switch is OK. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between control unit and lighting switch WKIA0043E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT SIGNAL CHECK) 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between time control unit terminal 4 and ground. Terminals Condition of key switch (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) Key inserted Key removed M40 4 (L/W) Ground Battery voltage 0V OK or NG OK >> Key switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. WKIA0042E DI-48 WARNING CHIME 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH A Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. B C D LEL449 E OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse ● Harness for open or short between time control unit and key switch NG >> Replace key switch. F G DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH CHECK) H 1. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 1 and ground. I Condition of seat belt buckle switch LH Terminals J (+) Terminal (Wire color) (-) Fastened Unfastened Connector M40 1 (W/B) Ground Approx. 5V 0V DI OK or NG OK >> Seat belt buckle switch LH is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. WKIA0046E L M DI-49 WARNING CHIME 2. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when seat belt is fastened and unfastened. LEL462 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Seat belt buckle switch LH ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between time control unit and seat belt buckle switch LH NG >> Replace seat belt buckle switch LH. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 1. CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL Check voltage between time control unit terminal 9 and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) (-) OFF ACC ON 9 (G) Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse WKIA0047E 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL With ignition switch OFF, check voltage between time control unit terminal 2 and ground. Terminals Condition of driver's door (+) Terminal (Wire color) (-) Closed Open Connector M40 2 (R) Ground Approx. 5V 0V OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. WKIA0048E DI-50 WARNING CHIME 3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH A Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3. B C D LEL465 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Front door switch LH ground circuit and condition ● Harness for open or short between time control unit and front door switch LH NG >> Replace front door switch LH. E F G H I J DI L M DI-51 WARNING CHIME Trouble Diagnoses (With Power Door Locks) EKS0039Q DI-53 DI-54 DI-55 DI-56 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH CHECK) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) DI-52 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK REFERENCE PAGE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERTSIGNAL CHECK) SYMPTOM CHART Light warning chime does not activate. X X Ignition key warning chime does not activate. X Seat belt warning chime does not activate. X All warning chimes do not activate. X SYMPTOM X X X X X X X: Applicable POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Power Supply Circuit Check Terminals Ignition switch position (+) (-) OFF ACC ON 10 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage WEL657 DI-52 WARNING CHIME Ground Circuit Check A Terminals (+) (-) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M38 16 (B) Ground Continuity B Yes C WEL467 D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) 1. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL E With CONSULT-II Check lighting switch (“HD/LMP 1ST SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. F G H I SEL316W J Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 34 and ground. DI L M WEL468 OK or NG OK >> Lighting switch is OK. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and lighting switch DI-53 WARNING CHIME DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT SIGNAL CHECK) 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL315W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 32 and ground. WEL469 OK or NG OK >> Key switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. LEL449 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch NG >> Replace key switch. DI-54 WARNING CHIME DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH CHECK) A 1. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II Check seat belt buckle switch LH (“SEAT BELT SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C D E LEL658 F Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 22 and ground. G H I J WEL470 OK or NG OK >> Seat belt buckle switch LH is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. DI 2. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH L Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when seat belt is fastened and unfastened. M LEL462 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Seat belt buckle switch LH ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and seat belt buckle switch LH NG >> Replace seat belt buckle switch LH. DI-55 WARNING CHIME DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 1. CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL318W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 33 and ground. WEL471 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse DI-56 WARNING CHIME 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check front door switch LH signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B C D SEL319W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 29 and ground. E F G H I WEL472 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. J 3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH DI Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3. L M LEL465 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Front door switch LH ground circuit and condition ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch LH NG >> Replace front door switch LH. DI-57 WARNING CHIME 4. CHECK WARNING CHIME With CONSULT-II Perform “CHIME” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL320W OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> Replace smart entrance control unit. DI-58 BOARD COMPUTER BOARD COMPUTER System Description PFP:24810 A EKS00653 FUNCTION The board computer can indicate the following items. ● Outside air temperature ● DTE (distance to empty) ● Trip distance ● Trip time ● Average fuel consumption ● Average vehicle speed B C D OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATION The outside air temperature indication is displayed while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Signal is supplied ● through ambient sensor terminal 1 ● to combination meter (board computer) terminal 20. Indication range is between -30 and 55°C (-22 and 131°F). When outside temperature is less than -30°C (22°F), display shows ICY. When outside temperature is more than 55°C (131°F), indication will be blank. When outside temperature is less than 3°C (37°F) continuously, display will blink as a warning. In this case, the display will change to the outside air temperature mode even though the display is showing a different mode. The indicated temperature is not affected by engine heat. It changes only when one of the following conditions exists. ● When vehicle speed is more than 20 km/h (12 MPH). ● The ignition switch has been turned OFF for more than 3.5 hours. ● When outside air temperature is less than the indicated temperature. E F G H I DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION The range indication provides the driver with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The range is calculated by signals from the fuel level sensor unit (fuel remaining), ECM (fuel consumption) J and vehicle speed sensor. The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. When fuel remaining is less than approximately 10 (10 5/8 US quarts, 8 3/4 Imp quarts), the indication will blink as a warning. If the fuel remaining is less than approximately 8 (8 1/2 US quarts, 7 Imp quarts), the indication will show "---". In this DI case, the display will change to the DTE mode even though the display is showing a different mode. When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, DTE mode will display "---" until the vehicle is driven 500 miles (804.5 km). L TRIP DISTANCE Trip distance is calculated by signal from the vehicle speed sensor. If trip distance is reset, trip time will be reset at the same time. TRIP TIME Trip time displays cumulative ignition switch ON time. If trip time is reset, trip distance will be reset at the same time. AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION Average fuel consumption indication is calculated by signals from the vehicle speed sensor and the ECM (fuel consumption). The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED Average vehicle speed indication is calculated by running distance and running time. The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. If average vehicle speed is reset, average fuel consumption will be reset at the same time. After resetting, the display will show "---" for 30 seconds. HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION Indication can be changed in the following order by momentarily depressing the board computer switch. Outside air temperature → DTE → Trip distance → Trip time → Average fuel consumption → Average vehicle speed. DI-59 M BOARD COMPUTER Holding the switch for more than 0.8 second will reset the indication of the currently displayed mode (trip distance, trip time, average vehicle speed or average fuel consumption). NOTE: After the display changes automatically, the indication can be changed to the last mode by pushing the board computer switch. CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . DI-60 EKS00654 BOARD COMPUTER Wiring Diagram — B/COMP — EKS00655 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA0624E DI-61 BOARD COMPUTER Trouble Diagnoses EKS00656 SEGMENT CHECK The board computer segment display can be checked by entering combination meter self-diagnostic mode. Refer to DI-15, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . PRELIMINARY CHECK WKIA1117E *1 DI-62, "DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" *2 DI-16, "PRELIMINARY CHECK" DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE Symptom Outside air temperature display is not displayed properly. (It may take a short time to steady the indication after ignition switch is turned ON.) Possible cause Repair order 1. Ambient sensor 1. Check ambient sensor. 2. Ambient sensor circuit 2. Check harness for open or short between ambient sensor and board computer. 3. Vehicle speed sensor signal 3. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 17 and vehicle speed sensor. NOTE: If the meter is powered up with the ambient sensor disconnected, outside air temperature display will show "---" even if the sensor is reconnected. In this case, with the sensor connected, disconnect and reconnect the battery, then the correct temperature will be displayed. DTE (distance to empty) is not displayed properly.) Trip distance is not indicated properly. 1. Average fuel consumption display 1. Make sure fuel consumption is displayed properly. If NG, check fuel consumption display. 2. Fuel tank gauge signal circuit. 2. Make sure fuel gauge operates properly. If NG, check fuel gauge. 1. Vehicle speed sensor signal circuit 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 17 and vehicle speed sensor. DI-62 BOARD COMPUTER Symptom Trip time is not indicated properly. Average fuel consumption is not displayed properly. Average vehicle speed is not indicated properly. Possible cause Repair order 1. 10A fuse [No. 12 (located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify battery voltage is present at combination meter terminal 13. 1. Fuse 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 17 and vehicle speed sensor. 1. Trip distance display 2. Fuel consumption signal A B 2. Check CAN lines for open or short between ECM and combination meter. 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 17 and vehicle speed sensor. 1. Trip distance display 2. Trip time display 2. Make sure trip time is displayed properly. If NG, check trip time display. Electrical Components Inspection C D EKS00657 AMBIENT SENSOR E After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ -15 (5) 12.73 -10 (14) 9.92 -5 (23) 7.80 0 (32) 6.19 5 (41) 4.95 10 (50) 3.99 15 (59) 3.24 20 (68) 2.65 25 (77) 2.19 30 (86) 1.81 35 (95) 1.51 40 (104) 1.27 45 (113) 1.07 F G H I J DI WKIA1118E If NG, replace ambient sensor. L M DI-63 BOARD COMPUTER DI-64 B ENGINE A SECTION ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM EC C D CONTENTS QG18DE MODIFICATION NOTICE .......................................... 15 Modification Notice ................................................. 15 How to Check Vehicle Type ................................... 15 INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 16 Alphabetical Index .................................................. 16 DTC No. Index ....................................................... 19 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 22 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 22 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T .......................................................................... 22 Precautions ............................................................ 22 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 25 PREPARATION ......................................................... 26 Special Service Tools ............................................. 26 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 27 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 28 System Diagram ..................................................... 28 System Chart ......................................................... 29 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 30 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 32 Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................... 33 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load & High Engine Speed)... 33 CAN communication .............................................. 34 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 35 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 35 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ............................................................. 36 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 47 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 47 Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 47 Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 49 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 52 Introduction ............................................................ 52 Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 52 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 53 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 66 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 69 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 74 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 74 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 78 Fail-safe Chart ........................................................ 80 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 81 Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 86 Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 90 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 102 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 106 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 106 CONSULT-II Function ........................................... 114 Generic Scan Tool (GST) ..................................... 129 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 130 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 133 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 136 Description ............................................................ 136 Testing Condition .................................................. 136 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 136 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 137 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 140 Description ............................................................ 140 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 140 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ................... 141 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 141 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 142 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 148 Description ............................................................ 148 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 148 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 148 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 149 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 150 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 151 Description ............................................................ 151 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 151 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 152 EC-1 E F G H I J K L M DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 152 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 153 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ..................... 154 Description ............................................................ 154 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 154 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 154 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 154 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 156 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 157 Component Inspection .......................................... 159 Removal and Installation ...................................... 159 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 160 Component Description ........................................ 160 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 160 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 160 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 160 Overall Function Check ........................................ 162 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 163 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 164 Component Inspection .......................................... 167 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 168 Component Description ........................................ 168 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 168 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 168 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 168 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 170 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 171 Component Inspection .......................................... 174 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 175 Component Description ........................................ 175 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 175 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 175 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 176 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 177 Component Inspection .......................................... 178 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 179 Component Description ........................................ 179 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 179 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 180 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 181 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 182 Component Inspection .......................................... 183 Removal and Installation ...................................... 183 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 184 Component Description ........................................ 184 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 184 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 184 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 185 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 186 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 187 Component Inspection .......................................... 189 Remove and Installation ....................................... 189 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 190 Component Description ........................................ 190 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 190 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 191 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 191 Component Inspection .......................................... 191 Removal and Installation ....................................... 192 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 193 Component Description ........................................ 193 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 193 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 193 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 194 Component Inspection .......................................... 195 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 196 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 196 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 196 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 196 Component Inspection .......................................... 197 Removal and Installation ....................................... 197 DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 198 Component Description ........................................ 198 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .198 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 198 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 199 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 200 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 201 Component Inspection .......................................... 202 Removal and Installation ....................................... 203 DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 204 Component Description ........................................ 204 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .204 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 204 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 205 Overall Function Check ......................................... 205 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 207 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 208 Component Inspection .......................................... 210 Removal and Installation ....................................... 211 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.212 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 212 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 212 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 214 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 215 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.219 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 219 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 219 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 221 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 222 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 226 Component Description ........................................ 226 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 226 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 226 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 228 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 229 Component Inspection .......................................... 230 Removal and Installation ....................................... 230 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 231 Component Description ........................................ 231 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 231 EC-2 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 232 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 233 Component Inspection ......................................... 234 Removal and Installation ...................................... 234 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 235 Component Description ........................................ 235 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 236 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 237 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 238 Component Inspection ......................................... 240 Removal and Installation ...................................... 240 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ............................ 241 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 242 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 242 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 247 Component Description ........................................ 247 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 247 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 247 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 248 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 249 Component Inspection ......................................... 250 Removal and Installation ...................................... 251 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 252 Component Description ........................................ 252 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 252 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 252 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 252 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 254 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 255 Component Inspection ......................................... 257 Removal and Installation ...................................... 258 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 259 Component Description ........................................ 259 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 259 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 259 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 260 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 261 Component Inspection ......................................... 264 Removal and Installation ...................................... 264 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION. 265 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 265 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 265 Overall Function Check ........................................ 266 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 267 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 269 System Description .............................................. 269 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 269 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 270 Overall Function Check ........................................ 270 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 271 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 275 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 275 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 276 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 277 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 284 Description ............................................................ 284 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 284 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 285 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 285 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 286 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 288 Component Inspection .......................................... 289 Removal and Installation ...................................... 290 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 291 Component Description ........................................ 291 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 291 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 291 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 291 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 293 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 294 Component Inspection .......................................... 296 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 298 Component Description ........................................ 298 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 298 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 298 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 298 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 299 Component Inspection .......................................... 299 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 300 Component Description ........................................ 300 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 300 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 300 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 301 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 302 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 303 Component Inspection .......................................... 305 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 306 Component Description ........................................ 306 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 306 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 306 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 307 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 308 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 309 Component Inspection .......................................... 312 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 314 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 314 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 315 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 316 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 322 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 322 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 323 EC-3 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Overall Function Check ........................................ 324 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 325 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 331 Component Description ........................................ 331 On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 331 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 331 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 332 Removal and Installation ...................................... 332 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 333 Component Description ........................................ 333 On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 333 Overall Function Check ........................................ 333 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 334 Removal and Installation ...................................... 334 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......... 335 Component Description ........................................ 335 On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 335 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 335 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 336 Removal and Installation ...................................... 336 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 337 Component Description ........................................ 337 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 337 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 337 Overall Function Check ........................................ 337 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 338 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 339 Description ............................................................ 339 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 339 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 339 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 340 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 341 Description ............................................................ 341 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 341 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 341 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 342 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 343 Component Description ........................................ 343 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 343 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 343 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 343 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 344 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 345 Component Inspection .......................................... 347 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 348 Component Description ........................................ 348 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 348 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 348 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 349 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ........ 351 Description ............................................................ 351 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 351 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 351 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 351 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 353 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 354 Component Inspection .......................................... 356 Removal and Installation ....................................... 356 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 357 Component Description ........................................ 357 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 357 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 357 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 358 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 359 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 361 Component Description ........................................ 361 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .361 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 361 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 362 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 363 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 364 Component Inspection .......................................... 367 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 368 Description ............................................................ 368 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .369 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 369 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 369 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 370 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 371 Component Inspection .......................................... 372 Removal and Installation ....................................... 372 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR ............................................................. 373 Component Description ........................................ 373 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 373 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 373 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 374 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION .............................................................. 375 Description ............................................................ 375 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 375 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 375 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 376 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 377 Component Inspection .......................................... 380 Removal and Installation ....................................... 381 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY ..................................................................... 382 Component Description ........................................ 382 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .382 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 382 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 382 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 384 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 385 Component Inspection .......................................... 386 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 387 Component Description ........................................ 387 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 387 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 387 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 388 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 389 EC-4 Component Inspection ......................................... 390 Removal and Installation ...................................... 391 DTC P1132 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE .................. 392 Component Description ........................................ 392 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 392 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 392 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 392 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 394 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 395 Removal and Installation ...................................... 396 DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR ............................................... 397 Component Description ........................................ 397 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 397 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 397 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 398 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 399 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 401 Removal and Installation ...................................... 404 DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE .................. 405 Description ........................................................... 405 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 406 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 406 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 406 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 407 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 409 Removal and Installation ...................................... 412 DTC P1146 HO2S2 ................................................. 413 Component Description ........................................ 413 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 413 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 413 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 414 Overall Function Check ........................................ 414 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 415 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 416 Component Inspection ......................................... 418 Removal and Installation ...................................... 419 DTC P1147 HO2S2 ................................................. 420 Component Description ........................................ 420 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 420 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 420 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 421 Overall Function Check ........................................ 421 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 422 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 423 Component Inspection ......................................... 425 Removal and Installation ...................................... 426 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ................ 427 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 427 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 428 System Description .............................................. 428 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 428 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 429 Overall Function Check ........................................ 429 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 431 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 432 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 439 Component Inspection .......................................... 440 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 442 Component Description ........................................ 442 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 442 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 442 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 443 Removal and Installation ...................................... 443 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 444 Component Description ........................................ 444 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 444 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 444 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 445 Removal and Installation ...................................... 445 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 446 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 446 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 446 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 447 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 448 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 450 Component Description ........................................ 450 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 450 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 450 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 450 Overall Function Check ........................................ 451 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 453 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 454 Removal and Installation ...................................... 455 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 456 Component Description ........................................ 456 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 456 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 456 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 456 Overall Function Check ........................................ 457 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 459 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 460 Removal and Installation ...................................... 461 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 462 Component Description ........................................ 462 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 462 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 462 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 462 Overall Function Check ........................................ 463 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 465 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 466 Removal and Installation ...................................... 468 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 469 Component Description ........................................ 469 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 469 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 469 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 469 Overall Function Check ........................................ 470 EC-5 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 472 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 473 Removal and Installation ...................................... 475 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 476 Component Description ........................................ 476 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 476 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 476 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 476 Overall Function Check ........................................ 477 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 479 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 480 Removal and Installation ...................................... 481 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 482 Component Description ........................................ 482 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 482 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 482 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 482 Overall Function Check ........................................ 483 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 485 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 486 Removal and Installation ...................................... 488 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 489 Component Description ........................................ 489 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 489 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 489 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 489 Overall Function Check ........................................ 490 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 492 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 493 Removal and Installation ...................................... 495 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 496 Description ............................................................ 496 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 496 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 497 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 497 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 498 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 500 Component Inspection .......................................... 503 Removal and Installation ...................................... 503 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 504 Component Description ........................................ 504 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 504 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 504 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 504 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 506 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 507 Component Inspection .......................................... 508 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 510 Component Description ........................................ 510 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 510 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 510 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 510 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 512 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 514 Component Inspection .......................................... 516 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 517 Component Description ........................................ 517 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .517 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 517 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 518 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 519 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 521 Component Inspection .......................................... 526 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 528 Component Description ........................................ 528 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 528 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 528 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 529 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 530 Component Description ........................................ 530 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .530 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 530 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 530 Overall Function Check ......................................... 531 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 532 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 533 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 534 Description ............................................................ 534 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .534 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 534 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 534 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 535 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 536 Component Inspection .......................................... 538 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 540 Component Description ........................................ 540 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .540 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 540 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 541 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 542 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 543 Component Inspection .......................................... 545 Removal and Installation ....................................... 545 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 546 Component Description ........................................ 546 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .546 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 546 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 547 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 548 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 549 Component Inspection .......................................... 552 Removal and Installation ....................................... 552 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 553 Component Description ........................................ 553 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EC-6 . 553 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 553 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 554 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 555 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 556 Component Inspection ......................................... 558 Removal and Installation ...................................... 558 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ..................................... 559 Component Description ........................................ 559 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 559 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 559 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 560 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 561 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 562 Component Inspection ......................................... 565 Removal and Installation ...................................... 565 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 566 Component Description ........................................ 566 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 567 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 572 Component Inspection ......................................... 576 Removal and Installation ...................................... 577 INJECTOR .............................................................. 578 Component Description ........................................ 578 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 578 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 579 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 580 Component Inspection ......................................... 584 Removal and Installation ...................................... 584 FUEL PUMP ........................................................... 585 System Description .............................................. 585 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 585 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 586 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 587 Component Inspection ......................................... 590 Removal and Installation ...................................... 590 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 591 Description ........................................................... 591 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 592 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 593 Removal and Installation ...................................... 595 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 596 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 596 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 597 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 602 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 608 Component Description ........................................ 608 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 608 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 609 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................611 Component Inspection ......................................... 616 ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 618 Component Description ........................................ 618 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 618 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 619 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 620 MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ........................ 621 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 621 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 622 Description ............................................................ 622 Component Inspection .......................................... 625 Removal and Installation ...................................... 626 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 626 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) .................................................................... 627 System Description ............................................... 627 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 628 Component Inspection .......................................... 630 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 633 Description ............................................................ 633 Component Inspection .......................................... 633 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 635 System Description ............................................... 635 Component Description ........................................ 636 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 637 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 637 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 637 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 637 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 637 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 637 Injector .................................................................. 637 Resistor ................................................................ 637 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 637 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 637 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ......................... 637 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 638 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 638 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 638 Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ............................ 638 QR25DE INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 639 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 639 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 642 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 646 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 646 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T ........................................................................ 646 Precaution ............................................................ 646 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 649 PREPARATION ....................................................... 650 Special Service Tools ........................................... 650 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 651 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 652 System Diagram ................................................... 652 Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 654 System Chart ........................................................ 655 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 656 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 658 EC-7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................. 659 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) .................................................................. 660 CAN communication ............................................. 661 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 662 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 662 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) ...................................................................... 663 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV) ......... 674 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 684 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 684 Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 685 Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 687 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 689 Introduction ........................................................... 689 Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 689 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 690 NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) . 706 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 706 OBD System Operation Chart .............................. 709 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 715 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 715 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 720 Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 721 Basic Inspection ................................................... 723 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 728 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 732 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 742 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 746 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 746 CONSULT-II Function ........................................... 753 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 767 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 769 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 772 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 777 Description ............................................................ 777 Testing Condition .................................................. 777 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 777 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 778 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 781 Description ............................................................ 781 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 781 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ................... 782 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 782 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 783 Component Inspection .......................................... 788 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 789 Description ............................................................ 789 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 789 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 789 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 790 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 791 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 792 Description ............................................................ 792 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .792 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 793 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 793 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 794 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER ...................... 795 Description ............................................................ 795 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .795 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 795 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 795 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 797 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 798 Component Inspection .......................................... 800 Removal and Installation ....................................... 800 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ...................... 801 Description ............................................................ 801 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .801 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 801 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 801 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 803 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 804 Component Inspection .......................................... 806 Removal and Installation ....................................... 806 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 807 Component Description ........................................ 807 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .807 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 807 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 807 Overall Function Check ......................................... 809 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 810 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 811 Component Inspection .......................................... 814 Removal and Installation ....................................... 814 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 815 Component Description ........................................ 815 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .815 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 815 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 815 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 817 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 818 Component Inspection .......................................... 821 Removal and Installation ....................................... 821 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 822 Component Description ........................................ 822 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 822 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 822 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 824 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 825 Component Inspection .......................................... 826 Removal and Installation ....................................... 826 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 827 Component Description ........................................ 827 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 827 EC-8 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 828 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 829 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 830 Component Inspection ......................................... 831 Removal and Installation ...................................... 831 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ........................... 832 Component Description ........................................ 832 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 832 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 832 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 833 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 834 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 835 Component Inspection ......................................... 837 Remove and Installation ....................................... 837 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ..................................... 838 Component Description ........................................ 838 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 838 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 839 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 839 Component Inspection ......................................... 839 Removal and Installation ...................................... 840 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ....................................... 841 Component Description ........................................ 841 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 841 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 841 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 842 Component Inspection ......................................... 843 Removal and Installation ...................................... 843 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................ 844 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 844 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 844 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 844 Component Inspection ......................................... 845 Removal and Installation ...................................... 845 DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................. 846 Component Description ........................................ 846 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 846 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 846 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 847 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 848 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 849 Component Inspection ......................................... 850 Removal and Installation ...................................... 851 DTC P0133 HO2S1 ................................................. 852 Component Description ........................................ 852 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 852 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 852 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 853 Overall Function Check ........................................ 854 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 855 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 856 Component Inspection ......................................... 859 Removal and Installation ...................................... 861 DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................. 862 Component Description ........................................ 862 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 862 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 862 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 863 Overall Function Check ........................................ 864 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 865 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 866 Component Inspection .......................................... 867 Removal and Installation ...................................... 868 DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 869 Component Description ........................................ 869 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 869 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 869 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 870 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 871 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 872 Component Inspection .......................................... 873 Removal and Installation ...................................... 874 DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 875 Component Description ........................................ 875 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 875 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 875 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 876 Overall Function Check ........................................ 876 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 878 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 879 Component Inspection .......................................... 881 Removal and Installation ...................................... 882 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 883 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 883 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 883 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 885 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 887 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 894 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 894 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 894 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 896 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 898 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 904 Component Description ........................................ 904 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 904 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 904 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 906 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 907 Component Inspection .......................................... 908 Removal and Installation ...................................... 908 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 909 Component Description ........................................ 909 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 909 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 909 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 910 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 911 Component Inspection .......................................... 912 Removal and Installation ...................................... 912 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 913 Component Description ........................................ 913 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 913 EC-9 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 913 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 914 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 915 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 916 Component Inspection .......................................... 918 Removal and Installation ...................................... 918 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ............................ 919 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 919 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 919 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 920 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ............................................ 926 Component Description ........................................ 926 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 926 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 926 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 927 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 928 Component Inspection .......................................... 929 Removal and Installation ...................................... 929 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 930 Component Description ........................................ 930 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 930 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 930 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 930 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 931 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 932 Component Inspection .......................................... 934 Removal and Installation ...................................... 934 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 935 Component Description ........................................ 935 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 935 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 935 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 936 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 937 Component Inspection .......................................... 940 Removal and Installation ...................................... 940 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 941 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 941 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 941 Overall Function Check ........................................ 943 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 944 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 949 System Description ............................................... 949 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 949 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 950 Overall Function Check ........................................ 950 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 951 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 955 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 955 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 956 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 957 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 963 Description ............................................................ 963 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 963 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 964 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 964 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 965 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 966 Component Inspection .......................................... 968 Removal and Installation ....................................... 968 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ...................................................................... 969 Component Description ........................................ 969 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .969 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 969 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 969 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 971 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 972 Component Inspection .......................................... 974 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 976 Component Description ........................................ 976 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .976 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 976 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 977 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 978 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 979 Component Inspection .......................................... 981 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 982 Component Description ........................................ 982 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .982 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 982 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 983 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 984 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 985 Component Inspection .......................................... 988 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 990 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 990 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 991 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 992 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 998 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 998 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 999 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1000 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1001 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 1008 Component Description ....................................... 1008 On Board Diagnostic Logic .................................. 1008 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1008 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1009 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1009 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 1010 Component Description ....................................... 1010 On Board Diagnostic Logic .................................. 1010 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1010 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1011 Removal and Installation ......................................1011 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......... 1012 Component Description ....................................... 1012 On Board Diagnostic Logic .................................. 1012 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1012 EC-10 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1013 Removal and Installation .....................................1013 DTC P0500 VSS ....................................................1014 Component Description .......................................1014 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1014 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1014 Overall Function Check .......................................1014 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1015 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1016 Description ..........................................................1016 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1016 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1016 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1017 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1018 Description ..........................................................1018 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1018 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1018 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1019 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................1020 Component Description .......................................1020 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1020 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1020 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1020 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1021 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1022 Component Inspection ........................................1024 DTC P0605 ECM ...................................................1025 Component Description .......................................1025 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1025 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1025 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1026 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER .......1028 Description ..........................................................1028 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1028 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1028 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1028 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1030 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1031 Component Inspection ........................................1033 Removal and Installation .....................................1033 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................1034 Component Description .......................................1034 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1034 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1034 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1035 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1036 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...1038 Description ..........................................................1038 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1039 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1039 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1039 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1040 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1041 Component Inspection ........................................1042 Removal and Installation .....................................1042 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR ............................................................1043 Component Description .......................................1043 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1043 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1043 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1044 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION .............................................................1045 Description ...........................................................1045 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1045 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1045 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1046 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1047 Component Inspection .........................................1050 Removal and Installation .....................................1051 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY ....................................................................1052 Component Description .......................................1052 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1052 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1052 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1052 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1054 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1055 Component Inspection .........................................1056 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........1057 Component Description .......................................1057 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1057 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1057 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1058 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1059 Component Inspection .........................................1060 Removal and Installation .....................................1061 DTC P1143 HO2S1 ................................................1062 Component Description .......................................1062 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1062 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1062 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1063 Overall Function Check .......................................1063 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1064 Component Inspection .........................................1066 Removal and Installation .....................................1067 DTC P1144 HO2S1 ................................................1068 Component Description .......................................1068 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1068 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1068 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1069 Overall Function Check .......................................1069 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1070 Component Inspection .........................................1072 Removal and Installation .....................................1073 DTC P1146 HO2S2 ................................................1074 Component Description .......................................1074 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1074 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1074 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1075 Overall Function Check .......................................1075 EC-11 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Wiring Diagram ....................................................1077 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1078 Component Inspection .........................................1080 Removal and Installation .....................................1081 DTC P1147 HO2S2 ................................................1082 Component Description .......................................1082 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1082 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1082 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1083 Overall Function Check .......................................1083 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1085 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1086 Component Inspection .........................................1088 Removal and Installation .....................................1089 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ...............1090 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1090 DTC Confirmation Procedure (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) ............................................1090 Overall Function Check (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) .....................................................1091 Diagnostic Procedure (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/ T MODELS) .........................................................1091 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE .......1092 System Description ..............................................1092 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1092 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1093 Overall Function Check .......................................1093 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1095 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1096 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ..........................1103 Component Inspection .........................................1104 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................1105 Component Description .......................................1105 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1105 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1105 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1106 Removal and Installation .....................................1106 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................1107 Component Description .......................................1107 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1107 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1107 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1108 Removal and Installation .....................................1108 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1109 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1109 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1109 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1110 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1111 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................1113 Component Description .......................................1113 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1113 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1113 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1113 Overall Function Check .......................................1114 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1116 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1117 Removal and Installation ......................................1118 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................1119 Component Description .......................................1119 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1119 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1119 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1119 Overall Function Check ........................................1120 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1122 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1123 Removal and Installation ......................................1124 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................1125 Component Description .......................................1125 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1125 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1125 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1125 Overall Function Check ........................................1126 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1128 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1129 Removal and Installation ......................................1131 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................1132 Component Description .......................................1132 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1132 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1132 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1132 Overall Function Check ........................................1133 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1135 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1136 Removal and Installation ......................................1138 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................1139 Component Description .......................................1139 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1139 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1139 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1139 Overall Function Check ........................................1140 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1142 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1143 Removal and Installation ......................................1144 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................1145 Component Description .......................................1145 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1145 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1145 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1145 Overall Function Check ........................................1146 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1148 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1149 Removal and Installation ......................................1151 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................1152 Component Description .......................................1152 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1152 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1152 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1152 Overall Function Check ........................................1153 EC-12 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1155 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1156 Removal and Installation .....................................1158 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............................1159 Description ..........................................................1159 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1159 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1160 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1160 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1161 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1163 Component Inspection ........................................1166 Removal and Installation .....................................1166 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ....................................................................1167 Component Description .......................................1167 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1167 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1167 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1167 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1169 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1170 Component Inspection ........................................1172 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ...............1174 Component Description .......................................1174 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1174 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1174 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1174 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1176 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1178 Component Inspection ........................................1180 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ....................1181 Component Description .......................................1181 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1181 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1181 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1182 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1183 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1185 Component Inspection ........................................1190 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ...1192 Component Description .......................................1192 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1192 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1192 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1193 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH .....................................1194 Component Description .......................................1194 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1194 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1194 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1194 Overall Function Check .......................................1195 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1196 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1197 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1198 Component Description .......................................1198 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1198 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1198 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1198 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1199 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1200 Component Inspection .........................................1202 Removal and Installation .....................................1203 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................1204 Description ...........................................................1204 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1204 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1204 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1204 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1205 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1206 Component Inspection .........................................1208 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................1210 Component Description .......................................1210 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1210 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1210 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1211 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1212 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1213 Component Inspection .........................................1215 Removal and Installation .....................................1216 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................1217 Component Description .......................................1217 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1217 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1217 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1218 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1219 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1220 Component Inspection .........................................1223 Removal and Installation .....................................1223 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................1224 Component Description .......................................1224 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1224 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1224 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1225 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1226 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1227 Component Inspection .........................................1229 Removal and Installation .....................................1229 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................1230 Component Description .......................................1230 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1230 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1230 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1231 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1232 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1233 Component Inspection .........................................1236 Removal and Installation .....................................1236 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................1237 Component Description .......................................1237 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1238 EC-13 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1243 Component Inspection .........................................1247 Removal and Installation .....................................1248 VIAS .......................................................................1249 Description ...........................................................1249 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1250 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1251 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1253 Component Inspection .........................................1256 Removal and Installation .....................................1257 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ..............................................1258 Component Description .......................................1258 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1258 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1259 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1260 Component Inspection .........................................1263 Removal and Installation .....................................1263 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ...........................................1264 Description ...........................................................1264 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1264 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1265 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1266 Component Inspection .........................................1268 Removal and Installation .....................................1268 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................1269 Component Description .......................................1269 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1270 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1271 Removal and Installation .....................................1273 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ...............................1274 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1274 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1275 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1286 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .........................................1292 Component Description .......................................1292 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1292 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1293 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1294 ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 1300 Component Description ....................................... 1300 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1300 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1301 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1302 DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................................... 1303 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1303 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .................... 1305 Description ........................................................... 1305 Component Inspection ......................................... 1308 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1309 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ..................... 1309 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) ................................................................... 1312 System Description .............................................. 1312 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1313 Component Inspection ......................................... 1315 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 1317 Description ........................................................... 1317 Component Inspection ......................................... 1317 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)1319 System Description .............................................. 1319 Component Description ....................................... 1320 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ... 1321 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 1321 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 1321 Calculated Load Value ......................................... 1321 Mass Air Flow Sensor .......................................... 1321 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 1321 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 1321 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ......................... 1321 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater ................... 1321 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ......................... 1321 Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 .................................. 1321 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ...................... 1321 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 1322 Throttle Control Motor .......................................... 1322 Injector ................................................................. 1322 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 1322 EC-14 MODIFICATION NOTICE [QG18DE] MODIFICATION NOTICE Modification Notice ● ● PFP:00000 A UBS00IS9 DTC P0451 has been added. On Board Diagnosis Logic for DTC P0138 has been changed. How to Check Vehicle Type UBS00ISA Check the vehicle serial number to confirm the type of vehicles. Vehicle Type EC C Vehicle Serial Number Type I (Initial products) Up to serial 848644 Type II (Modification adopted products) From serial 848645 D E F G H I J K L M EC-15 INDEX FOR DTC [QG18DE] INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index PFP:00024 UBS00B2D NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*2 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 A/F S1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 2 × EC-351 A/F S1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 2 × EC-351 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1271 1271 2 × EC-450 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1272 1272 2 × EC-456 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273 1273 2 × EC-462 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274 1274 2 × EC-469 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 1276 2 × EC-476 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278 1278 2 × EC-482 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279 1279 2 × EC-489 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 2 × AT-135 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 2 × AT-140 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 2 × AT-145 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 2 × AT-150 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 2 × AT-163 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-540 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-540 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-546 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-546 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-559 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 1 — EC-517 ASCD SW P1564 1564 1 — EC-510 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 1 — EC-528 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 2 × AT-120 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-534 5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000* 1 × EC-148 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 2 — EC-148 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-252 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 1 × EC-427 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 0340 2 × EC-259 CTP LEARING P1225 1225 2 — EC-442 CTP LEARING P1226 1226 2 — EC-444 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 × EC-241 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 2 × EC-241 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 2 × EC-241 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 2 × EC-241 ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-348 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 2 × EC-357 EC-16 INDEX FOR DTC [QG18DE] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*2 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 1 × EC-179 ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 1 × EC-179 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 1 × EC-190 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-428 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 2 × AT-131 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 or 2 × EC-373 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-375 ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-387 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-382 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-382 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 2 × EC-314 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 2 × EC-269 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 2 × EC-275 EVAP SYS PRES SEN*8 P0451 0451 2 × EC-298 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 2 × EC-300 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 2 × EC-306 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 2 × EC-322 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 2 × EC-231 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 2 × EC-231 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 2 × EC-226 FUEL LEVEL SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 2 × EC-331 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 2 × EC-333 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 2 × EC-335 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 2 × EC-335 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 × EC-212 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 × EC-219 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-198 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 × EC-204 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 × EC-413 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 × EC-420 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 × EC-154 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 × EC-154 IAT SEN CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 × EC-175 IAT SEN CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 × EC-175 IAT SEN CIRCUIT P0127 0127 2 × EC-193 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 × EC-151 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-368 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 2 × EC-339 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 2 × EC-341 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-247 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-247 L/PRES SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 2 × AT-173 EC-17 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [QG18DE] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 2 GST* Trip ECM*3 MIL lighting up Reference page MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 1 × EC-160 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 1 × EC-168 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 1 × EC-168 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P1102 1102 1 × EC-361 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 × EC-241 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. No DTC Flashing*4 — Flashing*4 EC-67 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 2 × AT-193 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-530 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 2 × AT-115 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 × EC-284 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 2 × EC-284 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 2 × EC-496 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 — EC-343 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-446 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 1 × AT-179 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 1 × AT-179 SWIRL CONT VALVE*7 P1138 1138 2 × EC-405 SWL CON/V POSI SEN*7 P1137 1137 2 × EC-397 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 2 × AT-159 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 2 × EC-231 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-235 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-235 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-184 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-184 TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 1 × AT-187 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-553 P0420 0420 2 × EC-265 VARI SWL CON/SV-B1* P1132 1132 2 × EC-392 VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*6 P0720 0720 2 × AT-126 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 2 × EC-337 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 2 × EC-291 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 2 × EC-504 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 7 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). This number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: When engine is running. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. *7: SULEV models *8: Type II vehicles EC-18 INDEX FOR DTC [QG18DE] DTC No. Index UBS00B2E NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×: Applicable —: Not Applicable A EC DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* No DTC ECM* 3 Flashing*4 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. — MIL lighting up Reference page Flashing*4 EC-67 C D U1000 1000*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 × EC-148 U1001 1001*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-148 — — — P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 2 × EC-151 P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-154 P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-154 P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-160 P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-168 P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-168 P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-175 P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-175 P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC 1 × EC-179 P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC 1 × EC-179 P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-184 P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-184 P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR 1 × EC-190 P0127 0127 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-193 P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN 2 × EC-196 P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-198 P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-204 P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 × EC-212 P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 × EC-219 P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR 2 × EC-226 P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-231 P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-231 P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-235 P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-235 P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 × EC-241 P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241 P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241 P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241 P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241 P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-247 P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-247 EC-19 E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [QG18DE] DTC*1 CONSULT-II Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-252 P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-259 P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 × EC-265 P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON 2 × EC-269 P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK 2 × EC-275 P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-284 P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-284 P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-291 P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN*8 2 × EC-298 P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-300 P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-306 P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK 2 × EC-314 P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK 2 × EC-322 P0460 0460 FUEL LEVEL SEN SLOSH 2 × EC-331 P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 × EC-333 P0462 0462 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-335 P0463 0463 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-335 P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 2 × EC-337 P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM/CIRC 2 × EC-339 P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM/CIRC 2 × EC-341 6 P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0605 0605 ECM 2 — EC-343 1 or 2 × or — EC-348 P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC 2 × AT-115 P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 × AT-120 P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*6 2 × AT-126 P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG 2 × AT-131 P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN 2 × AT-135 P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN 2 × AT-140 P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN 2 × AT-145 P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN 2 × AT-150 P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 × AT-159 P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN 2 × AT-163 P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-173 P0750 0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC 1 × AT-179 P0755 0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC 1 × AT-183 P1031 1031 A/F S1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-351 P1032 1032 A/F S1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-351 P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC 2 × EC-357 P1102 1102 MAF SENSOR 1 × EC-361 P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 × EC-368 1 or 2 × EC-373 1 × EC-375 P1121 1121 ETC ACTR P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-20 INDEX FOR DTC [QG18DE] DTC*1 CONSULT-II 3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-382 P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-382 P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-387 2 × EC-392 7 P1132 1132 VARI SWL CON/SV-B1* P1137 1137 SWL CON/V POSI SEN*7 2 — EC-397 P1138 1138 SWIRL CONT VALVE*7 2 × EC-405 P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-413 P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-420 P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 1 × EC-427 P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-428 P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-442 P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-444 P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-446 P1271 1271 A/F SEN1 (B1) 2 × EC-450 P1272 1272 A/F SEN1 (B1) 2 × EC-456 P1273 1273 A/F SEN1 (B1) 2 × EC-462 P1274 1274 A/F SEN1 (B1) 2 × EC-469 P1276 1276 A/F SEN1 (B1) 2 × EC-476 P1278 1278 A/F SEN1 (B1) 2 × EC-482 P1279 1279 A/F SEN1 (B1) 2 × EC-489 P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-496 P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-504 P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-510 P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-517 P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN 1 — EC-528 P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T 1 × AT-187 P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-530 P1760 1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-193 P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-534 P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-540 P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-540 P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-546 P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-546 P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-553 P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-559 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SEA J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). This number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: When engine is running. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. *7: SULEV models *8: Type II vehicles EC-21 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UBS00BIM The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB sections of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS00B2G The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-47, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precautions ● ● ● ● UBS00B2H Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable. SEF706Y EC-22 PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] ● ● Do not disassemble ECM. If a battery terminal is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. A EC C PBIB1164E D ● When connecting engine control system harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure. E F G BBIA0138E ● ● ● ● ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminals when connecting pin connectors. Securely connect engine control system harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs. Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc. Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-106, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" . H I J SEF291H L M MEF040D EC-23 K PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform Overall Function Check or DTC Confirmation Procedure. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. SEF217U ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the body ground. Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious problems. Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS). SEF348N ● ● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. PBIB1218E ● ● ● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily. Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown. SEF709Y EC-24 PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] ● – – – – When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location. Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units. Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave ratio can be kept smaller. Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING". for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". A EC C SEF708Y D UBS00B2I E F G H I J K L M EC-25 PREPARATION [QG18DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 UBS00B2J The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name EG17650301 (J33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in) NT636 KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT825 KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT826 (J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit Checking fuel pressure LEC642 (J-45356) Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure NT815 (J-44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 LEM054 EC-26 PREPARATION [QG18DE] Commercial Service Tools UBS00B2K A Tool name Description Leak detector i.e.: (J41416) Locating the EVAP leak EC C NT703 EVAP service port adapter i.e.: (J41413-OBD) Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port D E NT704 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) AEM488 Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor or A/F sensor. Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below. a: J-43897-18 18 mm with 1.5 mm pitch dia., for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor or A/F sensor b: J-43897-12 12 mm with 1.25 mm pitch dia., for Titania Oxygen Sensor Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. Anti-seize lubricant i.e: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) F G H I J NT779 Fuel tube removal tool For disconnecting fuel tube quick connectors a: 7.9 mm (5/16 in) K L LEC643 M EC-27 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram PFP:23710 UBS00B2L PBIB1781E EC-28 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] System Chart UBS00B2N A Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor ● Mass air flow sensor ● Engine coolant temperature sensor Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay ● Ignition switch ● Throttle position sensor On board diagnostic system Malfunction indicator lamp (On the instrument panel) ● PNP switch Swirl control valve*4 ● Air conditioner switch Swirl control valve control*4 ● Knock sensor A/F sensor 1 heater and heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control A/F sensor 1 heater and heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● EVAP control system pressure sensor EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator 1 ● Fuel tank temperature sensor* ● Battery voltage ● Power steering pressure sensor ● Vehicle speed signal*3 ● Intake air temperature sensor ● Heated oxygen sensor 2*2 ● TCM (Transmission control module)*3 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Electrical load ● Swirl control valve position sensor*1 *4 ● Fuel level sensor*3 ● Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD steering switch ● ASCD clutch switch ● ASCD brake switch EC C D E F G H ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system EVAP canister vent control valve I J *1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis. *2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. *3: This input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *4: SULEV models. K L M EC-29 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS00B2O INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3 and piston number Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position PNP switch Gear position Vehicle speed signal*2 Vehicle speed Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation Knock sensor Engine knocking condition Electrical load Electrical load signal Battery Battery voltage*3 Power steering pressure sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 2* ECM function Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Actuator Fuel injectors Power steering operation Density of oxygen in exhaust gas *1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the camshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below. ● During warm-up ● When starting the engine ● During acceleration ● Hot-engine operation ● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models) ● High-load, high-speed operation ● During deceleration ● During high engine speed operation EC-30 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL) A EC C SEF503YB The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses an air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-450 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the stoichiometric range (ideal airfuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. D E F G Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. ● Deceleration and acceleration ● High-load, high-speed operation ● Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit ● Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature ● High engine coolant temperature ● During warm-up ● After shifting from N to D (A/T models) ● When starting the engine H I J K MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. EC-31 L M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] FUEL INJECTION TIMING SEF337W Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. FUEL SHUT-OFF Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds. Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS00B2P INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 and piston number Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Vehicle speed signal*1 Vehicle speed Knock sensor Engine knocking PNP switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 ECM function Ignition timing control Actuator Power transistor *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best airfuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown in the figure. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec A°BTDC During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. ● At starting EC-32 SEF742M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] During warm-up A ● At idle ● At low battery voltage ● During acceleration EC The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The C ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. ● Air Conditioning Cut Control UBS00B2Q INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal PNP switch Neutral position Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*1 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation ECM function D Actuator E F Air conditioner cut control Air conditioner relay G H I *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off. ● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. ● When cranking the engine. ● At high engine speeds. ● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. ● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. ● When engine speed is excessively low. ● When the refrigerant pressure is excessively high or low. J K L M Fuel Cut Control (at No Load & High Engine Speed) UBS00B2R INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM PNP switch Neutral position Vehicle speed signal*1 Vehicle speed Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. EC-33 ECM function Fuel cut control Actuator Fuel injectors ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm with no load, (for example, in Neutral and engine speed over 2,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled. NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-30, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System" . CAN communication UBS00BJF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Refer toLAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail. EC-34 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check PFP:00018 A UBS00B2T IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EC C D SEF058Y With GST Check idle speed in MODE 1 with GST. E F IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. G Method A 1. 2. 3. Slide the harness protector of ignition coil No. 1 to clear the wires. Attach timing light to the ignition coil No. 1 wires as shown in the figure. Check ignition timing. H I J BBIA0134E K Method B 1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil. L M BBIA0135E EC-35 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire. SEF166Y 3. Check ignition timing. BBIA0211E Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment UBS00B2U PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery ● Ignition system ● Engine oil and coolant levels ● Fuses ● ECM harness connector ● Vacuum hoses ● Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Fuel pressure ● Engine compression ● Throttle valve ● EVAP system On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Make the check after the cooling fans has stopped. EC-36 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1206E EC-37 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operation Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. SEF983U Headlamp switch is OFF. Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. EC-38 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. EC C D E SEF978U 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. F M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G H SEF058Y I Without CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. J K M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. EC-39 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-259 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-252 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) >> GO TO 4. EC-40 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. EC M/T: 7 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 18 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) C OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11. D BBIA0211E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. E F G 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. H I J K L 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. EC-41 M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. M/T: 7 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 18 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 16. BBIA0211E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-45 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-259 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-252 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) >> GO TO 4. EC-42 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 4th position (M/T). C NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 D MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. E 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. F OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. G 1. 2. 3. 20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 4th position (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. EC-43 H I J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-453, "Wiring Diagram" . ECM Terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 2 4 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors between ECM and A/F sensor 1. 2. GO TO 4. 22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 23. 23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 24. 24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC-44 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 25. CHECK CO% A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”. 5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. 6. Check CO%. 1. 2. 3. 4. EC C D Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly. E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. SEF172Y F 26. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. G H I J 7. 27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. >> GO TO 31. 28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 1. 2. Stop engine. Replace A/F sensor 1. With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 30. EC-45 K SEF982UA L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 4th position (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 1. 2. 3. 30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 4th position (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check fuel pressure regulator and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-49, "Fuel Pressure Check" . ● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-160 , EC-168 and EC-361 . ● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-578 . ● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC179 and EC-190 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 33. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 32. EC-46 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC A After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-40 . EC >> GO TO 4. C 33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) >> GO TO 4. D E Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00B2V DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. F OPERATION PROCEDURE G 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning I UBS00B2W DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator of ECM is disconnected. J OPERATION PROCEDURE K 1. 2. 3. L Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00B2X DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: ● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. ● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. ● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) ● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F) ● PNP switch: ON ● Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the headlamp will not be illuminated. EC-47 M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) Vehicle speed: Stopped Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of A/T system indicates less than 0.9V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. ● ● ● OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. SEF217Z 6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. SEF454Y 7. 8. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 650±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing M/T: 7±5° BTDC A/T: 18±5° BTDC (in P or N position) MBIB0238E Without CONSULT-II NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . EC-48 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. b. 8. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. C Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. D 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. E F G H SEC897C 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 650±50 rpm A/T: 800±50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing M/T: 7±5° BTDC A/T: 18±5° BTDC (in P or N position) I J K 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE L If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-136, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: – Engine stalls. – Erroneous idle. Fuel Pressure Check UBS00B2Y FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because B15 models do not have fuel return system. EC-49 M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. SEF214Y Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuse for fuel pump. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. LEC298 EC-50 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QG18DE] FUEL PRESSURE CHECK ● ● ● ● 1. 2. A When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. Make sure that clamp screws do not contact adjacent parts. Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 to check fuel pressure. Release fuel pressure to zero. Disconnect fuel hose from fuel feed tube (engine side) using fuel tube quick connect removal tool. EC C D BBIA0141E 3. 4. 5. 6. E Release quick connector and disconnect fuel hose from fuel feed tube (underbody side). Remove fuel hose assembly. CAUTION: Do not install hose clamps over flared portions of fuel feed tubes or damage to fuel feed tubes may result. Install fuel pressure gauge from kit J-44321 between fuel tubes using hose and clamps from kit. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. Start engine and read the indication on fuel pressure gauge. F G H At idle speed: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) If results are unsatisfactory, check for fuel leakage in fuel line between fuel tank and injector. If OK, replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump assembly. Refer to EC-578 . BBIA0137E I J K L M EC-51 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 UBS00B2Z The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979 Calibration ID Mode 9 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. X: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data SRT code Test value CONSULT-II × × × × × — GST × ×*1 × — × × ECM × ×*2 — — — — *1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display. *2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-80 ) Two Trip Detection Logic UBS00B30 When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time as when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. X: Applicable MIL DTC 1st trip 2nd trip —: Not applicable 1st trip DTC Blinking Lighting up 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying — — — — — × — — — × — — × — — One trip detection diagnoses (Refer to EC-427 ) — × — — × — × — Except above — — — × — × × — Items Blinking Lighting up Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is being detected × Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is being detected When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses is continuously detected as NG for 5-trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has malfunction and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. EC-52 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS00B31 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page ECM*3 U1000 1000*7 — — — EC-148 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001* 7 — — × EC-148 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — — INT/V TIMING CONT P0011 0011 — — × EC-151 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × ×*5 EC-154 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × ×*5 EC-154 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — — EC-160 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — — EC-168 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — — EC-168 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — × EC-175 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — × EC-175 ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — — EC-179 ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — — EC-179 TP SEN2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — — EC-184 TP SEN2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — — EC-184 ECT SEN/CIRC P0125 0125 — — — EC-190 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0127 0127 — — × EC-193 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — × EC-196 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — — × EC-198 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × ×*5 EC-204 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — × EC-212 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — × EC-219 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — × EC-226 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — × EC-231 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — × EC-231 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-235 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-235 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — × EC-241 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — × EC-241 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — × EC-241 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — × EC-241 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — × EC-241 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — × EC-247 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — × EC-247 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — × EC-252 CAN COMM CIRCUIT A Engine speed will not rise more then 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-53 EC C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 2 GST* CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page 0340 — — × EC-259 5 ECM*3 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × ×* EC-265 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × ×*5 EC-269 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × ×*5 EC-275 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — × EC-284 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — × EC-284 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — × EC-291 EVAP SYS PRES SEN*9 P0451 0451 — — × EC-298 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — × EC-300 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — × EC-306 5 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — × ×* EC-314 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 — ×*5 EC-322 FUEL LEVEL SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — × EC-331 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — × EC-333 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — × EC-335 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — × EC-335 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — — × EC-337 ISC SYSTEM/CIRC P0506 0506 — — × EC-339 ISC SYSTEM/CIRC P0507 0507 — — × EC-341 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — × EC-343 ECM P0605 0605 — — × EC-348 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — × AT-115 P0710 0710 — — × AT-120 P0720 0720 — — × AT-126 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — × AT-131 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — — × AT-135 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — — × AT-140 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT* 6 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — — × AT-145 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — — × AT-150 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — × AT-159 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — × AT-163 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — × AT-173 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 — — — AT-179 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 — — — AT-183 5 A/F S1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 × × ×* EC-351 A/F S1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 × × ×*5 EC-351 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — × EC-357 MAF SENSOR P1102 1102 — — — EC-361 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — × EC-368 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — × or — EC-373 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-375 EC-54 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page ECM*3 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-382 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-382 ETC MOT PWR P1128 1128 — — — EC-387 VARI SWL CON/SV-B1*8 P1132 1132 — — × EC-392 SWIRL CON/V POSI SEN*8 P1137 1137 — — × EC-397 SWIRL CONT VALVE*8 P1138 1138 — — × EC-405 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × ×*5 EC-413 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × ×*5 EC-420 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — — EC-427 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-428 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — × EC-442 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — × EC-444 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-446 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1271 1271 — — × EC-450 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1272 1272 — — × EC-456 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273 1273 — — × EC-462 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274 1274 — — × EC-469 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 1276 — — × EC-476 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278 1278 × × ×*5 EC-482 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279 1279 × × ×*5 EC-489 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — × EC-496 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — × EC-504 ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — — EC-510 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — — EC-517 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — — EC-528 TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — — AT-187 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — × EC-530 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 — — × AT-193 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — × EC-534 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — — EC-540 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — — EC-540 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — — EC-546 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — — EC-546 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — — EC-553 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — — EC-559 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *5: This is not displayed with GST. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. *7: The trouble shooting for these DTCs needs CONSULT-II. *8: SULEV models *9: Type II vehicles EC-55 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-53, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. 1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-75, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair. How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. With CONSULT-II With GST CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0350, P0705, P0750, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) No Tools The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. PBIB0911E EC-56 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem- A perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. EC The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, seeEC-118, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the C ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no D longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 2 3 Items Freeze frame data E Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) F 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . G H I J SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. SRT Item The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. EC-57 K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No. ority*1 CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420 EVAP SYSTEM 1 EVAP control system P0442 2 EVAP control system P0441 2 EVAP control system P0456 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P1278 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P1279 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater P1031, P1032 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038 HO2S HO2S HTR 2 *1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the performance priority for models with CONSULT-II. EC-58 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] SRT Set Timing SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below. EC Example Self-diagnosis result All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 Ignition cycle ← ON → OFF ← ON → Diagnosis ← ON → P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) OFF A OFF ← ON → C D E P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) G P1402 (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL “ON”) H SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” F OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. I When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses show NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: ● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. ● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. ● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. ● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. J SRT Service Procedure If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. EC-59 K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] SEF170Z *1 EC-56 *2 EC-60 *3 EC-61 How to Display SRT Code With CONSULT-II Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. With GST Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown below. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. SEF935Z EC-60 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. A With CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table EC onEC-57 . Without CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. C D E F G H I J K L M EC-61 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] Driving Pattern PBIB1182E EC-62 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. A Zone A refers to the range where the time required for the diagnosis under normal conditions* is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed EC within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: ● Sea level C ● Flat road ● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) ● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. D Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: E ● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). ● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than F 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V). ● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V). G Pattern 2: ● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. H Pattern 3: ● The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times. Pattern 4: ● Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes. ● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. ● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. 1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle. 2. Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times. – During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. *3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON. Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models SEF414S Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. ● Gear change For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and high altitude areas [over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) 1st to 2nd 24 (15) 24 (15) 2nd to 3rd 40 (25) 40 (25) 3rd to 4th 65 (40) 65 (40) 4th to 5th 75 (45) 75 (45) EC-63 I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear km/h (MPH) 1st 48 (30) 2nd 84 (52) 3rd 128 (80) 4th — 5th — TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (13 test items). These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen. SRT item CATALYST EVAP SYSTEM Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test value (GST display) Test limit Conversion 01H Max. 1/128 81H Min. 1 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 P1278 45H 8EH Min. 0.004 P1279 48H 8EH Min. 0.004 P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500 ms P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV TID CID P0420 01H P0420 02H EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring EVAP control system (Very small leak) Three way catalyst function A/F sensor 1 HO2S Heated oxygen sensor 2 A/F sensor 1 heater HO2S HTR Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV P1032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV P1031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC WITH CONSULT-II The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-16, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “AT”. 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. EC-64 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” twice. A Touch “ENGINE”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. EC Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) C D E F G H I J K WCIA0365E WITH GST The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST. NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-16, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) 3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). NO TOOLS NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-16, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) 3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-67, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. ● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. EC-65 L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] Diagnostic trouble codes – 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes – Freeze frame data – 1st trip freeze frame data – System readiness test (SRT) codes – Test values – Others Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. – Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS00B32 DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer toDI-26, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-621 . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SEF217U ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function Mode I Ignition switch in ON position BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. Engine stopped Engine running Mode II Ignition switch in ON position SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) ● One trip detection diagnoses This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. Engine stopped When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. EC-66 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control has system malfunction and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A EC Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut MIL Flashing Without DTC C If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diagnostic test mode. EC-67, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. EC67, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ● Diagnostic trouble codes ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values ● Others D E F G HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. ● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. H I How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. Fully release the accelerator pedal. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). J K L M PBIB0092E How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. 3. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-68, "DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" . Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. EC-67 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI26, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-621 . DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING MIL Condition ON When the malfunction is detected. OFF No malfunction. DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code. PBIA3905E A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-16, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. ● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses. EC-68 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] OBD System Operation Chart UBS00B33 A RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC AND DETECTABLE ITEMS ● ● ● ● ● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are EC stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-52, "Two Trip Detection Logic" . The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when C the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) D without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC E RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip. SUMMARY CHART Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) F Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) G For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-62 . For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-62 . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. H I J K L M EC-69 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR MISFIRE , FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction. stored in ECM. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. EC-70 *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR MISFIRE , FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) A EC C Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) × (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: ● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F). ● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) ● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. ● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction. ● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. ● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. D E F G H I J K L M EC-71 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR MISFIRE , FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM SEF393S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. EC-72 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QG18DE] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR MISFIRE , FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM A EC C D E F G AEC574 ● ● ● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. ● H I J The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART). K L M EC-73 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction PFP:00004 UBS00B34 INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine. MEF036D It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. SEF233G A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the EC-75 . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on EC-77, "Worksheet Sample" should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. EC-74 SEF234G TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] WORK FLOW A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1043E *1: If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” is other than “0” or “1t”, refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . *2: If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . *3: If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-141, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . *4: If the malfunctioning part cannot be found, refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . *5: EC-62 *6: EC-136 EC-75 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW STEP DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW STEP I Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the EC-76, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . STEP II Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-64 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. SeeEC-86, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .) Also check related service bulletins for information. STEP III Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs. The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULTII to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V. STEP IV Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST. During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative. The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection. STEP V Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV. If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" .) Then perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-86, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .) STEP VI Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”. Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-106 , EC-130 . The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Repair or replace the malfunction parts. If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . STEP VII Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint. Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .) DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Description There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trouble-shooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Example: ● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. EC-76 SEF907L TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] ● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A Worksheet Sample EC C D E F G H I J K L M MTBL0017 EC-77 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS00B35 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. NOTE: If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-148 . Priority 1 Detected items (DTC) ● U1000, U1001 CAN communication line ● P0101, P0102, P0103, P1102 MAF sensor ● P0112, P0113, P0127 IAT sensor ● P0117, P0118, P0125 ECT sensor ● P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P1225, P1226, P1229, P2135 Throttle position sensor ● P0128 Thermostat function ● P0181, P0182, P0183 FTT sensor ● P0327, P0328 Knock sensor ● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● P0460, P0461, P0462, P0463 Fuel level sensor ● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor ● P0605 ECM ● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor EC-78 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Priority 2 3 Detected items (DTC) ● P0037, P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● P0138, P0139, P1146, P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● P0441 EVAP control system ● P0444, P0445, P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● P0447, P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve ● P0451*, P0452, P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor ● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor ● P0705, P0710, P0720, P0725, P0740, P0745, P0750, P0755, P1705, P1706, P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches ● P1031, P1032 A/F sensor 1 heater ● P1065 ECM power supply ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ● P1124, P1126, P1128 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1137 Swirl control valve control position sensor ● P1138 Swirl control valve ● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVER HEAT) ● P1271, P1272, P1273, P1274, P1276, P1278, P1279 A/F sensor 1 ● P1805 Brake switch ● P0011 IVT control ● P0171, P0172 Fuel injection system function ● P0300-P0304 Cylinder misfire ● P0420 Three way catalyst function ● P0442, P0455, P0456 EVAP control system ● P0506, P0507 Idle speed control system ● P0731-P0734, P0744 A/T function ● P1111 IVT control solenoid valve ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1132 Swirl control valve ● P1148 Closed loop control ● P1564 ASCD steering switch ● P1572 ASCD brake switch ● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor A EC C D E F G H I J K L *: Type II vehicles M EC-79 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Fail-safe Chart ● UBS00B36 When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode P0102 P0103 P1102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. P1121 Electric throttle control actuator (ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. P1122 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. Accelerator pedal position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. P1128 P1129 P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 ● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when Electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses is continuously detected as NG for 5-trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has malfunction and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more then 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-80 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Basic Inspection UBS00B37 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. A Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. EC Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections C Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks D Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature G indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H I SEF976U J 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. EC-81 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. SEF978U 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. 1. 2. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. EC-82 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Refer to EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. D E M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-259 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-252 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. J K L 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) >> GO TO 4. EC-83 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. M/T: 7 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 18 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0211E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm A/T: 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. EC-84 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. EC M/T: 7 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 18 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 16. C D BBIA0211E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-45, "INSTALLATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F G H Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-259 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-252 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● I J 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) L >> GO TO 4. M EC-85 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Symptom Matrix Chart UBS00B38 SYSTEM — ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 Air conditioner circuit 2 2 Air Ignition BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) 1 EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION Fuel pump circuit Fuel EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 EC-585 EC-49 2 EC-578 4 4 EC-622 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 EC-81 2 2 2 2 2 EC-566 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-86 3 4 2 4 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) 4 3 Reference page 2 3 1 EC-633 EC-36 2 EC-373, EC-375 3 2 EC-141 3 2 MTC-19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] SYMPTOM HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-252 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-241 G Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 EC-160, EC-168, EC-361 H Warranty symptom code 1 1 Throttle position sensor circuit 1 1 Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 Incorrect throttle position sensor adjustment Swirl control valve circuit 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 C D E 2 1 1 3 Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 2 PNP switch circuit EC-179, EC-190 2 EC-184, EC-235, EC-442, EC-444, EC-446, EC-553 EC-540, EC-546, EC-559 1 1 3 3 3 EC-81 EC-405 3 2 2 EC-450, EC-456, EC-462, EC-469, EC-476, EC-482, EC-489 2 2 3 Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 3 Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 2 Intake valve timing control system ECM Reference page F A/F sensor 1 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit EC EC-368 3 EC-337 3 EC-247 3 EC-348, EC-80 3 EC-530 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-343 3 3 3 3 EC-596 2 Electrical load signal circuit 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) EC-87 3 3 I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER Fuel ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA Fuel tank Fuel piping Reference page FL-7 5 Vapor lock 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Valve deposit Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) Air 5 — Air duct Air cleaner Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor — electric throttle control actuator) Electric throttle control actuator, Throttle wire 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-13 Air leakage from intake manifold/Collector/Gasket Cranking — Battery Generator circuit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SC-4 1 Starter circuit 3 Signal plate 6 EM-66 PNP switch 4 EC-530 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) EC-88 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] SYMPTOM Engine HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA EC Reference page D E F Cylinder head Cylinder head gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 3 Cylinder block G Piston 4 Piston ring Connecting rod C 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-52,EM66 6 H Bearing Crankshaft Valve mechanism I Timing chain Camshaft Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-52 J Intake valve 3 Exhaust valve Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/ Muffler/Gasket K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-52 5 EM-16, LU-8 , LU-7 Three way catalyst Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/ Oil filter/Oil gallery L 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil Cooling M Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap Thermostat CO-7, CO-8 5 Water pump Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 Cooling fan 5 5 4 5 Coolant level (low)/Contaminated coolant 5 EC-428 CO-8 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. EC-89 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS00B39 SULEV MODELS BBIA0168E EC-90 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0169E EC-91 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] BBIA0170E EC-92 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0139E EC-93 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] BBIA0171E EC-94 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F PBIB1211E G H I BBIA0193E J K L M EC-95 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] EXCEPT SULEV MODELS BBIA0297E EC-96 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0298E EC-97 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] BBIA0143E EC-98 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0144E EC-99 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] BBIA0145E EC-100 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F PBIB1211E G H I BBIA0193E J K L M EC-101 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Circuit Diagram UBS00B3A SULEV MODELS BBWA0731E EC-102 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0732E EC-103 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] EXCEPT SULEV MODELS BBWA0733E EC-104 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0734E EC-105 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS00B3B MBIB0045E ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS00B3C PREPARATION 1. 2. ECM is located in the right side of the cowl top (behind the strut tower). Remove ECM harness protector. BBIA0191E 3. 4. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as show at right. Connect a bread-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. ● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. ● Data is for comparison and may not be exact. BBIA0138E ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Engine ground Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 2 R A/F sensor 1 heater ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E EC-106 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R/W ITEM Throttle control motor power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) A EC 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 P Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing C D PBIB0534E 0 - 14V E [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing F PBIB0533E G [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H 7 - 10V 11 G/Y Intake valve timing control solenoid valve [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● When revving engine up to 2,500 rpmquickly. I J PBIB1790E [Engine is running] 12 P Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel is being turned [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel is not being turned 0.5 - 4.0V K 0.4 - 0.8V L Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] 13 Y ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed M PBIB0527E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0528E EC-107 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] 14 W/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB0525E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0526E 15 W Knock sensor [Engine is running] ● 16 35 Idle speed OR/L B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L 17 18 19 20 LG R/W PU/W L/Y Approximately 2.5V Approximately 3.1V [Engine is running] A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Swirl control valve [Engine is running] ● Idle speed 0.1 - 14V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 22 23 41 42 G/B R/B L/B Y/B ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 PBIB0529E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0530E EC-108 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● 25 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EC 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under on load C [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped. [Engine is running] ● 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor 34 Y/G Intake air temperature sensor D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. E [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. BATTERY VOLTAGE G (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 GY/L F H Idle speed I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E Approximately 10V J [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) K PBIB0520E 47 B Throttle position sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 48 R/W Sensors' power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V R/Y Refrigerant pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 M [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W Throttle position sensor 1 L ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed EC-109 Less than 4.75V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 L/R Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 1.7V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.5 - 2.4V [Engine is running] 54 Y Swirl control valve position sensor ● Idle speed ● Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F). Approximately 5V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F). 0 - 1.0V 0 - 0.1V [Engine is running] 61 62 80 81 L/W BR GY/R PU ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 PBIB0521E 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0522E [Engine is running] 66 67 68 R B/W G/R Throttle position Sensor ground Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) Power steering pressure sensor power supply ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G Throttle position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed EC-110 More than 0.36V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] 70 73 L BR/W Refrigerant pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON (Compressor operates.) [Engine is running] 1.0 - 4.0V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. [Engine is running] 74 R/L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● EC C D 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E F [Engine is running] 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Engine is running] 82 B/Y Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V H [Engine is running] 83 G Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Lighting switch: ON] 84 PU Electrical load signal (Headlamp signal) ● [Lighting switch: ON] ● 85 LG DATA link connector Y CAN communication line LG/B CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.3V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Cooling fan relay (High) Cooling fan is not operating [Engine is running] ● Cooling fan is high speed operating 0 - 1.0V 90 R Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 R/G Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 93 L/W Electrical load signal (Rear window defogger signal) ● [Ignition switch: ON] ● 94 L CAN communication line Rear window defogger switch: ON Rear window defogger switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] [Engine is running] 96 Y/G Electrical load signal (Heater fan signal) ● Heater fan switch: ON [Engine is running] ● Heater fan switch: OFF EC-111 I J Approximately 0V [Engine is running] ● 89 Lighting switch is OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 86 Lighting switch is 2nd position Approximately 0V Approximately 0V Approximately 2.8V Approximately 0V Approximately 5V K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 97 LG/R Cooling fan relay (Low) Cooling fan is not operating [Ignition switch: ON] ● Cooling fan is operating DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch: Released [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 W/R ASCD steering switch CRUISE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● COAST/SET switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/OR Gear position: P or N PNP switch [Ignition switch: ON] ● 104 P 0.28 - 0.48V Except the above gear position More than 2.0V Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 2V Approximately 3V Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V A/T models BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) M/T models Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: ON] 106 107 W OR Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Engine is running] EC-112 More than 4.3V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Ignition switch: ON] 108 109 P/L B/R ASCD brake switch Ignition switch ● Brake pedal: depressed ● Clutch pedal: depressed (M/T models) Brake pedal: depressed ● Clutch pedal: depressed (M/T models) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF ● B/P Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. [Engine is running] F BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) G 0 - 1.0V H BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 115 116 B B ECM ground 117 L/Y EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 W/L Power supply for ECM (Buck-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● Idle speed D E [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] C 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 113 EC [Ignition switch: ON] ● [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 Approximately 0V I Engine ground J K L : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) M EC-113 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] CONSULT-II Function UBS00B3D FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Work support Self-diagnostic results Function This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit. Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*1 Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output specification of the Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. Function test Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine each system is OK or NG. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. *1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. 1. Diagnostic trouble codes 2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes 3. Freeze frame data 4. 1st trip freeze frame data 5. System readiness test (SRT) codes 6. Test values 7. Others EC-114 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION A DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE Item WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA MONITOR 2 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION ACTIVE TEST ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS INPUT DATA* Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × Mass air flow sensor × Engine coolant temperature sensor × A/F sensor 1 × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × Vehicle speed sensor × × × Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × Throttle position sensor × × × Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × EVAP control system pressure sensor × × × Intake air temperature sensor × × × Knock sensor × SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT EC C × × × × × × × × × × E × × × × F G × H I Closed throttle position switch (Accelerator pedal position sensor signal) × × Air conditioner switch × × Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × × Stop lamp switch × × × Power steering pressure sensor × × × Battery voltage × × Load signal × × Swirl control valve position sensor × × × Fuel level sensor × × × ASCD steering switch × × × ASCD brake switch × × × EC-115 D J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Item WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × DATA*2 Injectors ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS OUTPUT Power transistor (Ignition timing) × Throttle control motor relay × Throttle control motor × EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve × Air conditioner relay Fuel pump relay × DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION DATA MONITOR (SPEC) SRT STATUS × × Cooling fan × × × A/F sensor 1 heater × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × × EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × Swirl control valve × × × × Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × × × × × Calculated load value × DTC WORK SUPPORT X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer toEC-53 . CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover. LAT136 EC-116 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A EC C SAIA0450E D 5. Touch “ENGINE”. If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . E F G SEF995X H 6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. I J K PBIB2308E WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item L WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value EC-117 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] WORK ITEM EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CONDITION USAGE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system ● IGN SW ON ● ENGINE NOT RUNNING ● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). ● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM ● TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). ● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” ● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” UNDER ANY CONDITION OTHER THAN THE ABOVE, CONSULT-II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTIONS. NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION ● When adjusting target ignition timing. *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-16, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data Freeze frame data item*1 DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] Description ● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to EC-16, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● One mode in the following is displayed. Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment) Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor as feedback for fuel control Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] ● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. FUEL SYS-B1 S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] ● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VEHICL SPEED [km/ h] or [mph] ● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EC-118 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Freeze frame data item*1 Description B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] ● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. A EC *1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. C D E F G H I J K L M EC-119 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ×: Applicable ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the signals of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. ● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. ● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. × B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F] × × A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × HO2S2 (B1) [V] × × HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/ LEAN] × VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] × × BATTERY VOLT [V] × × ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × THRTL SEN 1 [V] × THRTL SEN 2 [V] × FUEL T/TMP SE [°C] or [°F] × INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] Description × ● The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. ● The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed. ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed. ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH ... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. ● The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. × ● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed. × ● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The fuel temperature judged from the fuel tank temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The intake air temperature determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor is indicated. × EC-120 Remarks ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. ● When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS EVAP SYS PRES [V] × FUEL LEVEL SE [V] × START SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × MAIN SIGNALS Description ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. ● Indicates start signal status [ON/ OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. × ● CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF] × × AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF] × × P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] × × Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. × × ● IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch. HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch signal. BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] × INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × IGN TIMING [BTDC] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current airflow divided by peak airflow. ● Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass airflow sensor. ● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The opening becomes larger as the value increases. CAL/LD VALUE [%] MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s] PURG VOL C/V [%] ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. EC-121 D E F G H Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. ON ... rear defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is ON and/or heater fan switch is ON. OFF ... rear defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF and heater fan switch is OFF. × × C [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system determined by the power steering pressure sensor signal is indicated. LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF] A EC Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal. ● ● PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF] Remarks I J K L ● When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description ● Indicates the swirl control valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The opening becomes larger as the value increases. ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle. ● The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ● The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases. ● The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated. ● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated. ● ON ... Closed OFF ... Open ● Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signal). HIGH ... High speed operation LOW ... Low speed operation OFF ... Stop ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET ... Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully. ● Distance traveled while MIL is activated ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. ● The preset vehicle speed is displayed. SWRL C/V (B1)[step] INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA] INT/V SOL-B1 [%] AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF] × FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF] × VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF] THRTL RELAY [ON/OFF] × COOLING FAN [ON/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] IDL A/V LEARN [ON/OFF] TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [Mile] AC PRESS SEN [V] VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph] EC-122 Remarks TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description Remarks A MAIN SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CRUISE switch signal. CANSEL SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal. RESUME/ACC SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ACCEL/RES switch signal. SET SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from COAST/SET switch signal. D ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch switch signal (M/T models). E BRAKE SW1 SW [ON/OFF] BRAKE SW2 SW [ON/OFF] ● ● VHCL SPD CUT [NON/CUT] ● LO SPEED CUT [NON/CUT] AT OD MONITOR [ON/OFF] AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF] SWL/C POSI SE [degree] SET LAMP [ON/OFF] G H Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT ... Vehicle speed increased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signal. ● The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value increases. ● Indicates the swirl control value opening angle computed by ECM according to signal voltage of the swirl control valve position sensor. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. × F Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT ... Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the input signal from the TCM. A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%] C Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal. ● ● CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF] EC EC-123 I J ● For M/T models always OFF is displayed. K ● For M/T models always OFF is displayed. L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description Remarks Voltage [V] Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%] DUTY-HI SUTY-LOW ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width measured by the probe. PLS WIDTH-HI ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to be measured. ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones. They are the same figures as an actual piece of data which was just previously measured. PLS WIDTH-LOW NOTE: ● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. EC-124 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item ECM input signals Main signals ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × Monitored item [Unit] A Description EC ● B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed. ● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. ● × Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). ● × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] Remarks The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. C ● ● When engine is running, specification range is indicated. When engine is running, specification range is indicated. ● When engine is running, specification range is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. NOTE: Any monitored item that dose not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item TEST ITEM ● ● IGNITION TIMING POWER BALANCE COOLING FAN FUEL PUMP RELAY Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II. JUDGEMENT If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. ● Harness and connector ● Fuel injectors ● A/F sensor 1 Engine: Return to the original trouble condition G Timing light: Set Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. ● ● Compression ● A/C switch: OFF ● Injectors ● Shift lever: N ● Power transistor ● Cut off each injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Spark plugs ● Ignition coils ● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connector ● Turn the cooling fan HI, LOW and OFF using CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor ● Cooling fan relay ● Harness and connector ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Fuel injectors ● Harness and connector ● Fuel pump relay Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and OFF using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. I J If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. ● ● F CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) ● ● ENG COOLANT TEMP E H CONDITION ● FUEL INJECTION D ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning K Engine runs rough or dies. Cooling fan moves and stops. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound. EC-125 Harness and connector L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] TEST ITEM VALVE TIMING SOL PURG VOL CONT/V FUEL/T TEMP SEN VENT CONTROL/V SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONDITION JUDGEMENT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF with CONSULT-II and listen for operating sound ● Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. ● Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-II. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connector ● Solenoid valve Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. ● Harness and connector ● Solenoid valve Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connector ● Solenoid valve Swirl control valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connector ● Swirl control valve ● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Change swirl control valve opening step using CONSULT-II. DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode For details, refer to EC-57, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . SRT Work Support Mode This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. DTC Work Support Mode Test mode EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM Test item Condition EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-275 EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-496 PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-496 PURGE FLOW P0441 EC-269 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273 EC-462 Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC. A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274 A/F SEN1 HO2S2 Reference page A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 EC-469 EC-476 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278 EC-482 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279 EC-489 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-413 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-420 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-204 *: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to B15 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screen. EC-126 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) Description A CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. EC 1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): ● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. C In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording D Data ... xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfuncPBIB1593E tion detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also E displayed. The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL. F 2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): ● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfuncG tion is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. H I SEF707X Operation 1. 2. “AUTO TRIG” ● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected. ● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”.) “MANU TRIG” EC-127 J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] ● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. PBIB0197E EC-128 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] Generic Scan Tool (GST) UBS00B3E A DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained on the next page. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual. EC C D SEF139P FUNCTION E Diagnostic test mode Function MODE 1 READINESS TESTS This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to EC-57, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" ).] DTCs This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. MODE 3 This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1) ● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3) ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1) ● Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2) ● Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1) ● Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7) F G H I J MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. K MODE 7 This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this mode is performed, following parts can be opened or closed. L ● EVAP canister vent control valve open ● Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed In the following conditions, this mode cannot function. MODE 8 MODE 9 — (CALIBRATION ID) ● Low ambient temperature ● Low battery voltage ● Engine running ● Ignition switch OFF ● Low fuel temperature ● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. EC-129 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect GST to data link connector for GST which is located under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover. LAT136 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) SEF398S 5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. SEF416S CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B3F Remarks: ● Specification data are reference values. ● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. (i.e., Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING. Specification data might be displayed even when ignition timing is not adjusted to specification. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the input signals from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.) MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ENG SPEED MAS A/F SE-B1 B/FUEL SCHDL ● Tachometer: Connect ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication. ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. Idle 1.0 - 1.7V 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.4V Idle 1.0 - 1.6 msec 2,000 rpm 0.7 - 1.3 msec EC-130 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] MONITOR ITEM CONDITION A/F ALPHA-B1 ● Engine: After warming up COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up A/F SEN1 (B1) BATTERY VOLT Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Engine: After warming up ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load HO2S2 MNTR (B1) A 53 - 155% More than 70°C (158°F) ● HO2S2 (B1) VHCL SPEED SE Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm SPECIFICATION Fluctuates around 1.5V C Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V D Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) LEAN ←→ RICH E Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication. F 11 - 14V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D(A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CLSD THL POS AIR COND SIG P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL LOAD SIGNAL IGNITION SW HEATER FAN SW BRAKE SW ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON OFF → ON → OFF Throttle valve: Idle position ON Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF A/C switch: OFF OFF A/C switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ON Except above OFF Steering wheel in neutral position (Forward direction) OFF The steering wheel is turned ON Rear window defogger switch and/ or lighting switch is in 2nd ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF OFF Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON Ignition switch: ON G H I 1.8 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Engine: After warming up, idle the engine EC K L M ON → OFF → ON Heater fan is operating ON Heater fan is not operating OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON EC-131 J TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] MONITOR ITEM INJ PULSE-B1 IGN TIMING CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW PURG VOL C/V SWL C/V (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: Idle the engine SPECIFICATION Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 3.2 msec Idle A/T 18°+5° BTDC M/T 7°±5° BTDC 2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC Idle 20.0 - 35.5% 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 30.0% Idle 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/s Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F) 0 - 5 step Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F) 115 - 120 step Idle 0% - 2% When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 80% ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No - load ● Air conditioner switch: OFF → ON ● Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 seconds) ● Engine running and cranking ● When engine is stopped (Stops in 1 seconds) ● Except as shown above OFF VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No - load INT/V SOL (B1) AIR COND RLY FUEL PUMP RLY INT/V TIM (B1) ON ● After warming up engine, idle the engine. ● Air conditioner switch: OFF COOLING FAN OFF → ON Idle –5° - 5°CA When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 30°CA Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HIGH EC-132 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: After warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine HO2S2 HTR (B1) SWL/C POSI SE ● SPECIFICATION A OFF EC ON Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON Engine: Idle the engine 0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile) C 0 - 100% Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F) Approx. 0 deg. Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F) Approx. 80 deg. D E ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Engine: Idle ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication. SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch: Pressed ON ● CRUISE switch: Released OFF CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ON Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly Depressed ON CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF AC PRESS SEN VEH SPEED SE CANCEL SW RESUME/ACC SW SET SW BRAKE SW1 BRAKE SW2 CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP ● ● ● ● ● ● Approx. 0V 1.0 - 4.0V F Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON ● CRUISE switch: ON COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) COAST/SET switch: Released OFF H I J K L M *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal. Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B3G The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position. EC-133 G TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF. PBIB0198E ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1/B2)” and “INJ PULSE” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine to normal operating temperature. Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. SEF241Y EC-134 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1594E EC-135 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QG18DE] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description PFP:00031 UBS00B3H The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: ● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction) ● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) ● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition ● UBS00B3I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) ● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) ● Transmission: Warmed-up*1 ● ● Electrical load: Not applied*2 ● Engine speed: Idle *1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). For MT models, drive vehicle for 5 minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature. *2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Cooling fans are not operating. Steering wheel is straight ahead. ● Inspection Procedure UBS00B3J NOTE: Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SEB1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to EC-137, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF601Z EC-136 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B3K A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF613ZD EC-137 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QG18DE] SEF614Z EC-138 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF615ZA EC-139 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT [QG18DE] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description PFP:00006 UBS00B3L Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do not recur on DTC (1st trip) visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. Common I/I Report Situations STEP in Work Flow Situation II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t]. III The symptom described by the customer does not recur. IV (1st trip) DTC data does not appear during the DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. VI The TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B3M 1. INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “GROUND INSPECTION”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector. EC-140 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QG18DE] POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM Wiring Diagram PFP:24110 A UBS00B3N EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0673E EC-141 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 109 B/R Ignition switch Idle speed 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● 111 W/G B B ECM ground 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 115 116 Engine ground [Ignition switch: OFF] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ECM relay (Self shut-off) DATA (DC Voltage) A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine ground BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00B3O 1. INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0015E EC-142 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QG18DE] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC C D 4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116, and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. G H 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F26, M58 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground I J >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. K L M EC-143 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QG18DE] 6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. Disconnect ECM relay. BBIA0100E 2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. SEF420X 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connectors E22, E24 ● 10A fuse ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK ECM RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and ECM relay terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-566, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-144 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QG18DE] 9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. A Stop engine. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: EC After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop to approximately 0V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 10. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 12. C D PBIB1630E 10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV 1. 2. E F Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect ECM relay. G H I BBIA0100E J 3. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. K Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. L M SEF860T 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the harness for open or short between ECM relay and harness connector F48. >> Repair harness or connectors. EC-145 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QG18DE] 12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ECM relay terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BBIA0100E 13. CHECK ECM RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK ECM RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes OFF No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Replace ECM relay. PBIB0077E 15. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116, and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. EC-146 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QG18DE] 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F26, M58 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC C 17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END E F G H I J K L M EC-147 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QG18DE] DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 UBS00B3P CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name U1000*2 1000*2 U1001*1 1001*1 DTC detecting condition ● CAN communication line UBS00B3Q ● ECM cannot communicate to other control units. ECM cannot communicate for more than the specified time. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted) *1: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. *2: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. UBS00B3R Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-148 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B3S A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0274E EC-149 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B3T Go to LAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . EC-150 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QG18DE] DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL Description PFP:23796 A UBS00B3U SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Vehicle speed signal* Vehicle speed Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. C D E F G H I MBIB0121E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. J K L CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B3V Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V SOL (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle −5° - 5°CA When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0° - 30°CA Idle 0% - 2% When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 80% EC-151 M DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QG18DE] On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0011 0011 Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control performance UBS00B3W Detecting condition There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree. Possible cause ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B3X CAUTION: Always drive at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC368, "DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" . ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED 500 - 2,000 rpm Selector lever P or N position 4. 5. 6. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-153, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,800 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) Selector lever 1st or 2nd position Driving location uphill Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.) 7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-153, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-152 PBIB0164E DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B3Y 1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A Refer to EC-257, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). EC C 2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EC-264, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). D E 3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. F G H PBIB0565E I 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram refer to EC-254, "Wiring Diagram" for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-260, "Wiring Diagram" for CMP sensor (PHASE). J K >> INSPECTION END L M EC-153 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QG18DE] DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER Description PFP:226A0 UBS00B3Z SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Above 3,600 OFF ● Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ON CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B40 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 HTR (B1) CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0037 0037 P0038 0038 UBS00B41 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high Possible cause DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B42 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC-154 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QG18DE] 4. 5. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-157, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF174Y D WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ● Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select MODE 3 with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-157, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. E F G H I J K L M EC-155 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B43 BBWA0674E EC-156 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● 25 W/B A Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater C 0 - 1.0V D Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under on load E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped. [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B44 1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J BBIA0175E 4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. K L Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. M PBIB0112E EC-157 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QG18DE] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness connectors E108, M19 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 25 and HO2S2 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER Refer to EC-159, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-158 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00B45 A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 8 -10 Ω at 25°C (77°F) 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 EC C 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F G SEF249Y Removal and Installation H UBS00B46 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . J K L M EC-159 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 UBS00B47 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. SEF987W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B48 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 1.0 - 1.7V 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.4V Idle 20.0 - 35.5% 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 30.0% Idle 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B49 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition A) P0101 0101 ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem B) Possible cause A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B4A Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed. EC-160 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to EC-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC C D SEF174Y With GST E Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always driver vehicle at a safe speed. F With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to EC-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to EC-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. G H I J K L M SEF243Y EC-161 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] 7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm THRTL SEN 1 More than 3.0V THRTL SEN 2 More than 3.0V Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. PBIB0199E 8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS00B4B Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select MODE 1 with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with MODE 1. Check for linear mass air flow rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. If NG, go to EC-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF534P EC-162 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B4C A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0675E EC-163 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 48 WIRE COLOR R/W ITEM Sensors' power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 51 67 L/R B/W Mass air flow sensor Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM 1.5 - 2.4V [Engine is running] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 1.0 - 1.7V A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00B4D 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? A or B A >> GO TO 3. B >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK Check the following for connections. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and collector OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. EC-164 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. EC >> GO TO 4. C D BBIA0155E E 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. F G H BBIA0150E 3. I Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. J Terminal Voltage 2 Approximately 5V 4 Battery voltage K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. L PBIB0076E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-165 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-167, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-166 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00B4E A MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Conditions Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped.) Voltage V C Less than 1.0 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.7 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.5 - 2.4 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* EC 1.0 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0 D SEF100V E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. 4. 5. 6. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. ● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. ● Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. F G H I J K L M EC-167 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 UBS00B4F The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. SEF987W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B4G Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 1.0 - 1.7V 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.4V Idle 20.0 - 35.5% 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 30.0% Idle 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B4H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0102 0102 P0103 0103 Trouble diagnosis name Mass air flow sensor circuit low input Mass air flow sensor circuit high input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B4I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC-168 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC C D SEF058Y With GST E Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to next step. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I SEF058Y J With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. K L M EC-169 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B4J BBWA0675E EC-170 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 48 EC WIRE COLOR R/W A ITEM Sensors' power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V C [Engine is running] 51 67 L/R B/W Mass air flow sensor Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ECM relay (Self shut-off) ● R/G R/G Power supply for ECM E F Approximately 0V G For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] 119 120 1.5 - 2.4V [Engine is running] ● W/G D [Engine is running] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 1.0 - 1.7V A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure H 0 - 1.0V I BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00B4K K 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103 P0102 >> GO TO 2. P0103 >> GO TO 3. L M 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connections. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct to manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. EC-171 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 4. BBIA0155E 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0150E 3. Check voltage between MAF terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Terminal Voltage 2 Approximately 5V 4 Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB0076E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. EC-172 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC C Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. D E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR POEN AND SHORT 1. H Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. L M 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-173 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00B4L MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Conditions Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped.) Voltage V Less than 1.0 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.7 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.5 - 2.4 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0 *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Turn ignition switch OFF. ● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. ● Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. ● 5. 6. EC-174 SEF100V DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00B4M The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. EC C D SEC266C E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance F kΩ -10(14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3 25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. UBS00B4N Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0112 0112 Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0113 0113 Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Intake air temperature sensor J Possible cause K L DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B4O NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. I Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-175 M DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B4P BBWA0676E EC-176 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B4Q 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0150E 4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H PBIB0066E 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. I J K L 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between TCM and intake air temperature sensor ● Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor with intake air temperature sensor. EC-177 M DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QG18DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B4R INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). SEC266C SEF012P EC-178 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00B4S The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D SEF594K E Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 F G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. H SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as body ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B4T I J These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition P0117 0117 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0118 0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor K L M EC-179 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while the engine is running. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B4U NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-180 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B4V A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0677E EC-181 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B4W 1. CHECK ETC SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0151E 4. Check voltage between ECT terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0080E 2. CHECK ETC SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORRT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between ECT sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between ECT sensor and TCM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-183, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace ECT sensor. EC-182 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B4X ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. C Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. D E F PBIB0081E G Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 Resistance kΩ H I *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Removal and Installation SEF012P J UBS00B4Y ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . K L M EC-183 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00B4Z Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B50 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B51 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0122 0122 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. P0123 0123 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-184 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B52 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go toEC-187, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M EC-185 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B53 BBWA0678E EC-186 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR B A ITEM Throttle position sensor power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 D More than 0.36V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V F [Engine is running] 66 R Throttle position sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 2 H Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure I More than 0.36V J UBS00B54 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. L >> GO TO 2. M BBIA0155E EC-187 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0152E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0082E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-189, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-188 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. A Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC >> INSPECTION END C 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END E Component Inspection UBS00B55 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Remove and Installation F G H I J PBIB1060E K UBS00B56 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR L Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . M EC-189 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00B57 NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117, P0118, first perform trouble diagnosis for EC-179, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" . The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as body ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B58 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0125 0125 Trouble diagnosis name Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control DTC detecting condition ● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. EC-190 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Thermostat DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B59 A CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. If DTC is detected, go to EC-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF174Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B5A 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR H Refer to EC-191, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. I J 2. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION When the engine is cooled [lower than 75°C (167°F)], grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-12, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . K L 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B5B ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance as shown in the figure. SEF152P EC-191 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QG18DE] Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00B5C ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . EC-192 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00B5D The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. EC C D SEC266C E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance F kΩ −10 (14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3 25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0127 0127 Trouble diagnosis name Intake air temperature too high UBS00B5E DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure J Possible cause ● ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) K Intake air temperature sensor UBS00B5F NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. EC-193 I L M DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QG18DE] WITH CONSULT-II 1. a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. ● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-194, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF189Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B5G 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-195, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-194 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00B5H A INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions. EC C D SEC266C E 2. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 F If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). G SEF012P H I J K L M EC-195 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [QG18DE] DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:21200 UBS00B5I Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open. DTC No. P0128 0128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. Thermostat function DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Thermostat ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat ● Engine coolant temperature sensor UBS00B5J NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. ● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 68°C (154°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-12, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 68°C (154°F). If it is below 68°C (154°F), go to following step. If it is above 68°C (154°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-196, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B5K 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-197, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. EC-196 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00B5L A ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance as shown in the figure. EC C D SEF152P E Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 F G If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. H SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00B5M ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I Refer to CO-12, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . J K L M EC-197 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC P0138 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00B5N The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B5O Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B5P The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is too high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB2389E DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0138 0138 (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-198 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B5Q A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F G SEF174Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ● Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Select MODE 3 with GST. If NG, go to EC-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. H I J K L M EC-199 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B5R BBWA0727E EC-200 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● C D 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E [Engine is running] 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V F UBS00B5S 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. I J BBIA0155E K 2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-201 BBIA0175E DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check HO2S2 harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-202, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B5T HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1782E EC-202 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB1210E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. 7. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F G Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed at between 3,500 to 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.70V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00B5U HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . EC-203 H I J K L M DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC P0139 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00B5V The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B5W Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B5X The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. SEF302U DTC No. P0139 0139 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time. EC-204 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injectors ● Intake air leaks DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B5Y NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F) 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLANTEMP/S” indications more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J PBIB0115E 9. a. b. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to EC-208, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). Return to step 1. Overall Function Check K L UBS00B5Z Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. EC-205 M DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-208, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-206 PBIB1197E DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B60 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0727E EC-207 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00B61 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-208 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? BBIA0150E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-212, "DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-219, "DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. F G H I J K 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. 4. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-209 BBIA0175E DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-210, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B62 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1782E EC-210 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB1210E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.70V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00B63 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . EC-211 G H I J K L M DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 UBS00B64 With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor Input Signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 DTC No. P0171 0171 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too learn ECM function Fuel injection control Actuator Injectors DTC detecting condition ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Intake air leaks ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Injectors ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Mass air flow sensor ● Incorrect PCV hose connection UBS00B65 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-215, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-215, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust gas and intake air leak visually. EC-212 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] WITH GST A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then EC restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. C 5. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 6. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 7. Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at idle D BBIA0150E speed. 8. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-215, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-215, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust gas and intake air leak visually. F 1. 2. 3. G H I J K L M EC-213 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B66 BBWA0680E EC-214 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B67 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D E PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE G 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H I 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K L ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 M BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-215 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit. Refer to EC-585 . ● Fuel pressure regulator ● Fuel lines. ● Fuel filter for clogging >> Repair or replace. 6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling: 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. at idling: 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm: 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-160, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . EC-216 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] 7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. EC C D E PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. F G Clicking noise should be heard. H I PBIB1725E J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-578, "INJECTOR" . K 8. REMOVE INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector with fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-19, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. >> GO TO 9. EC-217 L M DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] 9. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Place pans or saucers under each injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors. Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each cylinder. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new one. PBIB1726E 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-218 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 A UBS00B68 With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The EC ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor Input Signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 DTC No. P0172 0172 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too rich ECM function Fuel injection control Actuator D Injectors DTC detecting condition ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Injectors ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Mass air flow sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure E Possible Cause F G UBS00B69 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H I Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. J K L M SEF215Z 6. 7. 8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. EC-219 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 6. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 7. Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at idle BBIA0150E speed. 8. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. EC-220 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B6A A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0680E EC-221 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B6B 1. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. EC-222 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuel pump circuit (Refer to EC-585 .) OK or NG OK >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. D E at idling : 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm : 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. F G at idling : 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm : 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer toEC-160, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . H I J K L M EC-223 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. PBIB1725E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR, EC-578, "INJECTOR" . 7. REMOVE INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-19, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect injector harness connectors. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip)>>GO TO 9. NG (Drips)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. EC-224 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QG18DE] 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END C D E F G H I J K L M EC-225 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00B6C The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. BBIA0132E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as body ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0181 0181 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance UBS00B6D DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Fuel tank temperature sensor UBS00B6E NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal. If the signal is less than 50°C (122°F), the result will be OK. If the signal is above 50°C (122°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal is less than 50°C (122°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-226 SEF174Y DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-227 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B6F BBWA0285E EC-228 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B6G 1. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0132E 4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0932E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” I J K >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to, EC-230, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. EC-229 L M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B6H FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00B6I FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-230 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00B6J The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D BBIA0132E E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 F G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as body ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00B6K DTC detecting condition J Possible cause P0182 0182 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0183 0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Fuel tank temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B6L NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-233, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-231 K L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B6M BBWA0285E EC-232 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B6N 1. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0132E 4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0932E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” I J K >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to, EC-234, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. EC-233 L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QG18DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B6O FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 If NG, replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump. PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00B6P FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-234 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00B6Q Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B6R Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V F G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B6S H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0222 0222 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P0223 0223 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1) I J K FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-235 L M DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B6T NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-238, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-236 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B6U A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0682E EC-237 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR B ITEM Throttle position sensor power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 R Throttle position sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V UBS00B6V 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-238 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0152E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-240, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-239 M DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B6W THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation PBIB1060E UBS00B6X ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . EC-240 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QG18DE] DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE PFP:00020 On Board Diagnosis Logic A UBS00B6Y When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Engine speed ECM function On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0300 0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. P0301 0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires. P0302 0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. P0303 0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. C D E F G H Possible cause ● Improper spark plug ● Insufficient compression ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● The injector circuit is open or shorted ● Injectors ● Intake air leak ● The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted ● Lack of fuel ● Signal plate ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Incorrect PCV hose connection I J K L M EC-241 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B6Z CAUTION: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-242, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature (T) condition Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (5 MPH) When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. Engine speed Time Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B70 1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. EC-242 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QG18DE] 2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING A Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (manifold) and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace it. EC 3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST C With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? D E F PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? G H I J BBIA0176E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 7. K L 4. CHECK INJECTOR M Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-578 . PBIB1725E EC-243 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QG18DE] 5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK 1. Remove ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 2. Remove spark plug from ignition coil assembly. 3. Connect a known-good spark plug to ignition coil. 4. Place and of spark plug against a suitable ground crank engine. 5. Check for spark. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-566, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . SEF575Q 6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS Check the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace spark plug (s) with standard type one (s). For spark plug type ignition coil. Refer to EM-13 . SEF156I 7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-52, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. 8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. Install all removed parts. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. BBIA0137E EC-244 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QG18DE] 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-585, "FUEL PUMP" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator ● Fuel lines ● Fuel filter for clogging EC C >> Repair or replace. 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING D Perform EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . Items E Specifications Target idle speed Ignition timing A/T 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 650 ± 50 rpm A/T 18 ± 5°BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 7 ± 5°BTDC F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Follow the EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . H 11. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-453, "Wiring Diagram" . ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 I J K L BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 4. M Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-356, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. EC-245 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QG18DE] 13. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling: at 2,500 rpm: 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. at idling: at 2,500 rpm: 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK CONNECTORS Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-160, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or replace it. 15. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-86, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or replace. 16. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 17. 17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-246 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QG18DE] DTC P0327, P0328 KS Component Description PFP:22060 A UBS00B71 The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. EC C D SEF598K E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B72 The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses. F Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition P0327 0327 Knock sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0328 0328 Knock sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Knock sensor DTC No. Possible Cause DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B73 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-247 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B74 BBWA0683E EC-248 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 15 WIRE COLOR W EC ITEM Knock sensor CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 2.5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B75 1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. D E F Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] G 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. H 2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. I Disconnect ECM harness connector and knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L PBIB0708E M 3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EC-250, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace knock sensor. EC-249 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QG18DE] 4. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. BBIA0155E >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F26, M58 ● Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground ● >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness connectors 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B76 KNOCK SENSOR Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Resistance: 530 - 590 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Discard any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. SEF227W EC-250 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QG18DE] Removal and Installation UBS00B77 A KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-66, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-251 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QG18DE] DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description PFP:23731 UBS00B78 The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. PBIB0562E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B79 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENG SPEED CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Tachometer: Connect ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B7A Specification data are reference values. DTC No. P0335 0335 Trouble diagnosis name Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit DTC detecting condition ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking. ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running. ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Signal plate UBS00B7B NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V with ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-255, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go toEC-255, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-252 SEF058Y DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QG18DE] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-253 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B7C BBWA0684E EC-254 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 13 Y PBIB0527E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 3.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB0528E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B7D 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS I 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. K L BBIA0155E EC-255 M DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QG18DE] 2. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0156E 3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. SEF479Y 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM relay ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to the wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F26, M58 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-256 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QG18DE] 6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) E Refer to EC-257, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). F 8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH G Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the signal plate. H 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B7E CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. 2. 3. 4. K Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. L M PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 3 (+) - 1 (–) 3 (+) - 2 (–) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 1 (–) If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). MBIB0024E EC-257 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QG18DE] Removal and Installation UBS00B7F CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EM-66, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . EC-258 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QG18DE] DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description PFP:23731 A UBS00B7G The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. EC C D PBIB0562E E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0340 0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit UBS00B7H The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. F Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during engine running. ● Camshaft (Intake) ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .) ● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .) ● Dead (Weak) battery DTC Confirmation Procedure G H UBS00B7I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V with ignition switch ON. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-261, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-261, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-259 L M SEF058Y DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B7J BBWA0685E EC-260 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 14 W/R PBIB0525E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB0526E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B7K I 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Turn ignition switch to START position. Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) J K 2. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. M >> GO TO 3. BBIA0155E EC-261 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QG18DE] 3. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0161E 3. Check voltage between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SEF479Y 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM relay >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to the wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F26, M58 ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ground ● >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-262 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QG18DE] 7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 14. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) E Refer to EC-264, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). F 9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) G Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. H I J PBIB0565E 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M EC-263 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00B7L CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 3 (+) - 1 (-) 3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 1 (-) MBIB0024E Removal and Installation UBS00B7M CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" . EC-264 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QG18DE] DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:20905 A UBS00B7N The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. EC C D PBIB1216E A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. DTC No. P0420 0420 Trouble diagnosis name Catalyst system efficiency below threshold DTC detecting condition ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly. ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. Three way catalyst (manifold) ● Exhaust tube ● Intake air leaks ● Fuel injectors ● Fuel injector leaks ● Spark plug ● Improper ignition timing DTC Confirmation Procedure F G Possible cause ● E H I UBS00B7O J NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. EC-265 L M SEF189Y DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QG18DE] 8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, GO TO STEP 12. 10. Wait 5 seconds at idle. PBIB1784E 11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “IMCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (it will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest step 1. PBIB1785E 12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-267, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF535Z Overall Function Check UBS00B7P Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Open engine hood. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 74 and ground. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds. If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to EC-267, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V PBIB1197E EC-266 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B7Q 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM A Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). D E F G PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. K 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check for ignition timing. Refer to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . Items Target idle speed Ignition timing J L Specifications A/T 800 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 650 ± 50 rpm A/T 18 ± 5°BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 7 ± 5°BTDC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . EC-267 M DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QG18DE] 5. CHECK INJECTORS 1. 2. 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-579 . Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform Diagnostic Procedure INJECTOR, EC-579 . MBIB0030E 6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. 4. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. 5. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. 6. Check for spark. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit.Refer to EC-566, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . SEF575Q 7. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-19, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Reconnect all injector harness connectors. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip)>>GO TO 8. NG (Drips)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Trouble is fixed>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold). EC-268 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description PFP:14950 A UBS00B7R NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123 P2127, P2128, P2138, first perform EC trouble diagnosis for other DTC. C D E F G H PBIB1209E In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B7S I J Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined. DTC No. P0441 0441 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system incorrect purge flow DTC detecting condition EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-269 Possible cause ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube ● Blocked rubber tube ● Cracked EVAP canister ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Blocked purge port ● EVAP canister vent control valve K L M DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B7T CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 0°C (32°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) Selector lever Suitable position Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,800 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.2 msec Engine coolant temperature More than 0°C (32°F) PBIB0826E 7. If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to EC271, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS00B7U Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. EC-270 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 5. 6. 7. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch ON Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Gear position Any position other than P, N or R A EC C PBIB1109E 8. 9. D Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. If NG, go to EC-271, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B7V 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister. E F G H 2. CHECK PURGE FLOW I With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. J 1. K L M BBIA0160E 5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. PURG VOL CONT/V VACUUM 100% Should exist. 0% should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB1786E EC-271 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 3. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. 6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle. Vacuum should not exist. BBIA0160E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it. 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT 1. 2. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B . Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C . SEF367U 3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. SEF368U EC-272 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. EC C D E PBIB1786E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F Refer to EC-289, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. G 8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. H Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. I Water should not exist. J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. K BBIA0157E 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION L Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452, EC-300 P0453, EC-306 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M 10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-508, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-273 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it. 13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-274 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A UBS00B7W This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister EC purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. D E F G H PBIB1209E DTC No. P0442 0442 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure) DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. EC-275 I Possible cause J ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. K ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. L ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B7X NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0829E 6. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that OK is displayed. If NG is displayed, refer to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. SEC763C WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-62 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. EC-276 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 2. 3. 4. Drive vehicle according to EC-62, "Driving Pattern" . Stop vehicle. Select MODE 1 with GST. – If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. – If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to EC-62, "Driving Pattern" . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select MODE 3 with GST. – If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure" . – If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-271 . – If P0441 and P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select MODE 1 with GST. – If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. – If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Diagnostic Procedure A EC C D E F UBS00B7Y 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. G H I J K SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION L Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. EC-277 M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE 1. 2. Wipe clean valve housing. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF445Y SEF943S OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. EC-278 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . EC NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. C D BBIA0160E E F G H SEF916U Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. I 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK J With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● K L M Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U EC-279 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. BBIA0157E 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-626, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1213E EC-280 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER A Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). EC OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. C NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection E >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. F 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. G H I Vacuum should exist. J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. K PBIB1786E L 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. EC-281 M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-289, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-305, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-622, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-627, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube. EC-282 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-630, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. A EC 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR C Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. D 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M EC-283 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description UBS00B7Z SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*2 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Vehicle speed signal*1 Vehicle speed ECM function Actuator EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B80 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-284 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B81 A DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P0444 0444 P0445 0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC C D UBS00B82 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. E F WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J SEF058Y K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L M EC-285 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B83 BBWA0686E EC-286 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D [Engine is running] ● Idle speed E 45 GY/L EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve SEC990C F Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● G Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). SEC991C [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H I J K : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) L M EC-287 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B84 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0162E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF206W 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay. ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-288 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. EC C D E PBIB1786E 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F Refer to EC-289, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. G H 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B85 J EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II K Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No L M PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E EC-289 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Removal and Installation UBS00B86 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . EC-290 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 A UBS00B87 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnoses. EC C D PBIB1263E E F G H BBIA0157E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B88 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0447 0447 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open J OFF UBS00B89 K DTC detecting condition An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve UBS00B8A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. EC-291 L M DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 2. 3. 4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-294, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-292 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B8B A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0687E EC-293 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 117 L/Y EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B8C 1. INSPECTION START 1. Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. 2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. 4. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1787E EC-294 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0157E E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G H PBIB0080E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors F27, M59 ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM relay J K >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND L SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-295 M DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B8D EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1033E EC-296 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V A Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes EC C Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. PBIB1787E D Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. E Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. F G H PBIB1033E I 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition J Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes K Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. L If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. EC-297 PBIB1034E M DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:22365 UBS00ISB The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0157E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ISC Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0451 0451 UBS00ISD Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition EVAP control system pressure sensor performance ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP control system pressure sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors ● EVAP control system pressure sensor UBS00ISE NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds. NOTE: Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-299, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF194Y EC-298 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ISF 1. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER 1. 2. EC Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check sensor harness connector for water. C Water should not exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. E BBIA0157E F 2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-299, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. G H 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-302 . I >> INSPECTION END J Component Inspection UBS00ISG EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-299 K L M PBIB1200E DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00B8E The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0157E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B8F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0452 0452 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor low input UBS00B8G DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-300 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B8H A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 0°C (32°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select MODE 7 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I PBIB1110E J K L M EC-301 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B8I BBWA0688E EC-302 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R/W Sensors' power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V B/W Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) 67 A C D [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V E UBS00B8J F 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. H I BBIA0155E J 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. K Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check sensor harness connector for water. L Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. M BBIA0157E EC-303 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-304 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR H Refer to EC-305, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. I 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B8K EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. L Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-305 M PBIB1200E DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00B8L The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0157E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B8M Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0453 0453 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor high input UBS00B8N DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-306 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Rubber hose to EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B8O A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 0°C (32°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-309, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select MODE 7 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-309, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I PBIB1110E J K L M EC-307 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B8P BBWA0688E EC-308 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R/W Sensors' power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V B/W Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) 67 A C D [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E F Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B8Q 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H >> GO TO 2. I J BBIA0155E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. K Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check sensor harness connector for water. L Water should not exist. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. BBIA0157E EC-309 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-310 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART C D E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G 9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING H 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-312, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 12. CHECK RUBBER TUBE Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. EC-311 I J K L M DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 13. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> GO TO 16. PBIB1213E 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B8R EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). ● EC-312 PBIB1200E DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. A EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-313 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00B8S This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. PBIB1209E DTC No. P0455 0455 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system gross leak detected DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. Possible cause ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC-314 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B8T A CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: ● Make sure that EVAP hose are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait C at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 to 3/4 full, and vehicle is D placed on flat level surface. ● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. F G H I J K PBIB0829E NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . 7. Make sure that OK is displayed. If NG is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-316, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-277 . SEC763C WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-62 before driving vehicle. EC-315 L M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine. Drive vehicle according to EC-62, "Driving Pattern" . Stop vehicle. Select MODE 1 with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to EC-62, "Driving Pattern" . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select MODE 3 with GST. ● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-316, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-277 . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-271 . ● If P0441, P0442 and P0455 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select MODE 1 with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B8U 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. EC-316 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE 1. 2. A Wipe clean valve housing. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: Vacuum: EC 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) C CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. D SEF445Y E F G H SEF943S OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE I J Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-622, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. K L 6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control is installed properly. Refer to EC-626, "Removal and Installation" ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. EC-317 M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0160E SEF916U Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10. 9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U EC-318 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● EC C D Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. E BBIA0157E 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace. F G H SEF200U 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. I J K L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB1786E EC-319 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. PBIB1786E 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-289, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. EC-320 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-305, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR VAPOR LINE A EC C Check refueling EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-627, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. D E 19. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 20. >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube. 20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-630, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. F G H I J 21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M EC-321 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00B8V This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. PBIB1209E DTC No. P0456 0456 Trouble diagnosis name Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check) DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP system does not operate properly. ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-322 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B8W NOTE: ● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, perform first trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. ● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. ● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. – Fuel filler cap is removed. – Refilled or drained the fuel. – EVAP component parts is/are removed. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. C D E F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1). Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. H I J K L M PBIB0837E 6. Make sure that OK is displayed. If NG is displayed, refer to EC-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: ● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-81, "Basic Inspection" . ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. EC-323 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] Overall Function Check UBS00B8X WITH GST Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. ● Do not start engine. ● 1. Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi). Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. BBIA0160E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the pressure pump and a hose. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect GST and select MODE 8. Using MODE 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close). Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step. Disconnect GST. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST instruction manual. EC-324 SEF462UI DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B8Y 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. EC C D SEF915U E 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION F Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. G 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION H Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-625, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. I J K L M EC-325 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0160E SEF916U Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U EC-326 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● EC C D Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. E BBIA0157E 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. F G H SEF200U I 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-626, "Removal and Installation" ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. J K L 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1213E EC-327 M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. PBIB1786E 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. EC-328 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-289, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. A EC 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR C Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. D 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR E Refer to EC-305, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. F G 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-623, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. H I 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. J K 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-627, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE Check signal line recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-630, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC-329 L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QG18DE] 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-330 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00B8Z The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp”. The “unified meter and A/C amp” sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D PBIB1218E E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00B90 NOTE: If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. DTC No. P0460 0460 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit noise DTC detecting condition Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. F G Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Fuel level sensor H I J DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B91 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-332, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-331 K DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B92 1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. Refer to FL-3 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO DI-15 . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00B93 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-332 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00B94 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp”. The “unified meter and A/C amp” sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D PBIB1218E E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00B95 NOTE: If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. DTC No. P0461 0461 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. F G Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Fuel level sensor H I J Overall Function Check UBS00B96 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-2, "FUEL SYSTEM" . TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-II K L M NOTE: Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. EC-333 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII. 9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it. 10. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 11. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11. If NG, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B97 1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. Refer to FL-3 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO DI-15 . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00B98 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-334 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00B99 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp”. The “unified meter and A/C amp” sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D PBIB1218E E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00B9A NOTE: If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. DTC No. P0462 0462 P0463 0463 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit low input Fuel level sensor circuit high input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause G ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Fuel level sensor H I UBS00B9B NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch ON. J K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-336, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-335 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B9C 1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. Refer to FL-3 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO DI-15 . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00B9D FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-336 DTC P0500 VSS [QG18DE] DTC P0500 VSS Component Description PFP:32702 A UBS00B9E NOTE: If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” The “unified meter and A/C amp.” then sends a signal to the C ECM through CAN communication line. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00B9F DTC detecting condition Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) E ● Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted) F ● Vehicle speed sensor ● unified meter and A/C amp. ● P0500 0500 Vehicle speed sensor The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. D Possible cause G DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B9G CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-338, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 50 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,800 - 6,000 rpm (A/T) 2,200 - 6,000 rpm (M/T) B/FUEL SCHDL More then 4.8 msec Selector lever Except P or N position PW/ST SIGNAL OFF 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-338, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check SEF196Y UBS00B9H Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. H Lift up drive wheels. Start engine. EC-337 K L M DTC P0500 VSS [QG18DE] 3. 4. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-338, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B9I 1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT Refer to DI-3, "METERS AND GAUGES" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. Refer to DI-6, "Combination Meter" . >> INSPECTION END EC-338 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 A UBS00B9J NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. EC The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0506 0506 UBS00B9K Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected DTC detecting condition The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure E Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak F UBS00B9L NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-47 , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to EC-637, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). G H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-340 . K L M SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-339 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B9M 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END EC-340 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [QG18DE] DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 A UBS00B9N NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. EC The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0507 0507 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected UBS00B9O DTC detecting condition The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more. E Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak ● PCV system F G DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B9P NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-47 , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to EC-637, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. K Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-342, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-341 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B9Q 1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 3. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END EC-342 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Component Description PFP:49763 A UBS00B9R Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. EC C D BBIA0164E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B9S Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine F SPECIFICATION Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel is turned. ON On Board Diagnosis Logic G UBS00B9T H The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P0550 0550 Trouble diagnosis name Power steering pressure sensor circuit DTC detecting condition An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Power steering pressure sensor UBS00B9U NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-345, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-343 L M DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B9V BBWA0689E EC-344 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 12 P Power steering pressure sensor ● 68 B/W G/R Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) Power steering pressure sensor power supply Steering wheel is being turned. [Engine is running] ● 67 Steering wheel is not being turned. [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) C 0.5 - 4.0V 0.4 - 0.8V D E Approximately 0V F [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V G Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B9W 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. A H Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. I >> GO TO 2. J K BBIA0155E L M EC-345 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0164E 3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0188E 3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and TCM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-346 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK PSP SENSOR A Refer to EC-347, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace PSP sensor. EC 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B9X POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR E 1. 2. 3. F Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and let it idle. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Steering wheel is being turned fully. 0.5 - 4.0V Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V G H MBIB0025E I J K L M EC-347 DTC P0605 ECM [QG18DE] DTC P0605 ECM Component Description PFP:23710 UBS00B9Y The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B9Z This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. DTC No. P0605 0605 Trouble diagnosis name Engine control module DTC detecting condition A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. Possible cause ● ECM FAIL-SAFE MODE ECM enters in fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected. Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. ● ECM deactivates ASCD operation. Malfunction A DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BA0 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no problem on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-349, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-348 DTC P0605 ECM [QG18DE] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-349, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC C D SEF058Y E With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. F PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-349, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. K Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BA1 1. INSPECTION START L With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-348 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select MODE 4 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-348 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. EC-349 M DTC P0605 ECM [QG18DE] 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace ECM. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END EC-350 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QG18DE] DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description PFP:22693 A UBS00BA2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor ECM function Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control EC Actuator Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode A/F S1 HTR (B1) E CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% F On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1031 1031 (Bank 1) P1032 1032 (Bank 1) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit low Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit high UBS00BA4 DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● G Harness or connectors (The heated A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors (The heated A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater WITH GST Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. Select MODE 3 with GST. EC-351 K L M Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-354, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y 1. 2. 3. 4. I UBS00BA5 WITH CONSULT-II 2. 3. H J NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. 1. D UBS00BA3 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM C DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QG18DE] 5. ● If DTC is detected, go to EC-354, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. EC-352 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BA6 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0690E EC-353 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 2 R A/F sensor 1 heater ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BA7 1. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. BBIA0155E 3. 4. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0140E 5. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1683E EC-354 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QG18DE] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. EC C D 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-356, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. I J 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. K L M EC-355 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BA8 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F) Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. PBIB1684E Removal and Installation UBS00BA9 AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR HEATER Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-356 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description PFP:23710 A UBS00BAA Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. EC C D PBIB1164E E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1065 1065 Trouble diagnosis name ECM power supply circuit UBS00BAB DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.] ● ECM ECM back-up RAM system does not function properly. DTC Confirmation Procedure G UBS00BAC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F H I Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-359, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF058Y M WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-357 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BAD BBWA0691E EC-358 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 121 EC WIRE COLOR W/L A ITEM Power supply for ECM (Buck-up) CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure C UBS00BAE 1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY D 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H MBIB0026E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M EC-359 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] 4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-357 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select MODE 4 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-357 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace ECM. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END EC-360 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 A UBS00BAF The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. EC C D SEF987W E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BAG Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load F SPECIFICATION Idle 1.0 - 1.7V 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.4V Idle 20.0 - 35.5% 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 30.0% Idle 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/s G H I On Board Diagnosis Logic J UBS00BAH K This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1102 1102 Trouble diagnosis name Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem DTC detecting condition Possible cause L A voltage from the sensor is constantly approx.1.0V when engine is running. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-361 M DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BAI NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-364, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-362 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BAJ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0675E EC-363 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 48 WIRE COLOR R/W ITEM Sensors' power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 51 67 L/R B/W Mass air flow sensor Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM 1.5 - 2.4V [Engine is running] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 1.0 - 1.7V A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00BAK 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-364 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect MAF sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0150E 3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Terminal E Voltage 2 Approximately 5V 4 Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. G PBIB0076E H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM I J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. K L M Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM. ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM. >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-365 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-367, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-366 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BAL A MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Conditions Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped.) Voltage V C Less than 1.0 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.7 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.5 - 2.4 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* EC D E 1.0 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0 PBIB1059E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. 4. 5. 6. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. ● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. ● Perform steps 2 and 3 again. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. F G H I J K L M EC-367 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:23796 UBS00BAM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Vehicle speed signal * Vehicle speed Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. MBIB0121E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. PBIB0195E EC-368 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BAN A Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM INT/V SOL (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 0% - 2% When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly Approx. 0% - 80% C On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1111 1111 Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit EC UBS00BAO DTC detecting condition An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure D Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve UBS00BAP NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. E Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I J SEF058Y K WITH GST Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L M EC-369 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BAQ BBWA0692E EC-370 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D 7 - 10V 11 G/Y Intake valve timing control solenoid valve E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm quickly F PBIB1790E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure G UBS00BAR 1. CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J K BBIA0148E L 4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0192E EC-371 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] 2. CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-372, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BAS INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Terminals Resistance 1 and 2 Approximately 8Ω at 20°C (68°F) 1 or 2 and ground ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) PBIB0193E Removal and Installation UBS00BAT INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-39, "TIMING CHAIN" . EC-372 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [QG18DE] DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00BAU Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1121 1121 UBS00BAV Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control actuator DTC detecting condition A) Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction. B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range. C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D Possible cause E ● Electric throttle control actuator F G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Malfunction A The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure I J UBS00BAW K NOTE: ● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L M PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-374, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-373 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [QG18DE] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 2 seconds. Shift selector lever to N or P position. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-374, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BAX 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0178E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END EC-374 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QG18DE] DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description PFP:16119 A UBS00BAY NOTE: If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC P1126. Refer to EC-373 or EC-382 . Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BAZ This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P1122 1122 Electric throttle control performance problem E Possible cause Electric throttle control function does not operate properly. ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) F Electric throttle control actuator FAIL-SAFE MODE G When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure H UBS00BB0 I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-377, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-375 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BB1 BBWA0693E EC-376 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C R/W Throttle control motor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V D [Ignition switch: ON] 4 P Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing E PBIB0534E F 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing G H PBIB0533E 104 116 P B [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay ECM ground [Engine is running] ● Idle speed I J Engine ground : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) K Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BB2 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. M >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-377 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QG18DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect throttle control motor relay. BBIA0102E 3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 5 and ground. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0575E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F48 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-378 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QG18DE] 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. E Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. F 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY H Refer to EC-380, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay. I 8. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT J 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal K L Continuity 4 Should exist 5 Should not exist 4 Should not exist 5 Should exist 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-379 M BBIA0152E DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QG18DE] 9. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0178E 10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-380, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 12. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 12. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BB3 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No 3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay. PBIB0098E THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. EC-380 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QG18DE] 2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. A Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C PBIB0095E D Removal and Installation UBS00BB4 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . E F G H I J K L M EC-381 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QG18DE] DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00BB5 Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BB6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BB7 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1124 1124 P1126 1126 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor relay circuit short Throttle control motor relay circuit open DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted) ● Throttle control motor relay ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open) ● Throttle control motor relay ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON. ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BB8 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTC is detected, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y EC-382 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QG18DE] With GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. EC Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF058Y F With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G H I J K L M EC-383 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BB9 BBWA0694E EC-384 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 104 EC WIRE COLOR R/W P ITEM Throttle control motor power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay Diagnostic Procedure C D UBS00BBA 1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect throttle control motor relay harness connector. E F G H I BBIA0102E 3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminal 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. J Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L PBIB0575E M 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link connector E23 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and battery >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. EC-385 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QG18DE] 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Refer to EC-386, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BBB THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No 3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay. PBIB0098E EC-386 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QG18DE] DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00BBC The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BBD C This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1128 1128 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor. Possible cause D ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor) E FAIL-SAFE MODE F When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BBE NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. G H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-389, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-387 M DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BBF BBWA0695E EC-388 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 P Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing D E PBIB0534E 0 - 14V F [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing G PBIB0533E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BBG 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS I 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. K L BBIA0155E EC-389 M DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal Continuity 4 Should exist 5 Should not exist 4 Should not exist 5 Should exist BBIA0152E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-390, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BBH THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E EC-390 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QG18DE] Removal and Installation UBS00BBI ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-391 DTC P1132 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] DTC P1132 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:00000 UBS00BBJ Swirl control valve consists of actuator and valve. The valve is installed in the intake manifold, and the actuator is connected to the rear end of the valve shaft. The swirl control valve uses a step motor which has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes. When no change in the control position is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. BBIA0174E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BBK Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM SWL C/V (B1) CONDITION ● SWL/C POSI SE ● Engine: Idle the engine Engine: Idle the engine SPECIFICATION Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F) 0 - 5 step Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F) 115 - 120 step Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F) Approx. 0 deg. Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F) Approx. 80 deg. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1132 1132 Trouble diagnosis name Swirl control valve circuit UBS00BBL DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The swirl control valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● Swirl control valve control solenoid valve An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BBM NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. Maintain engine speed at about 2,000 rpm for at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-395, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Perform step 5 through 8 three times. EC-392 SEF058Y DTC P1132 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-393 DTC P1132 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BBN BBWA0696E EC-394 DTC P1132 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 17 18 19 20 WIRE COLOR LG R/W PU/W L/Y ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] Swirl control valve ● Idle speed EC DATA (DC Voltage) C 0.1 - 14V Diagnostic Procedure A UBS00BBO D 1. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect swirl control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. E F G H BBIA0174E 4. I Check voltage between swirl control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K PBIB0627E L 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between swirl control valve and ECM relay >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-395 M DTC P1132 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 3. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and swirl control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal Swirl volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE Check resistance between swirl control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. Resistance: 20.5 - 23.5Ω [At 20°C (68°F)] OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake manifold assembly. SEF605Y 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00BBP SWIRL CONTROL VALVE Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-396 DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR Component Description PFP:23731 A UBS00BBQ Swirl control valve position sensor is installed on the intake manifold. The sensor is connected to the front end of the valve shaft of the swirl control valve. The sensor responds to the valve shaft movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the swirl control valve position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. EC C D BBIA0173E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BBR Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM SWL C/V (B1) CONDITION ● Engine speed: Idle Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F). 0 - 5 step Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F). 115 - 120 step ● Engine speed: Idle ● Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F). ● Engine speed: Idle ● Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F). SWL/C POSI SE F SPECIFICATION G Approximately 0 deg H Approximately 80 deg I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1137 1137 Trouble diagnosis name Swirl control valve control position sensor circuit UBS00BBS DTC Detecting Condition An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (Swirl control valve position sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Swirl control valve position sensor ● Harness or connectors (Swirl control valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● J K L Swirl control valve M EC-397 DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BBT NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II and wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-401, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-398 DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BBU A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0697E EC-399 DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM 17 18 19 20 LG R/W PU/W L/Y Swirl control valve 48 R/W Sensors' power supply CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) 0.1 - 14V Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 54 67 Y B/W Swirl control valve position sensor Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) ● Idle speed ● Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F). [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F). ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● W/G 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 Approximately 5V ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF EC-400 Approximately 0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BBV 1. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect swirl control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0174E 4. Check voltage between swirl control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0627E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between swirl control valve and ECM relay >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I J K 3. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and swirl control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal Swirl volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-401 L M DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] 4. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE Check resistance between swirl control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. Resistance: 20.5 - 23.5 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake manifold collector assembly. SEF605Y 5. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 6. BBIA0155E EC-402 DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect swirl control valve position sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0173E 3. E Check voltage between swirl control valve position sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. G SEF034S H 7. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between swirl control valve position sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J K Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between swirl control valve position sensor and TCM ● Harness for open or short between swirl control valve position sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-403 L M DTC P1137 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR [QG18DE] 9. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 54 and swirl control valve position sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace intake manifold assembly. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00BBW SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-404 DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE Description PFP:00000 A UBS00BBX SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Throttle position sensor Throttle position Battery Battery voltage* Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Swirl control valve position sensor Swirl control valve position ECM function EC Actuator C Swirl control valve control Swirl control valve D E *: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. Swirl control valve has a valve portion in the intake passage of each cylinder. While idling and during low engine coolant temperature, the swirl control valve closes, Thus the velocity of the air in the intake passage increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a swirl in the combustion chamber. Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burning speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel consumption, and increase the stability in running conditions. Also, except when idling and during low engine coolant temperature, this system opens the swirl control valve. In this condition, this system tends to increase power by improving intake efficiency via reduction of intake flow resistance, intake flow. The swirl control valve is operated by the ECM. Throttle position sensor (Idle position) Engine coolant temperature Swirl control valve OFF — Open Above 45°C (113°F) Open Below 44°C (111°F) Close ON F G H I J COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Swirl Control Valve K Swirl control valve consists of actuator and valve. The valve is installed in the intake manifold, and the actuator is connected to the rear end of the valve shaft. The swirl control valve uses a step motor which has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes. When no change in the control position is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. L M BBIA0174E EC-405 DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Swirl Control Valve Position Sensor Swirl control valve position sensor is installed on the intake manifold. The sensor is connected to the front end of the valve shaft of the swirl control valve. The sensor responds to the valve shaft movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the swirl control valve position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. BBIA0173E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BBY Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM SWL C/V (B1) CONDITION ● Engine speed: Idle SPECIFICATION Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F). 0 - 5 step Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F). 115 - 120 step On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1138 1138 Trouble diagnosis name Swirl control valve control system performance UBS00BBZ DTC Detecting Condition The target opening angle of swirl control valve controlled by ECM and the input signal from swirl control valve position sensor is not in the normal rang. Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (Swirl control valve position sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Swirl control valve position sensor ● Harness or connectors (Swirl control valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● Swirl control valve DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BC0 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. Maintain engine speed at about 2,000 rpm for at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-409, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Perform step 5 through 8 three times. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-406 SEF174Y DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BC1 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0697E EC-407 DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM 17 18 19 20 LG R/W PU/W L/Y Swirl control valve 48 R/W Sensors' power supply CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) 0.1 - 14V Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 54 67 Y B/W Swirl control valve position sensor Sensors' ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) ● Idle speed ● Engine coolant temperature is below 44°C (111°F). [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● Engine coolant temperature is above 45°C (113°F). ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● W/G 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 Approximately 5V ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF EC-408 Approximately 0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BC2 1. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect swirl control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0174E 4. Check voltage between swirl control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0627E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between swirl control valve and ECM relay >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I J K 3. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and swirl control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal Swirl volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-409 L M DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 4. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE Check resistance between swirl control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. Resistance: 20.5 - 23.5Ω [At 20°C (68°F)] OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake manifold collector assembly. SEF605Y 5. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 6. BBIA0155E EC-410 DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 6. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect swirl control valve position sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0173E 3. E Check voltage between swirl control valve position sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. G PBIB0138E H 7. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between swirl control valve position sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J K Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between swirl control valve position sensor and TCM ● Harness for open or short between swirl control valve position sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-411 L M DTC P1138 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 9. CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 54 and swirl control valve position sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace intake manifold assembly. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00BC3 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-412 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC P1146 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00BC4 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BC5 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION F SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly G LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BC6 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. H I J K SEF558Z L DTC No. P1146 1146 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring DTC detecting condition The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-413 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injectors M DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BC7 NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II. PBIB0818E 6. a. b. c. d. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLANTEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLANEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II. When “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F), go to step 3. Overall Function Check UBS00BC8 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. If NG, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-414 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BC9 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0727E EC-415 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Heated oxygen sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00BCA 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-416 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-219 . No >> GO TO 3. F 1. 2. 3. G H I BBIA0150E K 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-417 J BBIA0175E DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer toEC-418, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BCB HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1782E EC-418 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB1210E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.70V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 4th gear position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00BCC HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . EC-419 G H I J K L M DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC P1147 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00BCD The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BCE Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BCF The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuelcut. SEF559Z DTC No. P1147 1147 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring DTC detecting condition The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-420 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BCG NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H PBIB0819E 6. a. b. c. d. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to EC-423 . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLANTEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLANEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II. When “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F), go to step 3. I J K Overall Function Check UBS00BCH Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. L WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. If NG, go to EC-423, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-421 M DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BCI BBWA0727E EC-422 DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● C D 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E [Engine is running] 78 B Heated oxygen sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V F UBS00BCJ 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. I J BBIA0155E K L M EC-423 DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-212 . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. BBIA0150E 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-424 BBIA0175E DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-425, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. F G 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END I Component Inspection UBS00BCK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. J Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. K L M PBIB1782E EC-425 DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QG18DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB1210E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.70V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 4th position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00BCL HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . EC-426 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL [QG18DE] DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:22690 A UBS00BCM This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 Trouble diagnosis name Closed loop control function DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. Possible cause ● The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-427 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE System Description PFP:00000 UBS00BCN COOLING FAN CONTROL Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Vehicle speed signal*2 Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal Battery Battery voltage*1 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Actuator Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay(s) *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. OPERATION PBIB0926E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BCO Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine EC-428 SPECIFICATION A/C switch: OFF OFF A/C switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] MONITOR ITEM COOLING FAN CONDITION ● After warming up engine, idle the engine. ● Air conditioner switch: OFF SPECIFICATION A Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HIGH On Board Diagnosis Logic EC C UBS00BCP If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P1217 1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat) Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) ● Cooling fan Radiator hose ● Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Radiator ● Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method. ● Radiator cap ● Water pump ● Thermostat Engine coolant level is not within the specified range. H For more information, refer to EC-439, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . WITH CONSULT-II 2. 3. I J K UBS00BCQ Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. 1. F G CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-16, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" . 1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" . 2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. Overall Function Check E Possible Cause ● ● D Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Turn ignition switch ON. SEF621W EC-429 L M DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] 4. 5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. If the results are NG, go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF646X WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine. Set temperature control lever to full cold position. Turn air conditioner switch ON. Turn blower fan switch ON. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating. Be careful not to overheat engine. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If NG, go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEC163BA If OK, go to the following step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed. Be careful not to overheat engine. If NG, go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MEC475B EC-430 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BCR A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0698E EC-431 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 89 LG/B Cooling fan relay-2 (High) ● Cooling fan is not operating [Engine is running] ● Cooling fan is high speed operating [Ignition switch: ON] 97 LG/R Cooling fan relay-1 (Low) ● Cooling fan is not operating [Ignition switch: ON] ● Cooling fan is operating Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11-14V) 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11-14V) 0 - 1.0V UBS00BCS 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. WBIA0058E 3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-436 .) SEF646X EC-432 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] 3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 5. Make sure that cooling fan-1 operates at high speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-438 .) EC C D E SEF646X F 4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Without CONSULT-II Disconnect cooling fan relays-2. Start engine and let it idle. Set temperature lever at full cold position. Turn air conditioner switch ON. Turn blower fan switch ON. H I J WBIA0058E K 6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-436 .) L M SEC163BA EC-433 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] 5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-2. 3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan-1 operates at high speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-438 .) MEC475B 6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. SLC754A 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following for leak. ● Hose ● Radiator ● Water pump (Refer to CO-10, "WATER PUMP" .) >> Repair or replace. EC-434 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] 8. CHECK RADIATOR CAP A Apply pressure to cap with a tester. Radiator cap relief pressure: EC 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace radiator cap. C D SLC755A 9. CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. 2. E Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. F Valve opening temperature: 76.5°C (170°F) [standard] Valve lift: More than 9 mm/90°C (0.35 in/194°F) Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer toCO-12, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace thermostat. G H 3. 10. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-440, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 11. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES I SLC343 J K L M If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-439, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . >> INSPECTION END EC-435 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0951E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse and fusible link box connectors E23, E25 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E103 ● 10A fuse ● 40A fusible links ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-436 BBIA0153E DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] 4. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 97 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. C D 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E9, F47 ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1 G Refer to EC-440, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace cooling fan relay. H I 7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS Refer to EC-440, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. J K 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M EC-437 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-2 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0621E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse and fusible link box connectors E23, E25 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E103 ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and fuse ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and battery ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 89 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. EC-438 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E9, F47 ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and ECM EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-2 Refer to EC-440, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace cooling fan relays. D E 7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS F Refer to EC-440, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. G 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END I Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step OFF 1 2 3 4 Inspection item ● Blocked radiator ● Blocked condenser ● Blocked radiator grille ● Blocked bumper ● Coolant mixture ● ● Coolant level Radiator cap UBS00BCT Equipment ● Visual Standard No blocking Reference page J — K ● ● ● Coolant tester Visual Pressure tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck See MA-16, "Changing Engine Coolant" . 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/ SeeCO-8, "System Check" . cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See CO-8, "System Check" . ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot See CO-12, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" and CO-14, "RADIATOR" . ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-428 ). OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — EC-439 L M DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] Engine Step ON*3 9 Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page ● Coolant temperature gauge ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — ● Coolant overflow to reservoir tank ● Visual No overflow during driving and idling See MA-16, "Changing Engine Coolant" . OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator ● Visual Should be initial level in reservoir tank See MA-16, "ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE)" . OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) See EM-58, "Inspection after Disassembly" . 12 ● Cylinder block and pistons ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston See EM-68, "Inspection" . *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-5, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" . Component Inspection UBS00BCU COOLING FAN RELAYS-1 AND -2 Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No If NG, replace relay. PBIB0077E COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 1. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. Terminals Speed Cooling fan motor (+) (−) Low 1 4 High 1, 2 3, 4 Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. SEF734W COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. EC-440 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QG18DE] 2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. A Terminals Cooling fan motor (+) (−) 2 1 EC Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. C SEF610Y D E F G H I J K L M EC-441 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00BCV Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BCW The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1225 1225 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance problem Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) UBS00BCX NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-443, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-442 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BCY 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E BBIA0178E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00BCZ ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . I J K L M EC-443 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00BD0 Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BD1 The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1226 1226 Trouble diagnosis name Closed throttle position learning performance problem DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) UBS00BD2 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4, 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-445, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-444 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BD3 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E BBIA0178E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00BD4 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . I J K L M EC-445 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16119 UBS00BD5 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1229 1229 Trouble diagnosis name Sensor power supply circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BD6 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-448, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-446 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BD7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0699E EC-447 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR B ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V UBS00BD8 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0152E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E EC-448 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QG18DE] 3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT A Check the following. ● Harness for short to power and short to ground between ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control EC actuator terminal 1. ● ECM pin terminal. OK or NG C OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR D Refer to EC-240, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. E 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END I J K L M EC-449 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00BD9 The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BDA Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BDB To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low. DTC No. P1271 1271 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00BDC CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EC-450 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 3. 4. 5. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-454, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. A EC C SEF581Z D 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. E ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Selector lever ● D position with “OD” ON (A/T) ● 4th position (M/T) F If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 7. G PBIB0756E H Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T) and release accelerator pedal fully. I J K PBIB0757E 8. 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Touch “BACK” and “MODE”, then select “SELF-DIAG RESULT” mode. If P1271 is displayed, go to EC-454, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If another DTC is displayed, go to the corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”. L M PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00BDD Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T). EC-451 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-454, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-452 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BDE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0700E EC-453 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BDF 1. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. BBIA0155E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-454 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Removal and Installation UBS00BDG A AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-455 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00BDH The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BDI Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BDJ To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high. DTC No. P1272 1272 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 4.5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00BDK CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EC-456 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 3. 4. 5. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 4.5V, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 4.5V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. A EC C SEF581Z D 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. E ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Selector lever ● D position with “OD” ON (A/T) ● 4th position (M/T) F If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 7. G PBIB0756E H Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T) and release accelerator pedal fully. I J K PBIB0757E 8. 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Touch “BACK” and “MODE”, then select “SELF-DIAG RESULT” mode. If P1272 is displayed, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If another DTC is displayed, go to the corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. L M PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00BDL Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T). EC-457 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-458 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BDM A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0700E EC-459 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BDN 1. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. BBIA0155E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-460 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Removal and Installation UBS00BDO A AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-461 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00BDP The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BDQ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BDR To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted “lean” side or “rich” side. When the A/F signal is shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected. DTC No. P1273 1273 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 lean shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/ F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a specified period. Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injectors ● Intake air leaks DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BDS NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. EC-462 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 4. Maintain the following conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 400 to 800 seconds.) NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED A EC Below 3,200 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL Below 13.6 msec Selector lever P or N position C If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 minutes, retry from step 2. SEF567Z D E F G SEF568Z 5. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, go to EC-466, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I J SEF569Z Overall Function Check UBS00BDT Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. K Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T). NOTE: Keep accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. EC-463 L M DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-466, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-464 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BDU A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0700E EC-465 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BDV 1. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 1. 2. DATA (DC Voltage) Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 2. EC-466 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF652Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-212 . No >> GO TO 3. G H I J BBIA0150E K L M EC-467 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-356, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00BDW AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-468 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00BDX The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BDY I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BDZ To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to the lean side or rich side. When the A/F signal is shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected. DTC No. P1274 1274 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 rich shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a specified period. M ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injectors UBS00BE0 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. EC-469 L Possible Cause DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. K DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 4. Maintain the following conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 400 to 800 seconds.) NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED Below 3,200 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL Below 13.6 msec Selector lever P or N position If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 minutes, retry from step 2. SEF570Z SEF571Z 5. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, go to EC-473, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF572Z Overall Function Check UBS00BE1 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T). NOTE: Keep accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. EC-470 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-473, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-471 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BE2 BBWA0700E EC-472 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BE3 1. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) G >> GO TO 2. H I J K L M EC-473 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF652Y Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-219 . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness connector for water. Water should not exit. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. EC-474 BBIA0150E DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 EC C D BBIA0140E E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should not exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER I Refer to EC-356, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. J 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation L UBS00BE4 AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-475 M DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00BE5 The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BE6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BE7 To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control. DTC No. P1276 1276 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00BE8 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step. EC-476 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 4. 5. 6. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. A EC ENG SPEED 1,750 - 2,000 rpm (A/T) 1,750 - 2,900 rpm (M/T) Vehicle speed More than 65 km/h (40 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec Selector lever ● D position with “OD” ON (A/T) ● 4th position (M/T) D If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 7. C SEF576Z E Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T) and release accelerator pedal fully. F G H SEF577Z 8. 9. I Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If NG is displayed, go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF578Z Overall Function Check UBS00BE9 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. EC-477 M DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 7. 8. 9. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-480, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-478 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BEA A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0700E EC-479 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BEB 1. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. BBIA0155E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-480 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Removal and Installation UBS00BEC A AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-481 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00BED The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BEE Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BEF To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. P1278 1278 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition ● The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injectors ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor UBS00BEG CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. EC-482 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. A EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “INCMP” is displayed, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,750 - 2,000 rpm (A/T) 1,750 - 2,900 rpm (M/T) Vehicle speed More than 65 km/h (40 MPH) D E B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec Selector lever ● D position with “OD” ON (A/T) ● 4th position (M/T) F If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 5. C PBIB0756E G H Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T) and release accelerator pedal fully. I J PBIB0757E 6. 7. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If NG is displayed, go to EC-486, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00BEH Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure the result is OK. If NG, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T). EC-483 K DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-486, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-484 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BEI A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0700E EC-485 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BEJ 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-486 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK A Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. EC 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. C With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? D E F G SEF652Y H Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-212 , EC-219 . No >> GO TO 6. EC-487 I J K L BBIA0150E M DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 5 75 2 BBIA0140E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-356, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-167, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 9. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-633, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00BEK AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-488 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00BEL The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BEM I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BEN K To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. L DTC No. P1279 1279 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition ● The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. DTC Confirmation Procedure M Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injectors ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor UBS00BEO CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. EC-489 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “INCMP” is displayed, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,000 rpm Vehicle speed 70 - 120 km/h (43 - 75 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec Selector lever ● D position with “OD” ON (A/T) ● 4th position (M/T) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 5. PBIB0756E Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T) and release accelerator pedal fully. PBIB0757E 6. 7. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If NG is displayed, go to EC-493, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00BEP Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure the result is OK. If NG, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 3rd position (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. EC-490 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). A NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. EC Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. C Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. D If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-493, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G H I J K L M EC-491 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BEQ BBWA0700E EC-492 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BER 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. G H BBIA0155E I 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 J Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) K >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. L Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). M PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-493 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF652Y Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-212 , EC-219 . No >> GO TO 6. EC-494 BBIA0150E DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QG18DE] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 EC C D BBIA0140E E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 7. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER I Refer to EC-356, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. J 8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR K Refer to EC-167, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. L 9. CHECK PCV VALVE M Refer to EC-633, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00BES AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-495 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description UBS00BET SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Vehicle speed sensor*2 Vehicle speed ECM function EVAP canister purge flow control Actuator EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BEU Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-496 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BEV A DTC No. P1444 1444 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve DTC detecting condition The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) EC C D UBS00BEW NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 0°C (32°F) or more. E F WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. G H I J K L PBIB0839E 6. 7. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that OK is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If NG is displayed, refer to EC500, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select MODE 7 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-500, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-497 M DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BEX BBWA0686E EC-498 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D [Engine is running] ● Idle speed E 45 GY/L EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E F Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● G Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) PBIB0520E [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H I J K : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) L M EC-499 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BEY 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0162E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0080E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-500 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] 4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. A Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. EC Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. C D BBIA0157E 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR E Refer to EC-305, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. F G 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. I J K L PBIB1786E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-312, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. EC-501 M DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] 9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 13. PBIB1213E 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-502 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BEZ A EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) EC Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No C D PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition E F Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No G H PBIB0150E Removal and Installation UBS00BJU I EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . J K L M EC-503 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 UBS00BF0 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnoses. PBIB1263E BBIA0157E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BF1 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1446 1446 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve close UBS00BF2 DTC detecting condition EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister is saturated with water UBS00BF3 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC-504 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. 6. 7. a. b. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. Repeat next procedures 3 times. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. Repeat next procedure 20 times. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. A EC C D E F G H I PBIB0972E 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. K L M EC-505 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BF4 BBWA0687E EC-506 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR EC ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G A ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 117 L/Y EVAP canister vent control valve 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 1.0V D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure F UBS00BF5 1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE G 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. H I J K BBIA0157E 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE L Refer to EC-418, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. M 3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 6. PBIB1213E EC-507 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. BBIA0157E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-312, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BF6 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. EC-508 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QG18DE] 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. 4. A EC C PBIB1033E D 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Condition VENT CONTROL/V ON No OFF Yes 7. 8. E Air passage continuity between A and B Operation takes less than 1 second. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 5 again. F G PBIB1787E H Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. I Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. J K L PBIB1033E 3. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes 4. 5. M Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Operation takes less than 1 second. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. EC-509 PBIB1034E DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QG18DE] DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description PFP:25551 UBS00BF7 ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to EC-635, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. BBIA0086E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BF8 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAIN SW CONDITION ● CANCEL SW ● RESUME/ACC SW SET SW ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BF9 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-348. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition ● P1564 1564 ASCD steering switch ● ● Possible Cause An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range. Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● ASCD steering switch ● ECM ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BFA NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. Press CRUISE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press ACCEL/RES switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press COAST/SET switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. EC-510 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QG18DE] 7. 8. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. If trip DTC is detected, go to EC-514, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-511 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BFB BBWA0701E EC-512 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 67 WIRE COLOR B/W EC ITEM Sensor ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ASCD steering switch: Released [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch Approximately 0V D E [Ignition switch: ON] W/R DATA (DC Voltage) C ● 99 A CRUISE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● COAST/SET switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed Approximately 4V F Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 2V G H Approximately 3V I J K L M EC-513 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BFC 1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. 1. 2. Switch CRUISE Monitor item MAIN SW COAST/SET ACCEL/RES SET SW RESUME/ACC SW Condition Indication Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF SEC006D CANCEL 1. 2. CANCEL SW Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button. Switch CRUISE SW COAST/SET SW ACCEL/RES SW CANCEL SW Condition Voltage [V] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 2 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 3 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 1 Released Approx. 4 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. EC-514 PBIB0311E DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QG18DE] 2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD steering switch harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD steering switch terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. D 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. BBIA0086E E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the following. ● Harness connectors M401, M102 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Spiral cable ● Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch ● Harness for open and short between TCM and ASCD steering switch >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. G H I 4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and ASCD steering switch terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. J K 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. L 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness connectors M401, M102 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Spiral cable ● Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-516, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. EC-515 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QG18DE] 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BFD ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect ASCD steering switch. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 1 and 4 with pushing each switch. Switch CRUISE SW COAST/SET SW ACCEL/RES SW CANCEL SW Condition Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 660 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 1,480 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 250 Released Approx. 4,000 EC-516 PBIB0934E DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 A UBS00BFE When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-635, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. EC C D BBIA0087E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BFF Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW2 (Stop lamp switch) CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released (M/T) ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed (M/T) OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic G H UBS00BFG This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-348 DTC No. P1572 1572 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD brake switch F DTC Detecting Condition When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to the ECM at the same time. EC-517 Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD clutch switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD brake switch ● ASCD clutch switch ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation ● ECM I J K L M DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BFH CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 4. If trip DTC is detected, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Depress the brake pedal for more than five seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned condition. 5. If trip DTC is detected, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-518 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BFI A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0702E EC-519 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 P/L ASCD brake switch ● Brake pedal is fully released (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released (M/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is depressed (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is slightly depressed (M/T) EC-520 Approximately 0V DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BFJ 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. EC C A/T models CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is depress OFF When brake pedal is fully released ON D M/T models E CONDITION INDICATION When clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is depressed OFF When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON F SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. G H A/T models CONDITION When brake pedal is depress When brake pedal is fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V I Battery voltage M/T models J CONDITION When clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is depressed When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V K Battery voltage MBIB0061E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 4. L M EC-521 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage MBIB0060E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 13. 3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0167E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0799E EC-522 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0087E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK (M/T models)>>GO TO 6. OK (A/T models)>>GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. G H PBIB0857E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-523 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-526, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-526, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. EC-524 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0105E E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal + (M/T models) or 1 (A/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage G H PBIB0938E I J K PBIB1184E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. L M 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-525 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal – (M/T models) or 2 (A/T models). Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-526, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BFK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. EC-526 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed. Continuity A Should exist. Should not exist. EC If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-6, "CLUTCH SYSTEM" , and perform step 3 again. C SEC024D D STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 (A/T models), + and – (M/T models) under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. E F Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. G If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 3 again. H PBIB0939E I J K L PBIB1202E M EC-527 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description PFP:31036 UBS00BFL The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from “unified meter and A/C amp.”, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-635, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BFM This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-337, "DTC P0500 VSS" ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-348, "DTC P0605 ECM" DTC No. P1574 1574 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD vehicle speed sensor DTC Detecting Condition ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Vehicle speed sensor ● TCM ● ECM UBS00BFN CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle at more than 30 km/h (19 MPH). If DTC is detected, go to EC-529, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-528 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BFO 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-38, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. 2. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” Refer to DI-15, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . EC C D >> INSPECTION END E F G H I J K L M EC-529 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QG18DE] DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Component Description PFP:32006 UBS00BFP When the gear position is P or N (A/T models), Neutral (M/T models), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also indicates a transmission range switch to detect selector lever position. SEF752Y CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BFQ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON Except above OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1706 1706 Trouble diagnosis name Park/neutral position switch UBS00BFR DTC detecting condition The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.] ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch UBS00BFS CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal N and P position (A/T models) Neutral position (M/T models) ON Except the above position OFF 3. 4. If NG, go to EC-533, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC-530 SEF212Y DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QG18DE] 5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 50 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,550 - 6,375 rpm (A/T) 1,850 - 6,375 rpm (M/T) EC B/FUEL SCHDL 3.0 - 31.8 msec (A/T) 2.8 - 31.8 msec (M/T) VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 6. A If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-533, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check C SEF213Y D UBS00BFT Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. E WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. Condition (Gear position) P and N position (A/T models) Neutral position (M/T models) Except the above position 3. F G Voltage (V) (Known-good data) Approx. 0 H A/T models: Battery voltage M/T models: Approximately 5V If NG, go to EC-533, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I MBIB0029E J K L M EC-531 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BFU BBWA0304E EC-532 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/OR A PNP switch Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T). [Ignition switch: ON] ● Except the above gear position DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V A/T models BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) M/T models Approximately 5V D E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BFV 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F G Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. H I J Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" (A/T models) or MT-12, "POSITION SWITCH" (M/T models). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace PNP switch. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-533 L M DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description PFP:25320 UBS00BFW Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BFX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BFY The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1805 1805 Trouble diagnosis name Brake switch DTC detecting condition A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch FALI-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Vehicle condition Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BFZ WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-536, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-534 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BG0 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0703E EC-535 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal depressed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00BG1 1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. DATA (DC Voltage) Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Brake pedal Stop lamp Fully released Not illuminated Depressed Illuminated OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. EC-536 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0105E 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 (A/T models), + (M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Battery voltage F G PBIB1203E H I J K PBIB0938E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. L 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 ● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-537 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2 (A/T models), – (M/T models). Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. BBIA0105E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-538, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BG2 STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0105E EC-538 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 (A/ T models), + and – (M/T models) under the following conditions. Conditions Continuity Brake pedal fully released Should not exist. Brake pedal depressed A EC Should exist. If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 2 again. C PBIB1202E D E F G PBIB0939E H I J K L M EC-539 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00BG3 The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BG4 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS CONDITION ● ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BG5 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2122 2122 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P2123 2123 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-540 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BG6 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-543, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M EC-541 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BG7 BBWA0704E EC-542 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 82 B/Y Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 0V D [Engine is running] 83 G A Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E 90 R Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 R/G Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F 0.28 - 0.48V G [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed H More than 2.0V I [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.65 - 0.87V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed K More than 4.3V L Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BG8 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-543 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0104E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0811E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-544 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR G Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly. H 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BG9 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR K 1. 2. 3. L Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. M MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation UBS00BGA ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . EC-545 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00BGB The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BGC Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BGD These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P1227 1227 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) P1228 1228 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-546 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BGE A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-549, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M EC-547 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BGF BBWA0705E EC-548 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 82 B/Y Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 0V D [Engine is running] 83 G A Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E 90 R Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 R/G Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F 0.28 - 0.48V G [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed H More than 2.0V I [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.65 - 0.87V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed K More than 4.3V L Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BGG 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-549 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0104E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0812E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-550 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor E >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR F G Refer to EC-552, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly. H 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END K L M EC-551 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BGH ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation UBS00BGI ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . EC-552 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00BGJ Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BGK Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) F SPECIFICATION Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic H UBS00BGL This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2. I Possible cause ● P2135 2135 ● Harness or connector (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) J K FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. L Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-553 M DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BGM NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-556, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-554 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BGN A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0706E EC-555 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR B ITEM Throttle position sensor power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 R Throttle position sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V UBS00BGO 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-556 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0152E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. J K 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. I Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-558, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-557 L M DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BGP THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation PBIB1060E UBS00BGQ ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . EC-558 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 A UBS00BGR The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM E receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BGS F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ● ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF G H I *: Accelerator pedal sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BGT J This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2138 2138 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2. Possible cause ● Harness or connector (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2 K L M FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-559 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BGU NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-560 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BGV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0707E EC-561 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 82 B/Y Accelerator pedal position sensor 1ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 83 G Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 R Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 R/G Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.28 - 0.48V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 2.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 4.3V UBS00BGW 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0155E EC-562 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0104E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 1, 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0782E H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor I J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K 1. 2. 3. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 4, ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-563 M DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-565, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-564 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BGX A ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. EC C D E MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. Perform EC-47, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation F G UBS00BGY ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . H I J K L M EC-565 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description PFP:22448 UBS00BGZ IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON-OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. BBIA0172E EC-566 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BH0 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0708E EC-567 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM A few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] EC-568 DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0709E EC-569 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.1V [Engine is running] 62 81 BR PU ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB0521E Ignition signal No. 1 Ignition signal No. 2 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0522E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) EC-570 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0710E EC-571 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.1V [Engine is running] 61 80 L/W GY/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB0521E Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 4 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0522E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BH1 1. CHECK ENGINE START Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. PBIB0133E EC-572 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] 3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A Without CONSULT-II Let engine idle. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0521E PBIB1204E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. F 4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-141, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . I J MBIB0034E K 5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB0624E EC-573 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] 6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM relay. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. LEC444 7. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB0625E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F48 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 9. CHECK ECM RELAY Refer to EC-576, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace ECM relay. 10. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. EC-574 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] 11. CHECK CONDENSER A Refer to EC-576, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace condenser. EC 12. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V C 1. 2. 3. 4. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. E F G BBIA0172E 5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H Voltage: Battery voltage I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. J PBIB0138E K 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM relay >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-575 L M IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] 15. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EC-576, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor. 17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BH2 ECM RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes OFF No 3. If NG, replace ECM relay. PBIB0077E CONDENSER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F) MBIB0031E IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. EC-576 IGNITION SIGNAL [QG18DE] 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ 1 and 3 A EC Except 0 2 and 3 C PBIB0847E D Removal and Installation UBS00BH3 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . E F G H I J K L M EC-577 INJECTOR [QG18DE] INJECTOR Component Description PFP:16600 UBS00BH4 The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. SEF375Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode MONITOR ITEM INJ PULSE-B1 B/FUEL SCHDL CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load UBS00BH5 SPECIFICATION Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 3.2 msec Idle 1.0 - 1.6 msec 2,000 rpm 0.7 - 1.3 msec EC-578 INJECTOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BH6 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0711E EC-579 INJECTOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 22 23 41 42 G/B R/B L/B Y/B ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 PBIB0529E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0530E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BH7 1. INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. EC-580 INJECTOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. EC C D E PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. F G H I PBIB1725E J OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. K L M EC-581 INJECTOR [QG18DE] 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Stop engine. Disconnect injector harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0176E 4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0582E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness connectors F12, F101 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between injector harness connector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-582 INJECTOR [QG18DE] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F12, F101 ● Harness for open or short between injector and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC C 7. CHECK INJECTOR Refer to EC-584, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injector. D E 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END F G H I J K L M EC-583 INJECTOR [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BH8 INJECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect injector harness connector. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] PBIB1727E Removal and Installation UBS00BH9 INJECTOR Refer to EM-19, "Removal and Installation" . EC-584 FUEL PUMP [QG18DE] FUEL PUMP System Description PFP:17042 A UBS00BHA SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Battery Battery voltage* ECM function EC Actuator Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay C *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. D E F Operates for 1 second Engine running and cranking Operates When engine is stopped Stops in 1 second Except as shown above Stops G H COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank. I J K PBIB1218E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY UBS00BHB CONDITION ● Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 second) ● Engine running and cranking ● When engine is stopped (Stops in 1 second) ● Except as shown above EC-585 L SPECIFICATION ON OFF M FUEL PUMP [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BHC BBWA0314E EC-586 FUEL PUMP [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113 B/P A Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. C 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. Diagnostic Procedure D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E UBS00BHD 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION F 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers. Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. G H I BBIA0163E J 2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuel pump relay. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M BBIA0307E 4. Check voltage between fuel pump relay terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0303E EC-587 FUEL PUMP [QG18DE] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● 15A fuse ● Fuse block (J/B) connector B4 ● Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay >> Repair harness or connectors. 4. CHECK POWER GROUND CIRCUIT AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and body ground, “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and fuel pump relay terminal 3. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and body ground ● Harness for open or short between and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and fuel pump relay >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 113 and fuel pump relay connector terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness connector M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-588 BBIA0132E FUEL PUMP [QG18DE] 8. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY A Refer to EC-590, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel pump relay. EC 9. CHECK FUEL PUMP C Refer to EC-590, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. D 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E Perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M EC-589 FUEL PUMP [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BHE FUEL PUMP RELAY Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No If NG, replace relay. SEF145X FUEL PUMP 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 1 and 3. Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] If NG, replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. PBIB0928E Removal and Installation UBS00BHF FUEL PUMP Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-590 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Description PFP:92136 A UBS00BHG The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. EC C D BBIA0165E E F G H SEF099XA I J K L M EC-591 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BHH BBWA0712E EC-592 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 49 67 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM R/Y Refrigerant pressure sensor power supply B/W Sensor ground (MAF sensor / IAT sensor / PSP sensor / ASCD steering switch / EVAP control system pressure sensor / Refrigerant pressure sensor / Swirl control valve position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V D [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E [Engine is running] 70 L Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON (Compressor operates.) Diagnostic Procedure F 1.0 - 4.0V G UBS00BHI 1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. A H Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V J OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. K PBIB1205E L M EC-593 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. Stop engine. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0165E 5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. SEF479Y 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E9, F47 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair harness or connectors. 4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. EC-594 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QG18DE] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness for open or short between TCM and refrigerant pressure sensor ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. D Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. F 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor H I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR J Refer to MTC-15, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. K 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00BHJ REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to MTC-15, "REFRIGERATION SYSTEM" . EC-595 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode PFP:25350 UBS00BJC Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd and/ or heater fan switch is ON. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF and heater fan switch is OFF. OFF EC-596 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BJD A SULEV MODELS EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0713E EC-597 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] EXCEPT SULEV MODELS BBWA0717E EC-598 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR EC ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] 84 PU Electrical load signal (Headlamp signal) ● Lighting switch: 2ND position [Ignition switch: ON] ● Lighting switch: OFF [Engine is running] 96 Y/G A Electrical load signal (Heater fan signal) ● Heater fan switch: ON [Engine is running] ● Heater fan switch: OFF DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V C D Approximately 0V E Approximately 5V F G H I J K L M EC-599 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] SULEV MODELS BBWA0714E EC-600 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] EXCEPT SULEV MODELS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0735E EC-601 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] 93 Electrical load signal (Rear window defogger signal) L/W ● Rear window defogger switch: ON [Ignition switch: ON] ● Rear window defogger switch: OFF Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V UBS00BJE 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. Condition LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch ON at 2nd position ON Lighting switch OFF OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB0103E 3. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Lighting switch ON at 2nd position BATTERY VOLTAGE Lighting switch OFF 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB0674E EC-602 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] 4. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. Condition EC LOAD SIGNAL FAN control switch ON in any position ON FAN control switch OFF OFF C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 13. E PBIB0103E 5. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II F Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 96 and ground under the following conditions. Condition G Voltage FAN control switch ON in any position Approximately 0V FAN control switch OFF Approximately 5V H I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB1219E J 6. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-III K With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. Condition L LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch ON ON Rear window defogger switch OFF OFF M OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 16. PBIB0103E EC-603 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] 7. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-III 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 93 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Rear window defogger switch ON BATTERY VOLTAGE Rear window defogger switch OFF Approximately 0V OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 16. PBIB1788E 8. CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION 1. Start engine. 2. Turn the lighting switch ON at 2nd position. 3. Check that headlamps are illuminated. OK or NG OK (Models for USA)>>GO TO 9. OK (Models for Canada)>>GO TO 11. NG >> Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-10, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —" . 9. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect lighting switch harness connectors. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and lighting switch terminal 12 under the following conditions. PBIB1271E Condition Continuity 1 Should exist 2 Should not exist 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 10. EC-604 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) M1, E103 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 (Except SULEV models) ● Harness connectors M59, F27 (SULEV models) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 11. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D 1. 2. 3. E 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect lighting switch harness connector E115. Disconnect daytime light control unit harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and lighting switch terminal 12, daytime light control unit terminal 6 under the following conditions. F G H I PBIB1789E J Condition Continuity 1 Should exist 2 Should not exist K 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 12. L 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness connectors E109, M20 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Fuse block (J/B) M1, E103 ● Diode-3 M55 ● Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch ● Harness for open and short between ECM and daytime light control unit >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-605 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] 13. CHECK HEATER FAN SWITCH FUNCTION 1. Start engine. 2. Turn the heater fan switch ON in any position. 3. Check that heater fan turns properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Refer to MTC-19, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" 14. CHECK HEATER FAN INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect fan control switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 96 and fan control switch terminal 6. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open and short between ECM and fan control switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 16. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION 1. Start engine. 2. Turn ON the rear window defogger switch. 3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 17. No >> Refer to GW-17, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" 17. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and rear window defogger relay terminals 5, 7. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 18. EC-606 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QG18DE] 18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defogger relay. >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 19. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC C D Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E >> INSPECTION END F G H I J K L M EC-607 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 UBS00BHN When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal) Refer to EC-635, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. BBIA0087E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BHO Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW2 (Stop lamp switch) CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released (M/T) ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed (M/T) OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON EC-608 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BHP A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0316E EC-609 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 P/L ASCD brake switch ● Brake pedal is fully released (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released (M/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is depressed (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is slightly depressed (M/T) EC-610 Approximately 0V ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BHQ 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. EC 1. 2. C A/T models CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is depressed OFF When brake pedal is fully released ON D E M/T models CONDITION INDICATION When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON 1. 2. SEC011D F Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. G A/T models H CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V I Battery voltage M/T models CONDITION When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released J VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 4. MBIB0061E K L M EC-611 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage MBIB0060E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13. 3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0167E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0799E EC-612 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0087E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK (M/T models)>>GO TO 6. OK (A/T models)>>GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. G H PBIB0857E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-613 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-616, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-616, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. EC-614 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0105E E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal + (M/T models) or 1 (A/T models) and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage G H PBIB0938E I J K PBIB1203E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. L M 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-615 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal – (M/T models) or 2 (A/T models). Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-616, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BHR ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. EC-616 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QG18DE] 3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed. A Continuity Should exist. EC Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-6, "CLUTCH SYSTEM" , and perform step 3 again. C SEC024D D STOP LAMP SWITCH With M/T Models 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals + and – under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. E F Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. G If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 3 again. H PBIB0939E I With A/T Models 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. Continuity J K Should not exist. Should exist. L If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 3 again. M PBIB1202E EC-617 ASCD INDICATOR [QG18DE] ASCD INDICATOR Component Description PFP:24814 UBS00BHS ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. ● CRUISE indicator is illuminated. ● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-635, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BHT Specification data are reference value. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION CRUISE LAMP ● SET LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF EC-618 ASCD INDICATOR [QG18DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BHU A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0716E EC-619 ASCD INDICATOR [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BHV 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. ASCD INDICATOR CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001, refer to EC-148, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION Does combination meter operate normally? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-6, "Combination Meter" . 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-620 MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS [QG18DE] MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS Wiring Diagram PFP:24814 A UBS00BHW EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0318E EC-621 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QG18DE] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description PFP:14950 UBS00BHX SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PBIB1067E The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling. EC-622 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QG18DE] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1056E EC-623 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QG18DE] BBIA0294E EC-624 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QG18DE] Component Inspection UBS00BHY A EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B . 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C . 3. Release blocked port B . 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C . 5. Block port A and B . 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. EC C D PBIB1212E FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP) 1. E Wipe clean valve housing. F G H SEF445Y 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: Vacuum: I 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. J K SEF943S L EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-284, "DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" . M FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-226, "DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR" , EC-231, "DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR" . EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-291 . EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-300 . EC-625 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QG18DE] EVAP SERVICE PORT Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. BBIA0160E Removal and Installation UBS00BHZ EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. PBIB1214E EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. PBIB1215E How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS00BI0 CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not start engine. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: Improper installation of adapter to the service port may cause a leak. ● EC-626 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QG18DE] ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description PFP:00000 A UBS00BI1 EC C D E F PBIB1268E From the beginning of refueling, the fuel tank pressure goes up. When the pressure reaches the setting value of the refueling control valve (RCV) opening pressure, the RCV is opened. After RCV opens, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve, RCV and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. The RCV is always closed during driving and the evaporative emission control system is operated the same as conventional system. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: ● Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. ● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. ● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. – Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . – Disconnect battery ground cable. ● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. ● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. ● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. ● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. EC-627 G H I J K L M ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QG18DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BI2 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. PBIB1213E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-630, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC-628 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QG18DE] SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. A 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. C The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. D NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. F G H PBIB1213E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I Replace EVAP canister with a new one. J >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. L >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES M Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check signal line and recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace filler neck tube. EC-629 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QG18DE] 7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-630, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. 9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. 10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. SEF665U Component Inspection UBS00BI3 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. – – – 3. 4. – – – Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-7, "Removal and Installation" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel level sensor unit retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel level sensor unit retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck closed as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B ), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer with fuel level sensor unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. EC-630 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QG18DE] – Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel level sensor unit retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. A EC C D E F BBIA0295E G Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-7, "Removal and Installation" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: – Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck closed as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B ), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer with fuel level sensor unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. – 3. 4. – – – H I J K L M EC-631 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QG18DE] – Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel level sensor unit retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0295E EC-632 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [QG18DE] POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description PFP:11810 A UBS00BI4 EC C D E F SEF921W This system returns blow-by gas to the intake collector. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air duct into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the intake collector under all conditions. Component Inspection UBS00BI5 G H I J K PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over the valve inlet. L M PBIB1589E EC-633 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [QG18DE] VENTILATION HOSE 1. 2. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. SET277 EC-634 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [QG18DE] AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description PFP:18930 A UBS00BI6 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor ASCD brake switch Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC Brake pedal operation Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Unified meter and A/C amp.* Vehicle speed TCM * Powertrain revolution C ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator D E *: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. F G H SET OPERATION Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) ACCEL OPERATION If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. I J K CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. ● CANCEL switch is depressed ● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are depressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared.). ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models) ● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models). ● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp. ● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature: CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET switch or RESUME switch. ● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly. If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. COAST OPERATION When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. EC-635 L M AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [QG18DE] RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. ● Brake pedal is released. ● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models) ● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N position (A/T models) ● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) Component Description UBS00BI7 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-510 . ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-534 , and EC-538 . ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-517 and EC-526 . STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-517 , EC-534 and EC-608 . ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-373 , EC-375 , EC-382 and EC-387 . ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-618 . EC-636 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) PFP:00030 A UBS00BI8 Approximately 350 (3.57, 51) EC Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Target idle speed (Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature) Air conditioner: ON Ignition timing UBS00BI9 A/T No-load*1 (in P or N position) 800 ± 50 rpm M/T No-load*1 (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm A/T In P or N position M/T In Neutral position A/T In P or N position 18° ± 5° BTDC M/T In Neutral position 7° ± 5° BTDC C 850 rpm or more D E *1: Under the following conditions: ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electrical load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) ● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position F Mass Air Flow Sensor Supply voltage UBS00BIA G V Output voltage at idle Battery voltage (11 - 14) V Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 1.0 - 1.7 H 1.4 - 4.0 at idle* 5.0 - 10.0 at 2,500 rpm* g·m/sec *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and idling under no-load. I Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) UBS00BIB Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Fuel Pump Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 0.2 - 5.0 Ω 13.5 - 17.5 Ω 4-8 UBS00BIF Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater UBS00BIG Ω 2.3 - 4.3 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] M UBS00BIE Throttle Control Motor Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] L UBS00BID Resistor Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] K UBS00BIC Injector Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] J UBS00BIN Ω 8 - 10 EC-637 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] Calculated Load Value UBS00BIH Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) Condition At idle 20.0 - 35.5 At 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 30.0 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Temperature UBS00BII °C (°F) Resistance 25 (77) kΩ 1.9 - 2.1 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS00BIK Refer toEC-257, "Component Inspection" . Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor Temperature UBS00BIL °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 EC-638 INDEX FOR DTC [QR25DE] INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index PFP:00024 A UBS0026N NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*2 ECM*3 C Trip MIL lighting up Reference page A/F SEN1 (B1)*8 P1271 1271 2 × EC-1113 A/F SEN1 (B1)*8 P1272 1272 2 × EC-1119 A/F SEN1 (B1)*8 P1273 1273 2 × EC-1125 8 A/F SEN1 (B1)* P1274 1274 2 × EC-1132 A/F SEN1 (B1)*8 P1276 1276 2 × EC-1139 A/F SEN1 (B1)*8 P1278 1278 2 × EC-1145 A/F SEN1 (B1)*8 P1279 1279 2 × EC-1152 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)*8 P1031 1031 2 × EC-1028 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)*8 P1032 1032 2 × EC-1028 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 2 × AT-509 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 2 × AT-514 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 2 × AT-519 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 2 × AT-524 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 2 × AT-536 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-1210 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-1210 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-1217 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-1217 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-1230 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 1 — EC-1181 ASCD SW P1564 1564 1 — EC-1174 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 1 — EC-1192 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 2 × AT-494 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-1204 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 1 × EC-789 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001* 5 2 — EC-789 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-930 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 1 × EC-1090 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-935 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-1105 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-1107 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 × EC-919 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 2 × EC-919 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 2 × EC-919 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 2 × EC-919 EC-639 D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [QR25DE] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 3 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-1025 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 2 × EC-1034 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 1 × EC-827 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 1 × EC-827 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 1 × EC-838 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-1092 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 2 × AT-505 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 or 2 × EC-1043 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-1045 ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-1057 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-1052 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-1052 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 2 × EC-990 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 2 × EC-949 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 2 × EC-955 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 2 × EC-976 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 2 × EC-982 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 2 × EC-998 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 2 × EC-909 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 2 × EC-909 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 2 × EC-904 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 2 × EC-1008 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 2 × EC-1010 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 2 × EC-1012 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 2 × EC-1012 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 × EC-883 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 × EC-894 (B1)*7 P0132 0132 2 × EC-846 HO2S1 (B1)*7 P0133 0133 2 × EC-852 HO2S1 (B1)*7 P0134 0134 2 × EC-862 HO2S1 (B1)*7 P1143 1143 2 × EC-1062 HO2S1 P1144 1144 2 × EC-1068 7 HO2S1 HTR (B1)* P0031 0031 2 × EC-795 HO2S1 HTR (B1)*7 P0032 0032 2 × EC-795 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-869 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 × EC-875 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 × EC-1074 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 × EC-1082 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 × EC-801 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 × EC-801 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 × EC-822 HO2S1 (B1)*7 EC-640 INDEX FOR DTC [QR25DE] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 3 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page 2 ECM* IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 × EC-822 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 2 × EC-841 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 × EC-792 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-1038 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 2 × EC-1016 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 2 × EC-1018 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-926 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-926 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 2 × AT-544 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 1 × EC-807 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 1 × EC-815 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 1 × EC-815 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 × EC-919 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — EC-706 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. No DTC Flashing*4 — Flashing*4 EC-707 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 2 × AT-565 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-1194 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 2 × AT-488 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 × EC-963 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 2 × EC-963 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 2 × EC-1159 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 — EC-1020 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-1109 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 1 × AT-550 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 1 × AT-555 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 2 × AT-531 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 2 × EC-844 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-913 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-913 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-832 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-832 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-1224 TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 1 × AT-560 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 2 × EC-941 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 P0720 0720 2 × AT-500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 2 × EC-1014 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 2 × EC-969 GST* A EC C D E F G H EC-641 I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [QR25DE] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 3 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 2 × EC-1167 VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 2 — EC-1198 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: When engine is running. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. *7: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *8: A/T models except ULEV. DTC No. Index UBS0026O NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 ECM*3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. — Flashing*4 EC-707 No DTC Flashing*4 U1000 1000*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 × EC-789 U1001 1001*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-789 P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. — — — P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 2 × EC-792 7 2 × EC-795 P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1)* P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1)*7 2 × EC-795 P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-801 P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-801 P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-807 P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-815 P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-815 P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-822 P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-822 P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-827 P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-827 P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-832 P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-832 P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR 1 × EC-838 P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR 2 × EC-841 P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN 2 × EC-844 7 P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1)* 2 × EC-846 P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1)*7 2 × EC-852 EC-642 INDEX FOR DTC [QR25DE] DTC*1 CONSULT-II Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1)*7 2 × EC-862 P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-869 P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-875 P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 × EC-883 P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 × EC-894 P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR 2 × EC-904 P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-909 P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-909 P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-913 P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-913 P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 × EC-919 P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 × EC-919 P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE 2 × EC-919 P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE 2 × EC-919 P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE 2 × EC-919 P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-926 P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-926 P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-930 P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-935 P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 × EC-941 P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON 2 × EC-949 P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK 2 × EC-955 P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-963 P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-963 P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-969 P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-976 P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-982 P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK 2 × EC-990 P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK 2 × EC-998 P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH 2 × EC-1008 P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 × EC-1010 P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-1012 P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-1012 P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 2 × EC-1014 P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-1016 P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-1018 P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-1020 P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-1025 P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC 2 × AT-488 P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 × AT-494 P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 2 × AT-500 P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG 2 × AT-505 EC-643 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [QR25DE] DTC*1 CONSULT-II 3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN 2 × AT-509 P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN 2 × AT-514 P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN 2 × AT-519 P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN 2 × AT-524 P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 × AT-531 P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN 2 × AT-536 P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-544 P0750 0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC 1 × AT-550 P0755 0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC 1 × AT-555 P1031 1031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)*8 2 × EC-1028 P1032 1032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)*8 2 × EC-1028 P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC 2 × EC-1034 2 × EC-1038 1 or 2 × EC-1043 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 × EC-1045 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-1052 P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-1052 P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-1057 P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1)*7 2 × EC-1062 P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1)*7 2 × EC-1068 P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-1074 P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-1082 P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 1 × EC-1090 P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-1092 P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-1105 P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-1107 P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1121 1121 ETC ACTR P1122 1122 P1124 1 × EC-1109 8 P1271 1271 A/F SENSOR1 (B1)* 2 × EC-1113 P1272 1272 A/F SENSOR1 (B1)*8 2 × EC-1119 P1273 1273 A/F SENSOR1 (B1)*8 2 × EC-1125 P1274 1274 A/F SENSOR1 (B1)*8 2 × EC-1132 P1276 1276 A/F SENSOR1 (B1)*8 2 × EC-1139 P1278 1278 A/F SENSOR1 (B1)*8 2 × EC-1145 P1279 1279 A/F SENSOR1 (B1)*8 2 × EC-1152 P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-1159 P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-1167 P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-1174 P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-1181 P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN 1 — EC-1192 P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — EC-706 P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T 1 × AT-560 EC-644 INDEX FOR DTC [QR25DE] DTC*1 CONSULT-II 3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page GST*2 ECM* P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-1194 P1760 1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-565 P1800 1800 VIAS S/V CIRC 2 — EC-1198 P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-1204 P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-1210 P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-1210 P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-1217 P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-1217 P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-1224 P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-1230 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: When engine is running. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. *7: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *8: A/T models except ULEV. A EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-645 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UBS00BJ5 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS0026Q The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-47, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precaution ● ● ● ● UBS0026R Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned off. Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable. SEF289H EC-646 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] ● ● Do not disassemble ECM. If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the initial ECM values. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values. Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. A EC C PBIB1164E D ● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at right. E F G MBIB0145E ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs. Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc. Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-746 . Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents. Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS). EC-647 H I J K PBIB0090E L M MEF040D PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. SEF217U ● ● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF348N ● ● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. PBIB1218E EC-648 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] ● ● ● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily. Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown. A EC C SEF709Y D ● – – – – When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location. Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units. Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller. Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" E F G SEF708Y UBS0026S H I J K L M EC-649 PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 UBS0026T The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name KV10117100 (J36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut S-NT379 KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors a: 22 mm (0.87 in) S-NT636 (J-44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 LEM054 (J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit Checking fuel pressure LEC642 KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT825 KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT826 EG17650301 (J33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 EC-650 PREPARATION [QR25DE] Commercial Service Tools UBS0026U A Tool name (KentMoore No.) Description Fuel filler cap adapter (J-45356) Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure EC C S-NT815 Leak detector ie: (J41416) Locating the EVAP leak D E F S-NT703 EVAP service port adapter ie: (J41413-OBD) Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port G H S-NT704 Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor I J S-NT705 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner ie: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below. a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor K L AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant ie: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. S-NT779 EC-651 M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram PFP:23710 UBS0026V A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS PBIB1778E EC-652 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1779E EC-653 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS0026W BBIA0286E NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. Refer to EC-652, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. EC-654 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] System Chart UBS0026X A Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor ● Mass air flow sensor Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay ● Engine coolant temperature sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1*4 ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator ● On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*5 Power valve control VIAS control solenoid valve ● Throttle position sensor ● Accelerator pedal position sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control*4 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater*4 ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control*5 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater*5 ● Intake air temperature sensor Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● Power steering pressure sensor ● Ignition switch EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Battery voltage Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay ● Knock sensor Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays ● EC C D E F Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD steering switch ● ASCD brake switch ● ASCD clutch switch ● Fuel level sensor*1 ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Fuel tank temperature sensor*1 G H ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system ● EVAP canister vent control valve I 2 ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 * ● TCM (Transmission control module) *3 ● Air conditioner switch ● Vehicle speed sensor ● Electrical load signal J *1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis. *2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. *3: The signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *4: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *5: A/T models except ULEV. K L M EC-655 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS0026Y INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*5 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor*2 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Knock sensor Engine knocking condition Battery Battery voltage*5 Power steering pressure sensor 3 ECM function Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Actuator Fuel injectors Power steering operation Heated oxygen sensor 2* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Vehicle speed sensor*4 Vehicle speed Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *2: A/T models except ULEV. *3: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation. *4: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *5: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below. ● During warm-up ● When starting the engine ● During acceleration ● Hot-engine operation ● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models) ● High-load, high-speed operation ● During deceleration ● During high engine speed operation EC-656 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL) A/T Models ULEV and M/T Models A EC C D PBIB0121E A/T Models Except ULEV E F G SEF503YB The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV) in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV), refer to EC-846 /EC1113 This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models), air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/ T models except ULEV) shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. H I J K L Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. ● Deceleration and acceleration ● High-load, high-speed operation ● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV) or its circuit ● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature ● High engine coolant temperature ● During warm-up ● After shifting from N to D (A/T models) ● When starting the engine MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV). This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. EC-657 M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV) indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. FUEL INJECTION TIMING SEF337W Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. FUEL SHUT-OFF Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds. Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS0026Z INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Knock sensor Engine knocking Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Vehicle speed sensor*1 Vehicle speed ECM function Ignition timing control *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. EC-658 Actuator Power transistor ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best airfuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and EC camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec C A °BTDC During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. D ● At starting SEF742M ● During warm-up ● At idle E ● At low battery voltage ● During acceleration The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed F within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. G Air Conditioning Cut Control UBS00270 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*2 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation 1 Vehicle speed sensor* ECM function Actuator H I Air conditioner cut control Air conditioner relay J K Vehicle speed *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. L SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off. ● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. ● When cranking the engine. ● At high engine speeds. ● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. ● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. ● When engine speed is excessively low. ● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. EC-659 M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS00271 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Vehicle speed sensor*1 Vehicle speed ECM function Fuel cut control Actuator Fuel injectors *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled. NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-656 . EC-660 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] CAN communication UBS00272 A SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other EC control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C Refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , about CAN communication for detail. D E F G H I J K L M EC-661 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check PFP:00018 UBS00273 IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF058Y With GST Check idle speed with GST. NOTE: For the method of installing the tachometer, refer to “IGNITION TIMING”. IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. Method A 1. 2. 3. Slide the harness protector of ignition coil No. 1 to clear the wires. Attach timing light to the wires as shown in the figure. Check ignition timing. BBIA0089E Method B 1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil. BBIA0004E EC-662 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire. A EC C BBIA0076E D E F G SEF166Y 3. Check ignition timing. H I J BBIA0005E K Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) UBS00274 PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. 4. L Make sure that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery ● Ignition system ● Engine oil and coolant levels ● Fuses ● ECM harness connector ● Vacuum hoses ● Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Fuel pressure ● Engine compression ● Throttle valve ● Evaporative emission system On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. EC-663 M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 5. 6. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE PBIB1054E EC-664 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] INSPECTION PROCEDURE A 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for EC scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections C Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks D Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. F Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature G indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H I SEF976U Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J 5. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. EC-665 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. SEF978U 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. 1. 2. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. EC-666 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is the Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-935 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-930 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. J K L M Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. EC-667 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0005E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is the Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. EC-668 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. EC M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) C OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 16. D BBIA0005E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-131, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F G H Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-935 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-930 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. I J K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . L M >> GO TO 4. EC-669 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 19. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds. 1 time: 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.)>>GO TO 21. NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.)>>GO TO 28. SEF646Y 20. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Without CONSULT-II 1. Stop engine and set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-708, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . 2. Start engine and run it at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds. OK or NG OK >> INDPECTION END NG (MIL does not come on)>>GO TO 21. NG (MIL comes on less than 5 times)>>GO TO 28. 21. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and heated oxygen sensor 1 terminal 1. Refer to EC848, "Wiring Diagram" . Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> 1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1. 2. GO TO 4. 22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 23. EC-670 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING A Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . EC >> GO TO 24. 24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING C Refer to EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is the Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 26. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. D E 25. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. G H I Idle CO: 0.3 − 9.5% and engine runs smoothly. J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. SEF172Y K 26. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 0.3 − 9.5% and engine runs smoothly. 7. After checking CO, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. EC-671 SEF982UA L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 27. RECONNECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. >> GO TO 31. 28. REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 1. 2. Stop engine. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 30. 29. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. 2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds. 1 time: 2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 30. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Without CONSULT-II 1. Set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-708, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)*" . 2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check fuel pressure regulator and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-687, "Fuel Pressure Check" . ● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-807 , EC-815 . ● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-1258 . ● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-827 and EC-838 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 33. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 32. EC-672 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC A After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . EC >> GO TO 4. C 33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . D E >> GO TO 4. F G H I J K L M EC-673 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV) UBS00BJ7 PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery ● Ignition system ● Engine oil and coolant levels ● Fuses ● ECM harness connector ● Vacuum hoses ● Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Fuel pressure ● Engine compression ● Throttle valve ● Evaporative emission system On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Perform inspection after the cooling fans have completely stopped. EC-674 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1206E EC-675 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Head lamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. EC-676 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. EC C D E SEF978U 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. F 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G H SEF058Y I Without CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. K 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. J Stop engine. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. EC-677 M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-935 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer toEC-930 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11. EC-678 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. A Stop engine. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . EC >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING C Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . D >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. E F G 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN H With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. I 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. K 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. L 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. J M Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 16. 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-131, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. EC-679 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-935 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-930 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. 19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. EC-680 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A With GST Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: C Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). D NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. E 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG F OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. 1. 2. 3. 21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-1116, "Wiring Diagram" . H I Bank 1 ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 24 4 76 1 57 5 58 6 77 2 J K L Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM and A/F sensor 1. 2. GO TO 4. 22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 23. EC-681 M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 24. 24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 25. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. SEF172Y 26. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly. 7. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. EC-682 SEF982UA BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. EC >> GO TO 31. 28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 C 1. 2. D Stop engine. Replace A/F sensor 1. With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 30. E 29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With GST 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. EC-683 F G H I J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-687, "Fuel Pressure Check" ● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-807 and EC-815 . ● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-1258 . ● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-827 and EC-838 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 33. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 32. 32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-704, "How to Erase DTC" and AT-427, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . >> GO TO 4. 33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00275 DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS00276 DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. EC-684 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00277 A DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: EC ● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. ● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. ● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) ● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F) ● PNP switch: ON ● Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the headlamp will not be illuminated. ● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) ● Vehicle speed: Stopped ● Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/ T” system indicates less than 0.9V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. C D E F G H OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. I J K L M SEF452Y 6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. SEF454Y EC-685 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] 7. 8. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 700±50 rpm A/T: 700±50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing M/T: 15±5° BTDC A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position) MBIB0238E Without CONSULT-II NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 2. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. SEC897C 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 700±50 rpm A/T: 700±50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing M/T: 15±5° BTDC A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position) 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. EC-686 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. EC 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. C It is useful to perform EC-777, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: D – Engine stalls. – Erroneous idle. Fuel Pressure Check UBS00278 E FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because B15 models do not have fuel return system. G With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. H I J SEF214Y K Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuel pump fuse. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. L M LEC298 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: ● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. ● Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains saleability with O-rings inside. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Prepare fuel hose and fuel hose clamp for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. ● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). ● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. EC-687 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR25DE] Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. ● Use fuel pressure gauge to check fuel pressure. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . ● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. ● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. ● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. ● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. ● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. ● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. ● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). ● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. BBIA0111E ● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. ● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. ● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in). ● 3. 4. Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb.) Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb.) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage. PBIB0669E Start engine and check for fuel leakage. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. ● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. ● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. ● 5. 6. 7. 8. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. ● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging ● Fuel filter for clogging ● Fuel pump ● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. EC-688 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 A UBS00279 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979 C D 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979 Calibration ID Mode 9 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. E ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data SRT code Test value CONSULT-II × × × × × — GST × ×*1 × — × × ECM × ×*2 — — — — G H *1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display. *2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-721 .) Two Trip Detection Logic F I UBS0027A When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. ×: Applicable MIL DTC 1st trip Items 2nd trip —: Not applicable 2nd trip displaying 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying — — — × — × — — × — — × — — × — — — — — × — × × — Blinking Blinking Lighting up Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected × — — Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected — — One trip detection diagnosis (refer to EC-639, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) — Except above — When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. EC-689 K L 1st trip DTC 1st trip displaying Lighting up J M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS0027B EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS DTC*1 *2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page 1000*5 — — — EC-789 U1001 1001*5 — — × EC-789 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — — INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — × EC-792 4 EC-795 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST ECM CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 7 HO2S1 HTR (B1)* P0031 0031 × × ×* HO2S1 HTR (B1)*7 P0032 0032 × × ×*4 EC-795 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × ×*4 EC-801 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × ×*4 EC-801 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — × EC-807 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — — EC-815 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — — EC-815 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — × EC-822 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — × EC-822 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — — EC-827 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — — EC-827 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — — EC-832 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — — EC-832 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — — EC-838 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — × EC-841 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — × EC-844 4 EC-846 (B1)*7 P0132 0132 × × ×* HO2S1 (B1)*7 P0133 0133 × × ×*4 EC-852 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 × × ×*4 EC-862 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — — × EC-869 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × ×*4 EC-875 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — × EC-883 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — × EC-894 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — × EC-904 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — × EC-909 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — × EC-909 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-913 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-913 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — × EC-919 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — × EC-919 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — × EC-919 HO2S1 EC-690 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 *2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page CONSULT-II GST ECM CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — × EC-919 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — × EC-919 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — × EC-926 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — × EC-926 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — × EC-930 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — × EC-935 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × ×*4 EC-941 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × ×*4 EC-949 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × ×*4 EC-955 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — × EC-963 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — × EC-963 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — × EC-969 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — × EC-976 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — × EC-982 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — × ×*4 EC-990 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*3 × ×*4 EC-998 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — × EC-1008 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — × EC-1010 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — × EC-1012 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — × EC-1012 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — — × EC-1014 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — × EC-1016 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — × EC-1018 PW STP SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — × EC-1020 ECM P0605 0605 — — × EC-1025 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — × AT-488 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — × AT-494 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 P0720 0720 — — × AT-500 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — × AT-505 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — — × AT-509 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — — × AT-514 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — — × AT-519 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — — × AT-524 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — × AT-531 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — × AT-536 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — × AT-544 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 — — — AT-550 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 — — — AT-555 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)*8 P1031 1031 — — × EC-1028 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)*8 P1032 1032 — — × EC-1028 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — × EC-1034 EC-691 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 *2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) 1st trip DTC Reference page CONSULT-II GST ECM INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — × EC-1038 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — — or × EC-1043 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-1045 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-1052 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-1052 ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — — EC-1057 HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 × × ×*4 EC-1062 4 EC-1068 HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 × × ×* HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × ×*4 EC-1074 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × ×*4 EC-1082 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — — EC-1090 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-1092 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — × EC-1105 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — × EC-1107 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-1109 A/F SENSOR*8 P1271 1271 — — × EC-1113 SENSOR*8 P1272 1272 — — × EC-1119 A/F SENSOR*8 P1273 1273 — — × EC-1125 A/F SENSOR*8 P1274 1274 — — × EC-1132 A/F SENSOR*8 P1276 1276 — — × EC-1139 A/F SENSOR*8 P1278 1278 × × ×*4 EC-1145 A/F SENSOR*8 P1279 1279 × × ×*4 EC-1152 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — × EC-1159 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — × EC-1167 ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — — EC-1174 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — — EC-1181 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — — EC-1192 TPV SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — — AT-560 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — × EC-1194 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 — — × AT-565 VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 — — × EC-1198 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — × EC-1204 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — — EC-1210 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — — EC-1210 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — — EC-1217 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — — EC-1217 A/F TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — — EC-1224 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — — EC-1230 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *4: This is not displayed with GST. EC-692 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. *7: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *8: A/T models except ULEV. DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC A EC The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. 1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-716, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair. C D E F G H I How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. WITH CONSULT-II WITH GST CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) NO TOOLS The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. EC-693 J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. PBIB0911E FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-758, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 2 3 Items Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. EC-694 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the A vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even EC though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. C D E F G H I J K L M EC-695 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] SRT Item The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Priority* Corresponding DTC No. Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” 1 CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420 EVAP SYSTEM 1 EVAP control system P0442 2 EVAP control system P0456 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring HO2S 2 HO2S HTR 2 P0441 2 P0133 Heated oxygen sensor 1*2 P1143 Heated oxygen sensor 1*2 P1144 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*3 P1278, P1279 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 1* Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0031, P0032 3 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor* P1031, P1032 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038 *1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-II. *2: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *3: A/T models except ULEV. SRT Set Timing SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below. Example Self-diagnosis result All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 Diagnosis ← ON → P0400 OK (1) P0402 P1402 OFF Ignition cycle ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → — (1) OK (2) — (2) OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — P1402 NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL “ON”) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. EC-696 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. A When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate EC “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each C self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: D ● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. ● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. ● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnoE sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. ● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: F SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. SRT Service Procedure G If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. H I J K L M EC-697 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] SEF170Z *1 EC-704 *2 EC-704 *3 EC-704 How to Display SRT Code WITH CONSULT-II Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. WITH GST Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) EC-698 SEF949Z ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each A diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. WITH CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table EC on EC-696, "SRT Item" . WITHOUT CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The C driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. D E F G H I J K L M EC-699 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] Driving Pattern A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS PBIB1053E EC-700 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1680E EC-701 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: ● Sea level ● Flat road ● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) ● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: ● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 93 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). ● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 93 and ground is lower than 1.4V). ● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is less than 4.1V). Pattern 2: ● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. Pattern 3: ● The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times. Pattern 4: ● Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes. ● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. ● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. 1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle. 2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times. – During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. *3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. ● SEF414S Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON. Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. EC-702 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] Model with 5-speed For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For normal acceleration in high altitude areas [over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) 1st to 2nd 24 (15) 24 (15) 24 (15) 2nd to 3rd 40 (25) 29 (18) 40 (25) 3rd to 4th 58 (36) 48 (30) 64 (40) 4th to 5th 64 (40) 62 (39) 72 (45) Gear change EC C D Model with 6-speed For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For normal acceleration in high altitude areas [over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) 1st to 2nd 26 (16) 16 (10) 26 (16) 24 (15) 2nd to 3rd 42 (26) 23 (14) 42 (26) 40 (25) 3rd to 4th 55 (34) 40 (25) 64 (40) 64 (40) 4th to 5th 66 (41) 60 (37) 72 (45) 72 (45) 5th to 6th 72 (45) 72 (45) 80 (50) 80 (50) Gear change A Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted sped limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Model with 5-speed E F G H I J Gear km/h (MPH) 1st 55 (35) 2nd 95 (60) 3rd 135 (85) 4th — 5th — Model with 6-speed K L M Gear km/h (MPH) 1st 45 (25) 2nd 80 (50) 3rd 130 (80) 4th — 5th — 6th — TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (18 test items). EC-703 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen. A/T Models ULEV and M/T Models SRT item CATALYST EVAP SYSTEM Test value (GST display) Test limit Conversion 01H Max. 1/128 02H 81H Min. 1 P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 P0133 09H 04H Max. 16 ms P1143 0AH 84H Min. 10 mV Self-diagnostic test item DTC TID CID P0420 01H P0420 EVAP control system (Small leak) Three way catalyst function Heated oxygen sensor 1 HO2S Heated oxygen sensor 2 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater HO2S HTR Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P1144 0BH 04H Max. 10 mV P0139 19H 86H Min. 10 mV/500 ms P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV P0032 29H 08H Max. 20 mV P0031 2AH 88H Min. 20 mV P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV Test limit Unit A/T Models Except ULEV SRT item CATALYST EVAP SYSTEM Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test value (GST display) TID CID P0420 01H 01H Max. 1/128 P0420 02H 81H Min. 1 EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 P1278 45H 8EH Min. 0.004 P1279 48H 8EH Min. 0.004 P0139 19H 86H Min. 10 mV/500 ms P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV P1032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV P1031 58H 90H Max. 5 mV P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV Three way catalyst function A/F sensor 1 HO2S Heated oxygen sensor 2 A/F sensor 1 heater HO2S HTR Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC WITH CONSULT-II The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). EC-704 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-639, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4. A 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “AT”. EC 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” C twice. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. D 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) E F G H I J K L M WCIA0365E WITH GST The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST. NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-639, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”, Self-diagnosis. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) 3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). NO TOOLS 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. 2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. EC-705 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] 3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-708, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. ● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. – Diagnostic trouble codes – 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes – Freeze frame data – 1st trip freeze frame data – System readiness test (SRT) codes – Test values – Others Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) ● ● ● UBS0027C If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to BL-92, "NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)" . Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system SEF543X and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS0027D DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-26, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-1303, "DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SEF217U EC-706 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions. Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function Mode I Ignition switch in ON position BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. A EC C Engine stopped D Engine running Mode II Ignition switch in ON position MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) ● One trip detection diagnosis E F G This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. H Engine stopped I Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR (A/T models except ULEV and M/T models) This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read. J K When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut MIL Flashing Without DTC If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diagnostic test mode. EC-708, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later.EC708, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ● Diagnostic trouble codes ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values ● Others EC-707 L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. ● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. Fully release the accelerator pedal. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). PBIB0092E How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)* 1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-708, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . 2. Start Engine. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). *: A/T models ULEV and M/T models How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. 3. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-708, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI26, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-1303, "DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING MIL Condition ON When the malfunction is detected. OFF No malfunction. These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are EC-708 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code. A EC C D E F G PBIA3905E A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no malfunction. (See EC-639, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) H I J How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC708, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. ● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses. K L DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR* In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated oxygen sensor 1. *: A/T models ULEV and M/T models MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas ON Lean OFF Rich *Remains ON or OFF Any condition Air-fuel ratio feedback control condition Closed loop system Open loop system *: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop. To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge. Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load. OBD System Operation Chart UBS0027E RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS ● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. EC-709 M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] ● ● ● ● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-689, "Two Trip Detection Logic" . The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip. SUMMARY CHART Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-712 . For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-714 . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. EC-710 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. EC-711 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: ● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F). ● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) ● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of the vehicle conditions described above. ● The C counter will be counted up when the vehicle conditions described above is satisfied without the same malfunction. ● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. ● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. EC-712 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF393S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. 1st trip DTC will be cleared after *6: vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. EC-713 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR25DE] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” AEC574 ● ● ● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART). EC-714 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction PFP:00004 A UBS0027F INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine. EC C D MEF036D It is much more difficult to diagnose a incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. E F G H SEF233G I A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-716 . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on EC-719 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional incidents first. This will help troubleshoot driveability incidents on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. J K L SEF234G M EC-715 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] WORK FLOW Flow Chart PBIB1043E *1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” is other than[0] or [1t], perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 form EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-782, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . *4 If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . *5 EC-700 EC-777 *6 EC-716 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Description for Work Flow STEP DESCRIPTION STEP I Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET, EC-718 . STEP II Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-704 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-728 .) Also check related service bulletins for information. STEP III Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs. The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V. STEP IV STEP V STEP VI STEP VII Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST. During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative. The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection. Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV. If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-723 .) If CONSULT-II is available, perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS – SPECIFICATION VALUE”. (Refer to EC-777 .) (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-728 .) Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”. Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-746 , EC-769 . The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Repair or replace the malfunction parts. If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint. Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer toEC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-429, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .) EC-717 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Description There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples: ● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. ● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. EC-718 SEF907L TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Worksheet Sample A EC C D E F G H I J K L M MTBL0017 EC-719 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS0027G If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. NOTE: If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000 and U1001. Refer to EC-789 . Priority 1 Detected items (DTC) ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line ● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor ● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor ● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor ● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor ● P0128 Thermostat function ● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor ● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor ● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor ● P0605 ECM ● P1229 Sensor power supply ● P1610-P1615 NATS ● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor EC-720 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Priority 2 Detected items (DTC) ● P0031 P0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater*1 ● P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● P0132 P0133 P0134 P1143 P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 ● P0138 P0139 P1146 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring ● P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve ● P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor ● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system ● P0550 power steering pressure sensor ● P0705-P0725, P0740-P0755, P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves ● P1031, P1032 A/F sensor 1 heater*2 ● P1065 ECM power supply ● 3 EC C D E P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve F ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ● P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay ● P1128 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1271, P1272, P1273, P1274, P1276, P1278, P1279 A/F sensor 1*2 ● P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve ● P1805 Brake switch ● P0011 Intake valve timing control ● P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function ● P0300 - P0304 Misfire ● P0420 Three way catalyst function ● P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK, GROSS LEAK) ● P0731 - P0734 A/T function ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1148 Closed loop control ● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) ● A G H I J K P1564 ASCD steering switch ● P1572 ASCD brake switch ● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor L *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *2: A/T models except ULEV. Fail-safe Chart UBS0027H The ECM enters fail-safe mode, if any of the following malfunctions is detected. When the ECM enters the failsafe mode, the MIL illuminates. DTC No. P0102 P0103 Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-721 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] DTC No. P0117 P0118 Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULTII display) Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. ● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal operation. So, the acceleration will be poor. P1121 Electric throttle control actuator (ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open.) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. P1122 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal operation. So, the acceleration will be poor. When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-722 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Basic Inspection UBS0027I 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. A Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. EC Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections C Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks D Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature G indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H I SEF976U J 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. EC-723 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. SEF978U 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. 1. 2. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. EC-724 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Refer to EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is the Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. D E M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-935 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-930 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. J K L 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. EC-725 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0005E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is the Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. EC-726 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. EC M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 16. C D BBIA0005E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-131, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F G H Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-935 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-930 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. I J K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the rarely the case.) Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . L M >> GO TO 4. EC-727 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Symptom Matrix Chart UBS0027J SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 Ignition A/F sensor 1 circuit*1 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 Throttle position sensor circuit 1 1 Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 1 Knock sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 4 4 2 EC-1264 4 EC-687 2 EC-1258 4 4 EC-1305 4 4 4 1 1 1 EC-723 2 EC-1043, EC-1045 , EC-1052 , EC-1057 EC-1317 1 1 1 1 EC-723 2 2 2 2 2 EC-1237 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 Reference page 2 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit *2 BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Fuel pump circuit EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION Fuel EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 2 2 EC-782 EC-807, EC-815 , EC-1113 2 EC-827, EC-838 2 EC-832, EC-913 , EC-1105 , EC-1107 , EC-1109 , EC-1224 EC-1210, EC-1217 , EC-1230 2 2 2 2 EC-846, EC-852 , EC-862 , EC-1062 , EC-1068 3 EC-926 EC-930 EC-728 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] SYMPTOM ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 Power steering oil pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit 3 3 2 3 VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 3 Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 3 3 3 EC-1025, EC-1034 3 EC-1038 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3 Electrical load signal circuit 2 E EC-1020 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1198, EC-1249 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) *1: A/T models except ULEV. *2: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1194 3 3 3 3 4 EC-1269 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1274 3 C D 3 3 2 2 Reference page F EC-1014 1 PNP switch circuit EC EC-935 ECM Air conditioner circuit A 2 G H I J MTC-19 K L M EC-729 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER Fuel ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA FL-7 Fuel tank Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-116, FL-2 5 5 Vapor lock — Valve deposit Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) Air — 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 — Air duct EM-101 Air cleaner EM-101 Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor —electric throttle control actuator) Electric throttle control actuator 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-101 5 5 EM-103 Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket Cranking EM-103 Battery Alternator circuit SC-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SC-22 Starter circuit 3 SC-9 Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-159 4 EC-1194 MT-75 or AT-488 PNP switch Engine Reference page Cylinder head 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Cylinder head gasket 5 4 EM-143 3 Cylinder block Piston Piston ring 4 6 6 6 6 6 Connecting rod Bearing Crankshaft EC-730 6 6 6 EM-159 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] SYMPTOM Valve mechanism HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA EC Reference page D E Timing chain EM-131 Camshaft EM-121 Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-139 5 Intake valve 3 C F G EM-143 Exhaust valve Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket H 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-108, EX-3 5 Three way catalyst Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery 5 Cooling 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 EM-110, LU-19 , LU22 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-16 Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-32 Thermostat 5 CO-30 Water pump Water gallery CO-28 5 5 5 5 5 Cooling fan 5 2 5 Coolant level (low)/Contaminated coolant NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) 5 5 I J K CO-25 CO-37 L CO-26 1 EC-706 or BL-92 1 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. EC-731 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS0027K A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS BBIA0287E EC-732 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0285E EC-733 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] BBIA0128E EC-734 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0288E EC-735 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] PBIB1174E BBIA0289E EC-736 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0302E EC-737 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] BBIA0303E EC-738 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0128E EC-739 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] BBIA0342E EC-740 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A EC C D E F BBIA0296E G H I BBIA0305E J K L M EC-741 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Circuit Diagram UBS0027L A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS BBWA0718E EC-742 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0719E EC-743 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV BBWA0767E EC-744 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0719E EC-745 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS0027M MBIB0045E ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS0027N PREPARATION 1. ECM is located in the right side of the cowl top (behind the strut tower). BBIA0191E 2. 3. 4. Remove ECM harness protector. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown at right. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. ● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. ● Data is for comparison and may not be exact. BBIA0138E ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Engine ground [Engine is running] 2*4 3 R R/W A/F sensor 1 heater Throttle control motor power supply ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] EC-746 Approximately 5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A 0 - 14V EC [Ignition switch: ON] 4 P Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing C PBIB0534E D 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing E F PBIB0533E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) G 7 - 10V 11 G/Y Intake valve timing control solenoid valve H [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed 2,500 rpm I PBIB1790E [Engine is running] 12 P Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel is being turned [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel is not being turned J 0.5 - 4.0V K 0.4 - 0.8V Approximately 3.0V L [Engine is running] 13*1 (14)*2 Y ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Crankshaft position sensor (POS) M PBIB0527E Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0528E EC-747 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] 14*1 (13)* 2 W/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB0525E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0526E 15 W Knock sensor [Engine is running] ● 16*4 4 35* Idle speed OR/L Approximately 3.1V [Engine is running] B/Y A/F sensor 1 56*4 OR 75*4 W/L Approximately 2.5V ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 22 23 41 42 G/B R/B L/B Y/B ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 PBIB0529E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0530E Approximately 7.0V [Engine is running] 24*3 G/W Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Warm-up condition. ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. PBIB0519E [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. EC-748 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● 25 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EC 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under on load C [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped. [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. [Engine is running] ● 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve Idle speed [Engine is running] ● 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor 34 Y/G Intake air temperature sensor D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. G H [Engine is running] 35*3 B/Y Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) I BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J [Engine is running] ● Idle speed K 45 GY/L EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E L Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● M Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) PBIB0520E 47 B Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 48 R/W Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 R/Y Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V EC-749 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W Throttle position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 51 L/R Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0.8 - 1.3V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.5 - 2.1V 0 - 0.1V [Engine is running] 61 62 80 81 L/W BR GY/R PU ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 PBIB0521E 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] ● ● Warm-up condition Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0522E [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 67 68 B/W Sensor's ground G/R Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed EC-750 More than 0.36V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] 70 73 L BR/W Refrigerant pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON (Compressor operates.) [Engine is running] 1.0 - 4.0V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. [Engine is running] 74 R/L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● EC C D 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E F [Engine is running] 78 82 83 B B/Y G Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Engine is running] Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Lighting switch: ON] 84 PU Electrical load signal (Headlamp signal) ● [Lighting switch: ON] ● 85 LG DATA link connector Y CAN communication line LG/B CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. G Approximately 0V Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.3V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Cooling fan relay (High) Cooling fan is not operating [Engine is running] ● Cooling fan is high speed operating 0 - 1.0V 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 R/G Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) L/W Electrical load signal (Rear window defogger signal) 93 ● [Ignition switch: ON] ● 94 L CAN communication line Rear window defogger switch is ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF [Ignition switch: ON] EC-751 H I J Approximately 0V [Engine is running] ● 89 Lighting switch is OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 86 Lighting switch is 2nd position Approximately 0V Approximately 0V Approximately 2.8V K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 96 Y/G Heater fan switch Heater fan switch ON [Engine is running] ● Heater fan switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 97 LG/R Cooling fan relay (Low) Cooling fan is not operating [Ignition switch: ON] ● Cooling fan is operating DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V Approximately 5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch is OFF. [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 W/R ASCD steering switch CRUISE switch is ON. [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch is ON. [Ignition switch: ON] ● COAST/SET switch is ON. [Ignition switch: ON] ● ACCEL/RESUME switch is ON. [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/OR PNP switch P Throttle control motor relay Gear position is P or N [Ignition switch: ON] ● 104 0.28 - 0.48V Except the above gear position More than 2.0V Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 2V Approximately 3V Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V A/T models BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) M/T models Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● 106 107 W OR Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● Engine stopped 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Engine is running] EC-752 More than 4.3V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION A DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 109 P/L B/R ASCD brake switch Ignition switch ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T) [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T) 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● W/G BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 EC Approximately 0V ECM relay (Self shut-off) D E For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.0V F [Ignition switch: OFF] ● C 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) G [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113*1 (114)*2 B/P Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0V H [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 115 116 B B ECM ground 117 L/Y EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 W/L Power supply for ECM (Buck-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● I Engine ground Idle speed J K L : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) *1: Without NVIS (NATS). *2: With NVIS (NATS). *3: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *4: A/T models except ULEV. CONSULT-II Function M UBS0027O FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit. Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.* Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication line. Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. EC-753 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Diagnostic test mode Function Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. *: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ● Diagnostic trouble codes ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values ● Others EC-754 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION A DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS WORK SUPPORT Item DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION ACTIVE TEST 2 DATA* Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Mass air flow sensor × × × × × × × × × × × × × A/F sensor 1*4 × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × Vehicle speed sensor × × × Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × Throttle position sensor × × × Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × EVAP control system pressure sensor × × × Intake air temperature sensor × × × Knock sensor × Refrigerant pressure sensor × × Ignition switch (start signal) × × Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal) × × Air conditioner switch × × Engine coolant temperature sensor INPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS Heated oxygen sensor 1* 3 × × × × Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × × Stop lamp switch × × × Power steering pressure sensor × × × Battery voltage × × Load signal × × Fuel level sensor × × × ASCD steering switch × × × ASCD brake switch × × × EC-755 SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT EC C D × × × × × × × E F G × H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) ACTIVE TEST Injectors × × × Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × A/F sensor 1 heater*4 × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × × EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × × × VIAS control solenoid valve × × × × × × WORK SUPPORT Item 1 DTC* FREEZE FRAME Throttle control motor relay × Throttle control motor × EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve × Air conditioner relay OUTPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS DATA*2 × Fuel pump relay Cooling fan relay Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater*3 × Calculated load value SRT STATUS × DTC WORK SUPPORT × X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-694 . *3: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *4: A/T models except ULEV. CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. LAT136 EC-756 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A EC C SAIA0450E D 5. Touch “ENGINE”. If “ENGINE“ is not indicated, go to EC-1303, "DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . E F G SEF995X 6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. H I J PBIB2308E K WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item WORK ITEM FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE CONDITION ● USAGE FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value EC-757 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] WORK ITEM EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CONDITION USAGE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system ● IGN SW ON ● ENGINE NOT RUNNING ● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). ● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM ● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). ● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” ● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION. NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-639, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data Freeze frame data item* DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] Description ● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to EC-639, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● One mode in the following is displayed. Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment) Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] ● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. FUEL SYS-B1 L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] ● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VEHICL SPEED [km/ h] or [mph] ● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EC-758 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Freeze frame data item* Description A B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] ● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EC *: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. C DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ×: Applicable ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × Indicates the engine speed computed from the signals of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. ● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. × B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] Remarks E ● ENG SPEED [rpm] ● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed drops below the idle rpm. ● If the signal is interrupted while the engine is running, an abnormal value may be indicated. F ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. G H When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. I ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. J ● When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circulated, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. ● ● × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F] × × HO2S1 (B1) [V]*1 × × ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 1 is displayed. A/F SEN1 (B1) [V]*2 × × ● The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed. × ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed. ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal during air-fuel ratio feedback control: RICH... means the mixture became rich, and control is being affected toward a leaner mixture. LEAN... means the mixture became lean, and control is being affected toward a rich mixture. HO2S2 (B1) [V] HO2S1 MNTR (B1) [RICH/ LEAN]*1 × × × ● HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/ LEAN] × D Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. EC-759 K L M ● After turning ON the ignition switch, “RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mixture ratio feedback control begins. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is clamped, the value just before the clamping is displayed continuously. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] × × ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal is displayed. BATTERY VOLT [V] × × ● The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed. THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 [V] × The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. FUEL T/TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] ● × The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed. ● INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] × The intake air temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated. EVAP SYS PRES [V] × ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. ABSOL PRES/SE [V] × ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. FUEL LEVEL SE [V] × ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. START SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the starter signal. ● CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF] × × Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal. ● AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF] × × Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] ● × × Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. ● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering oil pressure switch as determined by the power steering oil pressure signal is indicated. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. ON... Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position. OFF... Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch are OFF. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch. Monitored item [Unit] PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × Description × × LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × × IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] × × HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch signal. BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × EC-760 Remarks ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Monitored item [Unit] IGN TIMING [BTDC] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS × Description Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current airflow divided by peak airflow. C Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor. D ● MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s] ● PURG VOL C/V [%] ● The opening becomes larger as the value increases. ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle. ● The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated. ● The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases. ● The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON... VIAS control solenoid valve is operating. OFF... VIAS control solenoid valve is not operating. INT/V SOL (B1) [%] VIAS S/V [ON/OFF] AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF] × FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF] × ● The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON... Closed OFF... Open VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF] ● Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals). HI... High speed operation LOW... Low speed operation OFF... Stop ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. THRTL RELAY [ON/OFF] COOLING FAN [HI/LOW/OFF] HO2S1 HTR (B1) [ON/ OFF]*1 Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. EC-761 ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. A ● CAL/LD VALUE [%] INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA] Remarks EC E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET... Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT... Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully. ● Distance traveled while MIL is activated. ● Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value increases. ● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is displayed. ● The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CRUISE switch signal. CANCEL SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal. RESUME/ACC SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ACCEL/RES switch signal. SET SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from COAST/SET switch signal. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch switch signal (M/T models). ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT...Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT...Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] IDL A/V LEARN [YET/ CMPLT] TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [mile] A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%]*2 O2SEN HTR DTY [%]*1 AC PRESS SEN [V] VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph] BRAKE SW1 SW [ON/OFF] BRAKE SW2 SW [ON/OFF] VHCL SPD CUT [NON/CUT] LO SPEED CUT [NON/CUT] EC-762 Remarks TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] ECM INPUT SIGNALS Monitored item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS AT OD MONITOR [ON/OFF] AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF] CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF] Description A ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the input signal from the TCM. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM. C ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. D Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. E ● SET LAMP [ON/OFF] Remarks EC Voltage [V] Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%] ● ● DUTY-HI Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width measured by the probe. DUTY-LOW PLS WIDTH-HI ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to be measured. Figures with “#”s are temporary ones. They are the same figures as an actual piece of data which was just previously measured. F G PLS WIDTH-LOW *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *2: A/T models except ULEV. H NOTE: ● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. I DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ECM input signals ENG SPEED [rpm] × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × J Main signals × Description ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS). ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed. ● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. Remarks K ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. L ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. M ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. NOTE: ● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. EC-763 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item TEST ITEM CONDITION ● FUEL INJECTION IGNITION TIMING POWER BALANCE COOLING FAN ● FUEL PUMP RELAY VIAS SOL VALVE PURG VOL CONT/V FUEL/T TEMP SEN VENT CONTROL/V V/T ASSIGN ANGLE Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel injectors ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. Harness and connectors ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Timing light: Set ● Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. ● ● Compression ● A/C switch: OFF ● Fuel injectors ● Shift lever: N ● Power transistor ● Cut off each injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Spark plugs ● Ignition coils ● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors ● Turn the cooling fan “ON” and “OFF” with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan relay ● Cooling fan motor ● Harness and connectors ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Fuel injectors Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel pump relay Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve ● ENG COOLANT TEMP Engine: Return to the original trouble condition JUDGEMENT ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Ignition switch: ON ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. ● Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-II. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Engine runs rough or dies. Cooling fan moves and stops. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. ● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Change intake valve timing using CONSULT-II. Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode For details, refer to EC-694, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . EC-764 ● ● Harness and connectors Intake valve timing control solenoid valve TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] SRT Work Support Mode This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. A DTC Work Support Mode Test mode Test item Condition PURGE FLOW P0441 EVAP SYSTEM HO2S1*2 EVAP SML LEAK H02S2 EC-955 EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456*1 EC-998 PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-1159 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-852 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-862 HO2S1 (B1) P1143 C D EC-1062 Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC. A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273 A/F EC EC-949 P0442/P1442*1 HO2S1 (B1) P1144 SEN1*3 Reference page EC-1068 EC-1125 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274 EC-1132 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 EC-1139 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278 EC-1145 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279 EC-1152 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-875 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-1074 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-1082 *1: DTC P1442 and P14546 do not apply to B15 models but appears in DTC Work Support mode screens. *2: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *3: A/T models except ULEV. E F G H I J K L M EC-765 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) Description CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): ● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data... xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed. SEF705Y The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL. 2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): ● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. SEF707X Operation 1. 2. “AUTO TRIG” ● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected. ● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to Incident Simulation Tests in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .) “MANU TRIG” ● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. EC-766 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H PBIB0197E I Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS0027P DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual. J K L SEF139P FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function MODE 1 READINESS TESTS This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-694, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . MODE 3 DTCs This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. EC-767 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Diagnostic test mode Function This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1) ● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3) ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1) ● Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2) ● Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1) ● Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7) MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed. ● EVAP canister vent control valve open ● Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed In the following conditions, this mode cannot function. MODE 8 MODE 9 — (CALIBRATION ID) ● Low ambient temperature ● Low battery voltage ● Engine running ● Ignition switch OFF ● Low fuel temperature ● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover. Turn ignition switch ON. LAT136 4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) SEF398S EC-768 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] 5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. A EC C SEF416S D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0027Q Remarks: ● Specification data are reference values. ● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ENG SPEED MAS A/F SE-B1 B/FUEL SCHDL ● Tachometer: Connect ● Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer indication. ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. Idle Approx. 0.8 - 1.3V 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.0V Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load A/F ALPHA-B1 ● Engine: After warming up COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up 54% - 155% More than 70°C (158°F) ● Engine: After warming up A/F SEN1 (B1)* 3 ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. ● Engine: After warming up ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH ● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V (B1)* HO2S2 MNTR (B1) VEH SPEED SE BATTERY VOLT I J Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm HO2S1 (B1)*2 2 G H Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm HO2S1 MNTR F Shift lever: N ● HO2S2 (B1) E EC-769 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] MONITOR ITEM CONDITION Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.41 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.2V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Shift lever: D (A/T) 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Shift lever: D (A/T) 1ST (M/T) ● THRTL SEN2*1 ● EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2*1 THRTL SEN1 CLSD THL POS AIR COND SIG P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL LOAD SIGNAL IGNITION SW HEATER FAN SW BRAKE SW INJ PULSE-B1 IGN TIMING ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON 1.8 - 4.8V Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load OFF → ON → OFF Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Shift lever: P or N (A/T model) Neutral (M/T model) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel is turned. ON Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ● ● SPECIFICATION ON → OFF → ON Heater fan is operating. ON Heater fan is not operating OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec Idle 10° - 20° BTDC 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC Idle 10% - 35% 2,500 rpm 10% - 35% Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s EC-770 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V SOL (B1) AIR COND RLY VIAS S/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm 20 - 30% Idle −5° - 5°CA 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 60% Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON Idle OFF More than 5,000 rpm ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions OFF VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HIGH ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON A/F S1 HTR (B1)*3 ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% ● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C (176°F) Approx. 50% ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Engine: Idle ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer indication. O2SEN HTR DTY*2 AC PRESS SEN VEH SPEED SE G H I Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less Engine: After warming up HO2S2 HTR (B1) F ON ● HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 D E For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON COOLING FAN EC C ● FUEL PUMP RLY A J K ON OFF L ON M OFF Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON. 0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile) Approx. 0V 1.0 - 4.0V EC-771 Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON CANCEL SW ● RESUME/ACC SW ● SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION ASCD: Operating The preset vehicle speed is displayed. CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) ● BRAKE SW2 (STOP lamp switch) ● CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch is pressed at first time → second time ON → OFF ● CRUISE switch: ON SET switch pressed ON ● When vehicle is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD control is canceled. OFF SET LAMP Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON *1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal. *2: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *3: A/T models except ULEV. Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS0027R The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position (A/T models) or with shift lever in 1st position (M/T models). The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”. PBIB0198E ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1(A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. EC-772 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. A EC C D E F SEF241Y G H I J K L M EC-773 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] PBIB0668E EC-774 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1(A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV) A Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. EC Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. C D E F G H SEF241Y I J K L M EC-775 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR25DE] PBIB1594E EC-776 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR25DE] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description PFP:00031 A UBS0027S The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: ● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D rection) ● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) E ● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition ● UBS0027T Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) F 2 ● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) ● Transmission: Warmed-up*1 ● ● G Electrical load: Not applied*2 ● Engine speed: Idle *1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. *2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead. ● Inspection Procedure H I J UBS0027U NOTE: Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform EC-723, "Basic Inspection" . 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SEB1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to EC-778, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF601Z EC-777 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS0027V SEF613ZD EC-778 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF768Z EC-779 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR25DE] SEF615ZA EC-780 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT [QR25DE] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description PFP:00006 A UBS0027W Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the C specific malfunctioning area. Common I/I Report Situations STEP in Work Flow Situation II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t]. III The symptom described by the customer does not recur. IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. Diagnostic Procedure D E UBS0027X 1. INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer toEC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 2. F G H 2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , Incident Simulation Tests. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT I J K Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , Incident Simulation Tests. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. L 4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS M Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector. EC-781 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QR25DE] POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM Wiring Diagram PFP:24110 UBS0027Y BBWA0720E EC-782 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 EC WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 109 B/R Ignition switch Idle speed W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) DATA (DC Voltage) C Engine ground [Ignition switch: OFF] 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D 0 - 1.0V E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F Engine ground G [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 ● For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Engine is running] 115 116 B B ECM ground 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 W/L Power supply for ECM (Buck-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure H UBS0027Z 1. INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 2. I J K 2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A L Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0015E EC-783 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QR25DE] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-784 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QR25DE] 6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. A Disconnect ECM relay. EC C D BBIA0100E 2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. G SEF859T H 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● 10A fuse ● 15A fuse ● Fuse and fusible link box connectors E22, E24 ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery I J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-1237, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-785 L M POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QR25DE] 9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Stop engine. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 10. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1630E 10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV 1. Disconnect ECM relay. BBIA0100E 2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. SEF860T 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connectors E22, E24 ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and harness connector F48 ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-786 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QR25DE] 12. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ECM relay terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 13. CHECK ECM RELAY E Refer to EC-788, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace ECM relay. F 14. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G H Continuity should exist. I 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. J 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the following. ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-787 L M POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00280 ECM RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals1 and 2 Yes OFF No 3. If NG, replace ECM relay. PBIB0077E EC-788 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QR25DE] DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 A UBS00AOI CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name U1000*1 1000*1 U1001*2 1001*2 UBS00AOJ DTC detecting condition ● CAN communication line ● ECM can not communicate to other control units. ECM can not communicate for more than the specified time. D Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted). F *1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. E UBS00AOK Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-791, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J K L M EC-789 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AOL BBWA0274E EC-790 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AOM A Go to LAN-4, "CAN Communication Unit" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-791 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QR25DE] DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL Description PFP:23796 UBS00AON SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and piston position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Vehicle speed signal* Vehicle speed Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. MBIB0121E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AOO Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V SOL (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle −5° - 5°CA 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 60% EC-792 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QR25DE] On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AOP A DTC No. P0011 0011 Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control performance Detecting condition There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree. Possible cause ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft EC C FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Detected items Intake valve timing control D Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AOQ CAUTION: Always drive at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC1038, "DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" . ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at idle. E F G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select ″DATA MONITOR″ mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. VHCL SPEED SE 100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 2,000 rpm Selector lever A/T models: D position M/T models: 5th position 4. 5. 6. J K PBIB0164E Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-794, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,800 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) Selector lever 1st or 2nd position Driving location uphill Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.) 7. I If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-794, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-793 L M DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AOR 1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EC-934, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). 2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EC-940, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). 3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) Check the following. Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. ● PBIB0565E 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram refer to EC-931, "Wiring Diagram" for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-936, "Wiring Diagram" for CMP sensor (PHASE). >> INSPECTION END EC-794 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER [QR25DE] DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER Description PFP:22690 A UBS00AOS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature ECM function Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Actuator EC Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine is started. OPERATION rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater Above 3,600 OFF Below 3,600 ON F CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AOT Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM G CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Engine: After warming up ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF ● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C (176°F) Approx. 50% O2SEN HTR DTY ● ON P0031 0031 P0032 0032 H I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control circuit low Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control circuit high UBS00AOU DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.) The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.) DTC Confirmation Procedure K ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater UBS00AOV WITH CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC-795 J Possible cause NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. 1. 2. D E Engine speed HO2S1 HTR (B1) C L M DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-798, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ● Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. Select MODE 3 with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-798, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. EC-796 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AOW A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0721E EC-797 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 7.0V [Engine is running] 24 G/W Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Warm-up condition. ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. PBIB0519E [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AOX 1. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0284E 4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0112E EC-798 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER [QR25DE] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. EC C D 3. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 24 and HO2S1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER I Refer to EC-800, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. J 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M EC-799 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00AOY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F) 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. SEF249Y Removal and Installation UBS00AOZ HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-108, "Removal and Installation" . EC-800 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR25DE] DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00AP0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater C Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air D The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION E Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Above 3,600 OFF F Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ON G CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AP1 H Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 HTR (B1) CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm I ON J OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0037 0037 P0038 0038 UBS00AP2 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high Possible cause DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AP3 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC-801 K L M DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR25DE] 4. 5. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-804, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ● Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select MODE 3 with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-804, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. EC-802 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AP4 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0722E EC-803 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● 25 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under on load [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AP5 1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0175E 4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1769E EC-804 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR25DE] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC C D 3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 25 and HO2S2 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER I Refer to EC-806, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. J 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M EC-805 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00AP6 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F) 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. PBIB0970E Removal and Installation UBS00AP7 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . EC-806 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 A UBS00AP8 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. EC C D PBIB1604E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AP9 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle Approx. 0.8 - 1.3V 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.0V Idle 10% - 35% 2,500 rpm 10% - 35% Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s G H I On Board Diagnosis Logic J UBS00APA K This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition A) P0101 0101 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem B) F A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. DTC Confirmation Procedure M UBS00APB Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed. EC-807 L DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to EC-811, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always driver vehicle at a safe speed. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to EC-811, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to EC-811, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. SEF243Y EC-808 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] 7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm THRTL SEN 1 More than 3.0V THRTL SEN 2 More than 3.0V Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. A EC C PBIB0199E 8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-811, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check D UBS00APC PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E F Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select MODE 1 with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with MODE 1. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. If NG, go to EC-811, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I SEF534P J K L M EC-809 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00APD BBWA0723E EC-810 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 L/R Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C 0.8 - 1.3V D [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.5 - 2.1V E [Engine is running] 67 B/W Mass air flow sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G A Power supply for ECM 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V F 0 - 1.0V G BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) I Diagnostic Procedure UBS00APE 1. INSPECTION START J Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? A or B A >> GO TO 3. B >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK L Check the following for connections. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. EC-811 M DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 4. BBIA0008E 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0130E 3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1168E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. EC-812 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42 (A/T models). C Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. D E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM (A/T models) F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR L Refer to EC-814, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. M 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-813 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00APF MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Conditions Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Voltage V Less than 1.0 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.8 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.5 - 2.1 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* SEF100V 0.8- 1.3 to Approx. 2.2 *:Make sure liner voltage rises as engine speed increases to about 4,000 rpm. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Turn ignition switch OFF. ● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. ● Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. ● 5. 6. Removal and Installation UBS00BJV MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-101, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . EC-814 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 A UBS00APG The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. EC C D PBIB1604E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00APH Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load ● CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle Approx. 0.8 - 1.3V 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.0V Idle 10% - 35% 2,500 rpm 10% - 35% Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s G H I On Board Diagnosis Logic J UBS00API K These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0102 0102 P0103 0103 Trouble diagnosis name Mass air flow sensor circuit low input Mass air flow sensor circuit high input F DTC detecting condition Possible cause L An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor M FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00APJ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC-815 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-825, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-825, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to next step. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is directed, go to EC-825, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-816 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00APK A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0723E EC-817 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 L/R Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0.8 - 1.3V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.5 - 2.1V [Engine is running] 67 B/W Mass air flow sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00APL 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103 P0102 >> GO TO 2. P0103 >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connections. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. EC-818 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. EC >> GO TO 4. C D BBIA0008E E 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. F G H BBIA0130E 3. I Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. J Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. K L PBIB1168E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair harness or connectors. EC-819 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42 (A/T models). Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Joint connector-1 ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM (A/T models) >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR POEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-826, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-820 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00APM A MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Conditions Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped.) Voltage V C Less than 1.0 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.8 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.5 - 2.1 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* EC D SEF100V E 0.8 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.2 *: Make sure liner voltage rises as engine speed increases to about 4,000 rpm. 4. 5. 6. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. ● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. ● Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation F G UBS00BJ8 H MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-101, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . I J K L M EC-821 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00APN The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. PBIB1604E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00APO DTC detecting condition P0112 0112 Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0113 0113 Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air temperature sensor UBS00APP NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-825, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y EC-822 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-823 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00APQ BBWA0724E EC-824 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00APR 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0130E 4. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H PBIB1169E 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42 (A/T models). Refer to wiring diagram. I J K Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between TCM and intake air temperature sensor (A/T models) ● Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-826, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor. EC-825 L M DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00APS INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). PBIB1604E SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00BJW MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-101, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . EC-826 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00APT The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D SEF594K E Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 F G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. H SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00APU These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name I J DTC Detecting Condition P0117 0117 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0118 0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause K ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor L M EC-827 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while the engine is running. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00APV NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-830, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-828 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00APW A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0725E EC-829 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00APX 1. CHECK ETC SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0010E 4. Check voltage between ECT terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. PBIB0080E 2. CHECK ETC SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORRT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between ECT terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42 (A/T models). Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between TCM and engine coolant temperature sensor (A/T models) ● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-831, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. EC-830 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00APY ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. C Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. D E F PBIB0081E G Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 Resistance kΩ H I *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Removal and Installation SEF012P J UBS00APZ ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-30, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . K L M EC-831 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00AQ0 Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AQ1 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever D: (A/T models) 1st: (M/T models) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AQ2 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0122 0122 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. P0123 0123 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-832 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AQ3 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go toEC-835, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M EC-833 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AQ4 BBWA0741E EC-834 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR B A ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 D More than 0.36V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V F [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 2 H Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure I More than 0.36V J UBS00AQ5 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. L >> GO TO 2. M BBIA0008E EC-835 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0103E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0082E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-837, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-836 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. A Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC >> INSPECTION END C 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END E Component Inspection UBS00AQ6 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Remove and Installation F G H I J PBIB1060E K UBS00AQ7 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR L Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . M EC-837 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00AQ8 NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117, P0118, EC-827 . The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as body ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AQ9 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0125 0125 Trouble diagnosis name Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control DTC detecting condition ● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. EC-838 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Thermostat DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AQA A CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 15°C (59°F). If it is above 15°C (59°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 15°C (59°F), go to following step. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 15°C (59°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. If DTC is detected, go to EC-839, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF174Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AQB 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR H Refer to EC-839, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. I J 2. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION When the engine is cooled [lower than 75°C (167°F)], grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-30, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . K L 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AQC ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB0081E EC-839 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QR25DE] Temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00AQD ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-30, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . EC-840 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00AQE The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. EC C D PBIB1604E E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance F kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0127 0127 Trouble diagnosis name Intake air temperature too high UBS00AQF DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure J Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Intake air temperature sensor K UBS00AQG NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. EC-841 L M DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] WITH CONSULT-II 1. a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. ● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-842, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF189Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AQH 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-843, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor. 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-842 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00AQI A INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. EC C D PBIB1604E E 2. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 F If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). G SEF012P Removal and Installation H UBS00BJX MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I Refer to EM-101, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . J K L M EC-843 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [QR25DE] DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:21200 UBS00AQJ Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open. DTC No. P0128 0128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. Thermostat function DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Thermostat ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat ● Engine coolant temperature sensor UBS00AQK NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. ● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 68°C (154°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-30, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 68°C (154°F). If it is below 68°C (154°F), go to following step. If it is above 68°C (154°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-844, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AQL 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-845, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. EC-844 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00AQM A ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance as shown in the figure. EC C D SEF152P E Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 F G If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. H SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00AQN ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I Refer to CO-30, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . J K L M EC-845 DTC P0132 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC P0132 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 UBS00BIO The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BIP Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BIQ To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxygen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high. SEF301UA DTC No. P0132 0132 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-846 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 DTC P0132 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00BIR NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-849, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F SEF174Y G WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ● Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. Select MODE 3 with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-849, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. H I J K L M EC-847 DTC P0132 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BIS BBWA0726E EC-848 DTC P0132 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION A EC DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 35 78 B/Y B Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. [Engine is running] ● Idle speed 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) C Approximately 0V D Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BIT 1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) G >> GO TO 2. H BBIA0290E I 2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. J Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. L 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35, HO2S1 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-849 BBIA0284E M DTC P0132 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-850, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BIU HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. SEF646Y 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. SEF217YA EC-850 DTC P0132 HO2S1 [QR25DE] A EC C SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least 1 time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least 1 time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V MBIB0018E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00BIV D E F G H I J K L HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . M EC-851 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC P0133 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 UBS00BIW The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00BIX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00BIY To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxygen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. SEF010V EC-852 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC No. P0133 0133 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition The response of the voltage signal from the sensor takes more than the specified time. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause A ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV valve ● Mass air flow sensor EC C D UBS00BIZ CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. E F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. H I J K L SEF338Z 6. M When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 20 to 50 seconds.) ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,100 rpm (A/T models) 1,600 - 3,000 rpm (M/T models) Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 3.5 - 13.0 msec (A/T models) 4.0 - 12.0 msec (M/T models) Selector lever Suitable position SEF339Z If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. EC-853 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-856, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF658Y Overall Function Check UBS00BJ0 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. 1 time 2 times 4. : 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V : 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V If NG, go to EC-856, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0018E EC-854 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00BJ1 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0726E EC-855 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 35 78 B/Y B Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. [Engine is running] ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) Approximately 0V UBS00BJ2 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E 2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. BBIA0290E EC-856 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 3. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold). EC C D SEC502D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. E F 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. G H I J K L M EC-857 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or DTC P0172 (Refer to EC-883 or EC-894 ). No >> GO TO 6. BBIA0130E 6. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors. EC-858 BBIA0284E DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 7. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 8. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-800, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. F G 9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR H Refer to EC-814, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. I 10. CHECK PCV VALVE J Refer to EC-1317, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace PCV valve. K 11. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 L Refer to EC-859, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. M 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00BJ3 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. EC-859 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. SEF646Y 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. SEF217YA SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least 1 time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least 1 time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time 2 times : 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V : 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V →0.6 - 1.0V MBIB0018E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. EC-860 DTC P0133 HO2S1 [QR25DE] ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation A UBS00BJ4 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-861 DTC P0134 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC P0134 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 UBS00AQO The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AQP Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AQQ Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that this time is not inordinately long. SEF237U DTC No. P0134 0134 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V. EC-862 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 DTC P0134 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AQR A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. C WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0134” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4. D E F G PBIB0544E 5. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.9 - 13.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position 6. H When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-866, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J PBIB0545E K L M SEC750C EC-863 DTC P0134 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Overall Function Check UBS00AQS Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V. 4. If NG, go to EC-866, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0018E EC-864 DTC P0134 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AQT A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0726E EC-865 DTC P0134 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 35 78 B/Y B Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. [Engine is running] ● Idle speed 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change) Approximately 0V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AQU 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E 2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35, HO2S1 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-866 BBIA0284E DTC P0134 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 A Refer to EC-867, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. EC 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AQV HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. F G H I SEF646Y J 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. K L M SEF217YA SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. EC-867 DTC P0134 HO2S1 [QR25DE] ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least 1 time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least 1 time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V MBIB0018E CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00AQW HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-868 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC P0138 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00AQX The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV) are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AQY Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load F SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly G LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AQZ The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of rear heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. H I J K SEF305UA L DTC No. P0138 0138 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-869 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 M DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AR0 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ● Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Select “Mode 3” with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. EC-870 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AR1 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0727E EC-871 DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00AR2 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E 2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-872 BBIA0175E DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER Check connectors for water. F Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. G 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 H Refer to EC-850, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. I 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AR3 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1783E EC-873 L M DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB0817E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed at between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models). The voltage should be below 0.50V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00AR4 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-874 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC P0139 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00AR5 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/ T models except ULEV) are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AR6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load F SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly G LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AR7 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. H I J K SEF302U L DTC No. P0139 0139 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time. EC-875 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks M DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AR8 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II For the best results, perform ″DTC WORK SUPPORT″ at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F) 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLANT TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up and go to next step when “COOLANT TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPSEF189Y PORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. PBIB0115E 9. a. b. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-879 . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). Return to step 1. Overall Function Check UBS00AR9 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. EC-876 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models). A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-879, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C PBIB1197E D E F G H I J K L M EC-877 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ARA BBWA0727E EC-878 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● C D 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V F UBS00ARB 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. I J BBIA0008E K L M EC-879 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer toEC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-883 or EC-894 . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. BBIA0130E 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-880 BBIA0175E DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-881, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. F G 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END I Component Inspection UBS00ARC HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. J Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. K L M PBIB1783E EC-881 DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB0817E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position. The voltage should be below 0.50V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00ARD HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-882 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 A UBS00ARE With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T EC models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*2 Fuel injection control Fuel injectors E *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *2: A/T models except ULEV. DTC No. P0171 0171 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too lean DTC detecting condition F Possible Cause ● Intake air leaks ● Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*2 ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Injectors ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Mass air flow sensor ● Incorrect PCV hose connection G H I J *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models *2: A/T models except ULEV DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ARF NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF215Z EC-883 M DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-887, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-887, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check for exhaust and intake air leak visually. SEF058Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 6. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 7. Start engine again and let it idle at least 10 minutes. BBIA0130E 8. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC887, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-887, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. EC-884 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ARG A A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0728E EC-885 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV BBWA0760E EC-886 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ARH A A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. EC Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). C D E SEC502D F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. G 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H I 3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K L Continuity should exist. 5. M Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-887 BBIA0284E DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "Fuel Pressure Check" . At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the instruction of FUEL PRESSURE CHECK. 5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Install all removed parts. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-807, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . EC-888 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. F G Clicking noise should be heard. H I PBIB1725E J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1258, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . K 7. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. L Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect injector harness connectors. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-116, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors. M Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E EC-889 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV 1. CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-890 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 3. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 EC C D BBIA0304E E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. H I 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. F Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "Fuel Pressure Check" . At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) J K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the instruction of FUEL PRESSURE CHECK. L M EC-891 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling: at 2,500 rpm: 1. 2. 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec With GST Install all removed parts. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. at idling: at 2,500 rpm: 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-807 . 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. PBIB1725E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1258, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . EC-892 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 7. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-116, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors. EC C D Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector. E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. F G PBIB1726E 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END I J K L M EC-893 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 UBS00ARI With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor Input Signal to ECM Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1* ECM function Fuel injection control Actuator Fuel injectors *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models *2: A/T models except ULEV DTC No. P0172 0172 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too rich DTC detecting condition ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) Possible Cause ● Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*2 ● Injectors ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Mass air flow sensor *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *2: A/T models except ULEV. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ARJ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF215Z EC-894 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-898, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-898, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. A EC C SEF058Y D WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 6. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 7. Start engine again and let it idle at least 10 minutes. BBIA0130E 8. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC898, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-898, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. E F G H I J K L M EC-895 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ARK A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS BBWA0728E EC-896 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0760E EC-897 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ARL A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). SEC502D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-898 BBIA0284E DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. A Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "Fuel Pressure Check" . EC At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the instruction of FUEL PRESSURE CHECK. C 5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Install all removed parts. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm F With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10 g·m/sec: E at idling at 2,500 rpm G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-807, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . I J K L M EC-899 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. PBIB0133E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. PBIB1725E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1258, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . 7. CHECK INJECTOR Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-116, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Disconnect injector harness connectors. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. 6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. 1. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-900 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV A 1. CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D E PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G 1. 2. H 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 I J BBIA0304E Continuity should exist. 4. K L Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-901 M DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 3. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-687 . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-1264 .) OK or NG OK >> Replace fuel pressure regulator. NG >> Repair or replace. 5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling at 2,500 rpm : 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec : 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. at idling at 2,500 rpm : 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec : 5.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-807 . EC-902 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR25DE] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. F G H I PBIB1725E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1258, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . J K 7. CHECK INJECTOR Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-116, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. 6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. 1. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-903 L M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00ARM The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. BBIA0132E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0181 0181 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance UBS00ARN DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Fuel tank temperature sensor UBS00ARO NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. If the result is NG, go to EC-907, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. If the “COOLANT TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If the “COOLANT TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal is less than 60°C (140°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-907, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-904 SEF475Y DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-905 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ARP BBWA0285E EC-906 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ARQ 1. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0132E 4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0932E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” I J K >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to, EC-908, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. EC-907 L M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ARR FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00ARS FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-908 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00ART The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D BBIA0132E E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 F G *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00ARU DTC detecting condition J Possible cause P0182 0182 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0183 0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Fuel tank temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ARV NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-911, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-909 K L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ARW BBWA0285E EC-910 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ARX 1. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0132E 4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H PBIB0932E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” I J K >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to, EC-912, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. EC-911 L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ARY FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 If NG, replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00ARZ FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-912 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00AS0 Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AS1 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T) 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2*1 F SPECIFICATION G H *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AS2 I These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0222 0222 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P0223 0223 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. J K L Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-913 M DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AS3 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-916, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-914 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AS4 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0868E EC-915 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR B ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V UBS00AS5 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-916 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0103E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-918, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-917 M DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AS6 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation PBIB1060E UBS00AS7 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC-918 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR25DE] DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE PFP:00020 On Board Diagnosis Logic A UBS00AS8 When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Engine speed ECM function C On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0300 0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. P0301 0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires. P0302 0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. P0303 0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. ● Improper spark plug ● Insufficient compression F G H ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● The injector circuit is open or shorted ● Injectors ● Intake air leak ● The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted ● Lack of fuel ● Drive plate ● Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*2 ● Incorrect PCV hose connection I J K L M UBS00BJO CAUTION: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC-919 E Possible cause *1: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *2: A/T models except ULEV. DTC Confirmation Procedure D DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR25DE] WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-920, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the feaze frame data ± 10 km/h (5 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. Engine speed Time Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ASA 1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (manifold) and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace it. EC-920 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR25DE] 3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST A With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? EC C D PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? E F G H BBIA0024E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 7. I J 4. CHECK INJECTOR K Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-578 . L M PBIB1725E EC-921 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR25DE] 5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK 1. Remove ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 2. Remove spark plug from ignition coil assembly. 3. Connect a known-good spark plug to ignition coil. 4. Place and of spark plug against a suitable ground crank engine. 5. Check for spark. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1237, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . SEF575Q 6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS Check the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace spark plug (s) with standard type one (s). For spark plug type ignition coil. Refer to MA-28, "Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum - Tipped Type)" . SEF156I 7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-143, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" . Standard: 1,190 kPa (12,1 kg/cm2 , 172 psi)/300 rpm Minimum: 990 kPa (10,1 kg/cm2 , 144 psi)/300 rpm Difference between each cylinder: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. EC-922 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR25DE] 8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. A Install all removed parts. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. EC At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. D BBIA0137E E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-1264, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to FL-3 .) ● Fuel lines (Refer to MA-25, "Checking Fuel Lines" .) ● Fuel filter for clogging F G H >> Repair or replace. 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING I Perform EC-723, "Basic Inspection" . Items Target idle speed Ignition timing Specifications A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 700 ± 50 rpm A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models). >> GO TO 12 (A/T models except ULEV). NG >> Adjust ignition timing. 11. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-850, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. EC-923 J K L M DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR25DE] 12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0304E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-1033, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 14. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. 1.4 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. CHECK CONNECTORS Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-807, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" , EC-815, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" and EC-361, "DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or replace it. EC-924 DTC P0300 - P0304 NO. 4 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR25DE] 16. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART A Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-728, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Repair or replace. EC 17. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC C Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . D >> GO TO 18. E 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M EC-925 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR25DE] DTC P0327, P0328 KS Component Description PFP:22060 UBS00ASB The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. BBIA0291E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ASC The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition P0327 0327 Knock sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0328 0328 Knock sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Knock sensor DTC No. Possible Cause DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ASD NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-928, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-926 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ASE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0736E EC-927 DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 15 WIRE COLOR W ITEM Knock sensor CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ASF 1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EC-929, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor. EC-928 BBIA0291E DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR25DE] 4. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS A Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. EC C D BBIA0008E E >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ASG H KNOCK SENSOR Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. I Resistance: 530 - 590 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] J CAUTION: Discard any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. K SEF227W Removal and Installation UBS00ASH L KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-159, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . M EC-929 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR25DE] DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description PFP:23731 UBS00ASI The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. PBIB0562E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ASJ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENG SPEED CONDITION ● Tachometer: Connect ● Run engine and compare with the tachometer indication. SPECIFICATION Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0335 0335 Trouble diagnosis name Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit UBS00ASK DTC detecting condition ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking. ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running. ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Signal plate UBS00ASL NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10,5V with ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-932, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-930 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ASM A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0737E EC-931 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] 13*1 (14)* 2 Y ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB0527E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0528E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) *1: Without NVIS (NATS) *2: With NVIS (NATS) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ASN 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-932 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR25DE] 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. A Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0015E 3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Battery voltage F 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0784E H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS) I J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to the wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. K L M 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connector M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and engine ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-933 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR25DE] 6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 or 14 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EC-934, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ASO CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 3 (–) 1 (+) - 2 (–) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (–) If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). PBIB0564E Removal and Installation UBS00ASP CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EM-159, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . EC-934 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR25DE] DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description PFP:23731 A UBS00ASQ The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. EC C D PBIB0562E E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0340 0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit UBS00ASR The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. F Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during engine running. ● Camshaft (Intake) ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .) ● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .) ● Dead (Weak) battery DTC Confirmation Procedure G H UBS00ASS NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10,5V with ignition switch ON. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-937, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-937, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-935 L M SEF058Y DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AST BBWA0738E EC-936 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 14*1 (13)*2 W/R PBIB0525E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB0526E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) *1: Without NVIS (NATS) *2: With NVIS (NATS) Diagnostic Procedure I UBS00ASU 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM J Turn ignition switch to START position. Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) K L 2. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. M >> GO TO 3. BBIA0008E EC-937 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR25DE] 3. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0010E 3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0784E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM relay ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between (CMP) sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to the wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connector M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and engine ground ● >> Repair open circuit short to power in harness or connectors. EC-938 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR25DE] 7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 14 or 13. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) E Refer to EC-940, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). F 9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) G Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. H I J PBIB0565E 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M EC-939 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00ASV CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 3 (-) 1 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation UBS00ASW CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EM-121, "CAMSHAFT" . EC-940 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:20905 A UBS00ASX A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensor 1 and 2. A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensor 1 and 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. EC C D SEF484YF DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0420 0420 Catalyst system efficiency below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly. Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. Possible cause ● Three way catalyst (manifold) ● Exhaust tube ● Intake air leaks ● Fuel injectors ● Fuel injector leaks ● Spark plug ● Improper ignition timing E F G H A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV I The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. J K L SEF484YB DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0420 0420 Catalyst system efficiency below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly. Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. DTC Confirmation Procedure M Possible cause ● Three way catalyst (manifold) ● Exhaust tube ● Intake air leaks ● Fuel injectors ● Fuel injector leaks ● Spark plug ● Improper ignition timing UBS00BJL A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: EC-941 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] ● ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. SEF189Y 6. 7. 8. 9. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Open engine hood. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 7 Wait 5 seconds at idle. SEF940Z 10. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1. SEF941Z 11. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 12. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-944, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF535Z A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. EC-942 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “CMPLT” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, GO TO STEP 12. 10. Wait 5 seconds at idle. A EC C SEF189Y D E F PBIB1784E 11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “IMCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (it will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest step 1. G H I J PBIB1785E K 12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-944, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SEF535Z Overall Function Check UBS00BJM Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS With GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. EC-943 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] 4. 5. 6. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground, and ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. MBIB0018E 7. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low) between ECM terminal 74 and engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminal 35 and engine ground. Switching frequency ratio = A/B A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency This ratio should be less than 0.75. If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst does not operate properly. Go to EC-944, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If the voltage at terminal 35 does not switch periodically more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 7, perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133” first. (See EC-856 .) PBIB1197E AT MODELS EXCEPT ULEV With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Open engine hood. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 74 and ground. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds. If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to EC-944, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V PBIB1197E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BJN A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-944 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] 2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D SEC502D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. E F 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK G Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. H 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING I Check the following items. Refer to EC-723, "Basic Inspection" . Items Target idle speed Ignition timing Specifications A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 700 ± 50 rpm A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC J K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the Basic Inspection. L 5. CHECK INJECTORS 1. 2. 3. M Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-1259 . Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform EC-1260, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0030E EC-945 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] 6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. 4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. 5. Check for spark. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-1237, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . SEF575Q 7. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-116, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold). EC-946 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV A 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). D E F G PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. K 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check for ignition timing. Refer to EC-723, "Basic Inspection" . Items J L Specifications Target idle speed 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the Basic Inspection. EC-947 M DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR25DE] 5. CHECK INJECTORS 1. 2. 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-1259 . Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform Diagnostic Procedure INJECTOR, EC-1260 . MBIB0030E 6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. 4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. 5. Check for spark. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. SEF575Q 7. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-116, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Disconnect ignition coil assembly harness connector. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip)>>GO TO 8. NG (Drips)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Trouble is fixed>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold). EC-948 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description PFP:14950 A UBS00AT1 NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123 P2127, P2128, P2138, first perform EC trouble diagnosis for other DTC. C D E F G H PBIB1026E In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AT2 I J Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined. DTC No. P0441 0441 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system incorrect purge flow DTC detecting condition EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-949 Possible cause ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube ● Blocked rubber tube ● Cracked EVAP canister ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Blocked purge port ● EVAP canister vent control valve K L M DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AT3 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) Selector lever Suitable position Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,800 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 10.0 msec Engine coolant temperature More than 0°C PBIB0826E 7. If TESTING is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC951, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS00AT4 Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. EC-950 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 5. 6. 7. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch ON Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Gear position Any position other than P, N or R A EC C PBIB1109E 8. 9. D Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. If NG, go to EC-951, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AT5 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister. E F G H 2. CHECK PURGE FLOW I With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. J 1. K L M BBIA0114E 5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. PURG VOL CONT/V 100% 0% VACUUM Should exist. should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB1786E EC-951 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 3. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. 6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle. Vacuum should not exist. BBIA0114E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it. 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT 1. 2. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B . Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C . SEF367U 3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. SEF368U EC-952 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. EC C D E PBIB1786E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-963 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. F G H I Water should not exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. J 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION K Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452, EC-976 P0453, EC-982 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. L 10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING M 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-974 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-953 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it. 13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-954 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A UBS00AT6 This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister EC purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. D E F G H PBIB1026E DTC No. P0442 0442 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure) DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. EC-955 I Possible cause J ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. K ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. L ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AT7 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0829E 6. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-723, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-957, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. SEC763C WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-700 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. EC-956 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 2. 3. 4. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-700 Stop vehicle. Select MODE 1 with GST. – If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. – If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to the Driving Pattern, EC-700 . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select MODE 3 with GST. – If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-957, "Diagnostic Procedure" . – If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-951 . – If P0441 and P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select MODE 1 with GST. – If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. – If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Diagnostic Procedure A EC C D E F UBS00AT8 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. G H I J K SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION L Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-1308, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. EC-957 M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0114E SEF916U Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U EC-958 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E BBIA0292E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● F G Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. H 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. I J K SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following, ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-1309, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer toEC-974, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. EC-959 L M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1213E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection ● >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. PBIB1786E EC-960 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. A EC C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. E 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F G H Refer to EC-968, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-908, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. K 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-981, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-1305, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. EC-961 M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-1312, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube. 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-1315, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-962 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description A UBS00AT9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Heated oxygen sensor 1*3 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*4 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank 2 ECM function Actuator C D EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve E F G Vehicle speed Vehicle speed signal* *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *4: A/T models except ULEV. H This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I J COMPONENT DESCRIPTION K The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. L M SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ATA Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm 20 - 30% EC-963 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0444 0444 P0445 0445 UBS00ATB Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve UBS00ATC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-966, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-964 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ATD A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0739E EC-965 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 GY/L Idle speed EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve SEC990C Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). SEC991C : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ATE 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0115E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF206W EC-966 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay. >> Repair harness or connectors. EC C 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. I J K L PBIB1786E 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-968, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-967 M DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00ATF EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E Removal and Installation UBS00ATG EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC-968 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 A UBS00ATH The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnoses. EC C D PBIB1263E E F G H BBIA0292E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ATI I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0447 0447 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open J OFF UBS00ATJ DTC detecting condition An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve UBS00ATK NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. EC-969 K L M DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] 2. 3. 4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-972, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-970 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ATL A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0740E EC-971 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 117 L/Y EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ATM 1. INSPECTION START 1. Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. 2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. 4. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0834E EC-972 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. EC C D BBIA0292E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. H PBIB0080E I 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F27, M59 ● Harness connectors B1, M4 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM relay >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND J K L SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-973 M DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-974, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ATN EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1033E EC-974 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V A Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes EC C Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. PBIB0834E D Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. E Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. F G H PBIB1033E I 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition J Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes K Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. L If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. EC-975 PBIB1034E M DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00ATO The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0292E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ATP Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0452 0452 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor low input UBS00ATQ DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-976 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ATR A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-979, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select MODE 7 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-979, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I PBIB1199E J K L M EC-977 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ATS BBWA0688E EC-978 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R/W Sensors power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V C D [Engine is running] 67 B/W A Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ATT 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. G >> GO TO 2. H I BBIA0008E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. J Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. K L M BBIA0292E 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. EC-979 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-980 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal EC 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR H Refer to EC-981, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. I J 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ATU L EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. M Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-981 PBIB1200E DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00ATV The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0292E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ATW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0453 0453 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor high input UBS00ATX DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-982 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Rubber hose to EVAP canister vent control valve DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ATY A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-985, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select MODE 7 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-985, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I PBIB1199E J K L M EC-983 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00ATZ BBWA0688E EC-984 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R/W Sensors' power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V C D [Engine is running] 67 B/W A Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AU0 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. G >> GO TO 2. H I BBIA0008E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. J Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. K L M BBIA0292E 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. EC-985 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-986 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal EC 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING H 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. I J 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-974, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. K L 11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR M Refer to EC-988, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 12. CHECK RUBBER TUBE Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. EC-987 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 13. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> GO TO 16. PBIB1213E 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AU1 EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). ● EC-988 PBIB1200E DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. A EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-989 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00AU2 This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. PBIB1026E DTC No. P0455 0455 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system gross leak detected DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. Possible cause ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. EC-990 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] ● ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure A UBS00AU3 CAUTION: EC Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: ● Make sure that EVAP hose are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve C properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. D TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. E ● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until reteaching sound is heard. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. F G H I J K L PBIB0829E 7. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-723, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-992, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-957 . SEC763C EC-991 M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-700 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-700 . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Select MODE 1 with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to the Driving Pattern, EC-700 . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select MODE 3 with GST. ● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-992, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-957 . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-951 . ● If P0441, P0442 and P0455 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select MODE 1 with GST. ● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. ● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AU4 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. EC-992 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-1308, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A EC C Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-1305, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. D E 6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 7. F G 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control is installed properly. Refer to EC-1309, "Removal and Installation" ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-974, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. H I J K L M EC-993 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0114E SEF916U Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10. 9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U EC-994 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E BBIA0292E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● F G Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. H 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace. I J K SEF200U 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION L With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. 1. 2. 3. 4. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB1786E EC-995 M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. PBIB1786E 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-968, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-908, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. EC-996 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-981, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A EC C Check refueling EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-1312, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. D E 19. CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 20. >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube. 20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-1315, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. F G H I J 21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M EC-997 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00AU5 This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. PBIB1026E EC-998 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC No. P0456 0456 Trouble diagnosis name Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check) DTC detecting condition ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● EVAP system does not operate properly. Possible cause A ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC NOTE: ● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. ● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. ● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. – Fuel filler cap is removed. – Refilled or drained the fuel. – EVAP component parts is/are removed. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V EC-999 E F G I UBS00AU6 WITH CONSULT-II D H CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure C J K L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1). Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0837E 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1001, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: ● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-723, "Basic Inspection" . ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. Overall Function Check UBS00AU7 WITH GST Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. ● Do not start engine. ● 1. Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi). Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. BBIA0114E EC-1000 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the pressure pump and a hose. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect GST and select mode 8. Using mode 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close). Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-1001, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step. Disconnect GST. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST instruction manual. A EC C SEF462UI D E F G H Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AU8 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN I 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. J K L SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. EC-1001 M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-1308, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. BBIA0114E SEF916U NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. EC-1002 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. 3. A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● EC C Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. D E PEF917U F 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. G H SEF200U I J K L M EC-1003 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) BBIA0292E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-1309, "Removal and Installation" ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-974, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. EC-1004 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. C No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. 1. D PBIB1213E E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. F G H 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. K 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB1786E EC-1005 L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-654, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-968, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-908, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-981, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. EC-1006 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR25DE] 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-1312, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. C CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE 21. Check signal line recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. D E 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-1315, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR F G H Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I J Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M EC-1007 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 UBS00AU9 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” The unified “meter and A/C amp.” sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. PBIB1218E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00AUA NOTE: If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. DTC No. P0460 0460 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit noise DTC detecting condition Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Fuel level sensor UBS00AUB NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1009, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1008 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AUC 1. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” A Refer to DI-15, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of “METER AND GAUGES”. Refer to DI-15 . EC C 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00AUD E FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . F G H I J K L M EC-1009 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 UBS00AUE The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” The “unified meter and A/C amp.” sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. PBIB1218E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00AUF NOTE: If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer toEC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. DTC No. P0461 0461 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. Overall Function Check Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (the CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Fuel level sensor UBS00AUG Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-7, "FUEL TANK" . TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-II NOTE: Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. EC-1010 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. A 6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. EC 8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII. C 9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it. 10. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). SEF195Y D 11. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11. E If NG, go to Diagnostic Procedure EC-1011 . WITH GST NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to Diagnostic Procedure, EC-1011 . Diagnostic Procedure F G H I J UBS00AUH 1. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” K Refer to DI-15 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO DI-15 . L M 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00AUI FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-1011 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 UBS00AUJ The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp”. The “unified meter and A/C amp”. sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. PBIB1218E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00AUK NOTE: If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit. One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel level sensor ground circuit. This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0462 0462 Fuel level sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage it from the sensor to ECM. P0463 0463 Fuel level sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Fuel level sensor UBS00AUL NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1013, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1012 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AUM 1. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” A Refer to DI-15, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO “METER AND GAUGES”. Refer to DI-15 . EC C 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00AUN E FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . F G H I J K L M EC-1013 DTC P0500 VSS [QR25DE] DTC P0500 VSS Component Description PFP:32702 UBS00AUO NOTE: If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” The “unified meter and A/C amp.” then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0500 0500 Trouble diagnosis name Vehicle speed sensor UBS00AUP DTC detecting condition The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted) ● Vehicle speed sensor ● unified meter and A/C amp. UBS00AUQ CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine (TCS switch OFF). Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-1015, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 6,000 rpm (A/T models) 1,800 - 6,000 rpm (M/T models) B/FUEL SCHDL More then 6.0 msec (A/T models) More than 5.0 msec (M/T models) Selector lever Except P or N position PW/ST SIGNAL OFF 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1015, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check SEF196Y UBS00AUR Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. Lift up drive wheels. EC-1014 DTC P0500 VSS [QR25DE] 2. 3. 4. Start engine. A Read vehicle speed sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-1015, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AUS 1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CITCUIT C Refer to DI-3, "METERS AND GAUGES" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. D 2. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” E Refer to DI-15, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M EC-1015 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 UBS00AUT NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0506 0506 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected UBS00AUU DTC detecting condition The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak UBS00AUV NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-47 , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-1321 . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1017 . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1016 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AUW 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. EC C 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . D E F G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M EC-1017 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [QR25DE] DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 UBS00AUX NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0507 0507 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected UBS00AUY DTC detecting condition The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak ● PCV system UBS00AUZ NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-47 , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-1321 . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1019, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1018 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AV0 1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 3. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D E F Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G H I >> INSPECTION END J K L M EC-1019 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Component Description PFP:49763 UBS00AV1 Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. BBIA0164E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AV2 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel is turned. ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AV3 The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P0550 0550 Trouble diagnosis name Power steering pressure sensor circuit DTC detecting condition An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Power steering pressure sensor UBS00AV4 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1022, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1020 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AV5 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0757E EC-1021 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 12 P Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel is being turned. [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel is not being turned. DATA (DC Voltage) 0.5 - 4.0V 0.4 - 0.8V [Engine is running] 67 68 B/W G/R Sensor's ground Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V Approximately 5V UBS00AV6 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-1022 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0164E 3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G PBIB0188E H 3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42 (A/T models). Continuity should exist. I J K 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and TCM (A/T models) >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1023 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK PSP SENSOR Refer to EC-1024, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace PSP sensor. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AV7 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and let it idle. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Steering wheel is being turned fully. 0.5 - 4.0V Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V MBIB0025E EC-1024 DTC P0605 ECM [QR25DE] DTC P0605 ECM Component Description PFP:23710 A UBS00AV8 The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC C D PBIB1164E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AV9 This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. DTC No. P0605 0605 Trouble diagnosis name Engine control module DTC detecting condition A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. F Possible cause ● ECM G FAIL-SAFE MODE H ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected. Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. ● ECM deactivates ASCD operation. Malfunction A J DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AVA Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. I K L M Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1026, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-1025 DTC P0605 ECM [QR25DE] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1026, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1026, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AVB 1. INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1025 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select MODE 4 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1025 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. EC-1026 DTC P0605 ECM [QR25DE] 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-706, EC "NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" . Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . C Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END D E F G H I J K L M EC-1027 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR25DE] DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description PFP:22693 UBS00AVC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor ECM function Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control Actuator Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AVD Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F S1 HTR (B1) CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1031 1031 P1032 1032 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit low Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit high UBS00AVE DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater UBS00AVF NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. With CONSULT-II WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1031, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST 1. 2. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC-1028 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. ● Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. A Select MODE 3 with GST. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1031, "Diagnostic Procedure" . When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. There- EC fore, using CONSULT-II is recommended. C D E F G H I J K L M EC-1029 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AVG BBWA0761E EC-1030 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 2 R A A/F sensor 1 heater ● ● Warm-up condition C Approximately 5V Idle speed D Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AVH 1. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. F G H BBIA0008E 3. 4. I Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. J K L BBIA0304E 5. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1683E EC-1031 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR25DE] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-1033, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-1032 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00AVI A AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F) EC Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. C If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F G PBIB1684E Removal and Installation H UBS00AVJ AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR HEATER Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . I J K L M EC-1033 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description PFP:23710 UBS00AVK Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1065 1065 Trouble diagnosis name ECM power supply circuit UBS00AVL DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.] ● ECM ECM back-up RAM system does not function properly. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AVM NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1036, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1034 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AVN A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0691E EC-1035 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 121 WIRE COLOR W/L ITEM Power supply for ECM (Back-up) CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AVO 1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. MBIB0026E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connector E24 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1036 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] 4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1034 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select MODE 4 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1034 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END A EC C D 1. 2. 3. 4. E F G 5. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to.BL-92, "NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)" Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H I J >> INSPECTION END K L M EC-1037 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:23796 UBS00AVP SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and piston position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Vehicle speed signal* Vehicle speed Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. MBIB0121E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. PBIB0195E EC-1038 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AVQ A Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load INT/V SOL (B1) SPECIFICATION Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 60% On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1111 1111 Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit EC C UBS00AVR D DTC detecting condition An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Possible cause ● ● DTC Confirmation Procedure Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) E Intake valve timing control solenoid valve UBS00AVS NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1041, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I J K SEF058Y WITH GST Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L M EC-1039 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AVT BBWA0744E EC-1040 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D 7 - 10V 11 G/Y Intake valve timing control solenoid valve E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm F PBIB1790E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure G UBS00AVU 1. CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J K BBIA0018E L 4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0192E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Check harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM relay. >> Repair harness or connectors. EC-1041 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] 3. CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-1042, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AVV INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Terminals Resistance 1 and 2 Approximately 8Ω at 20°C (68°F) 1 or 2 and ground ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) PBIB0193E Removal and Installation UBS00AVW INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-131, "TIMING CHAIN" . EC-1042 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [QR25DE] DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00AVX Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1121 1121 UBS00AVY Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control actuator DTC detecting condition A) Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction. B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range. C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D Possible cause E ● Electric throttle control actuator F G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Malfunction A The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure I J UBS00AVZ K NOTE: ● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L M PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T models), 1st position (M/T models) and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1044, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC-1043 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [QR25DE] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T models), 1st position (M/T models) and wait at least 2 seconds. Shift selector lever to N or P position. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1044, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AW0 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0079E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1044 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR25DE] DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description PFP:16119 A UBS00AW1 NOTE: If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC P1126. Refer to EC-1043 or EC-1052 . Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AW2 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P1122 1122 Electric throttle control performance problem E Possible cause Electric throttle control function does not operate properly. ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) F Electric throttle control actuator FAIL-SAFE MODE G When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure H UBS00AW3 I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1047, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1045 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AW4 BBWA0745E EC-1046 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C R/W Throttle control motor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V D [Ignition switch: ON] 4 P Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing E PBIB0534E F 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing G H PBIB0533E 104 P [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay I : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure J UBS00AW5 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. L >> GO TO 2. M BBIA0008E EC-1047 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR25DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect throttle control motor relay. BBIA0102E 3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 5 and ground. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0575E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connector E23 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1048 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR25DE] 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. E Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. F 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY H Refer to EC-1050, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay. I 8. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT J 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal K L Continuity 4 Should exist 5 Should not exist 4 Should not exist 5 Should exist 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1049 M BBIA0103E DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR25DE] 9. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0079E 10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-1050, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 12. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 12. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AW6 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No 3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay. PBIB0098E THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. EC-1050 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR25DE] 2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. A Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C PBIB0095E D Removal and Installation UBS00AW7 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . E F G H I J K L M EC-1051 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR25DE] DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00AW8 Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AW9 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AWA These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P1124 1124 Throttle control motor relay circuit short ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON. ● P1126 1126 Throttle control motor relay circuit open Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted) Throttle control motor relay ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open) ● Throttle control motor relay ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AWB NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1055, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y EC-1052 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR25DE] With GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. EC Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1055, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF058Y F With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G H I J K L M EC-1053 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AWC BBWA0746E EC-1054 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 104 EC WIRE COLOR R/W P ITEM Throttle control motor power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay Diagnostic Procedure C D UBS00AWD 1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect throttle control motor relay harness connector. E F G H I BBIA0102E 3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminal 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. J Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L PBIB0575E M 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connector E23 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and battery >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. EC-1055 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR25DE] 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Refer to EC-1056, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AWE THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No 3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay. PBIB0098E EC-1056 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR25DE] DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00AWF The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AWG C This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1128 1128 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor. Possible cause D ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor) E FAIL-SAFE MODE F When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AWH NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. G H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1059, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1057 M DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AWI BBWA0747E EC-1058 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 P Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is releasing D E PBIB0534E 0 - 14V F [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is depressing G PBIB0533E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AWJ 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS I 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. K L BBIA0008E EC-1059 M DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal Continuity 4 Should exist 5 Should not exist 4 Should not exist 5 Should exist BBIA0103E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-1060, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AWK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E EC-1060 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR25DE] Removal and Installation UBS00AWL ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-1061 DTC P1143 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC P1143 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 UBS00AWM The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AWN Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AWO To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the rich output is sufficiently high and whether the lean output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected. SEF300U DTC No. P1143 1143 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 lean shift monitoring DTC detecting condition The maximum and minimum voltage from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages. EC-1062 Possible cause ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks DTC P1143 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AWP A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: C ● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). ● Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1143” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. E F G H PBIB0546E I 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 109 - 13.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position 7. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1064, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L PBIB0547E M SEC769C Overall Function Check UBS00AWQ Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC-1063 DTC P1143 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 2. 3. – – 4. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] and engine ground. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least 1 time. The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least 1 time. If NG, go to EC-1064, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0018E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AWR 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E 2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. BBIA0290E EC-1064 DTC P1143 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-883 . No >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-800, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. F G H I J BBIA0130E K L M 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-1066, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For circuit, refer to EC-848, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1065 DTC P1143 HO2S1 [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00AWS HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. SEF646Y 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH”more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. SEF217YA SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC-1066 DTC P1143 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground. A 3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V EC more than 5 times within 10 seconds. ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least 1 time. C ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least 1 time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. MBIB0018E 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V D 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. E ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. F Removal and Installation UBS00AWT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . G H I J K L M EC-1067 DTC P1144 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC P1144 HO2S1 Component Description PFP:22690 UBS00AWU The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. SEF463R SEF288D CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AWV Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AWW To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the rich output is sufficiently high and lean output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected. SEF299U DTC No. P1144 1144 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 1 rich shift monitoring DTC detecting condition The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages. EC-1068 Possible cause ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors DTC P1144 HO2S1 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AWX A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: C ● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1144” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. E F G H PBIB0548E I 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.9 - 13.0 msec Selector lever Suitable position 7. J K L If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1070, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0549E M SEC772C Overall Function Check UBS00AWY Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC-1069 DTC P1144 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 2. 3. – – 4. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] and engine ground. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least 1 time. The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least 1 time. If NG, go to EC-1070, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0018E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AWZ 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E 2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. BBIA0290E EC-1070 DTC P1144 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-894 . No >> GO TO 4. F G H I J BBIA0130E K 4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. BBIA0284E 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-800, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. EC-1071 DTC P1144 HO2S1 [QR25DE] 6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Refer to EC-1072, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer toEC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For circuit, refer to EC-848, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AX0 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. SEF646Y 6. Check the following. ● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V. SEF217YA SEF648Y CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. EC-1072 DTC P1144 HO2S1 [QR25DE] ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. A Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm conC stant under no load. ● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds. D ● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least 1 time. ● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least 1 time. ● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. E MBIB0018E 1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V 2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V CAUTION: F ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor G Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00AX1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 H Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . I J K L M EC-1073 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC P1146 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00AX2 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/ T models except ULEV) are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AX3 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AX4 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV). The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB0554E DTC No. P1146 1146 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring DTC detecting condition The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-1074 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AX5 NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR ” mode with CONSULT-II 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLANT TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLANT TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of COSULT-II. C D E F SEF174Y G H I J K PBIB0818E 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1078, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00AX6 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. EC-1075 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-1078, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-1076 PBIB1197E DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AX7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0727E EC-1077 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00AX8 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-1078 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-894 . No >> GO TO 3. F 1. 2. 3. G H I BBIA0130E K 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1079 J BBIA0175E DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer toEC-1080, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AX9 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle and wait until 2 minutes have passed from starting the engine. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1783E EC-1080 DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB0817E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with“OD” OFF (A/T models) or 3rd gear position (M/T models). PBIB1197E The voltage should be below 0.50V at least once during this procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00AXA HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . EC-1081 G H I J K L M DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC P1147 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00AXB The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/ T models except ULEV) are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AXC Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V ←→ 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AXD The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 (A/T models ULEV and M/T models) or the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (A/T models except ULEV). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB0820E DTC No. P1147 1147 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring DTC detecting condition The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-1082 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit open or shorted.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AXE NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLANT TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLANT TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F SEF174Y G H I J K PBIB0819E 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1086 . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00AXF Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. EC-1083 DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models). The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-1086, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-1084 PBIB1197E DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AXG A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0727E EC-1085 DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 R/L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00AXH 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-1086 DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-883 . No >> GO TO 3. F 1. 2. 3. G H I BBIA0130E K 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1087 J BBIA0175E DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-1088, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00AXI HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1783E EC-1088 DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR25DE] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB0817E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and engine ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models). The voltage should be below 0.50V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00AXJ HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . EC-1089 G H I J K L M DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL [QR25DE] DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:22690 UBS00AXK A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. Closed loop control function Possible cause ● The heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Heated oxygen sensor heater A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 Trouble diagnosis name Closed loop control function DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. Possible cause ● The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. DTC Confirmation Procedure (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) UBS00BJI CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the following. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least once. ● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least once. If the check result is NG, perform EC-1091, "Diagnostic Procedure (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS)" . If the check result is OK, perform the following step. Let engine idle at least 5 minutes. Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive seconds. B/FUEL SCHDL 4.0 msec or more ENG SPEED More than 1,600 rpm Selector lever Suitable position VHCL SPEED SE More than 70 km/h (43 MPH) 6. SEF682Y During this test, P0134 may be displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1091, "Diagnostic Procedure (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS)" . EC-1090 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL [QR25DE] Overall Function Check (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) UBS00BJJ Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop control. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. A EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no-load. ● The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once. ● The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once. If NG, go to EC-1091, "Diagnostic Procedure (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS)" . C D E MBIB0018E Diagnostic Procedure (A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS) UBS00BJK F Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133, EC-856 . G H I J K L M EC-1091 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE System Description PFP:00000 UBS00AXL COOLING FAN CONTROL Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*1 Battery Battery voltage*1 Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed*1 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Actuator Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay(s) *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. OPERATION PBIB0926E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AXM Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION A/C switch: OFF OFF A/C switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON EC-1092 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● COOLING FAN ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Air conditioner switch: OFF SPECIFICATION A Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HIGH On Board Diagnosis Logic EC C UBS00AXN If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P1217 1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat) Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Cooling fan ● Radiator hose ● Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Radiator ● Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method. ● Radiator cap ● Water pump ● Thermostat ● Engine coolant is not within the specified range. H CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-23, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-26, "Changing Engine Oil" . 1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" . 2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. WITH CONSULT-II 2. 3. I J K UBS00AXO Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. 1. F G For more information, refer to EC-1103, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . Overall Function Check E Possible Cause ● ● D Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Turn ignition switch ON. SEF621W EC-1093 L M DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] 4. 5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. If the results are NG, go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF646X WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine. Set temperature control lever to full cold position. Turn air conditioner switch ON. Turn blower fan switch ON. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating. Be careful not to overheat engine. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If NG, go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEC163BA If OK, go to the following step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed. Be careful not to overheat engine. If NG, go to EC-1096, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MEC475B EC-1094 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AXP A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0729E EC-1095 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 89 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High) ● Cooling fan is not operating [Engine is running] ● Cooling fan is high speed operating [Ignition switch: ON] 97 LG/R Cooling fan relay (Low) ● Cooling fan is not operating [Ignition switch: ON] ● Cooling fan is operating Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11-14V) 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11-14V) 0 - 1.0V UBS00AXQ 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2 and relay-3. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0113E 3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-1100 .) SEF646X EC-1096 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] 3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-2 and relay-3. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 5. Make sure that cooling fan-1 operates at high speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-1102 .) EC C D E SEF646X F 4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Without CONSULT-II Disconnect cooling fan relay-2 and relay-3. Start engine and let it idle. Set temperature lever at full cold position. Turn air conditioner switch ON. Turn blower fan switch ON. H I J BBIA0113E K 6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-1100 .) L M SEC163BA EC-1097 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] 5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-2 and relay-3. 3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan-1 operates at high speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-1102 .) MEC475B 6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. SLC754A 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following for leak. ● Hose ● Radiator ● Water pump (Refer to CO-28, "WATER PUMP" .) >> Repair or replace. EC-1098 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] 8. CHECK RADIATOR CAP A Apply pressure to cap with a tester. Radiator cap relief pressure: EC 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace radiator cap. C D SLC755A 9. CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. 2. E Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. F Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard] Valve lift: More than 8 mm/95°C (0.31 in/203°F) Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to CO-30, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace thermostat. G H 3. 10. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-1104, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 11. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES I SLC343 J K L M If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-1103, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1099 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0951E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E103 ● Fuse and fusible link box connectors E23, E25 ● 10A fuse ● 40A fusible links ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1100 BBIA0306E DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] 4. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 97 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. C D 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E9, F47 ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1 G Refer to EC-1104, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace cooling fan relay. H 7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 Refer to EC-1104, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. I J K 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M EC-1101 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2 and relay-3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-2 and relay-3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1771E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse and fusible link box connectors E23, E25 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E103 ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2, relay-3 and fuse ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2, relay-3 and fusible link ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following; cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7and body ground. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. Check harness continuity between the following; cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2 and cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7and body ground. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1102 BBIA0306E DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] 4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 89 and cooling fan relay-2 and relay-3 terminals 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. C D 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E9, F47 ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and ECM ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-3 and ECM F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-2 AND RELAY-3 H Refer to EC-1104, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace cooling fan relays. I 7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 J Refer to EC-1104, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. K 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M >> INSPECTION END Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step OFF 1 Inspection item ● Blocked radiator ● Blocked condenser ● Blocked radiator grille UBS00AXR Equipment Standard ● Visual No blocking Reference page — ● Blocked bumper 2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-14 . 3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck See MA-23 . 4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/ See CO-36 . 2 cm , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) 2 ON* 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual EC-1103 No leaks See CO-26 . DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR25DE] Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot See CO-30 and CO-32 . ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-1092 ). OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature gauge ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — ● Coolant overflow to reservoir tank ● Visual No overflow during driving and idling See CO-26 . OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator ● Visual Should be initial level in reservoir tank See CO-26 . OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) See EM-143 . 12 ● Cylinder block and pistons ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston See EM-159 . *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-23, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" . Component Inspection UBS00AXS COOLING FAN RELAYS-1 AND -2 Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No If NG, replace relay. PBIB0077E COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 AND MOTOR-2 1. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. Terminals Speed Cooling fan motor (+) (−) Low 1 4 High 1, 2 3, 4 Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. SEF734W EC-1104 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00AXT Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AXU The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F DTC No. P1225 1225 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance problem Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) G UBS00AXV NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H I J Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1106, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1105 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AXW 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0079E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00AXX ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC-1106 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00AXY Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AXZ The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F DTC No. P1226 1226 Trouble diagnosis name Closed throttle position learning performance problem DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) G UBS00AY0 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. H I J Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1108, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1107 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AY1 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0079E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00AY2 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC-1108 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16119 A UBS00AY3 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1229 1229 Trouble diagnosis name Sensor power supply circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high. EC Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) ● ECM pin terminal C D FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. E Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure F UBS00AY4 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1111, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K L SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1109 M DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AY5 BBWA0748E EC-1110 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR B A ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V UBS00AY6 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS D 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. F G BBIA0008E H 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. I Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. J K L BBIA0103E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E EC-1111 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR25DE] 3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT Check the following. ● Harness for short to power and short to ground between ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. ● ECM pin terminal. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-918, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1112 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00AY7 The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AY8 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AY9 K To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low. DTC No. P1271 1271 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00AYA CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EC-1113 M DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. SEF581Z 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,800 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.2 - 9.0 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever D position with “OD” ON If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 7. PBIB0756E Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF and release accelerator pedal fully. PBIB0757E 8. 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Touch “BACK” and “MODE”, then select “SELF-DIAG RESULT” mode. If P1271 is displayed, go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If another DTC is displayed, go to the corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00AYB Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 90 km/h (56 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. EC-1114 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set D position with “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). A NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. EC Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. C Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. D If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G H I J K L M EC-1115 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AYC BBWA0762E EC-1116 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● ● Warm-up condition Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AYD 1. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. G H BBIA0008E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 J K L BBIA0304E M Continuity should exist. 5. I Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1117 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00AYE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-1118 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00AYF The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AYG I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AYH K To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high. DTC No. P1272 1272 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00AYI CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EC-1119 M DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-1123, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx.5V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. SEF581Z 6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,800 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.2 - 9.0 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever D position with “OD” ON If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 7. PBIB0756E Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF and release accelerator pedal fully. PBIB0757E 8. 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Touch “BACK” and “MODE”, then select “SELF-DIAG RESULT” mode. If P1272 is displayed, go to EC-1123, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If another DTC is displayed, go to the corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00AYJ Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 90 km/h (56MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. EC-1120 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set D position with “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). A NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. EC Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. C Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. D If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1123, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G H I J K L M EC-1121 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AYK BBWA0762E EC-1122 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AYL 1. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. G H BBIA0008E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 J K L BBIA0304E M Continuity should exist. 5. I Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-1123 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Removal and Installation UBS00AYM AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-1124 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00AYN The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AYO I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AYP To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted lean side or rich side. When the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected. DTC No. P1273 1273 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 lean shift monitoring The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/ F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a specified period. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks M UBS00AYQ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. EC-1125 L Possible Cause DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. K DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 4. Maintain the following conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 400 to 800 seconds.) NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED Below 3,200 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL Below 13.6 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever P or N position SEF567Z If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 minutes, retry from step 2. SEF568Z 5. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF569Z Overall Function Check UBS00AYR Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 90 km/h (56 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. EC-1126 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-1127 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AYS BBWA0762E EC-1128 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AYT 1. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) G >> GO TO 2. H I J K L M EC-1129 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-883 . No >> GO TO 3. EC-1130 BBIA0130E DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 EC C D BBIA0304E E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should not exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER I Refer to EC-1033, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. J 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation L UBS00AYU AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-1131 M DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00AYV The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AYW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AYX To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to the lean side or rich side. When the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected. DTC No. P1274 1274 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 rich shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a specified period. Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AYY NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. EC-1132 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 4. Maintain the following conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 400 to 800 seconds.) NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED A EC Below 3,200 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL Below 13.6 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever P or N position C SEF570Z D If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 minutes, retry from step 2. E F G SEF571Z 5. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1136, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I J K SEF572Z Overall Function Check UBS00AYZ Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 90 km/h (56 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. EC-1133 L M DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1136, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-1134 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AZ0 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0762E EC-1135 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AZ1 1. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 1. 2. DATA (DC Voltage) Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 2. EC-1136 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF215Z F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-894 . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness connector for water. Water should not exit. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. EC-1137 G H I J BBIA0130E K L M DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0304E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-1033, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00AZ2 AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-1138 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00AZ3 The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AZ4 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AZ5 K To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control. DTC No. P1276 1276 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00AZ6 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. EC-1139 M DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 4. 5. 6. If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-1143, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,750 - 2,600 rpm Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 1.8 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever D position with “OD” ON If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 7. SEF576Z Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF and release accelerator pedal fully. SEF577Z 8. 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1143, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF578Z Overall Function Check UBS00AZ7 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. Set D position with “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. EC-1140 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. 9. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1143, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-1141 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AZ8 BBWA0762E EC-1142 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AZ9 1. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. G H BBIA0008E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 J K L BBIA0304E M Continuity should exist. 5. I Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-1143 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Removal and Installation UBS00AZA AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-1144 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00AZB The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AZC I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AZD K To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. L DTC No. P1278 1278 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition ● The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. DTC Confirmation Procedure M Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor UBS00AZE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. EC-1145 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “INCMP” is displayed, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,750 - 2,600 rpm Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1,0 - 8.0 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever D position with “OD” ON If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 5. PBIB0756E Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) or 3rd position (M/T models) and release accelerator pedal fully. PBIB0757E 6. 7. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1149, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00AZF Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure the result is OK. If NG, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. EC-1146 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set D position with “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). A NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. EC Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. C Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. D If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1149, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G H I J K L M EC-1147 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AZG BBWA0762E EC-1148 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AZH 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. G H BBIA0008E I 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 J Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) K >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. L Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (manifold). M PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-1149 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-883 , EC-894 . No >> GO TO 6. EC-1150 BBIA0130E DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 EC C D BBIA0304E E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should not exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 7. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER I Refer to EC-1033, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. J 8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR K Refer to EC-814, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. L 9. CHECK PCV VALVE M Refer to EC-1317, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00AZI AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-1151 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00AZJ The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AZK Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AZL To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signals computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. P1279 1279 Trouble diagnosis name Air-fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition ● The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Injectors ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor UBS00AZM CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. EC-1152 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. A EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “INCMP” is displayed, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed 70 - 120 km/h (43 - 75 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.9 - 4.0 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Selector lever D position with “OD” ON D E F If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 5. C PBIB0756E Following the instructions of CONSULT-II screen, set D position with “OD” OFF and release accelerator pedal fully. G H I J PBIB0757E 6. 7. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1156, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M PBIB0758E Overall Function Check UBS00AZN Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Make sure the result is OK. If NG, follow the instruction for Idle Air Volume Learning. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 90 km/h (56 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. EC-1153 K DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set D position with “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1156, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-1154 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AZO A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0762E EC-1155 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AZP 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. EC-1156 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK A Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. EC 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. C With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? D E F G SEF215Z H Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-704, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-883 , EC-894 . No >> GO TO 6. EC-1157 I J K L BBIA0130E M DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR25DE] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal 16 1 35 5 56 6 75 2 BBIA0304E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-1033, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-814, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 9. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-1317, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00AZQ AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-108, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC-1158 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description A UBS00AZR SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position EC ECM function Actuator C Heated oxygen sensor 1*3 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1*4 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed*2 D EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve E F G *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM though CAN communication line. *3: A/T models ULEV and M/T models. *4: A/T models except ULEV. H This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I J COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K L M SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AZS Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-1159 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1444 1444 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve UBS00AZT DTC detecting condition The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) UBS00AZU NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. PBIB0839E 6. 7. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC1163, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select MODE 7 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1163, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-1160 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00AZV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0739E EC-1161 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 GY/L Idle speed EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) PBIB0520E [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) EC-1162 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AZW 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A CUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D E BBIA0115E 4. F Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester. G Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. H PBIB0080E I 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM J K >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR- L CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1163 M DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] 4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water. BBIA0292E Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-981, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1786E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-988, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. EC-1164 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] 8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING A 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. EC C 9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II Refer to EC-974, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. D E 10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. YES or NO YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> GO TO 13. F G H I PBIB1213E 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER J Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. K L 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1165 M DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00AZX EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100.0% Yes 0.0% No PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E Removal and Installation UBS00BJY EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC-1166 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 A UBS00AZY The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnoses. EC C D PBIB1263E E F G H BBIA0292E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AZZ I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1446 1446 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve close J OFF UBS00B00 DTC detecting condition EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister is saturated with water UBS00B01 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC-1167 K L M DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 7. a. b. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. Repeat next procedures 3 times. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1078, "Diagnostic ProceSEF058Y dure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. Repeat next procedure 20 times. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1078, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 4. 5. a. b. 6. PBIB0972E WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1168 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B02 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0740E EC-1169 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 117 L/Y EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B03 1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. Check the rubber tube for clogging. BBIA0292E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I Refer to EC-1080, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-1170 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] 3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 6. EC C D PBIB1213E E 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. F G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection I >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. J 6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. K L M BBIA0292E 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-1171 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-988, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B04 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. 4. PBIB1033E 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes 7. 8. Operation takes less than 1 second. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 5 again. PBIB0834E Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. PBIB1033E EC-1172 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes 4. 5. A Operation takes less than 1 second. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. EC C PBIB1034E D E F G H I J K L M EC-1173 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR25DE] DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description PFP:25551 UBS00B0A ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to EC-1319, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. BBIA0119E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B0B Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAIN SW CONDITION ● CANCEL SW ● RESUME/ACC SW SET SW ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B0C This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-1025. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition ● P1564 1564 ASCD steering switch ● ● Possible Cause An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range. Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● ASCD steering switch ● ECM ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B0D NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. Press “CRUISE” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press “ACCEL/RES” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press “COAST/SET” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. EC-1174 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR25DE] 7. 8. Press “CANCEL” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. If trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1178, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-1175 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B0E BBWA0701E EC-1176 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR EC ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 67 B/W Sensor's ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch is OFF. [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 W/R A ASCD steering switch CRUISE switch is ON. [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch is ON. [Ignition switch: ON] ● COAST/SET switch is ON. [Ignition switch: ON] ● ACCEL/RESUME switch is ON. C Approximately 0V Approximately 4V Approximately 0V D E Approximately 1V F Approximately 2V Approximately 3V G H I J K L M EC-1177 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B0F 1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. 1. 2. Switch CRUISE Monitor item MAIN SW COAST/SET ACCEL/RES SET SW RESUME/ACC SW Condition Indication Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF SEC006D CANCEL 1. 2. CANCEL SW Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button. Switch CRUISE SW COAST/SET SW ACCEL/RES SW CANCEL SW Condition Voltage [V] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 2 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 3 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 1 Released Approx. 4 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. EC-1178 PBIB0311E DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR25DE] 2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD steering switch harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between switch terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. D 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BBIA0119E E F Check the following. ● Harness connectors M401, M102 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Spiral cable ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD steering switch G H >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and ASCD steering switch terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. K L 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M401, M102 ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Spiral cable ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD steering switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-1180, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. EC-1179 M DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR25DE] 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B0G ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect ASCD steering switch. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 1 and 4 with pushing each switch. Switch CRUISE SW COAST/SET SW ACCEL/RES SW CANCEL SW Condition Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 660 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 1,480 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 250 Released Approx. 4,000 EC-1180 PBIB0934E DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 A UBS00B0H When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to for the ASCD function EC-1319, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" . EC C D BBIA0117E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B0I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 CONDITION ● BRAKE SW2 ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON F SPECIFICATION Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ON Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON G H On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B0J This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-1025 DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause ● P1572 1572 ASCD brake switch When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to the ECM at the same time. EC-1181 Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD clutch switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD brake switch ● ASCD clutch switch ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation ● ECM I J K L M DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B0K CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position If DTC is detected, go to EC-1185, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to the following step. 4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Depress the brake pedal for more than five seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned condition. 5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1185, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1182 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B0L A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0702E EC-1183 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 P/L ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T) ASCD brake switch Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is fully released ● Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T) EC-1184 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B0M 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. EC C A/T models CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is depress OFF When brake pedal is fully released ON D M/T models E CONDITION INDICATION When clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is depressed OFF When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON F SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. G H A/T models CONDITION When brake pedal is depress When brake pedal is fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V I Battery voltage M/T models J CONDITION When clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is depressed When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V K Battery voltage MBIB0061E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 4. L M EC-1185 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage MBIB0060E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 13. 3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0118E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0799E EC-1186 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0117E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK (M/T models)>>GO TO 6. OK (A/T models)>>GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. G H PBIB0857E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1187 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-1190, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-1190, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. EC-1188 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0105E E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal + (M/T models) or 1 (A/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage G H PBIB0938E I J K PBIB1772E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. L M 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1189 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal – (M/T models) or 2 (A/T models). Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-1190, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B0N ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. EC-1190 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed. Continuity A Should exist. Should not exist. EC If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-23, "CLUTCH SYSTEM" , and perform step 3 again. C SEC024D D STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 (A/T models), + and – (M/T models) under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. E F Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. G If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 3 again. H PBIB0939E I J K L PBIB1202E M EC-1191 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description PFP:31036 UBS00B0O The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from “unified meter and A/C amp.” and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-1319, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B0P This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-1014, "DTC P0500 VSS" ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-1025, "DTC P0605 ECM" DTC No. P1574 1574 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD vehicle speed sensor DTC Detecting Condition ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● Unified meter and A/C amp. ● Vehicle speed sensor ● TCM ● ECM UBS00B0Q CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle at more than 30 km/h (19 MPH). If DTC is detected, go to EC-1193, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1192 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B0R 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" or AT-429, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. 2. CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.” Refer to DI-15, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . EC C D >> INSPECTION END E F G H I J K L M EC-1193 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR25DE] DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Component Description PFP:32006 UBS00B0S When the gear position is P or N (A/T models), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also indicates a transmission range switch to detect selector lever position. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B0T Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Shift lever: P or N (A/T) Neutral (M/T) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1706 1706 Trouble diagnosis name Park/neutral position switch UBS00B0U DTC detecting condition The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.] ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch UBS00B0V CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Selector lever) Known good signal N and P position ON Except the above position OFF 3. 4. 5. If NG, go to EC-1197, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 50 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.0 msec (A/T models) More than 2.5 msec (M/T models) VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1197, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC-1194 SEF212Y SEF213Y DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR25DE] Overall Function Check UBS00B0W Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Condition (Gear position) Except the above position 3. EC Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. P (A/T models) and N position A C Voltage (V) (Known-good data) Approx. 0 D A/T models: Battery voltage M/T models: Approximately 5V If NG, go to EC-1197, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E MBIB0029E F G H I J K L M EC-1195 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B0X BBWA0749E EC-1196 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/OR A PNP switch Shift lever: P or D (A/T), Neutral (M/T) [Ignition switch: ON] ● Except the above gear position DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V A/T models BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) M/T models Approximately 5V D E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00B0Y 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F G Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. H I J Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" or AT-488, "DTC P0705 PARK/ NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" (A/T models) Refer to MT-12, "POSITION SWITCH" or MT-75, "POSITION SWITCH" (M/T models). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace PNP switch. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1197 L M DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description PFP:14955 UBS00B0Z The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B10 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Idle OFF More than 5,000 rpm ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B11 The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. P1800 1800 Trouble diagnosis name VIAS control solenoid valve circuit DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● VIAS control solenoid valve An excessively low or high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B12 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1200, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1198 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B13 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0754E EC-1199 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve Idle speed [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00B14 1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT−I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0022E 4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0173E EC-1200 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] 2. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM relay. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D BBIA0100E E 3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III F Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. H PBIB0625E I 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connector E22 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery J K L >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ECM RELAY M Refer to EC-1247, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace ECM relay. EC-1201 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] 6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-1202, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B15 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS SOL VALVE Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB0177E With GST Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. MEC488B EC-1202 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR25DE] Removal and Installation UBS00B16 A VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M EC-1203 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description PFP:25320 UBS00B17 Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B18 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B19 The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1805 1805 Trouble diagnosis name Brake switch DTC detecting condition A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch FALI-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Vehicle condition Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B1A WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1206, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1204 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B1B A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0703E EC-1205 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal depressed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00B1C 1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. DATA (DC Voltage) Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Brake pedal Stop lamp Fully released Not illuminated Depressed Illuminated OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. EC-1206 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0105E 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 (A/T models), + (M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Battery voltage F G PBIB1225E H I J K PBIB0938E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. L 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1207 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2 (A/T models), – (M/T models). Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. BBIA0105E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-1208, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B1D STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0105E EC-1208 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 (A/ T models), + and – (M/T models) under the following conditions. Conditions Continuity Brake pedal fully released Should not exist. Brake pedal depressed A EC Should exist. If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-11, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" , and perform step 2 again. C PBIB1202E D E F G PBIB0939E H I J K L M EC-1209 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00B1E The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B1F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.41 - 0.96V ● Shift lever: D (A/T) 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.2V Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2*1 CLSD THL POS SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) *: Accelerator pedal sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B1G These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2122 2122 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P2123 2123 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-1210 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B1H A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1213, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M EC-1211 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B1I BBWA0704E EC-1212 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 82 83 EC WIRE COLOR B/Y G ITEM CONDITION Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Engine is running] Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Engine is running] 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) 91 R/G Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V D Approximately 0V E [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B A Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released G 0.28 - 0.48V H [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 2.0V I [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released J 0.65 - 0.87V K [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 4.3V L UBS00B1J 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-1213 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0104E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0811E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1214 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C D 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR G Refer to EC-1215, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly. H I 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00B1K K ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. L M MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC-1215 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Removal and Installation UBS00B1L ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . EC-1216 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 A UBS00B1M The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM E receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B1N F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION CLSD THL POS G ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.41 - 0.96V ● Shift lever: D (A/T) 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.2V Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2*1 SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) H I J *: Accelerator pedal sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B1O These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. K Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P1227 1227 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) P1228 1228 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-1217 L M DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B1P NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1220, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-1218 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B1Q A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0705E EC-1219 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 82 83 WIRE COLOR B/Y G ITEM Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 R/G Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.28 - 0.48V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 2.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 4.3V UBS00B1R 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-1220 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0104E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0812E H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor I J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. K L M 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1221 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-1223, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1222 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00B1S A ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. EC C D E MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation F UBS00B1T G ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" H I J K L M EC-1223 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00B1U Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B1V Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever D: (A/T) 1ST: (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B1W This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2135 2135 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2. Possible cause ● Harness or connector (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-1224 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B1X A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1227, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M EC-1225 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B1Y BBWA0750E EC-1226 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR B A ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/ T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 1 D More than 0.36V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/ T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Less than 4.75V F [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Ignition switch: ON] 69 G ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/ T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released Throttle position sensor 2 H Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/ T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure I More than 0.36V J UBS00B1Z 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. L >> GO TO 2. M BBIA0008E EC-1227 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0103E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0082E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-1229, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-1228 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. A Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC >> INSPECTION END C 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END E Component Inspection UBS00B20 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation F G H I J PBIB1060E K UBS00B21 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR L Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . M EC-1229 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00B22 The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00B23 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.41 - 0.96V ● Shift lever: D (A/T) 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.2V Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2*1 ● CLSD THL POS SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) *: Accelerator pedal sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00B24 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2138 2138 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2. Possible cause ● Harness or connector (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2 FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-1230 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00B25 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1233, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M EC-1231 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS00B26 BBWA0707E EC-1232 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 82 83 EC WIRE COLOR B/Y G ITEM CONDITION Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Engine is running] Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Engine is running] 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) 91 R/G Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V D Approximately 0V E [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F [Ignition switch: ON] 98 R/B A Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released G 0.28 - 0.48V H [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 2.0V I [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully released J 0.65 - 0.87V K [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 4.3V L UBS00B27 1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. >> GO TO 2. BBIA0008E EC-1233 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0104E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 1, 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0782E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 4, ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1234 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C D 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. G CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-1236, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor. H 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END K L M EC-1235 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS00B28 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. Perform EC-684, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation UBS00B29 ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . EC-1236 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description PFP:22448 A UBS002LS IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. EC C D BBIA0106E E F G H I J K L M EC-1237 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002LT BBWA0751E EC-1238 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR EC ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 A 10 seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 1.0V D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F G H I J K L M EC-1239 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] BBWA0752E EC-1240 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 0.1V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 62 81 BR PU PBIB0521E Ignition signal No. 1 Ignition signal No. 2 0 - 0.2V F [Engine is running] ● ● Warm-up condition G Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0522E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I J K L M EC-1241 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] BBWA0753E EC-1242 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 0.1V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D E 61 80 L/W GY/R PBIB0521E Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 4 0 - 0.2V F [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB0522E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002LU I 1. CHECK ENGINE START Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4. J K 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION L With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that all circuits do not produce a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. M PBIB0133E EC-1243 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] 3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II Let engine idle. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. 1. 2. PBIB0521E PBIB1204E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. 4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO EC-782, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . MBIB0034E 5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between condenser terminal + and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB0851E EC-1244 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] 6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM relay. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal +. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D BBIA0100E E 7. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV F Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. H PBIB0625E I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connector E22 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery J K L >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 9. CHECK ECM RELAY M Refer to EC-1247, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ECM relay. EC-1245 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] 10. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal - and ground. Refer to Wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. 11. CHECK CONDENSER Refer to EC-1247, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace condenser. 12. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0106E 5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0138E EC-1246 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] 13. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. E Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 15. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EC-1247, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor. I J 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L Component Inspection UBS00BJ9 ECM RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes OFF No 3. M If NG, replace ECM relay. PBIB0077E CONDENSER 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. EC-1247 IGNITION SIGNAL [QR25DE] 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals + and -. Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F) PBIB0848E IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 3 and 1 Except 0 or ∞ 3 and 2 Except 0 1 and 2 PBIB0847E Removal and Installation UBS00BJA IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EM-113, "IGNITION COIL" . EC-1248 VIAS [QR25DE] VIAS Description PFP:14956 A UBS002LX SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position Battery Battery voltage* Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature ECM function EC Actuator C VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve D E *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. F G H I J K PBIB0843E When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suction efficiency and higher torque generation. The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector. Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction resistance under high speeds. EC-1249 L M VIAS [QR25DE] COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Power Valve The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve. BBIA0022E VIAS Control Solenoid Valve The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator. BBIA0022E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V UBS002LY CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Idle OFF More than 5,000 rpm ON EC-1250 VIAS [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002LZ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0869E EC-1251 VIAS [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve ● Idle speed [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm EC-1252 DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V VIAS [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002M0 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. EC C D E PBIB0844E 3. F Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves. G H BBIA0023E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves. I J K L M BBIA0023E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. NG (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. EC-1253 VIAS [QR25DE] 2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE With CONSULT-II Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Start engine and let it idle. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check vacuum existence under the following conditions. 1. 2. 3. VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum ON Should exist. OFF Should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0844E 3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE Without CONSULT-II Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Start engine and let it idle. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2. 5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions. 1. 2. 3. 4. Condition 12V direct current supply No supply Vacuum Should exist. Should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0845E 4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE 1. 2. Stop engine. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-654, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair hoses or tubes. SEF109L 5. CHECK VACUUM TANK Refer to EC-1256, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace vacuum tank. EC-1254 VIAS [QR25DE] 6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch ON. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0022E E 4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. G H PBIB0173E 7. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II I 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM relay. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L BBIA0100E 8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. PBIB0625E EC-1255 M VIAS [QR25DE] 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Fuse and fusible link box connector E22 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 10. CHECK ECM RELAY Refer to EC-1247, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ECM relay. 11. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-1256, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002M1 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. EC-1256 VIAS [QR25DE] 4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS SOL VALVE Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes A EC Operation takes less than 1 second. C PBIB0177E D With GST Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes E F G Operation takes less than 1 second. MEC488B VACUUM TANK H 1. 2. 3. I Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum pump. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B . J K PBIB0846E Removal and Installation L UBS002M2 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE M Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC-1257 INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR25DE] INJECTOR CIRCUIT Component Description PFP:16600 UBS002M3 The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. SEF375Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002M4 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● B/FUEL SCHDL INJ PULSE-B1 Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load SPECIFICATION Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec EC-1258 INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002M5 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0755E EC-1259 INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 23 42 22 41 R/B Y/B G/B L/B ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Injector No. 1 Injector No. 2 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 4 PBIB0529E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0530E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002M6 1. INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. EC-1260 INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR25DE] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. F G H I PBIB1725E J OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. K L M EC-1261 INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR25DE] 3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect injector harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0024E 4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0582E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M19, E108 ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness connectors F12, F101 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. EC-1262 INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR25DE] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F12, F101 ● Harness for open or short between injector and ECM EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 7. CHECK INJECTOR Refer to EC-1263, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injector. D E 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END G Component Inspection UBS002M7 INJECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect injector harness connector. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. H Resistance: 12.1 - 12.9Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] I J K PBIB1727E Removal and Installation UBS002M8 INJECTOR L Refer to EM-116, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . M EC-1263 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR25DE] FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Description PFP:17042 UBS002MC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Battery* Battery voltage* ECM Function Fuel pump control Actuator Fuel pump relay *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. Engine running and cranking Operates. When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds. Except as shown above Stops. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank. PBIB1218E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002MD Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY CONDITION ● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions SPECIFICATION ON OFF EC-1264 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002ME A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0756E EC-1265 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] 113 (Without NVIS) ● B/P Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON [Ignition switch: ON] 114 (With NVIS) 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. Diagnostic Procedure BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS002MF 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers. Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. BBIA0110E 2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuel pump relay. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0307E 4. Check voltage between fuel pump relay terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0657E EC-1266 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR25DE] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector B4 ● 10A fuse ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay EC C >> Repair harness or connectors. 4. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay terminal 3 and fuel pump terminal 1, fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E F G Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BBIA0132E H 5. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I 1. 2. J Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 113 or 114 and fuel pump relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K L M Check the following. ● Harness connectors B3, M16 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY Refer to EC-1268, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace fuel pump relay. EC-1267 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR25DE] 8. CHECK FUEL PUMP Refer to EC-1268, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel pump. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002MG FUEL PUMP RELAY Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No PBIB0098E FUEL PUMP 1. 2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 1 and 3. Resistance: Approximately 1.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] PBIB0928E Removal and Installation UBS002MH FUEL PUMP Refer to FL-3, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . EC-1268 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:92136 A UBS002MO The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. EC C D BBIA0133E E F G H SEF099X I J K L M EC-1269 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002MP BBWA0712E EC-1270 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM 49 R/Y Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) 67 B/W Sensor's ground CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 70 L Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON (Compressor operates.) Diagnostic Procedure E 1.0 - 4.0V F UBS002MQ 1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. A G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V I OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. J PBIB1188E K L M EC-1271 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. Stop engine. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0133E 5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. SEF509Y 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E9, F47 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair harness or connectors. 4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. EC-1272 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR25DE] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor ● Harness for open or short between TCM and refrigerant pressure sensor EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. F G 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. ● Harness connectors E10, F48 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace. K Removal and Installation UBS002MR L REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to MTC-82, "REFRIGERANT LINES" . M EC-1273 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode PFP:25350 UBS002MS Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF EC-1274 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002MT A A/T MODELS ULEV AND M/T MODELS EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0765E EC-1275 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] 84 P/U Electrical load signal (Headlamp signal) ● Lighting switch is 2ND position [Ignition switch: ON] ● Lighting switch is OFF EC-1276 DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0758E EC-1277 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 96 Y/G Heater fan switch Heater fan switch ON [Engine is running] ● Heater fan switch OFF EC-1278 DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V Approximately 5V ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0766E EC-1279 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] 93 L/W Electrical load signal (Rear window defogger signal) ● Rear window defogger switch is ON [Ignition switch: ON] ● Rear window defogger switch is OFF EC-1280 DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] A/T MODELS EXCEPT ULEV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0763E EC-1281 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] 84 P/U Electrical load signal (Headlamp signal) ● Lighting switch is 2ND position [Ignition switch: ON] ● Lighting switch is OFF EC-1282 DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0758E EC-1283 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 96 Y/G Heater fan switch Heater fan switch ON [Engine is running] ● Heater fan switch OFF EC-1284 DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V Approximately 5V ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0764E EC-1285 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] 93 Electrical load signal (Rear window defogger signal) L/W ● Rear window defogger switch is ON [Ignition switch: ON] ● Rear window defogger switch is OFF Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V UBS002MU 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-1 With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. Condition LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON Lighting switch: OFF OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB0103E 3. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-1 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position BATTERY VOLTAGE Lighting switch: OFF 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. MBIB0158E EC-1286 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] 4. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-2 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. Condition EC LOAD SIGNAL FAN control switch: ON in any position ON FAN control switch: OFF OFF C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 13. E PBIB0103E 5. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-2 F Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 96 and ground under the following conditions. Condition G Voltage FAN control switch: ON in any position Approximately 0V FAN control switch: OFF Approximately 5V H I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB1219E J 6. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-3 K With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions. Condition L LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch: ON ON Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF M OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 16. PBIB0103E EC-1287 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] 7. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-3 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 93 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Rear window defogger switch: ON BATTERY VOLTAGE Rear window defogger switch: OFF Approximately 0V OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 16. PBIB1773E 8. CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION 1. Start engine. 2. Turn the lighting switch ON at 2nd position. 3. Check that headlamps are illuminated. OK or NG OK (Models for USA)>>GO TO 9. OK (Models for Canada)>>GO TO 11. NG >> Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-10, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —" . 9. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect lighting switch harness connectors. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and lighting switch terminal 9, 10 under the following conditions. PBIB1774E Condition Continuity 1 Should exist 2 Should not exist 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 10. EC-1288 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E108, M19 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Diode M55 ● Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 11. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D 1. 2. 3. E 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect lighting switch harness connector E114. Disconnect daytime light control unit harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and lighting switch terminal 10, daytime light control unit terminal 6 under the following conditions. F G H I PBIB1803E J Condition Continuity 1 Should exist 2 Should not exist K 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 12. L 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness connectors E108, M19 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Diode M55 ● Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch ● Harness for open and short between ECM and daytime light control unit ● Harness for open and short between daytime light control unit and lighting switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1289 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] 13. CHECK HEATER FAN SWITCH FUNCTION 1. Start engine. 2. Turn the heater fan switch ON in any position. 3. Check that heater fan turns properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Refer to MTC-19, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" 14. CHECK HEATER FAN INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect air control connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 96 and air control terminal 8, fan control switch terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and air control, fan control switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 16. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION 1. Start engine. 2. Turn ON the rear window defogger switch. 3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 17. No >> Refer to GW-17, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" 17. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and rear window defogger relay terminals 5, 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 18. EC-1290 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR25DE] 18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors B1, M14 ● Harness connectors M58, F26 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and rear window defogger relay. >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 19. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC C D Perform EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E >> INSPECTION END F G H I J K L M EC-1291 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 UBS002MV When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal) Refer to EC-1319, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. BBIA0117E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002MW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) ● BRAKE SW2 (Stop lamp switch) ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION ● Brake pedal: Fully released ON ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF ● Brake pedal: Fully released OFF ● Brake pedal: Depressed ON Ignition switch: ON EC-1292 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002MX A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0316E EC-1293 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal fully released [Engine is running] ● Brake pedal slightly depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 P/L ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T) ASCD brake switch Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal is fully released ● Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T) Diagnostic Procedure BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS002MY 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. M/T models CONDITION INDICATION When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON A/T models CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal is depressed OFF When brake pedal is fully released ON SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. M/T models CONDITION When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage A/T models CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 4. EC-1294 MBIB0061E ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION EC INDICATION When brake pedal is released OFF When brake pedal is depressed ON C D SEC013D E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed F VOLTAGE Approximately 0V G Battery voltage H MBIB0060E I OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13. J 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M BBIA0118E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0799E EC-1295 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0117E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK (M/T models)>>GO TO 6. OK (A/T models)>> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB0857E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1296 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. A EC C 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D E Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G 9. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH H Refer to EC-1190, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. I 10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J K Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-1190, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. EC-1297 L M ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0105E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 (A/T models) or + (M/T models) and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. PBIB1225E PBIB0938E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC-1298 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR25DE] 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2 (A/T models) or EC (M/T models). Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART C D E Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, F27 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-1190, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. H I 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END J K L M EC-1299 ASCD INDICATOR [QR25DE] ASCD INDICATOR Component Description PFP:24814 UBS002MZ ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in unified meter and A/C amp. CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. ● CRUISE indicator is illuminated. ● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-1319, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002N0 Specification data are reference value. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION CRUISE LAMP ● SET LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed Illuminated CRUISE switch: Released Not illmivnated COAST/SET switch: Pressed Illuminated COAST/SET switch: Released Not illmivnated EC-1300 ASCD INDICATOR [QR25DE] Wiring Diagram UBS002N1 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0759E EC-1301 ASCD INDICATOR [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00BJB 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. ASCD INDICATOR CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed Illuminated CRUISE switch: Released Not illmivnated COAST/SET switch: Pressed Illuminated COAST/SET switch: Released Not illmivnated OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001, refer to EC-789, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION Does combination meter operate normally? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-6, "Combination Meter" . 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-781, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END EC-1302 DATA LINK CONNECTOR [QR25DE] DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram PFP:24814 A UBS002N3 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0743E EC-1303 DATA LINK CONNECTOR [QR25DE] BBWA0318E EC-1304 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR25DE] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description PFP:14950 A UBS002N4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC C D E F G PBIB1067E The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling. H I J K L M EC-1305 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR25DE] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING BBIA0293E NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. EC-1306 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR25DE] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0294E EC-1307 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR25DE] Component Inspection UBS002N5 EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B . 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C . 3. Release blocked port B . 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C . 5. Block port A and B . 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. PBIB1212E FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing. SEF445Y 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: Vacuum: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-963 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-904 . EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-969 . EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-976 . EC-1308 SEF943S EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR25DE] EVAP SERVICE PORT A Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. EC C SEF462UC Removal and Installation D UBS00BJG EVAP CANISTER E Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. F G H I J K PBIB1214E EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. L M PBIB1215E How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS002N6 CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: ● Do not start engine. ● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak. ● EC-1309 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR25DE] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. Turn ignition switch ON. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. PEF838U 6. 7. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. PEF917U 8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . SEF200U WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter. SEF462UC EC-1310 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR25DE] 3. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both EVAP canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve to make a closed EVAP system. A EC C D BBIA0292E 4. 5. 6. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-1306, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . E F G H I J K L M EC-1311 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR25DE] ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description PFP:00032 UBS002N7 PBIB1268E From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: ● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. ● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. ● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. – Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . – Disconnect battery ground cable. ● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. ● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. ● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. ● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. EC-1312 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR25DE] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002N8 A SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor C attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG D OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. F G H PBIB1213E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I Replace EVAP canister with a new one. J >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. L >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE M Refer to EC-1315, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC-1313 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR25DE] SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 1.9 kg (4.2 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. SEF596U 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check signal line and recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace filler neck tube. EC-1314 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR25DE] 7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A Refer to EC-1315, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC 8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE C Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. D 9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I E Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. F G 10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. H I J K SEF665U Component Inspection UBS002N9 L REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. – – – 3. 4. – – – Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-7, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B ), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. EC-1315 M ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR25DE] – Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0295E With GST 1. 2. – – 3. 4. – – – – Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-7, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck closed as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B ), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer with fuel level sensor unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel level sensor unit retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0295E EC-1316 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [QR25DE] POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description PFP:11810 A UBS002NA SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC C D E F G PBIB0492E This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. H I J K L PBIB1588E Component Inspection UBS002NB PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. PBIB1589E EC-1317 M POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [QR25DE] PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. 2. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. S-ET277 EC-1318 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [QR25DE] AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description PFP:18930 A UBS002NC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor ASCD brake switch Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC Brake pedal operation Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation ASCD clutch switch (MT models) Clutch pedal operation ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch (AT models) Gear position Combination meter Vehicle speed TCM Power train revolution C ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator D E BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. F G H SET OPERATION Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) I ACCEL OPERATION J If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. K CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. ● CANCEL switch is pressed ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models) ● A/T selector lever is shifted to P or N position (A/T models) If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. COAST OPERATION When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. ● Brake pedal is released. ● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models) ● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models) ● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) EC-1319 L M AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [QR25DE] Component Description UBS002ND ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-1174 . ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-1181 . ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-1181 . STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-1181 . ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-1043 . ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-1300 . EC-1320 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure PFP:00030 A UBS002NE Approximately 350 kPa (3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi) Fuel pressure at idle EC Idle Speed and Ignition Timing UBS002NF Target idle speed No-load*1 (in P or N position) 700±50 rpm Air conditioner: ON In P or N position 800 rpm or more Ignition timing In P or N position 15°±5° BTDC C *1: Under the following conditions: D ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) ● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position E Calculated Load Value UBS002NG F Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) At idle 10 - 35 At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35 G Mass Air Flow Sensor UBS002NH Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) Output voltage at idle H 0.8 - 1.3*V 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle* 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm* Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) I *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS002NI J Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 0.31 - 0.37 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) UBS002NJ L Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater M UBS002NK Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] K Ω UBS00BJH 2.3 - 4.3 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater UBS002NL Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00BJ6 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS002NM Refer to EC-934, "Component Inspection" . EC-1321 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS002NN Refer to EC-940, "Component Inspection" . Throttle Control Motor UBS002NO Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω Injector UBS002NP Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 12.1 - 12.9Ω Fuel Pump UBS002NQ Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1.0Ω EC-1322 I BODY A SECTION EXTERIOR & INTERIOR B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 7 SUNROOF/HEADLINER ....................................... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 CLIP AND FASTENER ............................................. 10 Description .............................................................. 10 BODY FRONT END .................................................. 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 FRONT BUMPER ASSEMBLY ............................ 13 BODY REAR END AND OPENER ........................... 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 REAR BUMPER ASSEMBLY .............................. 18 WINDSHIELD MOLDING .......................................... 21 Windshield and Rear Window ................................ 21 EXTERIOR ................................................................ 22 Removal and Installation ........................................ 22 SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM .......................................... 28 Removal and Installation ........................................ 28 DOOR FINISHER ...................................................... 31 Removal and Installation ........................................ 31 ROOF TRIM .............................................................. 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 TRUNK ROOM TRIM ................................................ 33 Removal and Installation ........................................ 33 E F G H EI J K L M EI-1 PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS001EH The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. EI-2 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EIS0016R The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit E Repairing the cause of noise F G SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tools EIS0016S Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Engine ear (J-39565) H Locating the noise EI J SIIA0995E K L M EI-3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00003 EIS0016T SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to EI-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. – Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping – Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. – Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. – Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. – Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. – Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. – Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. EI-4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: ● Close a door. ● Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. ● Rev the engine. ● Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. ● At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). ● Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E F CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. G LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool H (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: EI ● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. ● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. J Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. ● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing K the noise. ● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. ● Looking for loose components and contact marks. L Refer to EI-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. ● EI-5 M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0016U Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and upper/lower cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops EI-6 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. A TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINER B C D E Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. F G SEATS When isolating seat noises it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat H when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: EI 1. Headrest rods and holders 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seat back lock and bracket J These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. K UNDERHOOD Some interior noises may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noises include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. EI-7 L M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS0016V SBT843 EI-8 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H EI J K L M SBT844 EI-9 CLIP AND FASTENER CLIP AND FASTENER Description ● ● PFP:76906 EIS0016W Clips and fasteners in EI section correspond to the following numbers and symbols. Replace any clips and/or fasteners which are damaged during removal or installation. Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation C101 SBF302H SBF367BA SBT095 SBF423H SBF258G SBF708E MBT080A SBF638CA MBF519B MBF520B SBF104B SBF147B C103 C203 C205 C206 CE103 EI-10 CLIP AND FASTENER Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation A B CE107 C SBF411H SBF767B D CE117 E SBF174D SBF175DA F CF110 G SBF648B SBF649B H CF118 EI SBF151D SBF259G J K CG101 L SBF145B SBF085B M CS101 SBF078B EI-11 SBF992G CLIP AND FASTENER Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation CR103 SBF768B SBF770B WBT072 WBT073 Metal Clip EI-12 BODY FRONT END BODY FRONT END Removal and Installation ● ● ● ● ● PFP:H5022 A EIS0016X When removing or installing hood, place a cloth or other padding on front fender panels and cowl top. This prevents vehicle body from being scratched. Bumper fascia is made of plastic. Do not use excessive force and be sure to keep oil away from it. Hood adjustment: Adjust at hinge portion. Hood lock adjustment: After adjusting, check hood lock control operation. Apply a coat of grease to hood lock engaging mechanism. Hood opener: Do not attempt to bend cable forcibly. Doing so increases effort required to unlock hood. FRONT BUMPER ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Remove screws securing left and right front fog lamps, and remove the lamps (if equipped); or remove filler trim panel. Remove four clips C205 from the top of the front grille, pull up to unclip bottom and remove. Remove clips C205 and screws located on front side of fender protector at wheel opening. Remove three bolts from the air deflector. Remove two bolts securing lower side of front bumper fascia. Pull off front bumper fascia and energy absorber. Remove four nuts securing bumper reinforcement, then remove bumper reinforcement. Remove four bolts securing front bumper side stays. Remove front bumper side stays. Remove the air dam if necessary. B C D E F G H EI J K L M EI-13 BODY FRONT END QG18DE WBT038 EI-14 BODY FRONT END A B C LBT039 D E F G H EI J K L M EI-15 BODY FRONT END QR25DE LIIA0119E EI-16 BODY FRONT END A B C LIIA0120E D E F G H EI J K L M EI-17 BODY REAR END AND OPENER BODY REAR END AND OPENER Removal and Installation ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:F2022 EIS0016Y When removing or installing trunk lid, place a cloth or other padding on rear fender panels. This prevents vehicle body from being scratched. Bumper fascia is made of plastic. Do not use excessive force and be sure to keep oil away from it. Trunk lid adjustment: Adjust at hinge-trunk lid portion for proper trunk lid fit. Trunk lid lock system adjustment: Adjust striker so that it is in the center of the lock. After adjustment, check trunk lid lock operation. Opener cable: Do not attempt to bend cable using excessive force. After installation, make sure that trunk lid and fuel filler lid open smoothly. REAR BUMPER ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove two clips C205 from lower side and four clips C205 from upper side of rear bumper fascia. Remove two screws from each quarter panel side. Remove two screws from each upper side of fascia into bumper side brackets. Remove rear bumper fascia. Remove energy absorber from rear bumper reinforcement. Remove four nuts securing bumper reinforcement and remove bumper reinforcement. Remove four bolts securing each bumper side stay, and remove bumper side stays. EI-18 BODY REAR END AND OPENER A B C D E F G H EI J K L M WIIA0197E EI-19 BODY REAR END AND OPENER WBT086 EI-20 WINDSHIELD MOLDING WINDSHIELD MOLDING Windshield and Rear Window PFP:72700 A EIS0016Z B C D E F G H EI J K L M WBT114 EI-21 EXTERIOR EXTERIOR Removal and Installation PFP:AAAAA EIS00170 WBT054 EI-22 EXTERIOR A B C D E F G H EI J K L M WBT113 EI-23 EXTERIOR LIIA0009E EI-24 EXTERIOR A B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIIA0148E EI-25 EXTERIOR LIIA0010E EI-26 EXTERIOR A B C D E F G H LBT065 EI J K L M LBT059 EI-27 SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation PFP:76913 EIS00171 CAUTION: ● Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes. 1. Remove A/T finisher or M/T shift lever boot. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove the console. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove front and rear seats. Refer to SE-3, "Removal and Installation" (front), or SE-5, "Removal and Installation" (rear). 4. Remove kick plates. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Remove dash side lower garnish. Remove body side welts. Remove front seat belt floor anchor bolt. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear seat belt floor anchor bolt. Refer to SB-5, "Removal and Installation" . Remove center pillar lower garnish. Remove adjuster cover and pillar shoulder bolt. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove floor carpet. 12. Remove center pillar upper garnish. 13. Remove front pillar garnish. 14. Remove rear pillar garnish. 15. Remove parcel shelf. 16. Remove center rear seat back finisher. 17. Remove side rear seat back finishers. EI-28 SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM A B C D E F G H EI J K L M WBT128 EI-29 SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM WBT044 EI-30 DOOR FINISHER DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation PFP:80900 A EIS00172 CAUTION: Wrap the tip of a flat-bladed screwdriver with cloth when prying pawls from door trim. 1. Remove the door pull finisher(s). 2. Remove power window switch(es) finisher(s), then disconnect the connector(s) (models equipped with power windows). ● Do not lift the front of the power window switch assembly. 3. Remove window regulator handle (models without power windows). 4. Remove screws and disconnect clips C101 and clips C103 from door. 5. Reach behind and carefully pull door trim panel from inside handle until finisher pops off. 6. Lift out door trim. B C D E F G H EI J LIIA0149E K L M EI-31 ROOF TRIM ROOF TRIM Removal and Installation 1. 2. 3. PFP:73910 EIS00173 4. 5. Fully tilt front right and left seat backs backward. Remove front pillar garnish, front and rear kick plates. Refer to EI-28, "Removal and Installation" . Remove center pillar lower and upper garnish, and rear pillar garnish. Refer to EI-28, "Removal and Installation" . Remove sun visors. Remove interior lamp. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Remove assist grips. Remove sunroof welt (if equipped) and door welts. Remove sunroof switch (if equipped) and map lamp assembly. Remove clips attached to roof. Take out headlining from the front passenger door. WBT048 EI-32 TRUNK ROOM TRIM TRUNK ROOM TRIM Removal and Installation PFP:84920 A EIS00174 B C D E F G H EI J LBT049 K L M EI-33 TRUNK ROOM TRIM EI-34 B ENGINE A SECTION ENGINE MECHANICAL EM C D CONTENTS QG18DE PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Draining Coolant ............................. 4 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping .............. 4 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ............. 4 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ......................................................................... 4 Precautions for Assembly and Installation ............... 4 Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ......................... 4 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 5 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 5 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 5 Rocker Cover Bolts .................................................. 6 PREPARATION ........................................................... 7 Special Service Tools ............................................... 7 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 9 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................11 Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Troubleshooting ...................................................................11 NVH TROUBLESHOOTING — ENGINE NOISE....11 OUTER COMPONENT PARTS ................................ 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 OIL PAN .................................................................... 16 Components ........................................................... 16 Removal ................................................................. 16 Installation .............................................................. 17 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ........................ 19 Removal and Installation ........................................ 19 REMOVAL ........................................................... 19 INSTALLATION ................................................... 20 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............... 22 ROCKER COVER ..................................................... 23 Removal and Installation ........................................ 23 REMOVAL ........................................................... 23 INSTALLATION ................................................... 24 CAMSHAFT .............................................................. 26 Removal and Installation ........................................ 26 REMOVAL ........................................................... 26 INSTALLATION ................................................... 29 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 33 Valve Clearance ..................................................... 35 INSPECTION ...................................................... 35 ADJUSTING ........................................................ 36 TIMING CHAIN .......................................................... 39 Components ........................................................... 39 Removal ................................................................. 40 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL .......................... 45 INSTALLATION ...................................................... 45 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................... 48 OIL SEAL .................................................................. 49 Replacement .......................................................... 49 VALVE OIL SEAL ................................................ 49 FRONT OIL SEAL ............................................... 49 REAR OIL SEAL ................................................. 51 CYLINDER HEAD ..................................................... 52 On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 52 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ......... 52 Removal and Installation ........................................ 53 REMOVAL ........................................................... 53 INSTALLATION ................................................... 54 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 56 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 56 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 57 Inspection after Disassembly .................................. 58 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ........................ 58 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE .............................. 58 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ......................... 59 VALVE SEATS ..................................................... 60 REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS ................................................................. 60 VALVE DIMENSIONS .......................................... 61 VALVE SPRING ................................................... 61 ENGINE ASSEMBLY ................................................ 62 Removal and Installation ........................................ 62 REMOVAL ........................................................... 63 INSTALLATION ................................................... 65 CYLINDER BLOCK .................................................. 66 Components ........................................................... 66 Removal and Installation ........................................ 67 EM-1 E F G H I J K L M Disassembly ........................................................... 67 PISTON AND CRANKSHAFT ............................. 67 Inspection ............................................................... 68 PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE .......... 68 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ..................... 69 PISTON RING END GAP .................................... 69 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ....... 69 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION AND WEAR... 70 PISTON-TO-BORE CLEARANCE ....................... 70 CRANKSHAFT .................................................... 71 BEARING CLEARANCE ..................................... 72 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ...................................................... 75 REPLACEMENT OF CONNECTING ROD BUSHING (SMALL END) .................................... 76 FLYWHEEL RUNOUT ......................................... 76 Assembly ................................................................ 76 PISTON ............................................................... 76 CRANKSHAFT .................................................... 77 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 81 General Specifications ............................................ 81 Compression Pressure ........................................... 81 Cylinder Head ......................................................... 81 Valve ....................................................................... 82 VALVE .................................................................. 82 VALVE SPRING ................................................... 82 VALVE LIFTER .................................................... 82 VALVE CLEARANCE ........................................... 82 VALVE GUIDE ..................................................... 83 AVAILABLE SHIMS ............................................. 83 VALVE SEAT ....................................................... 85 VALVE SEAT RESURFACE LIMIT ...................... 86 Camshaft and Camshaft Bearing ........................... 86 Cylinder Block ......................................................... 87 Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin ......................... 87 PISTON ............................................................... 87 PISTON RING ..................................................... 88 PISTON PIN ........................................................ 88 Connecting Rod ...................................................... 88 Crankshaft .............................................................. 89 Main Bearing .......................................................... 90 STANDARD ......................................................... 90 UNDERSIZE ........................................................ 90 Connecting Rod Bearing ........................................ 90 STANDARD SIZE ................................................ 90 UNDERSIZE ........................................................ 90 Bearing Clearance .................................................. 90 Miscellaneous Components .................................... 90 QR25DE PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 91 Precautions for Draining Coolant ............................ 91 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ............. 91 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ............ 91 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ........................................................................ 91 Precautions for Assembly and Installation .............. 91 Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ........................91 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................92 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ........92 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE...92 PREPARATION .........................................................93 Special Service Tools ..............................................93 Commercial Service Tools ......................................95 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ..............................................97 NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise ....................97 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. ......................................................98 DRIVE BELTS ............................................................99 Checking Drive Belts ...............................................99 Tension Adjustment .................................................99 Removal and Installation .........................................99 REMOVAL ............................................................99 INSTALLATION ....................................................99 Removal and Installation of Drive Belt Auto-tensioner .................................................................... 100 REMOVAL .......................................................... 100 INSTALLATION .................................................. 100 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ............................. 101 Removal and Installation ....................................... 101 REMOVAL .......................................................... 101 INSTALLATION .................................................. 102 CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT .... 102 INTAKE MANIFOLD ................................................ 103 Removal and Installation ....................................... 103 REMOVAL .......................................................... 103 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ...................... 105 INSTALLATION .................................................. 106 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 107 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST ........................................................................ 108 Removal and Installation ....................................... 108 REMOVAL .......................................................... 108 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ...................... 109 INSTALLATION .................................................. 109 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ................................ 110 Removal and Installation ....................................... 110 REMOVAL .......................................................... 110 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ...................... 111 INSTALLATION .................................................. 112 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 112 IGNITION COIL ....................................................... 113 Removal and Installation ....................................... 113 REMOVAL .......................................................... 113 INSTALLATION .................................................. 113 SPARK PLUG .......................................................... 114 Removal and Installation ....................................... 114 REMOVAL .......................................................... 114 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ...................... 114 INSTALLATION .................................................. 115 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ....................... 116 Removal and Installation ....................................... 116 REMOVAL .......................................................... 116 INSTALLATION .................................................. 117 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 118 EM-2 ROCKER COVER ....................................................119 Removal and Installation .......................................119 REMOVAL ..........................................................119 INSTALLATION ................................................. 120 CAMSHAFT ............................................................ 121 Removal and Installation ...................................... 121 REMOVAL ......................................................... 121 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 123 INSTALLATION ................................................. 126 Valve Clearance ................................................... 128 INSPECTION .................................................... 128 VALVE ADJUSTMENT ...................................... 129 TIMING CHAIN ....................................................... 131 Removal and Installation ...................................... 131 REMOVAL ......................................................... 132 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 134 INSTALLATION ................................................. 135 OIL SEAL ................................................................ 139 Removal and installation of Valve Oil Seal ........... 139 REMOVAL ......................................................... 139 INSTALLATION ................................................. 139 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ........... 139 REMOVAL ......................................................... 139 INSTALLATION ................................................. 140 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal ........... 141 REMOVAL ......................................................... 141 INSTALLATION ................................................. 141 CYLINDER HEAD ................................................... 143 On-Vehicle Service ............................................... 143 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ...... 143 Removal and Installation ...................................... 145 REMOVAL ......................................................... 146 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 146 INSTALLATION ................................................. 146 Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 148 DISASSEMBLY ................................................. 148 ASSEMBLY ....................................................... 149 Inspection After Disassembly ............................... 150 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ...................... 150 VALVE DIMENSIONS ....................................... 150 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE ............................ 150 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ....................... 151 VALVE SEAT CONTACT ................................... 152 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT ......................... 152 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ...................... 153 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ............................. 154 ENGINE ASSEMBLY .............................................. 155 Removal and Installation ...................................... 155 REMOVAL ......................................................... 156 INSTALLATION ................................................. 158 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............. 158 CYLINDER BLOCK ................................................ 159 Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 159 DISASSEMBLY ................................................. 160 ASSEMBLY ....................................................... 162 How to Select Piston and Bearing ........................ 167 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 167 HOW TO SELECT A PISTON ........................... 168 HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING .................................................................... 169 HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING .............. 171 Inspection After Disassembly ............................... 174 CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE .................. 174 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ......... 175 PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ........ 175 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ................... 176 PISTON RING END GAP .................................. 176 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION .... 177 CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ...... 177 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ......................................... 177 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION .................... 178 INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING .................................................................... 178 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE . 179 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL .......................................................... 180 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL .......................................................... 180 OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT ............................................................... 181 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT .................................. 181 OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING .......................................................... 181 OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING ............. 182 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING .............. 182 OUTER DIAMETER OF LOWER CYLINDER BLOCK MOUNTING BOLT ................................ 182 OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLT ................................................................. 183 MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL) ............................................................ 183 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 184 Standard and Limit ................................................ 184 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................... 184 DRIVE BELTS ................................................... 184 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD ................................................................. 184 SPARK PLUG .................................................... 184 CYLINDER HEAD ............................................. 185 VALVE ............................................................... 185 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING ........ 188 CYLINDER BLOCK ........................................... 188 PISTON, PISTON RING, AND PISTON PIN ..... 189 CONNECTING ROD ......................................... 190 CRANKSHAFT .................................................. 191 MAIN BEARING ................................................ 192 CONNECTING ROD BEARING ........................ 193 Miscellaneous Components ................................. 193 EM-3 A EM C D E F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Draining Coolant ● PFP:00001 EBS00GJK Drain coolant when engine is cooled. Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ● ● ● Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area. Release fuel pressure before any removal or disassembly. After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage. Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – – – ● ● ● EBS00GJO Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts. When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, follow the specifications. Always replace the old with a new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring. Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction and blockage. Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust. Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well. Bleed the air trapped within the system after draining the coolant. Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections. After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems for leakage or rattles. Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ● EBS00GJN Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and replace if necessary. Precautions for Assembly and Installation ● EBS00GJM When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful operations. Use maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces. Cover openings of engine system with tape or equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials. Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly. When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, follow the specifications. Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ● EBS00GJL EBS00GJP Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts. Cylinder head bolts Lower cylinder block bolts Connecting rod cap bolts Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angular tightening) Do not use a torque value for final tightening. The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step. Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil. EM-4 PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00GJQ A REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing the mounting bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface using Tool and remove the liquid gasket sealing. Tool number EM : KV10111100 (J37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap (1) the cutter where the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the cutter (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. C D PBIC0002E E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface. ● Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. Attach the sealant tube to Tool. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . F G H PBIC0003E Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified location. Tool number ● ● ● ● ● ● I J : WS 3993 0000 ( – ) If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of this manual. Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component. If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. Do not retighten after the installation. After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . K L WBIA0251E M SEM159F CAUTION: Follow all specific instructions in this manual. EM-5 PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] Rocker Cover Bolts EBS00EWP NOTE: Remove and install rocker cover bolts with a socket or wrench only. EM-6 PREPARATION [QG18DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00CE8 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. EM Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST0501S000 ( — ) Engine stand assembly 1. ST05011000 ( — ) Engine stand 2. ST05012000 ( — ) Base Description Disassembling and assembling C D NT042 Engine attachment assembly 1. KV10106500 ( — ) Engine attachment 2. KV10113300 ( — ) Sub-attachment E Overhauling engine F G NT029 H ST10120000 (J24239-O1) Cylinder head bolt wrench Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt a: 13 mm (0.51 in) dia. b: 12 mm (0.47 in) c: 10 mm (0.39 in) I J NT583 KV10116200 (J26336-B) Valve spring compressor 1. KV10115900 (J26336-20) Attachment 2. KV10109220 ( — ) Adapter Disassembling valve mechanism K L WEM044 KV10115600 (J38958) Valve oil seal drift Installing valve oil seal NT024 KV10107902 (J38959) Valve oil seal puller 1. KV10116100 Valve oil seal puller adapter Displacing valve lip seal NT605 EM-7 M PREPARATION [QG18DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description J-45074 Valve shim lifter set 1. 45074-1 Camshaft pliers 2. 45074-2 Lifter holding tool Changing valve lifter shims NT041 EM03470000 (J8037) Piston ring compressor Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore NT044 KV10111100 (J37228) Seal cutter Removing oil pan NT046 WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket NT052 KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Angle wrench Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder head, etc. in angle. NT014 ST16610001 (J23907) Pilot bushing puller Removing pilot bushing NT045 KV1017100 (J36471-A) Front (heated) oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor with 22 m (0.87 in) hexagon nut NT379 EM-8 PREPARATION [QG18DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 A EM C LEM054 KV101056S0 ( — ) Rear gear stopper 1. KV10105620 ( — ) Adapter 2. KV10105610 ( — ) Plate assembly Preventing crankshaft from rotating D E NT773 J-45488 Quick connector release F Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room G H PBIC0198E Commercial Service Tools EBS00CE9 I Tool name Kent-Moore No. Description Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plug J K NT047 Crankshaft pulley puller Removing crankshaft pulley L M PBIC0887E Valve seat cutter set Finishing valve seat dimensions NT048 EM-9 PREPARATION [QG18DE] Tool name Kent-Moore No. Description Piston ring expander Removing and installing piston ring NT030 Valve guide drift Removing and installing valve guide Intake & Exhaust: a: 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia. b: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia. NT015 Valve guide reamer Reaming valve guide 1 or hole for oversize valve guide 2 Intake & Exhaust: d1 : 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia. d2 : 9.685 mm (0.3813 in) dia. NT016 Front oil seal drift Installing front oil seal a: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia. b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. NT049 Rear oil seal drift Installing rear oil seal a: 103 mm (4.06 in) dia. b: 84 mm (3.31 in) dia. NT049 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner J-43897-18 J-43897-12 Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.) a: J-43897-18 [18 mm dia.] for zirconium oxygen sensor b: J-43897-12 [12 mm dia.] for titania oxygen sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 EM-10 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QG18DE] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Troubleshooting PFP:00003 A EBS00CEA NVH TROUBLESHOOTING — ENGINE NOISE Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. 1. Locate the area where noise occurs. 2. Confirm the type of noise. 3. Specify the operating condition of engine. 4. Check specified noise source. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. EM C D Operating condition of engine Location of noise Top of Engine Rocker Cover Cylinder Head Crankshaft Pulley Cylinder Block (Side of Engine) Oil pan Type of noise Source of noise Reference page Before warmup After warmup When starting When idling When racing While driving Ticking or click C A — A B — Tappet noise Valve clearance EM-35 Rattle C A — A B C Camshaft bearing noise Camshaft journal clearance Camshaft runout EM-33 , EM-34 F Slap or knock — A — B B — Piston pin noise Piston and piston pin clearance Connecting rod bushing clearance EM-68 , EM-75 G Slap or rap A — — B B A Piston slap noise Piston-to-bore clearance Piston ring side clearance Piston ring end gap Connecting rod bend and torsion EM-68, EM-69 , EM-69 ,EM-69 Connecting rod bearing noise Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end) Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small end) EM-74 , EM-76 Knock A B C B B B Check item E Knock A B — A B C Main bearing noise Main bearing oil clearance Crankshaft runout EM-72 , EM-71 Front of Engine Timing Chain Cover Tapping or ticking A A — B B B Timing chain and chain tensioner noise Timing chain cracks and wear Timing chain tensioner operation EM-45 Front of Engine Squeak or fizzing A B — B — C Drive belts (sticking or slipping) Drive belts deflection MA-16 Creaking A B A B A B Drive belts (slipping) Idler pulley bearing operation Squall or creak A B — B A B Water pump noise Water pump operation A: Closely related B: Related C: Sometimes related —: Not related EM-11 H I J K L CO-11 M NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QG18DE] WBIA0061E EM-12 OUTER COMPONENT PARTS [QG18DE] OUTER COMPONENT PARTS Removal and Installation PFP:00100 A EBS00CEC EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0112E EM-13 OUTER COMPONENT PARTS [QG18DE] 1. Oil pressure switch 2. Air relief plug 3. Intake manifold 4. Intake manifold upper support 5. Intake manifold rear supports 6. Oil filter 7. Thermostat 8. Water pump 9. Water pump pulley 10. Support container 11. Container gusset 12. Compressor bracket WBIA0292E 1. Throttle body 2. Fuel tube 3. Injector 4. Swirl control position sensor (SULEV only) 5. Intake manifold 6. Fuel tube spacer 7. Swirl control valve (SULEV only) 8. O-rings 9. Clip 10. Gasket CAUTION: ● Perform "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of electronic throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-47, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . EM-14 OUTER COMPONENT PARTS [QG18DE] ● Perform "Idle Air Volume Learning" when harness connector of electronic throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC-47, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . A EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0293E 1. Crankshaft pulley 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor 4. Exhaust manifold 5. Exhaust manifold cover 6. Thermal transmitter 7. Drain plug 8. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 9. TWC (manifold) 10. TWC cover 11. Ignition coil 12. Spark plug 13. Washer 14. Gasket EM-15 3. Gasket OIL PAN [QG18DE] OIL PAN Components PFP:11110 EBS00CED WBIA0004E Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EBS00CEE Remove engine RH side undercover splash shield. Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" . Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the exhaust manifold support. Remove the engine gusset. WEM049 EM-16 OIL PAN [QG18DE] A EM C SEM110G 6. 7. a. D Remove rear plate cover (lower) (A/T models). Remove oil pan. Loosen and remove nuts and bolts of oil pan in order shown. E F G LBIA0288E b. c. Insert Tool between cylinder block and oil pan. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage aluminum mating face. ● Do not insert screwdriver, or oil pan flange will be damaged. Slide Tool by tapping on the side of the Tool with a hammer. H I J K SEM365E Installation 1. EBS00CEF Use a scraper to remove old RTV Silicone Sealant from mating surface of oil pan. ● Also remove old RTV Silicone Sealant from mating surface of cylinder block. M SEM295C EM-17 L OIL PAN [QG18DE] 2. Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant to mating surface of oil pan using Tool. ● Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Apply to groove on mating surface. ● Allow 7 mm (0.28 in) clearance around bolt holes. SEM015E ● ● Be sure RTV Silicone Sealant diameter is 3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in). Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant. SEM296CA 3. 4. Install oil pan. ● Tighten oil pan nuts and bolts in the order shown. ● Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. SEM072F EM-18 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QG18DE] FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation PFP:16600 A EBS00CEG EM C D E F WBIA0294E 1. Fuel tube 2. Fuel tube spacer 4. O-rings 5. Clip 3. G Fuel injector H CAUTION: ● Apply new engine oil when installing the parts that specified to do so in the figure. ● Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown above. I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Disconnect the intake manifold bracket. Remove the PCV hose and bracket. Disconnect the sub-harness for the fuel injectors. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. ● Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number J K L : J-45488 M WBIA0148E a. Remove quick connector cap. LBIA0090E EM-19 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QG18DE] b. c. d. 6. a. b. 7. a. b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as WBIA0295E shown. ● Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. ● Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. ● Avoid fire and sparks. ● Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. When removing fuel hose quick connector at vehicle piping side, perform as follows. Remove quick connector cap. Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. WBIA0253E ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte etc. from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal. ● Do not remove the remaining retainer on tube. ● When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one. Retainer color: Green. ● To keep clean the connecting portion and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags or something similar. Remove the fuel injectors from the fuel tube, as follows: Release the clip, and remove the fuel injector. Pull the fuel injector straight out of the fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the nozzle. ● Avoid any impact, such as dropping the fuel injector. ● Do not disassemble or adjust the fuel injector. INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install new O-rings on the fuel injectors. ● Lubricate the new O-rings lightly with new engine oil. ● Be careful not to scratch the injector during installation. Also be careful not to twist or stretch the O-ring. If the O-ring was stretched while it was installed, do not insert it into the fuel tube immediately. EM-20 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QG18DE] a. b. c. Install the fuel injector into the fuel tube with the following procedure: ● Do not reuse the clip, replace it with a new one. ● Insert the clip into the clip mounting groove on the fuel injector. ● Insert clip so that lug A of fuel injector matches notch A of the clip. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. ● Insert it while matching it to the axial center. ● Insert fuel injector so that projection B of fuel injector matches notch B of the clip. ● Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on the clip. ● Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. Install the fuel tube assembly with the following procedure: ● Insert the tip of each fuel injector into the intake manifold. A EM C D E F G PBIC1021E ● Tighten the fuel tube nuts in two steps in the order shown. Step 1 Step 2 H : 12 - 14 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb) : 17 - 24 N·m (1.7 - 2.4 kg-m, 12 - 17 ft-lb) I CAUTION: ● After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage. J WBIA0116E K CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (ENGINE SIDE) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and there is no damage to them. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube tip end. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ● Insert fuel tube into quick connector until the top spool on fuel tubes is inserted completely and the second level spool is positioned slightly below the quick connector bottom end. CAUTION: ● Hold at position "A" as shown, when inserting the fuel tube into the quick connector. ● Carefully align to center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to the O-ring inside the quick connector. ● Insert the fuel tube until you hear a “click” sound and KBIA0272E actually feel the engagement. ● To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step. Before clamping the fuel hose with the hose clamp, pull the quick connector hard by hand, holding at the "A" position, as shown. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come off of the fuel tube. NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb). Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint. EM-21 L M FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QG18DE] Direct arrow mark on quick connector cap to upper side (fuel hose side). Install fuel hose to hose clamp. ● 6. KBIA0298E CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (VEHICLE PIPING SIDE) 1. 2. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and there is no damage to them. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ● Insert fuel tube until a click is heard. ● Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint. Direct arrow mark on quick connector cap upper side. ● Install fuel hose to hose clamp. PBIC0662E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on hard to see points of the fuel system. CAUTION: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as the engine becomes extremely hot. EM-22 ROCKER COVER [QG18DE] ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation PFP:13264 A EBS00EWR EM C D E F G H I J WBIA0359E K 1. Blowby hose 2. Rocker cover 3. 4. PCV hose 5. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve 6. O-ring 7. Oil filler cap 8. Gasket Rocker cover oil seal 9. PCV control valve L 10. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Move the harnesses on top surface and right side of rocker cover aside. Remove the ignition coils. Disconnect the PCV hose and blowby hose from the rocker cover. If necessary, remove the PCV control valve. Disconnect the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). If necessary, remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). CAUTION: ● Do not shock it. ● Do not disassemble it. ● The tip of the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) generates a strong magnetic field. Keep it away from metallic particles or objects affected by magnetic fields. EM-23 M ROCKER COVER [QG18DE] 7. 8. 9. Loosen the bolts in the order shown. If replacement is necessary, remove the rocker cover oil seal using a flat-head screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rocker cover. Remove the rocker cover oil seal using a suitable tool. WBIA0149E INSTALLATION 1. Install the rocker cover oil seal. ● Using a drift with outer diameter 97 mm (3.82 in) and inner diameter 83 mm (3.27 in) to 88 mm (3.46 in), press in oil seal. NOTE: There are two types of oil seal. If oil seal with flat bottom surface is pressed in, drift with any inner diameter can be used. ● Press oil seal in until it is flush with installation surface. KBIA1377E 2. 3. Install the gasket on top of No. 1 camshaft bracket. ● Position the gasket aligning its shape with camshaft bracket side. Align positioning pin with gasket holes, and install. Install the gasket (for circumference, square type) to installation groove of rocker cover. KBIA1379E 4. Apply sealant to the positions shown, then install rocker cover. ● Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . PBIC0555E EM-24 ROCKER COVER [QG18DE] 5. Tighten the rocker cover bolts to specified torque in two steps, in the numerical order as shown. Bolt length: Bolt position 25 mm (0.98 in) : 1 65 mm (2.56 in) : 2 20 mm (0.79 in) Except the above (all circumference) 6. C KBIA1376E D : 8.82 - 10.78 N·m (0.9 - 1.0, 78 - 95 in-lb) : 7.2 - 10.8 N·m (0.73 - 1.1, 64 - 95 in-lb) E F Install the PCV control valve. PCV control valve 8. EM Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). ● Tighten bolt after fully inserting into rocker cover. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) bolt 7. Torque : 8.82 - 10.78 N-m (0.9 1.0 kg-m, 78 - 95 in-lb) : 8.82 - 10.78 N-m (0.9 1.0 kg-m, 78 - 95 in-lb) : 6.9 - 9.5 N-m (0.70 0.97 kg-m, 61 - 84 in-lb) A : 19.6 - 29.4 N·m (2.0 - 2.9 kg-m, 15 - 21 ft-lb) G Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. H I J K L M EM-25 CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation PFP:13001 EBS00EWS WBIA0297E 1. Camshaft brackets 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 4. Washer 5. Cylinder head front cover 6. Chain tensioner 7. Valve lifter 8. Adjusting shim (if equipped) 9. Camshaft (EXH) 10. Camshaft (INT) CAUTION: Prior to installation, apply engine oil to the parts marked in the figure. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. a. b. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-23, "ROCKER COVER" . Remove the cylinder head front cover. ● Move harness secured to the front surface beforehand. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. Remove the RH splash cover. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise and align the yellow paint mark with the timing indicator. MBIB0193E EM-26 CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] c. d. Confirm mating marks stamped on intake and exhaust sprockets are located as shown. ● If not, rotate crankshaft pulley as shown and align them. Referring to mating marks on the intake and exhaust camshaft sprockets, put paint mating marks on timing chain links. A EM C MBIB0194E D 4. a. Set the intake camshaft sprocket to the most advanced position. CAUTION: Removal and installation of the intake camshaft sprocket is required to maintain the most advanced position because of the following reasons. Therefore, follow the procedure exactly. ● Sprocket and vane (camshaft in front) rotate and become offset within the specific angle range. ● When engine is stationary, the vane is located at the most retarded position. The vane is fixed to the sprocket by an MBIB0195E internal lock pin. Therefore, it does not rotate. ● If the camshaft sprocket mounting bolts are turned under the above circumstance, the lock pin will be damaged by lateral load (shear stress). It may cause non-standard operation. NOTE: "Rotating direction" means direction viewed from the engine front side. CAUTION: Do not remove the chain tensioner before performing this step. Using a wrench, hold the hexagonal part so that the intake camshaft does not move. E F G H I J K L MBIB0196E b. Using an air gun, apply air pressure to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve advance side oil passage on the top surface of the No. 1 camshaft bracket. Compressed air pressure : 300 kPa (3.06 kg/cm2, 43.5 psi) or more Keep applying air pressure until step "d" is completed. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the oil passage from interference of the air gun tip. ● Thoroughly wipe off the oil before applying air pressure. When applying air pressure, cover around the air gun using a rag. Wear protective glasses if necessary. ● EM-27 MBIB0197E M CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] c. d. e. Slowly turn the intake camshaft in direction A (counterclockwise: intake manifold side). ● Perform while applying air pressure. CAUTION: Be careful not to dislocate the camshaft retaining spanner. During the above step, an operating click (a sound indicating internal lock pin is disengaged) is heard from the inside of the intake camshaft sprocket. After hearing it, slowly turn intake camshaft in direction B (clockwise: exhaust manifold side), and set to most advanced position. WBIA0130E ● Perform while applying air pressure. ● When the vane rotates solely against sprocket, lock pin is disengaged even if operating click is not heard. ● If the lock pin is not disengaged, jiggle the camshaft with a wrench. ● If the lock pin is not disengaged with the above step, tap the intake camshaft in front with a plastic hammer. The following status indicates that the most advanced position is achieved: vane starts rotating on it own, then the sprocket also starts rotating when camshaft is turned. When above status is achieved, this step is complete. ● The most advanced position is confirmed when the stopper pin groove and lock pin breathing groove are aligned. MBIB0198E f. 5. a. b. c. d. Stop the air and insert stopper pin [approximately 3 mm (0.12 in) dia., length of inserted part is approximately 15 mm (0.59 in)] into pinhole on camshaft sprocket to fix the most advanced position. CAUTION: Load (spring reaction force) is not applied to stopper pin. Pin is easily detached. Therefore, secure it with vinyl tape to prevent detachment. NOTE: In the figure, an Allen wrench [a/f 2.5 mm (0.091 in), short part: approximately 20 mm (0.79 in), long part: approximately 50 mm (1.97 in)] is used for stopper pin as an example. Remove the chain tensioner. Press the plate down and release the stopper tab. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body until it stops. Secure the plate by passing the stopper pin (such as a hard wire) through the plate hole and body hole. (Plunger is also secured.) Remove the chain tensioner bolts and remove the chain tensioner. PBIC0966E MBIB0201E EM-28 CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] 6. While holding the hexagonal part of the camshaft with a wrench, loosen the intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket bolts and remove the intake and exhaust camshaft sprockets. CAUTION: ● Avoid securing the camshaft at other than the hexagonal part and loosening bolts by utilizing tension of timing chain. ● After this step is completed, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately in order to prevent interference between the valves and pistons. A EM C LBIA0292E D 7. a. b. c. d. 8. 9. Handle the intake camshaft sprocket as follows. CAUTION: ● Secure the stopper pin with vinyl tape to prevent detachment. ● Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to impact. ● Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen the 3 bolts on front surface.) NOTE: If stopper pin is detached and the lock pin is engaged at the most retarded position during removal, recover as follows. MBIB0202E Reinstall the stopper pin to intake camshaft, and tighten the intake camshaft sprocket bolts so that air does not leak. CAUTION: Tightening torque for the bolts must be minimum so that air does not leak, preventing damage to the internal lock pin. Apply air pressure to disengage the lock pin, and turn the vane to the most advanced position. (This step can be performed with the timing chain removed.) Reinstall stopper pin. Remove intake camshaft sprocket from the camshaft. Loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in the order shown, and remove the camshaft brackets and camshafts. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage signal plate on rear end of intake camshaft. Remove adjusting shims and valve lifters. ● Note positions, and set them aside in the order removed. 1. Install the valve lifter and adjusting shims. ● Install them in the same position from which they were removed. ● Install adjusting shim with its stamped mark facing down (valve lifter side). EM-29 F G H I J K L M WBIA0150E INSTALLATION E CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] 2. Install the camshafts. ● Intake and exhaust camshafts are distinguished by checking difference between front and rear end shapes. MBIB0204E ● Install camshafts so that the dowel pins on the front side are positioned as shown. PBIC0967E 3. ● ● Install camshaft brackets. Completely remove any foreign material on mounting surfaces of camshaft brackets and mounting surface of cylinder head. Referring to marks on top surfaces of camshaft brackets, install them to their original positions and in their original directions. MBIB0206E 4. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts as follows. ● Different bolts are used depending on installation location. Refer to following for proper bolt locations. Bolt color: 1 to 10 in figure 11 and 12 in figure Camshaft bracket bolt Step 1 (bolts 9 - 12) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8) Step 3 Step 4 5. : black (reamer bolt) : gold : 2.0 N-m (0.2 kg-m, 18 in-lb) : 2.0 N-m (0.2 kg-m, 18 in-lb) : 5.9 N-m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) : 9.0 - 11.8 N-m (0.92 - 1.2 kg-m, 80 - 104in-lb) Install intake camshaft sprocket as follows. ● Before installation, make sure that stopper pin is inserted in intake camshaft sprocket. NOTE: Service parts are provided with pin inserted. EM-30 PBIC0969E CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] a. CAUTION: Stopper pin is easily detached. Secure it with vinyl tape to prevent detachment. Install timing chain by aligning the mating mark (marked when timing chain is removed) with mark on camshaft sprocket. ● Align dowel pin on camshaft front surface and pinhole on sprocket backside, then install. A EM C D MBIB0208E b. While holding the hexagonal part of camshaft with a wrench, tighten intake camshaft sprocket bolt. ● Make sure that stopper pin is not detached. Intake camshaft sprocket bolt E F : 78.4 - 88.2 N·m (8.0 - 9.0 kg-m, 58 - 65 ft-lb) G MBIB0209E 6. a. b. Install exhaust camshaft sprocket as follows. Install timing chain by aligning the mating mark (marked when timing chain is removed) with mark on camshaft sprocket. ● Align dowel pin on camshaft front surface and pinhole on sprocket, then install. While holding the hexagonal part of the camshaft with a wrench, tighten exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt. Exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt Make sure that mating marks on intake/exhaust camshaft sprockets and mating mark on timing chain are aligned. 7. Install chain tensioner. ● Hold plate and plunger with a stopper pin, then install them. Chain tensioner bolt ● ● I J K : 98.1 - 127.5 N-m (10 - 13 kg-m, 73 - 94 ft-lb) c. MBIB0210E L M : 6.28 - 8.34 N-m (0.64 - 0.85 kg-m, 56 - 73 in-lb) After installation, remove stopper pin and release plunger. Make sure again that mating marks on intake/exhaust camshaft sprockets and mating mark on timing chain are aligned. MBIB0211E EM-31 H CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] 8. Remove stopper pin from intake camshaft sprocket. PBIC0966E 9. Slowly turn crankshaft pulley clockwise to set intake camshaft sprocket to most retarded position. MBIB0213E ● ● ● The sprocket begins turning after the crankshaft does. Once sprocket starts turning, keep turning crankshaft until the vane (camshaft) also begins turning. The most retarded position should now be achieved. The most retarded position is confirmed when stopper pin groove is at a clockwise offset from lock pin breathing groove. While turning crankshaft slightly more counterclockwise, confirm that the lock pin is engaged when vane and sprocket turn together. MBIB0214E 10. Install cylinder head front cover. ● Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent as shown in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Install it by aligning the dowel pin on the cylinder head. Cylinder head front cover bolts : 6.92 - 9.51 N-m (0.71 - 0.97 kg-m, 62 - 84 in-lb) 11. Check and adjust valve clearance. Refer to EM-35, "Valve Clearance" . 12. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. EM-32 PBIC0968E CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL A Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear. Camshaft Runout 1. 2. 3. Put the camshaft on a V-block supporting the No.2 and No.5 journals. Set the dial gauge vertically on the No.3 journal. Turn camshaft in one direction by hand, and measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauge total indicator reading. Standard Limit 4. EM C : Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) D If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. PBIC0038E E Camshaft Cam Height 1. Measure the camshaft cam height. Standard intake cam height Standard exhaust cam height Cam wear limit 2. F : 40.61 - 40.8 mm (1.599 - 1.606 in) : 38.965 - 39.155 mm (1.534 - 1.542 in) : 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) G H If wear is beyond the limit, replace the camshaft. PBIC0039E I Camshaft Journal Clearance 1. 2. Install the camshaft brackets and tighten the bolts to specified torque. Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter of camshaft bracket. Standard No. 1 Intake and exhaust Standard No.2, 3, 4, 5 Intake Exhaust 3. J : 28.000 - 28.021 mm (1.1024 - 1.1032 in) : 23.985 - 24.006 mm (0.9443 - 0.9451 in) : 24.000 - 24.021 mm (0.9449 - 0.9457 in) K L PBIC0041E Measure the outer diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard No.1 Standard No. 2, 3, 4, 5 : 27.935 - 27.955 mm (1.0998 - 1.1006 in) : 23.935 - 23.955 mm (0.9423 - 0.9431 in) PBIC0040E 4. If the journal clearance exceeds the limit, replace camshaft and/or cylinder head. ● (Camshaft journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal) EM-33 M CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] Camshaft journal clearance Standard Intake : 0.030 - 0.071 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) Exhaust : 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in) Limit Intake : 0.135 mm (0.0053 in) Exhaust : 0.150 mm (0.0059 in) NOTE: Inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. If the camshaft bracket is out of specification, replace the entire cylinder head assembly. Camshaft End Play 1. 2. Install camshaft in cylinder head. Refer to EM-29, "INSTALLATION" Install a dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play with the dial gauge while moving the camshaft forward and backward (in direction to axis). Camshaft end play Standard : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in) Limit : 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) 3. 4. If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again. If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head assembly. PBIC0042E Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. 2. Install the camshaft sprocket on the camshaft. Measure camshaft sprocket runout while turning the camshaft by hand. Runout (total indicator reading 3. : Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) If it exceeds the specification, replace camshaft sprocket. KBIA0181J Valve Lifter and Valve Shim 1. Check contact and sliding surfaces for excessive wear or cracks, replace as necessary. SEM160D EM-34 CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] 2. Measure the valve lifter outer diameter. Valve lifter outer diameter A : 29.960 - 29.975 mm (1.1795 - 1.1801 in) If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter. EM C JEM798G D 3. Measure the valve lifter guide bore. Valve lifter guide bore 4. : 30.000 - 30.021 mm (1.1811 - 1.1819 in) E Calculate valve lifter clearance. If out of specified range, replace valve lifter and/or cylinder head of whichever exceeds standard limit. (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter guide bore) – (outer diameter of valve lifter) Valve lifter clearance : 0.025 - 0.065 mm (0.0010 0.0026 in) F G PBIC0043E H Valve Clearance EBS00CES INSPECTION NOTE: The following procedure is applicable when: components related to camshafts or valves are removed, installed, or replaced. Driveability concerns (poor starting, poor idling, noise) are caused by valve clearance aging. 1. Warm engine and stop. 2. Remove RH splash cover. 3. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-23, "ROCKER COVER" . 4. Remove all of the spark plugs. 5. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. ● Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. ● Check that both intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder face outward. ● If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as described above. NOTE: Or, valves to be checked when No. 4 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke can be checked first following step 8. SEM921F 6. Referring to figure, measure valve clearances of valves with x in table below using a thickness gauge. Cylinder No. 1 No. 2 Valve INT EXH INT No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke X X X EXH N0. 3 INT EXH No. 4 INT EXH X MBIB0223E EM-35 I J K L M CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] ● ● Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance standard: Hot Intake : 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) Exhaust : 0.37 - 0.45 mm (0.015 - 0.018 in) Cold* Intake Exhaust MBIB0224E : 0.25 - 0.33 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) : 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) *:Approximately 20°C (68°F) (Reference data) If an adjustment is done with a cold engine, confirm reference values with hot engine are met. Limit values with hot engine (reference) 7. 8. Intake : 0.21 - 0.47 mm (0.008 - 0.019 in) Exhaust : 0.30 - 0.56 mm (0.012 - 0.022 in) Turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) to position No. 4 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. Check only those valves shown in the figure and marked with an x in the table. Cylinder Valve No. 4 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke 9. No. 1 INT EXH No. 2 INT N0. 3 EXH INT X X EXH No. 4 INT EXH X X If outside the standard, adjust applicable valves. Refer to EM36, "ADJUSTING" . MBIB0225E ADJUSTING NOTE: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft clockwise (viewed from front) to position cam lobe upward on camshaft for valve that must be adjusted. 2. Turn valve lifter and adjusting shim to removal direction. ● Using a slotted screwdriver with an extra-thin tip, turn the valve lifter cutout in the direction shown by the arrow. WBIA0307E EM-36 CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] 3. Place Tool (1) around camshaft as shown. Tool number A : 45074-1 NOTE: Before placing Tool (1), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head. This will simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage camshaft and cylinder head. ● Be careful not to damage surroundings of valve lifter. EM C WBIA0243E D 4. Rotate Tool (1) so that valve lifter is pushed down, compressing the spring. E F G WBIA0244E 5. Tool number 6. 7. H Place Tool (2) between camshaft and valve lifter to retain valve lifter. : 45074-2 I CAUTION: ● If camshaft pliers are suddenly turned back, the lifter stopper may contact and damage the camshaft journals. Turn back the camshaft pliers carefully to remove. ● Tool (2) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. ● Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (2). Remove Tool (1). Remove adjusting shim using Tool and a magnetic finger. J K WBIA0245E L M WBIA0246E EM-37 CAMSHAFT [QG18DE] 8. Determine replacement adjusting shim size using the following formula. ● Use a micrometer to determine thickness (t1) of removed shim at camshaft contact face (around center). ● Use t1 + (C1-C2) to calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. t1 = Thickness of removed shim C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance Hot engine: Intake : 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) Exhaust : 0.37 - 0.45 mm (0.015 - 0.018 in) Reference values with cold engine: Intake : 0.25 - 0.33 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) Exhaust : 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) ● ● ● SEM145D Thickness of new adjusting shim is indicated with stamped mark on its back. Shims are available in 50 sizes from 2.00 mm (0.0787 in) to 2.98 mm (0.1173 in), in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). Select the closest size shim to the calculated thickness. Refer to EM-83, "AVAILABLE SHIMS" . AEM236 9. Install new shim using Tool (2). Tool number ● : 45074-2 Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. WBIA0247E 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Place Tool (1) as explained in steps 4 and 5. Remove Tool (2). Remove Tool (1). Turn the crankshaft a couple of times by hand. Recheck the valve clearance. WBIA0248E EM-38 TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] TIMING CHAIN Components PFP:13028 A EBS00CEH EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0298E 1. Cylinder head front cover 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Washer 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Chain tensioner 6. Chain slack guide 7. O-ring 8. Power steering pump adjusting bar 9. Crankshaft pulley 10. Front oil seal 11. Front cover 12. Chain tensioner guide 13. Dowel pin 14. Timing chain 15. Oil pump drive spacer 16. Crankshaft sprocket 17. O-ring (with collar) 18. Auxiliary bolt of cylinder head CAUTION: ● After removing timing chain, do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or valves will strike piston heads. ● When installing chain tensioner, oil seats, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. EM-39 TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] ● Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprocket and crankshaft pulley. Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EBS00CEI Disconnect battery negative cable. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Be careful not to spill coolant on drive belts. Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" . Remove the following belts. ● Power steering pump drive belt ● Alternator drive belt Remove power steering pump from adjusting bar. Remove generator. Refer to SC-31, "Removal" . Remove front RH wheel. Refer to WT-4, "Removal" . Remove front/right-side splash undercover. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . SEM869F WEM024 10. Disconnect vacuum hoses for: ● EVAP canister ● Brake power booster 11. Remove ignition coils. 12. Remove spark plugs. 13. Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-23, "REMOVAL" WBIA0118E 14. Remove gusset. WEM049 EM-40 TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] A EM C SEM110G 15. 16. 17. a. b. Remove rear plate (lower)(A/T models). Remove oil pan and oil strainer. Refer to EM-16, "Removal" . Remove RH engine mounting and RH engine mounting bracket. Refer to EM-62, "ENGINE ASSEMBLY" . Remove any parts that make it difficult to remove RH mount. Support cylinder block bottom surface with a transmission jack. CAUTION: ● When positioning jack, use a wooden block to avoid damage to the oil pan mounting surface. c. Separate and remove engine mounting bracket and engine mounting. 18. Remove cylinder head front cover. 19. Remove auxiliary bolts of cylinder head. D E F G H I J PBIC0557E K 20. Set No. 1 piston at TDC on its compression stroke. a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise, and align the pointer to the timing mark on the pulley. L M SEM872F b. Make sure the camshaft sprocket mating mark is in the position shown in the figure. ● If the mating mark is not in position, turn the crankshaft pulley once more and position it. MBIB0194E EM-41 TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] 21. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows. a. Secure crankshaft counterweight with the handle of a hammer, and loosen crankshaft pulley bolt. CAUTION: Take care to prevent foreign material from entering the engine. PBIC0565E b. Remove crankshaft pulley using crankshaft pulley puller. CAUTION: ● Hook tab onto back of crankshaft pulley only. ● Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Fully loosen, and then use it as support point. 22. Remove water pump pulley and idler pulley bracket assembly. 23. Remove the water pump. Refer to CO-10, "Removal and Installation" . KBIA1437E 24. Remove front cover as follows. a. To ease front cover removal, pull oil pump drive spacer out through front oil seal. ● Pull it straight out using long nose pliers or two flat-bladed screwdrivers. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage side of oil pump drive spacer and front oil seal lip. b. Remove power steering pump adjusting bar. PBIC0566E c. d. Remove front cover carefully. ● Remove mounting bolts A - E shown in figure. NOTE: Bolts C and E have been removed in step b. CAUTION: ● When removing, be careful not to damage or bend front end of cylinder head gasket. Also after peeling off contact surface between front cover and gasket, their surfaces shall be smooth. ● If cylinder head gasket is damaged, replace it with a new one. Remove O-rings from front cover and cylinder block. EM-42 WBIA0131E TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] 25. Pull two dowel pins for front cover out of cylinder block. ● Heat them sufficiently with industrial dryer, then pull them out using locking pliers. A EM C PBIC0567E D 26. If front oil seal is to be replaced, remove it from the front cover. ● Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver in notch on oil seal mounting point, and pry out oil seal. E F G PBIC0558E 27. Set the intake camshaft sprocket to the most advanced position. CAUTION: Do not remove the chain tensioner before performing this step. CAUTION: Removal/installation of the intake camshaft sprocket is required to maintain the most advanced position because of the following reasons. Therefore, follow the procedure exactly. ● Sprocket and vane (camshaft in front) rotate and become MBIB0195E offset within the specific angle range. ● When engine is stationary, the vane is located at the most retarded position. The vane is fixed to the sprocket by an internal lock pin. Therefore, it does not rotate. ● If the camshaft sprocket mounting bolts are turned under the above circumstance, the lock pin will be damaged by lateral load (shear stress). It may cause non-standard operation. NOTE: "Rotating direction" means direction viewed from the engine front side. a. Using a wrench, hold the hexagonal part so that the intake camshaft does not move. MBIB0196E EM-43 H I J K L M TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] b. Using an air gun, apply air pressure to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve advance side oil passage on the top surface of the No. 1 camshaft bracket. Compression pressure c. d. e. :300 kPa (3.06 kg/cm2, 43.5 psi) or more ● Keep applying air pressure until substep d is completed. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the oil passage from interference of the air gun tip. MBIB0197E ● Thoroughly wipe off the oil before applying air pressure. When applying air pressure, cover around the air gun using a rag. Wear protective glasses if necessary. Slowly turn the intake camshaft in direction A (counterclockwise: intake manifold side). CAUTION: Be careful not to dislocate the camshaft retaining spanner. During the above step, an operating click (a sound indicating internal lock pin is disengaged) is heard from the inside of the intake camshaft sprocket. After hearing it, slowly turn intake camshaft in direction B (clockwise: exhaust manifold side), and set to most advanced position. ● Perform while applying air pressure. WBIA0130E ● When the vane rotates solely against sprocket, lock pin is disengaged even if operating click is not heard. ● If the lock pin is not disengaged, jiggle the camshaft with a wrench. ● If the lock pin is not disengaged with the above step, tap the intake camshaft in front with a plastic hammer. The following status indicates that the most advanced position is achieved: vane starts rotating on it own, then the sprocket also starts rotating when camshaft is turned. When above status is achieved, this step is complete. ● The most advanced position is confirmed when the stopper pin groove and lock pin breathing groove are aligned. MBIB0198E f. Stop the air and insert stopper pin [approximately 3 mm (0.12 in) dia., length of inserted part is approximately 15 mm (0.59 in)] into pinhole on camshaft sprocket to fix the most advanced position. CAUTION: Load (spring reaction force) is not applied to stopper pin. Pin is easily detached. Therefore, secure it with vinyl tape to prevent detachment. NOTE: In the figure, an Allen wrench [a/f 2.5 mm (0.098 in), short part: approximately 20 mm (0.79 in), long part: approximately 50 mm (1.97 in)] is used for stopper pin as an example. EM-44 PBIC0966E TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] 28. Remove the chain tensioner. ● Remove in the following order. a. Press the plate down and release the stopper tab. b. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body until it stops. c. Secure the plate by passing the stopper pin (such as a hard wire) through the plate hole and body hole. (Plunger is also secured.) d. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the chain tensioner. A EM C MBIB0201E D 29. While holding the hexagonal part of the camshaft with a wrench, loosen the mounting bolts and remove the intake and exhaust camshaft sprockets. CAUTION: ● Avoid securing the camshaft at other than the hexagonal part and loosening mounting bolts by utilizing tension of timing chain. ● After this step is completed, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately in order to prevent interference between the valves and pistons. 30. Remove the timing chain, timing chain slack guide and tension guide. 31. Remove crankshaft sprocket. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL E F G LBIA0292E H EBS00CEJ Check for cracks and excessive wear at roller links. Replace if necessary. I J K SEM885F INSTALLATION L EBS00CEK CAUTION: ● Use a scraper to completely remove all liquid gasket adhering to mounting surface. De-grease and clean mounting surfaces. ● After installation, wipe off any protruding liquid gasket. EM-45 M TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Install timing chain and its related parts as follows. ● Refer to figure for proper alignment positions for the sprockets, timing chain and their related parts. ● Install each sprocket with its mating mark facing the engine front side. Install timing chain and crankshaft sprocket. ● Make sure that the crankshaft key points straight up (No. 1 cylinder is at TDC). ● Hook timing chain on front end of camshaft so that it will not fall off. Install timing chain slack guide and tension guide. Install the camshaft sprocket. Refer to EM-29, "INSTALLATION" . Install the chain tensioner. Refer to EM-29, "INSTALLATION" . Make sure that mating marks are properly aligned. Temporarily install the oil pump drive spacer, crankshaft pulley and crankshaft pulley bolt so that the crankshaft can be rotated. Rotate crankshaft clockwise several times to make sure it rotates normally. Remove components installed in step f. KBIA1398E Install front oil seal to front cover. ● Install it so that identification letters on oil seal will face toward front side of the engine. ● Using an oil seal drift, press oil seal in until it is flush with end surface of mounting position. ● Make sure that oil seal outer circumference is free from damage and burrs. PBIC0530E 3. a. b. Install front cover as follows. Install O-ring to cylinder block. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the positions shown in the figure between the cylinder head gasket lower surface and the cylinder block. ● Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . PBIC0561E c. d. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the back surface of the front cover as shown in the figure. ● Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . CAUTION: ● Do not apply sealant to groove A shown in figure. ● Be especially careful of amount of sealant being applied in locations indicated with a * in the figure. Apply sealant to the top surface of front cover lightly and evenly. EM-46 PBIC0562E TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . A Install O-ring to back surface to front cover. With socket oil pump inner rotor placed on crankshaft top surface (clearance between front cover top surface and cylinder EM head gasket lower surface is secured), move front cover close to cylinder block. Lift front cover at an angle and install it to mounting position so C that front cover will come in contact with both cylinder head gasket lower surface and cylinder block front surface at the same time. D CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage cylinder head gasket. PBIC0563E ● Make sure both sealing surfaces are contacted at the E same time to ensure proper sealant adhesion and location. Install the front cover with bolts temporarily so that front cover F will not move. Press fit the dowel pin into the cylinder block through the front cover. G ● e. f. g. h. i. H PBIC0564E j. Tighten the front cover bolts temporarily. A [M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in)], B [M6 x 40 mm (1.57 in)], C [M8 x 70 mm (2.76)], D [M6 x 73 mm (2.87 in)] ● Bolt C also secures the power steering pump adjusting bar. ● Bolt E [M6 x 12 mm (0.47 in)] is for installing power steering pump adjusting bar. Tighten the cylinder head auxiliary bolts (M6) temporarily. Tighten the front cover bolts and cylinder head auxiliary bolts to specified torque. I ● k. l. J K L EMD0850D 4. 5. 6. 7. Install oil pump drive spacer. ● When installing, align with flat of oil pump rotor. ● If they are not aligned, rotate inner rotor with a flat-bladed screwdriver to align them. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil seal lips. Install the water pump. Refer to CO-10, "Removal and Installation" . Install water pump pulley and idler pulley bracket assembly. PBIC0566E Install crankshaft pulley. ● When installing it, make sure that front oil seal lip is not inverted and garter spring is in position. ● Secure crankshaft counterweight with the handle of a hammer, and tighten crankshaft pulley bolt. EM-47 M TIMING CHAIN [QG18DE] 8. Install cylinder head front cover. ● Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to cylinder head front cover in the specified thickness, as shown. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . 9. Install engine front mounting bracket and engine front mounting. Refer to EM-62, "Removal and Installation" . 10. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● PBIC0968E EBS00EWU In order to allow sealant to cure, perform inspection at least 30 minutes after the last step involving sealant is installed. With engine warmed up, check each part for engine oil leakage. EM-48 OIL SEAL [QG18DE] OIL SEAL Replacement PFP:00100 A EBS00CEL VALVE OIL SEAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation" . Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" . Remove valve spring. Refer to EM-56, "DISASSEMBLY" . Remove valve oil seal using Tool. CAUTION: Piston concerned should be set at TDC to prevent valve from falling into combustion chamber. EM C D E WEM032 5. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal and install it using Tool. F G H I WEM033 J FRONT OIL SEAL 1. 2. Remove the following parts: ● Engine under cover ● RH engine side cover ● Generator and power steering drive belts ● Crankshaft pulley Remove front oil seal from front cover using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch front cover. K L M SEM911F EM-49 OIL SEAL [QG18DE] 3. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. ● Install new oil seal in the direction shown. SEM715A SEM912F EM-50 OIL SEAL [QG18DE] REAR OIL SEAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the transaxle. Refer to MT-15, "Removal and Installation" "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (RE4F03B A/T). Remove flywheel (MT) or drive plate (AT). Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear oil seal retainer. (RS5F70A M/T), or AT-264, A EM C D SEM096F 4. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. ● Install new oil seal in the direction shown. E F G H SEM715A I J K L SEM097F 5. 6. Install flywheel (MT) or drive plate (AT). Refer to EM-66, "Components" . Install the transaxle. Refer to MT-15, "Removal and Installation" (RS5F70A), MT-79, "Removal and Installation" (RS6F51H), or AT-264, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (RE4F03B), AT-645, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (RE4F04B). EM-51 M CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service PFP:11041 EBS00EZ5 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Warm up the engine to full operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the ignition coils. Remove the spark plugs. ● Clean the area around the spark plug with compressed air before removing the spark plug. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. WBIA0129E SEM387C 7. 8. 9. Depress the accelerator pedal fully to keep the throttle valve wide open. Crank the engine and record highest gauge indication. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. Compression pressure Standard Minimum Maximum allowable difference between cylinders : kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/rpm : 1,324 (13.5, 192)/350 : 1,157 (11.5, 168)/350 : 98 (1.0, 14)/350 10. If cylinder compression in one or more cylinders is low, pour a small amount of engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole and retest compression. ● If adding oil improves cylinder compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking the piston and cylinder walls. ● If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. Refer to EM-35, "INSPECTION" , EM-60, "VALVE SEATS" . If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace them. ● If compression in any two adjacent cylinders is low and if adding oil does not improve compression, there is leakage past the gasket surface. If so, replace cylinder head gasket. 11. Install spark plugs, ignition coils and fuel pump fuse. EM-52 CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] 12. Erase DTC if any DTC appears. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . Removal and Installation A EBS00CEN EM C D E F G H I PBIC0972E 1. Rear engine slinger 2. Cylinder head bolt 3. Washer 4. Auxiliary bolt of cylinder head 5. Cylinder head gasket 6. Cylinder head assembly CAUTION: ● When installing camshaft and oil seal, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. ● When tightening cylinder head bolts, camshaft sprocket bolts and camshaft bracket bolts, lubricate bolt threads and seat surfaces with new engine oil. ● Attach tags to valve lifters so as not to mix them up. REMOVAL 1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the air duct to intake manifold collector. Remove the engine drive belts. Remove the front splash undercovers. EM-53 K L M Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . CAUTION: Be careful not to spill coolant on drive belts. SEM869F 2. 3. 4. 5. J CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Before removing the intake manifold collector from the engine, the following parts should be disconnected to remove the intake manifold collector: ● Fuel injector tube quick connectors. Refer to EM-19, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . ● Ground harness Harness connectors for: ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Swirl control valve (SULEV only) ● Swirl control position sensor (SULEV only) ● Water hoses from collector ● Heater hoses Vacuum hoses for: ● EVAP canister ● Power brake booster Remove the intake manifold rear supports. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the spark plugs. Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation" . Remove camshafts. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" . Remove cylinder head bolts. ● Cylinder head bolts should be loosened in two or three steps. CAUTION: Head warping or cracking could result from removing the cylinder head bolts in incorrect order. Remove cylinder head with intake manifold. SEM878F INSTALLATION 1. 2. Before installing cylinder head gasket, apply a bead of Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent, to mating surface of cylinder block as shown. ● Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Install the cylinder head gasket. NOTE: When installing the cylinder head with intake manifold, use a new cylinder head gasket. PBIC0573E 3. Install cylinder head and cylinder head bolts with washers. ● Apply new engine oil to threads and seating surface of mounting bolts. CAUTION: ● Be sure to install washers between bolts and cylinder head with washer orientation as shown. SEM877A EM-54 CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] 4. Tighten cylinder head bolts (1) to (10) in numerical order as shown in five steps. Cylinder head bolts Step 1 : 29.4 N·m (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft-lb) Step 2 : 58.8 N·m (6.0 kg-m, 43 ft-lb) Step 3 : 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb) (loosen) Step 4 : 27.4 - 31.4 N·m (2.8 - 3.2 kg-m, 21 - 23 ft-lb) Step 5 : 50° - 55° (target 50°) clockwise A EM C SEM900F D E F G SEM878F H CAUTION: Check and confirm the tightening angle by using angle wrench. I J K PBIC0574E 5. L Tighten cylinder head auxiliary bolts (11) to (14) in numerical order shown. Cylinder head auxiliary bolts : 6.28 - 8.34 N·m (0.64 - 0.85 kg-m, 56 - 73 in-lb) M Verify shank length under bolt head. [Bolt 11: 20 mm (0.79 in), bolts 12 - 14: 25 mm (0.98 in)] Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. ● 6. SEM900F EM-55 CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] Disassembly and Assembly EBS00EWV WBIA0308E 1. Cylinder head 2. Valve (INT) 3. Valve (EXH) 4. Valve seat 5. Engine coolant temperature sensor 6. Copper washer 7. Spark plug tube 8. Spark plug 9. Valve guide 10. Valve oil seal 11. Valve spring seat 13. Valve spring retainer 14. Valve collet 12. Valve spring CAUTION: ● When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surface with new engine oil. ● Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surface when installing cylinder head, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft pulley and camshaft bracket. ● Note valve lifter positions so as to ensure proper installation locations. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove intake manifold assembly. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . Remove adjusting shims (if equipped) and valve lifters. ● Note locations for installation. Remove valve collet. ● Compress valve spring using Tool as shown. Remove valve collet with magnet. Remove valve spring retainer and valve spring. Push valve stem through the combustion chamber side, and remove valve. ● Inspect valve guide clearance before removal. Refer to EM58, "VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE" . ● Label components for installation in the same location. SEM914F EM-56 CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] 6. 7. 8. Remove valve oil seal using Tool as shown. A Remove valve spring seat. When valve seat must replaced, refer to EM-60, "REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS" . EM 9. When valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-59, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . 10. Remove spark plugs. C 11. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor. CAUTION: SEM909F Do not shock it. D 12. Remove spark plug tubes, as necessary. ● Using a pair of pliers, pull spark plug tube out of cylinder head. CAUTION: E ● Take care not to damage cylinder head. ● Spark plug tubes are deformed during removal and cannot be reused once removed. Do not remove unless necessary. F ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. If removed, install valve seat, refer to EM-60, "REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS" . If removed, install valve guide, refer to EM-59, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . Install valve oil seal using Tool as shown. Install valve spring seat. Install valve. ● Install large diameter to intake side. Install valve spring. Install valve spring retainer. G H I J PBIC0576E 8. Install valve collet. ● Compress valve spring using Tool as shown. Install valve collet with magnet. ● Tap stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to check if installed securely. 9. Install adjusting shim, if equipped in their original positions. 10. Apply sealant to engine coolant temperature sensor threads. ● Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . 11. Install engine coolant temperature sensor. 12. Install spark plug tube. ● Press-fit spark tube as follows. a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to cylinder-head mounting hole. b. Apply liquid gasket to area within approximately 15 mm (0.59 in) from edge of spark plug tube press-fit side as shown. ● Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . c. Using a drift, press-fit the spark plug tube so that its height "H" is as shown. EM-57 K L M SEM914F KBIA1248E CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] Standard press-fit height "H" : 41.0 - 42.0 mm (1.61 - 1.65 in) CAUTION: ● When press-fitting, take care not to deform spark plug tube. ● After press-fitting, wipe off liquid gasket protruding onto cylinder head upper surface. 13. Install spark plugs. Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . 14. Install intake manifold. Refer to EM-13, "OUTER COMPONENT PARTS" . Inspection after Disassembly EBS00CEP CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION 1. 2. Clean surface of cylinder head. Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of cylinder head mating surface. ● Check along six positions as shown. Head surface flatness Standard : Less than 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) ● ● If beyond the specified limit, replace or resurface it. Resurfacing limit: The limit for cylinder head resurfacing is determined by the amount of cylinder block resurfacing. Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”. Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”. The maximum limit is as follows SEM915F : A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in) After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates freely by hand. If resistance is felt, replace cylinder head. Nominal cylinder head height : 117.8 - 118.0 mm (4.638 - 4.646 in) VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE 1. Measure valve deflection as shown in figure. (Valve and valve guide wear the most in this direction.) Valve deflection limit (dial gauge reading) Intake & Exhaust : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) SEM345D 2. a. b. c. If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance. Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter. Calculate valve to valve guide clearance. Valve stem to valve guide clearance = valve guide inner diameter − valve stem diameter. Check that clearance is within specification. Unit: mm (in) ● Standard Limit Intake 0.020 - 0.050 (0.0008 - 0.0020) 0.1 (0.004) Exhaust 0.040 - 0.070 (0.0016 - 0.0028) 0.1 (0.004) If it exceeds the limit, replace valve and remeasure clearance. EM-58 SEM938C CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] ● If limit is still exceeded after replacing valve, replace valve guide. A VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT 1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F). EM C D SEM008A 2. E Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2 ton, 2.2 US ton, 2.0 Imp ton) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool. F G H SEM931C 3. Ream cylinder head valve guide hole. I Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts) Intake & Exhaust : 9.685 - 9.696 mm (0.3813 - 0.3817 in) J K SEM932C 4. Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) and press service valve guide into cylinder head at specified height. Projection “L” M : 11.5 - 11.7 mm (0.453 - 0.461 in) WBIA0076E EM-59 L CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] 5. Ream the new valve guide to the specified inner diameter. Inner diameter finished size Intake & Exhaust : 5.500 - 5.515 mm (0.2165 - 0.2171 in) SEM932C VALVE SEATS Check valve seats for pitting at contact surface. Resurface or replace if excessively worn. NOTE: ● Before repairing valve seats, check valve and valve guide for wear. If they have worn, replace them. Then correct valve seat. ● Use both hands to cut uniformly. SEM934C REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS 1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Set machine depth stop so that boring cannot contact the bottom face of seat recess in cylinder head. 2. Ream cylinder head recess. Refer to EM-85, "VALVE SEAT" for the reaming bore for the service valve seat. NOTE: Use the valve guide center for reaming to ensure valve seat will have the correct fit. SEM795A 3. 4. 5. 6. Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F). Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom. Cut or grind valve seat using suitable tool to the specified dimensions. Refer to EM-82, "Valve" . After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound. SEM008A EM-60 CYLINDER HEAD [QG18DE] 7. Check valve seating condition. Seat face angle “α” Contacting width “W” Intake Exhaust A : 44°53′ - 45°07′ : 1.06 - 1.34 mm (0.0417 - 0.0528 in) : 1.34 - 1.63 mm (0.0528 - 0.0642 in) EM C SEM892B D 8. Use a depth gauge to measure the distance “L” between the mounting surface of the cylinder head spring seat and the valve stem end. If the distance is shorter than specified, repeat step 5 above to correct it. If the distance is longer, replace the valve seat. E Valve seat resurface limit Intake : 35.95 - 36.55 mm (1.4154 - 1.4390 in) Exhaust : 35.92 - 36.52 mm (1.4142 - 1.4378 in) F G WBIA0077E VALVE DIMENSIONS H Check dimensions of each valve. Refer to EM-82, "Valve" . VALVE SPRING Squareness 1. I Measure dimension “S”. Out-of-square “S” : Less than 1.75 mm (0.0689 in) J K L SEM288A 2. If it exceeds the limit, replace the spring. M Pressure Check valve spring pressure at specified spring height. Valve spring pressure Standard : 370.0 N (37.73 kg, 83.19 lb) at 23.64 mm (0.9307 in) Limit : More than 347.8 N (35.46 kg, 78.19 lb) at 23.64 mm (0.9307 in) If not within specification, replace the spring. EM113 EM-61 ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QG18DE] ENGINE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:10001 EBS00CET WBIA0206E 1. RH engine mounting 2. RH engine mounting bracket 3. 4. Rear engine mounting bracket 5. Rear engine mounting 6. Dynamic damper 7. Center member 8. Front engine mounting 9. Front engine mounting bracket EM-62 LH engine mounting ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QG18DE] WARNING: ● Position vehicle on a flat and solid surface. A ● Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels. ● Do not remove engine until exhaust system has completely cooled off, otherwise, you may burn yourself and/or fire may break out in fuel line. EM ● Before disconnecting fuel hose, release pressure. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . C ● Be sure to lift engine and transaxle in a safe manner. ● For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS CATALOG. D CAUTION: ● When lifting engine, be sure to clear surrounding parts. Use special care near accelerator wire casing, brake lines and brake master cylinder. ● When lifting the engine, always use engine slingers in a safe manner. E ● When removing drive shaft, be careful not to damage grease seal of transaxle. ● Before separating engine and transaxle, remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the cylinder block assembly. F ● Always be extra careful not to damage edge of crankshaft position sensor (POS), or signal plate teeth. G REMOVAL NOTE: Engine cannot be removed separately from transaxle. Remove engine with transaxle as an assembly. 1. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Drain coolant from radiator and cylinder block. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 3. Remove coolant reservoir tank. 4. Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" . 5. Remove battery and battery tray. Refer to SC-4, "BATTERY" . 6. Remove air cleaner and air duct. 7. Remove drive belts. 8. Remove generator from engine and position aside. Refer to SC-31, "Removal" . 9. Remove air conditioner compressor from engine and position aside. Refer to MTC-68, "Removal and Installation" . 10. Remove power steering oil pump from engine and position aside. Refer to PS-21, "Removal and Installation" . NOTE: Power steering oil pump does not need to be disconnected from power steering tubes. 11. Remove the following parts: ● RH and LH front tires ● Front splash undercovers ● RH and LH drive shaft. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . CAUTION: When removing the drive shaft, be careful not to damage transaxle side grease seal. WEM020 EM-63 H I J K L M ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QG18DE] ● ● Disconnect control rod and support rod from transaxle (M/T models). Disconnect control cable from transaxle (A/T models). Refer to AT-262, "Control Cable Adjustment" . WMT005 Center member ● Front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . ● Stabilizer bar. Refer to FSU-11, "Removal and Installation" . ● Radiator/Cooling fan. Refer to CO-14, "Removal" . ● Fuel injector tube quick connectors (Refer to EM-19, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .) ● Ground harness Harness connectors for: WEM024 ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Swirl control valve (SULEV only) ● Swirl control position sensor (SULEV only) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Water hoses from collector ● Heater hoses ● PCV hose ● Intake valve timing control solenoid Vacuum hoses for: ● EVAP canister ● Power brake booster 12. If necessary, install engine slingers and support engine from above with a hoist. 13. Lift up engine slightly and disconnect or remove all engine mountings. CAUTION: When lifting engine, be sure to clear surrounding parts. Use special care near brake tubes and brake master cylinder. ● EM-64 ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QG18DE] 14. Lower engine and transaxle as shown. A EM C D E F SEM420D G INSTALLATION ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H I J K L M EM-65 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] CYLINDER BLOCK Components PFP:11010 EBS00CEU WBIA0135E 1. Dipstick tube 2. Cylinder block 3. Rear oil seal retainer 4. Rear oil seal 5. Rear plate 6. Flywheel 7. Drain plug 8. Baffle plate 9. Top ring 10. 2nd ring 11. Oil ring 12. Piston EM-66 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] 13. Snap ring 14. Piston pin 15. Connecting rod 16. Connecting rod bearing 17. Connecting rod cap 18. Key 19. Main bearing 20. Thrust bearing 21. Crankshaft 22. Main bearing cap 23. Knock sensor 24. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 25. Rear lower plate 26. Drive plate 27. Signal plate 28. Block heater (Canada only) 29. Connector protective cap (Canada only) A EM C Removal and Installation EBS00CEV CAUTION: ● When installing sliding parts such as bearings and pistons, apply engine oil on the sliding surfaces. ● Place removed parts, such as bearings and bearing caps, in their proper order and direction. ● When installing connecting rod nuts and main bearing cap bolts, apply new engine oil to threads and seating surfaces. ● Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the signal plate teeth of flywheel or drive plate, and rear plate. ● Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). ● Be careful not to damage sensor edges and signal plate teeth. Disassembly EBS00CEW D E F G PISTON AND CRANKSHAFT 1. 2. 3. Attach engine to Tools as shown. Drain any remaining engine coolant and oil. Remove timing chain. Refer to EM-40, "Removal" . H I J WEM034 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove pistons with connecting rod. ● When disassembling piston and connecting rod, remove snap ring first. Then heat piston to 60° to 70°C (140° to 158°F) or use piston pin press stand at room temperature. CAUTION: ● When piston rings are not replaced, make sure that piston rings are mounted in their original positions. ● When replacing piston rings, if there is no punch mark, install with either side up. Measure crankshaft end play. Refer to EM-71, "Crankshaft" . L M SEM877B Loosen main bearing caps in numerical order as shown in two or three steps. Remove bearing caps, main bearings and crankshaft. SEM165DB EM-67 K CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] 8. Remove signal plate from crankshaft. SEM928F Inspection EBS00CEX PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE 1. Measure inner diameter of piston pin hole inner diameter “dp”. Piston pin hole inner diameter “dp” :18.993 - 19.005 mm (0.7478 - 0.7482 in) AEM023 2. Measure piston pin outer diameter “Dp”. Piston pin outer diameter “Dp” :18.989 - 19.001 mm (0.7476 - 0.7481 in) AEM024 3. Calculate piston pin clearance Dp − dp. Piston pin to piston clearance : 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in) If it exceeds the above value, replace piston assembly with pin. EM-68 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE A Side clearance Top ring : 0.045 - 0.080 mm (0.0018 - 0.0031 in) 2nd ring : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) Oil ring : 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 in) Limit : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) EM C If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly. SEM024AA D PISTON RING END GAP E End gap Top ring : 0.20 - 0.39 mm (0.0079 - 0.0154 in) 2nd ring : 0.32 - 0.56 mm (0.0126 - 0.0220 in) Oil ring : 0.20 - 0.69 mm (0.0079 - 0.0272 in) Limit of end gap Top ring : 0.49 mm (0.0193 in) 2nd ring : 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) Oil ring : 1.09 mm (0.0429 in) F G AEM096 ● ● If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap exceeds maximum limit with a new ring, rebore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston rings. Refer to EM-87, "Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin" . When replacing the piston, check the cylinder block surface for scratches or seizure. If scratches or seizure is found, hone or replace the cylinder block. CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION Bend Limit Torsion Limit H I J : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length K L M SEM038F If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. SEM003F EM-69 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION AND WEAR 1. 2. Clean upper surface of cylinder block. Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of cylinder block surface. Check along six positions shown in figure. Block surface flatness Standard : Less than 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) ● If out of specification, resurface it. SEM486C ● The limit for cylinder block resurfacing is determined by the amount of cylinder head resurfacing. Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”. Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”. The maximum limit is as follows A + B Nominal cylinder block height from crankshaft center ● : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 213.95 - 214.05 mm (8.4232 - 8.4271 in) If necessary, replace cylinder block. SEM102F PISTON-TO-BORE CLEARANCE 1. Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-ofround and taper. The Y axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine. Standard inner diameter (Grade No. 1) Wear limit Out-of-round (X − Y) standard Taper (B − A) standard : 80.000 - 80.010 mm (3.1496 - 3.1500 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) : Less than 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) : Less than 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) SEM166D If it exceeds the limit, rebore all cylinders. Replace cylinder block if necessary. 2. Check for score and seizure. If seizure is found, hone it. NOTE: If cylinder block or piston is replaced, match piston grade with grade number on cylinder block lower surface. SEM929F EM-70 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] 3. Measure piston skirt diameter. Piston diameter “A” Measuring point “a” (Distance from the top) A : Refer to EM-87, "Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin" . : 42.3 mm (1.665 in) EM C SEM258C D 4. Check that piston-to-bore clearance is within specification. Piston-to-bore clearance = cylinder bore measurement “B” − Piston diameter “A” 5. 6. : 0.025 - 0.045 mm (0.0010 - 0.0018 in) E Determine piston oversize according to amount of cylinder wear. ● Oversize pistons are available for service. Refer to EM-87, "Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin" . Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”. Rebored size calculation D=A+B−C where: D : Bored diameter A : Piston diameter as measured B : Piston-to-bore clearance C : Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) F G H I 7. Install main bearing caps and tighten bolts to the specified torque. This will prevent distortion of cylinder bores. 8. Cut cylinder bores. ● When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. ● Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so at a time. 9. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance. 10. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. ● Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. J K L CRANKSHAFT 1. 2. Check crankshaft main and pin journals for score, wear or cracks. With a micrometer, measure journals for taper and out-of-round. Out-of-round, (X − Y) Standard : Less than 0.003 mm (0.0001 in) Limit : Less than 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Taper, (A − B) Standard : Less than 0.004 mm (0.0002 in) Limit : Less than 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) EM-71 M SEM316A CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] 3. Measure crankshaft runout. Runout, Standard (Total indicator reading) Limit : Less than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) : Less than 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) SEM346D BEARING CLEARANCE Use Method A or Method B. Method A is preferred because it is more accurate. Method A (Using bore gauge and micrometer) Main bearing 1. 2. Set main bearings in their proper positions on cylinder block and main bearing cap. Install main bearing cap to cylinder block. Tighten all bolts in correct order in two or three steps. Refer to EM-76, "Assembly" . SEM366E 3. Measure inner diameter “A” of each main bearing. AEM153 4. Measure outer diameter “Dm” of each main journal in crankshaft. AEM026 5. Calculate main bearing clearance. Main bearing clearance = A − Dm Standard : 0.018 - 0.042 mm (0.0007 - 0.0017 in) Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) EM-72 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] If it exceeds the limit, replace bearing. A ● If clearance cannot be adjusted within standard of any bearing, grind crankshaft journal and use undersized bearing. When grinding crank pin and crank journal: EM ● Grind until clearance is within specified standard bearing clearance. ● Fillets should be finished as shown in the figure. R: 2.3 - 2.5 mm (0.091 - 0.098 in) C Refer to EM-90, "Bearing Clearance" for standard bearing clearance and available spare parts. ● D E SEM588A 6. a. b. F If the crankshaft is replaced, select thickness of main bearings as follows: Grade number of each cylinder block main journal is punched on the respective cylinder block. These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. Grade number of each crankshaft main journal is punched on the respective crankshaft. These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. G H I SEM930F J K L AEM172 c. M Select main bearing with suitable thickness according to the following table. SEM194C EM-73 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] Main bearing grade color: Crankshaft main journal grade number Cylinder block main journal grade number 0 1 or I 2 or II 0 0 (Black) 1 (Brown) 2 (Green) 1 or I 1 (Brown) 2 (Green) 3 (Yellow) 2 or II 2 (Green) 3 (Yellow) 4 (Blue) For example: Cylinder block main journal grade number: 1 Crankshaft main journal grade number: 2 Main bearing grade number = 1 + 2 = 3 (Yellow) Connecting Rod Bearing (Big End) 1. 2. Install connecting rod bearing to connecting rod and cap. Install connecting rod cap to connecting rod. AEM027 3. a. b. Install connecting rod caps. Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and nut seating surfaces. Tighten connecting rod cap nuts in two steps: Step 1 Step 2 4. : 13.72 - 15.68 N·m (1.399 - 1.599 kg-m, 10.120 - 11.566 ft-lb) : 35 - 40 degrees clockwise, or 23 - 28 N·m (2.3 - 2.9 kg-m, 17 - 21 ft-lb) Measure inner diameter “C” of each bearing. AEM155 5. 6. Measure outer diameter “Dp” of each crankshaft pin journal. Calculate connecting rod bearing clearance. Connecting rod bearing clearance = C − Dp Standard : 0.014 - 0.039 mm (0.0006 - 0.0015 in) Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) ● ● If it exceeds the limit, replace bearing. If clearance cannot be adjusted using any standard bearing grade, grind crankshaft journal and use undersized bearing. Refer to EM-90, "Bearing Clearance" . EM-74 AEM028 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] ● If a new bearing, crankshaft or connecting rod is replaced, select connecting rod bearing according to the following table. A NOTE: These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. EM C SEM437CA D Connecting rod bearing grade number: Crankshaft pin journal grade number Connecting rod bearing grade color 0 — 1or I Brown 2 or II Green E F Method B (Using Plastigage) CAUTION: ● Do not turn crankshaft or connecting rod while Plastigage is being inserted. ● If incorrect bearing clearance exists, use a thicker or undersized main bearing to ensure specified clearance. G H I EM142 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING CLEARANCE (SMALL END) 1. J Measure inner diameter “C” of bushing. K L M AEM029 2. 3. Measure outer diameter “Dp” of piston pin. Calculate piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance. Piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance = C − Dp Standard : 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in) Limit : 0.023 mm (0.0009 in) ● If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly or connecting rod bushing and/or piston pin. AEM030 EM-75 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] REPLACEMENT OF CONNECTING ROD BUSHING (SMALL END) 1. 2. Drive in small end bushing until it is flush with end surface of rod. CAUTION: Be sure to align the oil holes. Ream the bushing so that clearance with piston pin is within specification. Piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance Standard : 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in) Limit : 0.023 mm (0.0009 in) SEM062A FLYWHEEL RUNOUT Runout (Total indicator reading) Flywheel (M/T models) :Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) CAUTION: ● Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear teeth and rear plate. ● Do not resurface flywheel. Replace as necessary. SEM931F Assembly EBS00CEY PISTON 1. Install new snap ring on one side of piston pin hole. SEM166B 2. Heat piston to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F) and assemble piston, piston pin, connecting rod and new snap ring. NOTE: ● Align the direction of piston and connecting rod. ● Numbers stamped on connecting rod and cap correspond to each cylinder. ● After assembly, make sure connecting rod swings smoothly. SEM932F EM-76 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] 3. Set piston rings as shown. CAUTION: ● When piston rings are not replaced, make sure that piston rings are mounted in their original position. ● Install new piston rings either side up if there is no punch mark. A EM C SEM965E D ● Align piston rings so that end gaps are positioned as shown. E F G SEM160B CRANKSHAFT 1. H Install signal plate to crankshaft using dowel pin to properly position the signal plate. Remove the dowel pin after the signal plate bolts are tightened. Tighten the signal plate bolts. Signal plate bolts : 7.64 - 9.22 N·m (0.78 - 0.94 kg-m, 67.7 - 81.6 in-lb Dowel pin diameter : 6 mm (0.24 in) I J K WEM035 2. Set main bearings in their proper positions on cylinder block and main bearing cap. ● Confirm that correct main bearings are selected by using Method A or Method B. Refer to EM-90, "Bearing Clearance" . ● Apply new engine oil to bearing surfaces. SEM420C EM-77 L M CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] SEM366E 3. Install crankshaft and main bearing caps and tighten bolts in the order shown. Main bearing cap bolts ● ● ● ● 4. : 46.1 - 52.0 N·m (4.780 - 5.30 kg-m, 34.0 - 38.8 ft-lb) Apply new engine oil to the bolt thread and seat surface. Prior to tightening bearing cap bolts, shift crankshaft back and forth to properly seat the bearing caps. Tighten bearing cap bolts gradually in two or three stages. Start with center bearing and move outward as shown in figure. After securing bearing cap bolts, make sure crankshaft turns smoothly by hand. SEM933F Measure crankshaft free end play. Crankshaft free end play Standard 0.060 - 0.220 mm (0.0024 - 0.0087 in) Limit 0.3 mm (0.012 in) ● If beyond the limit, replace thrust bearing with new ones. SEM116F 5. Install connecting rod bearings in connecting rods and connecting rod caps. ● Confirm that correct bearings are used. Refer to EM-90, "Connecting Rod Bearing" . ● Install bearings so that oil hole in connecting rod aligns with oil hole of bearing. ● Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and bearing surfaces. SEM168D EM-78 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] 6. 7. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft. Assemble the components in their original positions. A ● Rotate the crankshaft so the pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed is at the bottom dead center position. EM ● Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and crankshaft pin. ● Match the cylinder position number with the cylinder No. on C the connecting rod for installation. ● Using a piston ring compressor, install the piston with the front WBIA0162E mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine. D CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big end. E Install connecting rod caps. F G H AEM154 8. Install connecting rod caps. ● Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and nut seating surfaces. ● Tighten connecting rod cap nuts in two steps using Tool. Step 1 Step 2 I J : 13.72 - 15.68 N·m (1.399 - 1.599 kg-m, 10.120 - 11.566 ft-lb) : 35 - 40 degrees clockwise, or 23 - 28 N·m (2.3 - 2.9 kg-m, 17 - 21 ft-lb) K AEM155 9. L Measure connecting rod side clearance. Connecting rod side clearance Standard : 0.200 - 0.470 mm (0.0079 - 0.0185 in) Limit : 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) ● M If beyond the limit, replace connecting rod and/or crankshaft. SEM935F EM-79 CYLINDER BLOCK [QG18DE] 10. Install rear oil seal retainer. a. Before installing rear oil seal retainer, remove old Silicone RTV Sealant from cylinder block and retainer. b. Apply a continuous bead of Silicone RTV Sealant to rear oil seal retainer. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Apply around inner side of bolt holes. Rear oil seal retainer bolts : 6.28 - 8.34 N·m (0.64 - 0.85 kg-m, 55.6 - 73.8 in-lb) AEM248 11. Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Crankshaft position sensor bolt : 7.2 - 10.8 N·m (0.73 - 1.10 kg-m, 63.4 - 95.5 in-lb) 12. Install knock sensor at correct angle. Knock sensor bolt : 15.7 - 20.6 N·m (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb) SEM936F EM-80 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A EBS00CEZ Engine QG18DE Classification Gasoline Cylinder arrangement 4, in-line EM Displacement C cm3 (cu in) 1,769 (107.94) Bore × stroke mm (in) 80.0 x 88.0 (3.150 x 3.465) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-3-4-2 Compression Number of piston rings D E 2 F Oil 1 Number of main bearings 5 Compression ratio G 9.5 H I Valve timing (Intake valve timing control - OFF) EM120 J K Unit: degree a b c d e f 204 236 5 51 -2 26 M Compression Pressure EBS00CF0 Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/350 rpm Standard 1,324 (13.5, 192) Minimum 1,157 (11.5, 168) Difference limit between cylinders 98 (1.0, 14) Cylinder Head EBS00CF1 Unit: mm (in) Head surface flatness Nominal height L Standard Limit Less than 0.03 (0.0012) 0.1 (0.004) 117.8 - 118.0 (4.638 - 4.646) — EM-81 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] Valve EBS00CF2 VALVE Unit: mm (in) SEM188A Valve head diameter “D” Valve length “L” Valve stem diameter “d” Intake 29.9 - 30.2 (1.177 - 1.189) Exhaust 24.9 - 25.2 (0.980 - 0.992) Intake 92.00 - 92.50 (3.6220 - 3.6417) Exhaust 92.37 - 92.87 (3.6366 - 3.6563) Intake 5.465 - 5.480 (0.2152 - 0.2157) Exhaust 5.445 - 5.460 (0.2144 - 0.2150) Valve face angle “α” 44°53′ - 45°07′ Valve face contact width Intake 1.06 - 1.34 (0.0417 - 0.0528) Exhaust 1.34 - 1.63 (0.0528 - 0.0642) Valve margin “T” limit 1.05 - 1.35 (0.0413 - 0.0531) Valve stem end surface grinding limit 0.2 (0.008) VALVE SPRING Free height mm (in) 41.19 (1.622) Standard Pressure N (kg, lb) at height mm (in) 370.0 (37.73, 83.19) at 23.64 (0.9307) Limit More than 347.8 (35.46, 78.19) at 23.64 (0.9307) Out-of-square mm (in) Less than 1.75 (0.0689) VALVE LIFTER Unit: mm (in) Valve lifter outer diameter 29.960 - 29.975 (1.1795 - 1.1801) Valve lifter guide bore 30.000 - 30.021 (1.1811 - 1.1819) Clearance between valve lifter and valve lifter guide 0.025 - 0.065 (0.0010 - 0.0026) VALVE CLEARANCE Unit: mm (in) For adjusting (Standard) Hot Cold* (reference data) For checking (Reference) Hot Intake 0.32 - 0.40 (0.013 - 0.016) 0.25 - 0.33 (0.010 - 0.013) 0.21 - 0.47 (0.008 - 0.019) Exhaust 0.37 - 0.45 (0.015 - 0.018) 0.32 - 0.40 (0.013 - 0.016) 0.30 - 0.56 (0.012 - 0.022) *: At a temperature of approximately 20°C (68°F) Whenever valve clearances are adjusted to cold specifications, check that the clearances satisfy hot specifications and adjust again if necessary. EM-82 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] VALVE GUIDE Unit: mm (in) A EM C D MEM096A Intake Outer diameter Valve guide Inner diameter [Finished size] Exhaust E Standard Service Standard Service 9.523 - 9.534 (0.3749 - 0.3754) 9.723 - 9.734 (0.3828 - 0.3832) 9.523 - 9.534 (0.3749 - 0.3754) 9.723 - 9.734 (0.3828 - 0.3832) 5.500 - 5.515 (0.2165 - 0.2171) 5.500 - 5.515 (0.2165 - 0.2171) Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter 9.475 - 9.496 (0.3730 - 0.3739) 9.685 - 9.696 (0.3813 - 0.3817) 9.475 - 9.496 (0.3730 - 0.3739) 9.685 - 9.696 (0.3813 - 0.3817) Interference fit of valve guide 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023) 0.027 - 0.049 (0.0011 - 0.0019) 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023) 0.027 - 0.049 (0.0011 - 0.0019) Stem to guide clearance Stem to guide clearance limit 0.020 - 0.050 (0.0008 - 0.0020) 0.040 - 0.070 (0.0016 - 0.0028) 0.1 (0.004) 0.1 (0.004) Valve deflection limit (Dial gauge reading) G H I 0.2 (0.008) Projection length “L” F 11.5 - 11.7 (0.453 - 0.461) AVAILABLE SHIMS J K L AEM236 M Thickness mm (in) Identification mark 2.00 (0.0787) 200 2.02 (0.0795) 202 2.04 (0.0803) 204 2.06 (0.0811) 206 2.08 (0.0819) 208 2.10 (0.0827) 210 2.12 (0.0835) 212 2.14 (0.0843) 214 2.16 (0.0850) 216 2.18 (0.0858) 218 2.20 (0.0866) 220 EM-83 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] 2.21 (0.0870) 221 2.22 (0.0874) 222 2.23 (0.0877) 223 2.24 (0.0882) 224 2.25 (0.0885) 225 2.26 (0.0890) 226 2.27 (0.0893) 227 2.28 (0.0898) 228 2.29 (0.0901) 229 2.30 (0.0906) 230 2.31 (0.0909) 231 2.32 (0.0913) 232 2.33 (0.0917) 233 2.34 (0.0921) 234 2.35 (0.0925) 235 2.36 (0.0929) 236 2.37 (0.0933) 237 2.38 (0.0937) 238 2.39 (0.0940) 239 2.40 (0.0945) 240 2.41 (0.0948) 241 2.42 (0.0953) 242 2.43 (0.0956) 243 2.44 (0.0961) 244 2.45 (0.0964) 245 2.46 (0.0969) 246 2.47 (0.0972) 247 2.48 (0.0976) 248 2.49 (0.0980) 249 2.50 (0.0984) 250 2.51 (0.0988) 251 2.52 (0.0992) 252 2.53 (0.0996) 253 2.54 (0.1000) 254 2.55 (0.1003) 255 2.56 (0.1008) 256 2.57 (0.1011) 257 2.58 (0.1016) 258 2.59 (0.1019) 259 2.60 (0.1024) 260 2.61 (0.1027) 261 2.62 (0.1031) 262 2.63 (0.1035) 263 2.64 (0.1039) 264 2.65 (0.1043) 265 EM-84 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] 2.66 (0.1047) 266 2.68 (0.1055) 268 2.70 (0.1063) 270 2.72 (0.1071) 272 2.74 (0.1079) 274 2.76 (0.1087) 276 2.78 (0.1094) 278 2.80 (0.1102) 280 2.82 (0.1110) 282 2.84 (0.1118) 284 2.86 (0.1126) 286 2.88 (0.1134) 288 2.90 (0.1142) 290 2.92 (0.1150) 292 2.94 (0.1157) 294 2.96 (0.1165) 296 2.98 (0.1173) 298 A EM C D E F G VALVE SEAT Unit: mm (in) H I J K L M SEM573DA WEM047 Dia. Specification Dia. Specification A 27.8 - 28.0 (1.094 - 1.102) E 24.5 - 24.7 (0.965 - 0.972) B 29.5 - 29.7 (1.161 - 1.169) F 26.500 - 26.516 (1.0433 - 1.0439) C 31.9 - 32.1 (1.256 - 1.264) G 26.2 - 26.4 (1.031 - 1.039) D 31.500 - 31.516 (1.2402 - 1.2408) H 22.4 - 22.6 (0.8819 - 0.8898) EM-85 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] VALVE SEAT RESURFACE LIMIT Unit: mm (in) AEM343 Depth (L) Intake 35.95 - 36.55 (1.4154 - 1.4390) Exhaust 35.92 - 36.52 (1.4142 - 1.4378) Camshaft and Camshaft Bearing EBS00CF3 Unit: mm (in) SEM671 Intake Cam height “A” 40.61 - 40.80 (1.599 - 1.606) Exhaust 38.965 - 39.155 (1.534 - 1.542) Cam wear limit 0.20 (0.0079) Camshaft journal clearance No. 2, 3, 4, 5 Intake: 0.030 - 0.071 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Exhaust: 0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034) Intake: 0.135 (0.0053) Exhaust: 0.150 (0.0059) Intake: 23.985 - 24.006 (0.9443 - 0.9451) Exhaust: 24.000 - 24.021 (0.9449 - 0.9457) No. 1 27.935 - 27.955 (1.0998 - 1.1006) No. 2, 3, 4, 5 23.935 - 23.955 (0.9423 - 0.9431) Outer diameter of camshaft journal Camshaft runout [TIR*] Less than 0.02 (0.0008) Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] Camshaft end play Limit 28.000 - 28.021 (1.1024 - 1.1032) No. 1 Inner diameter of camshaft bracket Standard — — 0.1 (0.004) Less than 0.15 (0.0059) 0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074) *Total indicator reading EM-86 0.20 (0.0079) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] Cylinder Block EBS00CF4 Unit: mm (in) A EM C SEM171D D Surface flatness Height “H” (nominal) Cylinder bore inner diameter Standard E Standard Limit Less than 0.03 (0.0012) 0.1 (0.004) 213.95 - 214.05 (8.4232 - 8.4271) — Grade No. 1 80.000 - 80.010 (3.1496 - 3.1500) Grade No. 2 80.010 - 80.020 (3.1500 - 3.1504) Grade No. 3 80.020 - 80.030 (3.1504 - 3.1508) F G 0.2 (0.008) H Out-of-round (X − Y) Less than 0.015 (0.0006) — Taper (B − A) Less than 0.01 (0.0004) — 0.05 (0.0020) 0.2 (0.008) Difference in inner diameter between cylinders I Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin EBS00CF5 J PISTON Unit: mm (in) K L M SEM882E Standard Piston skirt diameter “A” Grade No. 1 79.965 - 79.975 (3.1482 - 3.1486) Grade No. 2 79.975 - 79.985 (3.1486 - 3.1490) Grade No. 3 79.985 - 79.995 (3.1490 - 3.1494) 0.25 (0.0098) oversize (service) 80.215 - 80.245 (3.1581 - 3.1592) 0.5 (0.020) oversize (service) 80.465 - 80.495 (3.1679 - 3.1691) “a” distance from the top 42.3 (1.665) Piston pin hole inner diameter 18.993 - 19.005 (0.7478 - 0.7482) Piston-to-bore clearance 0.025 - 0.045 (0.0010 - 0.0018) EM-87 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] PISTON RING Unit: mm (in) Standard Side clearance End gap Limit Top 0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031) 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Oil 0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053) Top 0.20 - 0.39 (0.0079 - 0.0154) 0.49 (0.0193) 2nd 0.32 - 0.56 (0.0126 - 0.0220) 0.64 (0.0252) Oil 0.20 - 0.69 (0.0079 - 0.0272) 1.09 (0.0429) 0.2 (0.008) PISTON PIN Unit: mm (in) Piston pin outer diameter 18.989 - 19.001 (0.7476 - 0.7481) Piston pin to piston clearance Piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance (small end) 0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002) Standard 0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007) Limit 0.023 (0.0009) Connecting Rod EBS00CF6 Unit: mm (in) Center distance 140.45 - 140.55 (5.5295 - 5.5335) Bend limit [per 100 (3.94) length] 0.15 (0.0059) Torsion limit [per 100 (3.94) length] 0.3 (0.012) Connecting rod bushing inner diameter* (small end) 19.000 - 19.012 (0.7480 - 0.7485) Connecting rod big end inner diameter 43.000 - 43.013 (1.6929 - 1.6934) Side clearance Standard 0.200 - 0.470 (0.0079 - 0.0185) Limit 0.52 (0.0205) *After installing in connecting rod EM-88 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] Crankshaft EBS00CF7 Unit: mm (in) A EM C D SEM715 E F G H SEM645 Main journal dia. “Dm” Pin journal dia. “Dp” Grade No. 0 49.956 - 49.964 (1.9668 - 1.9671) Grade No. 1 49.948 - 49.956 (1.9665 - 1.9668) Grade No. 2 49.940 - 49.948 (1.9661 - 1.9665) Grade No. 0 39.968 - 39.974 (1.5735 - 1.5738) Grade No. 1 39.962 - 39.968 (1.5733 - 1.5735) Grade No. 2 39.956 - 39.962 (1.5731 - 1.5733) Center distance “r” Out-of-round (X − Y) Taper (A − B) Runout [TIR*] J 43.95 - 44.05 (1.7303 - 1.7342) Standard Less than 0.003 (0.0001) Limit Less than 0.005 (0.0002) Standard Less than 0.004 (0.0002) Limit Less than 0.005 (0.0002) Standard Less than 0.04 (0.0016) Limit Less than 0.05 (0.0020) Standard Free end play I 0.060 - 0.220 (0.0024 - 0.0087) Limit 0.3 (0.012) *: Total indicator reading EM-89 K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] Main Bearing EBS00CF8 STANDARD Grade No. Thickness “T” mm (in) Identification color 0 1.827 - 1.831 (0.0719 - 0.0720) Black 1 1.831 - 1.835 (0.0720 - 0.0722) Brown 2 1.835 - 1.839 (0.0722 - 0.0724) Green 3 1.839 - 1.843 (0.0724 - 0.0725) Yellow 4 1.843 - 1.847 (0.0725 - 0.0727) Blue UNDERSIZE Unit: mm (in) Thickness “T” 0.25 (0.0098) 1.960 - 1.964 (0.0772 - 0.0773) 0.50 (0.0197) 2.085 - 2.089 (0.0821 - 0.0822) Connecting Rod Bearing EBS00CF9 STANDARD SIZE Unit: mm (in) Grade No. Thickness Identification color or number 0 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) — 1 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Brown 2 1.509 - 1.512 (0.0594 - 0.0595) Green UNDERSIZE Unit: mm (in) Grade No. Thickness Identification color or number 0.08 (0.0031) 1.542 - 1.546 (0.0607 - 0.0609) — 0.12 (0.0047) 1.562 - 1.566 (0.0615 - 0.0617) — 0.25 (0.0098) 1.627 - 1.631 (0.0641 - 0.0642) — Bearing Clearance EBS00CFA Unit: mm (in) Standard Main bearing clearance 0.018 - 0.042 (0.0007 - 0.0017) Limit 0.1 (0.004) Standard Connecting rod bearing clearance 0.014 - 0.039 (0.0006 - 0.0015) Limit 0.1 (0.004) Miscellaneous Components EBS00CFB Unit: mm (in) Flywheel runout [TIR*] Less than 0.15 (0.0059) Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] Less than 0.15 (0.0059) *: Total indicator reading at measuring point 115 mm (4.53 in) from crankshaft center. EM-90 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Draining Coolant ● PFP:00001 A EBS00CFC Drain coolant when engine is cooled. Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ● ● ● Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area. Release fuel pressure before any removal or disassembly. After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage. Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – – – ● ● ● D E F EBS00CFF EBS00CFG Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts. When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, follow the specifications. Always replace the old with a new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring. Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction and blockage. Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust. Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well. Bleed the air trapped within the system after draining the coolant. Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections. After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems for leakage or rattles. G H I J K L M Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ● EBS00CFE Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and replace if necessary. Precautions for Assembly and Installation ● C When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful operations. Use maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces. Cover openings of engine system with tape or equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials. Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly. When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, follow the specifications. Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ● EM EBS00CFD EBS00CFH Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts. Cylinder head bolts Lower cylinder block bolts Connecting rod cap bolts Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angular tightening) Do not use a torque value for final tightening. The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step. Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil. EM-91 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00GJR REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing the mounting bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface using Tool and remove the liquid gasket sealing. Tool number : KV10111100 (J37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap (1) the cutter where the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the cutter (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. PBIC0002E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface. ● Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. Attach the sealant tube to Tool. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . PBIC0003E Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified location. Tool number ● ● ● ● ● ● : WS3993 0000 ( – ) If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of this manual. Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component. If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. Do not retighten after the installation. After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . WBIA0251E SEM159F CAUTION: Follow all specific instructions in this manual. EM-92 PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00CFJ The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special service tools illustrated here. EM Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing oil pan and timing chain case C D S-NT046 ST0501S000 Engine stand assembly 1. ST05011000 (-) Engine stand 2. ST05012000 (-) Base E Disassembling and assembling F G NT042 KV10106500 (-) Engine stand shaft Disassembling and assembling H I NT028 KV10115300 (-) Engine sub-attachment Disassembling and assembling J K ZZA1078D KV10116200 (J26336-B) Valve spring compressor 1. KV10115900 (J-26336-20) Attachment 2. KV10109220 (-) Adapter Disassembling valve mechanism L M NT022 KV10112100 (BT8653-A) Angle wrench Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder head, etc in angle. S-NT014 EM-93 PREPARATION [QR25DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10117100 (J-36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm 80.87 in) hexagon nut NT379 KV10107902 (J-38959) Valve oil seal puller Removing valve oil seal S-NT011 KV10115600 (J-38958) Valve oil seal drift Installing valve oil seal Use side A. a: 20 (0.79) dia. d: 8 (0.31) dia. b: 13 (0.51) dia. e: 10.7 (0.421) dia. c: 10.3 (0.406) dia. f: 5 (0.20) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT603 EM03470000 (J-8037) Piston ring compressor Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore S-NT044 ST16610001 (J-23907) Pilot bushing puller Removing crankshaft pilot bushing S-NT045 WS39930000 (-) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket S-NT052 EM-94 PREPARATION [QR25DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name A Description — (J-45488) Quick connector release Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room EM C PBIC0198E — (J-44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 D E LEM054 F Commercial Service Tools EBS00CFK (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Pulley holder Crankshaft pulley removing and installing a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. b: 8mm (0.31 in) dia. G H I NT628 Crank puller Crankshaft pulley removing J K ZZA0010D Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plug L M S-NT047 Valve seat cutter set Finishing valve seat dimensions S-NT048 Piston ring expander Removing and installing piston ring S-NT030 EM-95 PREPARATION [QR25DE] (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Valve guide drift Removing and installing valve guide Intake & Exhaust: a: 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia. b: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia. S-NT015 Valve guide reamer 1: Reaming valve guide inner hole 2: Reaming hole for oversize valve guide Intake & Exhaust: d1 : 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia. d2 : 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia. S-NT016 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner a: (J43897-18) b: (J43897-12) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.) a: (18 mm 0.71in) for zirconia oxygen sensor b: (12 mm 0.47 in) for titania oxygen sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 TP50 Torx® plus Bit (J45737) Removing and installing M/T flywheel bolts LBIA0284E E20 Torx® Socket (J45816) Removing and installing A/T drive plate bolts LBIA0285E EM-96 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QR25DE] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise PFP:00003 A EBS00CFL EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0069E EM-97 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QR25DE] Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. EBS00CFM 1. Locate the area where noise occurs. 2. Confirm the type of noise. 3. Specify the operating condition of engine. 4. Check specified noise source. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Operating condition of engine Location of noise Top of engine Rocker cover Cylinder head Type of noise Front of engine Timing chain cover Front of engine Reference page After warmup When starting When idling When racing While driving Ticking or clicking C A — A B — Tappet noise Valve clearance EM-128 Rattle C A — A B C Camshaft bearing noise Camshaft journal clearance Camshaft runout EM-124 EM-123 — Piston pin noise Piston and piston pin clearance Connecting rod bushing clearance EM-177 EM-177 A Piston slap noise Piston-to-bore clearance Piston ring side clearance Piston ring end gap Connecting rod bend and torsion EM-177 EM-176 EM-176 EM-177 Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small end) Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end) EM-177 EM-177 EM-182 EM-181 Slap or knock Crankshaft pulley Cylinder block (Side of engine) Oil pan Source of noise Before warmup — Slap or rap A A — — — B B B B Check item Knock A B C B B B Connecting rod bearing noise Knock A B — A B C Main bearing noise Main bearing oil clearance Crankshaft runout Timing chain cracks and wear Timing chain tensioner operation Tapping or ticking A A — B B B Timing chain and chain tensioner noise Squeaking or fizzing A B — B — B Drive belts (Sticking or slipping) Drive belts deflection Creaking A B A B A B Drive belts (Slipping) Idler pulley bearing operation Squall Creak A B — B A B Water pump noise Water pump operation A: Closely related B: Related C: Sometimes related —: Not related EM-98 EM-131 EM-99 CO-25 DRIVE BELTS [QR25DE] DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts PFP:02117 A EBS00CFN EM C D E F G SBIA0234E NOTE: On vehicles not equipped with A/C, there is an idler pulley in the position for the drive belt routing. WARNING: Inspect the drive belt only when the engine is stopped. ● Make sure that the stamp mark of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the usable range. NOTE: ● Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold. ● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be A. ● Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. ● If the indicator is out of allowable use range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. H I J K Tension Adjustment ● EBS00CFO Belt tension is not manually adjustable, it is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto-tensioner. L Removal and Installation EBS00CFP REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove front RH engine side cover. With box wrench, and while securely holding the hexagonal part in pulley center of drive belt auto-tensioner, move the wrench handle in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner). CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. Insert a rod approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) in diameter from the rear into the holding boss to hold the tensioner pulley. ● Leave tensioner pulley arm locked until belt is installed again. Loosen auxiliary drive belt from water pump pulley in sequence, and remove it. M KBIA0088E INSTALLATION 1. With box wrench, and while securely holding the hexagonal part in pulley center of drive belt auto-tensioner, move the wrench handle in the direction of arrow [loosening direction of tensioner]. EM-99 DRIVE BELTS [QR25DE] 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. Insert a rod approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) in diameter through the rear of engine into holding boss to fix tensioner pulley. Hook the drive belt onto all of the pulleys except for the water pump pulley. Hook the drive belt onto water pump pulley last. CAUTION: Confirm belts are completely set on the pulleys. Release tensioner, and apply tensions to belt. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise several times to equalize tension between each pulley. Confirm tensions of belt at indicator is within the allowable use range. Refer to EM-99, "Checking Drive Belts" . Install front RH engine side cover. Removal and Installation of Drive Belt Auto-tensioner EBS00CFQ SBIA0235E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-99, "REMOVAL" . Remove the generator. Refer to SC-32, "Removal" . Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. ● Remove and install drive belt auto-tensioner by fixing tensioner pulley. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Install the drive belt auto-tensioner carefully so as not to damage the water pump pulley. EM-100 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT [QR25DE] AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation PFP:16500 A EBS00CFR EM C D E F G H I J K L M LBIA0332E 1. Fresh air intake tube (SE-R Spec V models only) 2. Fresh air intake tube (all models except SE-R Spec V) 3. Resonator 4. Mounting bracket 5. Grommets 6. Air cleaner case (upper and lower) 7. Mass air flow sensor 8. Mass air flow sensor clamp 9. Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube 10. Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube clamp REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. EM-101 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT [QR25DE] 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube and air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle the mass air flow sensor with care: ● Do not shock it. ● Do not disassemble it. ● Do not touch the internal sensor. Remove the air cleaner element, as necessary and replace it with a new element. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Attach each joint according to the alignment marks made during removal. Screw all clamps firmly. CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 1. 2. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and raise the air cleaner case (upper). Remove the air cleaner element. Replace the air cleaner element with a new element and install the air cleaner case (upper). EM-102 INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] INTAKE MANIFOLD Removal and Installation PFP:14003 A EBS00CFS EM C D E F G H I J WBIA0299E K 1. Cylinder head assembly 2. PCV hose 3. Intake manifold collector 4. Gasket 5. Electric throttle control actuator 6. Intake manifold support 7. Vacuum reservoir tank 8. VIAS control solenoid valve 9. Intake manifold L 10. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid M REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Drain coolant when engine is cooled. Refer to MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 4. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove air cleaner case and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-101, "Removal and Installation" . 6. Disconnect the following components at the intake side: ● PCV hose ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid ● Power valve actuator ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Brake booster vacuum hose EM-103 INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] 7. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. ● Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number : — (J-45488) WBIA0148E a. Remove quick connector cap. LBIA0090E b. c. d. 8. a. b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as WBIA0295E shown. ● Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. ● Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. ● Avoid fire and sparks. ● Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. When removing fuel hose quick connector at vehicle piping side, perform as follows. Remove quick connector cap. Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. WBIA0253E ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte etc. from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal. ● Do not remove the remaining retainer on tube. EM-104 INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one. Retainer color: Green. A ● To keep clean the connecting portion and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags or something similar. 9. Loosen mounting bolts diagonally, and remove the electric throttle control actuator. EM CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any damage. C 10. Disconnect intake manifold collector harness, and vacuum hose. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. D 11. Remove intake manifold collector bolts on the support. 12. Loosen the intake manifold collector bolts and nuts in the order shown to remove the intake manifold collector. E ● F G WBIA0018E H 13. Loosen the intake manifold bolts in the order shown to remove the intake manifold. I J K WBIA0300E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ● Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect surface distortion of intake manifold collector and intake manifold surface. Standard L M : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) WBIA0020E EM-105 INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tightening Intake Manifold Bolts and Nuts ● Install the intake manifold bolts and nuts in the numerical order of the tightening sequence as shown. CAUTION: After tightening No.5, retighten the No.1 mounting bolt to specification. WBIA0301E Tightening Intake Manifold Collector Bolts and Nuts ● Tighten in numerical order as shown. CAUTION: After tightening No.7, retighten the No.1 mounting bolt to specification. LBIA0069E Installation of Electric Throttle Control Actuator: ● Tighten the mounting bolts of electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps. ● After installation perform procedure in EM-107, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" . CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (ENGINE SIDE) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and there is no damage to them. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube tip end. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ● Insert fuel tube into quick connector until the top spool on fuel tubes is inserted completely and the second level spool is positioned slightly below the quick connector bottom end. CAUTION: ● Hold at position "A" as shown, when inserting the fuel tube into the quick connector. ● Carefully align to center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to the O-ring inside the quick connector. ● Insert the fuel tube until you hear a “click” sound and KBIA0272E actually feel the engagement. ● To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step. Before clamping the fuel hose with the hose clamp, pull the quick connector hard by hand, holding at the "A" position, as shown. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come off of the fuel tube. NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb). Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint. EM-106 INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] Direct arrow mark on quick connector cap to upper side (fuel hose side). Install fuel hose to hose clamp. ● 6. A EM C KBIA0298E D CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (VEHICLE PIPING SIDE) 1. 2. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and there is no damage to them. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ● Insert fuel tube until a click is heard. ● Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint. Direct arrow mark on quick connector cap upper side. ● Install fuel hose to hose clamp. E F G H PBIC0662E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. ● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . ● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . I J K L M EM-107 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [QR25DE] EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation PFP:14004 EBS00CFT WBIA0302E 1. Exhaust manifold and three way cat- 2. alyst assembly Exhaust manifold gasket 4. Heated oxygen sensor 1 (ULEV only) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Plug 5. 3. Exhaust manifold covers (upper and lowers) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the engine undercover. Disconnect the electrical connector of heated oxygen sensor 1 or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, and unhook the harness from the bracket and middle clamp on the cover. Remove the heated oxygen sensor 1 or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 using Tool. Tool numbers Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Heated oxygen sensor wrench : J44626 : KV10117100 (J36471-A) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor or air WBIA0151E fuel ratio (A/F) sensor. ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Remove the lower exhaust manifold covers. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the upper exhaust manifold cover. ● 4. 5. 6. EM-108 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [QR25DE] 7. 8. Loosen the nuts in the sequence shown, on the exhaust manifold and three way catalyst. Remove the exhaust manifold and three way catalyst assembly and gasket. Discard the gasket. A EM C WBIA0022E D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ● Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of exhaust manifold fitting surface. Standard E : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) F G KBIA0046E H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. I Tightening Exhaust Manifold Nuts ● Tighten the nuts in the numerical order shown, to specification. After tightening No.5, retighten No.1 and then No.3 to specification. J K L WBIA0023E M Installation of Heated Oxygen Sensor or Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Clean the sensor threads using Tool, then apply the anti-seize lubricant to the threads before installing. ● Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" Tool number : J43897-18, J43897-12 CAUTION: Do not over-tighten. Doing so may cause damage, resulting in a malfunction and the MIL coming on. EM-109 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [QR25DE] OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Removal and Installation PFP:11110 EBS00CFU WBIA0152E 1. Oil level gauge tube 2. Oil pan, upper 3. Cylinder block 4. Oil filter 5. Oil pickup screen 6. Drain plug 7. Oil pan, lower 8. Rear plate cover REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 1. Remove the engine under covers on both sides. 2. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-17, "Changing Engine Oil" . 3. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Set a suitable transmission jack under the transaxle. Lift the engine slightly from above by the engine slingers. 5. Remove the center member. ● Remove the front and rear engine mount through bolts and center member bolts. Refer to EM-155, "Removal and Installation" . WEM023 6. Disconnect the A/C compressor with piping connected from the mounting bracket and suspend with a strong wire. Refer to MTC-68, "Removal and Installation" . EM-110 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [QR25DE] 7. Remove the lower oil pan bolts. Loosen the bolts in the order shown. A EM C LBIA0070E D 8. Insert the Tool between lower oil pan and the upper oil pan to separate them. Tap gently on the side to move the Tool around the pan; do not damage the mating surface. 9. Remove the lower oil pan. 10. Remove the oil pickup screen. 11. Remove rear plate cover, and four engine to transaxle bolts. E F G SEM365E H 12. Loosen the upper oil pan bolts in the numerical order shown. I J K LBIA0072E 13. Insert the Tool between the upper oil pan and the cylinder block to separate them. Tap gently on the side to move the Tool around the pan; do not damage the mating surface. L M SEM365E 14. Remove the upper oil pan. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● Clean the oil pickup screen to remove any foreign material. EM-111 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [QR25DE] INSTALLATION 1. a. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent, to the upper oil pan. ● Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" , and EM-92, "Precautions for Liquid Gasket" . ● Install the two new O-rings in the upper oil pan. SBIA0253E b. Tighten the upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown. ● Bolt No. 10, 11, 18 indicate a double tightening in the sequence of bolt No.s 1, 2, 3. NOTE: Refer below for specified bolt sizes: M6 × 20 mm (0.79 in): No. 19, 20 M8 × 25 mm (0.98 in): No. 1, 3, 4, 9 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in): No. 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 17 M8 x100 mm (3.97 in): No. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 LBIA0073E c. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent to the lower oil pan. ● Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" , and EM-92, "Precautions for Liquid Gasket" . SBIA0259E d. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in the numerical order shown. ● Wait at least 30 minutes after the oil pans are installed before filling the engine with oil. LBIA0074E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● Check for any engine oil leaks with the engine at full operating temperature and running at idle. EM-112 IGNITION COIL [QR25DE] IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation PFP:22448 A EBS00CFV EM C D E F WBIA0024E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug Rocker cover H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 3. G Remove the engine cover using power tool. Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil. Remove the ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it. I J INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K L M EM-113 SPARK PLUG [QR25DE] SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation PFP:22401 EBS00CFW WBIA0024E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-113, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the spark plug with a suitable spark plug wrench. Temperature range NGK Standard type PLFR5A-11 (Platinum tipped) Hot type PLFR4A-11(Platinum tipped) Cold type PLFR6A-11(Platinum tipped) SEM294A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal conditions. The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Frequent engine starts. ● Low ambient temperatures. The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Extended highway driving. ● Frequent high engine revolution. ● EM-114 SPARK PLUG [QR25DE] Do not use a wire brush for cleaning the spark plugs. Replace as necessary. A EM C SMA773C D If plug is covered with carbon, a spark cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time : less than 588 kPa (6kg/ cm2, 85 psi) : less than 20 seconds E Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Gap nominal F : 1.1 mm ( 0.043 in) G H SMA806CA I INSTALLATION ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L M EM-115 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QR25DE] FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation PFP:16600 EBS00CFX WBIA0303E 1. Fuel hose 2. Intake manifold 3. Sub-harness 4. Fuel tube 5. Clip 6. O-ring 7. Fuel injector 8. Insulator CAUTION: ● Apply new engine oil to parts before installing the parts, as shown above. ● Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-101, "Removal and Installation" . Partially drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the intake collector. Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Disconnect the fuel hose quick connector at the fuel tube side. ● For how to disconnect and connect the quick connector, refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EM-116 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. a. b. CAUTION: ● Prepare a container and cloth for catching any spilled fuel. A ● This operation should be performed in a place that is free from any open flames. ● While hoses are disconnected seal their openings with vinyl bag or similar material to prevent foreign material from entering them. EM Disconnect sub-harness for injector at engine front side, and remove it from bracket. Loosen the fuel tube bolts in the order shown, then remove fuel C tube and fuel injectors as an assembly. Remove the fuel injectors from the fuel tube. Release the clip and remove the fuel injector. D Pull fuel injector straight out of the fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the nozzle. E ● Avoid any impact, such as dropping the fuel injector. ● Do not disassemble or adjust the fuel injector. KBIA0239E F INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. a. Install new O-rings on the fuel injector. NOTE: Lubricate the O-rings lightly with new engine oil. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch it during installation. Also be careful not to twist or stretch the O-ring. If the O-ring was stretched while it is attached, do not insert it into the fuel tube immediately. Install the fuel injector into the fuel tube with the following procedure: ● Do not reuse the clip, replace it with a new one. ● Insert the new clip into the clip mounting groove on fuel injector. ● Insert the clip so that the projection on "Lug A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. ● Insert it while matching it to the axial center. ● Insert fuel injector so that the projection on "Lug B" of fuel injector matches notch "B" of the clip. ● Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on the clip. ● Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. Install fuel tube assembly. Insert the tip of each fuel injector into intake manifold. KBIA0240E EM-117 G H I J K L M FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QR25DE] b. Tighten the fuel tube bolts in two steps in the numerical order shown. Step 1 Step 2 : 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 105 - 121 in-lb) : 17 - 23 N·m (1.7 - 2.4 kg-m, 13 - 17 ft-lb) CAUTION: After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage. 5. Connect the fuel hose quick connector. Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . 6. Install the intake collector. Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . 7. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. KBIA0239E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. ● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC684, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . ● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-685, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EM-118 ROCKER COVER [QR25DE] ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation PFP:13264 A EBS00CFY EM C D E F WBIA0309E 1. PCV valve 2. Oil filler cap 3. Rocker cover 4. Rocker cover gasket 5. O-ring 6. Breather hose G H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-113, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the PCV hose and breather hose from the rocker cover. Loosen the rocker cover bolts in the order shown. Remove the rocker cover. Remove the oil filler cap and PCV valve if necessary, to transfer to the new rocker cover. I J K L WBIA0025E M EM-119 ROCKER COVER [QR25DE] INSTALLATION 1. a. b. 2. ● Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the joint part of the cylinder head and camshaft bracket following the steps below: Refer to illustration “a” to apply sealant to joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. Refer to illustration “b” to apply sealant in a 90° degree angle to the illustration “a”. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Install the rocker cover. The rocker cover gasket must be securely installed in the groove in the rocker cover. WBIA0164E 3. Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two steps, in the order shown. Step 1 Step 2 4. 5. 6. : 1.0 - 2.9 N·m (0.1 - 0.3 kg-m, 9 - 26 in-lb) : 7.4 - 9.3 N·m (0.75 - 0.95 kg-m, 65 - 82 in-lb) If necessary, install the oil filler cap and PCV valve. Lubricate the PCV valve O-ring with new engine oil. Connect the PCV hose and breather hose to the rocker cover. Install the ignition coils. Refer to EM-113, "Removal and Installation" . WBIA0071E EM-120 CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation PFP:13001 A EBS00CFZ EM C D E F G H I J WBIA0304E K 1. No. 1 Camshaft bracket 2. Washer 3. Front cover (partial view) 4. Chain guide 5. Chain tensioner 6. O-ring(s) 7. Chain tensioner spring 8. Chain tensioner plunger 9. IVT control solenoid valve 10. IVT control cover 11. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 12. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 13. Valve lifter 14. Camshaft (EXH) 15. Camshaft (INT) 16. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 17. Camshaft bracket (EXH) 18. Camshaft bracket (INT) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-119, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front right side tire and wheel. Refer to WT-4, "Removal" . Remove the RH splash shield. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-99, "REMOVAL" . Remove the coolant overflow reservoir tank. Disconnect and remove the camshaft position sensor (PHASE). Disconnect the IVT control solenoid electrical connector. Disconnect the ground electrical connections from the front cover. EM-121 L M CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 9. Remove IVT control cover bolts in the order shown. 10. Remove the IVT control cover by cutting the sealant using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) WBIA0027E 11. Set the No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke with the following procedure: a. Open the access cover on RH undercover. b. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise, and align mating marks for TDC with timing indicator on front cover, as shown. KBIA0190E c. At the same time, make sure that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets are lined up with the yellow links in the timing chain, as shown. ● If not, rotate crankshaft pulley one more turn to line up the mating marks to the yellow links, as shown. KBIA0115E 12. Pull the timing chain guide out between the camshaft sprockets through front cover. 13. Remove camshaft sprockets as follows: CAUTION: Do not rotate the crankshaft or camshaft while the timing chain is removed. It causes interference between valve and piston. NOTE: Chain tension holding work is not necessary. Crankshaft sprocket and timing chain do not disconnect structurally while front cover is attached. a. Line up the mating marks on camshaft sprockets with the yellow links in the timing chain, and paint an indelible mating mark on the sprocket and timing chain link plate. EM-122 KBIA0049E CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] b. c. Push in the tensioner plunger and hold. Insert a stopper pin into the hole on tensioner body to hold the chain tensioner. Remove the timing chain tensioner. ● Use a wire with 0.5 mm (0.02 in) diameter for a stopper pin. Secure the hexagonal part of camshaft with a suitable tool. Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts and remove the camshaft sprockets. A EM C KBIA0048E D 14. Loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in the order shown, and remove the camshaft brackets and camshafts. ● Remove No.1 camshaft bracket by slightly tapping it with a rubber mallet. ● Note mounting positions, and set them aside in the order removed. 15. Remove the valve lifters. ● Note mounting positions, and set them aside in the order removed. E F G WBIA0028E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. 2. 3. H Put the camshaft on a V-block supporting the No.2 and No.5 journals. Set the dial gauge vertically on the No.3 journal. Turn camshaft in one direction by hand, and measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauge total indicator reading. Standard I J : Less than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) K PBIC0038E L Camshaft Cam Height 1. Measure the camshaft cam height. Standard intake cam height Standard exhaust cam height 2. : 45.665 - 45.855 mm (1.7978 - 1.8053 in) : 43.975 - 44.165 mm (1.7313 - 1.7388 in) M If wear is beyond the limit, replace the camshaft. PBIC0039E EM-123 CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] Camshaft Journal Clearance 1. Measure the outer diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard No.1 outer diameter Standard No.2, 3, 4, 5, outer diameter : 27.935 - 27.955 mm (1.0998 - 1.1006 in) : 23.435 - 23.455 mm (0.9226 - 0.9234 in) PBIC0040E 2. Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts to the specified torque following the tightening pattern as shown. Refer to EM-126, "INSTALLATION" . SBIA0255E 3. Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter of camshaft bracket. Standard No.1 Standard No.2, 3, 4, 5 : 28.000 - 28.021 mm (1.1024 - 1.1032 in) : 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 in) PBIC0041E 4. Calculate camshaft journal clearance. (Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal) ● Standard ● : 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in) When out of the specified range above, replace either or both the camshaft and the cylinder head assembly. NOTE: Inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. If the camshaft bracket is out of specification, replace the entire cylinder head assembly. Camshaft End Play 1. Install a dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play with the dial gauge while moving the camshaft forward and backward (in direction to axis). Standard end play 2. 3. : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in) If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again. If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head assembly. PBIC0042E EM-124 CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. 2. 3. Runout 4. A Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Install the camshaft sprocket on the camshaft. Measure camshaft sprocket runout while turning the camshaft by hand. EM : Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) If it exceeds the specification, replace camshaft sprocket. C D KBIA0181J Valve Lifter Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or cracks, replace as necessary. E F G H KBIA0182E I Valve Lifter Clearance Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter ● Measure the valve lifter outer diameter. Valve lifter outer diameter ● J : 33.965 - 33.980 mm (1.3372 - 1.3378 in) K If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter. L JEM798G Valve Lifter Hole Diameter ● Using inside micrometer, measure valve lifter guide bore diameter of cylinder head. Standard ● : 34.000 - 34.021 mm (1.3386 - 1.3394 in) If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly. PBIC0043E Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter bore diameter) – (valve lifter outer diameter) ● Standard : 0.020 - 0.056 mm (0.0008 - 0.0022 in) EM-125 M CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] ● If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly. INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install the valve lifter. ● Install them in the same position from which they were removed. Install the camshafts. ● The distinction between the intake and exhaust camshafts is in a difference of shapes of the back end: Intake: Signal plate for the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Exhaust: Cone end shape KBIA0246E ● Install camshafts so that the dowel pins on the front side are positioned as shown. KBIA0051E 3. Install camshaft brackets. ● Install by referring to identification mark on upper surface mark. ● Install so that identification mark can be correctly read when viewed from the exhaust side. ● Install No. 1 camshaft bracket as follows. – Apply sealant to No.1 camshaft bracket as shown. SBIA0256E ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . CAUTION: ● After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive sealant leaking from part “A” (both on right and left sides). SBIA0257E EM-126 CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] ● ● Apply sealant to camshaft bracket contact surface on the front cover backside. Apply sealant to the outside of bolt hole on front cover. A EM C SBIA0258E D ● Position the No.1 camshaft bracket near the mounting position, and install it without disturbing the sealant applied to the surfaces. E F G SBIA0259E 4. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts in four steps in the order shown. Step 1 (bolts 9 - 11) : 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8) : 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 3 (bolts 1 - 11) : 5.9 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Step 4 (bolts 1 - 11) : 9.0 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.2 kg-m, 80 - 104 in-lb) 5. 6. 7. CAUTION: After tightening camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive sealant from the parts listed below. SBIA0255E ● Mating surface of rocker cover. ● Mating surface of front cover, when installed without the front cover. Install camshaft sprockets. ● Install them by lining up the mating marks on each camshaft sprocket with the ones painted on the timing chain during removal. ● Before installation of chain tensioner, it is possible to re-match the marks on timing chain with the ones on each sprocket. CAUTION: ● Aligned mating marks could slip. Therefore, after matching them, hold the timing chain in place by hand. ● Before and after installing chain tensioner, check again to KBIA0115E make sure that mating marks have not slipped. Install chain tensioner. CAUTION: After installation, pull the stopper pin off completely, and make sure that the tensioner is fully released. Install chain guide. EM-127 H I J K L M CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 8. a. b. c. Install IVT control (intake valve timing control) cover as follows: Install IVT control solenoid valve to intake valve timing control cover. Install new O-ring to front cover side. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant to the positions shown in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SBIA0260E d. Install IVT control cover bolts in the order shown. IVT control cover bolts : 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb) 9. Check and adjust valve clearances. Refer to EM-128, "Valve Clearance" . 10. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. KBIA0085E Valve Clearance EBS00CG0 INSPECTION ● 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform this inspection as follows after removal, installation, or replacement of the camshaft or any valverelated parts, or if there are any unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). Warm up the engine, then stop it. Remove front RH engine undercover. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-119, "Removal and Installation" . Turn crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to align TDC identification mark (without paint mark) with timing indicator. KBIA0190E 5. At this time, check that both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder face outside. ● If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. KBIA0400J EM-128 CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 6. By referring to the figure, measure valve clearances at locations marked X as shown in the table below (locations indicated with black arrow in figure) with a feeler gauge. ● No.1 cylinder compression TDC. Cylinder No.1 No.2 Valve INT EXH INT Measurable × × × EXH No.3 INT A EM No.4 EXH INT EXH x C SBIA0261E D ● Use a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve and camshaft. E Valve clearance standard: Hot Intake : 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) Exhaust : 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) Cold* Intake : 0.24 - 0.32 mm (0.009 - 0.013 in) Exhaust : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) 7. 8. *Reference data at approximately 20°C (68°F) CAUTION: If inspection was carried out with cold engine, check that values with fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. Turn crankshaft one complete revolution (360°) and align mark on crankshaft pulley with pointer. By referring to the figure, measure valve clearances at locations marked X as shown in the table below (locations indicated with black arrow in figure). ● No.4 cylinder compression TDC. Cylinder Valve No.1 INT EXH Measurable No.2 INT EXH x No.3 INT × F G KBIA0185E H I J No.4 EXH INT EXH x × K SBIA0262E L 9. If out of specifications, adjust. Refer to EM-129, "VALVE ADJUSTMENT" . VALVE ADJUSTMENT ● ● 1. 2. 3. Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter. The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-121, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are outside the standard. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters with a micrometer. KBIA0057E EM-129 M CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. ● Valve lifter thickness calculation. t = t1 + (C1 - C2) t = Thickness of replacement valve lifter. t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter. C1 = Measured valve clearance. C2 = Standard valve clearance. ● Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark 696 indicates a thickness of 6.96 mm (0.2740 in) Available thickness of valve lifter, refer to EM-186, "Available Valve Lifter" . Install the selected valve lifter. Install camshaft. Refer to EM-126, "INSTALLATION" . Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. Check that valve clearances for cold engine are within specifications, refer to EM-185, "Valve Clearance" . KBIA0119E After completing the repair, check valve clearances again with the specifications for warmed engine. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between the valve and camshaft. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to EM-185, "Valve Clearance" EM-130 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] TIMING CHAIN Removal and Installation PFP:13028 A EBS00CG1 EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0305E 1. O rings 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 4. Chain tensioner 5. Spring 6. Chain tensioner plunger 7. Timing chain slack guide 8. Timing chain 9. Front cover 10. Chain guide 11. IVT control solenoid valve 13. Engine mounting bracket 14. Crankshaft pulley bolt 12. IVT control cover 15. Crankshaft pulley 16. Front oil seal 17. Balancer unit timing chain tensioner 18. Oil pump drive spacer 19. Crankshaft sprocket 20. Timing chain tension guide 21. Balancer unit timing chain 22. Balancer unit CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation. EM-131 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-101, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the spark plugs. Refer to EM-114, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-119, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the coolant overflow reservoir tank. Remove the auxiliary drive belt auto-tensioner. Refer to EM-100, "Removal and Installation of Drive Belt Auto-tensioner" . Remove the generator. Refer to SC-31, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the strut tower brace. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . Dismount and position aside the A/C compressor with the piping attached. Dismount and position aside the power steering pump and reservoir tank with the piping attached. Remove the upper and lower oil pan, and oil strainer. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation" . Remove IVT control cover bolts in the order shown. Remove the IVT control cover by cutting the sealant using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) 14. Pull chain guide between camshaft sprockets out through front cover. WBIA0027E 15. Set the No.1 cylinder at TDC on the compression stroke with the following procedure: a. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise and align the mating marks to the timing indicator on the front cover. KBIA0190E b. ● At the same time, make sure that the mating marks on the camshaft sprockets are lined up as shown. If not lined up, rotate the crankshaft pulley one more turn to line up the mating marks to the positions as shown. KBIA0115E EM-132 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] 16. Remove crankshaft pulley with the following procedure: a. Hold the crankshaft pulley with a suitable tool, then loosen the crankshaft pulley mounting bolt, and pull the pulley out about 10 mm (0.39 in). Remove the crankshaft pulley mounting bolt. A EM C KBIA0077E D b. Attach a pulley puller in the M 6 (0.24 in diameter) thread hole on crankshaft pulley, and remove crankshaft pulley. E F G KBIA0078E 17. Remove the front cover with the following procedure: a. Loosen the front cover bolts in the order shown, and remove them. b. Remove the front cover. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the mounting surface. 18. If the front oil seal needs to be replaced, lift it out with a screwdriver to remove it. H I J K L M WBIA0032E 19. Remove timing chain with the following procedure: a. Push in the tensioner plunger. Insert a stopper pin into the hole on the tensioner body to hold the chain tensioner. ● Use a wire of 0.5 mm (0.02 in) diameter as a stopper pin. b. Remove the chain tensioner. KBIA0048E EM-133 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] c. Secure hexagonal part of the camshaft with a wrench and loosen the camshaft sprocket mounting bolt and remove the camshaft sprocket for both camshafts. CAUTION: ● Do not rotate the crankshaft or camshafts while the timing chain is removed. It can cause damage to the valve and piston. KBIA0049E 20. Remove the chain slack guide, tension guide, timing chain, and oil pump drive spacer. 21. Remove the timing chain tensioner for the balancer unit with the following procedure: a. Lift the tensioner lever up, and release the ratchet claw. b. Push tensioner sleeve in, and hold it. c. Matching the hole on lever with the one on body, insert a stopper pin to secure tensioner sleeve. d. Remove the timing chain tensioner for the balancer unit. 22. Remove timing chain for balancer unit and crankshaft sprocket. KBIA0121E 23. Loosen balancer unit bolts in order shown and remove balancer unit. ● Use Torx® socket (size E14) CAUTION: Do not disassemble balancer unit. KBIA0122E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Timing Chain Check the timing chain for cracks or serious wear. If a defect is detected, replace it. PBIC0282E EM-134 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] Balancer Unit Mounting Bolt Outer Diameter ● ● ● A Measure outer diameters (d1, d2) at the two positions shown in the figure. Measure d2 within the range A. If the value difference (d1 - d2) exceeds the limit (a dimension difference is large), replace it with a new one. Limit EM : 0.15 mm (0. 0059 in) or more C KBIA0126E D INSTALLATION NOTE: ● There may be two color variations of the link marks (link colors) on the timing chain. ● There are 26 links between the gold/yellow mating marks on the timing chain; and 64 links between the camshaft sprocket gold/yellow link and the crankshaft sprocket orange/blue link, on the timing chain side without the tensioner. 1. Make sure the crankshaft key points straight up. 2. Install the balancer unit and tighten the balancer unit bolts in five steps in the order shown. CAUTION: When reusing a balancer unit bolt, check its outer diameter before installation. Refer to EM-135, "Balancer Unit Mounting Bolt Outer Diameter" . Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 : 45.2 - 51.0 N·m (4.6 - 5.2 kg-m, 34 - 37 ft-lb) : 90° - 95° degrees (Target: 90° degrees) : 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb) (loosen) : 45.2 - 51.0 N·m (4.6 - 5.2 kg-m, 34 - 37 ft-lb) : 90° - 95° degrees (Target: 90° degrees) E F G H I KBIA0122E CAUTION: Check tightening angle with an angle wrench or a protractor. Do not make judgment by visual check alone. J K L M WBIA0154E 3. Install the crankshaft sprocket and timing chain for the balancer unit. ● Make sure that the crankshaft sprocket is positioned with mating marks on the block and sprocket meeting at the top. ● Install it by lining up mating marks on each sprocket and timing chain. KBIA0123E EM-135 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] 4. 5. Install timing chain tensioner for balancer unit. NOTE: Chain guide and tensioner move freely with the caulking pin as the axle. Therefore, bolt hole position of the three points could be changed during removal. If points change, temporarily fix the two mounting bolts on the chain guide and move the tensioner to match the bolt holes. ● Be careful not to let mating marks of each sprocket and timing chain slip. ● After installation, make sure the mating marks have not slipped, then remove stopper pin and release tensioner. KBIA0124E Install timing chain and related parts. ● Install by lining up mating marks on each sprocket and timing chain as shown. NOTE: Before installing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of mating mark on timing chain for that of each sprocket for alignment. CAUTION: For the above reason, after the mating marks are aligned, keep them aligned by holding them with a hand. ● Before and after installing chain tensioner, check again to make sure that mating marks have not slipped. ● After installing chain tensioner, remove stopper pin, and make sure the tensioner moves freely. ● To avoid skipped teeth, do not move crankshaft and camshaft until front cover is installed. SBIA0265E 6. Install front oil seal to front cover. ● Using a drift of 56 mm (2.20 in) diameter, press oil seal in until it is flush with front end surface of front cover. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to cause damage to circumference of oil seal. SBIA0266E EM-136 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] 7. a. b. c. Install front cover as follows: Install new O-rings to cylinder head and cylinder block. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to positions shown. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Make sure the mating marks on the timing chain and each sprocket are still aligned. Then install the front cover. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the front oil seal during installation with the front end of the crankshaft. A EM C D E F G SBIA0267E d. Tighten front cover bolts in two steps in the order shown. H Front cover bolts : 12 - 14 N·m (1.3 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb) 8. CAUTION: Wipe off any excess sealant leaking at the surface for installing the oil pan. Install the chain guide between the camshaft sprockets. I J K L M KBIA0083E 9. a. b. c. Install IVT control cover as follows: Install IVT control solenoid valves to IVT control cover. Install new oil rings to the intake camshaft sprocket insertion points on IVT control backside cover. Install new O-ring to front cover. EM-137 TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] d. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to positions shown. ● Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SBIA0260E e. Tighten the IVT control cover bolts in the order shown. IVT control cover bolts : 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb) KBIA0085E 10. Insert crankshaft pulley by aligning with crankshaft key. ● Tap its center with a plastic hammer to insert. 11. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt. ● Secure crankshaft pulley with a pulley holder to tighten the bolt. ● Perform angle tightening with the following procedure: a. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of bolt. b. Tighten to initial specifications:· Crankshaft pulley bolt initial tightening : 37.3 - 47.1 N·m (3.8 - 4.8 kg-m, 28 - 34 ft-lb) c. Apply a paint mark on the front cover, mating with any one of six easy to recognize stamp marks on bolt flange. d. Turn crankshaft pulley bolt another 60° to 66° degrees [Target: 60° degrees]. ● Check vertical mounting angle with movement of one stamp mark. 12. Installation of the remaining parts is in reverse order of removal. SBIA0268E EM-138 OIL SEAL [QR25DE] OIL SEAL Removal and installation of Valve Oil Seal PFP:00100 A EBS00EX1 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove camshaft and valve lifter. Refer to EM-121, "REMOVAL" EM Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead center. This prevents valve from dropping inside cylinder. CAUTION: C When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front cover with the timing chain. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool. D E F WBIA0156E 4. G Remove valve oil seal using Tool. H I J WEM032 INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip. Press in valve oil seal to the position shown using Tool. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. K L M WEM033 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the following parts: ● Engine under cover ● Drive belts. Refer to EM-99, "REMOVAL" . ● Crankshaft pulley. Refer to EM-131, "TIMING CHAIN" Remove front oil seal from front cover using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch front cover. EM-139 EBS00EX2 OIL SEAL [QR25DE] INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. ● Install new oil seal in the direction shown. SEM715A SBIA0266E 2. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. EM-140 OIL SEAL [QR25DE] Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal EBS00EX3 A REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the transaxle. Refer to MT-79, "Removal and Installation" "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (RE4F04B A/T). Remove the flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (A/T models). Hold the crankshaft with a stopper plate and remove the mounting bolts using Tool. Tool numbers Flywheel bolt tool (TP50 Torx® plus bit) Drive plate bolt tool (E20 Torx® socket (RS6F51A M/T), or AT-645, EM C : J-45737 D : J45816 CAUTION: KBIA0062E Be careful not to damage the flywheel contact surface for the clutch disc. NOTE: ● The flywheel two-block construction allows movement in response to transmission side pressure, or when twisted in its rotational direction, therefore, some amount of noise is normal. ● 3. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage crankshaft and/or cylinder block. E F G H I WBIA0204E J INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. ● Install new oil seal in the direction shown. K L M SEM715A 2. Install rear oil seal using a suitable drift. CAUTION: ● Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip. ● Be careful not to damage crankshaft and/or cylinder block. ● Press fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting. SBIA0280E EM-141 OIL SEAL [QR25DE] SBIA0281E 3. 4. Install flywheel (M/T Models), or drive plate (A/T Models). ● Install drive plate, reinforcement plate and pilot converter as shown in figure. ● Using a drift with 33 mm (1.30 in) diameter, push pilot converter into the end of the crankshaft. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. KBIA0075E EM-142 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service PFP:11041 A EBS00CG2 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Warm up the engine to full operating temperature. EM Turn ignition switch OFF. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the ignition coil and spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to EM-114, "Removal and Installation" . C Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-ll). Disconnect the fuel injector harness connector to avoid any residual fuel injection during the measurement. D 7. Install the compression tester with the adapter into the spark plug hole. E F G KBIA0130E H ● Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 in) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal. I J K SEM387C 8. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to the “START” position to crank over the engine. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. L Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / rpm M Standard 1,250 (12.8, 181.3) / 250 Minimum Difference limit between cylinders 1,060 (10.8, 153.7) / 250 100 (1.0, 14) / 250 CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine cranking speed. ● If the engine speed is out of specified rpm range, check the battery. Check engine speed again with a fully charged battery. ● If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again. ● If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. – If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. – If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. EM-143 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the head gasket is leaking. In such a case, replace the cylinder head gasket. Install spark plug, ignition coil and harness connectors. ● 9. EM-144 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] Removal and Installation EBS00CG3 A EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0225E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. Oil filler cap 4. PCV valve 5. Rocker cover 6. Rocker cover gasket 7. O-ring 8. Valve collet 9. Valve spring retainer 10. Valve spring 11. Valve oil seal 12. Valve guide 13. Spark plug tube 14. Cylinder head bolt 15. Cylinder head gasket EM-145 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 16. Valve seat (EXH) 17. Valve (EXH) 19. Valve seat (INT) 20. Cylinder head 18. Valve (INT) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the strut tower brace. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . Drain engine coolant and engine oil. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" , MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" . 4. Remove the engine undercovers. 5. Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-131, "Removal and Installation" . 6. Remove the camshafts. Refer to EM-121, "CAMSHAFT" . 7. Remove the exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-108, "REMOVAL" . 8. Support the engine with suitable hoist and floor jack. 9. Remove cylinder head bolts in the order shown. 10. If necessary to transfer to new cylinder head or remove for reconditioning, remove the intake manifold collector, intake manifold, and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-103, "Removal and Installation" . WBIA0033E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts ● Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts with new ones. Limit (d1 - d2) ● : 0.23 mm (0.0091 in) or less If reduction of outer diameter appears in a position other than d2, use it as d2 point. KBIA0189E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install a new cylinder head gasket. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in five steps in the order shown. CAUTION: ● If cylinder head bolts are re-used, check their outer diameters before installation. Refer to EM-146, "Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts" . NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and the seating surfaces of cylinder head bolts. Cylinder head bolts Step 1 : 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb) Step 2 : 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb) (loosen) Step 3 : 34.3 - 44.1 N·m (3.5 - 4.4 kg-m, 26 - 32 ft-lb) Step 4 : 75° - 80° (target: 75°) clockwise Step 5 : 75° - 80° (target: 75°) clockwise EM-146 KBIA0058E CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] A EM C WBIA0033E D 3. CAUTION: Check and confirm the tightening angle by using an angle wrench or protractor. Avoid judgement by visual inspection without the tool. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. E F G WBIA0155E H I J K L M EM-147 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] Disassembly and Assembly EBS00CG4 WBIA0310E 1. Valve collet 2. Valve spring retainer 3. Valve spring (with valve spring seat) 4. Valve oil seal 5. Valve guide 6. Cylinder head 7. Valve seat (INT) 8. Valve (INT) 9. Valve (EXH) 10. Valve seat (EXH) 11. Spark plug 12. Spark plug tube CAUTION: ● When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. ● Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces when installing the cylinder head, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft pulley and camshaft bracket. ● Attach tags to valve lifters so all parts are assembled in their original position. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove the valve collet using Tool. ● Compress valve spring with Tool. Remove valve collet with magnet driver. Remove valve spring retainer and valve spring. CAUTION: Do not remove valve spring seat from valve spring. Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve. ● Inspect valve guide clearance before removal. Refer to EM150, "VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE" . ● Note installation point. EM-148 WBIA0156E CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove valve oil seal using Tool. When valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-152, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . When valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-151, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . Remove spark plug with spark plug wrench. Remove spark plug tube, if necessary using pliers. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage cylinder head. ● Do not remove spark plug tube if not necessary. Once removed, the spark plug tube cannot be reused because of deformation. A EM C WEM032 D ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. E Install valve guide. Refer to EM-151, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . Install valve seat. Refer to EM-152, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . Install valve oil seal using Tool. ● Install valve oil seal to specification shown. Install valve. ● Install larger diameter to intake side. F G H WEM033 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. c. Install valve spring. ● Install smaller pitch (valve spring seat side) to cylinder head side. ● Note the identification color of the valve spring: Intake: blue Exhaust: yellow Install valve spring retainer. Install valve collet. ● Compress valve spring with valve spring compressor. Install valve collet with magnet wand. ● Tap stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to check its installed condition. Install spark plug tube. Remove old liquid gasket from cylinder head side mounting hole. Apply liquid gasket all around on spark plug tube with a 12 mm (0.47 in) width from edge of spark plug tube on the press fit side. ● Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Press fit spark plug tube so that height is to "H" as shown. Press fit height "H" standard value : 38.55 - 38.65 mm (1.518 - 1.522 in) CAUTION: ● When press fitting be careful not to deform spark plug tube. ● After press fitting, wipe off any protruding liquid gasket on top surface of cylinder head. EM-149 I J K L WBIA0072E M SBIA0252E CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 9. Install spark plug. Inspection After Disassembly EBS00CG5 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION 1. 2. Wipe off oil and remove water scale deposits, old gasket, old sealer, and carbon with a scraper. CAUTION: Use care not to allow gasket debris to enter passages for oil or water. At each of several locations on bottom surface of cylinder head, measure distortion in six directions. Standard : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less PBIC0075E VALVE DIMENSIONS Check dimensions of each valve. Refer to EM-185, "VALVE" . SEM188A VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE Perform this inspection before removing the valve guide. 1. Make sure that the valve stem diameter is within the specification. 2. Push the valve out by approximately 15 mm (0.59 in) toward the combustion chamber side to measure the valve's run-out volume (in the direction of dial gauge) with dial gauge. 3. Half of the run-out volume accounts for the valve guide clearance. Valve to guide clearance Intake : 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 - 0.0021 in) Exhaust : 0.030 - 0.063 mm (0.0012 - 0.0025 in) PBIC0077E EM-150 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT A When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized (0.2 mm, 0.008 in) valve guide. 1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. EM C D SEM008A 2. E Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2.2 ton-force) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool. F G H SEM931C 3. Ream cylinder head valve guide hole. Valve guide hole diameter for intake and exhaust 4. I : 10.175 - 10.196 mm (0.4006 - 0.4014 in) J Heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. K SEM932C 5. Press valve guide from camshaft side to dimensions as in illustration. M PBIC0078E EM-151 L CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 6. Using valve guide reamer, apply reamer finish to valve guide. Intake and exhaust : 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 - 0.2369 in) SEM932C VALVE SEAT CONTACT After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within specifications, perform this procedure: ● Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve contact on the seat surface. ● Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference. ● If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has NG conditions even after the re-check, replace the valve seat. SBIA0322E VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT When valve seat is removed, replace with an oversized [0.5 mm, (0.020 in)] valve seat. 1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in the cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this. 2. Ream cylinder head recess diameter for service valve seat. Intake Exhaust ● : 37.000 - 37.016 mm (1.4567 - 1.4573 in) : 32.000 - 32.016 mm (1.2598 - 1.2605 in) Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center. This will enable the valve seat to fit correctly. SEM795A 3. 4. Heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. Provide valve seats cooled well with dry ice. Force fit valve seat into cylinder head. CAUTION: Avoid directly touching the cold valve seats. SEM008A EM-152 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 5. Using a valve seat cutter set or a valve seat grinder, finish the seat to the specified dimensions. CAUTION: When using valve seat cutter, firmly grip the cutter handle with both hands. Then, press on the contacting surface all around the circumference to cut in a single drive. Improper pressure on the cutter or cutting many different times may result in a defective valve seat. A EM C SEM934C D Grind to obtain the dimensions indicated as shown. Standard D1 dia. D2 dia. D3 dia. D4 dia. D5 dia. D6 dia. E : 33.5 mm (1.3189 in) : 35.1 - 35.3 mm (1.382 - 1.390 in) : 39.0 - 39.2 mm (1.535 - 1.543 in) : 28 mm (1.10 in) : 29.9 - 30.1 mm (1.177- 1.185 in) : 33.5 - 33.7 mm (1.319 - 1.327 in) F G SBIA0226E 6. 7. Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting. Check again for normal contact. H VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS Set try square along the side of the valve spring and rotate the spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of the spring and the try square. Limit I : 1.9 mm (0.0748 in) J K PBIC0080E L M EM-153 CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD Check valve spring pressure with valve spring seat installed at specified spring height. Replace if not within specifications. CAUTION: Do not remove the valve spring seat. SEM113 STANDARD Free height Installation height Installation load Height during valve open Load with valve open INTAKE (identification color: blue) 44.84 - 45.34 mm (1.7654 - 1.7850 in) EXHAUST (identification color: yellow) 45.28 - 45.78 mm (1.7827 - 1.8024 in) 35.30 mm (1.390 in) 35.30 mm (1.390 in) 151 - 175 N (15.4 - 17.8 kg-force, 34 - 39 lb-force) 151 - 175 N (15.4 - 17.8 kg-force, 34 - 39 lb-force) 24.94 mm (0.9819 in) 26.39 mm (1.0390 in) 358 - 408 N (36.5 - 41.6 kg-force, 80 - 92 lb-force) 325 - 371 N (33.1 - 37.8 kg-force, 73 - 83 lb-force) EM-154 ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] ENGINE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:10001 A EBS00CG6 EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0306E 1. RH engine mount insulator 2. RH engine mounting bracket 3. Rear engine mounting bracket 4. Rear engine mount insulator 5. Center member 6. LH engine mount insulator 7. Front engine mount bracket 8. Front engine mounting insulator EM-155 ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] WARNING: ● Place chocks at the front and back of the rear wheels. ● For engines not equipped with slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts as described in the Parts Catalog. CAUTION: ● Do not start working until the exhaust system and coolant are cool. ● If items or work required are not covered by the engine main body section, refer to the applicable sections. ● Use the correct supporting points for lifting and jacking. Refer to GI-39, "LIFTING POINT" . ● In removing the drive shaft, be careful not to damage the grease seals on the transaxle. ● Before separating the engine and transaxle, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the assembly. ● Be sure not to damage the edge of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) or the ring gear teeth. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove engine cover using power tool. Disconnect the fuel rail at the fuel hose quick connector (engine side). Refer to EM-103, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Drain the engine oil. Refer to MA-27, "Changing Oil Filter" . Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the engine hood assembly. Refer to EI-13, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the battery, battery hold downs, and battery tray. Refer to SC-4, "BATTERY" . Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector. Remove the air duct and air cleaner case assembly. Refer to EM-101, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the heater hoses. Remove the radiator and radiator fan assembly. Refer to CO-32, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the generator. Refer to SC-32, "Removal" . Remove the left and right drive shafts. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . Remove the engine undercovers. Dismount the A/C compressor with piping connected and secure with wire to the radiator support. Disconnect the transaxle shift control cables. Disconnect the brake power booster vacuum hose. Disconnect the following engine compartment electrical harness connectors: ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 (ULEV only) or Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (SULEV only) ● Starter ● Coolant temperature sensor ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid ● Backup lamp switch ● Vehicle speed sensor ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Ignition coils ● Fuel injector harness ● Engine ground straps ● Intake valve timing control solenoid ● Transaxle sensors (A/T only) ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Knock sensor ● Oil pressure switch ● Power valve actuator EM-156 ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] Power steering pressure switch Remove clutch operating cylinder from transaxle with line connected and position aside (M/T models). Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Dismount the power steering pump with piping connected and position it aside with wire. Install engine slingers into front left cylinder head and rear right cylinder head. ● Use generator bracket bolt holes for the front slinger. ● Use the proper slingers and bolts as described in the Parts Catalog. ● 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. Slinger bolts - front Slinger bolts - rear : 43.2 - 52.9 N·m (4.4 - 5.3 kg-m, 32- 39 ft-lb) : 24.5 - 31.4 N·m (2.5 - 3.2 kg-m, 18 - 23 ft-lb) A EM C D E SBIA0271E 24. Support the engine/transaxle assembly with engine lifting equipment from the top with the vehicle raised on a hoist. 25. Remove the center member. ● Remove front and rear engine mounting insulator through-bolt and the center member bolts. 26. Remove RH engine mounting insulator. 27. Remove LH transaxle mounting insulator through-bolts. 28. Lower the engine/transaxle assembly from the engine compartment. 29. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-21, "Removal" . 30. Separate the engine and transaxle. WEM023 F G H I J K L M EM-157 ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WBIA0036E ● ● Do not allow oil to get on mounting insulators. Be careful not to damage mounting insulators. If parts have a direction mark (arrow) this indicates front of the vehicle, and the parts must be installed according to the identification mark. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● ● ● Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, lubricants, engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of coolant, lubricants, oil, fuel, and exhaust gas. Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines. EM-158 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CYLINDER BLOCK Disassembly and Assembly PFP:11010 A EBS00CG7 EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0073E 1. Cylinder block 2. O-ring 3. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 4. Knock sensor 5. Oil pressure switch 6. Lower cylinder block 7. Lower cylinder block bolt 8. Snap ring 9. Connecting rod 10. Connecting rod bearing 11. Connecting rod bearing cap 12. Connecting rod bearing cap bolt 13. Piston 14. Oil ring 15. Second ring 16. Top ring 17. Piston pin 18. Main thrust bearing 19. Main bearing upper 20. Crankshaft 21. Main bearing lower 22. Crankshaft rear oil seal 23. Pilot converter (A/T only) 24. Crankshaft signal plate 25. Drive plate 26. Reinforcement plate 27. Flywheel 28. Cylinder block heater (if equipped) EM-159 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Mount the engine on a suitable engine stand. Drain any remaining engine oil and coolant from the engine. Remove the following components and associated parts. ● Exhaust manifold and three way catalyst assembly. Refer to EM-108, "Removal and Installation" . ● Intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-103, "Removal and Installation" . ● Intake manifold and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-103, "Removal and Installation" . ● Ignition coils. Refer to EM-113, "Removal and Installation" . ● Rocker cover. Refer to EM-119, "Removal and Installation" . ● Front cover, timing chain, and balancer unit. Refer to EM-131, "Removal and Installation" . ● Cylinder head. Refer to EM-145, "Removal and Installation" . ● Water pump. Refer to CO-28, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the cylinder block heater, if equipped. Remove the knock sensor. CAUTION: Carefully handle the sensor and do not drop the sensor. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS). CAUTION: ● Avoid impacts such as a dropping. ● Do not disassemble. ● Keep it away from metal particles. ● Do not place sensor close to magnetic materials. SBIA0273E 7. Remove the flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (A/T models). Hold the crankshaft with a stopper plate and remove the mounting bolts using Tool. Tool numbers For Flywheel bolt For Drive plate bolt : J-45737 : J-45816 CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the flywheel contact surface for the clutch disc. KBIA0062E NOTE: ● The flywheel two-block construction allows movement in response to transmission side pressure, or when twisted in its rotational direction, therefore, some amount of noise is normal. ● 8. Remove pilot converter using Tool (A/T models). WBIA0158E EM-160 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 9. a. Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies. A Position the crankshaft and corresponding connecting rod, to be removed, to the bottom dead center stroke. b. Remove the connecting rod cap. Number the cap so it can be EM assembled in the same position. c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push the piston and connecting rod assembly out of the top of the cylinder block. NumC ber the piston and rod so it can be assembled in the same position. ● Before removing the piston and connecting rod assembly, PBIC0259E D check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-175, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" . 10. Remove the connecting rod bearings. If reusing, number them so they can be assembled in the same E position and direction. CAUTION: ● When removing them, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order. F 11. Remove the piston rings from the piston. ● Use a piston ring expander. ● Before removing the piston rings, check the piston ring side G clearance. Refer to EM-176, "PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE" . CAUTION: H ● When removing the piston rings, be careful not to damage the piston. ● Be careful not to damage piston rings by expanding them excessively, if reusing them. I PBIC0087E 12. Remove the piston from the connecting rod as follows: a. Using a snap ring pliers, remove the two snap rings. J K L PBIC0260E b. Heat the piston to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F) with a heat gun, or equivalent. PBIC0261E EM-161 M CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] c. Push out piston pin with a punch of an outer diameter of approximately 19 mm (0.75 in). PBIC0262E 13. Remove the lower cylinder block bolts. ● Before loosening the lower cylinder block bolts, measure the crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-174, "CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE" . ● Loosen them in the order shown to remove them. WBIA0037E 14. Remove the lower cylinder block. ● Using Tool cut the Silicone RTV Sealant and remove the lower cylinder block from the cylinder block. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mounting surface. 15. Remove the crankshaft. CAUTION: ● Do not damage or deform the signal plate while mounted on the crankshaft. ● When setting the crankshaft on a flat surface, use a block of wood to avoid interference between the signal plate and the surface. ● Do not remove signal plate unless it is necessary. 16. Pull the rear oil seal out of the rear end of the crankshaft using suitable tool. SBIA0275E CAUTION: Do not to damage the crankshaft or cylinder block when removing the rear oil seal. NOTE: When replacing the rear oil seal without removing the cylinder block, use a screwdriver to pull it out from between crankshaft and block. 17. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder block and lower cylinder block. CAUTION: Identify and number the bearings, if reusing them, so that they are assembled in the same position and direction. ASSEMBLY 1. Using compressed air, clean out the coolant and oil passages in the cylinder block, the cylinder bore and the crankcase to remove any foreign material. CAUTION: Use approved safety glasses to protect your eyes. EM-162 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 2. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the drain plugs. Install the drain plugs on the cylinder block. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Replace the copper washers with new ones. A EM C WBIA0159E D 3. a. b. Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings. Remove dust, dirt, and oil from the bearing mating surfaces of the cylinder block and lower cylinder block. Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 main bearing journal on the cylinder block. ● Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside). E F G PBIC0264E c. 4. a. Install the main bearings paying attention to their position and direction. ● The main bearing with an oil hole and groove goes on the cylinder block. The one without them goes on the lower cylinder block. ● Only the main bearing (on the cylinder block) for No. 3 journal has different specifications. ● Before installing the bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing friction surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it. SBIA0277E ● When installing, align the bearing stopper to the notch. ● Make sure that the oil holes on the cylinder block and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned. b. 5. EM-163 J K M : 12 - 14 N·m (1.22 - 1.43 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb) Remove the dowel pin. CAUTION: Be sure to remove dowel pin before installing the crankshaft. NOTE: Dowel pins for the crankshaft and signal plate are supplied as a set for each. Install the crankshaft onto the cylinder block. ● While turning the crankshaft by hand, check that it turns smoothly. I L Install the signal plate to the crankshaft. Position the crankshaft and signal plate using a positioning dowel pin, and tighten the signal plate bolts to specification. Signal plate bolts H SBIA0278E CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 6. 7. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to positions shown and install the lower cylinder block. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . NOTE: Cylinder block and lower cylinder block are machined together. Neither of them can be replaced separately. CAUTION: After the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied, the lower cylinder block installation must be finished within 5 minutes. WBIA0160E Tighten lower cylinder block bolts in three steps in the order shown. NOTE: Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of the mounting bolts. Lower cylinder block bolts Step 1 (bolts 11 - 22) : 22.6 - 27.5 N·m (2.3 - 2.8 kg-m, 17 - 20 ft-lb) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 10) : 36.3 - 42.1 N·m (3.7 - 4.3 kg-m, 27 - 31 ft-lb) Step 3 (bolts 1 - 10) : 60° - 65° (target: 60°) KBIA0063E CAUTION: Use an angle wrench (special service tool) or protractor to check tightening angle. Do not tighten by visual inspection. ● Wipe off completely any protruding Silicone RTV Sealant on the exterior of engine. ● Check crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-174, "CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE" . ● After installing the mounting bolts, make sure that the crankshaft can be rotated smoothly by hand. WBIA0161E 8. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. ● Install new oil seal in the direction shown. SEM715A EM-164 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 9. Install rear oil seal using a suitable drift. CAUTION: ● Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip. ● Be careful not to damage crankshaft and/or cylinder block. ● Press fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting. A EM C SBIA0280E D E F G SBIA0281E 10. Install the piston to the connecting rod. Assemble the components in their original positions. a. Using a snap ring pliers, install the snap ring into the grooves of the piston's rear side. ● Insert the piston pin snap ring fully into groove. b. Install the piston to the connecting rod. ● Using a heat gun, heat the piston [approximately 60° - 70° C (140° - 158° F)] until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excessive force. From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and the connecting rod. ● Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the oil holes and the cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown in the figure. c. Install the piston pin snap ring into the front of the piston. ● Check that the connecting rod moves smoothly. H I J K L PBIC0099E 11. Using a piston ring expander, install the piston rings. Assemble the components in their original positions. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the piston. ● Position each ring with the gap as shown in the figure, referencing the piston front mark as the starting point. ● Install the top ring and the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward. Stamped mark : A (top ring) : 2A (second ring) EM-165 PBIC0100E M CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 12. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the connecting rod cap. Assemble the components in their original positions. ● When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing friction surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean the back. ● When installing, align the connecting rod bearing stopper protrusion with the notch of the connecting rod to install. ● Check the oil holes on the connecting rod and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned. PBIC0266E 13. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft. Assemble the components in their original positions. ● Rotate the crankshaft so the pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed is at the bottom dead center position. ● Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and crankshaft pin. ● Match the cylinder position number with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod for installation. ● Install the piston with the front mark on the piston crown facWBIA0162E ing the front of the engine using Tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big end. 14. Install the connecting rod caps. Assemble the components in their original positions. ● Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting rod with those on the cap to install. SBIA0282E 15. Tighten the connecting rod bolts using Tool in four steps as follows: ● Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of the connecting rod bolts. CAUTION: Always use either an angle wrench or protractor. Avoid tightening based on visual check alone. Step 1 Step 2 ● ● : 18.6 - 20.6 N·m (1.9 - 2.1 kg-m, 14 - 15 ft-lb) : 85° - 95° (target 90° degrees) Check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-175, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" . After tightening the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. EM-166 WBIA0163E CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 16. Install flywheel (M/T Models), or drive plate (A/T Models). ● Install drive plate, reinforcement plate and pilot converter as shown in figure. ● Using a drift with 33 mm (1.30 in) diameter, push pilot converter into the end of the crankshaft. A EM C KBIA0075E D 17. Install the cylinder block heater. Cylinder block heater : 69 - 78 N·m (7.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 51 - 57 ft-lb) E 18. Install the knock sensor. ● Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor. ● Install the knock sensor with the connector facing lower left by 45° as shown. ● Do not tighten the knock sensor bolt while holding the connector. ● Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other components. Knock sensor bolt F G H KBIA0069E I : 15.7 - 26.5 N·m (1.6 - 2.7 kg-m, 12 - 19 ft-lb) CAUTION: If the knock sensor is dropped, replace it with new one. 19. Install the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Crankshaft position sensor bolt J : 5.4 - 7.3 N·m (0.55 - 0.75 kg-m, 48 - 65 in-lb) K 20. Installation of remaining components is in reverse order of removal. L How to Select Piston and Bearing EBS00CG8 DESCRIPTION Selection points Selection parts Selection items Selection methods Main bearing Main bearing grade (bearing thickness) Determined by match of cylinder block bearing housing grade (inner diameter of housing) and crankshaft journal grade (outer diameter of journal) Between crankshaft to connecting rod Connecting rod bearing Connecting rod bearing grade (bearing thickness) Combining service grades for connecting rod big end inner diameter and crankshaft pin outer diameter determine connecting rod bearing selection Between cylinder block to piston Piston and piston pin assembly (The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly) Piston grade (piston outer diameter) Piston grade = cylinder bore grade (inner diameter of bore) *Between piston to connecting rod — Between cylinder block to crankshaft — EM-167 — M CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] *For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference. ● The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts. ● For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table. ● For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the selective fitting parts, refer to the text. HOW TO SELECT A PISTON When New Cylinder Block is Used: ● ● Check the cylinder bore grade on rear left side of cylinder block, and select a piston of the same grade. If there is a corrected stamp mark on the cylinder block, use it as a correct reference. SBIA0283E WBIA0074E EM-168 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] When a Cylinder Block is Reused: 1. 2. Measure the cylinder block bore inner diameter. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the cylinder bore inner diameter of the "Piston Selection Table". Select the piston of the same grade. A EM Piston Selection Table Unit: mm (in) Grade number (Mark) 2 (or no mark) 3 Inner diameter of cylinder bore 89.010-89.020 (3.5043-3.5047) 89.020-89.030 (3.5047-3.5051) Outer diameter of piston 88.990-89.000 (3.5035-3.5039) 89.000-89.010 (3.5039-3.5043) C NOTE: ● The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. ● The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected. Only 0 grade is available. HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used: 1. D E F Apply big end inside diameter grade stamped on connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". G H I SBIA0282E 2. 3. 4. Apply pin diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side to the column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". Apply the symbol obtained to connecting rod bearing grade table to select. J K L KBIA0073E When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused: 1. 2. Measure dimensions of the big end inner diameter of connecting rod and outer diameter of crankshaft pin individually. Apply the dimension measured to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table" below. EM-169 M CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table KBIA0147E Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table Grade Upper / Lower thickness mm (in) Identification color 0 1 2 3 1.499 / 1.495 (0.0590 / 0.0589) 1.503 / 1.499 (0.0592 / 0.0590) 1.507 / 1.503 (0.0593 / 0.0592) 1.511 / 1.507 (0.0595 / 0.0593) Black Brown Green Yellow Undersize Bearing Usage Guide ● ● When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearing, use undersize (U.S.) bearing. When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. EM-170 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Bearing Undersize Table Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 1.624 - 1.632 (0.0639 - 0.0643) A EM CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, do not damage the fillet R (All crankshaft pins). C KBIA0148E D HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used: 1. "Main Bearing Selection Table" rows correspond to bearing housing grade on rear left side of cylinder block. ● If there is a corrected stamp mark on the cylinder block, use it as a correct reference. E F G SBIA0283E 2. Apply journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side to column in "Main Bearing Selection Table". H I J K KBIA0073E L 3. 4. Find value at crossing of row and column in "Main Bearing Selection Table". CAUTION: ● There are two main bearing selection tables. One is for odd-numbered journals (1, 3, and 5) and the other is for even-numbered journals (2 and 4). Make certain to use the appropriate table. This is due to differences in the specified clearances. Apply the symbol obtained to "Main Bearing Grade Table" to select. NOTE: ● Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower. When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused: 1. 2. 3. Measure inner diameter of cylinder block main bearing housing and outer diameter of crankshaft journal. Apply measurement in above step 1 to the "Main Bearing Selection Table". Follow steps 3 and 4 in “When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used”. EM-171 M CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Main Bearing Selection Table (No.1, 3, and 5 journals) WBIA0095E EM-172 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Main Bearing Selection Table (No.2 and 4 journals) A EM C D E F G H I J K L WBIA0096E Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals) Unit: mm (in) Grade number Thickness Identification color (UPR / LWR) 0 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) Black 1 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) Brown 2 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779- 0.0780) Green 3 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) Yellow 4 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) Blue 5 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) Pink 6 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) Purple 7 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) White EM-173 Remarks Grade and color are the same for upper and lower bearings. M CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 UPR 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) LWR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) UPR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) LWR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) UPR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) LWR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) UPR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) LWR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) UPR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) LWR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) UPR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) LWR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) UPR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) LWR 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) Black/Brown Brown/Green Green/Yellow Yellow/Blue Grade and color are different for upper and lower bearings. Blue/Pink Pink/Purple Purple/White Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (U.S.) bearing when oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification. ● When using undersize (U.S.) bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with the bearing installed and grind journal until oil clearance falls within specification. Bearing Undersize Table ● Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 2.106 - 2.114 (0.0829 - 0.0832) CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use an undersize bearing (all journals). KBIA0148E Inspection After Disassembly EBS00CG9 CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE ● Using a dial gauge, measure the clearance between the thrust bearings and the crankshaft arm when the crankshaft is moved fully forward or backward. Standard Limit ● : 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace the thrust bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace the crankshaft. PBIC0268E EM-174 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ● Standard Limit ● A Measure side clearance between connecting rod and crankshaft arm with feeler gauge. : 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in) : 0.50 mm (0.0197 in) EM If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace the connecting rod bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace the crankshaft also. C KBIA0071E PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE Piston Pin Bore Diameter ● ● D E Measure the piston pin bore diameter with an inside micrometer. Service parts apply only to grade 0. F Piston pin bore diameter Grade No. 0 : 19.993 - 19.999 mm (0.7871 - 0.7874 in) Grade No. 1 : 19.999 - 20.005 mm (0.7874 - 0.7876 in) G H PBIC0116E I Outer Diameter of Piston Pin ● Measure outer diameter of piston pin with a micrometer. Piston pin outer diameter Grade No. 0 : 19.989 - 19.995 mm (0.7870 - 0.7872 in) Grade No. 1 : 19.995 - 20.001 mm (0.7872 - 0.7874 in) J K L PBIC0117E Piston to Piston Pin Clearance M (Piston to piston pin clearance) = (Piston pin bore diameter) – (Outer diameter of piston pin) Standard ● ● ● : 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in) If clearance exceeds specification, replace either or both of piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each parts. Refer to piston selection table to replace piston/piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-168, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" . Refer to connecting rod bearing selection table to replace connecting rod. Refer to EM-169, "HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING" . EM-175 WBIA0074E CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] NOTE: ● The connecting rod small end grade and piston pin hole (piston pin) grade are provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected. Only 0 grade is available. ● Refer to EM-177, "CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)" for the values for each grade at the plant. ● Regarding marks on piston head, refer to EM-168, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" . SBIA0282E PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ● ● Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove with feeler gauge. Standard Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring : 0.040 - 0.080 mm (0.0016 - 0.0031 in) : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) : 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 in) Limit Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) : 0.10 mm (0.004 in) : — SEM024AA If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly. PISTON RING END GAP ● ● Check if inner diameter of cylinder bore is within specification. Refer to EM-179, "PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" . Insert piston ring until middle of cylinder with piston, and measure gap. Standard Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Limit Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring ● : 0.21 - 0.31 mm (0.0083 - 0.0122 in) : 0.32 - 0.47 mm (0.0126 - 0.0185 in) : 0.20 - 0.60 mm (0.0079 - 0.0236 in) SEM822B : 0.54 mm (0.0213 in) : 0.67 mm (0.0264 in) : 0.95 mm (0.0374 in) If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring. EM-176 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ● A Check with connecting rod aligner. Bend limit Torsion limit : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length EM C D SEM003F ● If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. E F G SEM038F H CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ● Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified torque, measure the connecting rod big end inner diameter using an inside micrometer. Standard I J : 48.000 - 48.013 mm (1.8898 - 1.8903 in) K PBIC0119E L CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End) ● Measure inner diameter of bushing. M Connecting rod small end inner diameter Grade No. 0 : 20.000 - 20.006 mm (0.7874 - 0.7876 in) Grade No. 1 : 20.006 - 20.012 mm (0.7876 - 0.7879 in) PBIC0120E EM-177 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Connecting Rod Oil Clearance (Small End) (Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Outer diameter of piston pin) Standard ● ● : 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in) If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly. If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the "Piston Selection Table" to select the piston corresponding to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Refer to EM-168, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" . SBIA0282E Factory Installed Parts Grading: Service parts apply only to grade 0. Unit: mm (in) Grade 0 1 Connecting rod small end inner diameter 20.000 - 20.006 (0.7874 - 0.7876) 20.006 - 20.012 (0.7876 - 0.7879) Piston pin outer diameter 19.989 - 19.995 (0.7870 - 0.7872) 19.995 - 20. 001 (0.7872 - 0.7874) Piston pin bore diameter 19.993 - 19.999 (0.7871- 0.7874) 19.999 - 20.005 (0.7874 - 0.7876) WBIA0074E CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION ● ● Using a scraper, remove gasket on the cylinder block surface, and also remove oil, scale, carbon, or other contamination. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket debris to enter the oil or coolant passages. Measure the distortion on the block upper face at some different points in 6 directions. Limit ● : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) If out of the distortion limit, replace the cylinder block. PBIC0121E INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING ● ● ● Install the lower cylinder block with the main bearings removed and tighten the mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-162, "ASSEMBLY" . Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of the main bearing housing. Refer to EM-188, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and lower cylinder block assembly. NOTE: These components cannot be replaced as a single unit because they were processed together. PBIC0269E EM-178 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE Inner Diameter of Cylinder Bore ● Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-ofround and taper at 6 different points on each cylinder. (X and Y directions at A, B and C). The Y axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine. NOTE: When determining cylinder bore grade, measure cylinder bore at B position. Cylinder bore inner diameter Grade No. 1 : 89.000 - 89.010 mm (3.5039 - 3.5043 in) Grade No. 2 : 89.010 - 89.020 mm (3.5043 - 3.5047 in) Grade No. 3 : 89.020 - 89.030 mm (3.5047 - 3.5051 in) Wear limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in) Out-of-round 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) (difference between, X – Y): Taper limit (dif0.01 mm (0.0004 in) ference between, C – A): ● ● A EM C D SBIA0284E E F G H If the measured value rebore exceeds the limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone the inner wall. An oversize piston is provided. When using an oversize piston, rebore the cylinder so that the clearance of the piston cylinder satisfies the standard. I J Piston oversize (OS) Clearance : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) Diameter : 89.180 - 89.210 mm (3.5110 - 3.5122 in) K Outer Diameter of Piston ● Measure piston skirt diameter (A). L Piston skirt diameter Grade No. 1 : 88.980 - 88.990 mm (3.5031 - 3.5035 in) Grade No. 2 : 88.990 - 89.000 mm (3.5035 - 3.5039 in) Grade No. 3 : 89.000 - 89.010 mm (3.5039 - 3.5043 in) Oversize 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) clearance ● M Measure point (a) (distance from the top): 42 mm (1.65 in) SEM258C Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance ● Calculate by outer diameter of piston skirt and inner diameter of cylinder (direction X, position B). (Clearance) = (Inner diameter of cylinder) – (Outer diameter of piston skirt). Standard Limit ● : 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in) : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in) If it exceeds the limit, replace piston/piston pin assembly. Reboring Cylinder Bore 1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”. EM-179 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Rebored size calculation: D = A + B - C D: Bored diameter A: Piston diameter as measured B: Piston-to-bore clearance (standard value) C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) 2. 3. 4. 5. Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted in final assembly. Cut cylinder bores. NOTE: When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. CAUTION: Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a time. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. NOTE: Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL Measure outer diameter of crankshaft main journals "Dm". Standard "Dm" : 54.955 - 54.979 mm (2.1636 - 2.1645 in) AEM028 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL Measure outer diameter of crankshaft pin journals. Standard "Dp" : 44.956 - 44.974 mm (1.7699 - 1.7706 in) AEM028 EM-180 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT ● ● ● A Using a micrometer, measure the dimensions at four different points shown in the figure on each journal and pin. Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in dimensions between "X" and "Y" at "A" and "B". Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between "A"and "B" at "X" and "Y". Limit Out-of-round (X - Y) Taper (A - B) EM C : 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) : 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) PBIC0128E D CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ● ● ● Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on both ends of the crankshaft. Place a dial gauge straight up on the No. 3 journal. While rotating the crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on the dial gauge, the total indicator reading. Limit E F : 0.05 mm (0.002 in) G PBIC0271E H OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING Method of Measurement ● Standard Limit ● I Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Using an inside micrometer measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing. (Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod bearing) – (Outer diameter of crankshaft pin) J K : 0.028 - 0.045 mm (0.0011 - 0.0018 in) : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard, grind crankshaft pin and use undersized bearing. Refer to EM-169, "HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING" . L PBIC0119E Method of Using Plastigage ● ● ● ● M Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of each bearing completely. Cut the Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never rotate the crankshaft. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearings, and using the scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width. EM142 NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the method by calculation. EM-181 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING Method of Measurement ● Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and lower cylinder block. Measure the main bearing inner diameter with the lower cylinder block bolts tightened to the specified torque. (Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of main bearing) – (Outer diameter of crankshaft journal) Standard: No. 1, 3, and 5 journals No. 2 and 4 journals Limit ● : 0.012 - 0.022 mm (0.0005 - 0.0009 in) : 0.018 - 0.028 mm (0.0007 - 0.0011 in) : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) If the measured value exceeds the limit, select main bearings referring to the main bearing inner diameter and crankshaft journal outer diameter, so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Refer to EM-171, "HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING" . Method of Using Plastigage ● ● ● ● Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely. Cut the Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Tighten the main bearing bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never rotate the crankshaft. Remove the bearing cap and bearings, and using the scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width. NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the "Method by Calculation". EM142 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING ● When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Standard ● : There must be crush height. If the standard is not met, replace main bearings. SEM502G OUTER DIAMETER OF LOWER CYLINDER BLOCK MOUNTING BOLT ● ● ● ● Perform only with M10 (0.39 in) bolts. Measure outer diameters (d1, d2) at two positions as shown. Measure d2 at a point within block A. When the value of d1- d2 exceeds the limit (a large difference in dimensions), replace the bolt with a new one. Limit : 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) or more PBIC0272E EM-182 CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLT ● ● A Measure outer diameter (d) at position shown. When “d” exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace the bolt with a new one. Limit EM : 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) or less C D PBIC0273E MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL) E NOTE: ● Inspection for double mass flywheel only. ● Do not disassemble double mass flywheel. F Flywheel Runout ● ● Measure runout of flywheel contact surface to the clutch with a dial gauge. Measure runout at 210 mm (8.27 in) dia. Standard Limit ● G : 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less : 1.3 mm (0.051 in) or less H When measured value exceeds the limit, replace the flywheel with a new one. I J SBIA0287E Movement Amount in Rotation Direction 1. 2. 3. 4. Install a bolt to clutch cover hole, and place a torque wrench on the extended line of the flywheel center line. ● Tighten bolt to keep it from loosening at a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb). Put a mating mark on circumferences of the two flywheel masses without applying any load (measurement standard points). Apply a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb) in each direction, and mark the movement amount on the mass on the transaxle side. Measure dimensions of movement amounts A and B on circumference of the flywheel on the transaxle side. Standard ● : 28.3 mm (1.114 in) or less When measured value is outside the standard, replace flywheel. EM-183 WBIA0224E K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00030 EBS00CGA GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Cylinder arrangement Displacement cm Bore and stroke 3 In-line 4 2,488 (151.82) (cu in) mm (in) 89.0 x 100 (3.50 - 3.94) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-3-4-2 Compression Number of piston rings 2 Oil 1 Compression ratio 9.5 Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / 250 rpm Standard 1,250 (12.8, 181.3) Minimum 1,060 (10.8, 153.7) Differential limit between cylinders 100 (1.0, 14) Valve timing PBIC0187E Unit: degree a b c d e f 224 244 0 64 3 41 DRIVE BELTS Tension of drive belts Auto adjustment by auto-tensioner INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD Unit: mm (in) Limit Surface distortion Intake manifold collector 0.1 (0.004) Intake manifold 0.1 (0.004) Exhaust manifold 0.3 (0.012) SPARK PLUG Make NGK Standard type PLFR5A-11 (Platinum type) Hot type PLFR4A-11 (Platinum type) Cold type PLFR6A-11 (Platinum type) Gap (nominal) 1.1 mm (0.043 in) EM-184 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] CYLINDER HEAD Unit: mm (in) A Limit EM C D PBIC0283E Head surface distortion E 0.1 (0.004) VALVE Valve Dimensions F Unit: mm (in) G H I SEM188 Valve head diameter “D” Valve length “L” Valve stem diameter “d” J Intake 35.5 - 35.8 (1.398 - 1.409) Exhaust 30.5 - 30.8 (1.201 - 1.213) Intake 97.16 (3.8252) Exhaust 98.82 (3.8905) K Intake 5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354) Exhaust 5.955 - 5.970 (0.2344 - 0.2350) L Intake Valve seat angle “α” Valve margin “T” 45°15′ - 45°45′ Exhaust Intake 1.1 (0.043) Exhaust 1.3 (0.051) M Valve Clearance Unit: mm (in) Cold* (reference data) Hot Intake 0.24 - 0.32 (0.009 - 0.013) 0.32 - 0.40 (0.013 - 0.016) Exhaust 0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013) 0.33 - 0.41 (0.013 - 0.016) *: Approximately 20°C (68 °F) EM-185 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Available Valve Lifter KBIA0119E Thickness mm (in) Identification mark 6.96 (0.2740) 696 6.98 (0.2748) 698 7.00 (0.2756) 700 7.02 (0.2764) 702 7.04 (0.2772) 704 7.06 (0.2780) 706 7.08 (0.2787) 708 7.10 (02795) 710 7.12 (0.2803) 712 7.14 (0.2811) 714 7.16 (0.2819) 716 7.18 (0.2827) 718 7.20 (0.2835) 720 7.22 (0.2843) 722 7.24(0.2850) 724 7.26 (0.2858) 726 7.28 (0.2866) 728 7.30(0.2874) 730 7.32 (0.2882) 732 7.34 (0.2890) 734 7.36 (0.2898) 736 7.38 (0.2906) 738 7.40 (0.2913) 740 7.42 (0.2921) 742 744 (0.2929) 744 7.46 (0.2937) 746 Valve Spring Free height standard mm (in) Intake (blue) 44.84 - 45.34 (1.7654 - 1.7850) Exhaust (yellow) 45.28 - 45.78 (1.7827 - 1.8024) Pressure standard N (kg-force, lb-force) at height mm (in) Intake (blue) and Exhaust (yellow) Out-of-square mm (in) Installation height mm (in) 151 - 175 (15.4 - 17.8, 34 - 39) at 35.30 (1.390) 1.9 (0.0748) Intake (blue) and Exhaust (yellow) EM-186 35.30 (1.390) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Height during valve open mm (in) Load with valve open N (kg-force, lb-force) Intake (blue) 24.94 (0.9819) Exhaust (yellow) 26.39 (1.0390) Intake (blue) A 358 - 408 (36.5 - 41.6, 80 - 92) Exhaust (yellow) 325 - 371 (33.1 - 37.8, 73 - 83) EM Valve Lifter Unit: mm (in) C Standard Valve lifter outer diameter 33.965 - 33.980 (1.3372 - 1.3378) Valve lifter guide bore diameter 34.000 - 34.021 (1.3386 - 1.3394) Clearance between lifter and lifter guide bore D 0.020 - 0.056 (0.0008 - 0.0022) Valve Guide Unit: mm (in) E F G H PBIC0184E Outer diameter Valve guide Standard Service 10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950) 10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029) Inner diameter (Finished size) Valve guide bore diameter I 6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369) 9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935) Interference fit of valve guide J 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014) K 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023) Standard Valve to guide clearance Projection length “L” Intake 0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) Exhaust 0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025) Intake 10.1 - 10.3 (0.398 - 0.406) Exhaust 10.0 - 10.4 (0.394 - 0.409) L M Valve Seat Unit: mm (in) PBIC0284E Standard EM-187 Service SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D) Valve seat interference fit Valve seat outer diameter (d) Intake 36.500 - 36.516 (1.4370 - 1.4376) 37.000 - 37.016 (1.4567 - 1.4573) Exhaust 31.500 - 31.516 (1.2402 - 1.2408) 32.000 - 32.016 (1.2598 - 1.2605) Intake 0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044) Exhaust 0.084 - 0.116 (0.0033 - 0.0046) Intake 36.597 - 36.613 (1.4408 - 1.4415) 37.097 - 37.113 (1.4605 - 1.4611) Exhaust 31.600 - 31.616 (1.2441 - 1.2447) 32.100 - 32.116 (1.2638 - 1.2644) CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING Unit: mm (in) Standard Camshaft runout [TIR*] Less than 0.04 (0.0016) SEM671 Cam height “A” Intake 45.665 - 45.855 (1.7978 - 1.8053) Exhaust 43.975 - 44.165 (1.7313 - 1.7388) Outer diameter of camshaft journal No. 1 27.935 - 27.955 (1.0998 - 1.1006) No. 2, 3, 4, 5 23.435 - 23.455 (0.9226 - 0.9234) Inner diameter of camshaft bracket No.1 28.000 - 28.021 (1.1024 - 1.1032) No.2, 3, 4, 5 23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260) Camshaft journal clearance 0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034) Camshaft end play 0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074) Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] Less than 0.15 (0.0059) *: Total indicator reading CYLINDER BLOCK Unit: mm (in) PBIC0281E Surface distortion Cylinder bore Limit Inner diameter 0.1 (0.004) Standard Grade No. 2 89.010 - 89.020 (3.5043 - 3.5047) Grade No. 3 89.020 - 89.030 (3.5047 - 3.5051) Wear limit 0.2 (0.008) EM-188 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Out-of-round (X − Y) Less than 0.015 (0.0006) Taper (C − A) Less than 0.01 (0.0004) Main journal inner diameter grade (Without bearing) Difference in inner diameter between cylinders Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 A 58.944 - 58.945 (2.3206 - 2.3207) 58.945 - 58.946 (2.3207 - 2.3207) 58.946 - 58.947 (2.3207 - 2.3207) 58.947 - 58.948 (2.3207 - 2.3208) 58.948 - 58.949 (2.3208 - 2.3208) 58.949 - 58.950 (2.3208 - 2.3209) 58.950 - 58.951 (2.3209 - 2.3209) 58.951 - 58.952 (2.3209 - 2.3209) 58.952 - 58.953 (2.3209 - 2.3210) 58.953 - 58.954 (2.3210 - 2.3210) 58.954 - 58.955 (2.3210 - 2.3211) 58.955 - 58.956 (2.3211 - 2.3211) 58.956 - 58.957 (2.3211 - 2.3211) 58.957 - 58.958 (2.3211 - 2.3212) 58.958 - 58.959 (2.3212 - 2.3212) 58.959 - 58.960 (2.3212 - 2.3213) 58.960 - 58.961 (2.3213 - 2.3213) 58.961 - 58.962 (2.3213 - 2.3213) 58.962 - 58.963 (2.3213 - 2.3214) 58.963 - 58.964 (2.3214 - 2.3214) 58.964 - 58.965 (2.3214 - 2.3215) 58.965 - 58.966 (2.3215 - 2.3215) 58.966 - 58.967 (2.3215 - 2.3215) 58.967 - 58.968 (2.3215 - 2.3216) EM C D E F G H Standard Less than 0.03 (0.0012) PISTON, PISTON RING, AND PISTON PIN Available Piston I Unit: mm (in) J K L M PBIC0188E Piston skirt diameter “A” Standard Grade No. 2 88.990 - 89.000 (3.5035 - 3.5039) Grade No. 3 89.000 - 89.010 (3.5039 - 3.5043) 0.20 (0.0079) oversize clearance (service) 89.180 - 89.210 (3.5110 - 3.5122) “H” dimension Piston pin bore diameter Piston to cylinder bore clearance 42 (1.65) Grade No. 0 19.993 - 19.999 (0.7871 - 0.7874) Grade No. 1 19.999 - 20.005 (0.7874 - 0.7876) Standard 0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012) Limit 0.08 (0.0031) EM-189 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Piston Ring Unit: mm (in) Side clearance End gap Standard Limit Top 0.040 - 0.080 (0.0016 - 0.0031) 0.11 (0.0043) 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.10 (0.004) Oil ring 0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053) — Top 0.21- 0.31 (0.0083 - 0.0122) 0.54 (0.0213) 2nd 0.32 - 0.47 (0.0126 - 0.0185) 0.67 (0.0264) Oil (rail ring) 0.20 - 0.60 (0.0079 - 0.0236) 0.95 (0.0374) Piston Pin Unit: mm (in) Piston pin outer diameter Grade No.0 19.989 - 19.995 (0.7870 - 0.7872) Grade No.1 19.995 - 20.001 (0.7872 - 0.7874) Piston pin to piston clearance 0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002) Piston pin to connecting rod oil clearance Standard 0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007) CONNECTING ROD Unit: mm (in) Center distance 143.00 - 143.10 (5.63 - 5.63) Bend [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.15 (0.0059) Torsion [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.30 (0.0118) Connecting rod small end inner diameter Connecting rod small end inner diameter* 22.000 - 22.012 (0.7874 - 0.7879) Grade No. 0 20.000 - 20.006 (0.7874 - 0.7876) Grade No. 1 20.006 - 20.012 (0.7876 - 0.7879) Connecting rod big end inner diameter 48.000 - 48.013 (1.8898 - 1.8903) Standard Side clearance Connecting rod bearing housing 0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138) Limit 0.50 (0.0197) Grade No. 0 Grade No. 1 Grade No. 2 Grade No. 3 Grade No. 4 Grade No. 5 Grade No. 6 Grade No. 7 Grade No. 8 Grade No. 9 Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C 48.000 - 48.001 (1.8898 - 1.8898) 48.001 - 48.002 (1.8898 - 1.8898) 48.002 - 48.003 (1.8898 - 1.8899) 48.003 - 48.004 (1.8899 - 1.8899) 48.004 - 48.005 (1.8899 - 1.8899) 48.005 - 48.006 (1.8899 - 1.8900) 48.006 - 48.007 (1.8900 - 1.8900) 48.007 - 48.008 (1.8900 - 1.8901) 48.008 - 48.009 (1.8901 - 1.8901) 48.009 - 48.010 (1.8901 - 1.8902) 48.010 - 48.011 (1.8902 - 1.8902) 48.011 - 48.012 (1.8902 - 1.8902) 48.012 - 48.013 (1.8902 - 1.8903) *: After installing in connecting rod EM-190 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] CRANKSHAFT Unit: mm (in) A EM C D SEM645 Pin journal “DP” grade Main journal “Dm” grade SEM715 Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U 44.974 - 44.973 (1.7706 - 1.7706) 44.973 - 44.972 (1.7706 - 1.7705) 44.972 - 44.971 (1.7705 - 1.7705) 44.971 - 44.970 (1.7705 - 1.7705) 44.970 - 44.969 (1.7705 - 1.7704) 44.969 - 44.968 (1.7704 - 1.7704) 44.968 - 44.967 (1.7704 - 1.7704) 44.967 - 44.966 (1.7704 - 1.7703) 44.966 - 44.965 (1.7703 - 1.7703) 44.965 - 44.964 (1.7703 - 1.7702) 44.964 - 44.963 (1.7702 - 1.7702) 44.963 - 44.962 (1.7702 - 1.7702) 44.962 - 44.961 (1.7702 - 1.7701) 44.961 - 44.960 (1.7701 - 1.7701) 44.960 - 44.959 (1.7701 - 1.7700) 44.959 - 44.958 (1.7700 - 1.7700) 44.958 - 44.957 (1.7700 - 1.7700) 44.957 - 44.956 (1.7700 - 1.7699) Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 54.979 - 54.978 (2.1645 - 2.1645) 54.978 - 54.977 (2.1645 - 2.1644) 54.977 - 54.976 (2.1644 - 2.1644) 54.976 - 54.975 (2.1644 - 2.1644) 54.975 - 54.974 (2.1644 - 2.1643) 54.974 - 54.973 (2.1643 - 2.1643) 54.973 - 54.972 (2.1643 - 2.1642) 54.972 - 54.971 (2.1642 - 2.1642) 54.971 - 54.970 (2.1642 - 2.1642) 54.970 - 54.969 (2.1642 - 2.1641) 54.969 - 54.968 (2.1641 - 2.1641) 54.968 - 54.967 (2.1641 - 2.1641) 54.967 - 54.966 (2.1641 - 2.1640) 54.966 - 54.965 (2.1640 - 2.1640) 54.965 - 54.964 (2.1640 - 2.1639) 54.964 - 54.963 (2.1639 - 2.1639) 54.963 - 54.962 (2.1639 - 2.1639) 54.962 - 54.961 (2.1639 - 2.1638) 54.961 - 54.960 (2.1638 - 2.1638) 54.960 - 54.959 (2.1638 - 2.1637) 54.959 - 54.958 (2.1637 - 2.1637) 54.958 - 54.957 (2.1637 - 2.1637) 54.957 - 54.956 (2.1637 - 2.1636) 54.956 - 54.955 (2.1636 - 2.1636) Center distance “r” 49.60 - 50.04 (1.9528 - 1.9701) Out-of-round (X − Y) Standard Less than 0.005 (0.0002) Taper (A − B) Standard Less than 0.005 (0.0002) Runout [TIR*] Limit Less than 0.05 (0.002) Standard Free end play 0.10 - 0.26 (0.0039 - 0.0102) Limit 0.30 (0.0118) EM-191 E F G H I J K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] *: Total indicator reading MAIN BEARING Unit: mm (in) SEM685D Grade number Thickness Identification color (UPR / LWR) 0 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) Black 1 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) Brown 2 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) Green 3 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) Yellow 4 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) Blue 5 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) Pink 6 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) Purple 7 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) White 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 UPR 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) LWR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) UPR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) LWR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) UPR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) LWR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) UPR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) LWR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) UPR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) LWR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) UPR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) LWR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) UPR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) LWR 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) Remarks Grade and color are the same for upper and lower bearings. Black/Brown Brown/Green Green/Yellow Yellow/Blue Grade and color are different for upper and lower bearings. Blue/Pink Pink/Purple Purple/White Undersize Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 2.106 - 2.114 (0.0829 - 0.0832) Main journal diameter Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. Bearing Oil Clearance Unit: mm (in) Main bearing oil clearance Standard No.1, 3, and 5 0.012 - 0.022 (0.0005 - 0.0009) No.2 and 4 0.018 - 0.028 (0.0007 - 0.0011) Limit 0.1 (0.004) EM-192 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] CONNECTING ROD BEARING Grade number Thickness mm (in) A Identification color (mark) 0 1.499 - 1.495 (0.0590 - 0.0589) Black 1 1.503 - 1.499 (0.0592 - 0.0590) Red 2 1.507 - 1.503 (0.0593 - 0.0592) Green 3 1.511 - 1.507 (0.0595 - 0.0593) Yellow EM C Undersize Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 1.624 - 1.632 (0.0639 - 0.0643) D Crank pin journal diameter Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. E Bearing Oil Clearance Unit: mm (in) Connecting rod bearing oil clearance Standard 0.028 - 0.045 (0.0011 - 0.0018) Limit F 0.10 (0.0039) Miscellaneous Components EBS00EZ6 Unit: mm (in) Flywheel runout [TIR*] G Less than 0.15 (0.0059) Rotational movement 9.8 N.m (1.0 kg-m, 87 in-lb) force applied Less than 28.3 mm (1.114 in) H *: Total indicator reading at measuring point 115 mm (4.53 in) from crankshaft center. I J K L M EM-193 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] EM-194 B ENGINE A SECTION EXHAUST SYSTEM EX C D CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Special Service Tool ................................................. 2 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM .................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 E F G H I J K L M EX-1 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EBS00DTK The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name KV10114400 (J-38365-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening front and rear heated oxygen sensors a: 22 mm (0.87 in) S-NT636 Commercial Service Tools EBS00DTL (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-43897–18) (J-43897–12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.) a: J-43897-18 (18 mm) for zirconia oxygen sensor b: J-43897-12 (12 mm) for titania oxygen sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 EX-2 EXHAUST SYSTEM EXHAUST SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:20100 A EBS00DTM Refer to the following figures for removal and installation. EX QG18DE C D E F G H I J WBIA0136E K L M EX-3 EXHAUST SYSTEM QR25DE WBIA0312E CAUTION: ● Always replace the exhaust gaskets and seal bearings with new ones when reassembling. ● For the QR25DE engine, install the two seal bearings as shown. Position the conical spring so that the wide end is against the flare flange as shown. LBIA0356E LBIA0357E ● ● With engine running, check all tube connections for exhaust gas leaks, and entire system for unusual noises. Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise or vibration. EX-4 EXHAUST SYSTEM ● ● ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace it with a new one. A Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean the exhaust tube sensor threads (using oxygen sensor thread cleaner) Tool, J-43897-18 or J-43897-12, and apply anti-seize lubricant. Do not over-tighten the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may cause damage to the heated oxygen EX sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. C D E F G H I J K L M EX-5 EXHAUST SYSTEM EX-6 D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION FRONT AXLE C FAX CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ............................................. 5 Front Axle Parts ....................................................... 5 Front Wheel Bearing ................................................ 5 Drive Shaft ............................................................... 5 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ................................... 6 Components ............................................................. 6 Removal ................................................................... 6 Installation ................................................................ 8 Disassembly ............................................................. 8 WHEEL HUB ......................................................... 9 WHEEL BEARING ................................................ 9 Inspection ................................................................. 9 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............................. 9 SNAP RING .......................................................... 9 Assembly ................................................................ 10 DRIVE SHAFT ...........................................................11 Components ........................................................... 11 Removal ................................................................. 14 Installation .............................................................. 16 TRANSAXLE SIDE .............................................. 16 WHEEL SIDE ...................................................... 16 Disassembly ........................................................... 16 TRANSAXLE SIDE (TS79C AND T86 TYPE) ..... 16 TRANSAXLE SIDE (D90,D90+B AND D86+B TYPE) .................................................................. 17 WHEEL SIDE (ZF90, B90 AND B86 TYPE) ........ 17 SUPPORT BEARING .......................................... 17 Inspection ............................................................... 18 DRIVE SHAFT ..................................................... 18 BOOT .................................................................. 18 JOINT ASSEMBLY (TRANSAXLE SIDE) ............ 18 JOINT ASSEMBLY (WHEEL SIDE) .................... 19 Assembly ................................................................ 19 SUPPORT BEARING .......................................... 19 WHEEL SIDE (ZF90, B90 AND B86 TYPE) ........ 20 DYNAMIC DAMPER ........................................... 21 TRANSAXLE SIDE (TS79C AND T86) ............... 21 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 23 Drive Shaft .............................................................. 23 Wheel Bearing (Front) ............................................ 23 FAX-1 E F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 EDS000Q6 When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes. Always torque brake lines when installing. SBR686C FAX-2 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS000Q7 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name HT72520000 (J25730-B) Ball joint remover B Removing tie-rod outer end and lower ball joint a: 33 mm (1.30 in) b: 50 mm (1.97 in) r: R11.5 mm (0.453 in) C FAX NT546 KV38106800 (J34297-1) Differential side oil seal protector E Installing drive shaft F NT147 G Commercial Service Tools EDS000Q8 Tool name Description 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing each brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) H I NT360 J K L M FAX-3 Symptom AXLE × × Shake × ×: Applicable FAX-4 Noise × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × Vibration × × × Shimmy × × Judder × Poor quality ride or handling × × × Refer to FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to PS-6, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES STEERING Refer to AXLE in this chart. SUSPENSION × AXLE Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart. FAX-5, "Front Wheel Bearing" Wheel bearing damage DRIVE SHAFT FAX-5, "Front Wheel Bearing" FAX-8, "Installation" Parts interference Improper installation, looseness Refer to MA-39, "WHEEL BALANCE" Noise, Vibration Imbalance FAX-18, "Inspection" DRIVE SHAFT Joint sliding resistance Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS — Reference page Excessive joint angle NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EDS000Q9 Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Front Axle Parts PFP:00000 A EDS000QA Check front axle and front suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or other damage. ● Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play. ● Make sure that the cotter pin is properly installed. ● Retighten all axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Tightening torque B C : Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . FAX SMA525A E Front Wheel Bearing ● ● EDS000QB Rotate wheel hub to check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. Check axial end play. Axial end play F : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less G If out of specification or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly, replace wheel bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-6, "WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE" . H SFA543A Drive Shaft EDS000QC I Check for grease leakage or other damage. J K L SFA108A M FAX-5 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Components PFP:40202 EDS000QD WDIA0002E 1. Drive shaft 2. Sensor rotor (if equipped) 3. Knuckle 4. Wheel sensor (if equipped) 5. Baffle plate 6. Wheel bearing assembly 7. Snap ring 8. Wheel bolt 9. Wheel hub 11. Cotter pin 12. Disc rotor 10. Wheel bearing lock nut 13. Wheel nut Removal EDS000QE CAUTION: Before removing the front axle assembly, disconnect the wheel sensor from the assembly. Then move it away from the front axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the wheel sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Remove cotter pin and wheel bearing lock nut. SFA090A FAX-6 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE 2. Separate tie-rod from knuckle with Tool. ● Install stud nut on stud bolt to prevent damage to stud bolt. A B C WAX006 FAX 3. Remove brake caliper assembly, torque member and rotor. ● Brake hose need not be disconnected from brake caliper. In this case, suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. Make sure brake hose is not twisted. E F G SFA898A 4. H Remove strut lower mounting nuts and bolts. I J K SFA803A 5. Separate drive shaft from knuckle by lightly tapping it. If it is hard to remove, use a puller. ● Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them when removing drive shaft. L M SFA651A FAX-7 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE 6. 7. Loosen lower ball joint nut. Remove knuckle from lower ball joint stud with Tool. WAX007 Installation 1. EDS000QF Install in reverse order of removal. ● Install knuckle with wheel hub. When installing knuckle to strut, be sure to hold bolts and tighten nuts. : 114 - 133 N·m (11.6 - 13.6 kg-m, 84 - 98 ft-lb) ● Before tightening, apply oil to threaded portion of drive shaft. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut. : 197 - 274 N·m (20 - 28 kg-m, 145 - 202 ft-lb) (QG18DE models) : 255 - 333 N·m (26 - 33 kg-m, 188 - 245 ft-lb) (QR25DE models) ● ● SFA114A Rotate wheel hub to check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. Rotate wheel hub to check wheel bearing axial end play. Axial end play : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less SFA543A Disassembly EDS000QG CAUTION: When removing wheel hub or wheel bearing from knuckle, replace wheel bearing assembly (outer race and inner race) with a new one. Wheel bearing does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted, replace wheel bearing assembly. ● Growling noise is emitted from wheel bearing during operation. ● Wheel bearing drags or turns roughly. This occurs when turning hub by hand after bearing lock nut is tightened to specified torque. FAX-8 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE WHEEL HUB A Drive out hub and inner race from knuckle with a suitable tool. B C SFA116A FAX WHEEL BEARING When replacing wheel bearing, replace complete wheel bearing assembly (inner race and outer race). 1. Remove bearing inner race. E F G SFA654A 2. H Remove snap rings. I J K SAX008 L 3. 4. Press out bearing outer race. Remove baffle plate, if required. M SFA496A Inspection EDS000QH WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Check wheel hub and knuckle for cracks by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. SNAP RING Check snap ring for wear or cracks. Replace if necessary. FAX-9 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Assembly ● ● EDS000QI If baffle plate has been removed, replace it with a new one. When installing the baffle plate, press new plate so that it is in contact with knuckle wall. Refer to figure at right. SFA921B 1. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle until it seats against knuckle shoulder. Maximum load P : 29.4 kN (3.0 ton, 3.3 US ton, 2.95 Imp ton) CAUTION: ● Do not apply disassembly force in direction “R”. There is a possibility of breaking the seal. In case of separation (except range of initial clearance) and disassembling of inner race, the wheel bearing must be replaced with a new part. ● Do not press inner race of wheel bearing assembly or seal. ● Do not apply oil or grease to mating surfaces of wheel bearing outer race and knuckle. 2. Install outer snap ring into groove of knuckle. 3. Press wheel hub into knuckle until it stops when the end of the wheel bearing is hit. Maximum load P ● WAX012 : 49.0 kN (5.0 ton, 5.5 US ton, 4.9 Imp ton) Do not move wheel hub in direction “R”. WAX014 4. a. Check bearing operation. Add load P with press. Load P b. c. : 34.3 - 49.0 kN (3.5 - 5.0 ton, 3.9 - 5.5 US ton, 3.44 - 4.92 Imp ton) Spin knuckle several turns in both directions. Make sure that wheel bearings operate smoothly. SFA182A FAX-10 DRIVE SHAFT DRIVE SHAFT Components PFP:39100 A EDS000QJ CAUTION: ● Circular clips should be properly meshed with differential side gear (transaxle side) and with joint assembly (wheel side). Make sure they will not come out. ● Be careful not to damage boots. Use suitable protector or cloth during removal and installation. B C FAX E F G H I J K L WDIA0031E 1. Dust shield 2. Sensor rotor, if equipped 3. Joint assembly 4. Boot band 5. Boot 6. Circular clip 7. Drive shaft 8. Dynamic damper band, outboard (if equipped) 9. Dynamic damper 10. Dynamic damper band, inboard 11. Boot 12. Boot band 13. Spider assembly 14. Snap ring 15. Slide joint housing 16. Dust shield 17. Circular clip FAX-11 M DRIVE SHAFT LDIA0013E 1. Dust shield 2. Sensor rotor, if equipped 3. Joint assembly 4. Boot 5. Boot band 6. Circular clip 7. Drive shaft 8. Dynamic damper 9. Dynamic damper band 10. Boot 11. Boot band 12. Cage 13. Inner race 14. Ball 15. Snap ring 16. Slide joint assembly 17. Dust shield 18. Circular clip 19. Slide joint housing with extension shaft 20. Snap ring 21. Dust shield 22. Support bearing 23. Support bearing retainer 24. Bracket 25. Snap ring 26. Dust shield FAX-12 DRIVE SHAFT A B C FAX E F G H I J K L M LDIA0014E 1. Dust shield 2. Sensor rotor, if equipped 3. Joint assembly 4. Boot 5. Boot band 6. Circular clip 7. Drive shaft 8. Dynamic damper 9. Dynamic damper band 10. Boot 11. Boot band 12. Spider assembly 13. Snap ring 14. Slide joint assembly 15. Dust shield 16. Circular clip 17. Ball 18. Inner race 19. Cage 20. Slide joint housing with extension shaft 21. Snap ring 22. Dust shield 23. Support bearing 24. Support bearing retainer 25. Bracket 26. Snap ring 27. Dust shield FAX-13 DRIVE SHAFT Removal 1. EDS000QK Remove cotter pin and wheel bearing lock nut. SFA090A 2. Remove drive shaft center support bearing bolts. WAX017 3. 4. Remove strut lower mounting nuts and bolts. Remove brake hose clip. SFA803A 5. Separate drive shaft from knuckle by lightly tapping it. If it is hard to remove, use a puller. ● Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them when removing drive shaft. SFA651A FAX-14 DRIVE SHAFT 6. Remove left drive shaft from transaxle. A B C WAX003 FAX 7. Remove right drive shaft from transaxle. — For M/T models — ● Pry off drive shaft from transaxle as shown at right. E F G H WAX004 — For A/T models — ● Insert screwdriver into transaxle opening for right drive shaft and strike with a hammer. ● Be careful not to damage pinion mate shaft and side gear. I J K L M WAX005 FAX-15 DRIVE SHAFT Installation EDS000QL TRANSAXLE SIDE 1. 2. Drive a new oil seal to transaxle. Refer to MT-11, "SIDE OIL SEAL" , MT-74, "SIDE OIL SEAL" , MT-74, "SIDE OIL SEAL"AT263, "Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement" , or AT-643, "Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement" . Set Tool along the inner circumference of oil seal. AFA084 3. 4. 5. Insert drive shaft into transaxle. Be sure to properly align the serrations and then withdraw Tool. Push drive shaft, then press-fit circular clip on the drive shaft into circular clip groove of side gear. After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circular clip is not properly meshed with the side gear. WAX008 WHEEL SIDE 1. 2. Install drive shaft into knuckle. Tighten strut lower mounting nuts and wheel bearing lock nut. Disassembly EDS000QM TRANSAXLE SIDE (TS79C AND T86 TYPE) 1. 2. 3. Remove boot bands. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and drive shaft before separating joint assembly. Put matching marks on spider assembly and drive shaft. SFA963 4. Remove snap ring, then remove spider assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble spider assembly. 5. Draw out boot. ● Cover drive shaft serrations with tape so as not to damage the boot. SFA612 FAX-16 DRIVE SHAFT TRANSAXLE SIDE (D90,D90+B AND D86+B TYPE) 1. 2. 3. A Remove boot bands. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and drive shaft before separating joint assembly. Pry off snap ring with a screwdriver, and pull out slide joint housing. B C SFA476 4. 5. 6. ● Put matching marks on inner race and drive shaft. Remove snap ring, then remove ball cage, inner race and balls as a unit. Draw out boot. Cover drive shaft serrations with tape so as not to damage the boot. FAX E F G SFA514A WHEEL SIDE (ZF90, B90 AND B86 TYPE) CAUTION: The joint on the wheel side cannot be disassembled. 1. Before separating joint assembly, put matching marks on drive shaft and joint assembly. 2. Separate joint assembly with a suitable tool. ● Be careful not to damage threads on drive shaft. 3. Remove boot bands. H I J K WAX009 L SUPPORT BEARING 1. Remove dust shield. M SFA442B FAX-17 DRIVE SHAFT 2. Remove snap ring. SFA692 3. Press support bearing assembly off drive shaft. SFA693 4. 5. 6. Remove snap ring. Remove dust shield. Separate support bearing from retainer. SFA617 Inspection EDS000QN Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent, then dry with compressed air. Check parts for evidence of deformation and other damage. DRIVE SHAFT Replace drive shaft if it is twisted or cracked. BOOT Check boot for fatigue, cracks or wear. Replace with new boot and boot bands. JOINT ASSEMBLY (TRANSAXLE SIDE) TS79C AND T86 TYPE ● ● ● ● ● Check spider assembly for needle bearing and washer damage. Replace if necessary. Check roller surfaces for scratches, wear and other damage. Replace if necessary. Check serration for deformation. Replace if necessary. Check slide joint housing for any damage. Replace if necessary. When replacing only spider assembly, select a new spider assembly from among those listed in table below. Ensure that the number stamped on slide joint is the same as that stamped on new part. FAX-18 AFA111 DRIVE SHAFT Housing alone cannot be replaced. It must be replaced together with spider assembly. Stamped number Part No.* 01 39720-61E01 02 39720-61E02 03 39720-61E03 04 39720-61E04 05 39720-61E05 06 39720-61E06 07 39720-61E07 A B C FAX *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. D90+B TYPE ● ● ● Replace any parts of double offset joint which show signs of scorching, rust, wear or excessive play. Check serration for deformation. Replace if necessary. Check slide joint housing for any damage. Replace if necessary. E F JOINT ASSEMBLY (WHEEL SIDE) Replace joint assembly if it is deformed or damaged. G SUPPORT BEARING Make sure support bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. SUPPORT BEARING BRACKET H Check support bearing bracket for cracks with a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. Assembly ● ● EDS000QO After drive shaft has been assembled, ensure that it moves smoothly over its entire range without binding. Use Genuine NISSAN grease or equivalent after every overhaul. I J SUPPORT BEARING 1. Install bearing into retainer. K L M SFA618 2. 3. 4. Install dust shield. Install snap ring. Press drive shaft into bearing. SFA694 FAX-19 DRIVE SHAFT 5. 6. Install snap ring. Install new dust shield. SFA444B WHEEL SIDE (ZF90, B90 AND B86 TYPE) 1. ● Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft. Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to boot during installation. SFA800 2. Set joint assembly onto drive shaft by lightly tapping it. ● Ensure that marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. WAX010 3. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease. Specified amount of grease 4. : QG18DE 122 - 126 g (4.30 - 4.44 oz) : QR25DE A/T 120 - 140 g (4.23 - 4.94 oz) : QR25DE M/T 115 - 135 g (4.06 - 4.76 oz) Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft groove. Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is “L1 ”. Length “L1 ” QG18DE QR25DE A/T QR25DE M/T : 97 mm (3.82 in) : 115.7 mm (4.56 in) : 124.2 mm (4.89 in) SAX028 FAX-20 DRIVE SHAFT 5. Lock new large and small boot bands securely with a suitable tool. A B C AFA022 FAX 6. ● Install the sensor rotor, if equipped. For front sensor rotor, use a hammer and wooden block. For rear sensor rotor, use a suitable drift and press. Always replace sensor rotor with a new one. E F G SBR985C DYNAMIC DAMPER 1. 2. H Use a new damper band when reinstalling. Install dynamic damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely: I Unit: mm (in) QG18DE Applied model LH RH "A" 175-185 (6.89 - 7.28) 420-430 (16.54 - 16.93) "B" 70 (2.76) 64 (2.52) J K QR25DE "A" 173 - 179 (6.81 - 7.05) 200 - 206 (7.87 - 8.11) "B" 50 (1.97) 68 (2.68) SAX029 L TRANSAXLE SIDE (TS79C AND T86) 1. ● Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft. Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to boot during installation. M SFA800 FAX-21 DRIVE SHAFT 2. 3. Install spider assembly securely, making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. Install new snap ring. SFA023A 4. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease. Specified amount of grease 5. 6. : QG18DE 154 - 164 g (5.43 - 5.78 oz) : QR25DE A/T 145 - 165 g (5.11 - 5.82 oz) : QR25DE M/T D86+B 135 - 155 g (4.76 - 5.47 oz) : QR25DE M/T T86 140 - 160 g (4.94 - 5.64 oz) Install slide joint housing. Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is “L2 ”. Length “L2 ” QG18DE QR25DE A/T QR25DE M/T D86+B QR25DE M/T T86 ● 7. : 102.5 mm (4.035 in) : 98 mm (3.86 in) : 98 mm (3.86 in) : 98.5 mm (3.88 in) Make sure the boot is properly installed on the drive shaft groove. SFA993 Lock new large and small boot bands securely with a suitable tool. SFA443B FAX-22 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Drive Shaft Applied model Joint type Transaxle side Wheel side Quality PFP:00030 A EDS000QP QG18DE QR25DE TS79C D90+B, D90, D86+B and T86 ZF90 B90 and B86 Genuine NISSAN grease or equivalent B C D90+B and D90 145 - 165 (5.11- -5.82) Transaxle side Grease Capacity TS79C 154 - 164 (5.43 - 5.78) g (oz) D86+B 135 - 155 (4.76 - 5.47) T86 140 - 160 (4.94 - 5.64) Wheel side FAX B90 120 - 140 (4.23 - 4.94) ZF90 122 - 126 (4.30 - 4.44) B86 115- -135 (4.06 - 4.76) E D90+B and D90 98 (3.86) Boot length (in) Transaxle side “L2 ” TS79C 102.5 (4.035) D86+B 98 (3.86) F T86 98.5 (3.88) mm Wheel side “L1 ” ZF90 97 (3.82) B90 115.7 (4.56) B86 124.2 (4.89) G H I SFA961AA J K SFA962A Wheel Bearing (Front) Wheel bearing axial end play limit L mm (in) Wheel bearing lock nut tightening torque Knuckle to strut tightening torque EDS000QQ 0.05 (0.0020 in) or less N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 197 - 274 (20 - 28, 145 - 202) N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 114 - 133 (11.6 - 13.6, 84 - 98) FAX-23 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) FAX-24 B ENGINE A SECTION FUEL SYSTEM FL C D CONTENTS FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................... 2 Checking Fuel Lines ................................................. 2 General Precautions ................................................ 2 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ........................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 REMOVAL ............................................................. 3 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 6 FUEL TANK ................................................................ 7 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 REMOVAL ............................................................. 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 10 Standard and Limit .................................................. 10 E F G H I J K L M FL-1 FUEL SYSTEM FUEL SYSTEM Checking Fuel Lines PFP:17503 EBS00DTF Inspect the fuel lines, filler cap, and fuel tank for incorrect attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, and deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace the faulty parts. SMA803A General Precautions EBS00DTG WARNING: When replacing the fuel line parts, observe the following: ● Place a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop. ● Do not smoke while servicing the fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area. ● Have a CO2 fire extinguisher in the workshop. CAUTION: ● Before removing the fuel line parts, use the following procedures: – Store the drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. – Release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QG18DE), EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE). – Disconnect the battery ground cable. ● Always replace the O-ring seals with new ones. ● Do not kink or twist any of the hoses and tubes during removal and installation. ● Do not over tighten the hose clamps to avoid damaging the hoses. ● After installation, run the engine and check for fuel leaks at the connections. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● For inspection and installation of EVAP system parts, refer to EC-622, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" (QG18DE), EC-1305, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" (QR25DE). ● For inspection and installation of ORVR system parts, refer to EC-627, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" (QG18DE), EC-1312, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" (QR25DE). FL-2 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:17042 A EBS00DTH FL C D E F G H I J WFE025 K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QG18DE), EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE). Disconnect the battery ground cable. Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-5, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the inspection hole cover located under the rear seat cushion by rotating the attaching clips 90° as shown. JFE613A FL-3 L M FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 6. Disconnect the fuel pump assembly electrical connector. LFE008 7. a. b. 8. 9. Disconnect the fuel feed hose quick connector as follows: Apply mating marks on the fuel pump outlet and the quick connector for installation. Hold the quick connector and push in the tabs, then pull out from the fuel pump outlet that is inserted in the quick connector. CAUTION: ● The quick connector can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the fuel feed hose more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. LBIA0291E Remove the six fuel level sensor and fuel pump assembly retainer ring screws. To remove, pull up on the fuel level sensor and fuel pump assembly as shown. CAUTION: Do not damage the arm of the fuel level sensor and fuel tank temperature sensor when removing. SFE564A 10. Remove the fuel pump by gently releasing the tabs using a suitable tool as shown. ● Apply mating marks on the fuel pump and fuel filter for proper alignment for installation. JFE614A FL-4 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 11. Disconnect the fuel pump harness connector as shown. A FL C JFE615A D 12. Remove the fuel filter from fuel level sensor unit by gently releasing the tabs using a suitable tool as shown. ● Apply mating marks on fuel filter and fuel level sensor unit for proper alignment for installation. E F G JFE616A 13. Remove the fuel pressure regulator from the fuel filter by pulling off the retaining clip using a suitable tool as shown. H I J LFE014 K L M FL-5 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Installation is in reverse order of removal. ● Connect the quick connector in the order as follows: – Align the mating marks on the fuel pump outlet and quick connector for installation. – Align the push tabs with the quick connector slots. – Insert the fuel pump outlet into the center of the quick connector until you hear a click. WBIA0212E ● – – – After connecting the quick connector, make sure the connection is fully seated in the order as follows: Pull on the quick connector to make sure it is firmly connected. Apply fuel pressure to the fuel lines by turning the ignition switch ON (without starting the engine). Then check for fuel leaks at the connections Start the engine and increase the engine speed, verify there are no fuel leaks. WBIA0213E FL-6 FUEL TANK FUEL TANK Removal and Installation PFP:17202 A EBS00DTI FL C D E F G H I J WBIA0088E K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Refer to EC-49, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QG18DE), EC-687, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE). Disconnect the battery ground cable. Open the fuel filler lid and remove the filler cap to relieve the pressure in the fuel tank. Drain the fuel from the fuel tank. Refer to FL-2, "General Precautions" . Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-5, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the inspection hole cover located under the rear seat cushion by rotating the attaching clips 90° as shown. JFE613A FL-7 L M FUEL TANK 7. Disconnect the fuel pump assembly electrical connector. LFE008 8. a. b. Disconnect the fuel feed hose quick connector as follows: Apply mating marks on the fuel pump outlet and the quick connector for installation. Hold the quick connector and push in the tabs, then pull out from of the fuel pump outlet that is inserted in the quick connector. CAUTION: ● The quick connector can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the fuel feed hose more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. LBIA0291E 9. Remove the center exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . 10. From the rear left area of the fuel tank, remove the filler hose, vent hose, and evaporation hoses as shown. SFE559A 11. Support the fuel tank with a suitable transmission jack as shown. 12. Remove the fuel tank mounting band bolts while supporting the fuel tank. JFE610A FL-8 FUEL TANK 13. Lower the fuel tank by 70 – 80 mm (2.76 – 3.15 in), then remove the nuts and clips holding the fuel tank protector, and remove the protector. ● To remove the clips, use pliers to squeeze the extensions as shown by the arrows, and then remove the clip. 14. Remove the fuel tank. A FL C JFE611A D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Connect the quick connector in the order as follows: – Align mating marks on the fuel pump outlet and the quick connector for correct installation. – Align the push tabs with the quick connector slots. – Insert the fuel pump outlet into the center of the quick connector until you hear a click. E F G H WBIA0212E ● – – – After connecting the quick connector, check that the quick connector is fully seated in the order as follows: Pull on the quick connector to make sure it is firmly connected. Apply fuel pressure to the fuel lines by turning the ignition switch ON (without starting the engine). Then check for fuel leaks at the hose connections. Start the engine and increase engine speed, verify that there are no fuel leaks. I J K L WBIA0213E FL-9 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00030 EBS00DTJ Fuel Tank Fuel tank capacity 50 FL-10 (13 1/4 US gal, 11 Imp gal) E SUSPENSION A SECTION FRONT SUSPENSION B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 5 Components ............................................................. 5 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 6 Front Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 7 CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ...................................................................... 7 TOE-IN .................................................................. 7 FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE ..................... 8 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ................. 9 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 Disassembly ............................................................. 9 Inspection ................................................................. 9 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ......................... 9 MOUNTING INSULATOR AND RUBBER PARTS... 10 THRUST BEARING ............................................. 10 COIL SPRING ..................................................... 10 Assembly ................................................................ 10 STABILIZER BAR ..................................................... 11 Removal and Installation ........................................ 11 TRANSVERSE LINK AND LOWER BALL JOINT ... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 Inspection ............................................................... 13 TRANSVERSE LINK ........................................... 13 LOWER BALL JOINT .......................................... 14 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 15 General Specifications (Front) ................................ 15 Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ....................... 15 Lower Ball Joint ...................................................... 15 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ................................. 16 FSU F G H I J K L M FSU-1 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 EES000IB When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes. Always torque brake lines when installing. Lock nuts are unreusable parts; always use new ones. When replacing, do not wipe the oil off the new lock nut before tightening. FSU-2 SBR686C PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EES000IC The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name HT72520000 (J25730-B) Ball joint remover B Description Removing tie-rod outer end and lower ball joint C D NT146 FSU Commercial Service Tools EES000ID Tool name Description Attachment wheel alignment Measure wheel alignment a: Screw M24 x 1.5 pitch b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. d: 56 mm (2.20 in) e: 12 mm (0.47 in) NT148 Equivalent to GG94310000 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench F G H Removing and installing brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) I J S-NT360 Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring K L NT717 M FSU-3 FSU-5 Bushing or mounting deterioration Parts interference Noise × × × × Shake × × × × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Judder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-6, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" DRIVE SHAFT AXLE TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES STEERING × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable FSU-4 × FSU-6 FSU-11 Incorrect wheel alignment Stabilizer bar fatigue FSU-5, FSU-6 FSU-16 Suspension looseness × Spring fatigue — FSU-5 Symptom Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS FSU-5 Reference page Improper installation, looseness NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart × × × × PFP:00003 EES000IE Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Components PFP:54010 A EES000IF B C D FSU F G H I J K L M WEIA0002E 1. Strut tower bar bracket (if equipped) 2. Strut spacer 3. Strut mount bracket 4. Strut mount bearing 5. Spring upper seat 6. Upper spring rubber seat 7. Bound bumper rubber 8. Coil spring 9. Lower spring rubber seat 10. Shock absorber 11. Wheel hub and steering knuckle 13. Strut tower bar (if equipped) 14. Stabilizer 15. Stabilizer clamp 16. Bushing 17. Suspension member 18. Rebound stopper 19. Connecting rod 20. Transverse link FSU-5 12. Cotter pin FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY On-Vehicle Service EES000IG Check front axle and front suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or other damage. ● Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play. ● Make sure that cotter pin is inserted. ● Retighten all axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . SMA525A ● ● Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage. Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. If ball joint dust cover is cracked or damaged, replace transverse link. SFA392B ● – – Check spring height from top of wheelarch to the ground. Vehicle must be unladen*, parked on a level surface, and tires checked for proper inflation and wear (tread wear indicator must not be showing). *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Bounce vehicle up and down several times before measuring. Standard height : Refer to FSU-16, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" . – Spring height is not adjustable. If out of specification, check for worn springs or suspension parts. ● Check suspension ball joint end play. Jack up front of vehicle and set the stands. Clamp dial indicator onto transverse link and place indicator tip on lower edge of brake caliper. Make sure front wheels are straight and brake pedal is depressed. Place a pry bar between transverse link and inner rim of road wheel. While raising and releasing pry bar, observe maximum dial indicator value. – – – – – Vertical end play – LEIA0039E WSU002 : 0 mm (0 in) If ball joint movement is beyond specifications, remove and replace it. Front Wheel Alignment EES000IH Before checking front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (unladen*). *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. FSU-6 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY PRELIMINARY INSPECTION 1. 2. a. b. Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. B C : Refer to WT-3, "ROAD WHEEL" . Check front wheel bearings for looseness. D SFA975B Check front suspension for looseness. Check steering linkage for looseness. FSU Check that front shock absorbers work properly. Check vehicle wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to FSU-16, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" . ● *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated posiF tions. CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. 1. Measure camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge. Camber, caster and kingpin inclination 2. G H : Refer to FSU-15, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . I If camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect front suspension parts. Replace damaged or worn out parts. SRA096A J TOE-IN Measure toe-in using the following procedure. WARNING: ● Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. ● Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height as hub center. These are measuring points. K L M AFA050 4. 5. Measure distance “A” (rear side). Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180 degrees (1/2 turn). If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. 6. Measure distance “B” (front side). Total toe-in : Refer to FSU-15, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . SFA234AC FSU-7 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 7. a. b. Adjust toe-in by varying the length of steering tie-rods. Loosen lock nuts. Adjust toe-in by screwing tie-rods in and out. Standard length “L” c. : Refer to FSU-15, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . Tighten lock nuts to specified torque. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . SFA486A FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. 2. Set wheels in straight-ahead position. Then move vehicle forward until front wheels rest on turning radius gauge properly. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle. Do not hold the steering wheel on full lock for more than 15 seconds. Wheel turning angle (Full turn) : Refer to FSU-15, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . SFA439BA FSU-8 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation ● ● PFP:56210 A EES000II Remove shock absorber fixing bolt and nut (to hoodledge). Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. B C D SFA956A FSU ● When installing strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown. F G H WSU003 Disassembly 1. 2. EES000IJ Set shock absorber on vise, then loosen piston rod lock nut. ● Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. Compress spring with Tool so that shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately so as not to tilt the spring. I J K L SSU002 3. Remove piston rod lock nut. M SSU003 Inspection EES000IK SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ● ● ● Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. FSU-9 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER MOUNTING INSULATOR AND RUBBER PARTS ● Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. THRUST BEARING ● Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction and replace if necessary. COIL SPRING ● Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Assembly ● EES000IL When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown. SFA508A ● ● ● Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer side of vehicle, in line with strut-to-knuckle attachment points. Replace strut lower mounting nuts. When installing strut to knuckle, be sure to hold bolts and tighten nuts. Strut to knuckle tightening torque : 114 - 133 N·m (11.6 - 13.6 kg-m, 84 - 98 ft-lb) SFA564B FSU-10 STABILIZER BAR STABILIZER BAR Removal and Installation ● PFP:54611 A EES000IM Remove four stabilizer bar mounting nuts from each side. B C D WSU004 FSU ● When installing stabilizer, make sure the paint mark and clamp face in their correct directions. F G H SFA959A ● I Make sure that the slit in the bushing is in the position shown. J K SFA604B ● Install four stabilizer bar mounting nuts at each side. M WSU004 FSU-11 L STABILIZER BAR ● Install stabilizer bar with ball joint socket properly placed. SFA449BB ● ● ● Check stabilizer for deformation or cracks and replace if necessary. Check rubber bushings for deterioration or cracks and replace if necessary. Check ball joint can rotate in all directions. If movement is not smooth and free, replace stabilizer bar connecting rod. ARA027 FSU-12 TRANSVERSE LINK AND LOWER BALL JOINT TRANSVERSE LINK AND LOWER BALL JOINT Removal and Installation PFP:54500 A EES000IN 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. Remove tie-rod ball joint. Remove strut lower bracket fixing bolts and nuts. Separate drive shaft from knuckle by slightly tapping drive shaft end. Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them when removing drive shaft. B C D SFA651A FSU 5. Separate lower ball joint stud from knuckle with suitable tool. F G H WSU009 6. 7. 8. 9. I Remove fixing bolts. Remove transverse link and lower ball joint. During installation, final tightening must be carried out at curb weight with tires on the ground. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . After installation, check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . J K WSU005 Inspection EES000IO TRANSVERSE LINK ● ● L Check transverse link for damage, cracks or deformation and replace if necessary. Check rubber bushing for damage, cracks and deformation and replace if necessary. FSU-13 M TRANSVERSE LINK AND LOWER BALL JOINT LOWER BALL JOINT ● Check ball joint for play. Replace transverse link assembly if any of the following cases occur: Ball stud is worn, play in axial direction is excessive or joint is hard to swing. Before checking, turn ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that ball joint is properly broken in. Swinging force “A” (measuring point cotter pin hole of ball stud) Turning torque “B” : 7.8 - 77.5 N (0.8 - 7.9 kg, 1.8 - 17.4 lb) : 0.50 - 4.90 N·m (5.1 - 50 kg-cm, 4.4 - 43.4 in-lb) Vertical end play “C” : 0 mm (0 in) ● SFA858A Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and cover clamp if necessary. FSU-14 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications (Front) Suspension type Independent MacPherson strut Shock absorber type Double-acting hydraulic Stabilizer bar Standard equipment PFP:00030 A EES000IP B Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) EES000IQ Engine Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) QG18DE QR25DE Minimum −1°05' (−1.08°) −1°12' (−1.2°) Nominal −0°20' (−0.33°) −0°27' (−0.45°) 0°25′ (0.42°) 0°18′ (0.3°) 45′ (0.75°) or less 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 0°50′ (0.83°) 0°58′ (0.97°) Nominal 1°35′ (1.58°) 1°43′ (1.72°) Maximum 2°20′ (2.33°) 2°28′ (2.47°) 45′ (0.75°) or less 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 13°52′ (13.87°) 14°03′ (14.05°) Nominal 14°37′ (14.62°) 14°46′ (14.77°) Maximum 15°22′ (15.37°) 15°31′ (15.52°) Minimum 1 (0.039”) 1 (0.039”) Nominal 2 (0.079”) 2 (0.079”) Maximum 3 (0.118”) 3 (0.118”) Minimum 5.5′ (0.08°) 5.5′ (0.08°) Nominal 11′ (0.18°) 11′ (0.18°) Maximum 16′ (0.27°) 16′ (0.27°) Minimum 34° (34.0°) 29° (29.0°) Nominal 37° (37.0°) 32° (32.0°) Maximum 38° (38.0°) 33° (33.0°) Nominal 31° (31.0°) 27° (27.0°) Maximum Left and right difference Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Left and right difference Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance (A − B) mm (in) Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Wheel turning angle Full turn*2 Inside Degree minute (Decimal degree) Outside Degree minute (Decimal degree) D Swinging force “A” (Measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud) Turning torque “B” Vertical end play “C” 7.8 - 77.5 (0.8 - 7.9, 1.8 - 17.4) N-m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.50 - 4.90 (5.1 - 50.0, 4.4 - 43.4) mm (in) 0 (0) FSU-15 G H I J K L EES000IR N (kg, lb) FSU F *1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) with engine idle. Lower Ball Joint C M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) EES0012V SFA818A Engine Model QR25DE QG18DE SE-R SPEC-V 215/45ZR17 Tire Size 195/60HR15 195/55HR16 Front (Hf) mm (in) 664 (26.14) 660 (25.98) 664 (26.14) Rear (Hr) mm (in) 658 (25.91) 652 (25.67) 655 (25.79) *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. FSU-16 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX Edition: April 2003 Revision: March 2004 Publication No. SM4E-1B15U1 A GENERAL INFORMATION GI General Information B ENGINE EM Engine Mechanical LU Engine Lubrication System CO Engine Cooling System EC Engine Control System FL Fuel System EX Exhaust System ACC Accelerator Control System TRANSMISSION/ TRANSAXLE CL Clutch MT Manual Transaxle AT Automatic Transaxle D DRIVELINE/AXLE FAX Front Axle RAX Rear Axle FSU Front Suspension RSU Rear Suspension WT Road Wheels & Tires BR Brake System PB Parking Brake System BRC Brake Control System C E SUSPENSION F BRAKES G STEERING PS Power Steering System H RESTRAINTS SB Seat Belts SRS I BODY J AIR CONDITIONER K ELECTRICAL Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) BL Body, Lock & Security System GW Glasses, Window System & Mirrors RF Roof EI Exterior & Interior IP Instrument Panel SE Seat MTC Manual Air Conditioner SC Starting & Charging System LT Lighting System DI Driver Information System WW Wiper, Washer & Horn BCS Body Control System LAN LAN System AV ACS Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System Auto Cruise Control System PG Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements L MAINTENANCE MA Maintenance M INDEX IDX Alphabetical Index © 2004 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gardena, California. -1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the 2004 NISSAN SENTRA. In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice. IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle. The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately. Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected. -2 PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER! Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals. Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals. Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to: Nissan North America, Inc. Technical Service Information 39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200 Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331 FAX: (248) 488-3910 SERVICE MANUAL: Model: Year: PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ): Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail: Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. Page number(s) Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer) YES NO Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. If no, what page number(s)? Please describe the issue or problem in detail: Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer) YES NO Please comment: What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or repairing customer vehicles? DATE: DEALER: CITY: YOUR NAME: DEALER NO.: STATE/PROV./COUNTRY: POSITION: ADDRESS: ZIP/POSTAL CODE: QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 1.8L, QG ENGINE) 2004 QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 1.8L, QG ENGINE) PFP:00027 Engine Tune-Up Data ELS000L4 Engine QG18DE Classification Gasoline Cylinder arrangement 4 in-line Displacement 1,769 cm3 (107.94 cu in) Bore × stroke 80.0 × 88.0 mm (3.150 × 3.465 in) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-3-4-2 Number of piston rings Compression 2 Oil 1 Number of main bearings 5 Compression ratio 9.5: 1 Drive Belt Deflection and Tension Component Deflection Adjustment Unit: mm (in) Tension Adjustment*1 Unit: N (kg, lb) Used Belt Generator Used Belt Limit After Adjustment New Belt With air conditioner compressor 8.1 (0.319) 5.3 - 5.7 (0.209 - 0.244) Without air conditioner compressor 10.2 (0.402) 7.1 (0.280) Power steering oil pump Applied pushing force Limit After Adjustment New Belt 4.5 - 5.0 (0.177- 0.197) 292 (30, 66) 652 - 740 (66.5 - 75.5, 146.6 - 166.4) 789 - 877 (80.5 - 89.5, 177.4 - 197.1) 6.5 - 7.0 (0.256 - 0.276) 5.5 - 6.1 (0.217 - 0.240) 292 (30, 60) 652 - 740 (66.5 - 75.5, 146.6 - 166.4) 789 - 877 (80.5 - 89.5, 177.4 - 197.1) 4.4 - 4.9 (0.173 - 0.193) 3.9 - 4.4 (0.154 - 0.173) 196 (20, 44) 495 - 583 (50.5 -59.5, 111.4 - 131.2) 603- 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.5) 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) — *1: If the belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check belt tension at a different location on the belt. Spark Plugs (Double Platinum - Tipped) Type Hot PLFR4A-11 Standard PLFR5A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 Plug gap (nominal) 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ELS000L6 Unit: degree minute (decimal degree) Camber Minimum −1°10' (−1.17°) Nominal −0°25' (−0.42°) Maximum Left and right difference Caster 0°20′ (0.33°) 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 0°51′ (0.85°) Nominal 1°36′ (1.60°) Maximum 2°21′ (2.35°) Left and right difference 45′ (0.75°) or less QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 1.8L, QG ENGINE) 2004 Kingpin inclination Degree minute (decimal degree) Distance Total toe-in Angle (left plus right) Wheel turning angle Full turn*2 Inside Outside Minimum 13°58′ (13.97°) Nominal 14°43′ (14.72°) Maximum 15°28′ (15.47°) Minimum 1 mm (0.039 in) Nominal 2 mm (0.079 in) Maximum 3 mm (0.118 in) Minimum 5.5′ (0.08°) Nominal 11′ (0.18°) Maximum 16′ (0.27°) Minimum 34° (34.0°) Nominal 37° (37.0°) Maximum 38° (38.0°) Nominal 31° (31.0°) *1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and floor mats in designated positions. *2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 - 147 N (10 - 15 kg, 22 - 33 lb) with engine running at idle. Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ELS000L7 Unit: degree minute (decimal degree) Camber Distance Total toe-in Angle (left plus right) Minimum −1°45′ (−1.75°) Nominal −1°00′ (−1.00°) Maximum −0°15′ (−0.25°) Minimum −3 mm (−0.12 in) Nominal 1 mm (0.04 in) Maximum 5 mm (0.20 in) Minimum −16′ (−0.27°) Nominal 5′30″ (0.09°) Maximum 26′ (0.43°) *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Brake ELS000L8 Unit: mm (in) Brake model Front brake Cylinder bore diameter Pad length × width × thickness Rotor outer diameter × thickness Brake model Rear brake 125.6 × 46.0 × 11.0 (4.94 × 1.811 × 0.433) 257 × 22 (10.12 × 0.87) LT20G 15.87 (5/8) type a 17.45 (11/16) type b Lining length × width × thickness 219.4 × 35 × 4.5 (8.64 × 1.38 × 0.177) Cylinder bore diameter Valve model Control valve 57.2 (2.252) Cylinder bore diameter/caliper bore diameter Drum inner diameter/Disc diameter × thickness Master cylinder CL25VA Split point 203.2 (8) 23.81 (15/16) Dual proportioning valve 1,961 kPa (20 kg/cm2, 284 psi)] × 0.2 reducing ratio QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 1.8L, QG ENGINE) 2004 Booster model M215T Brake booster Primary: 230 (9.06) Secondary: 205 (8.07) Diaphragm diameter Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Recommended brake fluid Disc Brake - Repair Limits Unit: mm (in) Brake model CL25VA Pad wear limit Minimum thickness 2.0 (0.079) Rotor repair limit Minimum thickness 20 (0.79) Drum Brake - Repair Limits Unit: mm (in) Brake model LT20G Lining wear limit Minimum thickness Drum repair limit 1.5 (0.059) Maximum inner diameter 204.5 (8.05) Maximum out-of round 0.03 (0.0012) Refill Capacities ELS000LC Engine Coolant Capacity (Approximate) Unit: Drain and refill without reservoir M/T (RS5F70A) 6.0 (6 3/8, 5 1/4) A/T (RE4F03B) 5.9 (6 1/4, 5 1/4) Reservoir tank (at MAX level) (US qt, Imp qt) 0.7 (3/4, 5/8) Engine Oil Capacity (Approximate) Unit: Drain and refill With oil filter change 2.7 (2 7/8, 2 3/8) Without oil filter change 2.5 (2 5/8, 2 1/4) Dry engine (engine overhaul) (US qt, Imp qt) 3.1 (3 1/4, 2 3/4) Miscellaneous Capacities (Approximate) Fuel tank 50 13 1/4 US gal 11 Imp gal Power steering system 1.0 1 1/8 US qt 1 3/4 Imp qt M/T (RS5F70A) 3.0 3 1/8 US qt 2 5/8 Imp qt A/T (RE4F03B) 7.0 7 3/8 US qt 6 1/8 Imp qt 0.99 - 1.21 lb 0.99 - 1.21 lb 6.1 US fl oz 6.3 Imp fl oz Transaxle Refrigerant Air conditioning system Compressor oil 0.45 - 0.55 kg 180 m QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) 2004 QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) PFP:00027 Engine Tune-Up Data ELS000LF Engine QR25DE Cylinder arrangement 4 in-line Displacement 2,488 Bore and stroke cm3 (151.82 cu in) 89.0 x 100 mm (3.50 - 3.94 in) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-3-4-2 Number of piston rings Compression 2 Oil 1 Compression ratio 9.5 Compression pressure Standard 1,250 kPa (12.8 kg/cm2, 182 psi) / 250 rpm Minimum 1,060 kPa (10.8 kg/cm2, 154 psi) / 250 rpm Differential limit between cylinders 100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 250 rpm Drive Belt Deflection and Tension Tension of drive belts Auto adjustment by auto-tensioner Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped) Type Standard PLFR5A-11 Hot PLFR4A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 Plug gap (nominal) 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ELS000LI Unit: degree minute (decimal degree) Camber Minimum −1°12' (−1.2°) Nominal −0°27' (−0.45°) Maximum Left and right difference Caster 0°58′ (0.97°) Nominal 1°43′ (1.72°) Left and right difference Distance Total toe-in Angle (left plus right) 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum Maximum Kingpin inclination 0°18′ (0.3°) 2°28′ (2.47°) 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 14°03′ (14.05°) Nominal 14°46′ (14.77°) Maximum 15°31′ (15.52°) Minimum 1 mm (0.039 in) Nominal 2 mm (0.079 in) Maximum 3 mm (0.118 in) Minimum 5.5′ (0.08°) Nominal 11′ (0.18°) Maximum 16′ (0.27°) QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) 2004 Inside Wheel turning angle Full turn*2 Outside Minimum 29° (29.0°) Nominal 32° (32.0°) Maximum 33° (33.0°) Nominal 27° (27.0°) *1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) with engine idle. Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ELS000LJ Unit: degree minute (decimal degree) Camber Distance Total toe-in Angle (left plus right) Minimum −1°45′ (−1.75°) Nominal −1°00′ (−1.00°) Maximum −0°15′ (−0.25°) Minimum −3 mm (−0.12 in) Nominal 1 mm (0.04 in) Maximum 5 mm (0.20 in) Minimum −16′ (−0.27°) Nominal 5′30″ (0.09°) Maximum 26′ (0.43°) *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Brake ELS000LK Unit: mm (in) Brake model Cylinder bore diameter Front brake Pad length × width × thickness Rotor outer diameter × thickness CL25VB OPB27VA 57.2 (2.252) 38 (1.50) x 2 + 44 (1.73) x 2 125.6 × 46.0 × 11.0 (4.94 × 1.811 × 0.433) 117.1 x 53.3 x 9.3 (4.61 x 2.098 x 0.366) 280 × 22 (11.02 × 0.87) 324 x 30.0 (12.76 x 1.181) Brake model CL9HC Cylinder bore diameter/caliper bore diameter Rear brake Master cylinder 33.96 (1 11/32) Lining length × width × thickness 89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.39) Drum inner diameter/Disc diameter × thickness 258 × 9 (10.16 × 0.35) Cylinder bore diameter 23.81 (15/16) Valve model Control valve Dual proportioning valve 2,942 kPa (30 kg/cm2, 427 psi)] × 0.2 reducing ratio Split point Booster model M215T Brake booster Primary: 230 (9.06) Secondary: 205 (8.07) Diaphragm diameter Brake fluid Recommended brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Disc Brake - Repair Limits Unit: mm (in) Brake model CL25VB (Front) OPB27VA (Front) CL9HC (Rear) Pad wear limit Minimum thickness 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) Rotor repair limit Minimum thickness 20 (0.79) 28.4 (1.118) 8.0 (0.31) QUICK REFERENCE CHART: SENTRA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) 2004 Refill Capacities ELS000LN Engine Coolant Capacity (Approximate) Unit: Drain and refill (without reservoir) (US qt, Imp qt) M/T (RS5F51A, RS6F51H) 6.1 (6 1/2, 5 3/8) A/T (RE4F04B) 6.0 (6 3/8, 5 1/4) Reservoir tank (at MAX level) 0.7 (3/4, 5/8) Engine Oil Capacity (Approximate) Unit: With oil filter change Drain and refill (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2) Without oil filter change 3.8 (4, 3 3/8) Dry engine (engine overhaul) 4.5 (4 3/4, 4) Miscellaneous Capacity (Approximate) Fuel tank 50 13 1/4 US gal 11 Imp gal Power steering system 1.0 1 1/8 US qt 1 3/4 Imp qt M/T (RS5F51A, RS6F51H) 2.3 2 3/8 US qt 2 Imp qt A/T (RE4F04B) 8.5 9 US qt 7 1/2 Imp qt 0.99 - 1.21 lb 0.99 - 1.21 lb 6.1 US fl oz 6.3 Imp fl oz Transaxle Refrigerant Air conditioning system Compressor oil 0.45 - 0.55 kg 180 m A GENERAL INFORMATION GI SECTION GENERAL INFORMATION B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Description ............................................................... 3 General Precautions ................................................ 3 Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If Equipped) ................................................................. 5 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst ......................... 5 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended) ........................................................ 5 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended) ........................................................ 5 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System ............................................ 6 Precautions for Hoses .............................................. 6 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 6 HOSE CLAMPING ................................................ 6 Precautions for Engine Oils ...................................... 7 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ............. 7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ................................................................... 7 Precautions for Air Conditioning ............................... 7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................... 8 Description ............................................................... 8 Terms ....................................................................... 8 Units ......................................................................... 8 Contents ................................................................... 8 Components ............................................................. 8 SYMBOLS ............................................................. 9 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses ............................ 9 DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 9 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ............................................... 10 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION ........................................11 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES ............................... 12 How to Read Wiring Diagrams ............................... 13 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS ................................... 13 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - .......... 15 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 16 Abbreviations .......................................................... 21 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ......................................................................... 23 How to Check Terminal ........................................... 23 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT ............ 23 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS ...................... 23 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident ................................................................... 26 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 26 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS ........................ 26 CIRCUIT INSPECTION ....................................... 29 Control Units and Electrical Parts ........................... 34 PRECAUTIONS .................................................. 34 SMJ INSTALLATION ........................................... 35 CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM ............................. 36 Description .............................................................. 36 Function and System Application ........................... 36 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement ............ 37 Checking Equipment .............................................. 37 CONSULT-II Start Procedure .................................. 37 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ... 38 INSPECTION PROCEDURE .............................. 38 LIFTING POINT ......................................................... 39 Special Service Tools ............................................. 39 Garage Jack and Safety Stand ............................... 39 2-Pole Lift ............................................................... 40 Board-On Lift .......................................................... 41 TOW TRUCK TOWING ............................................. 42 Tow Truck Towing ................................................... 42 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 43 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ... 44 Tightening Torque Table ......................................... 44 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS ............................................................... 45 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants... 45 GI-1 E F G H I J K L M IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ............................ 46 Identification Information ........................................ 46 MODEL VARIATION ............................................ 46 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ................................ 47 DIMENSIONS ...................................................... 49 WHEELS & TIRES .............................................. 50 TERMINOLOGY ........................................................51 SAE J1930 Terminology List ...................................51 GI-2 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” GI EAS000X3 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. Description C D E F EAS000V5 Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not described in each individual section. General Precautions ● B G EAS000V6 H Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without proper exhaust ventilation. Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials. Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. I J K SGI285 ● ● Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle. These operations should be done on a level surface. When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially the brake tubes and master cylinder. L M SGI231 GI-3 PRECAUTIONS ● ● Before starting repairs which do not require battery power: Turn off ignition switch. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of radio and each control unit is erased. SEF289H ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an appropriate manner. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent SGI233 prior to inspection or assembly. Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones. Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set. Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence. Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM). Static electricity may damage internal electronic components. After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection. Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual. Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required. Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs. When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems, check all affected lines for leaks. PBIC0190E ● Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint. SGI234 GI-4 PRECAUTIONS WARNING: To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness GI connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module) system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections. B Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS) (If Equipped) EAS000V7 NVIS/IVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS). Both of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS/IVIS (NATS) registered. The security indicator is located on the instrument panel. The indicator blinks when the immobilizer system is functioning. Therefore, NVIS/IVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system. ● When NVIS/IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition switch is in "ON" position. This lighting up indicates that the anti-theft is not functioning, so prompt service is required. ● When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software is necessary. Regarding the procedures of NVIS/IVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, NVIS/IVIS (NATS). Therefore, CONSULT-II NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software (program card and operation manual) must be kept strictly confidential to maintain the integrity of the anti-theft function. ● When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. A maximum of four or five key IDs can be registered into NVIS/IVIS (NATS). ● When failing to start the engine first time using the key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS), start as follows. 1. Leave the ignition key in "ON" position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn ignition key to "OFF" or "LOCK" position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while keeping the key separate from any others on key-chain. C D E F G H I J K Precautions for Three Way Catalyst EAS000V8 If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. ● Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. ● When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. ● Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended) EAS000X4 Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended) EAS000X5 Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). GI-5 L M PRECAUTIONS For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN/INFINITI recommend the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System ● ● ● EAS000VA Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the multiport fuel injection system or ECM: Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect negative battery terminal. Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM. Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure. Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow sensor. SGI787 Precautions for Hoses EAS000VB HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ● To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with tapered tool or screwdriver. SMA019D ● To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose stopper.) SMA020D HOSE CLAMPING ● ● If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at that position. Discard old clamps; replace with new ones. SMA021D GI-6 PRECAUTIONS ● After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around. GI B C SMA022D D Precautions for Engine Oils EAS000VC Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. E HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. Do not put oily rags in pockets. Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. F G H I J K ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Precautions for Air Conditioning EAS000VD Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to ATC/MTC section “HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure”, “REFRIGERANT LINES” for specific instructions. GI-7 L M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Description PFP:00008 EAS000VE This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”. Terms ● EAS000VF The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury and/or damage to some part of the vehicle. WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed. CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed. BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information. Standard value:Tolerance at inspection and adjustment. Limit value:The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment. Units ● EAS000VG The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system. “Example” Outer Socket Lock Nut : 59 - 78 N-m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb) Contents EAS000VH ● ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for. ● A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g. ) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab. THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section. THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system. THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section and a number (e.g. “BR-5”). THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations. Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary. ● ● ● ● Components ● EAS000VI THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (See the following) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to perform repairs. GI-8 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appropriate PARTS CATALOG . GI B C D E F G H I SBR364AC SYMBOLS SYMBOL J DESCRIPTION Tightening torque K Should be lubricated with grease. Unless otherwise indicated, use recommended multi-purpose grease. L Should be lubricated with oil. Sealing point M Checking point Always replace after every disassembly. Apply petroleum jelly. P Apply ATF. Select with proper thickness. Adjustment is required. How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses EAS000VJ DESCRIPTION NOTICE: Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. GI-9 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the “Work Flow”. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identification of harness connectors. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SAIA0256E 1. 2. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V b. Voltage : Approximately 0V → Less than 1V 3. Symbol used in illustration GI-10 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4. Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in GI Section and "KEY TO SYM- GI BOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES" below. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown B in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION C There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration ● ● ● Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. D E F G H I J AGI070 K L M GI-11 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text SGI144A KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES Symbol Symbol explanation Symbol Symbol explanation Check after disconnecting the connector to be measured. Procedure with Generic Scan Tool (GST, OBD-II scan tool) Check after connecting the connector to be measured. Procedure without CONSULT, CONSULT-II or GST Insert key into ignition switch. A/C switch is “OFF”. Remove key from ignition switch. A/C switch is “ON”. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. REC switch is “ON”. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. REC switch is “OFF”. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. Fan switch is “ON”. (At any position except for “OFF” position) Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ACC” position. Fan switch is “OFF”. Turn ignition switch from “ACC” to “OFF” position. Apply positive voltage from battery with fuse directly to components. GI-12 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Symbol Symbol explanation Symbol Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON” position. Symbol explanation GI Drive vehicle. B Turn ignition switch from “ON” to “OFF” position. Disconnect battery negative cable. Do not start engine, or check with engine stopped. Depress brake pedal. Start engine, or check with engine running. Release brake pedal. Apply parking brake. Depress accelerator pedal. C D E F Release parking brake. Release accelerator pedal. G Check after engine is warmed up sufficiently. Voltage should be measured with a voltmeter. Pin terminal check for SMJ type ECM and TCM connectors. For details regarding the terminal arrangement, refer to the “ELECTRICAL UNITS” electrical reference page at the end of the manual. H I Circuit resistance should be measured with an ohmmeter. J Current should be measured with an ammeter. K Procedure with CONSULT-II Procedure without CONSULT-II L How to Read Wiring Diagrams EAS000VK CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. GI-13 M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● ● ● Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”. SAIA0257E ● Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SGI363 GI-14 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL ● GI For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". B C D E F G H I J K L M SGI091A GI-15 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Optional Splice SGI942 DESCRIPTION Number Item 1 Power condition 2 Fusible link 3 Fusible link/fuse location 4 Fuse 5 6 Current rating Connectors Description ● This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated). ● The double line shows that this is a fusible link. ● The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. ● This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For arrangement, refer to PG section, POWER SUPPLY ROUTING. ● The single line shows that this is a fuse. ● The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. ● This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse. ● This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male. ● The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors. ● Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector. Refer to PG section, SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION). 7 Optional splice ● The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application. 8 Splice ● The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle. 9 Page crossing ● This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page. ● The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page. 10 Common connector ● The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector. 11 Option abbreviation ● This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application. 12 Relay ● This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to PG section, STANDARDIZED RELAY. 13 Connectors ● This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut. GI-16 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Number Item Description ● 14 Wire color This shows a code for the color of the wire. BR = Brown OR = Orange P = Pink PU = Purple GY = Gray SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe 15 Option description 16 Switch 17 Assembly parts 18 Cell code 19 20 GI ● This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page. ● This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position. ● Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly. ● This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram page number. ● Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow. ● A double arrow “ cuit operation. ● This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section and system). ● This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code. B C D E F G Current flow arrow System branch ” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on cir- 21 Page crossing ● The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding pages. 22 Shielded line ● The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire. 23 Component box in wave line ● This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated by wave line) within the system. 24 Component name ● This shows the name of a component. ● This shows the connector number. ● The letter shows which harness the connector is located in. ● Example: M : main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to PG section "Main Harness", “Harness Layout”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in locating connectors. ● The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the grounded connector. ● This shows the ground connection. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in PG section. ● This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the page. ● Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component. ● This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color codes, Number 14 of this chart. ● This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section. The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out. ● This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors (J/C) exists on the PG section. Refer to "Reference Area" for details. 25 Connector number 26 Ground (GND) 27 Ground (GND) 28 Connector views 29 Common component 30 Connector color 31 Fusible link and fuse box 32 Reference area GI-17 H I J K L M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Harness Indication ● ● Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. AGI070 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition. A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when: ● ignition switch is “OFF”, ● doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ● pedals are not depressed, and ● parking brake is released. SGI860 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. GI-18 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● ● A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. GI B C D E F G SGI862-B Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ● The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. H I J K L M GI-19 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. SGI875 GI-20 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the GI end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. B C D E F G H I J K L M SGI092A Abbreviations EAS000VL The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION A/C Air Conditioner A/T Automatic Transaxle/Transmission ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid D1 Drive range 1st gear D2 Drive range 2nd gear GI-21 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION D3 Drive range 3rd gear D4 Drive range 4th gear FR, RR Front, Rear LH, RH Left-Hand, Right-Hand M/T Manual Transaxle/Transmission OD Overdrive P/S Power Steering SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. SDS Service Data and Specifications SST Special Service Tools 2WD 2-Wheel Drive 22 2nd range 2nd gear 21 2nd range 1st gear 12 1st range 2nd gear 11 1st range 1st gear GI-22 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal PFP:00000 GI EAS000VM CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. C Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J38751-95NI) Connector and terminal pin kit (NISSAN) (J38751-95INF) Connector and terminal pin kit (INFINITI) (J42992-98KIT) OBD and terminal repair kit (J42992-2000UPD) OBD-II Connector Kit Update B Description D E F G WAIA0004E WAIA0005E H HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator clip. I J Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with “T” pin. ● If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ● Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. K L M SGI841 Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL ● There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the “T” pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. SEL265V GI-23 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ● Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. SEL266V MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin. Do not bend terminal. SEL267V How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. SEL270V 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. SEL271V GI-24 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. GI B C SEL272V D ● If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. E F G SEL273V Waterproof Connector Inspection H If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. I RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION ● Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. ● The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. J K L SEL275V M WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. SEL330V GI-25 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident EAS000VN WORK FLOW SGI838 STEP DESCRIPTION Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred. The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis: STEP 1 STEP 2 WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio). WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency. WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation. HOW System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction). Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed. Operate the system, road test if necessary. Verify the parameter of the incident. If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”. Get the proper diagnosis materials together including: STEP 3 ● Power Supply Routing ● System Operation Descriptions ● Applicable Service Manual Sections ● Check for any Service Bulletins Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments. STEP 4 Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage. Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts. STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component. STEP 6 Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps. INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: ● Vehicle vibration ● Heat sensitive GI-26 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Freezing GI ● Water intrusion ● Electrical load ● Cold or hot start up B Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. ● Vehicle Vibration C The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. D E F G H I J K SGI839 ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ● Connectors not fully seated. ● Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ● Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ● Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ● Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS GI-27 L M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. SGI842 Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. SGI843 Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. SGI844 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. SGI845 Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. GI-28 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction GI In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN C A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. D There are two types of shorts. SHORT B ● SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ● SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. E NOTE: Refer to “How to Check Terminal” to probe or check terminal. F Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. G H I J SGI846-A K CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. ● Disconnect the battery negative cable. ● Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) ● Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. ● Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) ● Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) ● Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. GI-29 L M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. ● Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. ● With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). ● Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). ● Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. ● Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. SGI847-A RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD ● Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. ● Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. ● Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. ● With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. ● Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. ● Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD ● Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. ● Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). ● With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. ● With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). GI-30 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. GI ● With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. B Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: ● Remove the ground bolt or screw. ● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. ● Clean as required to assure good contact. ● Reinstall bolt or screw securely. ● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. ● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section. C D E F G H I J K L M SGI853 Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: ● Undersized wiring (single strand example) ● Corrosion on switch contacts ● Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — ACCUMULATED METHOD GI-31 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. ● Operate the circuit. ● The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. ● SGI974 MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in “Computer Controlled Systems”). Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. SAIA0258E GI-32 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Control Unit Circuit Test GI System Description:When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp. B C D MGI034A E INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Pin No. 1 Item Switch 2 Lamp Voltage value [V] Condition In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Battery voltage Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 Switch ON Battery voltage Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 F G The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. H I J K MGI035A L INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Pin No. Item 1 Lamp 2 Switch Condition Voltage value [V] In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Approx. 0 Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Battery voltage Battery voltage Switch ON Approx. 0 Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 5 Approx. 5 The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. GI-33 M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Control Units and Electrical Parts EAS000VO PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. Install only parts specified for a vehicle. Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. SAIA0251E ● Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. SAIA0252E ● For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. SAIA0253E ● For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. SAIA0254E GI-34 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ● ● ● ● ● Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. GI B C SAIA0255E D ● ● When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. E F G H I J SEF348N K SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange “fulltight” mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ L :3 - 5 N-m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. M CEL969 GI-35 CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:00000 EAS000VP CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. Refer to “CONSULT Operator's Manual” for more information. Function and System Application EAS000VQ Diagnostic test mode Function ENGINE A/T ABS AIR BAG SMART ENTRANCE NVIS (NATS)* Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurate by following the indications on CONSULT-II. x x — — — — Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. x x x x — x Trouble diagnostic record Current self-diagnostic results and all trouble diagnostic records previously stored can be read. — — — x — — ECU discriminated No. Classification number of a replacement ECU can be read to prevent an incorrect ECU from being installed. — — — x — — Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECU (ECM) can be read. x x x — — — DTC work support This mode enables a technician to set operating conditions to confirm self-diagnosis status/ results. — x — — — — Data monitor (Spec.) The specified values will be displayed when an OK/NG judgement is difficult for the DATA MONITOR items by Bar Chart and Line Graph. x — — — — — Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECU (ECM) and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. x — x — — — ECU (ECM) part number ECU (ECM) part number can be read. x x x — — — Control unit initialization All registered ignition key IDs in NATS components can be initialized and new IDs can be registered. — — — — — x Function test Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". x — — x — — SRT & DTC confirmation The results of SRT (System Readiness Test) and the selfdiagnosis status/results can be confirmed. x — — — — — REMO CONT ID SET UP A maximum of four IDs (identifications) can be registered in the memory using the remote controller. These IDs can also be confirmed and erased. — — — — x — GI-36 CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM x: Applicable *: NVIS (NATS) [Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (Nissan Anti-Theft System)] Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement GI EAS000VR CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Checking Equipment EAS000VT B C D When ordering the below equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. Tool name Description E NISSAN CONSULT-II (J-44200) 1. CONSULT-II unit (Tester internal soft: Resident version 3.3.0) and accessories 2. Program card AED03E and AEN02C (For NATS) To confirm the best combination of these softwares, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual. F 3. CONSULT-II coverter G H LAIA0038E NOTE: ● The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. ● Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned off before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure 1. 2. I EAS000ZM Turn off the ignition switch. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. J K L M PAIA0070E 3. 4. Turn on the ignition switch. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VECL)” or “System Shortcut” (eg: Engine) on the screen. SKIA3098E GI-37 CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit EAS000VU SGI125A INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items. Symptom CONSULT-II cannot access any system. CONSULT-II cannot access individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.) Check item ● CONSULT-II DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4) (For detailed circuit, refer to “MIL & Data Link Connectors Wiring Diagram” in EC section.) ● CONSULT-II DLC cable ● CONSULT-II program card (Check the appropriate CONSULT-II program card for the system. Refer to "Checking Equipment".) ● Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) ● Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-II DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. GI-38 LIFTING POINT LIFTING POINT Special Service Tools PFP:00000 GI EAS000ZN The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore number) Description Tool name B C LM4086-0200 ( — ) Board-on attachment D NT001 E LM4519-0000 ( — ) Safety stand attachment F NT002 G CAUTION: ● Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition. ● Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine, transmission, suspension, etc.), support the rear of the vehicle with a suitable jack. ● Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle, suspension, etc.), support the front of the vehicle with a suitable jack. ● Make sure not to damage piping parts when lifting vehicle. Garage Jack and Safety Stand EAS000ZO WARNING: ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when you have to get under the vehicle. H I J K L M GI-39 LIFTING POINT ● Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. LGI008 2-Pole Lift EAS000ZP WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. GI-40 LIFTING POINT When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler. GI B C D E F G H I LGI009 Board-On Lift EAS000ZQ J K L AGI016 CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. ● The board-on lift attachment (LM4086-0200) set at front end of vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. ● Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. GI-41 M TOW TRUCK TOWING TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing PFP:00000 EAS000VW CAUTION: ● All applicable state or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. ● It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage to the vehicle during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. ● Always attach safety chains before towing. ● When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. SGI986 NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated. CAUTION: ● Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the ground. ● When towing manual transaxle models with the front wheels on the ground (if a towing dolly is not used), turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in the straightahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. ● Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. ● Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. GI-42 TOW TRUCK TOWING Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ● ● ● ● EAS000VX GI Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. B C D LGI014 E F G H I J K L M GI-43 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS Tightening Torque Table Grade 4T Bolt size M6 6.0 M8 8.0 M10 M12 7T 10.0 12.0 EAS000VY Tightening torque (Without lubricant) Pitch mm Hexagon head bolt N-m kg-m Hexagon flange bolt ft-lb in-lb N-m kg-m ft-lb in-lb 1.0 5.1 0.52 3.8 45.1 6.1 0.62 4.5 53.8 1.25 13 1.3 9 — 15 1.5 11 — 1.0 13 1.3 9 — 16 1.6 12 — 1.5 25 2.5 18 — 29 3.0 22 — 1.25 25 2.6 19 — 30 3.1 22 — 1.75 42 4.3 31 — 51 5.2 38 — 1.25 46 4.7 34 — 56 5.7 41 — M14 14.0 1.5 74 7.5 54 — 88 9.0 65 — M6 6.0 1.0 8.4 0.86 6.2 74.6 10 1.0 7 87 M8 8.0 1.25 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.5 18 — 1.0 22 2.2 16 — 26 2.7 20 — 1.5 41 4.2 30 — 48 4.9 35 — M10 M12 9T Bolt diameter * mm PFP:00000 10.0 12.0 1.25 43 4.4 32 — 51 5.2 38 — 1.75 71 7.2 52 — 84 8.6 62 — 1.25 77 7.9 57 — 92 9.4 68 — M14 14.0 1.5 127 13.0 94 — 147 15.0 108 — M6 6.0 1.0 12 1.2 9 — 15 1.5 11 — M8 8.0 1.25 29 3.0 22 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.0 31 3.2 23 — 37 3.8 27 — 1.5 59 6.0 43 — 70 7.1 51 — M10 M12 M14 10.0 12.0 14.0 1.25 62 6.3 46 — 74 7.5 54 — 1.75 98 10.0 72 — 118 12.0 87 — 1.25 108 11.0 80 — 137 14.0 101 — 1.5 177 18.0 130 — 206 21.0 152 — *: Nominal diameter 1. Special parts are excluded. 2. This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head. MGI044A GI-44 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants PFP:00000 GI EAS000VZ Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant. Product Description 1 2 3 Purpose 5 6 Nissan Canada Part No. (Canada) Aftermarket Cross Reference Part Nos. B Rear View Mirror Adhesive Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to windows. 999MP-AM000P 99998-50505 Permatex 81844 C Anaerobic Liquid Gasket For metal-to-metal flange sealing. Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most powertrain applications. 99998-50503 Three Bond 1215; Permatex 51813 and 51817 D 999MP-AM001P High Performance Thread Sealant Provides instant sealing on any threaded straight or parallel threaded fitting. (Thread sealant only, no locking ability.) ● 4 Nissan North America Part No. (USA) Silicone RTV High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Blue) E 999MP-AM002P 999MP-AM002P Permatex 56521 99998-50506 (Ultra Grey) Permatex Ultra Grey 82194; Three Bond 1207 and 1216; Nissan RTV Part No. 999MP-A7007 999MP-AM004P Permatex 27200; Three Bond 1360, 1360N, 1305 N&P, 1307N, 1335, 1335B, 1363B, 1377C, 1386B, D&E and 1388 F Do not use on plastic. Gasket Maker Threadlocker Threadlocker (service tool removable) 999MP-AM003P (Ultra Grey) 999MP-AM004P 999MP-AM005P 999MP-AM005P Permatex 24200, 24206, 24240, 24283 and 09178; Three Bond 1322, 1322N, 1324 D&N, 1333D, 1361C, 1364D, 1370C and 1374 G H I J K L M GI-45 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Identification Information PFP:00010 EAS000W0 MODEL VARIATION Destination/Engine USA Body Grade Transaxle Canada QG18DE (Except SULEV) QG18DE (SULEV) QR25DE (Except ULEV) QR25DE (ULEV) QR25DE QG18DE QR25DE RE4F03B (A/T) DATALCAEUA DATALCAEVA — — — DATALCAENA — RS5F70A (M/T) DATALCFEUA DATALCFEVA — — — DATALCFENA — RE4F03B (A/T) DATALEAEUA DATALEAEVA — — — DATALEAENA — RS5F70A (M/T) DATALEFEUA DATALEFEVA — — — DATALEFENA — 2.5 S RE4F04B (A/T) — — DDBALJAEUA DDBALJAEVA — — DDBALJAENA SE-R RE4F04B (A/T) — — DDBALUAEUA DDBALUAEVA — — DDBALUAENA SE-R SPEC V RS6F51A (6M/T) — — — — DDBALWYEUA — DDBALWYENA 1.8 1.8 S Sedan Prefix and suffix designations: WAIA0011E GI-46 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION IDENTIFICATION NUMBER GI B C D E F WAIA0012E Vehicle Identification Number Arrangement G H I J K L M WAIA0010E GI-47 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION F.M.V.S.S. Certification Label LGI013 Engine Serial Number LAIA0023E GI-48 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION GI B C LAIA0024E D Automatic Transaxle Number E F G AGI072 H Manual Transaxle Number I J SGI334 K DIMENSIONS Unit: mm (in) Overall length 4,508 (177.5) Overall width 1,710 (67.3) Overall height 1,410 (55.5) Front tread 15/16 inch 17 inch 1,470 (57.9) 1466 (57.7) Rear tread 15/16 inch 17 inch 1,455 (57.3) 1446 (56.9) Wheelbase 2,535 (99.8) Gross vehicle weight rating kg (lb) See the “F.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the driver's side lock pillar. Front kg (lb) Gross axle weight rating Rear kg (lb) GI-49 L M IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION WHEELS & TIRES 15 × 6JJ (steel) 45 (1.77) 15 × 6JJ (aluminum) 45 (1.77) 16 × 6JJ (aluminum) 45 (1.77) 17 x 7JJ (aluminum) 47 (1.85) Conventional tire P195/60HR15 P195/60HR15 P195/55HR16 P215/45ZR17 Spare tire T125/70*14 or T125/70*15 T125/70*15 T125/70*15 T135/80D15T2 or T135/80*17 Road wheel Offset mm (in) *: D or R, depending on manufacturer. GI-50 TERMINOLOGY TERMINOLOGY SAE J1930 Terminology List PFP:00011 GI EAS000W1 All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart. NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM B OLD TERM Air cleaner ACL Air cleaner Barometric pressure BARO *** Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD BAROS-BCDD BCDD Camshaft position CMP *** Camshaft position sensor CMPS Crank angle sensor Canister *** Canister Carburetor CARB Carburetor Charge air cooler CAC Intercooler Closed loop CL Closed loop Closed throttle position switch CTP switch Idle switch Clutch pedal position switch CPP switch Clutch switch Continuous fuel injection system CFI system *** Continuous trap oxidizer system CTOX system *** Crankshaft position CKP *** Crankshaft position sensor CKPS *** Data link connector DLC *** Data link connector for CONSULT-II DLC for CONSULT-II Diagnostic connector for CONSULT-II Diagnostic test mode DTM Diagnostic mode Diagnostic test mode selector DTM selector Diagnostic mode selector Diagnostic test mode I DTM I Mode I Diagnostic test mode II DTM II Mode II Diagnostic trouble code DTC Malfunction code Direct fuel injection system DFI system *** Distributor ignition system DI system Ignition timing control Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater EFE-mixture heater Mixture heater Early fuel evaporation system EFE system Mixture heater control Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM *** C D E F G H I J K L M Electronic ignition system EI system Ignition timing control Engine control EC *** Engine control module ECM ECCS control unit Engine coolant temperature ECT Engine temperature Engine coolant temperature sensor ECTS Engine temperature sensor Engine modification EM *** Engine speed RPM Engine speed Erasable programmable read only memory EPROM *** Evaporative emission canister EVAP canister Canister Evaporative emission system EVAP system Canister control solenoid valve Exhaust gas recirculation valve EGR valve EGR valve GI-51 TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT valve EGRC-BPT valve BPT valve Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid valve EGRC-solenoid valve EGR control solenoid valve EGRT sensor Exhaust gas temperature sensor Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory FEEPROM *** Flash erasable programmable read only memory FEPROM *** Flexible fuel sensor FFS *** Flexible fuel system FF system *** Fuel pressure regulator *** Pressure regulator Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid valve *** PRVR control solenoid valve Fuel trim FT *** Heated Oxygen sensor HO2S Exhaust gas sensor Idle air control system IAC system Idle speed control Idle air control valve-air regulator IACV-air regulator Air regulator Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control valve IACV-AAC valve Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve IACV-FICD solenoid valve FICD solenoid valve Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve IACV-idle up control solenoid valve Idle up control solenoid valve Idle speed control-FI pot ISC-FI pot FI pot Idle speed control system ISC system *** Ignition control IC *** Ignition control module ICM *** Indirect fuel injection system IFI system *** Intake air IA Air Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor EGR temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor IAT sensor Air temperature sensor Knock *** Detonation Knock sensor KS Detonation sensor Malfunction indicator lamp MIL Check engine light Manifold absolute pressure MAP *** Manifold absolute pressure sensor MAPS *** Manifold differential pressure MDP *** Manifold differential pressure sensor MDPS *** Manifold surface temperature MST *** Manifold surface temperature sensor MSTS *** Manifold vacuum zone MVZ *** Manifold vacuum zone sensor MVZS *** Mass air flow sensor MAFS Air flow meter Mixture control solenoid valve MC solenoid valve Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve Multiport fuel injection System MFI system Fuel injection control GI-52 TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM *** On board diagnostic system OBD system Self-diagnosis Open loop OL Open loop Oxidation catalyst OC Catalyst Oxidation catalytic converter system OC system *** Oxygen sensor O2S Exhaust gas sensor Park position switch *** Park switch Park/neutral position switch PNP switch Park/neutral switch Inhibitor switch Neutral position switch Periodic trap oxidizer system PTOX system *** Positive crankcase ventilation PCV Positive crankcase ventilation Positive crankcase ventilation valve PCV valve PCV valve Powertrain control module PCM *** Programmable read only memory PROM *** Pulsed secondary air injection control solenoid valve PAIRC solenoid valve AIV control solenoid valve Pulsed secondary air injection system PAIR system Air induction valve (AIV) control Pulsed secondary air injection valve PAIR valve Air induction valve Random access memory RAM *** Read only memory ROM *** Scan tool ST *** Secondary air injection pump AIR pump *** Secondary air injection system AIR system *** Sequential multiport fuel injection system SFI system Sequential fuel injection Service reminder indicator SRI *** Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system *** Simultaneous fuel injection Smoke puff limiter system SPL system *** Supercharger SC *** Supercharger bypass SCB *** System readiness test SRT *** Thermal vacuum valve TVV Thermal vacuum valve Three way catalyst TWC Catalyst Three way catalytic converter system TWC system *** Three way + oxidation catalyst TWC + OC Catalyst Three way + oxidation catalytic converter system TWC + OC system *** Throttle body TB Throttle chamber SPI body Throttle body fuel injection system TBI system Fuel injection control Throttle position TP Throttle position Throttle position sensor TPS Throttle sensor Throttle position switch TP switch Throttle switch Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TCC solenoid valve Lock-up cancel solenoid Lock-up solenoid GI-53 GI B C D E F G H I J K L M TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Transmission control module TCM A/T control unit Turbocharger TC Turbocharger Vehicle speed sensor VSS Vehicle speed sensor Volume air flow sensor VAFS Air flow meter Warm up oxidation catalyst WU-OC Catalyst Warm up oxidation catalytic converter system WU-OC system *** Warm up three way catalyst WU-TWC Catalyst Warm up three way catalytic converter system WU-TWC system *** Wide open throttle position switch WOTP switch Full switch ***: Not applicable GI-54 I BODY A SECTION GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS .................................. 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 REMOVAL ............................................................. 3 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 3 WINDSHIELD AND REAR WINDOW ................... 5 QUARTER WINDOW ............................................ 6 POWER WINDOW ...................................................... 7 System Description .................................................. 7 MANUAL OPERATION ......................................... 7 AUTO OPERATION .............................................. 8 POWER WINDOW LOCK ..................................... 8 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — .............................. 9 Trouble Diagnoses ..................................................11 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............ 12 Front Door .............................................................. 12 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............... 13 Rear Door ............................................................... 13 DOOR MIRROR ........................................................ 14 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — .............................. 14 Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — ............................... 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .................................. 17 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 17 System Description ................................................. 18 WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS .................... 18 WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS ............................ 18 Wiring Diagram — DEF — ..................................... 20 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (With Power Door Locks) ............................................................ 22 “REAR DEFOGGER” .......................................... 22 CONSULT-II Application Items (With Power Door Locks) ..................................................................... 23 “REAR DEFOGGER” .......................................... 23 Trouble Diagnoses (Without Power Door Locks) ... 24 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 24 Trouble Diagnoses (With Power Door Locks) ........ 26 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 26 Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 30 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY ................ 30 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 30 Filament Check ....................................................... 30 Filament Repair ...................................................... 31 REPAIR EQUIPMENT ......................................... 31 REPAIRING PROCEDURE ................................. 31 REAR VIEW MIRROR ............................................... 33 Removal and Installation ........................................ 33 REMOVAL ........................................................... 33 INSTALLATION ................................................... 33 GW-1 E F G H GW J K L M PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS0015U The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. GW-2 WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS Removal and Installation PFP:72700 A EIS0015V REMOVAL After removing interior moldings and trim to access edge of glass, remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When removing the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. ● Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. B C D SBF034B E F G H ABT088 GW J K L ABT087 INSTALLATION Use genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. ● While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. ● The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. ● Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: ● Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. ● The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. ● Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. ● Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. ● GW-3 M WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS CAUTION: ● Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. ● Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. ● Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. ● The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase under higher temperatures and lower humidities. GW-4 WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS WINDSHIELD AND REAR WINDOW A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WBT114 Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between caulking material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be determined by applying water while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer and then sealant to the leak point. GW-5 WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS QUARTER WINDOW WBT074 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" . Lower the rear window. Remove two screws securing rear glass, then remove rear glass. Remove two bolts and one top screw securing rear door center sash, then remove rear door center sash. Remove quarter glass and rubber seal. GW-6 POWER WINDOW POWER WINDOW System Description PFP:25401 A EIS0015W Power is supplied at all times: ● from 30A fusible link (letter d , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to circuit breaker terminal +, ● through circuit breaker terminal -, ● to power window relay terminal 5. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)], ● to power window relay terminal 1. Ground is supplied: ● to power window relay terminal 2 ● through body grounds M28 and M54. The power window relay is energized and power is supplied: ● through power window relay terminal 3, ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1, ● to front power window switch RH terminal 5, ● to rear power window switch LH and RH terminal 5. MANUAL OPERATION Front Door LH B C D E F G H Ground is supplied: ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3, GW ● through body grounds M28 and M54. WINDOW UP When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the up position, J power is supplied: ● to front power window motor LH terminal UP, ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 9. K Ground is supplied: ● to front power window motor LH terminal DN, ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8. L Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released, or until the window reaches the end of its travel. WINDOW DOWN When the LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the down position, M power is supplied: ● to front power window motor LH terminal DN, ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8. Ground is supplied: ● to front power window motor LH terminal UP, ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 9. Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released, or until the window reaches the end of its travel. Front Door RH Ground is supplied: ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3, ● through body grounds M28 and M54. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses are terminal numbers, when power window switch is pressed in the UP and DOWN positions respectively. GW-7 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION Power is supplied: ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch (5, 6), ● to front power window switch RH (3, 4). The subsequent operation is the same as the sub-switch operation. SUB-SWITCH OPERATION Power is supplied: ● through front power window switch RH (1, 2), ● to front power window motor RH (UP, DN). Ground is supplied: ● to front power window motor RH (DN, UP), ● through front power window switch RH (2, 1), ● to front power window switch RH (4, 3), ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch (6, 5). Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released. Rear Door Rear door windows will raise and lower in the same manner as front door RH window. AUTO OPERATION The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open the driver's window without holding the window switch in the down or up position. The AUTO feature only operates on the driver's window. POWER WINDOW LOCK The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver's door window. When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the sub-switches in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating. GW-8 POWER WINDOW Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — EIS0015X A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0093E GW-9 POWER WINDOW WIWA0215E GW-10 POWER WINDOW Trouble Diagnoses EIS0015Y A Symptom None of the power windows can be operated using any switch. Possible cause 1. 10A fuse, 30A fusible link 2. M6 circuit breaker 3. Power window relay 4. M6 circuit breaker and power window relay related wiring Repair order 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)], 30A fusible link (letter d , located in fuse and fusible link box). B 2. Check M6 circuit breaker. 3. Check power window relay. 5. Ground circuit 4. Check the following. 6. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch – Check harness between M6 circuit breaker and 30A fusible link (letter d , located in fuse and fusible link box). – Check harness between M6 circuit breaker and power window relay. – Check harness between power window relay and power window relay main power window and door lock/unlock switch. – Check harness between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] and power window relay. C D E F 5. Check the following. – – Check ground circuit of main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3. Check power window relay ground circuit. 6. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Driver side power window cannot be operated but other windows can be operated. One or more power windows except driver's side window cannot be operated. Power windows except driver's side window cannot be operated using main power window and door lock/ unlock switch but can be operated by power window sub-switch. 1. Driver side power window regulator circuit 2. Driver side power window regulator 1. Check harness between main power window and door lock/unlock switch and driver side power window regulator for open or short circuit. 3. Check harness between power window relay and main power window and lock/unlock switch. 4. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch 4. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 1. Power window sub-switches 1. Check power window sub-switch. 2. Power window regulators 2. Check power window regulator. 3. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch 3. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 4. Power window circuit 4. Check the following. GW-11 H GW 2. Check driver side power window regulator. 3. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch circuit 1. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch G – Check harness between the power window sub switch terminal 5 and power window relay. – Check harnesses between main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window sub-switch for open/short circuit. – Check harnesses between power window sub-switch and power window regulator for open/short circuit. 1. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. J K L M FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Front Door ● ● PFP:80300 EIS0015Z For removal of door finisher, refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" . After adjusting the door or door lock, check the door lock operation. WIIA0006E GW-12 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door PFP:82300 A EIS00160 B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIIA0002E GW-13 DOOR MIRROR DOOR MIRROR Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — PFP:96301 EIS00161 WIWA0095E GW-14 DOOR MIRROR Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — EIS00162 A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0096E GW-15 DOOR MIRROR Removal and Installation EIS00163 CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch door mirror body. 1. Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove inner cover from front corner of door. 3. Disconnect door mirror harness connector. 4. Remove three nuts securing door mirror assembly. WBT052 GW-16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:25350 A EIS00164 B C D E F G H GW J WIIA0112E K L M GW-17 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER System Description EIS00165 WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS The rear window defogger system is controlled by the time control unit. The rear window defogger operates for approximately 15 minutes. Power is supplied at all times: ● to rear window defogger relay terminal 3 ● through 20A fuse [No. 7, located in the fuse block (J/B)], ● to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 ● through 20A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and ● to time control unit terminal 7 ● through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1, and ● to time control unit terminal 9. Ground is supplied to terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch (built into the air control) through body grounds M28 and M54. When the rear defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied: ● through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger switch ● to time control unit terminal 3. Terminal 10 of the time control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2. With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized. Power is supplied: ● through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay ● to the rear window defogger. The rear window defogger has an independent ground. With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger switch. Power is supplied: ● to terminal 4 of the rear window defogger switch ● from terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay. Terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch is grounded through body grounds M28 and M54. WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS The rear window defogger system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The rear window defogger operates for approximately 15 minutes. Power is supplied at all times: ● to rear window defogger relay terminal 3 ● through 20A fuse [No. 7, located in the fuse block (J/B)], ● to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 ● through 20A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 10 ● through 10A fuse (No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link box). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1, and ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 33. Ground is supplied to terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch (built into the air control) through body grounds M28 and M54. When the rear defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied: ● through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger switch GW-18 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER to smart entrance control unit terminal 39. Terminal 2 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2. With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized. Power is supplied: ● through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay ● to the rear window defogger. The rear window defogger has an independent ground. With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger switch. Power is supplied: ● to terminal 4 of the rear window defogger switch ● from terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay. Terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch is grounded through body grounds M28 and M54. ● A B C D E F G H GW J K L M GW-19 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Wiring Diagram — DEF — EIS00166 WIWA0097E GW-20 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0037E GW-21 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER TIME CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND (WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) OFF 5V ON 0V 3 G/B AIR CONTROL (REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH) 7 PU POWER SOURCE (FUSE) — 12V 8 B GROUND — — IGNITION SWITCH (ON) IGNITION KEY IN ON POSITION 12V 9 G IGNITION SWITCH (START) IGNITION KEY IN START POSITION 12V OFF 0V ON (IGNITION KEY IN ON POSITION) 12V 10 G/R REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND (WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM 2 G/R REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY 10 PU 16 B 33 G 39 G/B CONDITION DATA (DC) OFF 0V ON (IGNITION KEY IN ON POSITION) 12V POWER SOURCE (FUSE) — 12V GROUND — — IGNITION SWITCH (ON) IGNITION KEY IN ON POSITION 12V IGNITION SWITCH (START) IGNITION KEY IN START POSITION 12V OFF 5V ON 0V AIR CONTROL (REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH) CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (With Power Door Locks) EIS00167 “REAR DEFOGGER” CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. LAT136 GW-22 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A B C SAIA0450E D 5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . E F G WKIA0212E 6. Touch “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER”. H GW J LIIA0153E 7. K Select diagnosis mode,“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST”. L M SEL322W CONSULT-II Application Items (With Power Door Locks) “REAR DEFOGGER” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. REAR DEF SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear window defogger switch. GW-23 EIS00168 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Active Test Test Item REAR DEFOGGER Description This test is able to check rear window defogger operation. Rear window defogger activates when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Trouble Diagnoses (Without Power Door Locks) EIS00169 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Symptom: Rear Window Defogger Does Not Activate, or Does Not Go Off After Deactivating. 1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON position. Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M40 terminal 10 (G/R) and ground. Voltage (V) Approx.: Rear window defogger switch is "OFF" Rear window defogger switch is "ON" : 12V : 0V OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Refer to GW-30, "Filament Check" . NG >> GO TO 2. WIIA0041E 2. CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect time control unit harness connector M40. Turn ignition switch to ON position. Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M40 terminal 10 (G/R) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Rear window defogger relay ● Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and rear window defogger relay ● Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and time control unit GW-24 WIIA0042E REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A Check continuity between time control unit harness connector M40 terminal 3 (G/B) and ground. B Continuity: Rear window defogger switch is pushed. Rear window defogger switch is released. Continuity should exist. C Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following. ● Rear window defogger switch (Refer to GW-30, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH" .) ● Harness for open or short between time control unit and rear window defogger switch ● Rear window defogger switch ground circuit D WIIA0043E E F 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL G Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M40 terminals 7 (PU), 9 (G) and ground. Ignition switch position Terminals (+) (-) 7 Ground 9 Ground OFF ACC H ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage GW WIIA0044E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 10 or No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse L 5. CHECK TIME CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT M Check continuity between time control unit harness connector M40 terminal 8 and ground. Continuity should exist. Yes No >> Replace time control unit. >> Repair harness or connectors. WIIA0045E GW-25 J REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Trouble Diagnoses (With Power Door Locks) EIS0016A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Symptom: Rear Window Defogger Does Not Activate, or Does Not Go Off After Activating. 1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “REAR DEFOGGER” with CONSULT-II. SEL353W 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch to ON position. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness terminal 2 and ground. LEL482 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Refer to GW-30, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY" . ● Rear window defogger circuit ● Refer to GW-30, "Filament Check" . NG >> GO TO 2. GW-26 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 2. CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect control unit connector. Turn ignition switch to ON position. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 2 and ground. B C D E LEL483 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Rear window defogger relay ● Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and rear window defogger relay ● Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and smart entrance control unit F G H GW J K L M GW-27 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Select “REAR DEF SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL352W Without CONSULT-II Check continuity between smart entrance control unit terminal 39 and ground. LEL484 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following. ● Refer to GW-30, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH" . ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear window defogger switch ● Rear window defogger switch ground circuit 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 10 and 33 and ground. LEL485 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 10 or No. 37, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse GW-28 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 5. CHECK SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between smart entrance control unit terminal 16 and ground. B C D LEL486 E Yes No >> Replace smart entrance control unit. >> Repair harness or connectors. F G H GW J K L M GW-29 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Electrical Components Inspection EIS0016B REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No SEC202B REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH With air control (rear window defogger switch) connector M32 disconnected, check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 when rear window defogger switch is pushed and released. Terminals Condition Continuity (+) (-) Switch pushed Yes 3 5 Switch released No WIIA0105E Filament Check 1. EIS0016C Attach probe circuit tester (in volt range) to middle portion of each filament. SEL263 ● When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger. SEL122R GW-30 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 2. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts. A B C D E F G SEL265 3. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point. H GW J SEL266 Filament Repair EIS0016D REPAIR EQUIPMENT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. L Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long Drawing pen Heat gun Alcohol Cloth M REPAIRING PROCEDURE 1. K Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth dampened in alcohol. BE540 GW-31 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen. Shake silver composition container before use. 3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break. 4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is deposited. SEL012D Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted. 5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24 hours. SEL013D GW-32 REAR VIEW MIRROR REAR VIEW MIRROR Removal and Installation PFP:96321 A EIS0016E REMOVAL Remove rear view mirror by pushing deflect spring with screwdriver as shown in the figure. B C D E F G H GW J SBT821 INSTALLATION 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Install mounting bracket as follows: Determine mounting bracket position on windshield by measuring from top of windshield to top of mounting bracket as shown in the figure. Mark location on outside of windshield with wax pencil or equivalent. Clean attaching point on inside of windshield with an alcoholsaturated paper towel. Sand bonding surface of mounting bracket with sandpaper (No. 320 or No. 360). SBT822 Clean bonding surface of mounting bracket with an alcohol-saturated paper towel. Apply Genuine Mirror Adhesive or equivalent to bonding surface of mounting bracket. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Install mounting bracket at pre-marked position and press mounting bracket against glass for 30 to 60 seconds. After five minutes, wipe off excess adhesive with an alcohol-moistened paper towel. Install rear view mirror. GW-33 K L M REAR VIEW MIRROR GW-34 M INDEX A SECTION ALPHABETICAL INDEX B C D E F G H I J K L IDX IDX-1 ALPHABETICAL INDEX A A/C - Wiring diagram ...................................... MTC-27 A/C air flow ..................................................... MTC-21 A/C component layout .................................... MTC-19 A/C compressor clutch removal and installation . MTC69 A/C compressor mounting .............................. MTC-68 A/C compressor precaution .............................. MTC-8 A/C compressor special service tool ............... MTC-11 A/C control linkage adjustment (manual A/C) . MTC-41 A/C control operation (manual A/C) ................ MTC-20 A/C diagnostic work flow (manual A/C) .......... MTC-34 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system identification .... MTC-4 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system introduction ... MTC-15 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system precaution ....... MTC-3 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure ....... MTC-82 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service tools .. MTC-12 A/C HFC134a system service equipment precaution ... MTC-8 A/C lubricant (R134a) ..................................... MTC-16 A/C lubrication oil ............................................ MTC-16 A/C operational check ..................................... MTC-35 A/C performance chart .................................... MTC-58 A/C performance test diagnoses .................... MTC-58 A/C pressure switch ........................................ MTC-15 A/C push control ............................................. MTC-20 A/C reray ......................................................... MTC-55 A/C service data specification ......................... MTC-91 A/C switch ....................................................... MTC-20 A/C, M - Wiring diagram ................................. MTC-27 A/F - Wiring diagram ... EC-453, EC-459, EC-465, EC472, EC-479, EC-485, EC-492, EC-1116, EC-1122, EC1128, EC-1135, EC-1142, EC-1148, EC-1155 A/FH - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-353, EC-1030 A/T - Wiring diagram ........................................ AT-406 A/T fluid temperature sensor ............. AT-125, AT-494 A/T self-diagnoses ................ AT-431, AT-439, AT-440 A/T shift lock system .......................... AT-252, AT-633 A/T shift lock system - Wiring diagram AT-253, AT-634 A/T trouble diagnoses ........................................ AT-56 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 1ST ............. AT-137, AT-511 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 2ND ............ AT-142, AT-516 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 3RD ............ AT-147, AT-521 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 4TH ............ AT-153, AT-526 A/T Wiring diagram AT - BA/FTS ....... AT-199, AT-572 A/T Wiring diagram AT - CAN ............ AT-209, AT-588 A/T Wiring diagram AT - ENG SS ...... AT-132, AT-506 A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTS ............ AT-122, AT-496 A/T Wiring diagram AT - LPSV .......... AT-174, AT-546 A/T Wiring diagram AT - MAIN .......... AT-112, AT-485 A/T Wiring diagram AT - NONDTC .... AT-215, AT-594 A/T Wiring diagram AT - OVRCSV .... AT-194, AT-567 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PNP/SW ..... AT-116, AT-490 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/A ......... AT-180, AT-552 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/B ......... AT-184, AT-557 A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCCSIG ...... AT-166, AT-538 A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCV ............ AT-160, AT-533 A/T Wiring diagram AT - TPS ............ AT-190, AT-562 A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSS A/T ...... AT-128, AT-502 A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSSMTR ... AT-205, AT-579, AT-584 ABS - Wiring diagram ..................................... BRC-10 ABS sensor rotor ............................................... RAX-6 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor EC-540, EC559, EC-1210, EC-1217, EC-1230 Accelerator pedal released position learning ... EC-47, EC-684 Air bag ............................................................... SRS-3 Air bag disposal .............................................. SRS-47 Air bag precautions ............................................... GI-3 Air bleeding (hydraulic clutch) .................. CL-7, CL-24 Air bleeding for brake system ............................. BR-7 Air cleaner and air duct ................................... EM-101 Air cleaner filter replacementQG18DE .............. MA-19 Air cleaner filter replacementQR25DE .............. MA-26 Air conditioner - Wiring diagram ...................... MTC-27 Air conditioner cut control ............................... EC-659 Air control cable adjustment ............................ MTC-43 Air flow meter - See Mass air flow sensor EC-807, EC815 Air fuel ratio sensor 1 .. EC-450, EC-456, EC-462, EC469, EC-476, EC-482, EC-489, EC-1113, EC-1119, EC1125, EC-1132, EC-1139, EC-1145, EC-1152 Air fuel ratio sensor 1 heater ........... EC-351, EC-1028 Air mix door control linkage adjustment .......... MTC-45 Air spoiler, rear .................................................... EI-22 Alternator .......................................................... SC-30 Angular tightening application ................. EM-4, EM-91 Antenna .............................................................. AV-13 Anti-lock brake system - Wiring diagram ........ BRC-10 APPS1 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-542, EC-1212 APPS2 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-548, EC-1219 APPS3 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-561, EC-1232 ASC/BS - Wiring diagram ............... EC-519, EC-1183 ASC/SW - Wiring diagram .............. EC-512, EC-1176 ASCBOF - Wiring diagram .............. EC-609, EC-1293 ASCD ............................................................ EC-1319 ASCD (automatic speed control device) EC-635, ACS2 ASCD brake switch ....................... EC-1181, EC-1292 ASCD clutch switch ....................... EC-1181, EC-1292 ASCD indicator lamp ..................................... EC-1300 ASCD steering switch ................................... EC-1174 ASCIND - Wiring diagram ............... EC-619, EC-1301 Audio .................................................................... AV-2 AUDIO - Wiring diagram ...................................... AV-4 Audio and A/C control removal and installation - See Instrument panel .................................................... IP-10 Automatic transaxle number ............................... GI-49 Automatic transmission fluid replacement ........ MA-31 Axle ................................................................... MA-36 B Back door window ............................................ GW-12 BACK/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-22 IDX-2 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Back-up lamp ..................................................... LT-22 Back-up lamp switch (M/T) ................................ MT-12 Back-up lamp switch (M/T)Back-up lamp switch MT-75 Ball joint (front) ................................................ FSU-14 Basic inspection .................................. EC-81, EC-723 Battery ................................................................. SC-4 Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester SC-6, SC-13, SC-24 Baulk ring (M/T) ..................................... MT-19, MT-82 Bi-level door control linkage adjustment ........ MTC-43 Block heater .................................................... EM-159 Blower motor .................................................. MTC-50 Blower resistor ............................................... MTC-50 Blower unit ..................................................... MTC-79 Body alignment ................................................ BL-112 Brake booster .................................................... BR-16 Brake control valve (Proportioning valve) ......... BR-10 Brake fluid change .............................................. BR-6 Brake fluid level ................................................. MA-32 Brake fluid level and line check ........................... BR-6 Brake hydraulic line ............................................. BR-8 Brake inspectionDisc Brake .............................. MA-33 Brake inspectionDrum Brake ............................ MA-34 Brake lines and cables inspection ..................... MA-32 Brake lining wear temporary checkingDisc Brake . MA34 Brake lining wear temporary checkingDrum Brake MA34 Brake pedal ....................................................... BR-11 Brake switch .... EC-534, EC-1181, EC-1204, EC-1292 BRK/SW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-535, EC-1205 Bulb specifications ............................................. LT-48 Bumper, front ...................................................... EI-13 Bumper, rear ....................................................... EI-18 C Camshaft ......................................................... EM-121 Camshaft inspection ........................... EM-33, EM-123 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) .. EC-259, EC-935 CAN - Wiring diagram . EC-149, EC-790, LAN-8, LAN18 CAN (Controller Area Network) ........... LAN-7, LAN-17 CAN communication EC-34, EC-148, EC-661, EC-789, AT-208, AT-587, LAN-7, LAN-17 Canister-See EVAP canister ......................... EC-1308 CHARGE - Wiring diagram ............................... SC-23 Charging system ............................................... SC-22 Chassis and body maintenance ............. MA-9, MA-30 CHIME - Wiring diagram ..................................... DI-43 CIGAR - Wiring diagram ................................. WW-10 Cigarette lighter ............................................... WW-10 Circuit breaker ................................................... PG-46 Closed loop control ............................. EC-31, EC-657 Closed loop control (Bank 1) ......................... EC-1090 Clutch cover ........................................... CL-17, CL-33 Clutch disc .............................................. CL-17, CL-33 Clutch fluid level ................................................ MA-30 Clutch master cylinder .............................. CL-9, CL-26 Clutch operating cylinder ........................ CL-11, CL-28 Clutch pedal .............................................. CL-7, CL-24 A Clutch release bearing ............................ CL-14, CL-31 Clutch release mechanism ..................... CL-14, CL-31 Clutch withdrawal lever ........................... CL-14, CL-31 B Coil spring (front) ............................................... FSU-9 Coil spring (rear) ............................................. RSU-10 Combination lamp, front, removal and installation EI-13 C Combination lamp, rear, removal and installation EI-22 Combination meter ............................................... DI-3 Combination meter removal and installation - See Instrument panel ........................................................... IP-10 D Combination switch .............................................. LT-4 Component Location (manual A/C) ................ MTC-23 Compression pressure ...................................... EM-52 E Compressor clutch removal and installation ... MTC-69 Compressor mounting .................................... MTC-68 Compressor precaution .................................... MTC-8 F Compressor special service tool ..................... MTC-11 Connecting rod .................................................. EM-69 Connecting rod bearing clearance ..................... EM-74 G Connecting rod bushing clearance .................... EM-75 Connector inspection .......................................... GI-23 Console box - See Instrument panel ................... IP-10 CONSULT for ABS ......................................... BRC-16 H CONSULT for engine ...................................... EC-114 CONSULT general information ........................... GI-36 CONSULT-áU for engine ................................. EC-753 I Control lever (M/T) ............................................. MT-13 Control valve (A/T) ........................................... AT-297 Controller Area Network (CAN) ........... LAN-7, LAN-17 J Converter housing installation ............ AT-379, AT-741 COOL/F - Wiring diagram ................ EC-431, EC-1095 Coolant mixture ratio ......................................... MA-14 Coolant replacementQG18DE ........................... MA-16 K Coolant replacementQR25DE ........................... MA-23 Cooling circuit (engine) ........................................ CO-7 Cooling fan control ......................................... EC-1092 L Cooling fan motor .......................................... EC-1092 Cooling fan relay .............................. EC-440, EC-1104 Cooling unit (A/C evaporator) ......................... MTC-80 Coupling sleeve (M/T) .......................... MT-19, MT-82 IDX Crankcase ventilation system - See Positive crankcase ventilation ........................................ EC-633, EC-1317 Crankshaft .......................................... EM-71, EM-160 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ..... EC-252, EC-930 Cylinder block ..................................... EM-66, EM-159 Cylinder block boring ....................................... EM-179 Cylinder head ..................................... EM-52, EM-143 D D/LOCK - Wiring diagram ................................... BL-14 Data link connector ........................................ EC-1303 Data link connector for Consult ......... EC-116, EC-756 Daytime light system .......................................... LT-10 Daytime running light - See Daytime light system .. LT10 DEF - Wiring diagram ....................................... GW-20 IDX-3 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Detonation sensor - See Knock sensor ... EC-247, EC926 Diagnosis sensor unit ..................................... SRS-37 Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for OBD system EC-56, EC-639, EC-693 Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) inspection priority chart EC-78, EC-720 Differential gear (FF A/T) ................................. AT-355 Differential gear (FF M/T) ......... MT-21, MT-55, MT-85 Dimensions ......................................................... GI-49 DLC - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-621, EC-1303 Dome light - See Interior lamp ............................ LT-35 Door adjustment (front) ...................................... BL-30 Door adjustment (rear) ....................................... BL-30 Door glass .................... BL-30, GW-6, GW-12, GW-13 Door glass Fitting Adjustment ............................ BL-30 Door mirror .......................................... GW-14, GW-16 Door trim ............................................................. EI-31 Door, front ............................................. BL-30, GW-12 Door, rear .............................................. BL-30, GW-13 Drive belt ........................................................... EM-99 Drive belt inspectionQG18DE ........................... MA-16 Drive belt inspectionQR25DE ........................... MA-23 Drive plate runout ............................................. EM-76 Drive shaft ......................................................... MA-37 Drive shaft (front) ................................. FAX-5, FAX-11 Dropping resistor (A/T) ...................... AT-178, AT-544 DTC work support .............................. EC-126, EC-765 DTRL - Wiring diagram ....................................... LT-14 E ECM input/output signal ...... EC-106, EC-746, EC-769 ECM power supply EC-141, EC-357, EC-782, EC-1034 ECM/PW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-358 ECTS - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-181, EC-829 Electric throttle control actuator EC-373, EC-375, EC387, EC-1043, EC-1045, EC-1057 Electrical diagnoses ............................................ GI-23 Electrical load signal circuit .............. EC-596, EC-1274 Electrical units location ...................................... PG-43 Electronic ignition (EI) system ......................... EC-658 Engine compartment ........................................ BL-113 Engine control circuit diagram ........... EC-102, EC-742 Engine control component parts location ... EC-90, EC732 Engine control module (ECM) .......... EC-348, EC-1025 Engine control system diagram and chart . EC-28, EC652 Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) ... EC-179, EC-190, EC-827, EC-838 Engine fail-safe system ........................ EC-80, EC-721 Engine oil filter replacementQG18DE ............... MA-20 Engine oil filter replacementQR25DE ............... MA-27 Engine oil precautions .......................................... GI-7 Engine oil replacementQG18DE ....................... MA-20 Engine oil replacementQR25DE ....................... MA-26 Engine outer component parts .......................... EM-13 Engine removal ................................... EM-62, EM-155 Engine room - See Engine compartment ......... BL-113 Engine serial number .......................................... GI-48 ETC1 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-376, EC-1046 ETC2 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-384, EC-1054 ETC3 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-388, EC-1058 EVAP canister ................................. EC-625, EC-1308 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve .... EC-284, EC-496, EC-963, EC-1159 EVAP canister vent control valve EC-291, EC-504, EC969, EC-1167 EVAP control system (small leak) diagnosis .. EC-275, EC-314, EC-955, EC-990, EC-998 EVAP control system pressure sensor ... EC-298, EC300, EC-306, EC-976, EC-982 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring diagnosis . EC-269, EC-949 EVAP vapor lines inspectionQG18DE .............. MA-22 EVAP vapor lines inspectionQR25DE .............. MA-29 Evaporative emission (EVAP) system .......... EC-1305 Exhaust system .................................................... EX-3 Exhaust system inspection ............................... MA-30 Exterior ................................................................ EI-22 F F/FOG - Wiring diagram ..................................... LT-25 F/PUMP - Wiring diagram ............... EC-586, EC-1265 Fan switch ....................................................... MTC-50 Final drive (FF A/T) .......................................... AT-355 Final drive (FF M/T) .................. MT-21, MT-55, MT-85 Finisher, interior - See Trim ................................ EI-28 Finisher, trunk lid ................................................. EI-33 Floor trim ............................................................. EI-28 Flow charts .......................................................... GI-26 Fluid temperature sensor (A/T) .......... AT-125, AT-494 Fluids ................................................................ MA-13 Flywheel (clutch) .................................... CL-18, CL-34 Flywheel runout ................................................. EM-76 Fog lamp, front ................................................... LT-24 Fog lamp, front, removal and installation ............ EI-13 Fork rod (M/T) ....................................... MT-20, MT-84 Forward clutch ................................................. AT-324 Freeze frame data ............................... EC-57, EC-694 Front axle .......................................................... FAX-5 Front bumper ...................................................... EI-13 Front combination lamp removal and installation EI-13 Front door ............................................. BL-30, GW-12 Front fog lamp .................................................... LT-24 Front fog lamp removal and installation .............. EI-13 Front passenger air bag .................................. SRS-44 Front seat ............................................................. SE-3 Front seat belt ...................................................... SB-3 Front washer ...................................................... WW-3 Front wiper ......................................................... WW-3 FTTS - Wiring diagram EC-228, EC-232, EC-906, EC910 FUEL - Wiring diagram EC-214, EC-221, EC-885, EC896 Fuel cut control (at no load high engine speed) EC-33, IDX-4 ALPHABETICAL INDEX EC-660 Fuel gauge ............................................................ DI-3 Fuel injection system EC-73, EC-212, EC-219, EC-883, EC-894 Fuel injector and fuel tube .................. EM-19, EM-116 Fuel level sensor EC-331, EC-333, EC-335, EC-1008, EC-1010, EC-1012 Fuel line inspection ................................. FL-2, MA-19 Fuel line inspectionQR25DE ............................. MA-25 Fuel precautions .......................................... GI-3, GI-5 Fuel pressure check ............................ EC-49, EC-687 Fuel pressure release ......................... EC-49, EC-687 Fuel pump ....................................... EC-585, EC-1264 Fuel tank temperature sensor ... EC-226, EC-231, EC904, EC-909 Fuel tank vacuum relief valve .......... EC-625, EC-1308 Fuel tankRemoval and Installtion ......................... FL-7 Fuse .................................................................. PG-46 Fuse and fusible link box ................................... PG-55 Fuse block ......................................................... PG-54 Fusible link ........................................................ PG-46 G Gauges .................................................................. DI-3 Gear components (M/T) ........................ MT-19, MT-82 Generator .......................................................... SC-30 Generator - See Alternator ................................ SC-30 Generic scan tool (GST) ................... EC-129, EC-767 Ground distribution ............................................ PG-13 H H/LAMP - Wiring diagram .................................... LT-7 H/MIRROR - Wiring diagram ............................ GW-15 Harness connector ............................................ PG-47 Harness connector inspection ............................ GI-23 Harness layout .................................................. PG-22 Hazard warning lamp ......................................... LT-27 Headlamp ............................................................. LT-6 Headlamp removal and installation ..................... EI-13 Headlining - See Roof trim .................................. EI-32 Heated oxygen sensor 1 .... EC-846, EC-852, EC-862, EC-1062, EC-1068 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ...................... EC-795 Heated oxygen sensor 2 .... EC-198, EC-204, EC-413, EC-420, EC-869, EC-875, EC-1074, EC-1082 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ........ EC-154, EC-801 HEATER - Wiring diagram ............................. MTC-25 Heater mirror .................................................... GW-15 Heater system - Wiring diagram ..................... MTC-25 Heater unit (heater core) ................................ MTC-78 Height (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-49 HFC134a (R134a) system identification .......... MTC-4 HFC134a (R134a) system introduction .......... MTC-15 HFC134a (R134a) system precaution .............. MTC-3 HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure MTC-82 HFC134a (R134a) system service tools ........ MTC-12 HFC134a system service equipment precaution MTC-8 High clutch ....................................................... AT-318 HO2S1 - Wiring diaram ....... EC-848, EC-855, EC-865 HO2S1H - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-797 HO2S2 - Wiring diagram .... EC-200, EC-207, EC-415, EC-422, EC-871, EC-878, EC-1077, EC-1085 HO2S2H - Wiring diagram ................. EC-156, EC-803 Hood .................................................................... EI-13 Horn ................................................................... WW-9 HORN - Wiring diagram ..................................... WW-9 How to erase DTC for OBD system ..... EC-64, EC-704 I A B C D IATS - Wiring diagram ....................... EC-176, EC-824 Identification plate ............................................... GI-48 E Idle air volume learning ....................... EC-47, EC-685 Idle mixture ratio .................... EC-36, EC-663, EC-674 Idle speed ... EC-35, EC-36, EC-663, EC-674, EC-723 F Idle speed control (ISC) .... EC-339, EC-341, EC-1016, EC-1018 Ignition coil ........................ EM-113, EC-566, EC-1237 Ignition control system ..................... EC-566, EC-1237 G Ignition timing EC-35, EC-36, EC-663, EC-674, EC-723 IGNSYS - Wiring diagram ................ EC-567, EC-1238 ILL - Wiring diagram ........................................... LT-33 H Illumination ......................................................... LT-32 INJECT - Wiring diagram ................. EC-579, EC-1259 Injector ............................................. EC-578, EC-1258 I Input shaft (FF M/T) .................. MT-19, MT-38, MT-82 Instrument panel .................................................. IP-10 INT/L - Wiring diagram ....................................... LT-37 J Intake air temperature sensor .... EC-175, EC-193, EC822, EC-841 Intake door control linkage adjustment ........... MTC-41 Intake door motor ........................................... MTC-38 K Intake manifold ................................... EM-13, EM-103 Intake sensor .................................................. MTC-66 Intake valve timing control .. EC-151, EC-368, EC-792, L EC-1038 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-368, EC1038 Interior ................................................................. EI-28 IDX Interior lamp ........................................................ LT-35 IVC - Wiring diagram ....................... EC-370, EC-1040 IVIS (Infiniti vehicle immobilizer system) precautions ... GI-5 J Joint connector (J/C) ......................................... PG-50 Junction box (J/B) .............................................. PG-54 K Keyless entry system - See Multi-remote control system BL-33 Knock sensor (KS) ............................. EC-247, EC-926 KS - Wiring diagram .......................... EC-248, EC-927 IDX-5 ALPHABETICAL INDEX L Length (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-49 License lamp ....................................................... LT-19 Lifting points ........................................................ GI-39 Line pressure solenoid valve ............. AT-158, AT-544 Line pressure test (A/T) ....................... AT-67, AT-454 Liquid gasket application ........................ EM-5, EM-92 LOAD - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-597 Location of electrical units ................................. PG-43 Low and reverse brake .................................... AT-332 Lubricant (R134a) A/C .................................... MTC-16 Lubrication circuit (engine) ................................... LU-4 Lubrication oil A/C ........................................... MTC-16 Lubrication-locks, hinges and hood latches ...... MA-37 Luggage room lamp ............................................ LT-35 M M/T major overhaul ............................... MT-18, MT-85 M/T oil replacementM/T oil replacement ............ MT-73 M/T removal and installation .............................. MT-15 MAFS - Wiring diagram EC-163, EC-170, EC-363, EC810, EC-817 Magnet clutch ................................................. MTC-69 MAIN - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-141, EC-782 Main drive gear (M/T) ........................................ MT-19 Mainshaft (M/T) ......................... MT-19, MT-45, MT-82 Maintenance ....................................................... MA-5 Maintenance (engine)QG18DE ........................ MA-16 Maintenance (engine)QR25DE ......................... MA-23 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) .......... EC-66, EC-706 Manual air conditioner - Wiring diagram ......... MTC-27 Manual transaxle number ................................... GI-49 Manual transmission oil replacement ............... MA-30 Mass air flow sensor (MAFS) .... EC-160, EC-168, EC807, EC-815 Master cylinder (clutch) ............................ CL-9, CL-26 Meter ..................................................................... DI-3 METER - Wiring diagram ......................... DI-12, DI-61 MIL - Wiring diagram ..................................... EC-1303 MIL data link connectors circuit ....................... EC-621 MIRROR - Wiring diagram ................................ GW-14 Mirror defogger ................................................. GW-15 Mirror, door ......................................... GW-14, GW-16 Mirror, out side .................................................. GW-16 Misfire ................................................ EC-241, EC-919 Model variation ................................................... GI-46 Molding - See Exterior ........................................ EI-22 MULTI - Wiring diagram ..................................... BL-38 Multiport fuel injection (MFI) system .... EC-30, EC-656 Multiport fuel injection precautions .............. GI-3, GI-6 Multi-remote control system ............................... BL-33 N NATS (Nissan anti-theft system) ....................... BL-92 NVH troubleshooting (BR) ................................... BR-5 NVH troubleshooting (EM) .................... EM-11, EM-97 NVH troubleshooting (FA) ................................. FAX-4 NVH troubleshooting (RA) ................................ RAX-4 NVH troubleshooting (WT) .................................. WT-2 NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system) ........ BL-92 NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system) precautions GI-3, GI-5 O Oil change (capacity) ........................................ MA-13 Oil pan (engine) .................................. EM-16, EM-110 Oil pump (A/T) .................................................. AT-292 Oil pump (engine) .................................... LU-8, LU-19 Oil pump regulator valve (engine) ...................... LU-10 Oil seal replacement (engine) ............. EM-49, EM-139 On board diagnostic system ........................... EC-689 Operating cylinder (clutch) ..................... CL-11, CL-28 ORVR (On-board Refueling Vapor Recovery) EC-627, EC-1312 Overdrive control switch ....... AT-249, AT-251, AT-628 Overheat ......................................... EC-428, EC-1092 Overrun clutch .................................................. AT-324 Overrun clutch solenoid valve .......................... AT-565 P Park/Neutral position switch ............ EC-530, EC-1194 Park/neutral position switch (A/T) ...... AT-115, AT-488 Park/neutral position switch (M/T) ..................... MT-12 Park/neutral position switch (M/T)Park/neutral position switch (M/T) ...................................................... MT-75 Parking brake control ........................................... PB-2 Parking drum brake ........................................... BR-38 Parking lamp ...................................................... LT-19 PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) EC-633, EC-1317 Periodic maintenance ......................................... MA-7 PGC/V - Wiring diagram EC-286, EC-498, EC-965, EC1161 PHASE - Wiring diagram .................. EC-260, EC-936 Piston assembly ................................................ EM-76 Piston pin inspection ......................................... EM-68 Piston ring inspection ........................................ EM-69 Piston to bore clearance ..................... EM-70, EM-179 PNP/SW - Wiring diagram .............. EC-532, EC-1196 POS - Wiring diagram ....................... EC-254, EC-931 POWER - Wiring diagram ................... EC-1035, PG-5 Power door lock ................................................. BL-11 Power door mirror ............................................ GW-14 Power steering fluid level ........................ PS-8, MA-35 Power steering gear ........................................... PS-15 Power steering hydraulic pressure ..................... PS-10 Power steering oil pump .................................... PS-21 Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor ... EC-343, EC1020 Power steering system bleeding .......................... PS-8 Power supply routing .......................................... PG-3 Power transistor ............................................ EC-1237 Power window .................................................... GW-7 Power window main switch ................................ GW-7 IDX-6 ALPHABETICAL INDEX PRE/SE - Wiring diagram ... EC-302, EC-308, EC-978, EC-984 Precautions (General) .......................................... GI-3 Pressure plate - See Clutch cover ......... CL-17, CL-33 Pressure test (A/T) ............................... AT-67, AT-454 PS/SEN - Wiring diagram ................ EC-344, EC-1021 R Radiator ............................................................. CO-14 Radio - See Audio ............................................... AV-2 Rear air spoiler .................................................... EI-22 Rear axle ........................................................... RAX-5 Rear axle (disc brake type) ............................... RAX-6 Rear axle (drum brake type) ............................. RAX-6 Rear bumper ....................................................... EI-18 Rear combination lamp removal and installation EI-22 Rear disc brake ................................................. BR-29 Rear door ............................................. BL-30, GW-13 Rear drum brake ............................................... BR-38 Rear seat ............................................................. SE-5 Rear seat belt ...................................................... SB-5 Rear suspension ............................................... RSU-5 Rear window ...................................................... GW-3 Rear window defogger ..................................... GW-17 Refrigerant connection precaution ................... MTC-5 Refrigerant general precaution ......................... MTC-4 Refrigerant lines ............................................. MTC-82 Refrigerant pressure sensor . EC-591, EC-1269, MTC56 Refrigeration cycle ......................................... MTC-15 Release bearing (clutch) ........................ CL-14, CL-31 Remote keyless entry system ............................ BL-33 Removal and installation (A/T) ......................... AT-264 Reverse clutch ................................................. AT-313 Reverse idler shaft (M/T) ....................... MT-18, MT-82 Reverse lamp switch (M/T) - See Back-up lamp switch (M/T) .................................................................. MT-12 Reverse main gear (M/T) ...................... MT-19, MT-82 Revolution sensor (A/T) ................................... AT-500 Road wheel size ................................................. GI-50 Rocker cover ................................................... EM-119 Roof trim .............................................................. EI-32 Room lamp - See Interior lamp .......................... LT-35 RP/SEN - Wiring diagram ............... EC-592, EC-1270 S SAE J1979 - Mode 1 - 7 .................................. EC-689 Seal - See Exterior .............................................. EI-22 Seat belt inspection ................................. SB-7, MA-38 Seat belt pre-tensioner disposal ...................... SRS-47 Seat belt, front ..................................................... SB-3 Seat belt, rear ...................................................... SB-5 Seat, front ............................................................ SE-3 Seat, rear ............................................................ SE-5 SEN/PW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-447, EC-1110 Sheft warning system ......................................... BL-63 SHIFT - Wiring diagram ..................... AT-253, AT-634 Shift control components (M/T) ............ MT-20, MT-84 Shift control components (M/T)Shift control components A (M/T) .................................................................. MT-76 Shift fork (M/T) ...................................... MT-20, MT-84 Shift lever ........................................................... MT-13 B Shift lock system ................................. AT-252, AT-633 Shift schedule ..................................... AT-385, AT-748 Shift solenoid valve A (A/T) .. AT-139, AT-149, AT-550 C Shift solenoid valve B (A/T) ................ AT-139, AT-555 Shock absorber (front) ....................................... FSU-9 Shock absorber (rear) ..................................... RSU-10 Side trim .............................................................. EI-28 D Smart entrance control unit ............................... BCS-3 Spare tire size ..................................................... GI-50 Spark plug replacementQG18DE ...................... MA-21 E Spark plug replacementQR25DE ...................... MA-28 Specification value ........................................... EC-777 Speedometer ........................................................ DI-3 F SROOF - Wiring diagram .................................. RF-11 SRS - Wiring diagram ...................................... SRS-14 SRS Trouble diagnoses ..................................... SRS-8 G Stabilizer bar (front) ......................................... FSU-11 Stall test (A/T) ....................................... AT-63, AT-450 Standardized relay ............................................. PG-52 START - Wiring diagram ................................... SC-10 H Starter ................................................................ SC-18 Starting system .................................................... SC-9 Steering gear and linkage inspection ................ MA-35 I Steering linkage ................................................. PS-15 Steering wheel and column ............................... PS-11 Steering wheel play ............................................. PS-7 J Steering wheel turning force ................................ PS-9 Stop lamp ........................................................... LT-21 Stop lamp switch ........... EC-1181, EC-1204, EC-1292 STOP/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-21 K Striking rod (M/T) ............................................... MT-20 Strut (front) ........................................................ FSU-9 Strut (rear) ........................................................ RSU-8 L Sub-gear (M/T) .................................................. MT-19 Sunroof .............................................................. RF-10 Supplemental restraint system - Wiring diagram . SRSIDX 14 Suspension ........................................................ MA-36 Swirl control valve .............................. EC-392, EC-405 Swirl control valve control position sensor EC-397, EC405 SWL/S - Wiring diagram .................... EC-399, EC-407 SWL/V - Wiring diagram .................................. EC-394 Symbols and abbreviations .............. GI-8, GI-9, GI-21 Symptom matrix chart .......................... EC-86, EC-728 Synchronizer (M/T) ............................... MT-19, MT-82 System readiness test (SRT) code ...... EC-57, EC-694 T Tachometer .......................................................... DI-3 Tail lamp ............................................................. LT-19 TAIL/L - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-19 TCM circuit diagram ............................. AT-18, AT-406 IDX-7 ALPHABETICAL INDEX TCM inspection table ......................... AT-109, AT-481 Temperature control cable and linkage adjustment ...... MTC-45 Thermal protector ........................................... MTC-76 Thermostat ............................................ CO-12, CO-30 Three way catalyst function ............... EC-265, EC-941 Three way catalyst precautions ................... GI-3, GI-5 Throttle control motor ..................................... EC-1057 Throttle control motor relay .............. EC-382, EC-1052 Throttle position sensor (TPS) .. EC-184, EC-235, EC442, EC-444, EC-553, EC-832, EC-913, EC-1105, EC1107, EC-1224 Throttle position switch ...................... AT-249, AT-628 Throttle valve closed position learning . EC-47, EC-684 Throwout bearing - See Clutch release bearing CL-14, CL-31 Tie-rod ............................................................... PS-19 Tie-rod ball joints ............................................... PS-19 Tightening torque of standard bolts .................... GI-44 Time control system ........................................ BCS-10 Timing chain ....................................... EM-39, EM-131 Tire rotation ....................................................... MA-32 Tire size .............................................................. GI-50 TLID - Wiring diagram ........................................ BL-32 Top tether strap child restraint ........................... SB-10 Torque converter installation AT-265, AT-646, AT-741 Torque convertor clutch solenoid valve ........... AT-531 Tow truck towing ................................................. GI-42 Towing point ....................................................... GI-43 TPS1 - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-237, EC-915 TPS2 - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-186, EC-834 TPS3 - Wiring diagram .................... EC-555, EC-1226 Transmission case (M/T) ...................... MT-18, MT-81 Tread-FR&RR (Dimensions) ............................... GI-49 Trim ..................................................................... EI-28 Trouble diagnoses ..................................... GI-9, GI-23 Trunk lid .............................................................. EI-18 Trunk lid finisher ................................................. EI-33 Trunk lid opener - See Trunk lid ......................... EI-18 Trunk lid opener, electric ................................... BL-32 Trunk lid trim ....................................................... EI-33 Trunk room lamp ................................................. LT-35 Trunk room trim .................................................. EI-33 TURN - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-29 Turn signal lamp ................................................. LT-27 Two trip detection logic ........................ EC-52, EC-689 U Variable induction air control system (VIAS) EC-1198, EC-1249 Vehicle identification number .............................. GI-47 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .......... GI-43 Vehicle security (theft warning) system ............. BL-63 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) ........... EC-337, EC-1014 VEHSEC - Wiring diagram ................................. BL-70 Vent mode switch ............................................ MTC-20 VENT/V - Wiring diagram ... EC-293, EC-506, EC-971, EC-1169 VIAS - Wiring diagram .................................. EC-1251 VIAS/V - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-1199 Viscosity number (SAE) .................................... MA-14 W WARN - Wiring diagram ...................................... DI-28 Warning chime .................................................... DI-40 Warning lamps .................................................... DI-26 Washer, front ..................................................... WW-3 Water pump ...................................................... CO-10 Water temperature gauge ..................................... DI-3 Weatherstrip - See Exterior ................................. EI-22 Wheel alignment (front) ..................................... FSU-6 Wheel alignment (rear) ..................................... RSU-6 Wheel balance .................................................. MA-32 Wheel bearing (front axle) ................................. FAX-9 Wheel bearing (front) ........................................ FAX-5 Wheel bearing (rear) ......................................... RAX-5 Wheel hub (front) .................................. FAX-6, FAX-9 Wheel hub (rear) ............................................... RAX-6 Wheel sensors (ABS) ...................................... BRC-44 Wheel size .......................................................... GI-50 Wheelbase (Dimensions) .................................... GI-49 Width (Dimensions) ............................................. GI-49 WINDOW - Wiring diagram ................................ GW-9 Window, back door .......................................... GW-12 Window, door ........................................ GW-6, GW-12 Window, rear ...................................................... GW-3 Windshield ......................................................... GW-3 Windshield washer - See Front washer ............. WW-3 Windshield wiper - See Front wiper ................... WW-3 WIPER - Wiring diagram .................................... WW-5 Wiper and washer .............................................. WW-3 Wiper, front ........................................................ WW-3 Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list ......................... PG-40 Wiring diagrams ......................................... GI-8, GI-13 Withdrawal lever (clutch) ........................ CL-14, CL-31 Wrist pin - See Piston pin inspection ................ EM-68 Under body ...................................................... BL-116 V Vacuum hose (brake system) ............................ BR-18 Vacuum hose drawing (Engine control) ........... EC-654 Valve clearance .................................. EM-35, EM-128 Valve guide .......................... EM-58, EM-150, EM-151 Valve seat ........................................... EM-60, EM-152 Valve spring ........................................ EM-61, EM-153 IDX-8 I BODY A SECTION INSTRUMENT PANEL B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ............................................ 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 7 SUNROOF/HEADLINER ....................................... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ......................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 E F G H IP J K L M IP-1 PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS001EI The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. IP-2 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EIS00176 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D E F SBT839 — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit Repairing the cause of noise G H IP SBT840 Commercial Service Tools EIS00177 Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) J Description Engine ear (J-39565) Locating the noise K L SIIA0995E IP-3 M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00003 EIS00178 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. – Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping – Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. – Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. – Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. – Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. – Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. – Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. IP-4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1. Close a door. 2. Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3. Rev the engine. 4. Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5. At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E F CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. G LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool H (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: IP ● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. ● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. J Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. ● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing K the noise. ● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. ● Looking for loose components and contact marks. L Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. ● IP-5 M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS00179 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and upper/lower cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops IP-6 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. A TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINER B C D E Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. F G SEATS When isolating seat noises it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat H when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: IP 1. Headrest rods and holders 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seat back lock and bracket J These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. K UNDERHOOD Some interior noises may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noises include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. IP-7 L M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS0017A LIWA0276E IP-8 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H IP J K L M SBT844 IP-9 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:68200 EIS0017B CAUTION: ● Lock the CD changer unit mechanism (models with CD changer). Refer to AV-11, "LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM" . ● Disconnect both terminals from battery and wait three minutes. ● Disconnect air bag module connectors in advance. ● Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts. ● Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance. LIIA0001E *1 EI-28 *2 AV-11 IP-10 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY A B C D E F LIIA0002E *1 SRS-44 *2 EI-28 G H IP J K L M IP-11 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY LIIA0233E IP-12 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY A B C D E F G H IP J K L M LIIA0004E IP-13 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY IP-14 K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION LAN SYSTEM C D CONTENTS CAN PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 2 CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 2 Precautions For Harness Repair .............................. 2 CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 2 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 CAN COMMUNICATION ............................................ 4 System Description .................................................. 4 CAN Communication Unit ........................................ 4 TYPE 1 .................................................................. 4 TYPE 2 .................................................................. 6 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) ............................................. 7 System Description .................................................. 7 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 7 Wiring Diagram — CAN — ....................................... 8 Work Flow ................................................................ 9 CHECK SHEET ................................................... 10 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 11 ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 13 TCM Circuit Check ................................................. 13 Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 14 CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 15 Component Inspection ............................................ 16 ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ............................................. 16 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) ........................................... 17 System Description ................................................. 17 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 17 Wiring Diagram — CAN — ..................................... 18 Work Flow ............................................................... 19 CHECK SHEET ................................................... 20 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 21 CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 22 Component Inspection ............................................ 25 ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ............................................. 25 E F G H I J LAN L M LAN-1 PRECAUTIONS [CAN] PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS0069T The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis EKS003AA CAN SYSTEM ● ● Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement terminals. Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less. Precautions For Harness Repair EKS003AB CAN SYSTEM ● Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] PKIA0306E ● Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.) PKIA0307E LAN-2 PRECAUTIONS [CAN] Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. EKS0069S A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M LAN-3 CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 EKS003K5 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Unit EKS003K6 Go to CAN system, when selecting your CAN system type from the following table. Body type Sedan Axle 2WD Engine QG18DE/QR25DE Transmission A/T M/T 1 2 LAN-7, "CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)" LAN-17, "CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)" CAN system type CAN system trouble diagnosis ×: Applicable TYPE 1 System diagram LKIA0132E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM TCM Accelerator pedal position signal T R Output shaft revolution signal R T A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Combination Meter Stop lamp switch signal R T Overdrive control switch signal R T O/D OFF indicator signal T R Engine speed signal T R Engine coolant temperature signal T R Fuel consumption monitor signal* T R Vehicle speed signal R T Fuel level sensor signal R T Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R LAN-4 CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Combination Meter ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Engine and A/T integrated control signal *: For QR25DE models only T R R T A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M LAN-5 CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE 2 System diagram LKIA0133E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM Combination Meter Engine speed signal T R Engine coolant temperature signal T R Fuel consumption monitor signal* T R Vehicle speed signal R T Fuel level sensor signal R T Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R *: For QR25DE models LAN-6 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) System Description PFP:23710 A EKS003K7 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C EKS003K8 D E F LKIA0131E G H I J LAN L M LAN-7 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Wiring Diagram — CAN — EKS003K9 WKWA0626E LAN-8 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Work Flow 1. EKS003KA A Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE” and “A/T” displayed on CONSULT-II. B C D PKIA8260E 2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE” and “A/T” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8343E 3. 4. 5. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-10, "CHECK SHEET" . I Based on the "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" results, put check marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN-10, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: J If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-11, "CHECK SHEET LAN RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . L M LAN-9 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If "NG" is displayed on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)" as "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. WKIA2724E LAN-10 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Replace ECM. C D E F G H WKIA2725E Case 2 I Replace TCM. J LAN L M WKIA2726E LAN-11 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 3 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-13, "ECM Circuit Check" . WKIA2727E Case 4 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-13, "TCM Circuit Check" . WKIA2728E Case 5 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-14, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . WKIA2729E Case 6 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-15, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . WKIA2730E LAN-12 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check EKS003KB 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harness-side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. C D Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F59 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (Y). 94 (L) – 86 (Y) B E : Approx. 108 – 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and TCM. F G WKIA0257E TCM Circuit Check H EKS003KC 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harness-side). J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. LAN NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (Y). 5 (L) – 6 (Y) M : Approx. 54 – 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace TCM. NG >> Repair harness between TCM and ECM. WKIA0258E LAN-13 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Combination Meter Circuit Check EKS003KD 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side and harness-side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. ● Disconnect combination meter connector. Check the following. Without tachometer: Resistance between combination meter harness connector M30 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (Y). 34 (L) – 35 (Y) (Without tachometer) : Approx. 108 – 132Ω WKIA0259E ● With tachometer (QG18DE): Resistance between combination meter harness connector M30 terminals 38 (L) and 39 (Y). 38 (L) – 39 (Y) (QG18DE with tachometer) : Approx. 108 – 132Ω WKIA1042E ● With tachometer (QR25DE): Resistance between combination meter harness connector M29 terminals 6 (L) and 5 (Y). 6 (L) – 5 (Y) (QR25DE with tachometer) : Approx. 108 – 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and TCM. WKIA1107E LAN-14 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check EKS003KE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side, control module-side and harness-side). ● Combination meter ● TCM ● ECM ● Between combination meter and ECM OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. B C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector, TCM connector and harness connector F26. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F59 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (Y). 94 (L) – 86 (Y) F : Continuity should not exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> ● Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F26. ● Repair harness between ECM and TCM. H I WKIA0257E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT J Check continuity between ECM harness connector F59 terminals 94 (L), 86 (Y) and ground. 94 (L) – ground 86 (Y) – ground LAN : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> ● Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F26. ● Repair harness between ECM and TCM. L M WKIA0262E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between harness connector M58 terminals 6 (L) and 15 (Y). 6 (L) – 15 (Y) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector M58 and combination meter. WKIA0263E LAN-15 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M58 terminals 6 (L), 15 (Y) and ground. 6 (L) – ground 15 (Y) – ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector M58 and combination meter. WKIA0264E 6. ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check components inspection. Refer to LAN-16, "ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-9, "Work Flow" . NG >> Replace ECM and/or combination meter. Component Inspection EKS003KF ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● ● ● Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between combination meter terminals 34 and 35 (Without tachometer). Check resistance between combination meter terminals 38 and 39 (QG18DE with tachometer). Check resistance between combination meter terminals 5 and 6 (QR25DE with tachometer). Unit Terminal ECM 94 – 86 Combination meter (Without tachometer) 34 – 35 Combination meter (QG18DE with tachometer) 38 – 39 Combination meter (QR25DE with tachometer) 5–6 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 136 LAN-16 WKIA0265E CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) System Description PFP:23710 A EKS003KG CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C EKS003KH D E F WKIA0266E G H I J LAN L M LAN-17 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Wiring Diagram — CAN — EKS003KI WKWA0625E LAN-18 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Work Flow 1. EKS008JL A Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE” displayed on CONSULT-II. B C D PKIA8260E 2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8343E 3. 4. 5. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-20, "CHECK SHEET" . I Based on the "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" results, put check marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN-20, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: J If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-21, "CHECK SHEET LAN RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . L M LAN-19 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If "NG" is displayed on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)" as "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. WKIA2731E LAN-20 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Replace ECM. C D E F G H WKIA2732E Case 2 I Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-22, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . J LAN L WKIA2733E M LAN-21 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check EKS003KK 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side, control module-side and harness-side). ● Combination meter ● ECM ● Between combination meter and ECM OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector F26. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F59 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (Y). 94 (L) – 86 (Y) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F26. WKIA0257E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F59 terminals 94 (L), 86 (Y) and ground. 94 (L) – ground 86 (Y) – ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F26. WKIA0262E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F59 terminals 94 (L), 86 (Y) and harness connector F26 terminals 6 (L), 15 (Y). 94 (L) – 6 (L) 86 (Y) – 15 (Y) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA0271E LAN-22 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between harness connector M58 terminals 6 (L) and 15 (Y). 6 (L) – 15 (Y) B : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector M58 and combination meter. C D WKIA0263E E 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M58 terminals 6 (L), 15 (Y) and ground. 6 (L) – ground 15 (Y) – ground F : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector M58 and combination meter. H WKIA0264E I J LAN L M LAN-23 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. ● Check the following. Without tachometer: Continuity between harness connector M58 terminals 6 (L), 15 (Y) and combination meter harness connector M30 terminals 34 (L), 35 (Y). 6 (L) – 34 (L) (Without tachometer) 15 (Y) – 35 (Y) (Without tachometer) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. WKIA0274E ● With tachometer (QG18DE): Continuity between harness connector M58 terminals 6 (L), 15 (Y) and combination meter harness connector M30 terminals 38 (L), 39 (Y). 6 (L) – 38 (L) (QG18DE with tachometer) 15 (Y) – 39 (Y) (QG18DE with tachometer) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. WKIA1105E ● With tachometer (QR25DE): Continuity between harness connector M58 terminals 6 (L), 15 (Y) and combination meter harness connector M29 terminals 6 (L), 5 (Y). 6 (L) – 6 (L) (QR25DE with tachometer) 15 (Y) – 5 (Y) (QR25DE with tachometer) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1106E 8. ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check components inspection. Refer to LAN-25, "ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-19, "Work Flow" . NG >> Replace ECM and/or combination meter. LAN-24 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Component Inspection EKS003KL A ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● ● ● Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between combination meter terminals 34 and 35 (Without tachometer). Check resistance between combination meter terminals 38 and 39 (QG18DE with tachometer). Check resistance between combination meter terminals 5 and 6 (QR25DE with tachometer). B C D Unit Terminal ECM 94 – 86 Combination meter (Without tachometer) 34 – 35 Combination meter (QG18DE with tachometer) 38 – 39 Combination meter (QR25DE with tachometer) 5–6 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) WKIA0265E E 108 - 136 F G H I J LAN L M LAN-25 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] LAN-26 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION LIGHTING SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 COMBINATION SWITCH ............................................ 4 Check ....................................................................... 4 Replacement ............................................................ 5 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ............................................ 6 System Description .................................................. 6 LOW BEAM OPERATION ..................................... 6 HIGH BEAM OPERATION/FLASH-TO-PASS OPERATION ......................................................... 6 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ............................ 6 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — ................................. 7 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................... 8 Bulb Replacement .................................................... 8 Aiming Adjustment ................................................... 8 LOW BEAM ........................................................... 9 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — ............................................................... 10 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 10 System Description ................................................ 10 HEADLAMP OPERATION .................................. 10 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION ............................11 OPERATION (FOR CANADA) ............................ 12 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM .......................... 12 Schematic .............................................................. 13 Wiring Diagram — DTRL — ................................... 14 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 17 DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE ................................................................. 17 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 18 Aiming Adjustment ................................................. 18 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS .................. 19 Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — .................................. 19 STOP LAMP ............................................................. 21 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — ................................ 21 BACK-UP LAMP ....................................................... 22 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — ................................ 22 QG18DE .............................................................. 22 QR25DE .............................................................. 23 FRONT FOG LAMP .................................................. 24 System Description ................................................. 24 FOG LAMP OPERATION .................................... 24 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — .................................. 25 Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 26 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS... 27 System Description ................................................. 27 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION .............................. 27 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION ............................. 27 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION .................................................................... 28 Wiring Diagram — TURN — ................................... 29 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 31 Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 31 COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK ........... 31 ILLUMINATION ......................................................... 32 System Description ................................................. 32 Wiring Diagram — ILL — ........................................ 33 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS ...................................................................... 35 System Description ................................................. 35 WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS .................... 35 WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS ............................ 35 Wiring Diagram — INT/L — .................................... 37 WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS .................... 37 WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS ............................ 38 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (With Power Door Locks) ............................................................ 41 “INT LAMP”/“BATTERY SAVER” ......................... 41 CONSULT-II Application Items (With Power Door Locks) ..................................................................... 42 “INT LAMP” ......................................................... 42 “BATTERY SAVER” ............................................. 42 Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (With Power Door Locks) ................................................. 43 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (SYMPTOM: LT-1 E F G H I J LT L M INTERIOR LAMP TIMER DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY) ........................................................ 43 BULB SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................48 Bulb Specifications ..................................................48 HEADLAMP .........................................................48 EXTERIOR LAMP ................................................48 INTERIOR LAMP .................................................48 LT-2 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EKS006AD The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. B C D E F EKS00385 G H I J LT L M LT-3 COMBINATION SWITCH COMBINATION SWITCH Check PFP:25567 EKS00386 LEL576 LT-4 COMBINATION SWITCH Replacement EKS00387 A For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to SRS-42, "Removal and Installation" . ● Each switch can be replaced without removing switch base. B C D CEL501 ● To remove switch base, remove switch base attaching screws. E F G CEL406 ● Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel guide pins with the screws which secure the combination switch as shown in the figure. H I J LT SEL151V L M LT-5 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) HEADLAMP (FOR USA) System Description PFP:26010 EKS0069V The headlamps are controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch. Power is supplied at all times: ● to lighting switch terminal 5 ● through 15A fuse (No. 39, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and ● to lighting switch terminal 8 ● through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in the fuse and fusible link box). LOW BEAM OPERATION When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp “ON” (2ND) position, “LOW BEAM” (B), power is supplied: ● from lighting switch terminal 10 ● to terminal LO of the LH headlamp, and ● from lighting switch terminal 7 ● to terminal LO of the RH headlamp. Ground is supplied: ● to RH and LH headlamp terminal E ● through body grounds E7 and E37. With power and ground supplied, the headlamps will illuminate. HIGH BEAM OPERATION/FLASH-TO-PASS OPERATION When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp “ON” (2ND) position, “HIGH BEAM” (A) or “FLASH TO PASS” (C) position, power is supplied: ● from lighting switch terminal 9 ● to terminal HI of the LH headlamp, and ● from lighting switch terminal 6 ● to terminal HI of the RH headlamp, and ● to combination meter terminal 2 (with tachometer), 12 (without tachometer) for the high beam indicator. Ground is supplied to terminal 3 (with tachometer), 14 (without tachometer) of the combination meter through body grounds M28 and M54. With power and ground supplied, the high beams and the high beam indicator illuminate. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to BL-63, "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM" . LT-6 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — EKS0069W A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0634E LT-7 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Trouble Diagnoses EKS0069X Symptom LH headlamp does not operate. Possible cause Repair order 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Grounds E7 and E37 2. Check grounds E7 and E37. 3. 15A fuse 3. Check 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fuse and fusible link box.) Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 8 of lighting switch. 4. Lighting switch 4. Check lighting switch. RH headlamp does not operate. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Grounds E7 and E37 2. Check grounds E7 and E37. 3. 15A fuse 3. Check 15A fuse (No. 39, located in fuse and fusible link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 5 of lighting switch. 4. Lighting switch 4. Check lighting switch. LH high beam does not operate, but LH low beam operates. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Open in LH high beam circuit 2. Check R/B wire between lighting switch and LH headlamp for an open circuit. 3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch. LH low beam does not operate, but LH high beam operates. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Open in LH low beam circuit 2. Check R/Y wire between lighting switch and LH headlamp for an open circuit. 3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch. RH high beam does not operate, but RH low beam operates. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Open in RH high beam circuit 2. Check Y wire between lighting switch and RH headlamp for an open circuit. 3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch. RH low beam does not operate, but RH high beam operates. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Open in RH low beam circuit 2. Check PU wire between lighting switch and RH headlamp for an open circuit. 3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch. High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter. 2. Grounds M28 and M54 2. Check grounds M28 and M54. 3. Open in high beam circuit 3. Check R/B wire between lighting switch and combination meter for an open circuit. Bulb Replacement EKS006AN The headlamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. The bulb can be replaced from the engine compartment side without removing the headlamp body. ● Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the headlamp bulb. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the headlamp assembly. WKIA1133E 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering headlamp body may affect the performance of the headlamp. Remove headlamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just before a replacement bulb is installed. Aiming Adjustment EKS006AO For details, refer to the regulations in your own country. LT-8 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) NOTE: By regulation, no means for horizontal adjustment is provided from the factory on a finished vehicle. Horizontal aim will only be serviced in the case of headlamp replacement. After initial aim is set on the replacement headlamp, access to the horizontal adjusting screw must be prevented by installation of the headlamp aim locking cap that is provided with the replacement headlamp assembly. Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following. 1. Inflate all tires to correct pressures. 2. Place vehicle on flat surface. 3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in the driver's seat. A B C LOW BEAM D 1. Turn headlamp low beam on. 2. Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment. CAUTION: Do not tighten adjusting screw beyond a torque of 1.67 N-m (17 kg-cm, 14.8 in-lb) or damage may occur. E F G WEL569A H I J LT L M WKIA1134E If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming. Use the aiming chart shown in the figure. ● Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart. Adjust headlamps accordingly. LT-9 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26010 EKS006A0 LEL556 System Description EKS006A1 The headlamp system for Canada vehicles contains a daytime light control unit. This unit activates the high beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake is applied. If the daytime light control unit receives a ground signal from the generator, the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once a battery positive voltage signal is sent to the daytime light control unit from the generator. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 15A fuse (No. 39, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to daytime light control unit terminal 2 and ● to lighting switch terminal 5. Power is also supplied at all times: ● through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to daytime light control unit terminal 3 and ● to lighting switch terminal 8. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse (No. 10, located in the fuse block [J/B]) ● to daytime light control unit terminal 12. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse (No. 21, located in the fuse block [J/B]) ● to daytime light control unit terminal 1. Ground is supplied to daytime light control unit terminal 9 through body grounds E7 and E37. HEADLAMP OPERATION Low Beam Operation When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp “ON” (2ND) position, “LOW BEAM” (B) position, power is supplied: ● from lighting switch terminal 7 ● to RH headlamp terminal LO. Ground is supplied: ● to RH headlamp terminal E ● through body grounds E7 and E37. Also, when the lighting switch is moved to headlamp “ON” (2ND) position, “LOW BEAM” (B) position, power is supplied: ● from lighting switch terminal 10 ● to LH headlamp terminal LO. Ground is supplied: ● to LH headlamp terminal E LT-10 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — from daytime light control unit terminal 7 ● through daytime light control unit terminal 9 ● through body grounds E7 and E37. With power and ground supplied, the low beam headlamps illuminate. ● High Beam Operation/Flash-to-pass Operation When the lighting switch is moved to headlamp “ON” (2ND) position, “HIGH BEAM” (A) or “FLASH TO PASS” (C) position, power is supplied: ● from lighting switch terminal 6 ● to RH headlamp terminal HI, and ● from lighting switch terminal 9 ● to daytime light control unit terminal 5, and ● to combination meter terminal 2 (with tachometer), 12 (without tachometer) for the high beam indicator ● through daytime light control unit terminal 6 ● to LH headlamp terminal HI. Ground is supplied in the same manner as low beam operation. Ground is supplied to terminal 3 (with tachometer), 14 (without tachometer) of the combination meter through body grounds M28 and M54. With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps and high beam indicator illuminate. A B C D E F G DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION With the engine running and the lighting switch in the “OFF” or parking lamp (1ST) position and parking brake released, power is supplied: H ● to daytime light control unit terminal 3 ● through daytime light control unit terminal 6 ● to LH headlamp terminal HI I ● through LH headlamp terminal E ● to daytime light control unit terminal 7 ● through daytime light control unit terminal 8 J ● to RH headlamp terminal HI. Ground is supplied: LT ● to RH headlamp terminal E ● through body grounds E7 and E37. Because the high beam headlamps are wired in series during daytime light operation, they operate at half illuL mination. M LT-11 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — OPERATION (FOR CANADA) The headlamps' high beams automatically turn on after starting the engine with the lighting switch in the “OFF” or parking lamp (1st) position. All other lighting switch functions operate the same as conventional light systems. Engine With engine stopped OFF Lighting switch B C A B C A High beam X X O X X O Low beam X X X X X X Front parking and tail lamp X X X O O License and instrument illumination lamp X X X O O ● A: “HIGH BEAM” position ● B: “LOW BEAM” position ● C: “FLASH TO PASS” position ● O : Lamp ON ● X : Lamp OFF ● 2ND A Headlamp ● 1ST With engine running OFF B C O X O X O X O O O O O O O O A 1ST B C * * O X X X X X X X X X A 2ND B C A B C * * O X X X O X O X O X O O O O O O O O O O O O : Lamp on at half brightness *: When starting the engine with the parking brake released, the daytime light will come ON. When starting the engine with the parking brake applied, the daytime light will not come ON. Once the parking brake is released, the daytime light will come ON. Thereafter, the daytime light will continue to operate when the parking brake is applied. If the daytime light control unit receives a ground signal from the generator, the daytime light will not come ON. The daytime light will come ON when battery voltage is sent to the daytime light control unit from the generator (engine is running). VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to BL-63, "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM" . LT-12 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — Schematic EKS006A2 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0526E LT-13 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — Wiring Diagram — DTRL — EKS006A3 WKWA0635E LEL592 LT-14 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0076E LEL593 LT-15 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — WKWA0528E LEL594 LT-16 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — Trouble Diagnoses EKS006A4 A DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Terminal No. Wire color Item 1 B/Y Start signal 2 R Power source Voltage (Approx. values) Condition When turning ignition switch to ST Battery voltage B When turning ignition switch to ON from ST Less than 1V C When turning ignition switch to OFF Less than 1V D When turning ignition switch to ON Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to OFF Battery voltage E F 3 R/W Power source When turning ignition switch to ON Battery voltage G When turning ignition switch to OFF Battery voltage H 4 PU Lighting switch (Low beam) When turning lighting switch to headlamp ON (2ND) position, LOW BEAM Battery voltage 5 R/B Lighting switch (High beam) When turning lighting switch to HIGH (A) Battery voltage When turning lighting switch to FLASH TO PASS Battery voltage LH high beam When turning lighting switch to HIGH (A) Battery voltage When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to OFF (daytime light operation) Battery voltage 6 R/L CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position. 7 R/G LH headlamp control (ground) Y RH high beam When lighting switch is turned to headlamp ON (2ND) position, LOW BEAM 1V or less When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch OFF (daytime light operation) Half battery voltage L M When turning lighting switch to HIGH (A) Battery positive voltage When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch OFF (daytime light operation) Half battery voltage CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector level is in N or P position. 9 B 10 LG Ground — — Parking brake switch When parking brake is released Battery voltage When parking brake is applied 1.5V or less LT-17 J LT CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position. 8 I HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM — Terminal No. Wire color Item 11 Y/R Generator 12 G Power source Condition Voltage (Approx. values) When turning ignition switch ON 4.6V or less When engine is running Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF 1V or less When turning ignition switch ON Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to ST Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF 1V or less Bulb Replacement EKS006A5 Refer to LT-8, "Bulb Replacement" . Aiming Adjustment EKS006A6 Refer to LT-8, "Aiming Adjustment" . LT-18 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — PFP:26550 A EKS0038K B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0217E LT-19 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS WKWA0021E LT-20 STOP LAMP STOP LAMP Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — PFP:26550 A EKS0038L B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0636E LT-21 BACK-UP LAMP BACK-UP LAMP Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — PFP:26550 EKS006A7 QG18DE WKWA0515E LT-22 BACK-UP LAMP QR25DE A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0516E LT-23 FRONT FOG LAMP FRONT FOG LAMP System Description PFP:26150 EKS006AF Power is supplied at all times to front fog lamp relay terminal 5 through: ● 15A fuse (No. 43, located in the fuse and fusible link box.) With the lighting switch in headlamp “ON” (2ND) position, “LOW BEAM” (B) position, power is supplied: ● through 15A fuse (No. 39, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to lighting switch terminal 5 ● through terminal 7 of the lighting switch ● to front fog lamp relay terminal 1. FOG LAMP OPERATION The front fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in headlamp “ON” (2ND) position and “LOW BEAM” (B) position for fog lamp operation. With the front fog lamp switch in the ON position ground is supplied: ● to front fog lamp relay terminal 2 ● through the front fog lamp switch ● to body grounds E7 and E37. The front fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied: ● from front fog lamp relay terminal 3 ● to terminal + of each front fog lamp. Ground is supplied to terminal - of each front fog lamp through body grounds E7 and E37. With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate. LT-24 FRONT FOG LAMP Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — EKS006AG A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0024E LT-25 FRONT FOG LAMP Aiming Adjustment EKS006AH Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following. 1. Inflate all tires to correct pressure. 2. Place vehicle on level ground. 3. See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver's seat. WKIA1135E Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting screw. 1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog lamp lens as shown. MEL327G 2. 3. Turn front fog lamps ON. Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (3.94 in) below the height of the fog lamp centers as shown. ● When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp. LEL636 LT-26 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS System Description PFP:26120 A EKS0038Q TURN SIGNAL OPERATION With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 26, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to hazard switch terminal 2 ● through terminal 1 of the hazard switch ● to combination flasher unit terminal B ● through terminal L of the combination flasher unit ● to turn signal switch terminal 1. Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal E through body grounds M28 and M54. B C D E LH Turn When the turn signal switch is moved to the LH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal 3 to: ● front combination lamp LH terminal 3 ● combination meter terminal 35 (with tachometer) or 40 (without tachometer) ● rear combination lamp LH terminal 2. Ground is supplied to the front combination lamp LH terminal 1 through body grounds E7 and E37. Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal 4 through body grounds B13 and B19. Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 12 (with tachometer) or 39 (without tachometer) through body grounds M28 and M54. With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps. F G H RH Turn I When the turn signal switch is moved to the RH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal 2 to: ● front combination lamp RH terminal 3 J ● combination meter terminal 4 (with tachometer) or 41 (without tachometer) ● rear combination lamp RH terminal 2. LT Ground is supplied to the front combination lamp RH terminal 1 through body grounds E7 and E37. Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 4 through body grounds B13 and B19. Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 12 (with tachometer) or 39 (without tachometer) through body grounds M28 and M54. L With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps. HAZARD LAMP OPERATION M Power is supplied at all times to hazard switch terminal 3 through: ● 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. With the hazard switch in the ON position, power is supplied: ● through terminal 1 of the hazard switch ● to combination flasher unit terminal B ● through terminal L of the combination flasher unit ● to hazard switch terminal 4. Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal E through body grounds M28 and M54. Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the hazard switch to: ● front combination lamp LH terminal 3 ● combination meter terminal 35 (with tachometer) or 40 (without tachometer) ● rear combination lamp LH terminal 2. Power is supplied through terminal 6 of the hazard switch to: ● front combination lamp RH terminal 3 LT-27 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS combination meter terminal 4 (with tachometer) or 41 (without tachometer) ● rear combination lamp RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each front combination lamp through body grounds E7 and E37. Ground is supplied to terminal 4 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds B13 and B19. Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 12 (with tachometer) or 39 (without tachometer) through body grounds M28 and M54. With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps. ● REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION Power is supplied at all times: ● through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to remote keyless entry relay terminals 1, 6 and 3. Ground is supplied to remote keyless entry relay terminal 2, when the remote keyless entry system is triggered through the smart entrance control unit. Refer to BL-33, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" . The remote keyless entry relay is energized. Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the remote keyless entry relay: ● to front combination lamp LH terminal 3 ● to combination meter terminal 35 (with tachometer) or 40 (without tachometer) ● to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2. Power is supplied through terminal 7 of the remote keyless entry relay: ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 3 ● to combination meter terminal 4 (with tachometer) or 41 (without tachometer) ● to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each front combination lamp through body grounds E7 and E37. Ground is supplied to terminal 4 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds B13 and B19. Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 12 (with tachometer) or 39 (without tachometer) through body grounds M28 and M54. With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps. LT-28 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram — TURN — EKS0038R A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0637E LT-29 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS WKWA0222E LT-30 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses EKS0038S A Symptom Turn signal and hazard warning lamps do not operate. Turn signal lamps do not operate but hazard warning lamps operate. Possible cause Repair order 1. Hazard switch 1. Check hazard switch. 2. Combination flasher unit 2. Refer to combination flasher unit check. 3. Open in combination flasher unit circuit 3. Check wiring to combination flasher unit for open circuit. 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 26, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Turn ignition switch ON and verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 2 of hazard switch. 2. Hazard switch 3. Turn signal switch 4. Open in turn signal switch circuit B 2. Check hazard switch. C D 3. Check turn signal switch. 4. Check the wire between combination flasher unit terminal L and turn signal switch terminal 1 for open circuit. Hazard warning lamps do not operate but turn signal lamps operate. 1. 15A fuse 2. Hazard switch 3. Open in hazard switch circuit 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of hazard switch. E F 2. Check hazard switch. 3. Check the wire between combination flasher unit terminal L and hazard switch terminal 4 for open circuit. Front turn signal lamp LH or RH does not operate. G 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Grounds E7 and E37 2. Check grounds E7 and E37. 3. Open in front combination lamp circuit 3. Check the wire between combination switch terminal 3 (LH) or terminal 2 (RH) and front combination lamp terminal 3. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. 2. Grounds B13 and B19 2. Check grounds B13 and B19. 3. Open in rear combination lamp circuit 3. Check the wire between combination switch terminal 3 (LH) or terminal 2 (RH) and rear combination lamp terminal 2. LH and RH turn indicators do not operate. 1. Ground 1. Check grounds M28 and M54. LH or RH turn indicator does not operate. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter. 2. Turn indicator circuit 2. Check the wire between combination switch and combination meter. Rear turn signal lamp LH or RH does not operate. Electrical Components Inspection H I EKS0038T J LT L COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK ● ● Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications. Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly functioning if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit. M SEL122E LT-31 ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION System Description PFP:27545 EKS0038U Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to lighting switch terminal 11. The lighting switch must be in parking lamp (1ST) or headlamp “ON” (2ND) position for illumination. The illumination control switch controls the amount of current to the illumination system. As the amount of current increases, the illumination becomes brighter. The following chart shows the power and ground connector terminals for the components included in the illumination system. Component Connector No. Power terminal Ground terminal M22 1 3 M29 or M30 16 or 33 17 or 32 Hazard switch M43 7 8 Air control M32 2 6 A/T device indicator* M44 3 4 D6 4 2 Illumination control switch Combination meter Main power window and door lock/unlock switch* Audio unit CD changer* M45 8 7 M47, M48 23 25 * If equipped. The ground for all of the components is controlled through terminals 2 and 3 of the illumination control switch to body grounds M28 and M54. LT-32 ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram — ILL — EKS0038V A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0638E LT-33 ILLUMINATION WKWA0639E LT-34 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS System Description PFP:26410 A EKS006A8 WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS Power Supply and Ground B Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to interior lamp terminal +. C Switch Operation When interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and any door is opened, ground is supplied to interior lamp through the door switches. When interior lamp switch is in the ON position, ground is supplied: ● through case ground of interior lamp ● to interior lamp. WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS Power Supply and Ground D E F Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse (No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 10. Power is supplied at all times: ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch terminal 2 and ● through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to trunk room lamp terminal 1. When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted: ● through key switch terminal 1 ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 32. With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 33. Ground is supplied: ● to smart entrance control unit terminal 16 ● through body grounds M28 and M54. G H I J LT L Switch Operation When map lamp (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied: ● through body grounds M28 and M54 ● to map lamp terminal −. Power is supplied: ● to map lamp terminal + ● from smart entrance control unit terminal 17. When vanity lamp (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied: ● through body grounds M28 and M54 ● to vanity lamps (LH and RH) terminal 2. Power is supplied: ● to vanity lamps (LH and RH) terminal 1 ● from smart entrance control unit terminal 17. When trunk room lamp switch is ON (trunk lid is opened), ground is supplied: ● through body grounds B13 and B19 ● to trunk room lamp switch terminal − LT-35 M INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS from trunk room lamp switch terminal + ● to trunk room lamp terminal 2 With power and ground supplied, interior lamps turn ON. ● Battery Saver The lamps turn off automatically when interior lamp, map lamp and/or vanity lamps are illuminated with the ignition key in OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the lamp switch is in ON position for approximately 10 minutes. After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when: ● driver door is locked or unlocked, ● door is opened or closed, ● key is inserted in or removed from ignition key cylinder. LT-36 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Wiring Diagram — INT/L — EKS006A9 A WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0529E LT-37 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS WKWA0530E LT-38 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA0531E SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND LT-39 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM 8 R/Y INTERIOR LAMP 10 PU POWER SOURCE (FUSE) — 16 B GROUND — 17 R/B — 0V OFF (CLOSED) 5V ON (OPEN) 0V OFF (CLOSED) 5V ON (OPEN) 0V IGNITION KEY IS INSERTED 12V IGNITION KEY IS REMOVED 0V IGNITION SWITCH (ON) IGNITION KEY IS IN ON POSITION 12V IGNITION SWITCH (START) IGNITION KEY IS IN START POSITION 12V DRIVER DOOR: LOCKED 5V R FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH 32 L/W IGNITION KEY SWITCH (INSERT) G R/B 12V BATTERY SAVER OPERATES 29 38 12V 12V OTHER DOOR SWITCHES Y/G DATA (DC) BATTERY SAVER DOES NOT OPERATE R/W 36 LAMP SWITCH IN DOOR POSITION BATTERY SAVER (INTERIOR LAMP) 28 33 CONDITION DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR LH TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH DRIVER DOOR: UNLOCKED 0V ON (OPEN) 0V OFF (CLOSED) 12V LT-40 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (With Power Door Locks) EKS006AA CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. B “INT LAMP”/“BATTERY SAVER” 1. A With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. C D E LAT136 F 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. G H I SAIA0450E 3. J Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. LT L M LEL642 4. Touch “INT LAMP” or “BATTERY SAVER”. LEL643 LT-41 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS 5. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available for “INT LAMP” and “BATTERY SAVER”. SEL322W CONSULT-II Application Items (With Power Door Locks) “INT LAMP” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. DOOR SW DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-ALL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (All). LOCK SIG DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door unlock sensor LH. UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller. Active Test Test Item INT LAMP Description This test enables to check interior lamp, map lamp, and vanity lamps operations. When touch “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. ● Interior lamp turns on when the switch is in DOOR or ON. (Smart entrance control unit supplies power and ground to interior lamp.) ● Map lamp and vanity lamps turn on when the switch is in ON. (Smart entrance control unit supplies power to map lamp and vanity lamps.) “BATTERY SAVER” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. DOOR SW DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-ALL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (ALL). LOCK SIG DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door unlock sensor LH. TRUNK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk room lamp switch. Active Test Test Item BATTERY SAVER Description This test enables to check interior lamp, map lamp, and vanity lamp operations. When touch “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. ● Interior lamp turns on when the switch is in ON. (Smart entrance control unit supplies power to interior lamp.) ● Map lamp and vanity lamps turn on when the switch is in ON. (Smart entrance control unit supplies power to map lamps and vanity lamps.) LT-42 EKS006AB INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (With Power Door Locks) EKS006AC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (SYMPTOM: INTERIOR LAMP TIMER DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY) A 1. CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C D E F SEL318W G Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 33 and ground. H I J LEL450 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse LT L M LT-43 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL319W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 29 and ground. LEL451 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH Check continuity between front door switch LH terminals 2 and 3. LEL443 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Front door switch LH ground circuit and condition ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch LH NG >> Replace front door switch LH. LT-44 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS 4. CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR LH INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Perform “LOCK SIG DR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B C D SEL344W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 36 and ground. E F G H I LEL452 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. J 5. CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR LH 1. 2. LT Disconnect door unlock sensor LH harness connector. Check continuity between door unlock sensor LH terminals. L M WEL497 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door unlock sensor LH ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door unlock sensor LH NG >> Replace door unlock sensor LH. LT-45 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS 6. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door switches (“DOOR SW-ALL”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEL323W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 28 and ground. LEL453 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. Disconnect door switch harness connector. Check continuity between door switch terminals 1, + and ground. LEL447 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch NG >> Replace door switch. LT-46 INTERIOR, MAP, VANITY AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS 8. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B C D SEL315W Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector terminal 32 and ground. E F G H I LEL454 OK or NG OK >> Replace smart entrance control unit. NG >> GO TO 9. J 9. CHECK KEY SWITCH LT Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. L M LEL449 OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse ● Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch NG >> Replace key switch. LT-47 BULB SPECIFICATIONS BULB SPECIFICATIONS Bulb Specifications PFP:26297 EKS006AI HEADLAMP Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.* 65/55 9008 (H13) Wattage (W) Bulb No.* 8/27 3157AK 55 H11 27 1156A 27/8 1157 Back-up 18 921 License plate lamp 5 194 High-mounted stop lamp (parcel shelf mount) 18 921 * * Wattage (W) Bulb No.* Interior lamp 8 * Map lamp 8 * Trunk lamp 3.4 158 High/Low *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. EXTERIOR LAMP Item Front parking and turn signal lamp Fog light Rear combination lamp Turn signal Stop/Tail High-mounted stop lamp (rear air spoiler mount) *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. INTERIOR LAMP Item *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. LT-48 B ENGINE A SECTION ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM LU C D E CONTENTS QG18DE QR25DE PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 2 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 2 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................................ 4 Lubrication Circuit .................................................... 4 ENGINE OIL ............................................................... 5 Inspection ................................................................. 5 OIL LEVEL AND MUDDINESS ............................. 5 OIL LEAKAGE ....................................................... 5 OIL PRESSURE CHECK ...................................... 5 Changing Engine Oil ................................................ 6 OIL FILTER ................................................................. 7 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 REMOVAL ............................................................. 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7 OIL PUMP ................................................................... 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 8 Inspection ................................................................. 8 Regulator Valve Inspection .................................... 10 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......11 Oil Pressure ............................................................11 Oil Pump .................................................................11 Regulator Valve .......................................................11 Oil Capacity .............................................................11 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 12 Precautions for Liquid Gasket ................................ 12 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ........ 12 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE... 12 PREPARATION ......................................................... 13 Special Service Tools ............................................. 13 LUBRICATION SYSTEM .......................................... 14 Lubrication Circuit ................................................... 14 System Drawing ..................................................... 15 ENGINE OIL .............................................................. 16 Inspection ............................................................... 16 OIL LEVEL AND MUDINESS .............................. 16 OIL LEAKAGE ..................................................... 16 OIL PRESSURE CHECK .................................... 16 Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 17 OIL FILTER ............................................................... 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 REMOVAL ........................................................... 18 INSTALLATION ................................................... 18 OIL PUMP ................................................................. 19 Removal and Installation ........................................ 19 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 19 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 19 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 21 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 22 Oil Pressure ............................................................ 22 Oil Pump ................................................................. 22 Regulator Valve ...................................................... 22 Oil Capacity ............................................................ 22 LU-1 F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [QG18DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Liquid Gasket PFP:00001 EBS00EYP REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING After removing the mounting bolts and nuts, disconnect and remove the sealant using a seal cutter. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the areas where the sealant is applied. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● PBIC0275E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface. ● Remove the old sealant completely from the groove of the gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Clean the mating surface to remove dirt, moisture, grease, and foreign material. Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . PBIC0003E 4. Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. ● If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the Sealant to the groove. ● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. EMA0622D Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating component. ● If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten after the installation. ● After 30 minutes or more have passed after installation, fill the engine with oil and coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in the service manual, observe them. ● SEM164F LU-2 PREPARATION [QG18DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00CGC The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1. (J34301-1) Oil pressure gauge 2. (J34301-2) Hoses 3. (J34298) Adapter 4. (J34282-1) Adapter 5. (790-301-1230-A) 60° adapter 6. (J34301-15) Square socket Measuring oil pressure Maximum measuring range: 1,373 kPa (14 kg/cm2 , 199 psi) LU C D E AAT896 F KV10115800 (J-37140-A) Oil filter wrench Removing and installing oil filter G H S-NT772 WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket I J S-NT052 K L M LU-3 LUBRICATION SYSTEM [QG18DE] LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Circuit PFP:15010 EBS00CGD PBIC1071E LU-4 ENGINE OIL [QG18DE] ENGINE OIL Inspection PFP:KLA92 A EBS00CGE OIL LEVEL AND MUDDINESS ● ● ● ● ● Ensure the vehicle is on a level surface with engine off, then check the oil level. If the engine is already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking. Check that the oil level is within the range shown in the figure. If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Check the oil for white turbidity or remarkable contamination. If the oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with coolant. Diagnose the problem and correct as necessary. LU C D PBIC0249E E OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas. ● Oil pan ● Oil pan drain plug ● Oil pressure switch ● Oil filter ● Front cover ● Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head ● Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover ● Crankshaft oil seal. F G H I OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. ● For M/T models, put gearshift lever in Neutral. For A/T models, put the selector lever in Park "P" position. 1. Check the oil level. 2. Remove the oil pressure switch. 3. Connect the oil pressure gauge using the Tool. 4. After warming up the engine to the normal operating temperature, check that oil pressure corresponding to the engine speed is produced. J K L M SEM853F Engine oil pressure [Oil temperature is 80°C (176°F)] Engine speed (rpm) Idle speed 2,000 6,000 Engine pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Approx. 98 (1.0, 14) or more Approx. 294 (3.0, 43) or more Approx. 392 (4.0, 57) or more 5. a. b. After checking, install the oil pressure switch as follows. Remove old sealant adhering to the switch and engine. Apply thread sealant. Tighten switch to specification. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Oil pressure switch : 12 - 17 N·m (1.22 - 1.73 kg-m, 8.8 - 12.5 ft-lb) LU-5 ENGINE OIL [QG18DE] Changing Engine Oil EBS00CGF WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer: try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 2. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap to drain the oil. 4. Remove the oil filter and install a new filter. 5. Install the oil pan drain plug with a new washer. CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean the drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine that the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 6. Fill the engine with oil. Oil specification and viscosity ● Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Oil capacity (Approximate): ● With oil filter change 2.7 (2-7/8 US qt, 2-3/8 Imp qt) Without oil filter change 2.5 (2-5/8 US qt, 2-1/4 Imp qt) 3.1 (3-1/4 US qt, 2-3/4 Imp qt) Drain and refill Dry engine (engine overhaul) 7. 8. 9. Warm up the engine and check the area around the drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Refer to LU-5, "ENGINE OIL" . LU-6 OIL FILTER [QG18DE] OIL FILTER Removal and Installation PFP:15208 A EBS00CGG REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH engine under cover. 2. Using an oil filter wrench, remove the oil filter. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. ● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil leakage or spillage. ● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ● Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. LU C D INSTALLATION 1. 2. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. E F G H SMA010 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. I J K SMA229B 4. 5. 6. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leakage. Check oil level with the dipstick and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to LU-5, "ENGINE OIL" . Install the RH engine under cover. M ALC094 LU-7 L OIL PUMP [QG18DE] OIL PUMP Removal and Installation ● ● ● ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. PFP:15010 EBS00CGH When installing the oil pump, apply clean engine oil to the rotor. Make sure that O-ring seal is fitted properly. Use a scraper to remove the old sealant from the mating surface of the front cover. Also remove all traces of the old sealant from the mating surface of the engine block. Remove the drive belts. Remove the oil pan. Refer to EM-16, "Removal" . Remove the oil strainer. Remove the front cover. Refer to EM-40, "Removal" . Install the front cover, applying a continuous bead of Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent to mating surface of front cover assembly. Refer to LU-2, "LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE" . Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly EBS00CGI WBIA0057E 1. Oil pump cover 2. Inner rotor 3. Outer rotor 4. Front cover 5. Gasket 6. Oil strainer 7. Regulator valve 8. Spring 9. Washer 10. Plug Inspection ● EBS00CGJ Install the oil pump rotors with the punch marks on the oil pump cover side, as shown. JLC307B LU-8 OIL PUMP [QG18DE] ● Using a feeler gauge, check the following clearances. A LU C SEM855F D Standard clearance: Unit: mm (in) Body to outer rotor radial clearance 1 Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance 2 0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079) E Below 0.18 (0.0071) Body to inner rotor clearance 3 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Body to outer rotor axial clearance 4 0.030 - 0.090 (0.0012 - 0.0035) Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 5 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036) F G SEM856F ● ● H If the tip clearance (2) exceeds the limit, replace the rotor set. If the body to rotor clearances (1, 3, 4, 5) exceed the limit, replace the front cover assembly. I J K L M WLC012 LU-9 OIL PUMP [QG18DE] Regulator Valve Inspection 1. 2. 3. EBS00CGK Visually inspect components for wear and damage. Check oil pressure regulator valve sliding surface and valve spring. Coat regulator valve with engine oil. ● Check that the regulator valve falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight and gravity. ● If damaged, replace the regulator valve set or front cover assembly. WLC009 4. Check regulator valve to front cover clearance. Clearance ● : 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in) If the valve exceeds the specification, replace the front cover assembly. SLC101B LU-10 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QG18DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Oil Pressure PFP:00030 A EBS00CGL Approximate discharge pressure Engine speed (rpm) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) LU Idle speed Approx. 98 (1.0, 14) or more 2,000 Approx. 294 (3.0, 43) or more 6,000 Approx. 392 (4.0, 57) or more Oil Pump C EBS00CGM Unit: mm (in) Body to outer rotor radial clearance D 0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079) Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance Below 0.18 (0.0071) Body to inner rotor clearance 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Body to outer rotor axial clearance 0.030 - 0.090 (0.0012 - 0.0035) Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036) Regulator Valve E F EBS00CGN Unit: mm (in) Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance G 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038) Oil Capacity EBS00EYQ Unit: With oil filter change 2.7 (2-7/8, 2-3/8) Without oil filter change 2.5 (2-5/8, 2-1/4) Dry engine (engine overhaul) 3.1 (3-1/4, 2-3/4) (US qt., Imp qt.) H I J K L M LU-11 PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Liquid Gasket PFP:00001 EBS00CGO REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING After removing the mounting bolts and nuts, disconnect and remove the sealant using a seal cutter. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the areas where the sealant is applied. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● PBIC0275E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface. ● Remove the old sealant completely from the groove of the gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Clean the mating surface to remove dirt, moisture, grease, and foreign material. Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . PBIC0003E 4. Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. ● If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the Sealant to the groove. ● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. EMA0622D Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating component. ● If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten after the installation. ● After 30 minutes or more have passed after installation, fill the engine with oil and coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in the service manual, observe them. ● SEM164F LU-12 PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00CGP The actual shape of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Tool name Description ST25051001 (J34301-1) Oil pressure gauge Measuring oil pressure Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25 kg/cm2, 356 psi) LU C D S-NT050 ST25052000 (J34301-2) Hose Adapting oil pressure gauge to cylinder block E F S-NT559 KV10115801 (J37140-A) Oil filter wrench Removing and installing oil filter G H I S-NT772 WS39930000 (-) Tube presser Pressing the tube of RTV Silicone Sealant J K S-NT052 L M LU-13 LUBRICATION SYSTEM [QR25DE] LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Circuit PFP:15010 EBS00CGQ PBIC0247E LU-14 LUBRICATION SYSTEM [QR25DE] System Drawing EBS00CGR A LU C D E F G H PBIC0248E I J K L M LU-15 ENGINE OIL [QR25DE] ENGINE OIL Inspection PFP:KLA92 EBS00CGS OIL LEVEL AND MUDINESS ● ● ● ● ● Ensure the vehicle is on a level surface with engine off, then check the oil level. If the engine is already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking. Check that the oil level is within the range shown in the figure and adjust if necessary. If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Check the oil for white turbidity or remarkable contamination. If the oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with coolant. Diagnose the problem and correct as necessary. PBIC0249E OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas. ● Oil pan ● Oil pan drain plug ● Oil pressure switch ● Oil filter ● IVTC (intake valve timing control) cover ● Front cover ● Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head ● Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover ● Crankshaft oil seal OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. ● For M/T models, put gearshift lever in Neutral position. For A/T models, put selector lever in Park "P" position. 1. Check the oil level. 2. Remove the under cover. 3. Remove the oil pressure switch to connect the oil pressure gauge. 4. After warming up the engine to the normal operating temperature, check that oil pressure corresponding to the engine speed is produced. WCIA0001E Engine oil pressure [Oil temperature is 80 °C (176 °F)] Engine speed (rpm) 2 Engine pressure kPa (kg/cm , psi) 5. a. b. Idle speed 2,000 6,000 Approx. 98 (1.0, 14) or more Approx. 294 (3.0, 43) or more Approx. 392 (4.0, 57) or more After checking, install the oil pressure switch as follows: Remove the old thread sealant adhering to the switch and engine. Apply thread sealant. Tighten the switch to specification. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Oil pressure switch : 12.3 - 17.2 N·m (1.25 - 1.75 kg-m, 10 - 12 ft-lb) LU-16 ENGINE OIL [QR25DE] Changing Engine Oil EBS00CGT WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer: try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap to drain the oil. 4. Remove the oil filter and replace it with a new oil filter. 5. Install the oil drain plug using a new washer. Oil pan drain plug 6. A LU C D PBIC0250E : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) CAUTION: ● Clean the oil drain plug and install with a new washer. Fill the engine with the specified oil. ● Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Oil capacity (Approximate): With oil filter change 4.0 (4-1/4 US qt, 3-1/2 Imp qt) Without oil filter change 3.8 (4 US qt, 3-3/8 Imp qt) 4.5 (4-3/4 US qt, 4 Imp qt) Drain and refill Dry engine (engine overhaul) The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ● Always use the dipstick to the determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Warm up the engine and check the area around the oil drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the oil level using the dipstick. Refer to LU-16, "ENGINE OIL" . ● 7. 8. 9. E F G H I J K L M LU-17 OIL FILTER [QR25DE] OIL FILTER Removal and Installation PFP:15208 EBS00CGU REMOVAL 1. Open the oil filter installation/removal access cover on the RH engine under cover. 2. Using an oil filter wrench, remove the oil filter. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. ● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil leakage or spillage. ● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ● Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. KBIA0303E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Remove foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface. Apply a thin coating of engine oil to the oil seal surface of the new oil filter. SMA010 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface and then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten the oil filter to the correct specification. Oil filter : 14.7 - 20.5 N·m (1.5 - 2.1 kg-m, 11 - 15 ft-lb) SMA229B 4. 5. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leakage. Check the oil level and adjust the engine oil level as necessary. Refer to LU-16, "ENGINE OIL" . ALC094 LU-18 OIL PUMP [QR25DE] OIL PUMP Removal and Installation 1. 2. PFP:15010 A EBS00CGV To remove the oil pump, remove the front cover. Refer to EM-131, "TIMING CHAIN" . ● Only perform the steps necessary to remove the front cover. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly LU EBS00CGW C D E F G H KBIA0153E 1. Front cover 2. Outer rotor 3. Inner rotor 4. Oil pump cover 5. Regulator valve 6. Regulator valve spring 7. Regulator plug I J CAUTION: Before installation, apply new engine oil to the parts as instructed in the figure. K DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove the oil pump cover. Remove the inner rotor and the outer rotor from the front cover. After removing the regulator plug, remove the regulator valve spring and the regulator valve. L INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY 1. Measuring the internal clearance of the oil pump components. ● Measure the clearance with a feeler gauge. Clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 1): Standard clearance M : 0.114 - 0.179 mm (0.0045 - 0.0070 in) Tip clearance between inner rotor and outer rotor (position 2): Standard clearance : Less than 0.220 mm (0.0087 in) SLC932A LU-19 OIL PUMP [QR25DE] ● Measure clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge. Side clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body (position 3): Standard clearance ● : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) Side clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 4): Standard clearance : 0.060 - 0.110 mm (0.0024 - 0.0043 in) PBIC0252E Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body as follows. Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor (Position 5). ● 2. PBIC0253E 3. Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with an inside micrometer (Position 6). (Clearance) = (Inner diameter of oil pump body) – (Outer diameter of inner rotor): Standard clearance : 0.035 - 0.070 mm (0.0014 - 0.0028 in) PBIC0254E 4. Measure the regulator valve clearance. (Clearance) = D1(Valve hole diameter) – D2 (Outer diameter of valve): ● Standard clearance : 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in) CAUTION: Coat the regulator valve with engine oil. Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. KBIA0043E LU-20 OIL PUMP [QR25DE] ASSEMBLY ● ● A Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Install the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punched marks on the oil pump cover side. LU C PBIC0255E D E F G H I J K L M LU-21 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Oil Pressure PFP:00030 EBS00CGX Approximate discharge pressure Engine speed (rpm) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Idle speed Approx. 98 (1.0, 14) or more 2,000 Approx. 294 (3.0, 43) or more 6,000 Approx. 392 (4.0, 57) or more Oil Pump EBS00CGY Unit: mm (in) Body to outer rotor radial clearance 0.114 - 0.179 (0.0045-0.0070) Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance Less than 0.220 (0.0087) Body to inner rotor axial clearance 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Body to outer rotor axial clearance 0.060 - 0.110 (0.0024 - 0.0043) Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 0.035 - 0.070 (0.0014 - 0.0028) Regulator Valve EBS00CGZ Unit: mm (in) Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038) Oil Capacity EBS00CH0 Unit: With oil filter change Approximately 4.0 (4-1/4, 3-1/2) Without oil filter change Approximately 3.8 (4, 3-3/8) Dry engine (engine overhaul) Approximately 4.5 (4-3/4, 4) LU-22 (US qt., Imp qt.) L MAINTENANCE A SECTION MAINTENANCE B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE ....................................... 5 Explanation of General Maintenance ....................... 5 General Maintenance ............................................... 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................... 7 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ....................... 7 Schedule 1 ............................................................... 7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 7 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............... 9 Schedule 2 ..............................................................11 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................11 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............. 12 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 13 Fluids and Lubricants ............................................. 13 SAE Viscosity Number ........................................... 14 Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio .......................... 14 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) ........ 16 Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 16 Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 16 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 16 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ........................ 17 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 19 Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 19 Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 19 Changing Engine Oil .............................................. 20 Changing Oil Filter ................................................. 20 Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum - Tipped Type) ...................................................................... 21 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 22 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) ........ 23 Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 23 Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 23 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT .......................... 23 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 24 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 25 Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 25 Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 26 Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 26 Changing Oil Filter .................................................. 27 Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum - Tipped Type) ....................................................................... 28 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 29 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ................... 30 Checking Exhaust System ...................................... 30 Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks ................. 30 Checking M/T Oil .................................................... 30 Changing M/T Oil .................................................... 30 Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 31 Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 31 Balancing Wheels ................................................... 32 Tire Rotation ........................................................... 32 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks .................. 32 Checking Brake Lines and Cables ......................... 32 Changing Brake Fluid ............................................. 33 Checking Disc Brakes ............................................ 33 ROTOR ............................................................... 33 CALIPER ............................................................. 33 PAD ..................................................................... 34 Checking Drum Brake ............................................ 34 WHEEL CYLINDER ............................................ 34 DRUM .................................................................. 34 LINING ................................................................ 34 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ..................... 35 STEERING GEAR ............................................... 35 STEERING LINKAGE .......................................... 35 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines .............. 35 CHECKING FLUID LEVEL .................................. 35 CHECKING LINES .............................................. 35 Axle and Suspension Parts .................................... 36 Drive Shaft .............................................................. 37 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches ........ 37 Checking Seat Belt, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors MA-1 E F G H I J K MA M and Adjusters .......................................................... 38 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 39 Engine Maintenance (QG18DE) ............................. 39 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION ................... 39 SPARK PLUGS (DOUBLE PLATINUM - TIPPED)... 39 Engine Maintenance (QR25DE) ............................. 39 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION ...................39 SPARK PLUGS (DOUBLE PLATINUM - TIPPED) ...39 Chassis and Body Maintenance .............................39 WHEEL BALANCE ..............................................39 MA-2 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ELS000IF The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. B C D E F G H I J K MA M MA-3 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 ELS000IG The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV10115801 (J-37140-A) Oil filter cap wrench Removing oil filter a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in) NT375 Commercial Service Tool ELS000IH Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Belt tension gauge (BT3373-F) Checking drive belt tension of QG18DE engine AMA126 Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plugs S-NT047 (J-45695) Coolant refill tool Refilling engine coolant LMA053 MA-4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE Explanation of General Maintenance General Maintenance PFP:00000 A ELS000II ELS000IJ General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform checks and inspections themselves or they can have their NISSAN dealers do them. C OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Item Tires Wheel nuts Check the pressure including the spare, at least once a month and always prior to a long distance trip. Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Reference page E MA-32, "Tire Rotation" Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary. Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles). MA-32, "Tire Rotation" Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" and MA-32, "Balancing Wheels" Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. D WT-6, "Tire" Windshield Windshield wiper blades B — — Doors and engine hood Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid and back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. MA-37, "Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches" Lamps Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlamp aim. Clean the headlamps on a regular basis. — F G H I J K INSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Item Reference page Warning lamps and buzzers/chimes Make sure that all warning lamps and buzzers/chimes are operating properly. — Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. — Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioning. — Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Free play: Less than 35 mm (1.38 in) — Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches lock securely for folding-down rear seat backs. — Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. SB-7, "Seat Belt Inspection" Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. — Seats MA M MA-5 GENERAL MAINTENANCE Item Clutch pedal Reference page Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play. CL-7, "CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT" Brakes Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. — Brake pedal and booster Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal. BR-12, "BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT" and BR-16, "OPERATING CHECK" Parking brake Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. PB-2, "Inspection" Automatic transaxle “Park” mechanism Check that the lock release button on the selector lever operates properly and smoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the “P” position without applying any brakes. — UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Item Reference page QG18DE Windshield washer fluid Engine coolant level A/C condenser, radiator and hoses Brake and clutch fluid levels Battery Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. QR25DE — CO-8, "CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL" CO-26, "CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL" Check the front of the condenser and radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the radiator hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. — Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoirs. MA-32, "Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks" and MA-30, "Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks" Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. — Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" Engine oil level Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. LU-5, "Inspection" LU-16, "Inspection" Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir with the engine off. Check the lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. MA-35, "Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines" Automatic transaxle fluid level Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the engine idling. Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. MA-30, "Checking Exhaust System" The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt can easily accumulate. — Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and correct it immediately. — Engine drive belts Underbody Fluid leaks MA-6 MA-31, "Checking A/T Fluid" PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PERIODIC MAINTENANCE Introduction of Periodic Maintenance PFP:00026 A ELS000IK Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently includes one or more of the following driving conditions: Schedule 1 ● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. ● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. ● Driving in dusty conditions. ● Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. ● Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier. Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits. Emission Control System Maintenance MA-7, "Emission Control System Maintenance" Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-9, "Chassis and Body Maintenance" Emission Control System Maintenance MA-11, "Emission Control System Maintenance" Schedule 2 Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-12, "Chassis and Body Maintenance" Schedule 1 Abbreviations: R = Replace. MAINTENANCE OPERATION D E F G H I J I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Reference Section Page or - Content Title Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Drive belt NOTE (1) MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" NOTE (2) [R] MA-19, "Changing Air Cleaner Filter" MA-26, "Changing Air Cleaner Filter" I* MA-22, "Checking EVAP Vapor Lines" MA-29, "Checking EVAP Vapor Lines" I* MA-19, "Checking Fuel Lines" MA-25, "Checking Fuel Lines" 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter C ELS000IL EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Air cleaner filter B NOTE (3) 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 QG18DE QR25DE MA — MA-7 K M PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Engine coolant NOTE (4) Engine oil MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 3.75 (6) 3 R 7.5 (12) 6 R 11.25 (18) 9 R 15 (24) 12 R 18.75 (30) 15 R 22.5 (36) 18 R Reference Section Page or - Content Title 26.25 (42) 21 R 30 (48) 24 QG18DE QR25DE MA-16, "Changing Engine Coolant" MA-23, "Changing Engine Coolant" R MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" MA-26, "Changing Engine Oil" — Engine oil filter (Use part No. 1520865F01, 15208-9E000 or equiv.) R R R R R R R R MA-20, "Changing Oil Filter" Engine oil filter (Use part No. 152089E000 or equiv.) R R R R R R R R — MA-27, "Changing Oil Filter" MA-21, "Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped Type)" MA-28, "Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped Type)" EM-35, "Valve Clearance" — Spark plugs (Double PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake and exhaust valve clearance Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km) NOTE (5)* Abbreviations: R = Replace. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Drive belt NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 QG18DE QR25DE I* MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" [R] MA-19, "Changing Air Cleaner Filter" MA-26, "Changing Air Cleaner Filter" EVAP vapor lines I* MA-22, "Checking EVAP Vapor Lines" MA-29, "Checking EVAP Vapor Lines" Fuel lines I* MA-19, "Checking Fuel Lines" MA-25, "Checking Fuel Lines" Fuel filter NOTE (3) — MA-8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Engine coolant NOTE (4) MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 A QG18DE QR25DE R* MA-16, "Changing Engine Coolant" MA-23, "Changing Engine Coolant" C B Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" MA-26, "Changing Engine Oil" D Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-65F01, 15208-9E000 or equiv.) R R R R R R R R MA-20, "Changing Oil Filter" — E Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-9E000 or equiv.) R R R R R R R R — MA-27, "Changing Oil Filter" MA-21, "Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped Type)" MA-28, "Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped Type)" EM-35, "Valve Clearance" — Spark plugs (Double PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake and exhaust valve clearance Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km) NOTE (5)* (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. ● (3) Maintenance-free item. ● (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. ● (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. L = Lubricate. Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 J MA CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months H K Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. MAINTENANCE OPERATION G I NOTE: ● (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belt if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading (for QR25DE engine) reaches the maximum limit. ● F 11.25 (18) 9 Brake lines & cables 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 I 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 Reference Section Page or Content Title I MA-32 Brake pads, rotors, drums & linings (QG18DE) I I I I MA-33 and MA-34 Brake pads & rotors (QR25DE) I I I I MA-33 MA-9 M PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Manual transaxle oil or automatic transaxle fluid NOTE (1) MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 I Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Reference Section Page or Content Title I MA-30 or MA-31 MA-35, MA36 I I I I Front drive shaft boots I I I I MA-37 Exhaust system I I I I MA-30 R MTC-77 Tire rotation NOTE (2) MA-32 In-cabin microfilter R Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. L = Lubricate. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 Brake lines & cables 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 I 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or Content Title I MA-32 Brake pads, rotors, drums & linings (QG18DE) I I I I MA-33 and MA34 Brake pads & rotors (QR25DE) I I I I MA-33 I MA-30 or MA31 I MA-35, MA-36 Manual transaxle oil or automatic transaxle fluid NOTE (1) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation I I I I NOTE (2) MA-32 Front drive shaft boots I I I I MA-37 Exhaust system I I I I MA-30 R MTC-77 In-cabin microfilter R NOTE: ● (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil (exc. LSD) at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, and change LSD gear oil every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. ● (2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “GENERAL MAINTENANCE” heading earlier in this section. MA-10 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE Schedule 2 ELS000IM A EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Drive belt I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 Reference Section Page or - Content Title 52.5 (84) 42 NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter [R] EVAP vapor lines I* Fuel lines I* Fuel filter NOTE (2) Engine coolant NOTE (3) 60 (96) 48 QG18DE QR25DE C I* MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" [R] MA-19, "Changing Air Cleaner Filter" MA-26, "Changing Air Cleaner Filter" I* MA-22, "Checking EVAP Vapor Lines" MA-29, "Checking EVAP Vapor Lines" MA-19, "Checking Fuel Lines" MA-25, "Checking Fuel Lines" I* B D E F G H — R* MA-16, "Changing Engine Coolant" MA-23, "Changing Engine Coolant" I Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" MA-26, "Changing Engine Oil" Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-65F01, 152089E000 or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R MA-20, "Changing Oil Filter" — K Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-9E000 or equiv.) R R R R R R R R — MA-26, "Changing Engine Oil" MA MA-21, "Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped Type)" MA-28, "Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped Type)" EM-35, "Valve Clearance" — Spark plugs (Double PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Intake and exhaust valve clearance) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km) NOTE (4)* NOTE: Replace the drive belt if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit. ● (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belt if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading (for QR25DE engine) reaches the maximum limit. ● (2) Maintenance-free item. ● (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. ● (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. MA-11 J M PERIODIC MAINTENANCE Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 L = Lubricate. Reference Section - Page or Content Title Brake lines & cables I I I I MA-32 Brake pads, rotors, drums & linings (QG18DE) I I I I MA-33, MA-34 Brake pads & rotors (QR25DE) I I I I MA-33 Manual transaxle oil or automatic transaxle fluid I I I I MA-30 or MA-31 Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation Front drive shaft boots I NOTE (1) MA-35, MA-36 MA-32 I Exhaust system In-cabin microfilter I I I I R R R NOTE: ● (1) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “GENERAL MAINTENANCE” heading earlier in this section. MA-12 I MA-37 I MA-30 R MTC-77 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids and Lubricants Imp measure Liter 13 1/4 gal 11 gal 50 With oil filter change 2 7/8 qt 2 3/8 qt 2.7 Without oil filter change 2 5/8 qt 2 1/4 qt 2.5 3 1/4 qt 2 3/4 qt 3.1 ● Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent Dry engine (engine overhaul) Manual transaxle fluid (MTF) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants US measure Fuel Cooling system (with reservoir) A ELS000IN Capacity (Approximate) QG18DE Engine oil Drain and refill PFP:00000 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) ● API Certification Mark *1 ● API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *1 7 1/8 qt 5 7/8 qt 6.7 A/T 7 qt 5 7/8 qt 6.6 3 1/8 qt 2 5/8 qt 3.0 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ multi 75W-85 7 3/8 qt 6 1/8 qt 7.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic “D” ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *2 1 1/8 qt 7/8 qt 1.0 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *4 Brake and clutch fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*3 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-Freeze or equivalent 0.99 - 1.21 lb 0.99 - 1.21 lb 0.45 - 0.55 kg 6.1 fl oz 6.3 fl oz Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) RE4F03B Power steering fluid (PSF) Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricant 180 m HFC-134a (R-134a) *5 NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type R or equivalent *5 *1: For further details, see “SAE Viscosity Number”. *2: DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM , or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM Automatic Transmission Fluid. *3: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer. *4: For Canada, Genuine NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), used. *5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”. DEXRONTM III / MERCON TM Engine oil Drain and refill Imp measure Liter 13 1/4 gal 11 gal 50 With oil filter change 4 1/4 qt 3 1/2 qt 4.0 Without oil filter change 4 qt 3 3/8 qt 3.8 4 3/4 qt 4 qt M/T 7 3/16 qt A/T RS6F51H Dry engine (engine overhaul) Cooling system (with reservoir) Manual transaxle fluid (MTF) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) ● API Certification Mark *1 ● API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*1 4.5 ● ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III *1 6 qt 6.8 7 1/8 qt 5 7/8 qt 6.7 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent 2 3/8 qt 2 qt 2.2 MA-13 E F G H I J K MA M US measure Fuel D or equivalent ATF may also be Capacity (Approximate) QR25DE C ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III *1 M/T RS5F70A B Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ multi 75W-85 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Capacity (Approximate) QR25DE Recommended Fluids/Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter 9.0 qt 7.5 qt 8.5 Genuine NISSAN Matic “D” ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *2 1 1/8 qt 7/8 qt 1.0 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *4 Brake and clutch fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*3 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Brake grease (OPB27VA type) — — — Molykote AS88ON Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-Freeze or equivalent 0.99 - 1.21 lb 0.99 - 1.21 lb 0.45 - 0.55 kg 6.1 fl oz 6.3 fl oz Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) RE4F04B Power steering fluid (PSF) Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricant 180 m HFC-134a (R-134a) *5 NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type R or equivalent *5 *1: For further details, see “SAE Viscosity Number”. *2: DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM , or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an authorized NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM Automatic Transmission Fluid. *3: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your authorized NISSAN dealer. *4: For Canada, Genuine NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON TM III / MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used. *5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”. SAE Viscosity Number ELS000IO SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above −18°C (0°F). NOTE: Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy. MMA117AA Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio ELS000IP The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. MA-14 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Maximum outside temperature °C °F -35 -30 Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent Demineralized water or distilled water 50% 50% CAUTION: ● When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-Freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio. ● The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage the engine cooling system. A B C D E F G H I J K MA M MA-15 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) Checking Drive Belts PFP:10001 ELS000IQ LMA011 1. 2. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear and oil. If necessary, replace. Inspect drive belt deflection or tension at a point on the belt midway between pulleys. ● Check belt tension using Belt Tension Gauge BT3373-F or equivalent. Refer to MA-39, "BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION" . ● Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. Adjust if belt deflection exceeds the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. Changing Engine Coolant ELS000IR WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. ● ● Set climate control system as follows to prevent coolant from remaining in the system. Turn ignition switch “ON” and set temperature controller to maximum hot position. Wait 10 seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". MA-16 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) 2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove radiator filler cap. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts. A B C D E F G LLIA0008E 3. Remove cylinder block drain plug and air relief plug. H I J LMA013 K MA M LMA014 4. Check drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated, flush engine cooling system. Refer to MA-19, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" . REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank and cylinder block drain plug, if removed for a total system drain for engine removal or repair. ● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. ● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Cylinder block drain plug : 34.3 - 44.1 N·m (3.5 - 4.5 kg-m, 26 - 32 ft-lb) MA-17 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) 2. 3. 4. 5. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. ● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-Freeze Coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. Refer to MA-14, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio". Coolant capacity (without reservoir tank) M/T : 6.0 (6-3/8 US qt, 5-1/4 Imp qt) A/T : 5.9 (6-1/4 US qt, 5-1/4 Imp qt) Reservoir tank capacity (for MAX level) 6. 8. (3/4 US qt, 5/8 Imp qt) Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure 7. : 0.7 : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 , 80 - 120 psi) LLIA0058E CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level 0 - 100 m (328 ft) 300 m (984 ft) 500 m (1,641 ft) 1,000 m (3,281 ft) Vacuum gauge reading : 28 inches of vacuum : 27 inches of vacuum : 26 inches of vacuum : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum LLIA0057E 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. MA-18 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open air relief plug. Fill radiator with water until water spills from the air relief hole, then close air relief plug. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap. Run engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev engine two or three times under no-load. Stop engine and wait until it cools down. Drain water. Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from radiator. Checking Fuel Lines ● ELS000IS A B C D Inspect fuel lines and tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. E F G SMA803A ● H If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts. I J MMA104A Changing Air Cleaner Filter K ELS000IT Unfasten clamps to change air cleaner filter. MA M LLIA0010E MA-19 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) Changing Engine Oil ELS000IU WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 2. Stop engine. 3. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap. SMA076D 4. Drain oil and refill with new engine oil. Oil pan drain plug : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) Oil Specification and Viscosity ● Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Oil Capacity (Approximate) Unit: Drain and refill (US qt., Imp qt.) With oil filter change 2.7 (2-7/8, 2-3/8) Without oil filter change 2.5 (2-5/8, 2-1/4) Dry engine (engine overhaul) 3.1 (3-1/4, 2-3/4) CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. Stop engine. Check oil level. ● 5. 6. 7. LMA026 Changing Oil Filter 1. ELS000IV Remove oil filter with Tool. WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot. NOTE: The filter is a full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve. LMA018 MA-20 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) 2. Clean oil filter mounting surface on cylinder block. Coat rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil. A B C SMA010 D 3. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. E F G SMA702C 4. Add engine oil. Refer to MA-20, "Changing Engine Oil" . ● Clean excess oil from engine. H Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum - Tipped Type) 1. 2. ELS000IW I Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors. Remove ignition coils. J K MA LMA020 3. Remove spark plugs with spark plug socket. M Spark Plug Type Hot type PLFR4A-11 Standard type PLFR5A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 Gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. ● The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: – Frequent engine starts – Low ambient temperatures ● The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: – Extended highway driving – Frequent high engine revolution MA-21 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QG18DE ENGINE) CAUTION: Do not use wire brush for cleaning. If plug is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time : Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) : less than 20 seconds SMA673B ● Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. SMA806CA 4. Install spark plugs. Spark plug 5. : 20 - 29 N·m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb) Install ignition coils and ignition wires. Ignition coil : 3.8 - 5.0 N·m (0.38 - 0.51 kg-m, 33 - 44 in-lb) Checking EVAP Vapor Lines 1. 2. ELS000IX Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. Inspect vacuum relief valve of fuel tank filler cap for clogging, sticking, etc. Refer to EC-625, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)" (QG18DE) or EC-1308, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" (QR25DE). MA-22 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) Checking Drive Belts PFP:10001 A ELS000IY B C D E F G H I LLIA0007E WARNING: J Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. ● Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each automatic tensioner is within the allowable working range (between three notches). K NOTE: ● Check the automatic tensioner indicator when the engine is cold. ● The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the tensioner. MA ● Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. ● If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. ● Belt tensioning is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by auto belt tensioner. M Changing Engine Coolant ELS000IZ WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove radiator filler cap. LBIA0063E MA-23 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) When draining all the coolant in the system, also perform the following two steps: 1. Remove cylinder block drain plug and air relief plug. KBIA0163E 2. Check drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated, flush engine cooling system. Refer to MA-25, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" . REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Install the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank and cylinder block drain plug, if removed for a total system drain for engine removal or repair. ● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. ● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Radiator drain plug Cylinder block drain plug 2. 3. 4. 5. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. ● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-Freeze Coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. Refer to MA-14, "Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio". Coolant capacity (Without reservoir tank) Reservoir tank capacity (for MAX level) 6. : 7.8 - 11.8 N·m (0.8 - 1.2 kg-m , 69 - 104 in-lb) : 34 - 44 N·m (3.5 - 4.5 kg-m, 25 - 33 ft-lb) : M/T 6.1 (6-1/2 US qt, 5-3/8 Imp qt) A/T 6.0 (6-3/8 US qt, 5-1/4 Imp qt) : 0.7 (3/4 US qt, 5/8 Imp qt) Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure 2 : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm , 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. MA-24 LLIA0058E ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) 7. 8. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level 0 - 100 m (328 ft) 300 m (984 ft) 500 m (1,641 ft) 1,000 m (3,281 ft) A B C Vacuum gauge reading : 28 inches of vacuum : 27 inches of vacuum : 26 inches of vacuum : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum D LLIA0057E When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. E 9. F G H I FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap. Run engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev engine two or three times under no-load. Stop engine and wait until it cools down. Drain water. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from radiator. Checking Fuel Lines ● J K ELS000J0 MA Inspect fuel lines and tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. M SMA803A MA-25 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts. ● MMA104A Changing Air Cleaner Filter ELS000J1 Unfasten clamps to change air cleaner filter. ● The viscous paper-type filter does not need cleaning. LLIA0010E Changing Engine Oil ELS000J2 WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 2. Stop engine. 3. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap. LLIA0011E 4. Drain oil and refill with new engine oil. Oil Specification and Viscosity ● Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Oil Capacity (Approximate) Unit: Drain and refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Dry engine (engine overhaul) (US qt., Imp qt.) 4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2) 3.8 (4, 3 3/8) 4.5 (4 3/4, 4) CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. Stop engine. ● 5. 6. MA-26 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) 7. Check oil level. A B C SMA390C D Changing Oil Filter ELS000J3 1. Remove oil filter with Tool. WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot. NOTE: The filter is a full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve. E F G LLIA0012E H 2. Clean oil filter mounting surface on cylinder block. Coat rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil. I J K SMA010 3. 4. ● MA Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. Add engine oil.Refer to MA-26, "Changing Engine Oil" . Clean excess oil from engine. M SMA702C MA-27 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) Changing Spark Plugs (Double Platinum - Tipped Type) 1. ELS000J4 Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors. LLIA0013E 2. 3. Remove ignition coils. Remove spark plugs with spark plug socket. Spark Plug Type Hot type PLFR4A-11 Standard type PLFR5A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 Gap (Nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. ● The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: – Frequent engine starts – Low ambient temperatures ● The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: – Extended highway driving – Frequent high engine revolution CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure : Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) Cleaning time : Less than 20 seconds SMA673B ● 4. Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Install spark plugs. Spark plug 5. : 20 - 29 N·m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb) Install ignition coils and reconnect ignition wires according to numbers indicated on them. Ignition coils : 5.4 - 7.3 N·m (0.55 - 0.73 kg-m, 46 - 64 in-lb) SMA806CA MA-28 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) Checking EVAP Vapor Lines 1. 2. ELS000J5 Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. Inspect vacuum relief valve of fuel tank filler cap for clogging, sticking, etc. Refer to EC-1308, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . A B C D E F G H I J K MA M MA-29 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking Exhaust System PFP:00000 ELS000J6 Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. SMA211A Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks ELS000J7 If fluid level is extremely low, check clutch system for leaks. SMA449C Checking M/T Oil ELS000J8 1. Check that oil is not leaking from transaxle or around it. 2. Check oil level. Never start engine while checking oil level. Filler plug RS5F70A (QG18DE) RS6F51H, (QR25DE) : 10 - 19 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 173 in-lb) : 30 - 39 N·m (3.1 - 4.0 kg-m, 23 - 28 lb-ft) SMA066C Changing M/T Oil 1. ELS000J9 Drain oil from drain plug and refill with new gear oil. SMA145AA MA-30 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 2. Check oil level. Oil grade and viscosity Capacity Drain plug A : Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . : RS5F70A (QG18DE) 3.0 (3 1/8 US qt, 2 5/8 Imp qt) RS6F51H (QR25DE) 2.2 (2 3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt) : RS5F70A (QG18DE) 10 - 19 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 173 in-lb) RS6F51H (QR25DE) 30 - 39 N·m (3.1 - 4.0 kg-m, 23 - 28 ft-lb) B C SMA066C D E Checking A/T Fluid ELS000JA 1. 2. 3. Check for fluid leakage. Warm up engine. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30 - 50°C (86 - 122°F) using “COLD” range on dipstick. a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake. b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. c. Check fluid level with engine idling. d. Remove dipstick and note reading. If level is at low side of either range, add fluid to the charging pipe. SMA827CA e. Re-insert dipstick into charging pipe as far as it will go. f. Remove dipstick and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add fluid to the charging pipe. Do not overfill. 4. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. 5. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) using “HOT” range on dipstick. 6. Check fluid condition. ● If fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to AT-63, "FLUID CONDITION CHECK" . Flush cooling system after repair of A/T. ● If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR" . SMA853B Changing A/T Fluid 1. 2. 3. ELS000JB Warm up A/T fluid. Stop engine. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid. Always refill same volume with drained fluid. Fluid grade : NISSAN Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid. Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . SMA027D MA-31 F G H I J K MA M CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 4. 5. Fluid capacity (With torque converter) : RE4F03B (QG18DE) 7.0 (7-3/8 US qt, 6-1/8 Imp qt) RE4F04B (QR25DE) 8.5 (9.0 US qt, 7-1/2 Imp qt) Drain plug : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) Run engine at idle speed for five minutes. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-31, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. Balancing Wheels ELS000JC Adjust wheel balance using the road wheel center. Wheel balance (maximum allowable unbalance) : Refer to MA-32, "Balancing Wheels" . Tire Rotation ● ● ● ELS000JD After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) or any time the wheel and tire assembly has been removed and installed. Tighten wheel nuts in a criss-cross pattern to specification, making several passes. Wheel nuts : 98 - 127 N·m (10 - 12 kg-m, 73 - 93 ft-lb) SMA829C Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks ● ● ● ELS000JE Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank. If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system for leaks. SBR451D Checking Brake Lines and Cables ELS000JF CAUTION: If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration and other damage. Replace damaged parts. 2. Check for oil leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while engine is running. SBR389C MA-32 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Changing Brake Fluid ELS000JG CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . ● Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleeder valve. 3. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 4. Refill until brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill brake fluid. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . A B C D E F SBR419C Checking Disc Brakes G ELS000JH ROTOR H Check condition, wear, and damage. Refer to BR-22, "DISC ROTOR INSPECTION" (CL25VA/CL25VB) and BR-27, "DISC ROTOR INSPECTION" (OPB27VA) for front disc brake and BR-34, "DISC ROTOR INSPECTION" for rear disc brake. I J K SMA260A CALIPER Check for leakage. Refer to Refer to BR-21, "CALIPER INSPECTION" (CL25VA/CL25VB) and BR-27, "CALIPER INSPECTION" (OPB27VA) for front disc brake and BR-33, "CALIPER INSPECTION" for rear disc brake. MA M SMA922A MA-33 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE PAD Check condition and thickness. Refer to BR-19, "PAD WEAR INSPECTION" (CL25VA/CL25VB), BR-23, "PAD WEAR INSPECTION" (OPB27VA) for front disk brake and BR-29, "PAD WEAR INSPECTION" for rear disc brake. BRA0010D Checking Drum Brake ELS000JI WHEEL CYLINDER Check operation and for leakage. Refer to BR-40, "WHEEL CYLINDER" . SBR205A DRUM Check condition of inner surface. Refer to BR-40, "DRUM" . SMA848B LINING Measure wear and check for damage. Refer to BR-40, "LINING" . SMA849B MA-34 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ELS000JJ A STEERING GEAR ● ● Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and grease leakage. Check connection with steering column for looseness. B C D SLIA0014E STEERING LINKAGE ● E Check ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage. Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines ELS000JK CHECKING FLUID LEVEL F Check fluid level with engine off. ● Use the correct range of the tank depending on the fluid temperature. Use “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F). Use “COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0 30°C (32 - 86°F). CAUTION: ● Do not overfill. ● Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● G H I WGIA0107E CHECKING LINES ● ● J Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid. K MA M WST032 MA-35 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Axle and Suspension Parts ELS000JL Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear, or other damage. ● Shake each wheel to check for excessive play. ● Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise. SMA525A ● Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness. SMA614 SFA307B ● ● Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage. Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. SFA392B MA-36 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Drive Shaft ● ELS000JM A Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and grease leakage. B C D SFA108A Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches ELS000JN E F G H I J LMA027 K MA M MA-37 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking Seat Belt, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters ELS000JO LLIA0020E MA-38 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Maintenance (QG18DE) PFP:00030 A ELS000JP BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION Component Deflection adjustment Unit: mm (in) Tension adjustment *1 Unit: N (kg, lb) Used Belt Generator Used Belt After Adjustment New Belt Limit With air conditioner compressor 8.1 (0.319) 5.3 - 5.7 (0.209 - 0.244) Without air conditioner compressor 10.2 (0.402) Power steering oil pump 7.1 (0.280) Applied pushing force B After Adjustment New Belt Limit 4.5 - 5.0 (0.177- 0.197) 292 (30, 66) 652 - 740 (66.5 - 75.5, 146.6 - 166.4) 789 - 877 (80.5 - 89.5, 177.4 - 197.1) D 6.5 - 7.0 (0.256 - 0.276) 5.5 - 6.1 (0.217 - 0.240) 292 (30, 60) 652 - 740 (66.5 - 75.5, 146.6 - 166.4) 789 - 877 (80.5 - 89.5, 177.4 - 197.1) E 4.4 - 4.9 (0.173 - 0.193) 3.9 - 4.4 (0.154 - 0.173) 196 (20, 44) 495 - 583 (50.5 -59.5, 111.4 - 131.2) 603- 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.5) 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) C F — *1: If the belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check belt tension at a different location on the belt. G SPARK PLUGS (DOUBLE PLATINUM - TIPPED) Type Standard PLFR5A-11 Hot PLFR4A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 Plug gap H Nominal: 1.1 mm (0.043 in) I Engine Maintenance (QR25DE) ELS000JQ BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION Tension of drive belts J Auto-adjustment by auto tensioner SPARK PLUGS (DOUBLE PLATINUM - TIPPED) Type Standard PLFR5A-11 Hot PLFR4A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 Plug gap MA Nominal: 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Chassis and Body Maintenance ELS000JR WHEEL BALANCE Maximum allowable unbalance K Dynamic (At rim flange) Static g (oz) g (oz) 10 (0.35) (one side) 20 (0.71) MA-39 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) MA-40 C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE A SECTION MANUAL TRANSAXLE B MT D CONTENTS RS5F70A PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions .............................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 6 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 8 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 8 DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 9 Cross-sectional View ................................................ 9 DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER ...................... 9 M/T OIL ..................................................................... 10 Replacement .......................................................... 10 DRAINING ........................................................... 10 FILLING ............................................................... 10 Checking ................................................................ 10 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ......................... 10 SIDE OIL SEAL .........................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 POSITION SWITCH .................................................. 12 Position Switch Check ............................................ 12 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH .................................. 12 PNP SWITCH ...................................................... 12 CONTROL LINKAGE ............................................... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 TRANSAXLE GEAR CONTROL ......................... 13 STRIKING ROD OIL SEAL ................................. 14 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ........................................ 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 15 REMOVAL ........................................................... 15 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 Component Parts ................................................... 18 CASE COMPONENTS ........................................ 18 GEAR COMPONENTS ....................................... 19 SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS .................... 20 FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS ........................... 21 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 21 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 21 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 28 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS .................................... 38 Disassembly ........................................................... 38 Inspection ............................................................... 39 GEAR AND SHAFT ............................................. 39 SYNCHRONIZERS ............................................. 40 BEARING ............................................................ 41 Assembly ................................................................ 41 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS ....................................... 45 Disassembly ........................................................... 45 Inspection ............................................................... 47 GEAR AND SHAFT ............................................. 47 SYNCHRONIZERS ............................................. 47 BEARING ............................................................ 48 Assembly ................................................................ 49 FINAL DRIVE ............................................................ 55 Pre-inspection ......................................................... 55 DIFFERENTIAL CASE SIDE ............................... 55 Disassembly ........................................................... 55 Inspection ............................................................... 56 GEAR, WASHER, SHAFT AND CASE ............... 56 BEARING ............................................................ 56 Assembly ................................................................ 56 SHIFT CONTROL ..................................................... 59 Inspection ............................................................... 59 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 60 General Specifications ............................................ 60 TRANSAXLE ....................................................... 60 FINAL GEAR ....................................................... 60 Gear End Play ........................................................ 61 Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear .............. 61 3RD, 4TH, 5TH, REVERSE BAULK RING .......... 61 1ST AND 2ND BAULK RING .............................. 61 Available Snap Rings ............................................. 61 SNAP RING ......................................................... 61 Available C-rings .................................................... 61 4TH INPUT GEAR C-RING ................................. 61 5TH INPUT GEAR REAR C-RING ...................... 62 MAINSHAFT C-RING .......................................... 62 Available Adjusting Shims ...................................... 62 INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING MT-1 E F G H I J K L M SHIM .................................................................... 62 MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM ........................ 63 MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM .................................................................... 63 Available Thrust Washer ......................................... 64 MAINSHAFT THRUST WASHER ........................ 64 Available Washers .................................................. 64 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHER ... 64 Available Shims — Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim ......................................... 65 BEARING PRELOAD .......................................... 65 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS ................................................................. 65 RS6F51H PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 66 Caution ................................................................... 66 PREPARATION ......................................................... 67 Special Service Tools ............................................. 67 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 69 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 70 NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 70 DESCRIPTION .......................................................... 71 Cross-sectional View .............................................. 71 DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER .................... 72 TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER ....................... 72 REVERSE GEAR ................................................ 72 M/T OIL ...................................................................... 73 Replacement .......................................................... 73 DRAINING ........................................................... 73 FILLING ............................................................... 73 Checking ................................................................. 73 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ......................... 73 SIDE OIL SEAL ......................................................... 74 Removal and Installation ........................................ 74 REMOVAL ........................................................... 74 INSTALLATION .................................................... 74 POSITION SWITCH .................................................. 75 Checking ................................................................. 75 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ................................... 75 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ................ 75 CONTROL LINKAGE ................................................ 76 Removal and Installation of Control Device and Cable ...................................................................... 76 Cable Adjustment ................................................... 77 AIR BREATHER HOSE ............................................. 78 Removal and Installation ........................................ 78 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ........................................ 79 Removal and Installation ........................................ 79 REMOVAL ........................................................... 79 INSTALLATION .................................................... 80 Component Parts .................................................... 81 CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS .............. 81 GEAR COMPONENTS ........................................ 82 SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS ..................... 84 FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS ............................ 85 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................85 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................85 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................89 Adjustment ..............................................................96 INPUTSHAFT END PLAY ....................................96 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD .......97 MAINSHAFT END PLAY ......................................98 REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY ..................99 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS ................................... 101 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 101 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 101 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 102 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 103 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS ..................................... 108 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 108 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 108 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 109 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 112 REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS ................ 117 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 117 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 117 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 117 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 118 FINAL DRIVE .......................................................... 119 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 119 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 119 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 119 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 119 SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 121 Inspection .............................................................. 121 SHIFT FORK ...................................................... 121 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 122 General Specifications .......................................... 122 TRANSAXLE ...................................................... 122 FINAL GEAR ...................................................... 123 Gear End Play ....................................................... 123 Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear ............ 123 3RD, 4TH, 5TH, 6TH & REVERSE BAULK RING.123 1ST AND 2ND BAULK RING ............................. 124 Available Snap Rings ............................................ 124 6TH BUSHING ................................................... 124 Available C-rings ................................................... 124 MAINSHAFT C-RING ........................................ 124 Available Thrust Washers ..................................... 125 INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER ................... 125 Available Adjusting Shims ..................................... 125 MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM ....................... 125 INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM .................................................................. 125 MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM .................................................................. 126 REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM .... 126 6TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM ................ 126 Available Shims – Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim(s) ........................................... 126 BEARING PRELOAD ......................................... 126 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM(S) ............................................................. 126 MT-2 PRECAUTIONS [RS5F70A] PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 A ECS005TD Do not reuse transaxle oil, once it has been drained. B Check oil level or replace oil with vehicle on level ground. During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clear of dust or dirt. Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If mating marks are required, be MT certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to. In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, use it. D Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces. E F G H I J K L M MT-3 PREPARATION [RS5F70A] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ECS005TE The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name KV38107700 (J39027) Preload adapter Measuring turning torque of final drive assembly Measuring total turning torque Measuring clearance between side gear and differential case with washer Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim [Use with KV38106000 (J34291-B).] NT087 KV38106000 (J34291-B) Height gauge adapter (differential side bearing) Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim [Use with KV38107700 (J39027).] a: 140 mm (5.51 in) b: 40 mm (1.57 in) c: 16 mm (0.63 in) dia. d: M8 × 1.25P NT418 KV32101000 (J25689-A) Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin Removing and installing lock pin Removing selector shaft Removing welch plug a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. NT410 KV31100300 (J25689-A) Pin punch Removing and installing retaining pin a: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia. NT410 ST30031000 (J22912-01) Puller NT411 ST30021000 (J22912-01) Puller NT411 MT-4 Removing 3rd, 5th input gear Removing 3rd & 4th and 5th & Rev synchronizer hub Removing mainshaft rear bearing Removing 2nd gear, 5th gear bush Removing 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub, 1st and 4th main gear Removing and installing differential side bearing a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia. b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. Removing input shaft front and rear bearing Installing input shaft front and rear bearing Installing 5th input gear, 3rd main gear and 4th main gear Installing 1st & 2nd, 3rd & 4th and 5th & Rev synchronizer hub Installing 2nd gear bush, 5th gear bush, Rev gear bush Installing mainshaft rear bearing a: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia. b: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. PREPARATION [RS5F70A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description A ST33061000 (J8107-2) Drift Removing differential side bearing a: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia. b: 29.5 mm (1.16 in) dia. B MT NT073 ST33290001 (J34286) Puller ● Removing idler gear bearing outer race D a: 250 mm (9.84 in) b: 160 mm (6.30 in) E NT414 ST33230000 (J25805-01) Drift Removing differential oil seal Installing differential side bearing a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. G H NT084 ST30720000 (J25405) Drift F Installing differential side bearing outer race a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. I J NT115 ST22350000 (J25678-01) Drift Installing input shaft front and rear bearing a: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia. b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. K L NT065 ST22452000 (J34335) Drift Installing 3rd and 4th main gear Installing 5th gear bush Installing 5th & Rev synchronizer hub Installing Rev gear bush Installing mainshaft rear bearing a: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia. NT065 ST37750000 (J34335) Drift NT065 MT-5 Installing input shaft oil seal Installing 5th synchronizer Installing mainshaft rear bearing Installing 5th main gear Installing 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub Installing striking rod oil seal Installing clutch housing dust seal a: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia. M PREPARATION [RS5F70A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST30621000 (J35869) Drift Installing differential side bearing outer race [Use with ST30611000 (J25742-1).] a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. b: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia. NT073 ST30611000 (J25742-1) Drift handle Installing differential side bearing outer race [Use with ST30621000 (J35869).] a: 15 mm (0.59 in) b: 335 mm (13.19 in) c: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia. d: M12 × 1.5P NT419 Commercial Service Tools ECS005TF Tool name Description Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race a: 56 mm (2.20 in) dia. b: 50.5 mm (1.988 in) dia. NT065 Drift Removing input shaft rear bearing Removing mainshaft rear bearing a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. b: 16 mm (0.63 in) dia. NT065 Drift Installing differential oil seal (Transaxle case side) a: 58 mm (2.28 in) dia. b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. NT065 Drift Installing differential oil seal (Clutch housing side) a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia. b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. NT065 Drift Installing 2nd gear bush a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. b: 33 mm (1.30 in) dia. NT065 MT-6 PREPARATION [RS5F70A] Tool name Description Drift Installing 3rd & 4th and 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub Installing mainshaft front bearing a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. B MT NT065 Drift A Installing input shaft oil seal Installing 5th input gear a: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia. b: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia. D E NT065 F G H I J K L M MT-7 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [RS5F70A] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 ECS005TG 3 1 Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 Jumps out of gear MT-19, MT-21 MT-20 Bearing (Worn or damaged) 3 3 2 2 1 MT-8 Shift Fork (Worn) Control Rod (Worn) O-Ring (Worn or damaged) Oil Seal (Worn or damaged) 2 3 Insert Spring, Shifting Insert (Damaged) Oil leakage 3 Baulk Ring (Worn or damaged) Symptom Gear (Worn or damaged) Noise Gasket (Damaged) Suspected Parts (Possible cause) Check Plug Return Spring and Check Ball (Worn or damaged) MT-10 (Oil level is high) 2 MT-13 MT-10 (Wrong oil) 1 MT-18 MT-10 Reference page (Oil level is low) Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. 2 3 3 DESCRIPTION [RS5F70A] DESCRIPTION Cross-sectional View PFP:00000 A ECS005TH B MT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0017E DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER Double-cone synchronizer is used for 1st and 2nd gears to reduce operating force of the shift lever. SMT837DA MT-9 M/T OIL [RS5F70A] M/T OIL Replacement PFP:KLD20 ECS005TI DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle. Stop the engine. Remove drain plug and drain oil. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it on the transaxle. Drain plug : 10 - 19 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. SMA145AA FILLING 1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole as shown. Oil grade Capacity (approximately) 2. 3. : API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 : 3.0 (3 1/8 US qt, 2 5/8 Imp qt) After refilling oil, check oil level as shown. Install the filler plug in the transaxle case using a new gasket. Filler plug : 10 - 19 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 173 in-lb) SMA066C CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Checking ECS005TJ OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. 2. Check that oil is not leaking from transaxle. Check oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Never start the engine while checking the oil level. 3. Install the filler plug in the transaxle case using a new gasket. Filler plug : 10 - 19 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. SMA066C MT-10 SIDE OIL SEAL [RS5F70A] SIDE OIL SEAL Removal and Installation 1. 2. 3. PFP:32113 A ECS005TK Remove drain plug and drain the oil from transaxle. Refer to MT-10, "DRAINING" . Remove drive shafts. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . Remove differential oil seal using Tool. B MT D E SMT563A 4. Install differential oil seal with a suitable tool (drift). ● Apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip of oil seal before installing. F G H SMT126DB 5. Install drive shafts. Refer to FAX-16, "Installation" . ● Install differential oil seal so that dimensions “A” and “B” are within specifications. I J Unit: mm (in) Model Dimension “A” Dimension “B” QG18DE (RS5F70A) 0.5 (0.020) or less 5.5 - 6.5 (0.217 - 0.256) K L WCIA0001E 6. Refill the transaxle oil and install the drain plug using a new gasket. Refer to MT-10, "FILLING" . MT-11 M POSITION SWITCH [RS5F70A] POSITION SWITCH Position Switch Check PFP:32005 ECS005TL NOTE: For removal and installation of the switches. Refer to MT-18, "CASE COMPONENTS" . BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ● Check continuity. Gear position Continuity Reverse Yes Except reverse No SMT715BD PNP SWITCH ● Check continuity. Gear position Continuity Neutral Yes Except neutral No MT-12 CONTROL LINKAGE [RS5F70A] CONTROL LINKAGE Removal and Installation PFP:34103 A ECS005TM TRANSAXLE GEAR CONTROL Refer to the illustration for the removal and installation procedure. B MT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0135E 1. Control lever knob 2. Boot 3. Finisher 4. Control lever bracket 5. Socket 6. Control lever 7. O-ring 8. O-ring 9. Ring spring 10. Bearing seat 11. Ring spring 12. Seat 13. Return spring 14. Control rod 15. Bushing 16. Collar 17. Bushing 18. Bracket 19. Bushing 20. Collar 21. Washer 22. Support rod bracket 23. Support rod MT-13 CONTROL LINKAGE [RS5F70A] STRIKING ROD OIL SEAL 1. 2. Remove the transaxle control rod from yoke. Remove the retaining pin from the yoke using Tool as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the boot. SMT143DB 3. 4. Remove the boot. Remove the striking rod oil seal with a suitable tool (drift). SMT566A 5. Install the striking rod oil seal using Tool as shown. ● Apply multi-purpose grease to the seal lip of the oil seal before installing. SMT570AA 6. 7. 8. Install the boot. Install the yoke and retaining pin. Connect the transaxle control rod to the yoke. MT-14 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:32010 A ECS005TN B MT D E F WMT009 G REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation" . H I J K WMT010 3. Disconnect the clutch operating cylinder from the transaxle and position aside. Refer to CL-11, "Removal" . L M WCIA0006E 4. 5. Disconnect back-up lamp switch, VSS sensor, PNP switch, and ground harness connectors. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-20, "Removal" . MT-15 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 6. Remove the air breather hose. SMT132D 7. Remove the shift control rod and support rod from transaxle. WMT005 8. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil from the transaxle. SMA145AA 9. Remove the drive shafts from the transaxle. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . 10. Support the engine by placing a jack under the oil pan as shown. CAUTION: Do not place the jack under the oil pan drain plug. SMT659B MT-16 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 11. Remove LH side and rear side mounting bolts. A B MT D E F G WMT007 12. Remove the lower housing bolts. H I J SMT658B K 13. Remove the bolts securing the transaxle to the engine. 14. Lower the transaxle while supporting it with the jack. L INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Tighten the starter motor bolts to specification. Starter motor bolts ● ● M : 31 - 42 N·m (3.2 - 4.3 kg-m, 23 - 31 ft-lb) Tighten the LH and rear mounts to specification. Refer to MT-15, "Removal and Installation" . Tighten the transaxle to engine bolts to specification. Bolt No. Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 1 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 30) 70 (2.76) 2 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 30) 80 (3.15) 3 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 30) 30 (1.18) 4* 16 - 21 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 25 (0.98) Front gusset A to engine 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 30) 20 (0.79) Rear gusset B to engine 16 - 21 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 16 (0.63) " " mm (in) *: With gussets MT-17 SMT930D TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] Component Parts ECS005TO CASE COMPONENTS WMT014 1. Clutch housing 2. Dust seal 3. Oil pocket 4. Check plug 5. Input shaft oil seal 6. Oil channel 7. Mainshaft front bearing 8. Bearing retainer 9. Reverse idler gear front thrust washer 10. Reverse idler gear 11. Reverse idler gear bearing 12. Reverse idler gear rear thrust washer 13. O-ring 14. Reverse idler gear shaft 15. Snap ring 16. Back-up lamp switch 17. Filler plug 18. Side cover gasket 19. Side cover 20. Welch plug 21. Mainshaft bearing snap ring 22. Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim 23. O-ring 24. Rear cover 25. Differential oil seal 26. Drain plug 27. PNP switch 28. Transmission case 29. Oil gutter 30. Welch plug 31. Boot 32. Striking rod oil seal 33. Welch plug 34. Differential oil seal 35. O-ring 36. Speedometer pinion MT-18 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] GEAR COMPONENTS A B MT D E F G H SMT641DA 1. Reverse idler gear front thrust washer 2. Reverse idler gear 3. Reverse idler gear bearing 4. Reverse idler gear rear thrust washer 5. O-ring 6. Reverse idler gear shaft 7. Snap ring 8. Input shaft front bearing 9. Input shaft 10. 3rd gear needle bearing 11. 3rd input gear 12. 3rd gear baulk ring 13. Coupling sleeve 14. Spread spring 15. Shifting insert 16. 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub 17. Spread spring 18. 4th gear C-ring 19. 4th gear needle bearing 20. 4th gear baulk ring 21. 4th input gear 22. 5th gear front C-ring 23. 5th input gear 24. 5th gear rear C-ring 25. C-ring holder 26. Input shaft rear bearing 27. Oil channel 28. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim 29. Mainshaft front bearing 30. Mainshaft 31. 1st gear needle bearing 32. 1st main gear 33. 1st inner baulk ring 34. 1st synchronizer cone 35. 1st outer baulk ring 36. 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub 37. Coupling sleeve 38. Insert spring 39. 2nd gear bushing 40. 2nd gear needle bearing 41. 2nd gear outer baulk ring 42. 2nd gear synchronizer cone 43. 2nd inner baulk ring 44. 2nd main gear 45. 3rd main gear 46. Spacer 47. Mainshaft adjusting shim 48. 4th main gear 49. 5th gear bushing 50. 5th gear needle bearing 51. 5th main gear 52. 5th gear baulk ring 53. Spread spring 54. Shifting insert 55. 5th & reverse synchronizer hub 56. Spread spring 57. Coupling sleeve 58. Reverse gear bushing 59. Reverse gear needle bearing 60. Reverse gear baulk ring 61. Reverse main gear 62. Sub-gear 63. Sub-gear washer 64. Snap ring 65. Mainshaft thrust washer 66. Mainshaft rear bearing 67. Mainshaft C-ring 68. C-ring holder 69. Snap ring MT-19 I J K L M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS WMT015 1. Clutch housing 2. 3rd & 4th bracket 3. 3rd & 4th shift fork 4. Retaining pin 5. Check ball 6. Check pin 7. Check spring 8. Check plug 9. Stopper ring 10. 3rd & 4th fork rod 11. Selector shaft pin 12. Selector 13. 5th & reverse bracket 14. Reverse switch bracket 15. Retaining pin 16. 5th & reverse shift fork 17. Interlock plunger 18. Check ball 19. Interlock pin 20. Stopper ring 21. 5th & reverse fork rod 22. Striking lever 23. Retaining pin 24. 1st & 2nd bracket 25. 1st & 2nd shift fork 26. Check ball 27. 1st & 2nd fork rod 28. Transaxle case 29. Check ball 30. Check spring 31. Check plug 32. Select check leaf spring 33. Return spring 34. Steel ball 35. Reverse gate 36. Return bearing 37. Selector arm 38. Bushing 39. Welch plug 40. Selector shaft 41. Striking yoke 42. Retaining pin 43. Striking rod 44. Dust boot 45. Striking rod oil seal 46. Welch plug MT-20 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS A B MT D E F G H I J WCIA0003E 1. Differential side bearing adjusting shim 2. Differential side bearing outer race 3. Differential side bearing 4. Final gear 5. Differential case 6. Speedometer drive gear 7. Speedometer stopper 8. Differential side bearing 9. Differential side bearing outer race 10. Pinion mate thrust washer 11. Pinion mate gear 12. Side gear thrust washer 13. Side gear 14. Pinion mate shaft 15. Lock pin Disassembly and Assembly K L ECS005TP DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Case 1. M Remove the back-up lamp switch, PNP switch, drain plug, and filler plug from the transaxle case. WMT023 MT-21 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 2. 3. Remove snap ring from reverse idler shaft as shown. Remove side cover and rear cover from case. SMT644D 4. 5. a. b. Remove O-ring and mainshaft bearing adjusting shim. Remove reverse idler gear shaft. Attach bolt (M6) to thread of reverse idler gear shaft end as shown. Pull out the attached bolt (M6), and remove reverse idler gear shaft from case. SMT645D 6. 7. Remove reverse idler gear, thrust washer (front and rear), and bearing from case. Remove mainshaft rear bearing snap ring from case. SMT646D 8. Remove check plugs, springs, and check balls from case. SMT647D MT-22 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 9. Remove transaxle case mounting bolts. A B MT SMT649D D 10. Remove input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case. 11. Remove oil gutter from transaxle case. E F G SMT650D H 12. Remove differential side bearing outer race and adjusting shim from transaxle case using Tool. I J K SMT651DA 13. Remove differential oil seal from transaxle case using Tool. L M SMT653DA MT-23 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 14. Remove welch plugs from transaxle case using Tool. SMT839DA Clutch Housing 1. 2. Remove transaxle case from the clutch housing. Remove check plugs, check springs, check pins, and check balls from the clutch housing. SMT654D 3. Remove 3rd & 4th bracket retaining pin using Tool. SMT656DA 4. 5. 6. Remove 3rd & 4th shift fork stopper ring. Remove 3rd & 4th fork rod. Remove 3rd & 4th shift fork and bracket. SMT655D MT-24 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 7. 8. Remove interlock plunger and check ball. Remove 5th & reverse bracket stopper ring. A B MT SMT658D D 9. Remove retaining pins from 5th & reverse shift fork and 5th & reverse bracket using Tool. 10. Remove 5th & reverse fork rod. 11. Remove interlock pin from 5th & reverse fork rod using Tool. 12. Remove reverse switch bracket and 5th & reverse bracket. E F G SMT657DA 13. Remove check ball from housing. 14. Remove retaining pin for 1st & 2nd shift fork and 1st & 2nd bracket using Tool. 15. Remove 1st & 2nd fork rod. 16. Remove 5th & reverse and 1st & 2nd shift forks, and 1st & 2nd bracket. H I J SMT659DA K 17. Remove both input shaft and mainshaft assemblies from housing. L M SMT660D 18. Remove final drive assembly from housing. 19. Remove oil pocket from housing. SMT661D MT-25 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 20. Remove mainshaft bearing retainer from housing. 21. Cut off oil channel using a cutter as shown. SMT662D 22. Remove mainshaft front bearing from housing using Tool. SMT663DA 23. Using a magnet or other suitable tool, remove selector pin from selector shaft. SMT664D 24. Remove selector shaft and plug, then remove selector using Tool. SMT665DA 25. Remove reamer bolts, then remove select check leaf spring, return spring, steel ball, reverse gate, selector arm, bearing, and bushing. CAUTION: Be careful not to lose the steel ball. SMT666DA MT-26 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 26. Remove retaining pin and plug from striking lever using Tool. 27. Remove striking rod, then striking lever from housing. A B MT SMT667DA 28. Using a flat-head screwdriver or other suitable tool, remove dust seal, input shaft oil seal, and striking rod oil seal from housing. CAUTION: When removing dust and oil seals, be careful not to damage mounting surfaces of dust seal and oil seal. D E F G SMT668D 29. Remove differential oil seal from housing using Tool. H I J WMT021 K 30. Remove differential side outer race from housing using Tool. L M SMT670DA MT-27 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] ASSEMBLY Clutch Housing 1. Hammer the new striking rod oil seal into clutch housing as far as it will go using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse striking rod oil seal. SMT722DA 2. Hammer the differential oil seal into clutch housing with a suitable tool until it becomes flush with clutch housing end face. CAUTION: Do not reuse differential oil seal. SMT723DA 3. Hammer input shaft oil seal into clutch housing as far as it will go with a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse input shaft oil seal. SMT724DA 4. Hammer the dust seal into clutch housing as far as it will go using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse dust seal. SMT725DA MT-28 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 5. Install outer race of differential side bearing using Tool. A B MT SMT726DA D 6. Install new oil channel (mainshaft). CAUTION: Pay attention to installation direction of oil channel. E F G SMT727D 7. Align the notches on mainshaft front bearing and transaxle case. Then, install mainshaft front bearing with a suitable tool. H I J SMT728DA 8. K Install mainshaft bearing retainer, tighten bolt to specification. L M SMT729D 9. Attach boot, striking rod, and striking lever to clutch housing. Install new retaining pin for striking lever using Tool. CAUTION: ● Before installing striking rod, wrap the end with a vinyl tape or similar product to prevent oil seal from being damaged. ● Do not reuse retaining pin. SMT667DA MT-29 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 10. Hammer the new welch plug (striking lever side) with a generalpurpose drift [OD: 12 mm (0.47 in)]. CAUTION: Do not reuse welch plug. SMT730D 11. Install selector, selector shaft, and selector shaft pin into clutch housing. SMT731D 12. Hammer the new welch plug (selector shaft side) with a generalpurpose drift [OD: 12 mm (0.47 in)]. CAUTION: Do not reuse welch plug. SMT732D 13. Install select check leaf spring, return spring, steel ball, reverse gate, selector arm, bushing, and return bearing. SMT733DA 14. Tighten the two reamer bolts to specification. CAUTION: Use correct reamer bolts for each installation point, because each bolt has a different length. SMT734D MT-30 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 15. Install oil pocket. A B MT SMT735D 16. Install differential assembly, input shaft assembly, and mainshaft assembly into clutch housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage input shaft oil seal during installation of input shaft assembly. D E F G SMT736D 17. Install 5th & reverse shift fork. 18. Install 1st & 2nd shift fork, bracket, and fork rod. 19. Install retaining pin for 1st & 2nd bracket using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse retaining pin. 20. Install two check balls. H I J K SMT659DB L 21. Install interlock pin into 5th & reverse fork rod using Tool. 22. Install reverse switch bracket, 5th & reverse bracket, and fork rod. 23. Install new retaining pin for 5th & reverse shift fork and reverse switch bracket using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse retaining pin. M SMT657DB 24. Install 5th & reverse bracket stopper ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse stopper pin. 25. Install check ball and interlock plunger. MT-31 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 26. Install 3rd & 4th shift fork, bracket, and fork rod. 27. Install 3rd & 4th bracket retaining pin using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse retaining pin. SMT656DB 28. Install 3rd & 4th shift fork stopper ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse stopper ring. 29. Install check ball, check pin, and check spring, and apply Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent onto the check plug. Then, tighten the check plug to specification. Refer to MT-20, "SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS" . SMT655D Transaxle Case 1. Insert differential oil seal into differential case with a suitable tool until it becomes flush with case end face. SMT737DA 2. Install welch plug into transaxle case with a suitable tool. SMT739D MT-32 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 3. Calculate dimension “N” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for differential side bearing. End play : 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in) Dimension “N” = (“N1 ” – “N2 ”) + End play “N” : Thickness of adjusting shim : Distance between clutch housing case “N1 ” end face and mounting face of adjusting shim : Distance between differential side bearing “N2 ” and transaxle case A B MT SMT740D D Use the “Available Shims” table for the available shim sizes. Refer to MT-65, "Available Shims — Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim" . a. b. Using dial gauge and scale, measure dimension “N1 ” between clutch housing case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim. Install outer race onto differential side bearing on final gear side. Holding the outer race horizontally by hand, rotate the final gear five times or more (for smooth movement of bearing roller). E F G H SMT741D c. I Using dial gauge and scale as shown, measure dimension “N2 ” between differential side bearing outer race and transaxle case end face. J K L SMT742D 4. Install the selected shim and bearing outer race using Tool. M SMT738DA MT-33 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 5. Measure the turning torque of the final drive assembly using Tool. Turning torque of final drive assembly (New bearing) ● ● ● 6. : 2.9 - 6.9 N-m (30 - 70 kg-cm, 26 - 61 in-lb) When the old bearing is used again, turning torque will be slightly less than the above. Make sure turning torque is close to the specified range. Changes in turning torque of final drive assembly per revolution should be within 1.0 N-m (10 kg-cm, 8.7 in-lb) without binding. SMT600-E Calculate dimension “O” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for input shaft rear bearing. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “O” = (“O1 ” – “O2 ”) + End play “O” : Thickness of adjusting shim : Distance between transaxle case “O1 ” end face and mounting face of adjusting shim : Distance between clutch housing “O2 ” case end face and end face of input shaft rear bearing SMT743D Use the “Available Shims” table for the available shim sizes. Refer to MT-62, "Available Adjusting Shims" . a. Using block gauge, scale, and dial gauge, measure dimension “O1 ” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim. SMT744D b. Using block gauge, scale, and dial gauge as shown in the figure, measure dimension “O2 ” between clutch housing case end face and end face of input shaft rear bearing. SMT745D 7. Install selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto input shaft. MT-34 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 8. Install oil gutter into transaxle case. A B MT SMT650D D 9. Clean mating surfaces of clutch housing and transaxle case. Check for cracks and damage, then apply sealant. Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . E F G SMT802D 10. Install transaxle case onto clutch housing, and tighten mounting bolts with specified torque. Transaxle case mounting bolts H : Refer to MT-18, "CASE COMPONENTS" . I J SMT649D 11. Apply sealant to threads of back-up lamp switch, PNP switch, and drain plug, then install them. Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . NOTE: Fill the case with oil before installation of the filler plug. L M WMT023 12. Install speedometer pinion assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. MT-35 K TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 13. Install check springs and check balls. Apply sealant to the thread on the check plug, and install it. SMT749D 14. Calculate thickness “P” of the adjusting shim using the following procedure to satisfy the specification of the end play for the mainshaft rear bearing. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “P” = (“P1 ” – “P2 ”) + End play “P” : Thickness of adjusting shim : Distance between transaxle case “P1 ” end face and mainshaft rear bearing : Distance between adjusting shim “P2 ” end face of rear cover and transaxle mounting face SMT746D Use the "Available Shims" table for the available shim sizes. Refer to MT-62, "Available Adjusting Shims" . a. Using a dial gauge as shown, measure dimension “P1 ” between the transaxle case end face and the mainshaft rear bearing. SMT747D b. Using a dial gauge as shown, measure dimension “P2 ” between the adjusting shim mounting face of rear cover and the transaxle mounting face. SMT748D MT-36 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F70A] 15. Using snap ring pliers and flat-head screwdriver as shown, install snap ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. A B MT SMT646D D 16. Install selected mainshaft adjusting shim. 17. Install reverse idler gear, O-ring, thrust washers (front and rear), and bearing onto reverse idler shaft. E F G SMT753DA H 18. Install snap ring into transaxle case using snap ring pliers. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse snap ring. ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Before installation, apply gear oil to O-ring. 19. Using feeler gauge, measure the end play of snap ring, and select a snap ring suitable to meet the specified end play. End play I J : 0.05 - 0.25 mm (0.0020 - 0.0098 in) K Use the "Available Shims" table for the available shim sizes. Refer to MT-61, "Available Snap Rings" . L SMT754D 20. Install selected snap ring with a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. 21. Apply gear oil to rear cover O-ring, and install rear cover, side cover gasket, and side cover. Then tighten mounting bolts with specified torque. Use the "Available Shims" table for the available shim sizes. Refer to MT-18, "CASE COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse mounting bolts for rear cover and side cover. SMT644D MT-37 M INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly 1. PFP:32200 ECS005TQ Before disassembly, measure the end plays of 3rd and 4th input gears with a suitable tool. Refer to MT-61, "Gear End Play" . ● If end play is not within specification, disassemble and check the parts. SMT759D 2. Remove oil channel from input shaft rear bearing. SMT671D 3. Press out input shaft rear bearing using Tool. SMT672DA 4. 5. Remove C-ring holder. Remove 5th gear rear C-ring. SMT673D MT-38 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 6. 7. Remove 5th input gear from input shaft using Tool. Remove 5th gear front C-ring. A B MT SMT674DA D 8. Remove 4th input gear, baulk ring, 4th gear needle bearing, and 4th gear C-ring from input shaft. 9. Press out both 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub assembly and 3rd input gear from input shaft using Tool. 10. Remove 3rd gear needle bearing. E F G SMT675DA H 11. Press out input shaft front bearing from input shaft using Tool. I J K SMT676DA Inspection ECS005TR GEAR AND SHAFT ● ● L Check shaft for cracks, wear or bending. Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks. M SMT693D MT-39 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] SYNCHRONIZERS ● ● ● Check spline area of coupling sleeves, hubs and gears for wear or cracks. Check baulk rings for cracks or deformation. Check insert springs for wear or deformation. SMT637A ● If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it. SMT867D ● Measure the movement (free play in dimension “L”) of 3rd & 4th coupling sleeve with the end fixed and the other end lifted as shown in the figure. If the movement exceeds specification, replace the sleeve. Coupling sleeve 3rd & 4th Dimension “L” 0 - 0.95 mm (0 - 0.0374 in) SMT841D ● Measure clearance between baulk ring and gear. Refer to MT61, "Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear" . SMT140 MT-40 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] BEARING A Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. B MT SMT148A Assembly 1. D ECS005TS Press on input shaft front bearing using Tool. E F G SMT696DA 2. 3. Install 3rd gear needle, 3rd input gear and 3rd gear baulk ring bearing to input shaft. Install spread spring, shifting insert, and 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub onto 3rd & 4th coupling sleeve. ● Pay attention to the shape of spread spring and shifting insert for correct assembly. Do not install spread spring hook onto the same shifting insert. CAUTION: Do not reuse 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub. I J K SMT694D ● Install synchronizer hub with its three grooves facing the front side (3rd input gear side). L M SMT695D MT-41 H INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] ● Install 3rd & 4th coupling sleeve with its chamfered surface facing the 4th input gear side. SMT699D 4. Position bearing replacer to the front side of input shaft front bearing. ● Align grooves of shifting insert and 3rd gear baulk ring. Then, press it onto 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub assembly using a drift. SMT698DA 5. 6. Install 4th gear C-ring onto input shaft using Tool. Measure the end play of 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub with a suitable tool, and check if it is within allowable specification. End play 7. : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) If not within specification, adjust the end play by changing thickness of 4th (input) gear C-ring. Refer to MT-61, "Available Crings" . SMT700D 8. Install 4th gear needle bearing, 4th gear baulk ring, and 5th gear front C-ring. SMT701DA 9. Install 4th input gear using Tool. MT-42 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 10. Position 5th input gear as shown, to install it on input shaft. A B MT SMT703D D 11. Install 5th input gear using Tool as shown. CAUTION: Do not reuse 5th input gear. E F G SMT702DA 12. Install 5th gear rear C-ring onto input shaft using Tool. 13. Measure the end play of 5th input gear with a suitable tool, and check if it is within the allowable specification below. End play H : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) I J K SMT704D 14. If not within specification, adjust the end play by changing thickness of the 5th (input gear) rear C-ring. Refer to MT-61, "Available C-rings" . 15. Install C-ring holder onto 5th gear rear C-ring using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse C-ring holder. 16. Install input shaft rear bearing using Tool. CAUTION: Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing the input gear side. SMT705DA MT-43 L M INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 17. Install oil channel onto input shaft. SMT671D 18. Measure gear end play as a final check. Refer to MT-61, "Gear End Play" . MT-44 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] MAINSHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly 1. PFP:32241 A ECS005TT Before disassembly, measure gear end play with a suitable tool. Refer to MT-61, "Gear End Play" . ● If end play is not within the specified limit, disassemble and check the parts. B MT D SMT760D 2. E Remove snap ring with a suitable tool. F G H SMT677D 3. Remove C-ring holder and mainshaft C-ring. I J K SMT678D 4. L Press out mainshaft rear bearing from mainshaft using Tool. M SMT679DA MT-45 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 5. Remove mainshaft thrust washer. SMT680D 6. 7. Remove snap ring from mainshaft. Then, remove reverse main gear assembly, reverse gear needle bearing, and reverse gear baulk ring. Place bearing replacer between 5th & reverse synchronizer hub and 5th main gear, and press out both reverse gear bushing and 5th & reverse synchronizer assembly using Tool. WMT024 8. 9. Remove 5th main gear, 5th gear baulk ring, and 5th gear needle bearing. Place bearing replacer between 3rd and 4th main gears, and press out both 5th gear bushing and 4th main gear using Tool. WMT025 10. Remove mainshaft adjusting shim and spacer. SMT683D 11. Place bearing replacer between 2nd main gear and 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub, and press out both 3rd and 2nd main gears. 12. Remove 2nd double cone assembly, 2nd gear bushing, and coupling sleeve assembly. MT-46 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 13. Place bearing replacer on 1st gear front side, and press out all of 2nd gear bushing, 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub, 1st main gear, and 1st double cone using Tool. A B MT WMT026 D 14. Remove 1st gear needle bearing. Inspection ECS005TU E GEAR AND SHAFT ● ● Check shaft for cracks, wear or bending. Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks. F G H SMT693D SYNCHRONIZERS ● ● ● I Check spline area of coupling sleeves, hubs and gears for wear or cracks. Check baulk rings for cracks or deformation. Check insert springs for wear or deformation. J K L SMT637A ● If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it. M SMT867D MT-47 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] ● Measure the movement (play, dimension “L”) of 1st & 2nd coupling sleeve and 5th & reverse coupling sleeve with their end fixed and the other end lifted as shown in the figure. If the movement exceeds specification, replace the sleeve. Coupling sleeve Length “L” 1st & 2nd 0 - 0.68 mm (0 - 0.0268 in) 5th & Reverse 0 - 0.89 mm (0 - 0.0350 in) SMT868D ● Measure clearance between baulk ring and gear. Refer to MT61, "Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear" . SMT140 BEARING ● Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. SMT148A ● Measure wear of inner and outer baulk ring as shown. – Place baulk rings in position on synchronizer cone. While holding baulk ring against synchronizer cone as far as it will go, measure dimensions “A” and “B” using Tool. WMT017 – Standard “A” “B” Wear limit : 0.6 - 0.8 mm (0.024 - 0.031 in) : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) MT-48 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] ● If dimension “A” or “B” is smaller than the wear limit, replace outer baulk ring, inner baulk ring and synchronizer cone as a set. Assembly 1. A ECS005TV Install 1st gear needle bearing and 1st main gear onto mainshaft. B MT D SMT706D 2. 3. Install 1st double cone assembly onto mainshaft. Install 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub with its three grooves facing the front side (1st main gear side) onto mainshaft. CAUTION: Do not reuse 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub. E F G H SMT695D 4. I Install 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub using Tool. J K L SMT707DA 5. Install insert spring onto 1st & 2nd coupling sleeve. M SMT994BB MT-49 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 6. Install 1st & 2nd coupling sleeve with its chamfered surface facing the 1st main gear side onto 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub. SMT708D 7. Install 2nd gear bushing with its flange surface facing 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub side using Tool. WMT027 8. 9. Install 2nd needle bearing, 2nd double cone assembly, and 2nd main gear onto mainshaft using Tool. Position 3rd main gear as shown, and install it using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse 3rd main gear. SMT710DA 10. Install spacer and mainshaft adjusting shim onto mainshaft. 11. Select a mainshaft adjusting shim suitable to satisfy the following specification of dimension “L” and install it onto mainshaft. Dimension “L” Mainshaft adjusting shims : 151.35 - 151.45 mm (5.9586 - 5.9626 in) : Refer to MT-62, "Available Adjusting Shims" . SMT711D MT-50 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 12. Position 4th main gear as shown, and install it onto mainshaft. A B MT SMT713D D 13. Install 4th main gear onto mainshaft using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse 4th main gear. E F G SMT712DA 14. Install 5th gear bushing with its flange surface facing the 4th main gear side using Tool. H I J WMT028 K 15. Install 5th needle bearing, 5th main gear, and 5th gear baulk ring onto mainshaft. L M SMT761D 16. Being careful of the following points, install spread spring, shifting insert, and 5th & reverse synchronizer hub onto 5th & reverse coupling sleeve. SMT694D MT-51 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] ● ● Pay attention to the shape of spread spring and shifting insert for correct assembly. Do not install spread spring hook onto the same shifting insert. Install synchronizer hub with its three grooves facing the front side (5th main gear side). CAUTION: Do not reuse 5th & reverse synchronizer hub. SMT695D ● Install 5th & reverse coupling sleeve with its chamfered surface facing the reverse main gear side. SMT716D 17. Install 5th & reverse synchronizer hub assembly using Tool. SMT715DA 18. Install reverse gear baulk ring using Tool. 19. Install reverse gear bushing using Tool. 20. Install reverse gear needle bearing using Tool. WMT029 21. Install sub-gear, sub-gear washer, and snap ring onto reverse main gear. CAUTION: ● Pay attention to direction of sub-gear washer. ● Do not reuse snap ring. SMT718D MT-52 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 22. Install reverse main gear assembly onto mainshaft. 23. Select a thrust washer suitable to satisfy the following specification of dimension “M” as shown, and install it onto mainshaft. Dimension “M” Available thrust washers A : 244.20 - 244.30 mm (9.6142 - 9.6181 in) : Refer to MT-64, "Available Thrust Washer" . B MT D E F G SMT719D 24. Install mainshaft rear bearing using Tool. H I J SMT720DA 25. Install mainshaft C-ring. 26. Using feeler gauge, measure the end play of mainshaft rear bearing with a suitable tool, and check if it satisfies the following specification. End play Mainshaft C-rings L : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) : Refer to MT-61, "Available Crings" . M SMT721D 27. Install C-ring holder. SMT678D MT-53 K MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F70A] 28. Install snap ring with a suitable tool. SMT677D 29. Measure gear end play as a final check. Refer to MT-61, "Gear End Play" . MT-54 FINAL DRIVE [RS5F70A] FINAL DRIVE Pre-inspection PFP:38411 A ECS005TW DIFFERENTIAL CASE SIDE 1. 2. 3. Clean final drive assembly sufficiently to prevent side gear thrust washer, differential case, side gear, and B other parts from sticking by gear oil. Upright the differential case so that the side gear to be measured faces upward. MT Place final drive adapter and dial gauge onto side gear. Move side gear up and down, and measure the clearance using Tool. Side gear and differential case clearance : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) D E SMT685DA 4. 5. If not within specification, adjust the clearance by changing thrust washer thickness. Turn differential case upside down, and measure the clearance between side gear and differential case on the other side in the same way using Tool. G Disassembly 1. 2. F ECS005TX Remove mounting bolts. Then, separate the final gear from differential case. Make a notch and remove speedometer drive gear using a scraper or other suitable tool. ● Bearing replacer cannot be positioned unless speedometer drive gear is removed. H I J SMT609A 3. 4. K Remove differential side bearing of final gear side using Tool. Turn differential case upside down, and remove differential side bearing of speedometer drive gear side using Tool. ● Be careful not to mix up the differential side bearings. L M WCIA0005E 5. 6. Remove speedometer stopper. Remove lock pins from pinion mate shaft using Tool. SMT689DA MT-55 FINAL DRIVE [RS5F70A] 7. 8. Remove pinion mate shaft. Rotate pinion mate gear, and remove pinion mate gear, pinion mate thrust washer, side gear, and side gear thrust washer from differential case. SMT839 Inspection ECS005TY GEAR, WASHER, SHAFT AND CASE ● ● Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears and pinion mate gears. Check washers for wear. WCIA0004E BEARING ● Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. CAUTION: When replacing tapered roller bearing, replace outer and inner race as a set. SPD715 Assembly 1. 2. 3. ECS005TZ Apply gear oil to sliding area of differential case, each gear, and thrust washer. Install side gear thrust washer and side gear into differential case. Position pinion mate gear and pinion mate thrust washer diagonally, and install them into differential case while rotating. SMT062A MT-56 FINAL DRIVE [RS5F70A] 4. Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case. A B MT SMT087A D 5. 6. 7. Upright the differential case so that its side gear to be measured faces upward. Place preload adapter and dial gauge onto side gear. Move side gear up and down, and measure the clearance using Tool. Turn differential case upside down, and measure the clearance between side gear and differential case on the other side in the same way using Tool. Clearance of side gear and differential case Differential side gear thrust washers 8. E F : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) G SMT685DA : Refer to MT-64, "Available Washers" . H Install retaining pin using Tool. ● Make sure that retaining pin is flush with case. I J K SMT699B L 9. Align and install speedometer drive gear into differential case. 10. Install speedometer stopper. M SMT842D MT-57 FINAL DRIVE [RS5F70A] 11. Install differential side bearing using Tool. 12. Turn differential case upside down, and install another differential side bearing on the other side in the same way using Tool. SMT751DA 13. Install differential gear into differential case. Apply sealant onto mounting bolts, and tighten them in order as shown in the figure with specified torque. Differential gear mounting bolts : Refer to MT-21, "FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS" . SMT752D MT-58 SHIFT CONTROL [RS5F70A] SHIFT CONTROL Inspection ● PFP:32982 A ECS005U0 Check if the width of shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling sleeve) is within allowable specification below. Item One-side wear Sliding width of new part 1st & 2nd 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 3rd & 4th 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 5th & reverse 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) B MT D SMT801D E ● Check if shift check groove of fork rod or 5th & reverse check groove is worn, or has any other abnormalities. F G H SMT692D I J K L M MT-59 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F70A] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS005U1 TRANSAXLE Engine QG18DE Transaxle model RS5F70A Number of speeds 5 Synchromesh type Warner Shift pattern Gear ratio 1st 3.333 2nd 1.955 3rd 1.286 4th 0.926 5th 0.756 Reverse Number of teeth Input gear Main gear 3.214 1st 15 2nd 22 3rd 28 4th 41 5th 45 Rev. 14 1st 50 2nd 43 3rd 36 4th 38 5th 34 Rev. 45 Reverse idler gear Oil level (reference) Oil capacity 37 mm (in)*1 75.5 - 80.5 (2.972 - 3.169) 3.0 (3 1/8, 2 5/8) (US qt, Imp qt) Remarks 1st & 2nd double baulk ring type synchronizer Reverse sub-gear *1: Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . FINAL GEAR Engine QG18DE Transaxle model RS5F70A Final gear ratio Number of teeth 4.176 Final gear/pinion 71/17 Side gear/pinion mate gear 16/10 MT-60 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F70A] Gear End Play ECS005U2 Unit: mm (in) Gear A End play 1st main gear B 2nd main gear 5th main gear 0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122) MT Reverse main gear 3rd input gear 4th input gear 0.17 - 0.44 (0.0067 - 0.0173) D Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear ECS005U3 3RD, 4TH, 5TH, REVERSE BAULK RING Unit: mm (in) Gear Standard E Wear limit 3rd 4th F 0.90 - 1.45 (0.0354 - 0.0571) 0.7 (0.028) 5th Reverse 0.9 - 1.35 (0.0354 - 0.0531) G 1ST AND 2ND BAULK RING Unit: mm (in) H I J SMT906D Dimension Standard A 0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031) B 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) Wear limit L 0.2 (0.008) Available Snap Rings ECS005U4 SNAP RING End play 0.05 - 0.25 mm (0.0020 - 0.0098 in) Thickness Part number* 1.45 mm (0.0571 in) 32204-6J000 1.55 mm (0.0610 in) 32204-6J001 1.65 mm (0.0650 in) 32204-6J002 1.75 mm (0.0689 in) 32204-6J003 1.85 mm (0.0728 in) 32204-6J004 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. Available C-rings ECS005U5 4TH INPUT GEAR C-RING End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness Part number* MT-61 K M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F70A] 3.00 mm (0.1181 in) 32205-6J000 3.03 mm (0.1193 in) 32205-6J001 3.06 mm (0.1205 in) 32205-6J002 3.09 mm (0.1217 in) 32205-6J003 3.12 mm (0.1228 in) 32205-6J004 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. 5TH INPUT GEAR REAR C-RING End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness Part number* 2.59 mm (0.1020 in) 32205-6J005 2.62 mm (0.1031 in) 32205-6J006 2.65 mm (0.1043 in) 32205-6J007 2.68 mm (0.1055 in) 32205-6J008 2.71 mm (0.1067 in) 32205-6J009 2.74 mm (0.1079 in) 32205-6J010 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. MAINSHAFT C-RING End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness Part number* 3.48 mm (0.1370 in) 32348-6J000 3.51 mm (0.1382 in) 32348-6J001 3.54 mm (0.1394 in) 32348-6J002 3.57 mm (0.1406 in) 32348-6J003 3.60 mm (0.1417 in) 32348-6J004 3.63 mm (0.1429 in) 32348-6J005 3.66 mm (0.1441 in) 32348-6J006 3.69 mm (0.1453 in) 32348-6J007 3.72 mm (0.1465 in) 32348-6J008 3.75 mm (0.1476 in) 32348-6J009 3.78 mm (0.1488 in) 32348-6J010 3.81 mm (0.1500 in) 32348-6J011 3.84 mm (0.1512 in) 32348-6J012 3.87 mm (0.1524 in) 32348-6J013 3.90 mm (0.1535 in) 32348-6J014 3.93 mm (0.1547 in) 32348-6J015 3.96 mm (0.1559 in) 32348-6J016 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. Available Adjusting Shims ECS005U6 INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness Part number* 0.74 mm (0.0291 in) 32225-6J003 0.78 mm (0.0307 in) 32225-6J004 0.82 mm (0.0323 in) 32225-6J005 0.86 mm (0.0339 in) 32225-6J006 MT-62 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F70A] 0.90 mm (0.0354 in) 32225-6J007 0.94 mm (0.0370 in) 32225-6J008 0.98 mm (0.0386 in) 32225-6J009 1.02 mm (0.0402 in) 32225-6J010 1.06 mm (0.0417 in) 32225-6J011 1.10 mm (0.0433 in) 32225-6J012 1.14 mm (0.0449 in) 32225-6J013 1.18 mm (0.0465 in) 32225-6J014 1.22 mm (0.0480 in) 32225-6J015 1.26 mm (0.0496 in) 32225-6J016 1.30 mm (0.0512 in) 32225-6J017 1.34 mm (0.0528 in) 32225-6J018 1.38 mm (0.0543 in) 32225-6J019 1.42 mm (0.0559 in) 32225-6J020 1.46 mm (0.0575 in) 32225-6J021 1.50 mm (0.0591 in) 32225-6J022 1.54 mm (0.0606 in) 32225-6J023 1.58 mm (0.0622 in) 32225-6J024 1.62 mm (0.0638 in) 32225-6J060 1.66 mm (0.0654 in) 32225-6J061 A B MT D E F G H *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM I J K L SMT907D Standard length “L” 151.35 - 151.45 mm (5.9586 - 5.9626 in) Thickness Part number* 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 32238-6J000 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 32238-6J001 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 32238-6J002 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 32238-6J003 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 32238-6J004 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 32238-6J005 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness Part number* 2.99 mm (0.1177 in) 32238-6J010 3.03 mm (0.1193 in) 32238-6J011 MT-63 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F70A] 3.07 mm (0.1209 in) 32238-6J012 3.11 mm (0.1224 in) 32238-6J013 3.15 mm (0.1240 in) 32238-6J014 3.19 mm (0.1256 in) 32238-6J015 3.23 mm (0.1272 in) 32238-6J016 3.27 mm (0.1287 in) 32238-6J017 3.31 mm (0.1303 in) 32238-6J018 3.35 mm (0.1319 in) 32238-6J019 3.39 mm (0.1335 in) 32238-6J020 3.43 mm (0.1350 in) 32238-6J021 3.47 mm (0.1366 in) 32238-6J022 3.51 mm (0.1382 in) 32238-6J023 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. Available Thrust Washer ECS005U7 MAINSHAFT THRUST WASHER SMT843D Standard length “M” 244.20 - 244.30 mm (9.6142 - 9.6181 in) Thickness Part number* 6.04 mm (0.2378 in) 32246-6J000 6.12 mm (0.2409 in) 32246-6J001 6.20 mm (0.2441 in) 32246-6J002 6.28 mm (0.2472 in) 32246-6J003 6.36 mm (0.2504 in) 32246-6J004 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. Available Washers ECS005U8 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHER Clearance between side gear and differential case 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.75 - 0.80 (0.0295 - 0.0315) 38424-D2111 0.80 - 0.85 (0.0315 - 0.0335) 38424-D2112 0.85 - 0.90 (0.0335 - 0.0354) 38424-D2113 0.90 - 0.95 (0.0354 - 0.0374) 38424-D2114 0.95 - 1.00 (0.0374 - 0.0394) 38424-D2115 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. MT-64 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F70A] Available Shims — Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim ECS005U9 A BEARING PRELOAD Unit: mm (in) Differential side bearing preload T* 0.15 - 0.21 (0.0059 - 0.0083) B * Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “T” in thickness. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.44 (0.0173) 38454-M8000 0.48 (0.0189) 38454-M8001 0.52 (0.0205) 38454-M8002 0.56 (0.0220) 38454-M8003 0.60 (0.0236) 38454-M8004 0.64 (0.0252) 38454-M8005 0.68 (0.0268) 38454-M8006 0.72 (0.0283) 38454-M8007 0.76 (0.0299) 38454-M8008 0.80 (0.0315) 38454-M8009 0.84 (0.0331) 38454-M8010 0.88 (0.0346) 38454-M8011 *: Always check with the parts department for the latest information. MT D E F G H I J K L M MT-65 PRECAUTIONS [RS6F51H] PRECAUTIONS Caution ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 ECS005V2 Do not reuse transaxle oil, once it has been drained. Check oil level, and drain and refill transaxle oil with the vehicle on level ground. During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clean of dust and dirt. Check for the correct installation orientation prior to removal or disassembly. If mating marks are required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to. In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally and from inside to outside as applicable. If a tightening sequence is specified, follow it as specified. Be careful not to damage the sliding surfaces and mating surfaces of parts. MT-66 PREPARATION [RS6F51H] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS005V3 The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV381054S0 (J34286) Puller Side bearing outer race removal Mainshaft front bearing removal MT D ZZA0601D ST35321000 ( — ) Drift ZZA1000D ST30720000 (J25405) Drift E Input shaft oil seal installation Reverse main gear installation 1st bushing installation 1st-2nd synchronizer hub installation 2nd bushing installation 3rd main gear installation a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. Differential oil seal installation Differential side bearing outer race installation Mainshaft rear bearing installation Differential side bearing installation a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. F G H I ZZA0811D ST33200000 (J26082) Drift Mainshaft front bearing installation 6th bushing installation 4th main gear installation 5th main gear installation 6th main gear installation a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. J K ZZA1002D ST33061000 (J8107-2) Drift Bore plug installation Differential side bearing removal a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. L M ZZA1000D ST33052000 ( — ) Drift ZZA1023D MT-67 Welch plug installation Input shaft rear bearing removal 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th gear bushing, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd input gear removal Input shaft front bearing installation 6th input gear and 6th bushing removal Mainshaft rear bearing removal 4th main gear and 5th main gear removal 6th main gear removal a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. PREPARATION [RS6F51H] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV40105020 ( — ) Drift 5th input gear and synchronizer hub removal 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub, 1st main gear, reverse main gear and 1st bushing removal a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia. b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. c: 15 mm (0.59 in) ZZA1133D KV40105710 ( — ) Press stand ZZA1058D ST38220000 ( — ) Press stand 3rd-4th synchronizer hub installation 4th bushing installation 5th bushing installation 5th-6th synchronizer hub installation 2nd bushing installation 3rd main gear installation a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) Reverse main gear installation 1st bushing installation 1st-2nd synchronizer hub installation a: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in) ZZA1058D Input shaft front bearing installation a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. c: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia. ST30032000 (J26010-01) Drift ZZA0978D ST30901000 (J26010-01) Drift ZZA0978D ST30031000 (J22912-01) Puller Input shaft rear bearing installation 4th main gear installation 5th main gear installation 6th main gear installation Mainshaft rear bearing installation a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia. Measuring wear of 1st and 2nd baulk ring ZZA0537D MT-68 PREPARATION [RS6F51H] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description A KV40101630 (J35870) Drift Reverse main gear installation a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. B MT ZZA1003D KV38102510 ( — ) Drift 1st bushing installation 1st-2nd synchronizer hub installation Differential side bearing installation a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. D E ZZA0838D F Commercial Service Tools ECS005V4 Tool name Description Puller Each bearing gear and bushing removal G H I ZZB0823D Puller Each bearing gear and bushing removal J K NT077 Pin punch Each retaining pin removal and installation Tip: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia. L M ZZA0815D MT-69 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [RS6F51H] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 ECS005V5 3 1 Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 Jumps out of gear MT-102, MT-109 Gear (Worn or damaged) Bearing (Worn or damaged) MT-121 Shift fork (Worn) 3 3 3 2 2 1 MT-70 Check plug return spring and check ball (Worn or damaged) MT-76 O-Ring (Worn or damaged) Oil seal (Worn or damaged) 2 3 Insert spring, shifting insert (Damaged) Oil leakage Gasket (Damaged) 2 (Oil level is high) 1 Baulk ring (Worn or damaged) Symptom (Wrong oil) Noise (Oil level is low) Suspected parts (Possible cause) Control device and cable (Worn) MT-74 MA-30, "Checking M/T Oil" Reference page MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" MA-30, "Checking M/T Oil" Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. 2 3 3 DESCRIPTION [RS6F51H] DESCRIPTION Cross-sectional View PFP:00000 A ECS005V6 RS6F51H B MT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0364E MT-71 DESCRIPTION [RS6F51H] 1. Input shaft rear bearing 2. 6th input gear 3. 5th & 6th synchronizer 4. 5th input gear 5. 4th input gear 6. 3rd & 4th synchronizer 7. 3rd input gear 8. Reverse idler gear (rear) 9. Reverse synchronizer 10. Reverse idler gear (front) 11. Reverse idler shaft 12. Clutch housing 13. Input shaft front bearing 14. Input shaft 15. Mainshaft 16. Mainshaft front bearing 17. Speedometer drive gear 18. Differential side bearing (front) 19. Final gear 20. Differential case 21. Differential side bearing (rear) 22. Reverse main gear 23. 1st main gear 24. 1st & 2nd synchronizer 25. 2nd main gear 26. 3rd main gear 27. 4th main gear 28. 5th main gear 29. 6th main gear 30. Mainshaft rear bearing DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER The 1st gear is equipped with a double-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the shift lever as shown. WCIA0202E TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER The 2nd gear is equipped with a triple-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the control lever as shown. WCIA0204E REVERSE GEAR Description of the reverse gear components are as shown. SCIA0751E MT-72 M/T OIL [RS6F51H] M/T OIL Replacement PFP:KLD20 A ECS005V7 DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle oil. Stop the engine. Remove drain plug and drain oil. Set a new gasket on the drain plug and install it in transaxle body. Drain plug B MT : 30 - 39 N·m (3.1 - 4.0 kg-m, 23 - 28 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. D E WCIA0022E FILLING 1. Oil grade Capacity (approximately) 2. F Remove filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. : API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 : 2.2 G (2 3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt) After refilling oil, check oil level. Assemble a new gasket on to filler plug, then install it in transaxle body. Filler plug H : 30 - 39 N·m (3.1 - 4.0 kg-m, 23 - 28 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. WCIA0022E Checking ECS005V8 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ● ● ● Check that oil is not leaking from transaxle. Check oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Never start engine while checking oil level. Set a new gasket on the filler plug and install it in transaxle body. Filler plug I J K L : 30 - 39 N·m (3.1 - 4.0 kg-m, 23 - 28 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. M WCIA0022E MT-73 SIDE OIL SEAL [RS6F51H] SIDE OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:32113 ECS005V9 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the drive shaft from the transaxle body. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . Remove oil seal with a slotted screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the case surface when removing the oil seal. WCIA0023E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Using Tool (drift), drive the new oil seal straight until it protrudes from the case end equal to dimension "A" as shown. Dimension "A" Tool (drift) ● : Within 0.5 mm (0.02 in) or flush with the case. : ST30720000 (J25405) CAUTION: ● Before installing oil seal, apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. ● Oil seal is not reusable. Check oil level after installation. Refer to MT-73, "Checking" . MT-74 SCIA1010E POSITION SWITCH [RS6F51H] POSITION SWITCH Checking PFP:32005 A ECS005VA NOTE: For removal and installation of the switches. Refer to MT-81, "Component Parts" . B BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ● Check continuity. MT Gear position Continuity Reverse Yes Except reverse No D E SCIA0708E F PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ● Check continuity. Gear position Continuity Neutral Yes Except neutral No G H I J K L M MT-75 CONTROL LINKAGE [RS6F51H] CONTROL LINKAGE Removal and Installation of Control Device and Cable PFP:34103 ECS006H6 WCIA0136E 1. Snap pin 2. Washer 3. Cable 4. Manual lever 5. Shift cable 6. Lock plate 7. Control device assembly 8. Lock plate 9. Select cable 10. Shift cable 11. Control lever knob MT-76 12. Control lever CONTROL LINKAGE [RS6F51H] 13. Control device assembly 14. Cover 15. Select cable 16. Floor 17. Pin 18. Shift cable 19. Washer 20. Clutch housing 21. Cable mounting bracket 22. Select cable 23. Shift cable 24. Lock plate A B 25. Lock plate CAUTION: ● Note that the select side lock plate for securing the control cable is different from the one on the MT shift side. ● After assembly, make sure selector lever automatically returns to Neutral when it is moved to 1st, 2nd, or Reverse. D Cable Adjustment ECS006S7 NOTE: After installation of the select cable, the cable must be adjusted for proper operation. This adjustment is performed before installing the interior console and shift boot. 1. Slide clip “B” from under clip “A” as shown. E F G H LCIA0303E I 2. 3. Shift the control lever to the neutral position. CAUTION: Do not move the control lever when adjusting the cables. Push clip “A” into the cable end case until it snaps into place as shown. J K L M LCIA0304E 4. Slide clip “B” back over clip “A” until it snaps into place and holds clip “A” in place as shown. LCIA0305E MT-77 AIR BREATHER HOSE [RS6F51H] AIR BREATHER HOSE Removal and Installation PFP:31098 ECS005VC LCIA0033E CAUTION: ● Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or winding when installing it. ● Insert the air breather hose into the transaxle tube until the overlap area reaches the spool. MT-78 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:32010 A ECS005VD B MT D E F G H I WCIA0109E REMOVAL J 1. 2. 3. 4. K 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Remove the battery. Remove the air breather hose. Remove the clutch operating cylinder. CAUTION: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the removal procedure. Remove the engine under cover. Disconnect the control cable from the transaxle. Refer to MT-76, "Removal and Installation of Control Device and Cable" . Drain the gear oil from the transaxle. Refer to MA-30, "Changing M/T Oil" . Remove the connectors and harnesses for: ● PNP switch ● Speed sensor ● Back-up lamp switch ● Ground Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the drive shaft. Refer to FAX-14, "Removal" . Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-20, "Removal and Installation" . Place a suitable jack under the transaxle. CAUTION: When setting the jack, be careful not to bring it into contact with the switches. Remove the center member, engine insulator, and engine mount bracket. Support the engine by placing a jack under the engine oil pan. MT-79 L M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 15. Remove the bolts that mount the engine to the transaxle. 16. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle as shown. MTD0062D INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. ● When installing the transaxle to the engine, use them specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence as shown. CAUTION: When installing the transaxle, do not allow the transaxle input shaft to make contact with the clutch cover. Bolt No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 “ 40 82 47 47 52 40 40 40 30 30 ” mm (in) Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) ● ● 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29) 70 - 80 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 59) 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29) After installation, check the transaxle oil level. Refer to MT-73, "Checking" . After installation, check for any leaks and any loose mechanisms. LCIA0036E MT-80 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] Component Parts ECS005VE A CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS B MT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA1062E 1. Clutch housing 2. Input shaft oil seal 3. Oil channel 4. Magnet 5. Differential oil seal 6. Ball pin 7. Washer Welch plug 8. Transaxle case 9. 10. Bore plug 11. Differential oil seal 12. Park/Neutral position switch 13. Oil gutter 14. Back-up lamp switch 15. Air breather tube 16. Baffle plate 17. Filler plug 18. Gasket 19. Drain plug 20. Gasket MT-81 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] GEAR COMPONENTS SCIA0956E 1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. Needle bearing 4. 3rd input gear 5. 3rd baulk ring 6. Spread spring 7. 3rd & 4th shifting insert 8. 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub 9. 4th baulk ring 10. 3rd & 4th coupling sleeve 11. Bushing 12. Needle bearing 13. 4th input gear 14. Thrust washer 15. Bushing 16. Needle bearing 17. 5th input gear 18. 5th baulk ring 19. 5th & 6th shifting insert 20. 5th & 6th synchronizer hub 21. 5th & 6th coupling sleeve 22. Baulk ring 23. 6th input gear 24. Needle bearing 25. Bushing 26. Snap ring 27. Input shaft rear bearing 28. Oil channel 29. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim 30. Retaining pin 31. Reverse idler shaft 32. Thrust bearing 33. Needle bearing 34. Reverse idler gear (front) 35. Reverse baulk ring 36. Reverse coupling sleeve 37. Insert spring 38. Reverse idler gear (rear) 39. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim MT-82 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] A B MT D E F G H SCIA0957E 1. Mainshaft front bearing 2. Mainshaft bearing retainer 3. Mainshaft 4. Reverse main gear 5. 1st main gear 6. Bushing 7. Needle bearing 8. 1st inner baulk ring 9. 1st gear synchronizer cone 10. 1st outer baulk ring 11. Spread spring 12. 1st & 2nd shifting insert 13. 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub 14. 2nd outer baulk ring 15. 2nd gear synchronizer cone 16. 2nd inner baulk ring 17. 1st & 2nd coupling sleeve 18. Bushing 19. Needle bearing 20. 2nd main gear 21. 3rd main gear 22. 3rd & 4th mainshaft spacer 23. 4th main adjusting shim 24. 4th main gear 25. 5th main gear 26. 6th main gear 27. Mainshaft rear bearing 28. Mainshaft C-ring 29. C-ring holder 30. Snap ring 31. Snap ring 32. Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim 33. 5th & 6th mainshaft spacer 34. 6th main adjusting shim I J K L M MT-83 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS SCIA0958E 1. Reverse shift fork 2. Shifter cap 3. Reverse fork rod 4. Reverse lever assembly 5. 5th & 6th bracket 6. 5th & 6th fork rod 7. 5th & 6th shift fork 8. Retaining pin 9. 3rd & 4th bracket 10. 3rd & 4th shift fork 11. 3rd & 4th fork rod 12. 1st & 2nd shift fork 13. 1st & 2nd bracket 14. 1st & 2nd fork rod 15. Shift check sleeve 16. Inter lock pin 17. Check ball 18. Shift check sleeve 19. Check spring 20. Check plug 21. Control assembly 22. O-ring 23. Shift check 24. Stopper bolt 25. Stopper ring 26. Reverse bracket fork rod 27. Reverse bracket MT-84 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS A B MT D E F G H WCIA0207E 1. Differential side bearing outer race 2. Differential side bearing 3. Speedometer drive gear 4. Differential case 5. Final gear 6. Differential side bearing 7. Differential side bearing outer race 8. Differential side bearing adjusting shim Disassembly and Assembly J ECS005VF DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. I K Remove the drain plug and filler plug. Remove the park/neutral position switch and back-up lamp switch. After removing the shift check and stopper bolt, remove the control assembly. L M SCIA0389E 4. Remove the 2 check ball plugs, 2 check springs, and 2 check balls as shown. Discard the check ball plug. CAUTION: Check ball plugs are not reusable. LCIA0302E MT-85 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 5. Remove the transaxle case bolts as shown. SCIA0983E 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the bore plug. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case. While spreading the snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing located at bore plug hole, remove the transaxle case. Remove the oil gutter and baffle plate. Remove the snap ring, mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, and input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim from the transaxle case. 10. Remove the differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case side) using Tool as shown, and then remove the adjusting shim. SCIA1021E 11. Remove the welch plug with a suitable punch and hammer as shown. SCIA0402E 12. Remove the differential oil seal with a suitable tool as shown. SCIA0397E 13. Remove the magnet from the clutch housing. MT-86 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 14. Remove the reverse check ball plug, reverse check spring, reverse shift check sleeve, and check ball. Discard the check ball plug. A CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the check ball plug. ● Do not drop the check ball. B 15. With the shift lever in 5th position, remove the bracket bolts from the reverse lever assembly as shown. Lift the reverse lever assembly to remove. MT CAUTION: Retain the shifter cap for installation. D E SCIA0960E 16. Pull out the reverse fork rod then remove the reverse shift fork. 17. Remove the retaining pin of the reverse bracket. F G H I SCIA0961E 18. Pull out the reverse lever and the reverse bracket fork rod. 19. Remove the two check balls and the interlock pin. 20. Shift the 3rd-4th fork rod to the 3rd position. Remove the retaining pin of the 5th-6th shift fork using a pin punch. J K L M SCIA0962E 21. Remove the stopper rings for the 5th-6th bracket. SCIA0963E 22. Pull out the 5th-6th fork rod and remove the 5th-6th shift fork and the 5th-6th bracket. 23. Remove the check balls (2 pieces) and interlock pin. MT-87 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 24. Remove the retaining pin of 3rd-4th bracket using pin punch. 25. Remove the stopper rings for 3rd-4th shift fork. SCIA0393E 26. Pull out the 3rd-4th fork rod and remove 3rd-4th shift fork and bracket. 27. Remove the shift check sleeve from the clutch housing. 28. Remove the retaining pin of 1st-2nd shift fork using a suitable pin punch. SCIA0394E 29. Pull out the 1st-2nd fork rod with bracket. 30. Remove the 1st-2nd shift fork. 31. Remove the retaining pin of 1st-2nd bracket using a suitable pin punch and separate the fork rod and bracket. 32. Remove the gear components from the clutch housing. a. While tapping the input shaft with a plastic hammer, remove the input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse idler gear assembly as a set. CAUTION: Always withdraw the mainshaft straight out. Failure to do so can damage the resin oil channel on the clutch housing side. b. Remove the final drive assembly. SCIA0964E 33. Remove the bearing retainer and then the mainshaft front bearing as shown. 34. Remove the oil channel on the mainshaft side. SCIA0400E MT-88 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 35. Remove the differential oil seal (clutch housing side) using Tool as shown. A B MT SMT117E D 36. Remove the differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing side) using Tool as shown. E F G SMT116E 37. Remove the input shaft oil seal using a suitable tool as shown. CAUTION: Do not damage the clutch housing sealing surface. H I J SCIA0398E K ASSEMBLY 1. Install a new input shaft oil seal from the clutch housing end of the side, to the depth of 1.8 - 2.8 mm (0.071 - 0.110 in) using Tool (drift) as shown. CAUTION: Oil seals are not reusable. L M SCIA1022E MT-89 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 2. Install a new differential oil seal using Tool (drift) as shown. CAUTION: Oil seals are not reusable. SCIA1023E 3. Install the oil channel on the mainshaft side as shown. CAUTION: Position the oil channel with the orientation as shown, for installation. SCIA0986E 4. Install the mainshaft front bearing using Tool (drift) as shown. CAUTION: Position the mainshaft front bearing with the orientation as shown, for installation SCIA1024E 5. Install the mainshaft front bearing retainer. CAUTION: Install the bearing retainer with the punched surface facing up. Bearing retainer bolt : 6.27 - 8.33 N·m (0.64 0.84 kg-m, 56 - 73 in-lb) SCIA0400E 6. Install the differential side bearing outer race using Tool as shown. SCIA1063E MT-90 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 7. Install the final drive assembly into the clutch housing. A B MT SCIA0888E D 8. Install the input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse idler gear assembly into the clutch housing. CAUTION: Do not damage the input shaft oil seal. E F G SCIA0964E 9. Install the 1st-2nd fork rod bracket onto the 1st-2nd fork rod, and then install a new retaining pin as shown. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. H I J SCIA0889E 10. Install the 1st-2nd fork rod and the 1st-2nd shift fork, and then install a new retaining pin. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. K L M SCIA0394E 11. Install the shift check sleeve. 12. Install the 3rd-4th bracket, 3rd-4th shift fork, and 3rd-4th fork rod with the interlock pin. MT-91 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 13. Install the new stopper rings onto the 3rd-4th shift fork. CAUTION: Stopper rings are not reusable. 14. Install a new retaining pin onto the 3rd-4th bracket. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. SCIA0393E 15. Install the 2 check balls. 16. Install the 5th-6th bracket, 5th-6th shift fork, and 5th-6th fork rod. 17. Install new stopper rings onto the 5th-6th bracket with interlock pin. CAUTION: Stopper rings are not reusable. SCIA0963E 18. Install a new retaining pin onto the 5th-6th shift fork. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. SCIA0962E 19. Install the two check balls. 20. Install the check ball, 5th-6th shift check sleeve, 5th-6th check spring, and 5th-6th check ball plug. Discard the check ball plug. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the check ball plug. ● Do not drop the check ball. 21. Install the reverse bracket fork rod and reverse lever bracket. 22. Install a new retaining pin onto the reverse bracket. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. SCIA0961E 23. Install the reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod. MT-92 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 24. Install the reverse lever assembly using the following steps: a. Install the shifter cap onto the reverse lever assembly cam, and then install them onto the reverse shift fork. CAUTION: Do not drop the shifter cap. b. While lifting the reverse shift fork, align the cam with the reverse bracket. A B MT D E SCIA0965E c. Tighten the bracket bolts to specification, and install the reverse lever assembly. Bracket bolts F : 11.8 - 15.6 N·m (1.2 - 1.5 kg-m, 9 - 11 ft-lb) G H SCIA0960E 25. Install the check ball, reverse shift check sleeve, reverse check spring, and reverse check ball plug. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the check ball plug. ● Do not drop the check ball. 26. Install the magnet onto the clutch housing. 27. Install the selected input shaft adjusting shim onto the input shaft. ● For selection of adjusting shims, refer to MT-96, "INPUTSHAFT END PLAY" . 28. Install the baffle plate and oil gutter. 29. Install the transaxle case using the following steps: a. Install the selected mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim into the transaxle case. ● For selection of adjusting shims, refer to MT-98, "MAINSHAFT END PLAY" . b. Temporarily install the snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing into the transaxle case. CAUTION: Do not reuse the snap ring. c. Apply sealant to the mating surfaces of the transaxle case and clutch housing as shown. Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the sealant application and mounting surfaces. SCIA0891E MT-93 I J K L M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] d. Using a snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing temporarily, install the transaxle case over the clutch housing as shown. SCIA0892E e. f. Through the bore plug mounting hole, with the snap ring stretched, lift up the mainshaft assembly from the control assembly mounting hole. Securely install the snap ring onto the mainshaft rear bearing as shown. SCIA0893E g. Tighten the “A” bolts (gold) and new “B” bolts (black) to specification. “A” Bolt “B” Bolt : 50.0 - 53.9 N·m (5.1 - 5.4 kg-m, 37 - 39 ft-lb) : 63.0 - 66.9 N·m (6.5 - 6.8 kg-m, 47 - 49 ft-lb) CAUTION: Always replace the “B” bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. SCIA1064E h. i. Install the control assembly using new O-rings. CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. Install a new shift check and a new stopper bolt. CAUTION: Shift check and stopper bolt are not reusable. MT-94 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 30. Install a new bore plug using Tool (drift) as shown. CAUTION: Bore plugs are not reusable. A B MT SCIA1025E D 31. Install the new welch plug using Tool (drift). CAUTION: Do not reuse the welch plug E F G SMT131E 32. Install the 2 check balls, 2 check springs, and 2 new check ball plugs. CAUTION: Check ball plugs are not reusable. H I J LCIA0302E 33. Apply sealant to the threads of the neutral switch and reverse lamp switch. Then install them into the transaxle case. Refer to MT-81, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" . Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . K L M SCIA0895E 34. Install new gaskets onto the drain plug and filler plug, and then install them into the transaxle case. CAUTION: ● Gaskets are not reusable. ● After oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specification. Refer to MT-81, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" . MT-95 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] Adjustment ECS005VG INPUTSHAFT END PLAY When adjusting the input shaft end play, select the adjusting shim for the input shaft bearing. To select the correct thickness for the adjusting shim, measure the clearance between the transaxle case and input shaft rear bearing. Calculate the dimension “O” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following steps to adjust the input shaft rear bearing for the specified end play. ● ● SCIA1001E CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “O” = (“O1 ” - “O2 ”) + End play “O” : Thickness of adjusting shim. “O1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim. “O2 ” : Distance between clutch housing case end face and end face of input shaft rear bearing. Adjusting Shims Shim thickness Part number Shim thickness Part number Shim thickness Part number 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) 0.44 mm (0.0173 in) 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 32225 8H500 32225 8H501 32225 8H502 32225 8H503 32225 8H504 32225 8H505 32225 8H506 32225 8H507 32225 8H508 32225 8H509 32225 8H510 32225 8H511 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.00 mm (0.0396 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 1.12 mm (0.0441 in) 1.16 mm (0.0457 in) 1.20 mm (0.0472 in) 1.24 mm (0.0488 in) 1.28 mm (0.0504 in) 1.32 mm (0.0520 in) 32225 8H512 32225 8H513 32225 8H514 32225 8H515 32225 8H516 32225 8H517 32225 8H518 32225 8H519 32225 8H520 32225 8H521 32225 8H522 32225 8H523 1.36 mm (0.0520 in) 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) 1.44 mm (0.0567 in) 1.48 mm (0.0583 in) 1.52 mm (0.0598 in) 1.56 mm (0.0614 in) 1.60 mm (0.0630 in) 1.64 mm (0.0646 in) 32225 8H524 32225 8H560 32225 8H561 32225 8H562 32225 8H563 32225 8H564 32225 8H565 32225 8H566 1. Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “O1 ” between the transaxle case end face and mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown. SCIA1002E MT-96 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 2. Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “O2 ” between the clutch housing case end face and end face of the input shaft rear bearing as shown. A B MT SCIA1004E D 3. Install the selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto the input shaft. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ● ● E When adjusting differential side bearing preload, select adjusting shim for differential side bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance “L” between transaxle case and differential side bearing outer race. Calculate dimension “L” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to meet specification of preload for differential side bearing. F G Preload : 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in) Dimension “L” = (“L1 ” - “L2 ”) + Preload “L” : Thickness of adjusting shim “L1 ” : Distance between clutch housing case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim “L2 ” : Distance between differential side bearing and transaxle case H SCIA0896E I CAUTION: Up to only 2 adjusting shims can be selected. J Adjusting Shim 1. Shim thickness Part number 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 31438 80X00 31438 80X01 31438 80X02 31438 80X03 31438 80X04 31438 80X05 31438 80X06 31438 80X07 31438 80X08 31438 80X09 31438 80X10 31438 80X11 K L M Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “L1 ” between the clutch housing case end face and mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown. SCIA1078E MT-97 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] 2. 3. Install the outer race onto the differential side bearing on the final gear side. Holding the outer race horizontally by hand, rotate the final gear five times or more (for smooth movement of the bearing roller). Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “L2 ” between the differential side bearing outer race and transaxle case end face as shown. SCIA1079E 4. Install the selected adjusting shim and then the differential side bearing outer race using Tool as shown. SCIA1026E MAINSHAFT END PLAY ● ● When adjusting the mainshaft end play, select the adjusting shim for the mainshaft rear bearing. To select the adjusting shim, measure clearance “M” between the transaxle case and mainshaft rear bearing. Calculate the dimension “P” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to meet specification of end play for mainshaft rear bearing. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “P” = “M” + End play “P” : Thickness of adjusting shim “M” : Distance between mainshaft rear bearing and transaxle case CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. MT-98 SCIA0904E TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] Adjusting Shim Shim thickness Part number 0.44 mm (0.0173 in) 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.00 mm (0.0396 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 32238 8H510 32238 8H511 32238 8H512 32238 8H513 32238 8H514 32238 8H515 32238 8H516 32238 8H517 32238 8H518 32238 8H519 32238 8H520 32238 8H521 32238 8H522 32238 8H523 32238 8H524 32238 8H560 32238 8H561 A B MT D E F 1. 2. 3. 4. Install the mainshaft assembly to the clutch housing. Install the snap ring to the transaxle case. Install the transaxle case to clutch housing, and temporarily assemble them with fixing bolts. Temporarily install the snap ring to the mainshaft rear bearing. Install the dial gauge to the snap ring access hole, and expand the snap ring as shown. Lift the mainshaft assembly through the control assembly installation hole, and push it against the transaxle case. This state shall be defined as base. Moving the distance of the mainshaft assembly, with the snap ring installed on the main bearing, becomes “M”. G H I J SCIA1017E K REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY ● ● When adjusting the reverse idler gear end play, select the adjusting shim for the reverse idler gear. To select the correct thickness of adjusting shim, measure the clearance between the transaxle case and reverse idler gear. Calculate the dimension “Q” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following steps to adjust the end play of the reverse idler gear to specification. End play : 0.04 - 0.14 mm (0.0016 - 0.0055 in) Dimension “Q” = (“Q1 ” - “Q2 ”) + End play “Q” : Thickness of adjusting shim “Q1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim “Q2 ” : Distance between clutch housing case end face and end face of reverse idler gear CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. MT-99 L M SCIA1007E TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51H] Adjusting Shim 1. Shim thickness Part number 1.76 mm (0.0693 in) 1.84 mm (0.0724 in) 1.92 mm (0.0756 in) 2.00 mm (0.0787 in) 2.08 mm (0.0819 in) 2.16 mm (0.0850 in) 2.24 mm (0.0882 in) 2.32 mm (0.0913 in) 2.40 mm (0.0945 in) 2.48 mm (0.0976 in) 2.56 mm (0.1008 in) 2.64 mm (0.1039 in) 32237 8H500 32237 8H501 32237 8H502 32237 8H503 32237 8H504 32237 8H505 32237 8H506 32237 8H507 32237 8H508 32237 8H509 32237 8H510 32237 8H511 Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “Q1 ” between the transaxle case end face and the mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown. SCIA1003E 2. Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “Q2 ” between the clutch housing case end face and the end face of reverse idler gear as shown. SCIA1005E 3. Install the selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto the reverse idler gear. MT-100 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32200 A ECS005VH DISASSEMBLY 1. Before disassembling, measure the end play for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th input gears. B End play standard values 3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in) 4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) 6th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) CAUTION: If measurement is outside the standard value, disassemble to check the contact surfaces of the gear, shaft, and, hub. Adjust using the correct size snap ring for assembly. 2. 3. 4. MT D SCIA0966E Remove the oil channel. Remove the input shaft rear bearing using Tool as shown. Remove the snap ring. E F G H I SCIA1037E 5. 6. Remove the 6th input gear, 6th bushing, and 6th needle bearing using Tool as shown. Remove the 6th baulk ring, 5th-6th coupling sleeve, and shifting insert. J K L SCIA1038E 7. 8. Remove the 5th input gear and synchronizer hub assembly simultaneously using Tool as shown. Remove the 5th needle bearing. SMT137E MT-101 M INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 9. Remove the 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th needle bearing, 4th bushing, 4th baulk ring, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly, 3rd baulk ring, and 3rd input gear simultaneously using Tool as shown. 10. Remove the 3rd needle bearing. SCIA1030E 11. Remove the input shaft front bearing using Tool as shown. SCIA0920E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Input Shaft and Gear Inspect the components for the following conditions as shown. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, or bending of the input shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage, or peeling of the input gears. SMT636A Synchronizer Check the items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and excessive wear of the contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as shown. SMT387A MT-102 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] ● If any cracks, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam face of baulk ring or working face of the insert as shown, replace it. A B MT SMT867D D Baulk ring clearance Press the baulk ring against cone, and measure clearance between baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it with a new one. E Clearance - standard 3rd and 4th : 0.9 - 1.45 mm (0.035 - 0.0571 in) 5th and 6th : 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in) Limit : 0.7 mm (0.028 in) F G SMT140 H Bearing Check the items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Rough rotation of the bearing as shown. ● Damage to the bearing. I J K MTF0041D ASSEMBLY L 1. 2. 3. M Install the 3rd needle bearing. Install the 3rd input gear and 3rd baulk ring. Install the spread spring, shifting insert, and a new 3rd-4th synchronizer hub onto the 3rd-4th coupling sleeve. CAUTION: Do not reuse the 3rd-4th synchronizer hub. ● Install with orientation of the synchronizer hub as shown. SCIA0921E MT-103 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] ● Install with orientation of coupling sleeve as shown. SCIA0993E ● Be sure not to hook the ends of the 2 spread springs (front and back have two each) on the same shifting insert. SCIA1083E 4. Install 3rd-4th coupling sleeve assembly using Tool as shown. CAUTION: Align the grooves of the shifting insert and the 3rd baulk ring. SCIA1031E 5. 6. 7. Install the 4th bushing using Tool as shown. Install the 4th baulk ring. Install the 4th input gear and 4th needle bearing. SCIA1032E MT-104 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 8. Measure the dimension “C2 ” as shown. Select a thrust washer so that dimension “C2 ” satisfies standard dimension specification. Then install the thrust washer onto the input shaft. Standard for dimension “C2 ” A : 154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094 in) B CAUTION: Only 1 thrust washer can be selected. MT D E F G SCIA0925E Thrust Washer Thickness Part number Thickness Part number H 3.84 mm (0.1512 in) 3.90 mm (0.1535 in) 3.96 mm (0.1559 in) 32347 8H500 32347 8H501 32347 8H502 4.02 mm (0.1583 in) 4.08 mm (0.1606 in) 4.14 mm (0.1630 in) 32347 8H503 32347 8H504 32347 8H505 I 9. Install the 5th bushing using Tool as shown. 10. Install the 5th needle bearing and 5th input gear. 11. Install the 5th baulk ring. J K L SCIA1033E M 12. Install the synchronizer assembly onto a new 5th-6th synchronizer hub. CAUTION: Do not reuse the 5th-6th synchronizer hub. ● Install with the orientation of the synchronizer hub as shown. SCIA0921E MT-105 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] ● Be sure not to hook the ends of the 2 spread springs (front and back have two each) on the same shifting insert. SCIA1083E 13. Install the 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly using Tool as shown. CAUTION: Align the grooves of the 5th-6th shifting insert and 5th-6th baulk ring. SCIA1039E 14. Install the needle bearing, 6th input gear and then 6th bushing using Tool as shown. SCIA1040E 15. Install the snap ring onto the input shaft, and measure to check that end play (gap between snap ring and groove) of the 6th bushing is within specification. End play standard value ● : 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) If the measurement is outside the standard value, select the appropriate size snap ring. SCIA0970E Snap Rings Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 1.76 mm (0.0693 in) 1.81 mm (0.0713 in) 1.86 mm (0.0732 in) 1.91 mm (0.0752 in) 1.96 mm (0.0772 in) 32204 8H511 32204 8H512 32204 8H513 32204 8H514 32204 8H515 2.01 mm (0.0791 in) 2.06 mm (0.0811 in) 2.11 mm (0.0831 in) 2.16 mm (0.0850 in) 2.21 mm (0.0871 in) 32204 8H516 32204 8H517 32204 8H518 32204 8H519 32204 8H520 MT-106 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 16. Install the input shaft rear bearing using Tool as shown. CAUTION: Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing the input gear side. A B MT SCIA1041E D 17. Install the input shaft front bearing using Tool as shown. 18. Install the oil channel onto the input shaft. E F G SCIA1042E 19. Check the end play of the 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th input gears as shown. H End play standard value 3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in) 4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) 6th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) I J SCIA0966E K L M MT-107 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] MAINSHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32241 ECS005VI DISASSEMBLY 1. Before disassembling, measure the end play of 1st and 2nd main gears as shown. End play standard value 1st gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 2nd gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) CAUTION: If the measurement is outside the standard value, disassemble to check the contact surfaces of gear, shaft, and hub. Adjust with the snap ring at assembly. SCIA0973E 2. 3. Remove the snap ring. Remove the C-ring holder, and then mainshaft C-ring as shown. SCIA0974E 4. 5. Remove the mainshaft rear bearing, adjust shim, and 6th main gear using Tool as shown. Remove the 5th-6th mainshaft spacer. SCIA1056E 6. 7. 8. Remove the 4th main gear and 5th main gear simultaneously using Tool as shown. Remove the adjusting shim. Remove the 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer. SCIA1044E MT-108 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 9. Remove the 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd gear needle bearing, 2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly, 1st main gear, reverse main gear, 1st gear needle bearing, and 1st bushing simultaneously using Tool as shown. A B MT SCIA1045E D INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Mainshaft and Gears Check the items listed as shown. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other nonstandard conditions of the mainshaft. ● Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard conditions of the mainshaft gears. E F G SMT640A H Synchronizer Check the items listed as shown. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as shown. I J K SMT387A ● L If any cracks, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam face of baulk ring or working face of the insert, replace it. M SMT867D MT-109 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] Baulk Ring Clearance Double Cone Synchronizer (1st) Check the clearance of outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring of 1st double cone synchronizer, using the following steps. NOTE: The mean value is the middle value of a set of measurements between the highest and lowest values. It is calculated by adding the highest and lowest measured value and dividing their sum by two: [(high value) + (low value)] / 2 = mean value. CAUTION: Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring act as a set to control the clearances “A” and “B”. If the measurement exceeds the service limit value, replace all of them as a set. 1. SMT138E Using a dial gauge and Tool, measure clearance “A” at two or more points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value. Clearance “A” Standard Limit value : 0.6 - 0.8 mm (0.024 - 0.031 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less SCIA1046E 2. Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance “B” at two or more points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value as shown. Clearance “B” Standard Limit value : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less SCIA1084E Triple Cone Synchronizer (2nd) Check the clearance of the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring of the 2nd triple cone synchronizers, using the following procedure. CAUTION: The outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring operate as a set to control the clearances “A”, “B”, and “C”. If the measured clearances exceed the service limit value, replace the components as a set. NOTE: To calculate the mean value of two or more measured values, add the highest and lowest measured values and divide by two. MT-110 WCIA0195E MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 3. Press the baulk ring on to the clutch gear taper cone by hand, then measure the clearance “A” at two or more points diagonally opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value. A Clearance “A” Standard : 0.6 - 1.2 mm (0.024 - 0.047 in) Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) B MT LCIA0298E 4. D Measure clearances “B” at two or more points diagonally opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value. Clearance “B” Standard : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) Limit : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) E F G SCIA1084E 5. Press the baulk ring on to the clutch gear taper cone by hand, then measure the clearance “C” at two or more points diagonally opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value. H Clearance “C” Standard : 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in) Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) I J LCIA0300E K Bearing Check the items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Rough rotation of the bearing as shown. ● Damage to the bearing. L M MTF0041D MT-111 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] ASSEMBLY 1. Install the reverse main gear using Tool as shown. SCIA1048E CAUTION: Install with the orientation of reverse main gear as shown. SCIA0992E 2. 3. Install the 1st bushing using Tool as shown. Install the needle bearing, and then the 1st main gear. SCIA1049E 4. Install the spread spring, shifting insert, and a new 1st-2nd synchronizer hub onto the 1st-2nd coupling sleeve. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse 1st-2nd synchronizer hub ● Install with the orientation of the new synchronizer hub as shown. SCIA0921E MT-112 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] ● Install with the orientation of coupling sleeve as shown. A B MT SCIA0989E D ● Do not hook the ends of the two spread springs (front and back have two each) on the same shifting insert. E F G SCIA1083E 5. Install the 1st-2nd coupling sleeve assembly onto the mainshaft, and the synchronizer hub assembly onto the mainshaft using Tool as shown. CAUTION: ● Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring on the 2nd gear-side must have been removed. ● Install the coupling sleeve with the proper orientation. H I J SCIA1050E 6. 7. 8. Install the 2nd bushing using Tool as shown. Install the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring on 2nd gear-side. Install the 2nd needle bearing and 2nd gear. K L M SCIA1051E 9. Install the 3rd main gear. CAUTION: Install the 3rd main gear with the orientation as shown. 10. Install the 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer. SCIA1052E MT-113 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 11. Measure the dimension “C1 ”. Select a suitable adjusting shim so that the dimension “C1 ” satisfies the specified standard value, and install it onto the mainshaft. Standard for dimension “C1 ” : 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848 in) CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. SCIA0944E Adjusting Shim Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 32238 8H500 32238 8H501 32238 8H502 32238 8H503 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 1.00 mm (0.0394 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 32238 8H504 32238 8H505 32238 8H506 32238 8H507 12. Install the 4th main gear with the specified orientation as shown, using Tool as shown. CAUTION: Install the 4th main gear with the orientation as shown. SCIA1053E 13. Install the 5th main gear with the specified orientation as shown, using Tool as shown. CAUTION: Install the 5th main gear with the orientation as shown. 14. Install the 5th-6th mainshaft spacer. SCIA1054E MT-114 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 15. Install the 6th main gear using Tool as shown. A B MT SCIA1057E D 16. Select the 6th main adjusting shim and then install it onto the mainshaft. ● Calculate thickness “S” of 6th main adjusting shim by procedure below so that end play dimension between 6th main gear and mainshaft rear bearing becomes the dimension specified. E End play : 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Dimension “S” = (“S1 ” – “S2 ”) + End play “S” : Thickness of adjusting shim “S2 ” : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to mainshaft rear bearing press-fit end face “S2 ” : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to 6th main gear end face F G H CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. I J K SCIA0995E Adjusting Shim a. b. Thickness Part number Thickness Part number L 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.12 mm (0.0441 in) 32237 8H560 32237 8H561 32237 8H562 32237 8H563 1.20 mm (0.0472 in) 1.28 mm (0.0504 in) 1.36 mm (0.0535 in) 32237 8H564 32237 8H565 32237 8H566 M Using a height gauge, measure the dimension “S1 ” and “S2 ” as shown. Install the selected 6th main adjusting shim to the mainshaft. 17. Install the mainshaft rear bearing using Tool as shown. SCIA1058E MT-115 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] 18. Install the C-ring onto the mainshaft, and check that the end play of mainshaft rear bearing meets specifications. End play standard value ● : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) If the measurement is outside the specified standard value, reselect a new C-ring. SCIA0979E C-Ring Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 2.535 mm (0.0866 in) 2.565 mm (0.1010 in) 2.595 mm (0.1022 in) 2.625 mm (0.1033 in) 2.655 mm (0.1045 in) 2.685 mm (0.1057 in) 2.715 mm (0.1069 in) 2.745 mm (0.1081 in) 2.775 mm (0.1093 in) 2.805 mm (0.1104 in) 32348 8H800 32348 8H801 32348 8H802 32348 8H803 32348 8H804 32348 8H805 32348 8H806 32348 8H807 32348 8H808 32348 8H809 2.835 mm (0.1116 in) 2.865 mm (0.1128 in) 2.895 mm (0.1140 in) 2.925 mm (0.1152 in) 2.955 mm (0.1163 in) 2.985 mm (0.1175 in) 3.015 mm (0.1187 in) 3.045 mm (0.1199 in) 3.075 mm (0.1211 in) 32348 8H810 32348 8H811 32348 8H812 32348 8H813 32348 8H814 32348 8H815 32348 8H816 32348 8H817 32348 8H818 19. Fit the C-ring holder, and install the snap ring as shown. SCIA0974E 20. Check the end play of 1st and 2nd main gears as shown. End play standard value 1st gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 2nd gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) SCIA0973E MT-116 REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32281 A ECS005VJ DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the reverse idler gear adjusting shim. Remove the reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling sleeve and insert spring simultaneously. Remove the reverse idler gear needle bearing. Remove the thrust needle bearing. Remove the reverse baulk ring. Remove the reverse idler gear (front). Remove the reverse idler gear needle bearing. Remove the thrust needle bearing. Pull off the locking pin from the reverse idler shaft. B MT D E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Reverse Idler Shaft and Gears Check the parts listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other nonstandard conditions of the reverse idler shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard conditions of the reverse idler gears. F G H SCIA0953E I Synchronizer Check parts listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and insert spring. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as shown. J K L SMT637A ● If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it. SMT867D MT-117 M REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51H] Baulk ring clearance ● Press the baulk ring against the cone, and measure the clearance between the baulk ring and cone as shown. If the measurement is below the specified limit, replace it with a new one. Baulk ring to gear clearance Standard : 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in) Limit value : 0.7 mm (0.028 in) SMT140 Bearing Check the parts listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and rough rotation of the bearing. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION: ● Install the insert spring with the orientation as shown. SCIA0954E MT-118 FINAL DRIVE [RS6F51H] FINAL DRIVE Disassembly and Assembly PFP:38411 A ECS005VK DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove the mounting bolts. Then, separate the final gear from the differential case. Remove the speedometer drive gear. Using a puller and Tool (drift), remove the differential side bearing (clutch housing side) as shown. B MT D E SCIA1019E 4. F Using a puller and Tool (drift), remove the differential side bearing (transaxle case side) as shown. G H I SCIA1060E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Bearing J Check for bearing damage and rough rotation as shown. If necessary, replace with a new one. CAUTION: When replacing the tapered roller bearing, replace the outer and inner races as a set. K L M SPD715 ASSEMBLY 1. Using Tool (drift), install the differential side bearing (transaxle case side) as shown. SCIA1061E MT-119 FINAL DRIVE [RS6F51H] 2. Align and install the speedometer drive gear onto the differential case as shown. SMT842D 3. Using Tool (drift), install the differential side bearing (clutch housing side) as shown. SCIA1018E 4. Install the final gear into the differential case, and tighten the final gear bolts to specification. Final gear bolts : Refer to MT-85, "FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS" . SCIA0912E MT-120 SHIFT CONTROL [RS6F51H] SHIFT CONTROL Inspection PFP:32982 A ECS005VL Check the contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage, or bending as shown. If necessary, replace the parts. B MT D E F G H SCIA0913E SHIFT FORK Check if the width of the shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling sleeve) is within specification, as shown. I J K SMT801D L Shift Fork Item One-side wear specification Sliding width of new part 1st & 2nd 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 3rd & 4th 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 5th & 6th 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 6.10 - 6.23 mm (0.2402 - 0.2453 in) Reverse 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 12.80 - 12.93 mm (0.5039 - 0.5091 in) MT-121 M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51H] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS005VM TRANSAXLE Engine QR25DE Transaxle model RS6F51H Model code number 7Y076 Number of speed 6 Synchromesh type Warner Shift pattern SCIA0955E Gear ratio Number of teeth 1st 3.153 2nd 1.944 3rd 1.392 4th 1.055 5th 0.809 6th 0.630 Reverse 3.002 Input gear Main gear Reverse idler gear Oil capacity 1st 13 2nd 18 3rd 31 4th 36 5th 42 6th 46 Reverse 13 1st 41 2nd 35 3rd 39 4th 38 5th 34 6th 29 Reverse 38 Front 37 Rear 38 2.2 (2 3/8, 2) (US qt, Imp qt) Reverse synchronizer Remarks Installed Double baulk ring type synchronizer 1st synchronizer Triple baulk ring type synchronizer 2nd synchronizer MT-122 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51H] FINAL GEAR Engine QR25DE Transaxle model RS6F51H Model code number 7Y076 Final gear ratio 4.133 Number of teeth Final gear/Pinion A B 62/15 Side gear/Pinion mate gear MT — Gear End Play ECS005VN Unit: mm (in) Gear D End play 1st main gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) 2nd main gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) 3rd input gear 0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122) 4th input gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) 5th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) 6th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) E F G Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear ECS005VO 3RD, 4TH, 5TH, 6TH & REVERSE BAULK RING Unit: mm (in) Gear Standard Wear limit 3rd 0.9 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.0571) 0.7 (0.028) 4th 0.9 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.0571) 0.7 (0.028) 5th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) 6th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) Reverse 0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) H I J K L M MT-123 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51H] 1ST AND 2ND BAULK RING Unit: mm (in) 1st Double Baulk Ring SMT138E 2nd Triple Baulk Ring WCIA0195E Standard Dimension Wear limit Double baulk ring Triple baulk ring Double baulk ring Triple baulk ring A 0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031) 0.6 - 1.2 (0.024 - 0.047) 0.2 (0.008) 0.3 (0.012) B 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) 0.2 (0.008) 0.2 (0.008) C — 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) — 0.3 (0.012) Available Snap Rings ECS005VP 6TH BUSHING End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Thickness mm (in) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.81 (0.0713) 1.86 (0.0732) 1.91 (0.0752) 1.96 (0.0772) Part number* Thickness 32204 8H511 32204 8H512 32204 8H513 32204 8H514 32204 8H515 mm (in) 2.01 (0.0791) 2.06 (0.0811) 2.11 (0.0831) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.21 (0.0871) Part number* 32204 8H516 32204 8H517 32204 8H518 32204 8H519 32204 8H520 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Available C-rings ECS005VQ MAINSHAFT C-RING End play Thickness 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) mm (in) 2.535 (0.0866) 2.565 (0.1010) 2.595 (0.1022) 2.625 (0.1033) 2.655 (0.1045) 2.685 (0.1057) 2.715 (0.1069) 2.745 (0.1081) 2.775 (0.1093) 2.805 (0.1104) Part number* Thickness 32348 8H800 32348 8H801 32348 8H802 32348 8H803 32348 8H804 32348 8H805 32348 8H806 32348 8H807 32348 8H808 32348 8H809 mm (in) 2.835 (0.1116) 2.865 (0.1128) 2.895 (0.1140) 2.925 (0.1152) 2.955 (0.1163) 2.985 (0.1175) 3.015 (0.1187) 3.045 (0.1199) 3.075 (0.1211) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. MT-124 Part number* 32348 8H810 32348 8H811 32348 8H812 32348 8H813 32348 8H814 32348 8H815 32348 8H816 32348 8H817 32348 8H818 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51H] Available Thrust Washers ECS005VR A INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER B MT D SCIA1008E Standard length “C2 ” Thickness 154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094in) mm (in) Part number* 3.84 (0.1512) 3.90 (0.1535) 3.96 (0.1559) Thickness 32347 8H500 32347 8H501 32347 8H502 mm (in) E Part number* 4.02 (0.1583) 4.08 (0.1606) 4.14 (0.1630) 32347 8H503 32347 8H504 32347 8H505 F *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. G Available Adjusting Shims ECS005VS MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM H I J K SCIA1009E Standard length “C1 ” Thickness 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848in) mm (in) Part number* 0.52 (0.0205) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.76 (0.0299) Thickness 32238 8H500 32238 8H501 32238 8H502 32238 8H503 mm (in) Part number* 0.84 (0.0331) 0.92 (0.0362) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.08 (0.0425) 32238 8H504 32238 8H505 32238 8H506 32238 8H507 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.40 (0.0157) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 6.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 32225 8H500 32225 8H501 32225 8H502 32225 8H503 32225 8H504 32225 8H505 32225 8H506 32225 8H507 32225 8H508 32225 8H509 32225 8H510 32225 8H511 Thickness mm (in) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0396) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) 1.12 (0.0441) 1.16 (0.0457) 1.20 (0.0472) 1.24 (0.0488) 1.28 (0.0504) 1.32 (0.0520) Part number* 32225 8H512 32225 8H513 32225 8H514 32225 8H515 32225 8H516 32225 8H517 32225 8H518 32225 8H519 32225 8H520 32225 8H521 32225 8H522 32225 8H523 MT-125 Thickness mm (in) 1.36 (0.0520) 1.40 (0.0551) 1.44 (0.0567) 1.48 (0.0583) 1.52 (0.0598) 1.56 (0.0614) 1.60 (0.0630) 1.64 (0.0646) Part number* 32225 8H524 32225 8H560 32225 8H561 32225 8H562 32225 8H563 32225 8H564 32225 8H565 32225 8H566 L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51H] *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness mm (in) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) Part number* Thickness 32238 8H510 32238 8H511 32238 8H512 32238 8H513 32238 8H514 32238 8H515 32238 8H516 32238 8H517 32238 8H518 mm (in) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0396) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) Part number* 32238 8H519 32238 8H520 32238 8H521 32238 8H522 32238 8H523 32238 8H524 32238 8H560 32238 8H561 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0.04 - 0.14 mm (0.0016 - 0.0055 in) Thickness mm (in) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.84 (0.0724) 1.92 (0.0756) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.08 (0.0819) 2.16 (0.0850) Part number* Thickness 32237 8H500 32237 8H501 32237 8H502 32237 8H503 32237 8H504 32237 8H505 mm (in) 2.24 (0.0882) 2.32 (0.0913) 2.40 (0.0945) 2.48 (0.0976) 2.56 (0.1008) 2.64 (0.1039) Part number* 32237 8H506 32237 8H507 32237 8H508 32237 8H509 32237 8H510 32237 8H511 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. 6TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Thickness mm (in) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.12 (0.0441) Part number* Thickness 32237 8H560 32237 8H561 32237 8H562 32237 8H563 mm (in) 1.20 (0.0472) 1.28 (0.0504) 1.36 (0.0520) Part number* 32237 8H564 32237 8H565 32237 8H566 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Available Shims – Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim(s) BEARING PRELOAD Differential side bearing preload L* 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083) *: Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “L” in thickness. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM(S) Thickness mm (in) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) Part number* Thickness 31438 80X00 31438 80X01 31438 80X02 31438 80X03 31438 80X04 31438 80X05 mm (in) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. MT-126 Part number* 31438 80X06 31438 80X07 31438 80X08 31438 80X09 31438 80X10 31438 80X11 ECS005VT J AIR CONDITIONER A SECTION MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 3 Contaminated Refrigerant ........................................ 3 General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 4 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ......................... 4 A/C Identification Label ............................................ 4 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 5 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ...................................................... 5 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 6 Precautions for Servicing Compressor ..................... 8 Precautions for Service Equipment .......................... 8 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT .............. 8 ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ........................ 8 VACUUM PUMP ................................................... 9 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET ...................................... 9 SERVICE HOSES ................................................. 9 SERVICE COUPLERS ........................................ 10 CHARGING CYLINDER ...................................... 10 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 10 PREPARATION ..........................................................11 Special Service Tools ..............................................11 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 12 COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL ........................ 14 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 15 Refrigeration Cycle ................................................. 15 REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 15 FREEZE PROTECTION ..................................... 15 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PROTECTION .......... 15 LUBRICANT ............................................................. 16 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 16 LUBRICANT ........................................................ 16 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ........................... 16 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 19 Component Layout ................................................. 19 Control Operation ................................................... 20 FAN CONTROL SWITCH ................................... 20 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 20 MODE CONTROL KNOB .................................... 20 TEMPERATURE CONTROL KNOB .................... 20 RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH ..................... 20 AIR CONDITIONER (A/C) SWITCH .................... 20 Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 21 System Description ................................................. 22 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTIONS ................................................................. 22 Component Location .............................................. 23 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 23 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 24 Wiring Diagram — Heater — .................................. 25 QG18DE MODELS .............................................. 25 Wiring Diagram — A/C, M — .................................. 27 QG18DE MODELS .............................................. 27 QR25DE MODELS .............................................. 31 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 34 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 34 SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 34 Operational Check .................................................. 35 CONDITIONS: ..................................................... 35 PROCEDURE: .................................................... 35 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 37 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK ................... 37 INTAKE DOOR .......................................................... 38 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door ........ 38 Component Description .......................................... 38 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ...................................... 38 Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 39 Control Linkage Adjustment ................................... 41 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ...................................... 41 Mode Door .............................................................. 42 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR ...................................................... 42 CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT ................. 43 Air Mix Door ............................................................ 44 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MTC-1 E F G H I MTC K L M MIX DOOR .......................................................... 44 Temperature Control Linkage Adjustment .............. 45 BLOWER MOTOR .................................................... 46 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor ...... 46 Blower Motor Circuit ............................................... 46 Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 50 FAN CONTROL SWITCH .................................... 50 BLOWER MOTOR ............................................... 50 FAN RESISTOR .................................................. 50 MAGNET CLUTCH ................................................... 51 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch ... 51 Magnet Clutch Circuit ............................................. 52 Electrical Component Inspection ............................ 55 A/C RELAY .......................................................... 55 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .............. 56 INSUFFICIENT COOLING ........................................ 57 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling ........................................................................... 57 Performance Test Diagnoses ................................. 58 Performance Chart ................................................. 60 TEST CONDITION .............................................. 60 TEST READING .................................................. 60 Trouble Diagnoses for Abnormal Pressure ............. 61 BOTH HIGH AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDES ARE TOO HIGH. .......................................................... 61 HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO HIGH AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO LOW. ............... 61 HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO LOW AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO HIGH. .............. 62 BOTH HIGH- AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDES ARE TOO LOW. .................................................. 62 LOW-PRESSURE SIDE SOMETIMES BECOMES NEGATIVE. ....................................... 63 LOW-PRESSURE SIDE BECOMES NEGATIVE. ... 63 INSUFFICIENT HEATING ......................................... 64 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating ........................................................................... 64 NOISE ........................................................................ 65 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise .................. 65 INTAKE SENSOR ..................................................... 66 Intake Sensor Circuit .............................................. 66 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 66 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 66 Removal and Installation ........................................ 67 COMPRESSOR ......................................................... 68 Removal and Installation ........................................ 68 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH ......................................... 69 Overhaul ................................................................. 69 QG18DE .............................................................. 69 QR25DE .............................................................. 69 Removal ................................................................. 70 QG18DE .............................................................. 70 QR25DE .............................................................. 71 Inspection ................................................................72 CLUTCH DISC .....................................................72 PULLEY ...............................................................72 COIL .....................................................................72 Installation ...............................................................72 QG18DE ..............................................................72 QR25DE ...............................................................74 Break-In Operation ..................................................75 THERMAL PROTECTOR ..........................................76 Inspection ................................................................76 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ..........................................77 Removal and Installation .........................................77 FUNCTION ..........................................................77 REPLACEMENT TIMING ....................................77 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................77 HEATER & COOLING UNIT (HEATER CORE) ........78 Removal ..................................................................78 Installation ...............................................................78 BLOWER UNIT ..........................................................79 Removal ..................................................................79 Installation ...............................................................79 A/C EVAPORATOR ...................................................80 Removal ..................................................................80 Installation ...............................................................81 REFRIGERANT LINES .............................................82 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ..................82 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................................82 Removal and Installation .........................................84 QG18DE ..............................................................84 QR25DE ...............................................................85 Checking Refrigerant Leaks ....................................86 PRELIMINARY CHECK .......................................86 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector ......................86 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR .........................................................86 CHECKING PROCEDURE ..................................87 Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector ..............................88 PRECAUTIONS FOR FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK DETECTION ..............................................88 CHECKING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS USING THE FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR ...................88 DYE INJECTION ..................................................88 BELT ..........................................................................90 Tension Adjustment .................................................90 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......91 General Specifications ............................................91 COMPRESSOR ...................................................91 LUBRICANT .........................................................91 REFRIGERANT ...................................................91 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................91 ENGINE IDLING SPEED (WHEN A/C IS ON) .....91 BELT TENSION ...................................................91 MTC-2 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EJS001QX The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) B C D E F EJS001A7 WARNING: G ● CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed and compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant H Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier. ● Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. I ● The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed: – When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to MTC minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. – When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. K – Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used. – Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and L throat. Remove R-134a from the A/C system, using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment), or J2209 (R-134a recovery equipment). If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health M and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. – Do not allow A/C lubricant to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. Contaminated Refrigerant EJS001A8 If a refrigerant other than pure R-134a is identified in a vehicle, your options are: ● Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. ● Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. ● Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. ● If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. MTC-3 PRECAUTIONS ● If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact Nissan Customer Affairs for further assistance. General Refrigerant Precautions EJS001A9 WARNING: ● Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. ● Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ● Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). ● Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. ● Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ● Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ● Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. ● Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and R-134a have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EJS001AA The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future service. Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of time cannot be removed . Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. Leak detection dyes for R-134a and R-12 A/C systems are different. Do not use R-134a leak detection dye in R-12 A/C systems or R-12 leak detection dye in R-134a A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. A/C Identification Label EJS001AB Vehicles are equipped factory installed fluorescent dye and have this identification label on the under side of hood. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label. LHA175 MTC-4 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Refrigerant Connection EJS001AC A FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ● ● The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics. The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections. B C D E F G H SHA815E I MTC K L M MTC-5 PRECAUTIONS O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION QG18DE WJIA0417E QR25DE WJIA0418E CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections in some systems use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or around, the connection. MTC-6 PRECAUTIONS O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications SHA814E A Connection type O-ring size Part number* D New 8 92471 N8210 6.8 (0.268) 1.85 (0.0728) Former 12 92475 71L00 10.8 (0.425) 1.78 (0.0701) New 12 92472 N8210 10.9 (0.429) 3.65 (0.1437) Former 16 92475 72L00 13.9 (0.547) 1.78 (0.0701) New 16 92473 N8210 13.6 (0.535) 2.43 (0.0957) New 19 92474 N8210 16.5 (0.650) 2.43 (0.0957) mm (in) W mm (in) B C D *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. E WARNING: Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. CAUTION: F When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. ● When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber. G ● When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench. ● After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture. ● When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the opera- H tion. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection. ● Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal I caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. ● Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. ● Always replace used O-rings. MTC ● When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to apply lubricant to threaded portion. Lubricant name: Genuine Nissan A/C System Lubricant Type R or equivalent K Part number: KLH00-PAGR0 ● O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube. ● When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube. L ● Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that the O-ring is installed to tube correctly. M MTC-7 PRECAUTIONS ● After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections. When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque. RHA861F Precautions for Servicing Compressor ● ● ● ● ● ● EJS001AD Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering. When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to MTC-16, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" . Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner. After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in both directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for one hour. After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation. [Gap between clutch disc and pulley is 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)] Precautions for Service Equipment EJS001AE RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance. MTC-8 PRECAUTIONS VACUUM PUMP A The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it. To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the hose-to-pump connection, as follows. ● Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump. ● For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the hose from the pump. ● If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate. Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended. B C D E F G RHA270D H MANIFOLD GAUGE SET Be certain that the gauge face indicates R-134a or 134a. Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant. I MTC K SHA533D SERVICE HOSES L Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described (colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shut off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses opposite the manifold gauge. M RHA272D MTC-9 PRECAUTIONS SERVICE COUPLERS Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to an CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur. Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve Clockwise Open Counterclockwise Close RHA273D CHARGING CYLINDER Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-5, "Wiring Diagram — POWER —" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" MTC-10 EJS001AF PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EJS001AG Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV99231260 (J-38874) Clutch disc wrench B Removing shaft nut and clutch disc C D NT204 KV99232340 (J-38874) Clutch disc puller Removing clutch disc E F S-NT376 (J-38873-A) Drive plate installer G Installing pulley and drive plate H I WJIA0367E KV99234330 (J-39024) Pulley installer Installing pulley MTC K NT207 KV99233130 (J-39023) Pulley puller Removing pulley L M NT208 KV99233130 (J-29884) (with small adaptor) Pulley puller Removing pulley LHA172 MTC-11 PREPARATION HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment EJS001AH Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its lubricant. Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubricant. Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant. Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and compressor failure will result. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant Container color: Light blue Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a) Fitting size:Thread size ● large container 1/22 -16 ACME S-NT196 KLH00-PAGR0 (–) Genuine Nissan A/C System Lubricant Type R Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG), type R Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) vane rotary compressors (Nissan only) Lubricity:40 ml [Litre] (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz) S-NT197 (J-43600) Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment (ACR2000) Function: Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling and Recharging WJIA0293E (J-41995) Electrical leak detector Power supply: ● DC 12V (Cigarette lighter) AHA281A (J-43926) Refrigerant dye leak detection kit Kit includes: (J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety glasses (J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector (J-41447) qty. 24 HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal) SHA437F MTC-12 PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J-42220) Fluorescent dye leak detector Description A Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal) For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system. Includes: UV lamp and UV safety glasses B C SHA438F (J-41447) HFC-134a (R-134a) Fluorescent leak detection dye (Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) D Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle (Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.) SHA439F E F (J-41459) HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce bottle For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak detection dye into A/C system. G H SHA440F (J-43872) Dye cleaner I For cleaning dye spills. MTC SHA441F (J-39183) Manifold gauge set (with hoses and couplers) K Identification: ● ● The gauge face indicates R-134a. Fitting size:Thread size L 1/22 -16 ACME M RJIA0196E Service hoses ● High side hose (J-39501-72) ● Low side hose (J-39502-72) ● Utility hose (J-39476-72) Hose color: S-NT201 MTC-13 ● Low hose: Blue with black stripe ● High hose: Red with black stripe ● Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green with black stripe Hose fitting to gauge: ● 1/22 -16 ACME PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Service couplers ● ● High side coupler (J-39500-20) Hose fitting to service hose: Low side coupler (J-39500-24) ● M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached. S-NT202 (J-39649) Vacuum pump (Including the isolator valve) Capacity: ● Air displacement: 4 CFM ● Micron rating: 20 microns ● Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz) Fitting size: Thread size ● S-NT203 1/22 -16 ACME COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL Tool name Description (J-41810-NI) Refrigerant identifier equipment (R-134a) For checking refrigerant purity and for system contamination RJIA0197E (J-44614) Clutch disc holding tool For holding clutch disc MTC-14 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Refrigeration Cycle PFP:KA990 A EJS001AI REFRIGERANT FLOW The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser, the liquid tank, through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil is controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case. FREEZE PROTECTION B C The compressor cycles go on and off to maintain the evaporator temperature within a specified range. When the evaporator coil temperature falls below a specified point, the intake sensor interrupts the compressor operation. When the evaporator coil temperature rises above the specification, the thermo control amplifier allows compressor operation. REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PROTECTION Refrigerant Pressure Sensor D E The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the refrigerant lines where they attach to the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM turns the A/C relay OFF and stops the compressor when pressure on the high pressure side detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/ cm2 , 398 psi) or below about 177 kPa (1.8 kg/cm2 , 26 psi). F G Pressure Relief Valve The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 3,727 kPa (38 kg/ cm2 , 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the atmosphere. H I MTC K L M WJIA0419E MTC-15 LUBRICANT LUBRICANT Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor PFP:KLG00 EJS001AJ The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: ● Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor ● Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: Genuine Nissan A/C System Lubricant Type R or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGR0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the test group shown below. 1. LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION Can lubricant return operation be performed? ● A/C system works properly. ● There is no evidence of a large amount of lubricant leakage. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. PERFORM LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION 1. Start engine, and set the following conditions: Test condition Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm A/C switch: ON Blower speed: Max. position 2. Perform lubricant return operation for about 10 minutes. 3. Stop engine. CAUTION: If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. – >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK COMPRESSOR Should the compressor be replaced? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO MTC-68, "Removal and Installation" . No >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK ANY PART Is there any part to be replaced? (Evaporator, condenser, liquid tank or in case there is evidence of a large amount of lubricant leakage.) Yes or No Yes >> GO TO MTC-17, "Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor" . No >> Carry out the A/C performance test. MTC-16 LUBRICANT Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. Amount of lubricant to be added Lubricant to be added to system Part replaced Amount of lubricant ml (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) B Remarks Evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Condenser 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Liquid tank 5 (0.2, 0.2) Add if compressor is not replaced. 30 (1.0, 1.1) Large leak — Small leak *1 In case of refrigerant leak ● *1: A C D E If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed. Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. F Before connecting the recovery/recycling recharging equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling recharging equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If OK, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. G Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling recharging equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Connect recovery/recycling recharging equipment to the vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling recharging equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-3, H "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling recharging equipment. Measure lubricant disI charged into the recovery/recycling recharging equipment. Drain the lubricant from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. MTC Drain the lubricant from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant K to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant L at this time. Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor. M MTC-17 LUBRICANT RHA065DD MTC-18 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Layout PFP:00004 A EJS001AK B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0257E MTC-19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Control Operation EJS001AL LHA109 FAN CONTROL SWITCH This switch turns the fan ON and OFF, and controls fan speed. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH This switch turns the rear window defogger ON and OFF. MODE CONTROL KNOB This control knob controls the outlet air flow. When DEF or F/D mode is selected, the push control unit sets the intake door to FRESH. The compressor turns on when DEF mode is selected and remains on until the key is turned off. TEMPERATURE CONTROL KNOB This knob adjusts the temperature of the discharge air. RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. The indicator lamp will also light. Recirculation is canceled when DEF sen. or F/D mode is selected, and resumes when another mode is cho- AIR CONDITIONER (A/C) SWITCH The air conditioner switch controls the A/C system. When the switch is depressed with the fan ON, the compressor will turn ON. The indicator lamp will also light. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. MTC-20 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Discharge Air Flow EJS001AM A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M LHA127 MTC-21 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS System Description EJS001AN SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTIONS Knob/Switch position Knob/Switch A/C A/C Mode Air outlet Intake air Compressor — — ON*1 FACE — — B/L — — FOOT — — F/D FRE — DEF FRE ON*1 — REC*2 — *1: Compressor operation is controlled by the ECM (when the compressor is activated in DEF mode, it remains on until the key is turned off). *2: In DEF and F/D modes, REC switch is canceled. MTC-22 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Location EJS001AO A ENGINE COMPARTMENT B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0248E MTC-23 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PASSENGER COMPARTMENT WJIA0249E MTC-24 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — Heater — EJS001AP A QG18DE MODELS B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0052E MTC-25 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 96 Y/G FAN CONTROL SWITCH DATA (DC) FAN CONTROL SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 0V FAN CONTROL SWITCH "OFF" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 5V MTC-26 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — A/C, M — EJS001AQ A QG18DE MODELS B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0053E MTC-27 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 96 110 Y/G L/R FAN CONTROL SWITCH AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH SIGNAL DATA (DC) FAN CONTROL SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 0V FAN CONTROL SWITCH "OFF" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 5V BOTH A/C SWITCH AND BLOWER SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 0V A/C SWITCH "OFF" (ENGINE RUNNING) BATTERY VOLTAGE MTC-28 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0054E MTC-29 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 49 R/L SENSOR POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SWITCH "ON" APPROX. 5.0V 67 B/W ECM GROUND IDLE SPEED (ENGINE RUNNING) 1V OR LESS REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR BOTH A/C SWITCH AND BLOWER SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING, WARM-UP CONDITION, COMPRESSOR OPERATING) 0.36 - 3.88V BOTH A/C SWITCH AND BLOWER SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING) (COMPRESSOR OPERATING) 0 - 1.0V A/C SWITCH "OFF" (ENGINE RUNNING) BATTERY VOLTAGE 70 105 L L AIR CONDITIONER RELAY MTC-30 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS QR25DE MODELS A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0055E MTC-31 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 96 110 Y/G L/R FAN CONTROL SWITCH AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH SIGNAL DATA (DC) FAN CONTROL SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 0V FAN CONTROL SWITCH "OFF" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 5V BOTH A/C SWITCH AND BLOWER SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING) APPROX. 0V A/C SWITCH "OFF" (ENGINE RUNNING) BATTERY VOLTAGE MTC-32 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0056E MTC-33 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) 49 R/Y SENSOR POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SWITCH "ON" APPROX. 5.0V 58 B/W ECM GROUND IDLE SPEED (ENGINE RUNNING) 1V OR LESS REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR BOTH A/C SWITCH AND BLOWER SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING, WARM-UP CONDITION, COMPRESSOR OPERATING) 0.36 - 3.88V BOTH A/C SWITCH AND BLOWER SWITCH "ON" (ENGINE RUNNING) (COMPRESSOR OPERATING) 0 - 1.0V A/C SWITCH "OFF" (ENGINE RUNNING) BATTERY VOLTAGE 70 105 L L AIR CONDITIONER RELAY How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair EJS001AR WORK FLOW WJIA0258E *1: MTC-35 *2 MTC-34 SYMPTOM TABLE Symptom Reference page ● Intake door does not change in VENT, B/L or FOOT mode. ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR”. MTC-38 ● Air outlet does not change. ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR”. MTC-42 ● Air mix door does not change. ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR”. MTC-44 ● Blower motor does not rotate at all. ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR”. MTC-46 ● Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch and fan switch are ON. ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH”. MTC-51 ● Insufficient cooling. ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING”. MTC-57 ● Insufficient heating. ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT HEATING”. MTC-64 ● Noise ● Go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR NOISE”. MTC-65 MTC-34 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operational Check EJS001AS A The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. CONDITIONS: ● Engine running and at normal operating temperature. B PROCEDURE: 1. Check Blower C 1. Turn fan control switch to 1-speed. Blower should operate on 1-speed. 2. Then turn fan control switch to 2-speed, and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked. 3. Leave fan control switch on 4-speed. If NG, go to MTC-46, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor" . If OK, continue with next check. D E F LHA110 2. Check Discharge Air 1. Turn knob to each mode. G H I LHA111 2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. K Refer to MTC-21, "Discharge Air Flow" . If NG, go to MTC-42, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR" . If OK, continue with next check. NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspec- L M tion) and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF mode is selected. Confirm that the intake door position is at FRESH when the F/D mode is selected. Intake door position is checked in the next step. RHA654F MTC-35 MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. Check Recirculation 1. Press REC switch. Recirculation indicator should illuminate. 2. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound change slightly). If NG, go to MTC-38, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door" . If OK, continue with next check. NOTE: ● Recirculation does not operate in DEF modes. and F/D LHA112 4. Check Temperature Decrease 1. Turn temperature control knob to full cold. 2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets. If NG, go to MTC-57, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling" . If OK, continue with next check. WHA191 5. Check Temperature Increase 1. Turn temperature control knob to full hot. 2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets. If NG, go to MTC-64, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating" . WHA192 6. Check Air Conditioner Switch Turn the fan control switch to the desired (1- to 4-speed) position and push the A/C switch to turn ON the air conditioner. The indicator lamp should come on when air conditioner is ON. If NG, go to MTC-51, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch" . WHA193 MTC-36 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EJS001AT A POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK Check power supply circuit for air conditioner system. Refer to PG-5, "Wiring Diagram — POWER —" . B C D E F G H I MTC K L M MTC-37 INTAKE DOOR INTAKE DOOR Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door PFP:27245 EJS001AU SYMPTOM: ● Intake door does not change. INSPECTION FLOW LHA142 *1 MTC-39 *2 MTC-35 *3 Component Description MTC-34 EJS001AV INTAKE DOOR MOTOR The intake door motor is installed on the intake unit. Using a link, it opens and closes the intake door. When REC switch is ON, the ground line of the motor is switched from terminal 2 to 1. This starts the motor because the position switch contacts built into it make current flow. When REC switch is OFF, the ground line is switched from terminal 1 to 2. The contacts turn along with the motor. When they reach the non-current flow position, the motor will stop. LHA124 MTC-38 INTAKE DOOR Intake Door Motor Circuit EJS001AW A SYMPTOM: ● Intake door does not change. B 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Disconnect intake door motor harness connector. Do approx. 12 volts exist between intake door motor harness terminal Nos. 1, 2 and body ground? C D E F LHA168 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 2. G H I MTC K L M MTC-39 INTAKE DOOR 2. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE DOOR MOTOR AND AIR CONTROL UNIT Check circuit continuity between A/C control unit harness terminal Nos. 10 (11) and intake door motor harness terminal Nos. 2 (1). LHA140 If OK, check harness for short. Yes or No Yes >> Replace A/C control unit. No >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY OF INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Check circuit continuity between intake door motor harness terminal No. 1 and No. 2. LHA139 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace intake door motor. MTC-40 INTAKE DOOR 4. CHECK INTAKE DOOR LINKAGE A Refer to MTC-43, "CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Repair or adjust. Control Linkage Adjustment B EJS001AX INTAKE DOOR MOTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Install intake door motor on intake unit. Ensure that the intake door motor lever is fitted into the slit portion of intake door link. Connect the intake door motor harness connector. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. Check that intake door operates properly when REC switch is turned ON and OFF. C D E F LHA125 G H I MTC K L M MTC-41 INTAKE DOOR Mode Door EJS001AY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR SYMPTOM: ● Mode door does not change. INSPECTION FLOW LHA146 *1 MTC-21 *4 MTC-34 *2 MTC-41 *3 MTC-42 MTC-35 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT Mode Door Control Linkage ● ● ● ● A Turn mode door control knob to position. Set side link in DEF mode. Pull on outer cable in direction of arrow and then clamp it. After positioning mode door control cable, check that it operates properly. B C D WHA188 E F G H I MTC K L M MTC-43 INTAKE DOOR Air Mix Door EJS001AZ TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR SYMPTOM: ● Air mix door does not change. INSPECTION FLOW WHA190 *1 MTC-35 *2 MTC-34 MTC-44 INTAKE DOOR Temperature Control Linkage Adjustment EJS001B0 A Temperature Control Cable ● Turn temperature control knob to the full cold position. ● Set the air mix door lever in the full cold position by hand. ● Pull on cable cover in the direction of the arrow and then clamp cable cover. After positioning air mix door control cable, check for proper operation. B C D WHA189 E F G H I MTC K L M MTC-45 BLOWER MOTOR BLOWER MOTOR Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor PFP:27226 EJS001B1 SYMPTOM: ● Blower motor does not rotate at all. INSPECTION FLOW LHA138 *1 MTC-46 *2 MTC-35 *3 Blower Motor Circuit EJS001B2 SYMPTOM: ● Blower motor does not rotate. Symptom table No. MTC-34 INCIDENT 1 Fan fails to rotate. 2 Fan does not rotate at 1-speed. 3 Fan does not rotate at 2-speed. 4 Fan does not rotate at 3-speed. 5 Fan does not rotate at 4-speed. 1. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Check if blower motor rotates properly at each fan speed. Conduct checks as per symptom table above. 1 >> GO TO 2. 2, 3, 4 >> GO TO 8. 5 >> GO TO 10. MTC-46 BLOWER MOTOR 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR 1. 2. A Disconnect blower motor harness connector. Do approx. 12 volts exist between blower motor harness terminal + and body ground? B C D LHA137 E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Check 15A (Nos. 14 and 16) fuses at fuse block. Refer to PG-9, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON”" . F 3. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY FOR BLOWER MOTOR G 1. 2. H Turn fan control switch to any position except OFF. Check circuit continuity between blower motor connector M57 terminal – (L/B) and body ground. Continuity should exist. I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Reconnect blower motor harness connector. GO TO 5. MTC WJIA0005E K 4. CHECK BLOWER MOTOR L Refer to MTC-50, "BLOWER MOTOR" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Replace blower motor. M MTC-47 BLOWER MOTOR 5. CHECK BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN RESISTOR Do approx. 12 volts exist between fan resistor harness terminal No. 1 and body ground? LHA135 Yes or No Yes >> Disconnect fan control switch harness connector. GO TO 7. No >> Disconnect blower motor and fan resistor harness connectors. GO TO 6. 6. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN RESISTOR Check circuit continuity between blower motor harness terminal – and fan resistor harness terminal No. 1. LHA134 OK or NG OK >> Check harness for short and repair as necessary. NG >> Check harness for open and check connectors. Repair as necessary. 7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN CONTROL SWITCH Check circuit continuity between fan control switch harness terminal No. 5 and body ground. LHA133 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness or connector. MTC-48 BLOWER MOTOR 8. CHECK RESISTOR AFTER DISCONNECTING IT A Refer to MTC-50, "FAN RESISTOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fan resistor. B 9. CHECK FAN RESISTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR C Reconnect fan resistor harness connector. D 1 >> GO TO 12. 2, 3, 4 >> GO TO 10. 10. CHECK FAN CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT E Do approx. 12 volts exist between each fan control switch harness terminal and body ground? F G H LHA131 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 12. No >> GO TO 11. I MTC 11. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN FAN CONTROL SWITCH AND FAN RESISTOR Check circuit continuity between fan control switch harness terminal and fan resistor harness terminal. K L M LHA132 OK or NG OK >> Check harness for short and repair as necessary. NG >> Check harness for open and check connectors. Repair as necessary. 12. CHECK FAN CONTROL SWITCH AFTER DISCONNECTING IT Refer to MTC-50, "FAN CONTROL SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Replace fan control switch. MTC-49 BLOWER MOTOR Electrical Components Inspection EJS001B3 FAN CONTROL SWITCH Check continuity between terminals at each switch position. Fan control switch position Continuity between terminals OFF 1 4—5—6 2 3—5—6 3 2—5—6 4 1—5—6 LHA163 BLOWER MOTOR Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. ● Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit. FAN RESISTOR Check resistance between terminals. Terminal No. (+) (−) 3 4 2 Resistance (Approx.) 1.305 - 1.595Ω 1 2.457 - 3.003Ω 0.225 - 0.275Ω LHA164 MTC-50 MAGNET CLUTCH MAGNET CLUTCH Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch PFP:92660 A EJS001B4 SYMPTOM: ● Magnet clutch does not operate when A/C switch and fan control switch are ON. B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K WJIA0006E *1 MTC-86 *2 MTC-52 *3 MTC-35 *4 MTC-34 *5 MA-16 *6 MA-23 L M MTC-51 MAGNET CLUTCH Magnet Clutch Circuit EJS001B5 SYMPTOM: ● Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch and fan control switch are ON. 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR Disconnect compressor harness connector. Do approx. 12 volts exist between compressor harness connector E36 terminal 1, (L/R) and body ground? WHA256 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH COIL Disconnect magnet clutch connector. Do approx. 3.2Ω exist between A/C compressor harness connector E36 terminal 1, (L/R) and body ground? WHA257 Yes or No Yes >> INSPECTION END. No >> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to MTC-69, "COMPRESSOR CLUTCH" . MTC-52 MAGNET CLUTCH 3. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND COMPRESSOR HARNESS A Disconnect A/C relay. Check circuit continuity between A/C relay harness terminal 3 and compressor harness terminal 1. B C D LHA149 If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. E F 4. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT G Refer to MTC-66, "Intake Sensor Circuit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair as necessary. H 5. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR A/C RELAY I Disconnect A/C relay. Do approx. 12 volts exist between A/C relay harness terminal 1, 5 and body ground? MTC K L M LHA150 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Check power supply circuit and 10A (No. 15) fuse at fuse block. Refer to PG-9, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON”" . 6. CHECK A/C RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT Refer to MTC-55, "A/C RELAY" . OK or NG OK >> Reconnect A/C relay. GO TO 7. NG >> Replace A/C relay. MTC-53 MAGNET CLUTCH 7. CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF A/C RELAY Reconnect A/C relay. Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM harness connector F59 terminal 105 (L) and body ground? Battery voltage should exist. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> Disconnect A/C relay. Disconnect ECM harness connector. GO TO 8. WJIA0376E 8. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND ECM HARNESS Check circuit continuity between A/C relay harness connector E50 terminal 2 (L) and ECM harness connector F59 terminal 105 (L). Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM. Refer to EC-106, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" (with QG18DE), or EC-746, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" (with QR25DE). NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0377E 9. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM harness connector F59 terminal No. 110 (L/R) and body ground? Battery voltage should exist. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> Check ECM. Refer to EC-106, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" (with QG18DE), or EC-746, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" (with QR25DE). WJIA0378E 10. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to MTC-56, "REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. MTC-54 MAGNET CLUTCH 11. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN FAN CONTROL SWITCH AND A/C CONTROL UNIT Disconnect A/C control unit and fan control switch. Check circuit continuity between fan control switch harness connector M31 terminal No. 6 (Y/G) and A/C control unit harness connector M32 terminal No. 8 (Y/G). A B Continuity should exist. C If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D WJIA0263E E 12. CHECK FAN CONTROL SWITCH GROUND Disconnect fan control switch harness connector. Does continuity exist between fan control switch harness terminal No. 5 and body ground? F G H I LHA158 Yes or No Yes >> Replace A/C control unit. No >> Repair harness or connector. MTC K Electrical Component Inspection EJS001B6 A/C RELAY Check continuity between terminal Nos. 3 and 5. Conditions L Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminal Nos. 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No M If NG, replace relay. LHA160 MTC-55 MAGNET CLUTCH REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR BBIA0165E Make sure that higher A/C refrigerant pressure results in higher refrigerant pressure sensor output voltage. SHA315F MTC-56 INSUFFICIENT COOLING INSUFFICIENT COOLING Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling PFP:00000 A EJS001B7 SYMPTOM: ● Insufficient cooling B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0364E *1 MTC-42 *2 MTC-61 *3 MTC-58 *4 MTC-35 *5 MTC-34 *6 MTC-80 *7 EC-1092 *8 EC-1092 *9 MA-17 (QG18DE) or MA-24 (QR25DE) *11 MTC-66 *10 MTC-3 MTC-57 INSUFFICIENT COOLING Performance Test Diagnoses EJS001B8 LHA196 *1 MTC-60 *2 MTC-61 MTC-58 INSUFFICIENT COOLING A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0008E *1 MTC-51 *2 MA-16 *3 MTC-59 MA-23 INSUFFICIENT COOLING Performance Chart EJS001B9 The Nissan A/C system uses a thermal expansion valve to provide a restriction which causes a pressure change and also controls refrigerant flow through the evaporator. The best way to diagnose a condition in the refrigerant system is to note the system pressures (shown by the manifold gauges) and the clutch cycle rate and times. Then, compare the findings to the charts. ● The system pressures are low (compressor suction) and high (compressor discharge). ● A clutch cycle is the time the clutch is engaged plus the time it is disengaged (time on plus time off). ● Clutch cycle times are the lengths of time (in seconds) that the clutch is ON and OFF. TEST CONDITION Testing must be performed as follows: Vehicle location Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place) Doors Closed Door windows Open Hood Open TEMP. switch Max. COLD Mode switch (Ventilation) set REC switch (Recirculation) set 4-speed (blower) speed Engine speed 1,500 rpm Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements. TEST READING Recirculating-to-Discharge Air Temperature Table Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet Discharge air temperature at center ventilator °C (°F) Air temperature °C (°F) Relative humidity % 50 - 60 60 - 70 20 (68) 6.6 - 8.3 (44 - 47) 25 (77) 10.4 - 12.4 (51 - 54) 30 (86) 14.2 - 16.7 (58 - 62) 35 (95) 18.2 - 21 (65 - 70) 40 (104) 22.0 - 25.2 (72 - 77) 20 (68) 8.3 - 9.8 (47 - 50) 25 (77) 12.4 - 14.4 (54 - 58) 30 (86) 16.7 - 18.9 (62 - 66) 35 (95) 21.0 - 23.6 (70 - 74) 40 (104) 25.2 - 28.1 (77 - 83) Ambient Air Temperature-to-Operating Pressure Table Ambient air Relative humidity % 50 - 70 High-pressure (Discharge side) kPa (kg/ cm2 , psi) Low-pressure (Suction side) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 20 (68) 961 - 1,187 (9.8 - 12.1, 139 - 172) 108 - 157 (1.1 - 1.6, 16 - 23) 25 (77) 1,295 - 1,599 (13.2 - 16.3, 186 - 228) 161.8 - 215.8 (1.65 - 2.2, 23.5 - 31.3) 30 (86) 1,285 - 1,599 (13.1 - 16.0, 186 - 228) 167 - 216 (1.7 - 2.2, 24 - 31) 35 (95) 1,520 - 1,863 (15.5 - 19.0, 220 - 279) 235 - 284 (2.4 - 2.9, 34 - 41) 40 (104) 1,765 - 2,158 (18 - 22, 256 - 313) 289.3 - 353.1 (2.95 - 3.6, 41.9 - 51.2) Air temperature °C (°F) MTC-60 INSUFFICIENT COOLING Trouble Diagnoses for Abnormal Pressure EJS001BA Whenever system's high and/or low side pressure is abnormal, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (normal) pressure range. However, since the standard (normal) pressure differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to MTC-60, "Ambient Air Temperature-toOperating Pressure Table" . A B BOTH HIGH AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDES ARE TOO HIGH. Gauge indication Both high and low-pressure sides are too high. Refrigerant cycle ● Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser. Air suction by cooling fan is insufficient. Probable cause Corrective action Excessive refrigerant charge in refrigeration cycle Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained. Insufficient condenser cooling performance ↓ ● Clean condenser. ● Check and repair cooling fan as necessary. D 1. Condenser fins are clogged. 2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan AC359A ● Low-pressure pipe is not cold. ● When compressor is stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approximately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2 , 28 psi). It then decreases gradually thereafter. Engine tends to overheat. ● ● An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Plates are sometimes covered with frost. C F Poor heat exchange in condenser (After compressor operation stops, high pressure decreases too slowly.) ↓ Air in refrigeration cycle Evacuate repeatedly and recharge system. Engine cooling systems malfunction. Check and repair each engine cooling system. ● Excessive liquid refrigerant on low-pressure side ● Excessive refrigerant discharge flow ● Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification. E G H I Replace expansion valve. MTC K ↓ L 1. Improper thermal valve installation 2. Improper expansion valve adjustment M HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO HIGH AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO LOW. Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause High-pressure side is too high and low-pressure side is too low. Upper side of condenser and high-pressure side are hot, however, liquid tank is not so hot. High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor and condenser are clogged or crushed. AC360A MTC-61 Corrective action ● Check and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. INSUFFICIENT COOLING HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO LOW AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDE IS TOO HIGH. Gauge indication High-pressure side is too low and low-pressure side is too high. Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High and low-pressure sides become equal soon after compressor operation stops. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings Replace compressor. No temperature difference between high and low-pressure sides Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. Replace compressor. AC356A BOTH HIGH- AND LOW-PRESSURE SIDES ARE TOO LOW. Gauge indication Both high- and low-pressure sides are too low. Refrigerant cycle ● There is a big temperature difference between receiver drier outlet and inlet. Outlet temperature is extremely low. ● Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted. ● Temperature of expansion valve inlet is extremely low as compared with areas near liquid tank. AC353A ● Expansion valve inlet may be frosted. ● Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side ● Expansion valve and liquid tank are warm or only cool when touched. There is a big temperature difference between expansion valve inlet and outlet while the valve itself is frosted. Probable cause Corrective action Compressor discharge capacity does not change. (Compressor stroke is set at maximum.) ● Replace liquid tank. ● Check lubricant for contamination. High-pressure pipe located between receiver drier and expansion valve is clogged. ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. Low refrigerant charge ↓ Leaking fittings or components Check refrigerant for leaks. Refer to MTC-86, "Checking Refrigerant Leaks" . Expansion valve closes a little compared with the specification. ↓ ● Remove foreign particles by using compressed air. ● Check lubricant for contamination. ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. ● Check intake sensor operation. Refer to MTC-66, "INTAKE SENSOR" . ● Replace expansion valve. 1. Improper expansion valve adjustment 2. Malfunctioning thermal valve 3. Outlet and inlet may be clogged. An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Low-pressure pipe is clogged or crushed. Air flow volume is not enough or is too low. Evaporator is frozen. MTC-62 INSUFFICIENT COOLING LOW-PRESSURE SIDE SOMETIMES BECOMES NEGATIVE. Gauge indication Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative. Refrigerant cycle ● ● Air conditioning system does not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air. The system constantly functions for a certain period of time after compressor is stopped and restarted. Probable cause Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically. ↓ Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet. ↓ Water is mixed with refrigerant. Corrective action ● Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. ● Replace liquid tank. A B C D AC354A LOW-PRESSURE SIDE BECOMES NEGATIVE. Gauge indication Low-pressure side becomes negative. Probable cause Corrective action E High-pressure side is closed and refrigerant does not flow. ↓ Expansion valve or liquid tank is frosted. Leave the system at rest until no frost is present. Start it again to check whether or not the problem is caused by water or foreign particles. F Refrigerant cycle Liquid tank or front/rear side of expansion valve's pipe is frosted or dewed. ● AC362A ● If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and remove particles with dry and compressed air (not shop air). ● If either of the above methods cannot correct the problem, replace expansion valve. ● Replace liquid tank. ● Check lubricant for contamination. G H I MTC K L M MTC-63 INSUFFICIENT HEATING INSUFFICIENT HEATING Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating PFP:00000 EJS001BB Symptom: ● Insufficient heating Inspection Flow WJIA0009E *1 MTC-41 *2 MTC-35 *3 MTC-34 *4 MA-17 *5 MA-24 *6 CO-9 *7 CO-36 *8 CO-12 *9 CO-30 *10 MA-19 *11 MA-25 MTC-64 NOISE NOISE Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise PFP:00004 A EJS001BC SYMPTOM: ● Noise B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0214E *1 MTC-69 *2 MTC-72 *4 MA-16 *5 MA-23 *3 MTC-65 MTC-16 INTAKE SENSOR INTAKE SENSOR Intake Sensor Circuit PFP:27723 EJS001GW COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the A/C control unit. After disconnecting intake sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ -15 (5) 12.34 -10 (14) 9.62 -5 (23) 7.56 0 (32) 6.00 5 (41) 4.80 10 (50) 3.87 15 (59) 3.15 20 (68) 2.57 25 (77) 2.12 30 (86) 1.76 35 (95) 1.47 40 (104) 1.23 45 (113) 1.04 WJIA0091E If NG, replace intake sensor. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. WJIA0177E 1. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND BODY GROUND Disconnect intake sensor harness connector. Terminals Continuity (+) Connector M49 (–) Terminal No. (Wire color) Body ground Yes 2 (B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0264E MTC-66 INTAKE SENSOR 2. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND A/C CONTROL UNIT A Disconnect A/C control unit harness connector. Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal No. (Wire color) Connector Terminal No. (Wire color) M49 1 (GY) M32 12 (GY) Continuity B Yes C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D WJIA0265E 3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR E Refer to MTC-66, "Intake Sensor Circuit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/C control unit. NG >> Replace intake sensor. F Removal and Installation 1. 2. EJS001GV Remove the evaporator. Refer to MTC-80, "Removal" . Remove the intake sensor clip and then the sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface. G H I MTC WJIA0100E K L M MTC-67 COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR Removal and Installation PFP:92600 EJS001BD LHA121 WJIA0011E MTC-68 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH COMPRESSOR CLUTCH Overhaul PFP:92600 A EJS001BE QG18DE B C D E F G WJIA0267E QR25DE H I MTC K L M WJIA0268E MTC-69 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH Removal EJS001BF QG18DE ● ● When removing center bolt, hold clutch disc with clutch disc tool. Remove the clutch disc. Clutch disc holding tool: (J-44614) Commercial service tool WHA228 ● Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. RHA072C ● Pulley removal: LHA173 WHA212 ● ● Use a pulley puller with small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter. Remove the pulley assembly with the puller. To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. MTC-70 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH QR25DE ● ● A When removing center bolt, hold clutch disc with clutch disc tool. Remove the drive plate using the clutch disc puller. Insert the holder's three pins into the drive plate. Rotate the holder clockwise to hook it onto the plate. Then tighten the center bolt to remove the drive plate. While tightening the center bolt, insert a round bar (screwdriver, etc.) between two of the pins (as shown in the figure) to prevent drive plate rotation. After removing the drive plate, remove the shims from either the drive shaft or the drive plate. B C AHA841 D E F G AHA506A ● H Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. I MTC AHA843 ● ● For pulley removal, use pulley puller. Use a commercially available pulley puller. Position the center of the puller on the end of the drive shaft. Remove the pulley assembly with the puller. To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove. Remove the field coil harness clip using a screwdriver. L M RHA139E MTC-71 K COMPRESSOR CLUTCH ● Remove the three field coil fixing screws and remove the field coil. RHA074C Inspection EJS001BG CLUTCH DISC If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. WHA183 PULLEY Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. COIL Check magnet coil for loose connection or cracked insulation. Installation EJS001BH QG18DE ● ● Install the magnet coil. Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. WHA213 ● Install the pulley assembly using the installer and a wrench, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. WJIA0368E MTC-72 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH ● Install the clutch disc on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down using the drive plate installer. A B C WHA184 D ● ● Using the clutch disc tool to prevent clutch disc rotation, tighten the bolt to 12 to 15 N·m (1.2 to 1.5 kg-m, 9 to 11 ft-lb) torque. After tightening the bolt, check that the pulley rotates smoothly. E F G WHA229 ● Check clearance all the way around the clutch disc. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance H : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) I If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting spacer and readjust. MTC K L M WHA194 MTC-73 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH QR25DE ● ● Install the field coil. Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. RHA076C ● Install the pulley assembly using the installer, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. WJIA0368E ● Install the drive plate on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the drive plate down with the installer. RHA078C ● ● Using the holder to prevent clutch disc rotation, tighten the bolt to 12 to 15 N-m (1.2 to 1.5 kg-m, 9 to 11 ft-lb) torque. After tightening the bolt, check that the pulley rotates smoothly. AHA847 MTC-74 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH ● Check clearance all the way around the clutch disc. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance A : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting spacer and readjust. B C D E F G AHA505A Break-In Operation EJS001BI When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. H I MTC K L M MTC-75 THERMAL PROTECTOR THERMAL PROTECTOR Inspection ● PFP:27631 EJS001BJ Check continuity between terminal and ground. WJIA0266E MTC-76 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation PFP:27277 A EJS001GX FUNCTION Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean at either recirculation or fresh mode by installing in-cabin microfilter into blower unit. B C D LJIA0012E E REPLACEMENT TIMING Refer to MA-7, "Schedule 1" or MA-11, "Schedule 2" . Caution label is affixed inside the glove box. F REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove in-cabin microfilter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilter from blower unit. Replace with new in-cabin microfilter and reinstall cover on blower unit. Reinstall glove box assembly. G H I LJIA0013E MTC K L M MTC-77 HEATER & COOLING UNIT (HEATER CORE) HEATER & COOLING UNIT (HEATER CORE) Removal PFP:27110 EJS001BK LHA203 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Drain the cooling system. Refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (QG18DE), or MA-23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (QR25DE). Discharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Discharging Refrigerant" . Disconnect the two heater hoses from inside the engine compartment. Remove the instrument panel assembly and steering member assembly. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . Remove the heater unit. Remove the heater core. Installation EJS001BL Install in the reverse order of removal. When filling radiator with coolant, refer to MA-16, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (QG18DE), or MA23, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (QR25DE). Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" . MTC-78 BLOWER UNIT BLOWER UNIT Removal PFP:27200 A EJS001BM B C D E F G H I LHA204 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Discharging Refrigerant" . Disconnect the two refrigerant lines from the engine compartment. Cap the A/C lines to prevent moisture from entering the system. Remove the glove box and mating trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove cooling unit. Refer to MTC-80, "Removal" . Disconnect the resistor and blower motor connector. Remove blower unit. Remove the three bolts and then remove the motor from the blower case. Installation MTC K L LHA130 EJS001BN Install in the reverse order of removal. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" . MTC-79 M A/C EVAPORATOR A/C EVAPORATOR Removal PFP:27280 EJS001BO LHA181 1. 2. Discharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Discharging Refrigerant" . Remove clamp bolt and remove low-pressure and high-pressure lines from cooling unit (expansion valve). Remove lines from retaining clip on dash panel and move lines away from dash panel for clearance. 3. Install caps over cooling unit (expansion valve) ports and lines. 4. Remove both side front console side covers. 5. Remove passenger side instrument panel lower cover and left lower instrument cover clip (from blower case). 6. Remove center console. 7. Remove instrument stay assemblies LH and RH. 8. Remove floor air duct risers on the right and left sides of the console front brackets (if equipped). 9. Disconnect cooling unit drain hose from lower cooling unit cover. 10. Remove five screws and clip from heating and cooling unit lower cover. 11. Drop lower cover as far as possible, reach inside of case and slide evaporator core rearward away from dash panel as far as possible so that rear of evaporator core slides up on case retaining tabs. Evaporator core may be pushed from engine compartment to ease movement. (This provides clearance at the front of the unit so that the cover can be removed). 12. Remove lower cover. LHA199 MTC-80 A/C EVAPORATOR 13. Mark installation point of intake sensor and remove intake sensor from evaporator core. 14. Remove evaporator core from case by sliding forward off of case retaining tabs. 15. Remove expansion valve from evaporator core (if necessary). A B C WJIA0254E D Installation EJS001BP Installation is the reverse of removal*. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" . *: When installing lower cover to cooling unit case, ensure that the thermo probe is in the same location as originally installed, and that the intake sensor wire is properly positioned in case slot. NOTE: Be sure that the evaporator core is fully seated against the dash panel before securing lower cover. E F G H I MTC K L M MTC-81 REFRIGERANT LINES REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure PFP:92600 EJS001BQ SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) or J2209 (R-134a recovery equipment). If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. WJIA0380E Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant WJIA0381E MTC-82 REFRIGERANT LINES A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0382E *1 MTC-16 *2 MTC-86 *3 MTC-87 *4 MTC-58 *5 MTC-3 *6 MTC-91 MTC-83 REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation ● EJS001BR Refer to MTC-5, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" . QG18DE WJIA0420E MTC-84 REFRIGERANT LINES QR25DE A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0421E MTC-85 REFRIGERANT LINES Checking Refrigerant Leaks EJS001BS PRELIMINARY CHECK Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage, damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector or fluorescent dye leak detector. ● If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was repaired and not properly cleaned. ● When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. ● When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak detector, move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 1/4 inch from the component. NOTE: Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. ● Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector EJS001BT PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a J-41995 electronic refrigerant leak detector or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument is calibrated and set properly per the operating instructions. The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak detector properly, read the operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. ● Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. ● Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. 1. Position probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from point to be checked. SHA196FA SHA707EA 2. When testing, circle each fitting completely with probe. SHA706E MTC-86 REFRIGERANT LINES 3. Move probe along component approximately 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in)/sec. A B C SHA708EA D CHECKING PROCEDURE To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn engine off. 2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service ports. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. E F Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above 16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to MTC-82, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . G NOTE: At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi). H Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge a to evaporator inlet g ) to the low side (evaporator drain hose g to shaft seal l ). Refer to MTC-86, "Checking Refrigerant Leaks" . Perform a leak check for the following areas carefully. Clean the component to be checked and move the leak detector I probe completely around the connection/component. ● Compressor Check the fitting of high and low pressure hoses, relief valve and shaft seal. MTC ● Liquid tank Check the pressure switch, tube fitting, weld seams and the fusible plug mount. ● Service valves Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves (to K prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe any residue from valves to L prevent any false readings by leak detector. ● Cooling unit (Evaporator) With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in M the cooling unit. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain hose. Keep the probe inserted for at least ten seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected leak, then repeat check as outlined above. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components. If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10. Start engine. Set the heater A/C control as follows: 1. A/C switch ON. 2. Face mode 3. Recirculation switch ON 4. Max cold temperature 5. Fan speed high MTC-87 REFRIGERANT LINES 9. Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 10. Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after stopping the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when pressure is high. SHA839E 11. Before connecting the recovery/recycling recharging equipment to the vehicle, check recovery/recycling recharging equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover refrigerant from equipment lines and then check refrigerant purity. 12. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling recharging equipment and refrigerant identifier. Refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling recharging equipment and refrigerant identifier. Refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . 14. Discharge A/C system using approved recovery/recycling equipment. Refer to MTC-82, "Discharging Refrigerant" . Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 15. Evacuate and recharge A/C system. Refer to MTC-82, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" . Perform the leak test to confirm no refrigerant leaks. 16. Conduct A/C performance test to ensure system works properly. Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector EJS001BU PRECAUTIONS FOR FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK DETECTION ● ● ● The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J41995) to pinpoint refrigerant leaks. For your safety and your customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the work. Refer to MTC-4, "Precautions for Leak Detection Dye" . CHECKING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS USING THE FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety glasses (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or expansion valve) leak. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then check the cloth with the UV lamp for dye residue. Confirm any suspected leaks with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector. DYE INJECTION (This procedure is only necessary when re-charging the system or when the compressor has seized and was replaced.) Refer to MTC-4, "Precautions for Leak Detection Dye" . 1. 2. 3. 4. Check A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi). Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye into the injector tool (J-41459). Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side service fitting. Start engine and switch A/C ON. MTC-88 REFRIGERANT LINES 5. With the A/C operating (compressor running), inject one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool J-41459 (refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions). 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from the service fitting. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow dye to spray or drip when disconnecting the injector from the system. NOTE: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the dye directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the dye with the system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the dye to penetrate a leak and become visible. A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M MTC-89 BELT BELT Tension Adjustment ● PFP:92600 EJS001BV Refer to MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" (QG18DE) or MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE). MTC-90 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A EJS001BX COMPRESSOR Engine QG18DE QR25DE Model ZEXEL make DKV-11G ZEXEL make DKV-14G Type B Vane rotary Displacement cm3 110 (6.71) (cu in)/rev. Direction of rotation C 140 (8.54) Clockwise (viewed from drive end) Drive belt Poly V D LUBRICANT Name NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type R or equivalent Part number Capacity m (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) E KLH00-PAGR0 Total in system 180 (6.1, 6.3) F REFRIGERANT Type Capacity HFC-134a (R-134a) kg (lb) Inspection and Adjustment EJS001BY ENGINE IDLING SPEED (WHEN A/C IS ON) ● H Refer to EC-35, "IDLE SPEED" (QG18DE), or EC-662, "IDLE SPEED" (QR25DE). BELT TENSION ● G 0.45 - 0.55 (0.99 - 1.21) Refer to MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" (QG18DE) or MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE). I MTC K L M MTC-91 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) MTC-92 F BRAKES A SECTION PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ................................... 2 Components ............................................................. 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................. 2 Adjustment ................................................................ 3 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 4 Parking Brake ........................................................... 4 E PB G H I J K L M PB-1 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Components PFP:36010 EFS00241 WBR187 Removal and Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. EFS00242 Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the parking brake front cable. Remove the control lever. Remove bolts, slacken and remove the front cable. Remove lock plate and disconnect cable. Remove the rear cables. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the self-locking control lever nut. Inspection 1. 2. 3. 4. WFIA0010E EFS00243 Check control lever or parking brake pedal assembly for wear or other damage. Replace if necessary. Check cables for discontinuity or deterioration. Replace if necessary. Check warning lamp and switch. Replace if necessary. Check parts at each connecting portion and, if found deformed or damaged, replace. PB-2 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Adjustment EFS00244 Pay attention to the following points after adjustment. ● There is no drag when control lever is being released. ● Be sure that toggle lever returns to stopper when parking brake lever is released. 1. Loosen parking brake cable. 2. Depress brake pedal fully more than five times. 3. Operate control lever 10 times or more with a full stroke [215.2 mm (8.47 in)]. 4. Adjust control lever by turning adjusting nut. 5. Pull control lever with specified amount of force. Check lever stroke and ensure smooth operation. Number of notches 6. A B C D SBR264B : 6 - 7 [196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)] Bend warning lamp switch plate. Warning lamp should come on when lever is pulled or depressed one notch. It should go off when the lever is fully released. E PB G H I J K L M PB-3 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Brake PFP:00030 EFS00245 Type Lever Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)] 6-7 Number of notches when warning lamp comes on 1 PB-4 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING ...................................... 3 Schematic ................................................................ 3 Wiring Diagram — POWER — ................................. 5 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION ................................................ 5 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON” ......................................... 8 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” .................................................................. 9 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START” .................................. 10 GROUND .................................................................. 13 Ground Distribution ................................................ 13 MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 13 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS ................................ 15 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS ......................... 17 BODY HARNESS ................................................ 19 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND HARNESS .................................................................. 20 ROOM HARNESS ............................................... 21 HARNESS ................................................................. 22 Harness Layout ...................................................... 22 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT ................. 22 OUTLINE ............................................................. 23 MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 24 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS ................................ 26 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS ......................... 29 BODY HARNESS ................................................ 35 ROOM LAMP HARNESS .................................... 37 FRONT DOOR HARNESS .................................. 38 REAR DOOR HARNESS .................................... 39 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) ...................... 40 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ............................ 43 Electrical Units Location ......................................... 43 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 43 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 44 Fuse ........................................................................ 46 Fusible Link ............................................................ 46 Circuit Breaker ........................................................ 46 HARNESS CONNECTOR ......................................... 47 Description .............................................................. 47 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) .................................................................. 47 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) .................................................................. 48 HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) ................................. 49 JOINT CONNECTOR ................................................ 50 Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 50 ELECTRICAL UNITS ................................................ 51 Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 51 STANDARDIZED RELAY .......................................... 52 Description .............................................................. 52 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS ........................................ 52 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ................. 52 FUSE BLOCK — JUNCTION BOX (J/B) ................. 54 Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 54 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX .............................. 55 Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 55 PG-1 E F G H I J PG L M PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS00658 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PG-2 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING POWER SUPPLY ROUTING Schematic PFP:24110 A EKS003AZ For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-13, "Ground Distribution" . B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA1145E PG-3 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING WKWA1146E PG-4 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING Wiring Diagram — POWER — EKS003B0 A BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA0491E PG-5 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING WKWA0057E PG-6 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA0492E PG-7 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON” WKWA0250E PG-8 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA0493E PG-9 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START” WKWA0494E PG-10 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA0495E PG-11 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING WKWA0496E PG-12 GROUND GROUND Ground Distribution PFP:24080 A EKS003B1 MAIN HARNESS B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0960E PG-13 GROUND WKIA0961E PG-14 GROUND ENGINE ROOM HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0215E PG-15 GROUND WKIA0962E PG-16 GROUND ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS QG18DE A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0217E PG-17 GROUND QR25DE WKIA0963E PG-18 GROUND BODY HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0964E PG-19 GROUND REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND HARNESS LEL434 PG-20 GROUND ROOM HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M LEL433 PG-21 HARNESS HARNESS Harness Layout PFP:24010 EKS003B2 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: ● Main Harness ● Engine Room Harness ● Engine Control Harness ● Body Harness SEL252V TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. Find the grid reference. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. CONNECTOR SYMBOL Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below. Water proof type Connector type ● Cavity: Less than 4 ● Relay connector ● Cavity: From 5 to 8 ● Cavity: More than 9 ● Ground terminal etc. Male Standard type Female — PG-22 Male Female HARNESS OUTLINE A B C D E F G H I J WKIA1014E NOTE: For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-13, "Ground Distribution" . PG L M PG-23 HARNESS MAIN HARNESS WKIA1741E PG-24 HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA1742E PG-25 HARNESS ENGINE ROOM HARNESS WKIA0967E PG-26 HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0968E PG-27 HARNESS WKIA0242E PG-28 HARNESS ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS QG18DE (ULEV) A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0969E PG-29 HARNESS WKIA0970E PG-30 HARNESS QG18DE (SULEV) A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0971E PG-31 HARNESS WKIA0972E PG-32 HARNESS QR25DE A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0973E PG-33 HARNESS WKIA0974E PG-34 HARNESS BODY HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA1743E PG-35 HARNESS WKIA1744E PG-36 HARNESS ROOM LAMP HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J WKIA0380E PG L M PG-37 HARNESS FRONT DOOR HARNESS LH SIDE WKIA0977E RH SIDE WKIA0978E PG-38 HARNESS REAR DOOR HARNESS LH SIDE A B C D E F G H I WKIA2769E RH SIDE J PG L M WKIA2770E PG-39 HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) EKS003B3 Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring diagram. Code Section Wiring Diagram Name 1STSIG AT A/T 1ST Signal 2NDSIG AT A/T 2ND Signal 3RDSIG AT A/T 3RD Signal 4THSIG AT A/T 4TH Signal ABS BRC Anti-lock Brake System A/C,M MTC Air Conditioner A/F EC Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 A/FH EC Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater APPS1 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor APPS2 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor APPS3 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor ASC/BS EC ASCD Brake Switch ASCBOF EC ASCD Brake Switch ASCIND EC ASCD Indicator ASC/SW EC ASCD Steering Switch AUDIO AV Audio B/COMP DI Board computer BACK/L LT Back-up Lamp BA/FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and TCM Power Supply BRK/SW EC Brake Switch CAN AT CAN Communication Line CAN EC CAN Communication Line CAN LAN CAN Communication Line CHARGE SC Charging System CHIME DI Warning Chime CIGAR WW Cigarette Lighter COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control DEF GW Rear Window Defogger DLC EC Data Link Connector D/LOCK BL Power Door Lock DTRL LT Headlamp - With Daytime Light System (For Canada) ECM/PW EC ECM Power Supply For Back-Up ECTS EC Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ENGSS AT Engine Speed Signal ETC1 EC Electric Throttle Control Function ETC2 EC Throttle Control Motor Relay ETC3 EC Throttle Control Motor F/FOG LT Front Fog Lamp F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump Control FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor PG-40 HARNESS Code FUEL Section EC Wiring Diagram Name Fuel Injection System Function HEATER MTC H/LAMP LT H/MIRR GW Heated Mirror HO2S1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 HO2S1H EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater HO2S2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 HO2S2H EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater HORN WW Horn IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGNSYS EC Ignition Signal ILL LT Illumination INJECT EC Injector INT/L LT Interior, Step, Spot, Vanity Mirror and Trunk Room Lamps IVC EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve KEYLES BL Remote Keyless Entry System KS EC Knock Sensor LOAD EC Load Signal LPSV AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN AT Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER DI Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp., and Fuel Gauges MIL EC Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIRROR GW Power Door Mirror NATS BL NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) NONDTC AT Non-detectable Items OVRCSV AT Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve PGC/V EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PHASE EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) PNP/SW AT Park/Neutral Position Switch PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch POS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) POWER PG Power Supply Routing PRE/SE EC EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PS/SEN EC Power Steering Pressure Sensor ROOM/L LT Room Lamp RP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor SEN/PW EC Sensor Power Supply SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System SROOF RF Sunroof SRS SRS A Heater System Headlamp Supplemental Restraint System SSV/A AT Shift Solenoid Valve A SSV/B AT Shift Solenoid Valve B PG-41 B C D E F G H I J PG L M HARNESS Code Section Wiring Diagram Name START SC Starting System STOP/L LT Stop Lamp SWL/S EC Swirl Control Valve Position Sensor [QG18DE (SULEV)] SWL/V EC Swirl Control Valve [QG18DE (SULEV)] TAIL/L LT Parking, License and Tail Lamps TCCSIG AT A/T TCC Signal (Lock Up) TCV AT Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve TLID BL Trunk Lid Opener TPS AT Throttle Position Sensor TPS1 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS2 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS3 EC Throttle Position Sensor TRSA/T AT Turbine Revolution Sensor (QR25DE Model) TURN LT Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VIAS EC Variable Air Induction Control System (QR25DE Model) VEHSEC BL Vehicle Security System VENT/V EC EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS EC Vehicle Speed Sensor VSSA/T AT Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) VSSMTR AT Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR WARN DI Warning Lamps WINDOW GW Power Window WIPER WW Front Wiper and Washer PG-42 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PFP:25230 A EKS003B4 ENGINE COMPARTMENT B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0980E PG-43 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION PASSENGER COMPARTMENT WKIA0249E PG-44 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0981E PG-45 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Fuse ● ● ● ● EKS003B5 If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. CEL083 Fusible Link EKS003B6 A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: ● If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. ● Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Circuit Breaker WKIA0254E EKS003B7 For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: ● Power door locks ● Power sunroof ● Power windows ● Remote keyless entry system SBF284E PG-46 HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR Description PFP:24010 A EKS003B8 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ● The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] ● B C D E F G H I J PG L M SEL769DA PG-47 HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. ● The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. ● The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. CAUTION: ● Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. ● Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] ● AEL299C PG-48 HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. ● Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. ● Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: ● Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. ● A B C D E WHIA0103E F G H I J PG L M PG-49 JOINT CONNECTOR JOINT CONNECTOR Terminal Arrangement PFP:B4341 EKS003B9 WKIA0982E PG-50 ELECTRICAL UNITS ELECTRICAL UNITS Terminal Arrangement PFP:23710 A EKS003BA B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0983E PG-51 STANDARDIZED RELAY STANDARDIZED RELAY Description PFP:25230 EKS003BB NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. SEL881H TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS SEL882H 1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make 1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break PG-52 STANDARDIZED RELAY A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0253E PG-53 FUSE BLOCK — JUNCTION BOX (J/B) FUSE BLOCK — JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement PFP:24350 EKS003BC WKIA0984E PG-54 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement PFP:24381 A EKS003BD B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0985E PG-55 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX PG-56 G STEERING A SECTION POWER STEERING SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions for Steering System .............................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 6 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 6 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ............................................. 7 Checking Steering Wheel Play ................................. 7 Checking Neutral Position on Steering Wheel ......... 7 PRE-CHECKING ................................................... 7 CHECKING ........................................................... 7 Front Wheel Turning Angle ...................................... 7 Checking Gear Housing Movement ......................... 8 Checking and Adjusting Drive Belts ......................... 8 Checking Fluid Level ................................................ 8 Checking Fluid Leakage ........................................... 8 Bleeding Hydraulic System ...................................... 8 Checking Steering Wheel Turning Force .................. 9 Checking Hydraulic System ................................... 10 STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN ......11 Components ............................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 STEERING WHEEL .............................................11 STEERING COLUMN ......................................... 12 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 13 Inspection ............................................................... 14 TILT MECHANISM .............................................. 14 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ............ 15 Components ........................................................... 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 Disassembly ........................................................... 18 Inspection ............................................................... 18 BOOT .................................................................. 18 TIE-ROD OUTER AND INNER SOCKETS ......... 19 Assembly ................................................................ 19 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ............................... 21 Removal and Installation ........................................ 21 REMOVAL ........................................................... 21 INSTALLATION ................................................... 21 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 22 PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION .................... 22 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 23 INSPECTION ...................................................... 23 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 23 HYDRAULIC LINE .................................................... 25 Removal and Installation ........................................ 25 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 27 General Specifications ............................................ 27 Steering Wheel ....................................................... 27 Steering Column ..................................................... 27 Steering Gear and Linkage ..................................... 27 Power Steering ....................................................... 28 PS-1 E F PS H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EGS000FE The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Steering System ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EGS000FF Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack. Use nylon cloths or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with their operation. Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to hydraulic parts. Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease. Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated. PS-2 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EGS000FG The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name KV48101100 (J26364) Torque adapter Measuring pinion rotating torque B C D NT169 ST27180001 (J25726-B) Steering wheel puller Removing steering wheel E F S-NT544 HT72520000 (J25730-B) Ball joint remover PS Removing tie-rod and lower ball joint a: 33 mm (1.30 in) b: 50 mm (1.97 in) r: R11.5 mm (0.453 in) I NT546 (J-24319-B) Tie rod puller H Remove outer tie rod J K LGIA0007E KV48103500 (J26357 and J26357-10) Pressure gauge Measuring oil pressure L M S-NT547 KV48102500 (J33914) Pressure gauge adapter Measuring oil pressure S-NT542 PS-3 PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST3127S000 1 GG91030000 (See J25765-A) Torque wrench 2 HT62940000 ( — ) Socket adapter 3 HT62900000 ( — ) Socket adapter Measuring turning torque S-NT541 (J44372) 5-60 Pound pull gauge Measuring steering wheel turning force WST052 (J44183-A) 20-100 Pound pull gauge Measuring rack sliding force WST052 ST35300000 ( — Drift Installing power steering pump oil seal a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. ) NT073 (J-44615) Air Bag Master Key Set Removing and installing accessory air bag bolts. LRS194 PS-4 PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool EGS000FH A Tool number Description Power steering pump attachment Disassembling and assembling power steering pump Unit: mm (in) B C S-NT179 D 10 mm Drift Installing power steering pump snap ring E LST027 F PS H I J K L M PS-5 Symptom STEERING Refer to PS-19 Refer to PS-19 Refer to PS-19 Refer to PS-8 Refer to PS-7 Refer to PS-9 Tie-rod ball joint swinging force Tie-rod ball joint rotating torque Tie-rod ball joint end play Steering gear fluid leakage Steering wheel play Steering gear rack sliding force Drive belt looseness × × × × × × × × × Judder ×: Applicable PS-6 Shake × × × Vibration × × × Shimmy × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES Refer to PS-12 Steering linkage looseness FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to PS-12 Improper installation or looseness of steering column SUSPENSION Refer to PS-14 Steering column deformation or damage FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to PS-8 Mounting rubber deterioration AXLE Refer to PS-14 Improper installation or looseness or tilt lock lever FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × DRIVE SHAFT Refer to PS-11 Improper steering wheel MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts", MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" Refer to PS-8 Noise Air in hydraulic system Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Refer to PS-8 Reference page Fluid level NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EGS000FI Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Checking Steering Wheel Play ● – – – A EGS000FJ With wheels in a straight-ahead position, check steering wheel play. Steering wheel play ● PFP:00000 B : 35 mm (1.38 in) or less If it is not within specification, check the following for loose or worn components: Steering gear assembly Steering column Front suspension and axle C D SST489B Checking Neutral Position on Steering Wheel E EGS000FK PRE-CHECKING ● Make sure that wheel alignment is correct. Wheel alignment ● F : Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" PS Verify that the steering gear is centered before removing the steering wheel. H SST490BA I CHECKING 1. 2. 3. Check that the steering wheel is in the neutral position when driving straight ahead. If it is not in the neutral position, remove the steering wheel and reinstall it correctly. If the neutral position is between two teeth, loosen tie-rod lock nuts. Turn the tie-rods by the same amount in opposite directions on both left and right sides. K Front Wheel Turning Angle 1. 2. EGS000FL Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle. Turning angle of full turns L : Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" M If it is not within specification, check rack stroke. Rack stroke “S” J : Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" SMA127 PS-7 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Checking Gear Housing Movement 1. Check the movement of steering gear housing during stationary steering on a dry paved surface. ● Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg, 11 lb) to steering wheel to check the gear housing movement. Turn off ignition key while checking. Movement of gear housing 2. EGS000FM : ±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less If movement exceeds the limit, replace mount insulator after confirming proper installation of gear housing clamps. SST663B Checking and Adjusting Drive Belts EGS000FN Refer to MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" (QG18DE), MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE). Checking Fluid Level EGS000FO Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. ● Use “HOT” range for fluid temperatures of 50 - 80°C (122 176°F). ● Use “COLD” range for fluid temperatures of 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F). CAUTION: ● Do not overfill. ● Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-13, "Fluids and Lubricants" . WGIA0107E Checking Fluid Leakage EGS000FP Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. ● Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60 - 80°C (140 - 176°F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each “lock” position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more WST032 than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, shut off engine, then loosen and retighten flare nut. CAUTION: Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from power steering pump is noticed, check power steering pump. Refer to PS-22, "PREDISASSEMBLY INSPECTION" . 6. Check dust boots for accumulation of power steering fluid. Bleeding Hydraulic System 1. 2. 3. 4. EGS000FQ Raise front end of vehicle until wheels are clear of the ground. Add fluid into reservoir tank to specified level. Then quickly turn steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel operation until fluid level no longer decreases. Start engine and repeat step 2 above. ● If any of the following occurs, bleed air again: PS-8 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Air bubbles in reservoir tank – Clicking noise in oil pump – Excessive buzzing in oil pump Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly. This does not affect the performance or durability of the system. – Checking Steering Wheel Turning Force 1. 2. 3. 4. : J-44372-A Steering wheel turning force 5. a. b. c. E F : 39 N (4 kg, 9 lb) or less PS H I J WST048 : 140 - 330 N (14.3 - 33.6 kg, 31.5 - 74.1 lb) : 160 - 350 N (16.3 - 35.7 kg, 36.0 - 78.7 lb) : 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) K L M Check sliding force outside the above range at rack speed of 40 mm (1.75 in)/s. Maximum rack sliding force Maximum force deviation 6. 7. D WST047 : J-44183-A Average rack sliding force (QG18DE models) Average rack sliding force (QR25DE models) Maximum force deviation d. C If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, check rack sliding force as follows. Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms from the gear. Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature. Pull tie-rod using Tool slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check that rack sliding force is within specification. Tool number B EGS000FR Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake. Start engine. Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. [Make sure temperature of fluid is approximately 60 - 80°C (140 - 176°F).] Check steering wheel turning force using Tool when steering wheel has been turned 360° from the neutral position. NOTE: Tires need to be inflated to normal pressure. Tool number A : Not more than 294 N (30 kg, 66 lb) : 147 N (15 kg, 33 lb) If rack sliding force is not within specification, overhaul steering gear assembly. If rack sliding force is OK, inspect steering column. Refer to PS-14, "Inspection" . PS-9 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Checking Hydraulic System EGS000FS Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire pressure. 1. Set Tool. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. Refer to PS-8, "Bleeding Hydraulic System" . Tool numbers 2. 3. : KV48103500 (J-26357 and J-26357-10) : KV48102500 (J-33914) Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 rpm. NOTE: Make sure temperature of fluid in tank rises to 60 - 80°C (140 176°F). SST834-F WARNING: Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in oil pump increases to maximum. This will raise oil temperature abnormally. Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at 1,000 rpm. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. Oil pump maximum standard pressure QG18DE : 7,649 - 8,238 kPa (78 - 84 kg/cm2 , 1,109 - 1,194 psi) QR25DE : 8,000 - 8,800 kPa (82 - 90 kg/cm2 , 1,160 - 1,276 psi) If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK. If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow control valve. Refer to PS-22, "Disassembly and Assembly" . If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and check pressure again. CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds. ● If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear is damaged. Refer to PS-16, "Removal and Installation" . ● If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. Refer to PS-23, "DISASSEMBLY" . After checking hydraulic system, remove Tool and add fluid as necessary. Then completely bleed air out of system. Refer to PS-8, "Bleeding Hydraulic System" . ● ● 4. 5. PS-10 STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN Components PFP:48430 A EGS000FT B C D E F PS H I WGIA0002E 1. Air bag module 2. Steering wheel 3. Spiral cable 4. Side lid LH 5. Column cover 6. Combination switch 7. Steering column assembly 8. Steering column lower cover 9. Lower joint J CAUTION: ● The rotation of the spiral cable (SRS “Air bag” component part) is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed. ● Remove the steering wheel before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable. EGS000FU STEERING WHEEL Remove air bag module. Refer to SRS-40, "Removal and Installation" . Remove steering wheel mounting nut. Remove steering wheel using Tool. Tool number 4. L M Removal and Installation 1. 2. 3. K : ST27180001 (J25726-B) Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WST004 PS-11 STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN STEERING COLUMN Removal CAUTION: ● The rotation of the spiral cable (SRS “Air Bag” component part) is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed. ● Remove the steering wheel before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to PS-11, "STEERING WHEEL" . 3. Removal spiral cable. Refer to SRS-42, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Disconnect data link connector. 5. Remove lower instrument panel and lower reinforcement panel. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 6. Remove the column covers. 7. Disconnect electrical connectors. 8. Remove three screws securing combination switch and remove combination switch. 9. Remove key interlock cable (A/T models). 10. Remove the hole cover, then remove bolt from lower joint. 11. Remove the steering column lower cover. 12. Remove four nuts securing steering column and remove steering column. SST329C Installation 1. Installation is the reverse order of removal. ● When installing steering column, finger tighten all lower bracket and clamp retaining bolts; then tighten them securely. Do not apply undue stress to steering column. ● When attaching coupling joint, be sure tightening bolt faces cutout portion. SST800A Align slit of lower joint with projection on dust cover. Insert joint until surface A contacts surface B. CAUTION: After installation, turn steering wheel to make sure it moves smoothly. Ensure the number of turns are the same from the straight forward position to left and right locks. Be sure that the steering wheel is in a neutral position when driving straight ahead. ● SST491C PS-12 STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN Disassembly and Assembly EGS000FV A B C D E F PS H I WGIA0003E ● ● 1. Combination switch 2. Lock nut 3. Jacket tube assembly 4. Tilt lever 5. Tilt lever stopper 6. Steering column mounting bracket 7. Spring 8. Adjust bolt 9. Adjust bolt stopper 10. Nut 11. Column shaft assembly 12. Steering column lower cover 13. Hole cover seal 14. Hole cover 15. Lower joint J K When disassembling and assembling, unlock steering lock with key. Install lock nut on steering column shaft and tighten the nut. L M SST490C ● – Steering lock: Break self-shear type screws using a drill or other appropriate tool. SST741A PS-13 STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN – Install new self-shear type screws, then tighten until screw heads break off. WST033 Inspection ● – – ● EGS000FW When steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows and replace damaged parts. Check column bearings for damage or unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose grease or replace steering column as an assembly, if necessary. Check jacket tube for deformation or breakage. Replace if necessary. When the vehicle comes into a light collision, check length “L”. Steering column length “L” : 542 - 544 mm (21.34 - 21.42 in) WGIA0014E If out of specification, replace steering column as an assembly. TILT MECHANISM ● After installing steering column, check tilt mechanism operation. SST582B PS-14 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Components PFP:49001 A EGS000FX B C D E F PS H I J K L M WST007 1. Steering gear 2. Gear housing tube 3. Boot clamp 4. Dust boot 5. Boot band 6. Tie-rod inner socket 7. Tie-rod 8. Tie-rod outer socket 9. Cotter pin PS-15 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Removal and Installation EGS000FY WST008 1. Lower joint 2. Cotter pin 3. Low pressure line fitting 4. Gear and linkage assembly 5. Rack mounting insulator 6. Gear housing mounting bracket REMOVAL CAUTION: ● The rotation of the spiral cable (SRS “Air bag” component part) is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed. ● Remove the steering wheel before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable. 1. Remove the front wheels and tires. 2. Drain the power steering fluid. 3. Remove the tie-rod outer socket nut and separate the tie-rod from the knuckle using Tool. Tool number 4. : HT72520000 (J25730-B) Disconnect the high pressure line connector. SFA455BC PS-16 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 5. Disconnect the steering gear lower joint. ● Before removing lower joint from gear, set gear in neutral (wheels in straight-ahead position). After removing lower joint, put matching mark on pinion shaft and pinion housing to record neutral position. A B C WST009 D 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Position the bracket for the hoses and harness aside. If necessary, remove the low pressure line fitting. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor 2 electrical connector. Remove the steering gear mounting bolts. Remove the steering gear through the passenger side. E F PS H I J K WST029 L INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. ● Install the low pressure line fitting. ● Observe specified tightening torque when tightening high pressure line connector and low pressure line fitting. Excessive tightening will damage threads of connector or O-ring. Tightening torque Low pressure line fitting (1) High pressure side (2) M : 28 - 39 N·m (2.8 - 4.0 kg-m, 21 - 28 ft-lb) : 15 - 25 N·m (1.5 - 2.5 kg-m, 11 - 18 ft-lb) SST879C ● The O-ring in low pressure line fitting is larger than that in high pressure connector. Take care to install the proper O-ring. PS-17 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ● Initially, tighten tie-rod outer socket nut. Then tighten further to align nut groove with first pin hole so that cotter pin can be installed. Tie rod outer socket nut ● ● : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 28 ft-lb) CAUTION: Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N·m (5 kg-m, 36 ft-lb). To install, set left and right dust boots to equal deflection. Attach lower joint by aligning matching marks of pinion shaft and pinion housing. SST824A Tighten gear housing mounting bracket bolts and nut in the order shown. WST010 Disassembly 1. EGS000FZ Prior to disassembling, measure pinion rotating torque using Tools. Tool numbers : KV48101100 (J26364) : ST3127S000 (25765-A) Within ±100° from the neutral position Average rotating : 0.6 - 2.0 N·m (7 - 20 kg-cm, torque 6 - 17 in-lb) Maximum torque : 0.5 N·m (7 kg-cm, 5.8 in-lb) deviation Except for above measuring range Maximum rotating : 1.9 N·m (19 kg-cm, 17 in-lb) torque Maximum torque : 0.65 N·m (7 kg-cm, 6 in-lb) deviation WST034 If pinion rotating torque is not within the specifications, replace steering gear assembly. Before measuring, disconnect gear housing tube and drain fluid. ● Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle gear housing carefully, as it is made of aluminum. Do not grip cylinder in a vise. Remove tie-rod outer sockets and dust boots. Remove tie-rod inner sockets. ● ● 2. 3. Inspection EGS000G0 Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent, refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Blow dry with compressed air, if available. BOOT ● ● Check condition of boot. If cracked excessively, replace it. Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid. PS-18 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE TIE-ROD OUTER AND INNER SOCKETS ● A Check outer and inner ball joints for swinging force “A” and axial end play “C”. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . ● B Check outer ball joint for rotating torque “B”. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . ● C Check condition of dust cover. If excessively cracked, replace outer tie-rod. SST057C Assembly 1. 2. EGS000G1 Install tie-rod inner sockets, dust boots and outer sockets. Tighten outer socket lock nut. Tie-rod length “L” D E : Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . F PS H SGIA0167E 3. Measure rack stroke. Rack stroke “S” I : Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . J K AST132 4. Before installing boot, coat the contact surfaces between boot and tie-rod with grease. M SST967A PS-19 L POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 5. Install boot clamps. ● Install large boot clamp using suitable tool and crimp securely. ● Install small boot clamp as shown. AST139 PS-20 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:49110 A EGS000IQ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the reservoir tank. Remove the engine undercover. Remove the drive belts. Refer to MA-16, "Checking Drive Belts" (QG18DE) or MA-23, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE) for routing. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the high pressure line connector. Disconnect the low pressure hose. Remove the power steering through bolt and the power steering pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Refer to PS-22, "Disassembly and Assembly" for tightening specifications. B C D E F PS H I J K L M PS-21 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Disassembly and Assembly EGS000G2 WGIA0057E 1. Pulley 2. Snap ring 3. Drive shaft 4. Oil seal 5. Suction pipe 6. O-ring 7. Spring O-ring 8 Flow control valve 9. 10. Connector 11. Washer 12. Joint 13. Connector bolt 14. Pump case 15. O-ring 16. O-ring 17. Front side plate 18. Vane 19. Rotor 20. Pin 21. Cam ring 22. Gasket 23. Rear cover 24. Mounting bracket 25. Power steering pump bracket 26. Mounting bracket 27. Mounting bracket PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. ● Fluid leak from any point shown in the figure. ● Deformed or damaged pulley ● Poor performance WGIA0033E PS-22 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: ● Parts which can be disassembled are strictly limited. Never disassemble parts other than those specified. ● Disassemble in as clean a place as possible. ● Clean your hands before disassembly. ● Do not use rags; use nylon cloths or paper towels. ● Refer to PS-2, "Precautions for Steering System" . ● When disassembling and reassembling, do not let foreign matter enter or contact the parts. ● Remove snap ring, then press the drive shaft out. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop drive shaft. A B C D E F SST010B ● Remove oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front housing. PS H I J SST034A ● K Remove connector and flow control valve with spring. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop flow control valve. NOTE: Do not disassemble flow control valve. L M SST036A INSPECTION ● ● ● If pulley is cracked or deformed, replace it. If an oil leak is found around pulley shaft oil seal, replace the seal. If serration on pulley or pulley shaft is deformed or worn, replace it. ASSEMBLY Assemble oil pump, noting the following. ● Make sure O-rings and oil seal are properly installed. ● Always install new O-rings and oil seal. ● Be careful of oil seal direction. ● Cam ring, rotor and vanes must be replaced as a set if necessary. PS-23 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ● ● Coat each part with Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent, refer to MA-13, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" , when assembling. Pay attention to the direction of rotor. WST031 ● When assembling vanes to rotor, flat surfaces of vanes must face inside of rotor (rounded surfaces of vanes face cam ring side). SST843A ● Insert pin 2 into pin groove 1 of front housing and front side plate. Then install cam ring 3 as shown at left. Cam ring : D1 is less than D2 . WST035 PS-24 HYDRAULIC LINE HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation PFP:49721 A EGS000JP QG18DE Engine B C D E F PS H I WGIA0058E J K L M PS-25 HYDRAULIC LINE QR25DE Engine WGIA0059E PS-26 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications Applied model PFP:00030 A EGS000G3 QG18DE QR25DE Steering model B Power steering Steering gear type Rack and Pinion (PR25T) Steering overall gear ratio 17.48 15.80 Turns of steering wheel (Lock to lock) 3.01 2.4 Steering column type C Collapsible, tilt D Steering Wheel EGS000G4 Applied model All Steering wheel axial play Steering wheel play mm (in) mm (in) Movement of gear housing E 0 (0) 35 (1.38) or less ±2 (±0.08) or less mm (in) F Steering Column EGS000G5 PS H SST855C Applied model Steering column length “L” I All mm (in) 542 - 544 (21.34 - 21.42) Steering Gear and Linkage EGS000G6 J K L SST867C Applied model QG18DE Steering gear type Rack and Pinion (PR25T) Swinging force at cotter pin hole: “A” Rotating torque: “B” Tie-rod outer socket Axial end play: “C” N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) Axial end play: “C” mm (in) 0.29 - 2.94 (3.0 - 30.0, 2.6 - 26.0) 29 - 39 (3 - 4, 22 - 28) 49 (5, 36) 5.9 - 46.1 (0.58 - 4.65, 1.3 - 10.4) 0.2 (0.004) or less N·m (kg-cm, ft-lb) Maximum tightening torque Tie-rod standard length “L” N·m (kg-cm, ft-lb) N (kg, lb) Initial tightening torque 6.9 - 65.7 (0.66 - 6.59, 1.5 - 14.8) 0.4 (0.016) or less N·m (kg-cm, ft-lb) Maximum tightening torque Swinging force*: “A” N (kg, lb) mm (in) Initial tightening torque Tie-rod inner socket QR25DE N·m (kg-cm, ft-lb) mm (in) 29 - 39 (3 - 4, 22 - 28) 49 (5, 36) 133.04 (5.238) PS-27 136.09 (5.358) M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SST086BA Initial tightening torque N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 4.9 - 5.9 (50 - 60, 43 - 52) Retightening torque after loosening N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) Retainer adjustment Adjusting screw Tightening torque after gear has settled in-lb) Returning angle 0.2 (2, 1.7) N·m (kg-cm, 4.9 - 5.9 (50 - 60, 43 - 52) degree 60° - 80° Steering gear type Rack stroke “S” PR25T mm (in) 65 (2.56) Pinion gear preload without gear fluid Within ±100° from the neutral position Average rotating torque N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) Maximum torque deviation Maximum rotating torque Except above range 0.6 - 2.0 (7 - 20, 6 - 17) N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.6 (7, 5.8) N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) Maximum torque deviation 1.9 (19, 17) N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.65 (7, 6) *: Measuring point [l: 172 mm (6.77 in)] Power Steering EGS000G7 Applied model QG18DE Steering gear type QR25DE Rack and Pinion (PR25T) Pump type Rack sliding force N (kg, lb) Under normal operating oil pressure F40 Range within ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) from the neutral position at rack speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s Except for the above range Average rack sliding force 140 - 330 (14.3 - 33.6, 31.5 - 74.1) 160 - 350 (16.3 - 35.7, 36.0 - 78.7) Maximum force deviation 98 (10, 22) Maximum rack sliding force 294 (30, 66) Maximum force deviation 147 (15, 33) Steering wheel turning force (Measured at one full turn from the neutral position) N (kg, lb) 39 (4, 9) or less Fluid capacity (Approximate) (US qt, Imp qt) 1.0 (1-1/8, 7/8) Oil pump maximum pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 7,649 - 8,238 (78 - 84, 1,109 - 1,194) PS-28 8,000 - 8,800 (82 - 90, 1,160 - 1,276) D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION REAR AXLE C RAX CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ............................................. 5 Rear Axle Parts ........................................................ 5 Rear Wheel Bearing ................................................. 5 WHEEL HUB ............................................................... 6 Components ............................................................. 6 Removal ................................................................... 6 Installation ................................................................ 7 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 9 Wheel Bearing (Rear) ............................................... 9 E F G H I J K L M RAX-1 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 EDS000QR When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes. After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment. Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link. Always torque brake lines when installing. RAX-2 SBR686C PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS000QS The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name KV40104710 ( — Drift B Install sensor rotor a: 76.3 mm (3.004 in) dia. b: 67.9 mm (3.673 in) dia. ) C RAX NT474 ST3072000 ( — Drift E Install sensor rotor a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. ) F NT115 G Commercial Service Tools EDS000QT Tool name Description GG94310000 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) H I NT360 J K L M RAX-3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EDS000QU RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Parts interference TIRES ROAD WHEEL Noise × × × × Shake × × × × Vibration × × × Shimmy × × × Judder × Poor quality ride or handling × Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Symptom REAR AXLE ×: Applicable RAX-4 × Wheel bearing damage Reference page RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" Improper installation, looseness Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts PFP:00000 A EDS000QV Check axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear or damage. ● Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. ● Retighten all axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Tightening torque B C : Refer to RSU-5, "Components" . RAX SMA525A E Rear Wheel Bearing ● Check axial end play. Axial end play ● ● EDS000QW F : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less Check that wheel hub bearings operate smoothly. Check tightening torque of wheel bearing lock nut. G : 187 - 255 N·m (19 - 26 kg-m, 138 - 188 ft-lb) ● If out of specification or if wheel bearing does not turn smoothly, replace wheel hub assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "WHEEL HUB" . H SRA690A I J K L M RAX-5 WHEEL HUB WHEEL HUB Components PFP:43200 EDS000QX LDIA0016E 1. Spindle 2. Baffle plate 3. Back plate 4. Sensor rotor (if equipped) 5. Wheel hub 6. Wheel bearing lock nut 7. Hub cap 8. Wheel sensor (if equipped) Removal EDS000QY CAUTION: ● Before removing the rear wheel hub assembly, disconnect the wheel sensor from the assembly. Then move it away from the hub assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the wheel sensor becoming inoperative. ● Wheel hub bearing does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted, replace wheel hub bearing assembly. 1. Growling noise is emitted from wheel hub bearing during operation. 2. Wheel hub bearing drags or turns roughly. This occurs when turning hub by hand after bearing lock nut is tightened to specified torque. 1. Remove brake caliper assembly. 2. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. 3. Remove brake rotor. 4. Remove wheel hub bearing from spindle. Brake hose does not need to be disconnected from brake caliper. Suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. Make sure brake hose is not twisted. SRA711A RAX-6 WHEEL HUB 5. Remove the sensor rotor, if equipped, using suitable puller, drift and bearing replacer. A B C ARA082 RAX Installation ● EDS000QZ With vehicles equipped with ABS, press-fit sensor rotor into wheel hub bearing using a drift. Do not reuse sensor rotor. When installing, replace it with a new one. E F G SAX014 H ● Press-fit sensor rotor as far as the location shown in figure at right. I J K L M WAX013 RAX-7 WHEEL HUB ● ● Install wheel hub bearing. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut. Before tightening, apply oil to threaded portion of rear spindle. Do not reuse wheel bearing lock nut. : 187 - 255 N·m (19 - 26 kg-m, 138 - 188 ft-lb) ● Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. SRA712A ● Check wheel hub bearing axial end play. Axial end play : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less SRA737A ● Clinch two places of lock nut. SFA599B ● Install hub cap using a suitable tool. Do not reuse hub cap. When installing, replace it with a new one. SRA738A RAX-8 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing (Rear) Wheel bearing axial end play limit mm (in) PFP:00030 A EDS000R0 0.05 (0.0020) or less Wheel bearing lock nut tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 187 - 255 (19 - 26, 138 - 188) B C RAX E F G H I J K L M RAX-9 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) RAX-10 I BODY A B SECTION ROOF C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special service tool .................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 7 SUNROOF/HEADLINER ....................................... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 SUNROOF ................................................................. 10 System Description ................................................. 10 POWER ............................................................... 10 TILT AND SLIDE OPERATION ........................... 10 Wiring Diagram — SROOF — ................................ 11 Memory Reset Adjustment ..................................... 12 Removal ................................................................. 13 SUNROOF LID ASSEMBLY ................................ 14 SHADE ASSEMBLY ............................................ 14 SUNROOF ASSEMBLY ...................................... 14 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 15 DIAGNOSTIC TABLE .......................................... 15 ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 15 DRAIN HOSES .................................................... 16 WEATHERSTRIP ................................................ 16 LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY ............................. 16 E F G H RF J K L M RF-1 PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS0016F The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. RF-2 PREPARATION PREPARATION Special service tool PFP:00002 A EIS0016G The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating noise D SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit E F Repairing the cause of noise G H SIIA0994E RF Commercial Service Tool EIS0016H Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Engine ear (J-39565) J Locating noise K L SIIA0995E M RF-3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS0016I SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. – Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping – Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. – Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. – Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. – Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. – Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. – Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. RF-4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1. Close a door. 2. Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3. Rev the engine. 4. Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5. At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E F CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. G LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool H (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: RF ● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. ● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. J Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. ● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing K the noise. ● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. ● Looking for loose components and contact marks. L Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. ● RF-5 M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0016J Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and upper/lower cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops RF-6 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. A TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINER B C D E Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. F G SEATS When isolating seat noises it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat H when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: RF 1. Headrest rods and holders 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seat back lock and bracket J These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. K UNDERHOOD Some interior noises may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noises include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. RF-7 L M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic Worksheet EIS0016K LIWA0276E RF-8 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H RF J K L M SBT844 RF-9 SUNROOF SUNROOF System Description PFP:91210 EIS0016L POWER Power is supplied at all times: ● through 30A fusible link (letter d , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 5. The power circuit is protected by the circuit breaker. The sunroof motor assembly is grounded through body ground R5. NOTE: When the battery or sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected during service, the sunroof will not operate properly. Procedure for resetting motor memory: From any sunroof position (full open, partially open, closed, partially vented, and vented), push and hold the button in the forward position until the sunroof vent is in the full up position. This resets the sunroof motor memory and the sunroof will operate correctly. TILT AND SLIDE OPERATION The sunroof is controlled by the sunroof switch. With the sunroof in the closed position, depressing the UP/ CLOSE switch will tilt the rear of the sunroof up. The sunroof will stop when the switch is released, or when the sunroof reaches its maximum tilt position. The sunroof will tilt down when in the tilt up position and the DOWN/OPEN switch is depressed. The sunroof will stop when the switch is released, or when the sunroof is fully closed. With the sunroof in the closed position, pressing the DOWN/OPEN switch will cause the sunroof to slide open. The sunroof will slide open until the switch is released or until it is all the way open. The sunroof will close when in the open position, and the UP/CLOSE switch is depressed. The sunroof will slide until the switch is released, or when the sunroof is fully closed. All automatic operations in sunroof are controlled by internal limit switches located in the sunroof motor assembly. RF-10 SUNROOF Wiring Diagram — SROOF — EIS0016M A B C D E F G H RF J K L M WIWA0001E RF-11 SUNROOF Memory Reset Adjustment EIS0016N If the battery is disconnected or the sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected, the sunroof motor memory must be reset. To reset the sunroof motor memory from any sunroof position (full open, partially open, closed, partially vented, and vented), push and hold the sunroof button in the forward position until the sunroof vents in the full up position. This resets the sunroof motor memory and now the sunroof will operate correctly. Install motor and limit SW assembly and sunroof rail assembly in the following sequence: 1. Arrange equal lengths of link and wire assemblies on both sides of the sunroof opening. 2. Connect the sunroof connector to the sunroof switch and positive (+) power supply. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set the lid assembly to the fully closed position by operating the sunroof switch. Fit the outer side of the lid assembly to the surface of the roof outer body panel. Remove the motor and keep the DOWN/OPEN switch depressed until the motor pinion gear reaches the end of its rotating range. Install the motor. Check that the motor drive gear fits properly in wires. Press the UP/CLOSE switch to check the lid assembly for normal tilting. Check the sunroof lid assembly for normal operations (tilt up, tilt down, open and close). SBF920F RF-12 SUNROOF Removal EIS0016O A B C D E F G H RF J K L M WIIA0001E After any repair, check sunroof operation and glass lid alignment. Handle the finisher plate and glass lid with care so as not to cause damage. ● To ease installation, mark each point before removal. CAUTION: ● Always work with a helper. ● ● RF-13 SUNROOF ● Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly, then after removal, do not move the motor assembly. SUNROOF LID ASSEMBLY 1. Open the sunroof shade. 2. Close the glass lid. 3. Remove the six bolts securing the glass lid assembly to the sunroof assembly. SHADE ASSEMBLY 1. After removing the glass lid assembly, remove the two screws securing the drain channel. 2. Remove the drain channel. 3. Remove the shade assembly. SUNROOF ASSEMBLY 1. Remove the headlining. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Disconnect the front and rear drain hoses. 3. Remove the two screws securing the sunroof motor to the sunroof assembly. 4. Remove the sunroof motor and bracket. 5. Remove bolts securing the sunroof assembly to the roof. 6. Remove the sunroof assembly. RF-14 SUNROOF Trouble Diagnoses EIS0016P A DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Check items (Components) Reference page Symptom Adjustment Drain hoses Weatherstrip Link and wire assembly RF-15, "ADJUSTMENT" RF-16, "DRAIN HOSES" RF-16, "WEATHERSTRIP" RF-16, "LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY" Excessive wind noise 1 Water leaks 1 2 3 Sunroof rattles 1 4 2 3 Excessive operation noise 1 2 3 B C 2 D E The numbers in this table mean checking order. ADJUSTMENT F G H RF J K L M WBT061 If any gap or height difference between glass lid and roof is found, check glass lid fit and adjust as follows: Gap Adjustment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the shade assembly. Tilt the glass lid up then remove the side trim. Loosen the glass lid securing bolts (3 each on left and right sides), then tilt the glass lid down. Adjust the glass lid from outside of vehicle so it resembles “A-A” as shown in the figure above. Tilt the glass lid up and down until it is adjusted to “B-B” as shown in the figure above. After adjusting the glass lid, tilt the glass lid up and tighten the bolts. Tilt the glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly. RF-15 SUNROOF Height Difference Adjustment 1. 2. 3. Tilt the glass lid up and down. Check the height difference between the roof panel and the glass lid to see if it is as “A-A” as shown in the figure above. If necessary, adjust it by using one of following procedures. ● Adjust by adding or removing adjustment shim(s) between the glass lid and link assembly. ● If the glass lid protrudes above the roof panel, add shim(s) or plain washer(s) at the sunroof mounting bracket or stud bolt locations to adjust sunroof installation as required. DRAIN HOSES 1. Remove the headlining to access the drain hose connections. (Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" .) ABT258 2. 3. 4. 5. Check visually for proper connections, damage or deterioration. (The figure shows only the front side.) If leakage occurs around the trunk room, remove the trunk room side trim and check connecting area. Check for proper connection or damage. Remove the drain hoses and check visually for any damage, cracks or deterioration. Pour water into the drain hoses to find the damaged portion. ● If any damaged portion is found at each step, replace the damaged hose. ABT372 WEATHERSTRIP ● ● ● In case of leakage around the roof lid, close it and pour water over the roof lid to find the damaged or gap portion. If gap is between the weatherstrip and the roof panel, perform gap adjustment. Refer to RF-15, "Gap Adjustment" . If gap is between the weatherstrip and the roof lid, or if weatherstrip is flattened, damaged or deteriorated, replace the roof lid assembly. (Weatherstrip is not serviceable.) LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY NOTE: Before replacing a suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of noise being experienced. 1. Check link to determine if coating film has peeled off to such an extent that substrate is visible. Check also to determine if link is the source of noise. If it is, replace it. 2. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum jelly has been applied to wire or rail groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as required. 3. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If damaged, replace wire. RF-16 E SUSPENSION A SECTION REAR SUSPENSION B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ............................. 5 Components ............................................................. 5 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 6 Rear Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6 CAMBER ............................................................... 7 TOE-IN .................................................................. 7 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............................... 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ............... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 Disassembly ........................................................... 10 Inspection ............................................................... 10 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ....................... 10 UPPER RUBBER SEAT AND BUSHING ............ 10 COIL SPRING ..................................................... 10 Assembly ................................................................ 10 TORSION BEAM, LATERAL LINK AND CONTROL ROD ........................................................................... 11 Disassembly ........................................................... 11 Inspection ............................................................... 11 Rubber Bushing Replacement ................................ 11 TRAILING ARM ................................................... 11 LATERAL LINK .................................................... 11 CONTROL ROD .................................................. 11 Assembly ................................................................ 12 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 13 General Specifications (Rear) ................................ 13 Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ......................... 13 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ................................. 13 RSU F G H I J K L M RSU-1 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 EES000IT When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes. After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment. Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link. Always torque brake lines when installing. Lock nuts are unreusable parts; always use new ones. When replacing, do not wipe the oil off of the new lock nut before tightening. RSU-2 SBR686C PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools PFP:00002 A EES000IU Tool name Description Equivalent to GG94310000 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) B C D S-NT360 Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring RSU NT717 F G H I J K L M RSU-3 ROAD WHEEL TIRES Bushing or mounting deterioration Parts interference Noise × × × × Shake × × × × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Judder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × Noise × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Refer to RSU-5 , RSU-6 Refer to RSU-13 Vibration ×: Applicable RSU-4 × Shimmy × × × × × × Judder × × × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × × × × Noise × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × Shimmy, Judder × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × × × × × × SUSPENSION Refer to BR-5 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart. Refer to TIRES in this chart. Refer to SUSPENSION in this chart. Refer to RAX-4 AXLE — Non-uniformity Refer to RSU-13 — Deformation or damage Incorrect tire size — Uneven tire wear Refer to WT-6 × Incorrect air pressure × Refer to WT-4 × Imbalance × Refer to RSU-6 × Out-of-round × Refer to RSU-6 × Incorrect wheel alignment Suspension looseness × Spring fatigue — Refer to RSU-10 , RSU-11 Refer to RSU-5 Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Refer to RSU-5 SUSPENSION Reference page Improper installation, looseness Symptom NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 EES000IV Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Components PFP:55020 A EES000IW B C D RSU F G H I J K L M WSU006 1. Bushing 2. Shock absorber mounting bracket 3. Distance tube 4. Distance tube bushing 5. Bound bumper cover 6. Bound bumper 7. Coil spring 8. Shock absorber 9. Torsion beam 11. Control rod 10. Lateral link RSU-5 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY On-Vehicle Service EES000IX Check axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear or damage. ● Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. ● Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Tightening torque : Refer to RSU-5, "Components" . SMA525A ● ● Check shock absorber for oil leakage or other damage. Check wheelarch height. Refer to RSU-13, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" . SMA113 Rear Wheel Alignment EES000IY Before checking rear wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (Unladen*). *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION 1. 2. a. b. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. : Refer to WT-6, "Road Wheel" . Check front wheel bearings for looseness. SFA975B Check front suspension for looseness. Check steering linkage for looseness. Check that front shock absorbers work properly. Check vehicle wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to RSU-13, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" . ● *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. RSU-6 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY CAMBER A Camber is preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. Camber 1. 2. : Refer to RSU-13, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)" . B Measure camber of both right-hand and left-hand wheels with a suitable alignment gauge. If the camber is not within specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts. C SFA948A D TOE-IN Toe-in is preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. Measure toe-in using following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts. WARNING: ● Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. ● Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). RSU F G SFA614B Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. 4. Measure distance “A” (rear side). 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180 degrees (1/2 turn). If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. 6. Measure distance “B” (front side). H 3. Total toe-in :A−B Refer to RSU-13, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)" . I J K SFA234AC L M RSU-7 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal and Installation PFP:00000 EES000IZ REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damaged sensor wires and sensor becoming inoperative. ● Drain brake fluid before disconnecting brake lines. 1. Disconnect brake hydraulic lines and parking brake cables at toggle levers. (Models with drum brakes.) 2. Disconnect brake hydraulic lines and parking brake cables from calipers and remove brake calipers and rotors. (Models with disc brakes.) ARA046 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect ABS wheel sensor, if equipped. Using a transmission jack, raise torsion beam a little, and remove nuts and bolts from the trailing arms, shock absorber assemblies (lower side) and lateral link. Lower transmission jack and remove suspension. Remove luggage compartment trim. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" . ARA052 7. Remove shock absorber fixing nuts (upper side). Then pull out shock absorber assemblies. WSU007 INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Attach torsion beam at trailing arm and lateral link to vehicle. Do not tighten bolts at this time. ARA051 RSU-8 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 2. 3. 4. 5. Using a transmission jack, place lateral link and control rod horizontally against torsion beam. Tighten lateral link on vehicle. Attach shock absorber assembly to vehicle. Then tighten the lower side of shock absorber assembly. Lower torsion beam to fully extended position. Remove transmission jack and tighten torsion beam, at trailing arm, to specified torque. Refer to RSU-5, "Components" . Install brake hydraulic lines and tighten flare nuts. Flare nut tightening torque 6. 7. 8. : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 – 13 ft-lb) Connect ABS wheel sensor, if equipped. Bleed air. Refer to BR-7, "Bleeding Brake System" . Install ABS wheel sensor. A B C SRA698A D RSU F G H I J K L M RSU-9 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation PFP:56210 EES000J0 Remove shock absorber upper and lower fixing nuts. Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. Disassembly 1. 2. 3. EES000J1 Set shock absorber in vise, then loosen piston rod lock nut. Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. Compress spring with Tool so that the shock absorber upper spring seat can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately so as not to tilt the spring. Remove piston rod lock nut. SRA806A Inspection EES000J2 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ● ● ● Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage. Replace if necessary. UPPER RUBBER SEAT AND BUSHING Check rubber parts for deterioration or cracks. Replace if necessary. COIL SPRING Check for cracks, deformation or other damage. Replace if necessary. Assembly ● EES000J3 Locate upper spring seat as shown. WSU008 ● ● When installing coil spring, be careful not to reverse top and bottom direction. (Top end is flat.) When installing coil spring on shock absorber, it must be positioned as shown. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston rod lock nut. SFA436B RSU-10 TORSION BEAM, LATERAL LINK AND CONTROL ROD TORSION BEAM, LATERAL LINK AND CONTROL ROD Disassembly ● ● A EES000J4 Remove torsion beam assembly. Refer to RSU-8, "REMOVAL" . Remove lateral link and control rod from torsion beam. Inspection ● PFP:55130 B EES000J5 Check for cracks, distortion or other damage. Replace if necessary. C Standard length : "A" 207 - 208 mm (8.15 - 8.19 in) "B" 394 - 395 mm (15.51 - 15.55 in) "C" 601 - 603 mm (23.66 - 23.74 in) "D" 106 - 108 mm (4.17 - 4.25 in) ● D RSU Check all rubber parts for wear, cracks or deformation. Replace if necessary. SSU025 Rubber Bushing Replacement F EES000J6 TRAILING ARM G Trailing arm bushings are press fit and must be centered properly in trailing arm collars. 1. Press out old bushing from trailing arm collar. 2. Press in new bushing until inside edge of bushing is 16.7 to 17.7 mm (0.66 to 0.70 in) from inside edge of trailing arm. ● Do not allow bushing to incline more than 1 degree. ● During installation, do not allow trailing arm to bend or twist. H I J ARA063 LATERAL LINK Lateral link bushings are press fit. The large lateral link bushing is directional and must be installed in a specific position. 1. Remove lateral link. 2. Press out bushings. Note installation position of large bushing before removing. 3. Press in small bushing until bushing is centered in lateral link collar. 4. Press in large bushing until bushing is centered in lateral link collar. a. Position bushing on lateral link collar. b. Angle between bushing centerline and collar centerline must be within 3 degrees as shown in illustration. CONTROL ROD Control rod bushings are not replaceable. If bushings are worn or damaged, replace control rod. RSU-11 K L M ARA054 TORSION BEAM, LATERAL LINK AND CONTROL ROD Assembly 1. EES000J7 Temporarily assemble lateral link and control rod. ● When installing the control rod, connect the bushing with the smaller inner diameter to the lateral link. SRA793A 2. Temporarily install lateral link and control rod on torsion beam. ● When installing, place lateral link with the arrow topside. SRA701A 3. 4. Place lateral link and control rod horizontally against torsion beam, and tighten to the specified torque. Install torsion beam assembly. Refer to RSU-8, "INSTALLATION" . SSU024 RSU-12 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications (Rear) PFP:00030 A EES000J8 Suspension type Multi-link beam suspension Shock absorber type Double-acting hydraulic B Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) EES000J9 Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance (A − B) mm (in) Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum −1°45′ (−1.75°) Nominal −1°00′ (−1.00°) Maximum −0°15′ (−0.25°) Minimum −3 (−0.12) Nominal 1 (0.04) Maximum 5 (0.20) Minimum −16′ (−0.27°) Nominal 5′30″ (0.09°) Maximum C D RSU F 26′ (0.43°) *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) EES000JA G H I SFA818A Engine Model QR25DE QG18DE J SE-R SPEC-V Tire Size 195/60HR15 195/55HR16 215/45ZR17 Front (Hf) mm (in) 664 (26.14) 660 (25.98) 664 (26.14) Rear (Hr) mm (in) 658 (25.91) 652 (25.67) 655 (25.79) *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. K L M RSU-13 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) RSU-14 H RESTRAINTS A SECTION SEAT BELTS B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precaution for Seat Belt Service .............................. 2 AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 2 FRONT SEAT BELT ................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 REAR SEAT BELT ...................................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 BASIC INSPECTION .................................................. 7 Seat Belt Inspection .................................................. 7 AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 7 PRELIMINARY CHECKS ...................................... 7 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK .................................................................. 8 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK .................................................................. 9 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ............. 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM ............................................... 11 Removal and Installation ........................................ 11 E F G SB I J K L M SB-1 PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EHS000LQ The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. Precaution for Seat Belt Service EHS000J7 CAUTION: ● Before removing the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Do not use electrical test equipment for front seat belt pre-tensioner connector. ● After replacing or reinstalling front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting front seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" . ● Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly. ● Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. ● Never oil tongue and buckle. ● If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt assembly. ● If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly. ● When replacing seat belt assembly, use a Genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: ● The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). ● The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.) ● The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. ● Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. ● The front seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. SB-2 FRONT SEAT BELT FRONT SEAT BELT Removal and Installation PFP:86880 A EHS000J8 1. 2. Disconnect both battery cables. Slide the seat all the way forward and tilt the seat back toward the front. 3. Remove adjuster cover. 4. Remove floor anchor bolt. 5. 6. 7. Remove shoulder anchor bolt. Remove center pillar upper and lower garnish. Refer to EI-28, "SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM" for details. Disconnect front seat belt pre-tensioner connector. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . Remove the screw securing front seat belt pre-tensioner retractor, then remove seat belt and seat belt pre-tensioner retractor. Remove bolts securing seat belt adjuster, then remove seat belt adjuster. 8. 9. B C D E F G SB I J K L M WHIA0162E SB-3 FRONT SEAT BELT WRS044 SB-4 REAR SEAT BELT REAR SEAT BELT Removal and Installation PFP:88840 A EHS000J9 1. Remove rear seat. Refer to SE-5, "REAR SEAT" for details. 2. 3. 4. Remove outer and floor anchor bolt. Remove rear side garnish. Refer to EI-28, "SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM" for details. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-28, "SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM" for details. 5. Remove bolts securing rear seat belt retractor, then remove seat belt and seat belt retractor. B C D E F G SB I J K L WRS147 SB-5 M REAR SEAT BELT WRS153 SB-6 BASIC INSPECTION BASIC INSPECTION Seat Belt Inspection PFP:00013 A EHS000JA AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Front seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: ● The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions if the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). ● The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.) ● The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. ● Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. ● The front seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. B C D E F G PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. c. 6. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: Switch ignition ON. With driver seat belt unfastened, the seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, SB the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. I If the “AIR BAG” warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" . Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels J freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. K Check retractor operation: Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth etc. because dirt L built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Fasten the seat belt. Pull firmly on belt and buckle to ensure belt M remains latched. Unfasten seat belt. Ensure belt releases freely and buckle button returns to original position. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. WRS047 SB-7 BASIC INSPECTION SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out of the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If NG, replace the retractor assembly. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock, apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SB-8 BASIC INSPECTION SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. 2. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. A B C D E F G WRS072 15 degrees or less tilt 35 degrees or more tilt : Belt can be pulled out. : Belt locks and cannot be pulled out. SB I If NG, replace the retractor assembly. J K L M SB-9 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation PFP:00025 EHS000JB CAUTION: Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. WRS049 1. 2. Remove anchor plate cover. Refer to EI-28, "SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM" for details. Remove anchor plate. NOTE: ● To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence. SB-10 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:88840 A EHS000JC CAUTION: Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. B C D E F G SB I J K L M LRS192 1. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-5, "REAR SEAT" for details. 2. Remove LH and RH LATCH System anchors. NOTE: LH and RH LATCH System anchors are different. Install with arrow facing forward. SB-11 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM SB-12 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 BATTERY .................................................................... 4 How to Handle Battery ............................................. 4 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE ............................................................... 4 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL .................... 4 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK ............................... 5 CHARGING THE BATTERY ................................. 6 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester .......................................................... 6 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART .................. 8 STARTING SYSTEM .................................................. 9 System Description .................................................. 9 M/T MODEL .......................................................... 9 A/T MODEL ........................................................... 9 Wiring Diagram — START — ................................. 10 M/T MODEL ........................................................ 10 A/T MODEL ..........................................................11 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester ........................................................ 13 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 13 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 14 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 15 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 17 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE ......................................................... 18 Construction ........................................................... 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 20 QG18DE .............................................................. 20 QR25DE .............................................................. 21 Pinion/Clutch Check ............................................... 21 CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................... 22 System Description ................................................. 22 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — ............................. 23 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester ......................................................... 24 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 25 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 26 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 27 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 28 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 29 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR .............................. 30 Construction ........................................................... 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 31 QG18DE .............................................................. 31 QR25DE .............................................................. 32 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 33 Battery .................................................................... 33 Starter ..................................................................... 33 Generator ............................................................... 33 SC-1 E F G H I J SC L M PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS006EZ The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" SC-2 EKS0037M PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EKS0037N Tool number Tool name Description J-44373 Model 620 Battery/Starting/Charging system tester B C D E SEL403X F G H I J SC L M SC-3 BATTERY BATTERY How to Handle Battery PFP:AYBGL EKS0037O CAUTION: ● If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery. ● After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. ● Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. ● The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. ● The terminal connections should be clean and tight. ● At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance” and “maintenance-free”. MEL040F ● When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. MEL041F ● Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge. MEL042F CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL WARNING: Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. SC-4 BATTERY Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. ● ● A B C MEL043F D Sulphation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulphated batteries. A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test. E F G SEL709E SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK 1. 2. H Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. I J SC MEL042FA Hydrometer Temperature Correction L Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading 71 (160) 0.032 66 (150) 0.028 60 (140) 0.024 54 (130) 0.020 49 (120) 0.016 43 (110) 0.012 38 (100) 0.008 32 (90) 0.004 27 (80) 0 21 (70) −0.004 16 (60) −0.008 10 (50) −0.012 4 (40) −0.016 −1 (30) −0.020 −7 (20) −0.024 SC-5 M BATTERY Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading −12 (10) −0.028 −18 (0) −0.032 Corrected specific gravity Approximate charge condition 1.260 - 1.280 Fully charged 1.230 - 1.250 3/4 charged 1.200 - 1.220 1/2 charged 1.170 - 1.190 1/4 charged 1.140 - 1.160 Almost discharged 1.110 - 1.130 Completely discharged CHARGING THE BATTERY CAUTION: ● Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery. ● Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. ● When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. ● If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60°C (140°F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 60°C (140°F). Charging Rates Amps Time 50 1 hour 25 2 hours 10 5 hours 5 10 hours Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. ● If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than .050, the battery should be replaced. Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS0037P CAUTION: When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye protection. NOTE: ● To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. ● If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester will prompt you to turn on the headlights to remove the surface charge. ● If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C (32°F). Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button, then press “ENTER” to make the selection. SC-6 BATTERY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or repair as necessary. Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends with ignition switch in “OFF” position. NOTE: The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends and tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean the battery post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the test. Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery terminal, and the black to the negative terminal. The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys, select “IN-VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER” key. A B C SEL404X D E F G SEL405X 5. 6. 7. Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the top case of the battery to be tested. NOTE: The battery type and rating will have either of the following. CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.) JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard. Battery is stamped with a number such as: 80D26L: 80 (rank of output), D (physical size-depth), 26 (width in cm). The last character L (post configuration) is not input into the tester. The tester requires the rating for the battery be entered exactly as it is written or stamped on the battery. Do not attempt a CCA conversion for JIS stamped batteries. JIS must be input directly. Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating. NOTE: The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use CCA or JIS. Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-8, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . I J SC SEL406X L M SEL407X SC-7 H BATTERY 8. 9. Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. NOTE: ● If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press the “ENTER” button to make the selection. ● When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently been driven, select “BEFORE CHARGE”. SEL576X ● If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE & RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item Service procedure GOOD BATTERY Battery is OK. Refer to SC-6, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . REPLACE BATTERY Replace battery. Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is “Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. BAD CELL-REPLACE Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. GOOD-RECHARGE Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. CHARGE & RETEST NOTE: If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. SC-8 STARTING SYSTEM STARTING SYSTEM System Description PFP:23300 A EKS0037Q M/T MODEL Power is supplied at all times: ● through 40A fusible link (letter c , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to ignition switch terminal B. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: ● from ignition switch terminal St ● to clutch interlock relay terminal 5. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to clutch interlock relay terminal 1. When the clutch pedal is depressed, ground is supplied to clutch interlock relay terminal 2 through the clutch interlock switch and body grounds E7 and E37. The clutch interlock relay is energized and power is supplied: ● from terminal 3 of the clutch interlock relay ● to terminal S of the starter motor windings. The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. B C D E F G A/T MODEL Power is supplied at all times: H ● through 40A fusible link (letter c , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to ignition switch terminal B. I With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: ● from ignition switch terminal St ● to park/neutral position relay terminal 5 J With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to park/neutral position relay terminal 1. SC With the selector lever in the P or N position, ground is supplied: ● to park/neutral position relay terminal 2 ● through park/neutral position switch. L The park/neutral position relay is energized and power is supplied: ● from ignition switch terminal St M ● through park/neutral position relay terminals 5 and 3 ● to terminal S of the starter motor windings. The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. SC-9 STARTING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — START — EKS0037R M/T MODEL WKWA0644E SC-10 STARTING SYSTEM A/T MODEL A B C D E F G H I J SC L M WKWA0160E SC-11 STARTING SYSTEM WKWA0645E SC-12 STARTING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS0037S NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-13, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/ Charging System Tester" . 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test. A B C D E SEL408X 4. Start the engine. F G H SEL409X 5. Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-13, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . NOTE: ● If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start, perform engine diagnosis. ● For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION” incidents, refer to SC-17, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" . I J SC L SEL410X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART M Diagnostic item Service procedure CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . CHARGE BATTERY Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-13, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . REPLACE BATTERY Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-13, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. SC-13 STARTING SYSTEM WORK FLOW SEL411X *1 SC-6 *4 SC-17 *2 SC-18 *3 SC-14 SC-15 STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Check “B” Terminal Circuit A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR STARTER MOTOR “B” TERMINAL B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check that the starter motor connector E202 terminal B (B/R) connection is clean and tight. Check voltage between starter motor connector E202 terminal B (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester. C D E F G LSC037 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for open circuit. H 2. CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) I 1. Check voltage between starter motor connector E202 terminal B (B/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. J SC L M LSC038 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity. SC-15 STARTING SYSTEM 3. CHECK STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) 1. Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal using a digital circuit tester. LSC039 OK or NG OK >> Starter motor “B” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . NG >> Check the starter motor case and ground for poor continuity. SC-16 STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check “S” Terminal Circuit A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR STARTER MOTOR “S” TERMINAL B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect starter motor connector F53 (QG18DE), F32 (QR25DE) terminal S (B/Y) connector. Check voltage between starter motor connector F53 (QG18DE), F32 (QR25DE) terminal S (B/Y) and ground using a digital circuit tester. With the ignition switch ON C D : Battery voltage should exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 40A fusible link (letter c , located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Clutch interlock relay ● Park/neutral position relay ● Harness for open or short E F WKWA0096E G H 2. CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) 1. 2. I Connect starter motor connector F53 (QG18DE), F32 (QR25DE) terminal S (B/Y) connector. Check voltage between starter motor connector F53 (QG18DE), F32 (QR25DE) terminal S (B/Y) and battery positive terminal using a digital tester. With the ignition switch in START J : Voltage less than 1V SC OK or NG OK >> Starter motor “S” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor “S” terminal for poor continuity. L WKWA0097E M SC-17 STARTING SYSTEM MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE Voltage V Engine coolant temperature QG18DE QR25DE −30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F) 7.4 8.7 −19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F) 8.2 9.2 −9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F) 9.3 9.6 More than 1°C (More than 34°F) 9.5 10.0 Construction EKS0037T WKIA0287E 1. Solenoid through bolts 2. Drive end shield 3. Retainers 4. Pinion assembly 5. Fork lever 6. Bearing pedestal 7. Solenoid switch assembly 8. Seal 9. Locking washers 10. Intermediate bearing 11. Internal gear 12. Cover disc 13. Drive shaft 14. Planetary gears 15. Yoke assembly 16. Armature assembly 17. Brush holder 18. Commutator end shield 19. Closure cap 20. Starter through bolts 21. Closure cap screws SC-18 STARTING SYSTEM A B C D E F G H WKWA0066E 1. Gear case 2. Shift lever 3. Plate 4. Packing 5. Adjusting plate 6. Magnetic switch assembly 7. Pinion stopper set 8. Pinion assembly 9. Internal gear 10. Pinion shaft 11. Planetary gear 12. Packing 13. Yoke 14. Armature 15. Brush holder assembly 16. Rear cover I J SC L M SC-19 STARTING SYSTEM WKWA0067E 1. Pinion stopper set 2. Pinion assembly 3. Front bracket 4. Shift lever 5. Plate 6. Packing 7. Adjusting plate 8. Magnetic switch assembly 9. Clutch gear 10. Internal gear 11. Gear shaft 12. Planetary gears 13. Ball 14. Center bracket 15. Yoke assembly 16. Armature 17. Brush assembly 18. Rear bracket Removal and Installation EKS0037U QG18DE Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the upper starter mounting bolt. Remove the harness protector from the starter engine room harness. Disconnect the starter harness connectors. Remove the lower starter mounting bolt. Remove the starter. LSC024 SC-20 STARTING SYSTEM Installation A To install, reverse the removal procedure. B C WSC016 QR25DE Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D E Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. Remove the engine undercover (M/T) or the air duct, fresh air intake hose, and air cleaner lid (A/T). Disconnect the starter harness connectors. Remove the two starter mounting bolts. Remove the starter. F G H WKWA0065E Installation I To install, reverse the removal procedure. J SC L WKWA0064E Pinion/Clutch Check 1. EKS0037V Inspect pinion assembly teeth. Replace pinion assembly if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of ring gear teeth.) Inspect planetary gears/planetary gear teeth. ● Replace planetary gears if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of pinion shaft/drive shaft gear teeth.) Check to see if pinion assembly locks in one direction and rotates smoothly in the opposite direction. ● If it locks or rotates in both directions, or unusual resistance is evident, replace. ● 2. 3. SC-21 M CHARGING SYSTEM CHARGING SYSTEM System Description PFP:23100 EKS0037W The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged. The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator. Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal B through: ● 100A (QG18DE) or 120A (QR25DE) fusible link (letter a , located in the fuse and fusible link box). Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal S through: ● 10A fuse (No. 33, located in the fuse and fusible link box). Terminal B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal S detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by the 100A (QG18DE) or 120A (QR25DE) fusible link. The generator is grounded to the engine block. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 30, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminals 20 and 26 (without tachometer), terminals 6 and 41 (QG18DE with tachometer) or terminals 7 and 14 (QR25DE engine) for the charge warning lamp. Ground is supplied to terminal 13 (without tachometer), terminal 19 (QG18DE with tachometer) or terminal 23 (QR25DE engine) of the combination meter through terminal L of the generator. With power and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a fault is indicated. SC-22 CHARGING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — EKS0037X A B C D E F G H I J SC L M WKWA1149E SC-23 CHARGING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS0037Y NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/ Charging system tester. 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test. 4. Start engine. SEL417X 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is displayed. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: ● If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display. ● Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting, particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect this without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue on with the testing process. The final results will not be affected. The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the DIODE/RIPPLE check. When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads. ● Heater fan set to highest speed. Do not run the A/C or windshield defroster. ● Headlamp high beam ● Rear window defogger NOTE: Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads. SEL418X SEL419X Press “ENTER” to continue. SEL420X SC-24 CHARGING SYSTEM 10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press “ENTER” to restart the test. A B C SEL421X D 11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-25, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . E F G SEL422X H 12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. 13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. I J SC SEL577X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL Service procedure L Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result. NO CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to SC-26, "WORK FLOW" . LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to SC-26, "WORK FLOW" . HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to SC-26, "WORK FLOW" . DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result. EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED Replace the generator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED Go to SC-26, "WORK FLOW" . SC-25 M CHARGING SYSTEM WORK FLOW LSC047 SC-26 CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Check “L” Terminal Circuit A 1. CHECK “L” TERMINAL CONNECTION B Check to see if “L” terminal is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair “L” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. D 2. CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. C Disconnect E35 connector from generator. Apply ground to connector E35 terminal L (Y/R) with the ignition switch in the ON position. E F G H LSC042 OK or NG I OK >> Replace the generator. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check the following. J ● 10A fuse [No. 30, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● CHARGE lamp ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse SC ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator L M SC-27 CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check “B” Terminal Circuit 1. CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION Check to see if “B” terminal is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair “B” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. 2. CHECK GENERATOR “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector E34 terminal B (B/L) (QG18DE), (W) (QR25DE) and ground using a digital circuit tester. LSC043 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 100A (QG18DE), 120A (QR25DE) fusible link (letter a , located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link 3. CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) Check voltage between generator connector E34 terminal B (B/L) (QG18DE), (W) (QR25DE) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. LSC044 OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. SC-28 CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Check “S” Terminal Circuit A 1. CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION B Check to see if “S” terminal is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair “S” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. C D 2. CHECK GENERATOR “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector E35 terminal S (G/B) and ground using a digital circuit tester. E F G H LSC045 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse (No. 33, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between generator and fuse I J 3. CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST) Check voltage between generator connector E35 terminal S (G/B) and battery positive terminal using a digital SC circuit tester. L M LSC046 OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. SC-29 CHARGING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INDICATOR The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur while generator is operating: ● Excessive voltage is produced. ● No voltage is produced. Construction EKS0037Z WKWA0068E 1. Pulley assembly 2. Front cover 4. Retainer 5. Rotor 6. Slip ring 7. Stator 8. Fan guide 9. IC regulator assembly 10. Diode assembly 11. Packing 3. Front bearing 12. Rear cover SC-30 CHARGING SYSTEM A B C D E F G H WKIA0136E 1. Pulley assembly 2. Front cover 3. Front bearing 4. Retainer 5. Rotor 6. Slip ring 7. Stator 8. Fan guide 9. IC regulator assembly 10. Diode assembly 11. Packing I J 12. Rear cover Removal and Installation EKS00380 QG18DE Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. SC Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the front/right-side engine undercover. Remove the drive belt. Disconnect the A/C compressor harness connector. Remove the four A/C compressor mounting bolts. Slide the A/C compressor forward and support it. Remove the two generator lower mounting bolts. Disconnect the generator harness connectors. Remove the generator upper bracket. Remove the generator. SC-31 L M LSC019 CHARGING SYSTEM Installation To install, reverse the removal procedure. LSC018 QR25DE Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the front/right-side engine undercover. Remove the drive belt. Disconnect the generator harness connectors. Disconnect the engine ground wire from the top mount. Remove the generator upper and lower mount bolts. Set the generator aside and remove the generator top mount. Slide the generator out and remove. LKWA0051E Installation To install, reverse the removal procedure. LKWA0052E SC-32 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Battery Application Type Capacity (20 HR) minimum Cold cranking current (For reference value) A EKS00381 QG18DE QR25DE GR.21R (BCI) GR.24R (BCI) 12-49 12-63 356 @ -18°C (0°F) 550 @ -18°C (0°F) V-AH A PFP:00030 Starter C EKS00382 Application QG18DE Manufacturer System voltage Terminal voltage Current D QR25DE Hitachi S114-900 Type No-load B Mitsubishi M000T87085ZC Mitsubishi M000T60781ZC M/T models A/T models Reduction gear type Reduction gear type 12V 12V 11V 11V F 90A Max. 90A Max. 2,600 rpm Min. 2,500 rpm Min. Minimum diameter of commutator 32.1 mm 28.8 mm Minimum length of brush 10.7 mm 5.5 mm 7.0 mm 11.5 N (1.17 kg, 2.58 lb) 15.0 - 20.4 (1.53 - 2.08 kg, 3.37 - 4.59 lb) 18.3 - 24.8 (1.87 - 2.53 kg, 4.11 - 5.58 lb) Revolution Brush spring tension Clearance between pinion front edge and pinion stopper 1.8 mm E G H I 0.5 - 2.0 mm Generator EKS00383 J Application QG18DE QR25DE LR180-769 LR1100-734 Type SC HITACHI Nominal rating 12V-80A 12V-110A Ground polarity Negative Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 volts is applied) Hot output current (When 13.5 volts is applied) 1,000 rpm 950 rpm 23A/1,300 rpm 66A/2,500 rpm 79A/5,000 rpm 35A/1,300 rpm 83A/2,500 rpm 95A/5,000 rpm Regulated output voltage 14.1 - 14.7V Minimum length of brush 6 mm (0.236 in) Brush spring pressure 1.000 - 3.432 N (0.102 - 0.350 kg, 0.225 - 0.772 lbs) Slip ring minimum outer diameter 26.0 mm (1.024 in) Rotor (Field coil) resistance 2.67 ohms SC-33 2.31 ohms L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SC-34 I BODY A B SECTION SEAT C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 FRONT SEAT .............................................................. 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 REAR SEAT ................................................................ 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 E F G H SE J K L M SE-1 PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS0017C The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. SE-2 FRONT SEAT FRONT SEAT Removal and Installation PFP:87000 A EIS0017D WARNING: Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag module prior to disposal of seatback assembly. For Wiring Diagrams, refer to SRS-3, "Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis" . CAUTION: ● On vehicles equipped with side air bags, before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the negative and positive battery cables and wait a minimum of 3 minutes. ● When checking the power seat circuitry for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse the seat connector with the side air bag connector. Doing so could cause the side air bag to deploy. ● Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module installed in the seat. Always handle it with care. ● Disconnect the side air bag harness connector, if equipped, and the power seat switch harness connector from under the seat before removing the seat. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal" . ● After front side air bag module inflates, front seatback assembly must be replaced. NOTE: Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags. B C D E F G H SE J K L M SE-3 FRONT SEAT WEIA0003E SE-4 REAR SEAT REAR SEAT Removal and Installation PFP:88300 A EIS0017E B C D E F G H SE J K L M LIIA0529E SE-5 REAR SEAT SE-6 H RESTRAINTS A SECTION SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service ..................................... 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special service tool .................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 SRS CONFIGURATION .............................................. 5 SRS Configuration ................................................... 5 Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ................ 6 Side Air Bag ............................................................. 6 Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors ........... 6 SRS Component Parts Location .............................. 7 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 8 Trouble Diagnoses Introduction ............................... 8 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ....................................... 8 DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II ................. 8 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II ................................................ 9 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II ........................................ 9 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS..... 9 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ......................................................11 INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER ...................11 PRELIMINARY CHECK .......................................11 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 12 Schematic .............................................................. 13 Wiring Diagram — SRS — ..................................... 14 SRS Operation Check ............................................ 17 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 17 Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II ..................... 17 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 17 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 21 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) .............. 23 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ........................... 24 Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II ................ 28 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 28 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 ........................... 33 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6) .............. 34 Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off ............................................................ 35 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 ........................... 35 Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On ............................................................ 36 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10 ......................... 36 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..................................... 37 Removal and Installation ........................................ 37 REMOVAL ........................................................... 37 INSTALLATION ................................................... 37 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ................... 38 Removal and Installation ........................................ 38 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ................... 39 Removal and Installation ........................................ 39 REMOVAL ........................................................... 39 INSTALLATION ................................................... 39 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE .................................... 40 Removal and Installation ........................................ 40 Removal ................................................................. 40 Installation .............................................................. 41 SPIRAL CABLE ........................................................ 42 Removal and Installation ........................................ 42 Removal ................................................................. 42 Installation .............................................................. 43 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .............. 44 Removal and Installation ........................................ 44 REMOVAL ........................................................... 44 INSTALLATION ................................................... 45 FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ............................ 46 Removal ................................................................. 46 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ..................................................... 47 Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-ten- SRS-1 E F G SRS I J K L M sioner ...................................................................... 47 CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL ..................... 47 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) ................... 48 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) .................................................................... 51 DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN VEHICLE ......................................52 DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ......................................52 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS ..........................................53 FOR FRONTAL COLLISION ...................................53 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) ...................................................................53 FOR SIDE COLLISION ...........................................54 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) ......55 SRS-2 PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EHS000PP The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. B C D E F Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service EHS000JE ● ● ● ● ● ● ● G Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual. Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt SRS pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the I vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required. The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to J turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear. Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side facing upward and front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down. K Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components. After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" SRS-3 EHS000JF L M PREPARATION PREPARATION Special service tool PFP:00002 EHS000JG The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV99105300 (J-41246) Air bag module bracket Anchoring air bag module S-NT354 KV99106400 (J-38381) Deployment tool Disposing of air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioner S-NT357 — (J-38381-80) Deployment tool adapter for front driver air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioner Connection between the deployment tool and front driver air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioner WHIA0089E KV9910830 (J-38381-35) Deployment tool adapter for front side air bag modules and front passenger air bag module Connection between the deployment tool and front side air bag modules and front passenger air bag module ZZA1166D — (J-44615) Air bag lock master key set Removing and installing air bag locking bolts LRS210 Commercial Service Tool EHS000JH Tool name Description Tamper resistant torx socket Size: T30 S-NT757 SRS-4 SRS CONFIGURATION SRS CONFIGURATION SRS Configuration PFP:00000 A EHS000JI B C D E F WRS148 G The air bag deploys if the diagnosis sensor unit activates while the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” SRS position. The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module and front passenger air bag module are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision. I SRS configurations which are activated for some collision modes are as follows; SRS configuration Frontal collision Left side collision Right side collision Driver air bag module X — — Front passenger air bag module X — — Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner X — — Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner X — — Front LH side air bag module — X — Front RH side air bag module — — X J K L M SRS-5 SRS CONFIGURATION Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter The front seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed to both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining force. Side Air Bag EHS000JJ SRS444 EHS000JK Front side air bag is built-in type. The front seat backs with built-in type side air bag have the label shown in figure at right. WHIA0001E Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors EHS000LD The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors. ● Driver air bag module ● Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner ● Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. WHIA0103E SRS-6 SRS CONFIGURATION SRS Component Parts Location EHS000JL A B C D E F G SRS WRS149 I J K L M SRS-7 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses Introduction PFP:00004 EHS000JM CAUTION: ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. ● Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged, replace it with a new one. ● Keep ground portion clean. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-II. The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis mode”. The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp. The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part. The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-II are as follows: User mode Diagnosis mode Display type “AIR BAG” warning lamp X X ON-OFF operation CONSULT-II — X Monitoring DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs. ● “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The stored results are not erased until memory erasing is executed. ● “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ● “ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.” The diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, as shown. When replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-II screen. For NISSAN MODEL B15, the diagnosis sensor unit discriminated number assigned is A615 (models with side air bags) or A616 (models without side air bags). ● ARS366 SRS-8 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode A After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis mode. B C D SRS803 E From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode. F G SRS I SRS804 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode Diagnosis mode activates only when a malfunction is detected, by turning ignition switch as follows: 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF” within 1 second. 3. Wait more than 3 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 three times. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. SRS will enter Diagnosis mode, if no malfunction is detected. From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode After a malfunction is repaired, turn ignition switch “OFF” for at least one second, then back “ON”. Diagnosis mode is returned to User mode. If switching Diagnosis mode to User mode is required while malfunction is being detected, turn ignition switch as follows: 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF” within 1 second. 3. Wait more than 3 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 three times. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS With CONSULT-II ● “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” A current Self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. SRS-9 J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ● ● After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-II screen by pushing “BACK” key of CONSULT-II and select “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” mode. NOTE: If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased. SRS701 Without CONSULT-II After a malfunction is repaired, switch the ignition “OFF” for at least one second, then back “ON”. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared. SRS-10 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair EHS000JN A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. A B INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER WHAT ..... Vehicle model WHEN ..... Date, Frequencies WHERE ..... Road conditions HOW ..... Operating conditions, Symptoms C PRELIMINARY CHECK D Check that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery [Refer to SC-4, "BATTERY" .] ● Fuse ● System component-to-harness connections E F G SRS I J K L M SRS-11 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW NOTE: Seat belt pre-tensioner malfunction is indicated by “AIR BAG” warning lamp. WRS155 *1: SRS-11 *2: SRS-17 *3: SRS-17 *4: SRS-28 *5: SRS-21 *6: SRS-33 SRS-12 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Schematic EHS000JO A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0045E SRS-13 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — SRS — EHS000JP WHWA0046E SRS-14 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0014E SRS-15 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHWA0047E SRS-16 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Operation Check EHS000JQ A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — User Mode 1. 2. After turning ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON”, “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates. Compare “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation to the chart below. B C D WRS151 E “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation — User mode — SRS condition Reference item No malfunction is detected. No further action is necessary. F — G MRS095A The system is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired as indicated. Go to SRS-17, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" or SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6" . SRS I J MRS096A MRS097A MRS098A Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II Air bag is deployed. Front seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed. Go to SRS-53, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . Air bag fuse, diagnosis sensor unit or harness is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired. Go to SRS-35, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9" . One of the following has occurred and needs to be repaired. Go to SRS-36, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10" . ● Meter fuse is blown. ● “AIR BAG” warning lamp circuit has open or short. ● Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. K EHS000JR DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using CONSULT-II — Diagnosis mode CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. SRS-17 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector. LEC297 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. SAIA0450E 5. Touch “AIR BAG”. If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . SRS771 6. Touch "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]". SRS697 SRS-18 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. Diagnostic code is displayed on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]". A B C SHIA0203E D If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” even though malfunction is detected in “SRS Operation Check”, refer to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" , to diagnose the following cases: ● Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. F ● The SRS system malfunctions intermittently. 8. Touch “PRINT”. G 9. Compare diagnostic codes. Refer to SRS-19, "CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”)" . SRS701 10. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode. SRS 11. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II and disconnect both battery cables. 12. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart”, that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. I 13. After repairing the system, refer to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" for final checking. CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”) Diagnostic item NO DTC IS DETECTED. Explanation When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in User mode ● ● Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. ● Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. ● Low battery voltage (Less than 9V) No malfunction is detected. SRS-19 J Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement. ● Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" . K L ● Go to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" after charging battery. ● Go to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation Driver air bag module circuit is open. (including the spiral cable) Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement. DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] ● 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] ● DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] ● DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] ● Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] ● Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 5. Replace the related harness. SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] ● SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] ● Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 5. Replace the related harness. SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] ● SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] ● 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. (including the spiral cable) 3. Replace the spiral cable. Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. (including the spiral cable) 5. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 4. Replace driver air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 6. Replace the related harness. 3. Replace front passenger air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seatback assembly. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seatback assembly. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SRS-20 5. Replace the related harness. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] Explanation ● LH side air bag (satellite) sensor Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement. A 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. B C 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] ● RH side air bag (satellite) sensor 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. D E 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] ● The circuit for the front LH pre-tensioner is open to some power supply circuit. 5. Replace the related harness. F 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. G PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] ● The circuit for the front LH pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] ● The circuit for the front LH pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. 3. Replace the front LH seat belt. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] ● The circuits for the front LH pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. ● The circuit for the front RH pre-tensioner is open to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. SRS I J 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] ● The circuit for the front RH pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] ● The circuit for the front RH pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] ● The circuits for the front RH pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. 5. Replace the related harness. ● Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the front RH seat belt. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) K L 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] 3. Replace diagnosis sensor unit. 4. Replace the related harness. Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated using the air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Final checking after repairing SRS by using CONSULT-II — Diagnosis mode CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. SRS-21 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. 2. 3. After repairing SRS, connect both battery cables. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. Turn ignition switch ON. LEC297 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. SAIA0450E 5. Touch “AIR BAG”. If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . SRS771 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. SRS697 SRS-22 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 8. If any malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to SRS-17, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" , and repair malfunctioning part completely. A B C SRS701 D 8. Touch “ERASE”. NOTE: Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”). If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. E F G SRS773 9. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II to “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. SRS I J SRS697 10. Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. 11. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode. 12. Turn ignition switch OFF then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II. 13. Go to SRS-17, "Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — User Mode" . L M SRS702 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record 1. CONSIDER POSSIBILITY OF NOT ERASING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT AFTER REPAIRING Is it the first time for maintenance of SRS? Yes or No Yes >> Go to SRS-24, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . No >> Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. Go to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . SRS-23 K TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 Inspecting SRS intermittent malfunction by using CONSULT-II — Diagnosis mode CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. LEC297 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. SAIA0450E 5. Touch “AIR BAG”. If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . SRS771 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. SRS697 SRS-24 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go to step 10. A B C SRS700 D If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch “BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG MODE”. E F G SRS702 8. Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. NOTE: With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed. SRS I J SRS697 9. Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. 10. Touch “PRINT”. 11. Compare diagnostic codes to SRS-26, "Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”)" . 12. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears. 13. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II, and both battery cables. 14. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “IntermitSHIA0182E tent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”, that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component. 15. Go to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" , for final checking. SRS-25 K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”) Diagnostic item Explanation NO DTC IS DETECTED. ● No malfunction is detected. DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] ● Driver air bag module circuit is open. (including the spiral cable) DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. (including the spiral cable) DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. (including the spiral cable) DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] ● Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] ● Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] ● Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] ● Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. Repair order ● Go to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the spiral cable, diagnosis sensor unit and driver air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. SRS-26 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit and front passenger air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit and front LH seatback assembly. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit and front RH seatback assembly. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] ● SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] ● PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] LH side air bag (satellite) sensor 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit and LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. RH side air bag (satellite) sensor 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit and RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. The circuit for front LH pre-tensioner is open to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] ● The circuit for front LH pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] ● The circuit for front LH pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] ● The circuits for the front LH pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. ● The circuit for front RH pre-tensioner is open to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] ● The circuit for front RH pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] ● The circuit for front RH pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] ● The circuits for the front RH pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] ● Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit and front LH seat belt. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) B C D E F G SRS I 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. J 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit and front RH seat belt. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) K L 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. If the harness check is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit. Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts, then make the final system check. SRS-27 A 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. ● PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] Repair order M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II EHS000JS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp — Diagnosis mode NOTE: SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode. 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF” within 1 second. 3. Wait more than 3 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 three times. WRS151 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. SRS is now in Diagnosis mode. 6. “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows: NOTE: If SRS does not enter Diagnosis mode even though malfunction is detected in User mode, check the battery voltage. If the battery voltage is less than 9V, charge the battery. Then go to SRS-33, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7" . If the battery voltage is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit. No. “AIR BAG” warning lamp flash pattern — Diagnosis mode — a through b are repeated. 1 SRS333 SRS-28 SRS condition ● Diagnosis results (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. ● Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. Go to SRS34, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6)" . TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. “AIR BAG” warning lamp flash pattern — Diagnosis mode — 2 SRS341 3 SRS342A SRS condition a through d are repeated. b — Driver and front passenger air bag marker (For identifying driver air bag, front passenger air bag and/or seat belt pre-tensioner malfunctioning) d — Indicates malfunctioning part. The number of flash varies with malfunctioning part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec. OFF is counted as one flash.) The system is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired. a through f are repeated. b, c , d — Front side air bag marker (For identifying front side air bag malfunctioning) f — Indicates malfunctioning part. The number of flash varies with malfunctioning part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec. OFF is counted as one flash.) A B C D E F Malfunctioning part is indicated by the number of flashes (part d or f ). Compare the number of flashes to G SRS-29, "Air Bag Warning Lamp Flash Code Chart (Diagnosis mode)" , and locate malfunctioning part. 8. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and disconnect both battery cables. 9. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Warning Lamp Flash Code Chart” that corre- SRS sponds to the flash code. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component. 10. After repairing the system, refer to SRS-33, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7" . I 7. Air Bag Warning Lamp Flash Code Chart (Diagnosis mode) Flash pattern ● ● J a through b are repeated. Diagnosis results (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. K Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. SRS333 L Repair order ● Go to SRS-34, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6)" . SRS-29 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Flash pattern a through d are repeated. d — One flash indicates malfunctioning front RH pre-tensioner circuit. SRS801 The front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is malfunctioning. (d : 1 flash) Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement”). 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner. (Before disposing, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. Flash pattern a through d are repeated. d — Two flashes indicate malfunctioning driver air bag module circuit. The driver air bag module circuit is malfunctioning. (d : 2 flashes) SRS334 Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the spiral cable. 4. Replace driver air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 5. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 6. Replace the related harness. Flash pattern a through d are repeated. d — Three flashes indicate malfunctioning front LH pre-tensioner circuit. SRS802 The front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is malfunctioning. (d : 3 flashes) Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement”). 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner. (Before disposing, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. SRS-30 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Flash pattern a through d are repeated. d — Seven flashes indicate malfunctioning diagnosis sensor unit. The diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. (d : 7 flashes) A B C SRS335 Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. D 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 4. Replace the related harness. E Flash pattern a through d are repeated. d — Eight flashes indicate malfunctioning front passenger air bag module circuit. The front passenger air bag module circuit is malfunctioning. (d : 8 flashes) F G SRS336 SRS Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. I 3. Replace front passenger air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. J 5. Replace the related harness. Flash pattern a through f are repeated. f — One flash indicates malfunctioning front RH side air bag module circuit. The front RH side air bag module circuit is malfunctioning. (f : 1 flash) K L SRS338 Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seatback assembly. (Before disposal, the front RH side air bag module must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. SRS-31 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Flash pattern a through f are repeated. f — Two flashes indicate malfunctioning front LH side air bag module circuit. The front LH side air bag module circuit is malfunctioning. (f : 2 flashes) SRS337 Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seatback assembly. (Before disposal, the front LH side air bag module must be deployed.) 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. Flash pattern The RH side air bag (satellite) sensor is malfunctioning. (f : 3 flashes) a through f are repeated. f — Three flashes indicate malfunctioning RH side air bag (satellite) sensor circuit. SRS340 Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. Flash pattern The LH side air bag (satellite) sensor is malfunctioning. (f : 4 flashes) a through f are repeated. f — Four flashes indicate malfunctioning LH side air bag (satellite) sensor circuit. SRS339-A Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”) 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated using the air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required. SRS-32 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 A Final checking after repairing SRS by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp — Diagnosis mode and User mode 1. After repairing SRS connect both battery cables. 2. Open driver's door. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 4. “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows: B C WRS151 N o. “AIR BAG” warning lamp flash pattern — Diagnosis mode — a through b are repeated. 1 SRS333 2 SRS341 3 SRS342A a through d are repeated. b — Driver and front passenger air bag marker (For identifying driver air bag, front passenger air bag and/or seat belt pre-tensioner malfunctioning) d — Indicates malfunctioning part. The number of flashes varies with malfunctioning part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec. OFF is counted as one flash.) SRS condition No malfunction is detected or repair is completed. No further action is necessary. The system is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired. a through f are repeated. b, c , d — Front side air bag marker (For identifying front side air bag malfunctioning) f — Indicates malfunctioning part. The number of flashes varies with malfunctioning part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec. OFF is counted as one flash.) NOTE: When diagnosis sensor unit is replaced with new one, “AIR BAG” warning lamp will operate in User mode. Checking “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation in Diagnosis mode is not required. Go to step 6. 5. If “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates as shown in No. 1 in chart above, turn ignition switch “OFF” to reset from Diagnosis mode to User mode and to erase the memory of the malfunction. Then go to step 6. If “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates as shown in No. 2 or No. 3 in chart above, the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely, or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6" , and repair malfunctioning part completely. 6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates in User mode. Compare “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation to the chart below. NOTE: If switching Diagnosis mode to User mode is required while malfunction is being detected, turn ignition switch as follows: 7. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 8. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF”. SRS-33 D E F G SRS I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 9. Wait more than 3 seconds. 10. Repeat steps 1 to 3 three times. 11. Turn ignition switch “ON”. SRS is now in User mode. “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation — User mode — SRS condition Reference item No malfunction is detected. No further action is necessary. — MRS095A The system is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired as indicated. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6" . Air bag is deployed. Go to SRS-53, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . Air bag fuse, diagnosis sensor unit or harness is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired. Go to SRS-35, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9" . One of the following has occurred and needs to be repaired. Go to SRS-36, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10" . MRS096A MRS097A MRS098A ● Meter fuse is blown. ● “AIR BAG” warning lamp circuit has open or short. ● Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6) Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record 1. CONSIDER POSSIBILITY OF NOT ERASING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT AFTER REPAIRING Is it the first time for maintenance of SRS? Yes or No Yes >> Go to SRS-24, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . (Further inspection cannot be performed without CONSULT-II.) No >> Diagnosis results (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. Go to SRS33, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7" . SRS-34 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off EHS000JT A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 1. SEE THE DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE B Is air bag module deployed? Yes or No Yes >> Refer to SRS-53, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . No >> GO TO 2. C 2. CHECK AIR BAG FUSE D Check 10A fuse 18 [located in the fuse block (J/B)]. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. E F G LRS067 3. CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN SRS Replace “AIR BAG” fuse and turn ignition switch ON. Is “AIR BAG” fuse blown again? Yes >> Repair main harness and/or replace related harness. No >> INSPECTION END. I J 4. CHECK DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT K Connect CONSULT-II and touch “START”. ● Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Visually check the wiring harness connection of diagnosis sensor unit. If the harness connection check result is OK, replace diagnosis sensor unit. L M SRS771 5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION Is harness connection between warning lamp and diagnosis sensor unit OK? OK or NG OK >> Replace diagnosis sensor unit. NG >> Connect “AIR BAG” warning lamp and diagnosis sensor unit connector properly. If “AIR BAG” warning lamp still does not go off, replace harness. SRS-35 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On EHS000JU DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10 1. CHECK “METER” FUSE Check 10A fuse 30 [located in the fuse block (J/B)]. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LRS068 2. CHECK “METER” FUSE AGAIN Replace “METER” fuse and turn ignition switch ON. Is “METER” fuse blown again? Yes >> Repair main harness. No >> INSPECTION END. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND “AIR BAG” WARNING LAMP Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector and turn ignition switch “ON”. ● Does “AIR BAG” warning lamp turn on? Yes or No Yes >> Replace diagnosis sensor unit. No >> Check the ground circuit of “AIR BAG” warning lamp. SRS-36 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:28556 A EHS000JV REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. ● Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new ones. ● Check diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. ● Check diagnosis sensor unit to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If they show any visible signs of damage, replace them with new ones. ● Check diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities or rust. ● Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. ● After replacement of diagnosis sensor unit, perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" for details. 1. Disconnect driver, front passenger and front side air bag module connectors. Also, disconnect front seat belt pre-tensioner connectors. 2. Remove console box. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector. 4. Remove bolts from diagnosis sensor unit. Then remove the diagnosis sensor unit. B C D E F G INSTALLATION SRS NOTE: ● To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence. I J K WRS156 L M SRS-37 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Removal and Installation PFP:86884 For removal and installation of front seat belt pre-tensioners, refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation" . SRS-38 EHS000JW SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:K8EH0 A EHS000JX REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Do not use old nut or bolt coated with bonding agent after removal; replace with new ones. ● Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure they are free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. ● Do not attempt to disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. ● Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. 1. Remove front seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Disconnect side air bag (satellite) sensor connector. 3. Remove bolt and nut from side air bag (satellite) sensor unit. Then remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor. B C D E F G WHIA0003E SRS INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Check side air bag (satellite) sensor for proper installation. ● After replacement of side air bag (satellite) sensor, check SRS function and perform self-diagnosis. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" for details. To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence. I J K L M SRS-39 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:K8510 EHS000JY WHIA0050E Removal EHS000JZ CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect driver air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Always work from the side of driver air bag module. 1. Remove side lids and ASCD steering switch (if equipped). Using the TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T30) (if equipped), remove left and right special bolts or hex head bolts. Driver air bag module can then be removed. 2. Disconnect the air bag harness connector and remove the air bag module. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . WHIA0051E CAUTION: ● Always place driver air bag module with pad side facing upward. ● Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module. ● The bolts are coated with bonding agent. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new ones. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module connector. LRS055 SRS-40 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ● ● ● Replace driver air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not expose the driver air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the driver air bag module. A B C SBF814E D Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EHS000K0 Connect driver air bag harness connector. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connecE tors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . Position driver air bag module, press firmly and tighten with new F special bolts. Install ASCD steering switch (if equipped) and all lids. Connect both battery cables, then conduct self-diagnosis to G ensure entire SRS operates properly. (Use CONSULT-II or warning lamp check.) Turn steering wheel to the left end and then to the right end fully SRS WHIA0052E to make sure that spiral cable is set in the neutral position. If air bag warning lamp blinks or stays ON (at the user mode), it shows the spiral cable may be snapped due to its improper position. Perform self-diagnosis again (use CONSULT-II or warning lamp). Refer to I SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" . If a malfunction is detected, replace the spiral cable with a new one. Perform self-diagnosis again to check that no malfunction is detected. Go to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" and perform self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. (Use CONSULT-II or warning lamp check.) J K L M SRS-41 SPIRAL CABLE SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation PFP:25554 EHS000K1 WHIA0090E Removal EHS000K2 CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-40, "Removal" . 2. Set steering wheel in the neutral position. 3. Remove lower lid and disconnect horn connector. Remove steering wheel nut. 4. Using steering wheel puller, remove steering wheel. Be careful not to over-tighten puller bolt on steering wheel. CAUTION: ● Do not tap or bump the steering wheel. 5. Remove steering column cover. LRS056 6. Unlock the spiral cable connector. Then disconnect connectors and remove the four screws. The spiral cable can then be removed. CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to disassemble spiral cable. ● Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. SRS384 SRS-42 SPIRAL CABLE Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EHS000K3 B tions from the right end position. Align the two marks ( ). CAUTION: ● The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position. ● Also, with the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. To set spiral cable to neutral position turn to the left approximately 3.5 turns from the right end position. Connect spiral cable connector and tighten with screws. Install steering column cover. Install steering wheel, aligning with spiral cable pin guides, and pull spiral cable through. Connect horn connector and engage spiral cable with pawls in steering wheel. Move driver air bag module connector away from steering wheel lower lid opening. Tighten nut. : 29 - 39 N-m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) 7. 8. A Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left about 3.5 revolu- C D E F G WRS057 Install driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-41, "Installation" . Connect both battery cables, then conduct self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" . SRS I J K L M SRS-43 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:K8515 EHS000K4 REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. ● Always work from the side of or under air bag module. 1. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" for details. 2. Disconnect front passenger air bag module connector from air bag harness connector. 3. Remove the nuts and hex bolts from front passenger air bag module. 4. Remove the front passenger air bag module from the instrument WRS152 panel. ● The front passenger air bag module is heavy and should be supported using both hands during removal. LRS060 CAUTION: ● Always place front passenger air bag module with pad side facing upward. ● Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module. ● The special bolts are coated with bonding agent. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new coated bolts. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module connector. LRS061 ● ● ● ● Replace air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the front passenger air bag module. After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. SBF814E SRS-44 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE INSTALLATION A CAUTION: ● Always work from the side of or under air bag module. 1. Install front passenger air bag module on steering member. ● Ensure harness is not caught between rear of air bag module and steering member. 2. Install glove box assembly. (Glove box lid is open.) B C D LRS060 3. 4. 5. 6. E Connect front passenger air bag module connector to air bag harness connector. Close the glove box lid. Connect both battery cables. Go to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" and perform self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. (Use CONSULT-II or warning lamp check.) F G WRS152 SRS I J K L M SRS-45 FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE Removal PFP:K8EH0 EHS000K5 WARNING: Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag module prior to disposal of seatback assembly. Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced. Refer to SE-5, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Always work from the rear of air bag module. 1. Open seat back zipper to access module. 2. Pull up the seat back trim. 3. Remove the Torx nuts coated with bonding agent from front side air bag module. 4. Remove harness clips. Front side air bag module can then be removed. WHIA0053E CAUTION: ● Always place front side air bag module with the stud bolt side facing down. ● Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module connector. SRS623 ● ● ● ● Replace front seatback assembly if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not expose front seatback assembly to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. After air bag inflates, the front seatback assembly must be replaced. SBF814E SRS-46 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00014 A EHS000K6 Before disposing of air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, on vehicles equipped with such systems, deploy the systems. If such systems have already been deployed due to an accident, dispose of them as B indicated in SRS-52, "DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" . When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, always use the Special Service Tool; Deployment tool KV99106400 (Kent-Moore No. J38381). C When deploying the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the deployment component. When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, a fairly loud noise is made, followed by smoke D being released. The smoke is not poisonous, however, be careful not to inhale smoke since it irritates the throat and can cause choking. Only deploy one air bag module at a time. E Due to heat, leave air bag module unattended for more than 30 minutes after deployment. Leave seat belt pre-tensioner unattended for more than 10 minutes after deployment. Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. F Never apply water to the deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. Wash your hands clean after finishing work. Place the vehicle outdoors with an open space of at least 6 m (20 ft) on all sides when deploying air bag G module or seat belt pre-tensioner while mounted in vehicle. Use a voltmeter to make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. Do not dispose of air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners un-deployed. SRS CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL Connecting to Battery CAUTION: The battery must show voltage of 9.6V or more. Remove the battery from the vehicle and place it on dry wood blocks approximately 5 m (16 ft) away from the vehicle. ● Wait 3 minutes after the vehicle battery is disconnected before proceeding. ● Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. Make sure the polarity is correct. The right side lamp in the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow with a green light. If the right side lamp glows red, reverse the connections to the battery. I J K L SRS019 M Deployment Tool Check Press the deployment tool switch to the “ON” position. The left side lamp in the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage” should illuminate. If it does not illuminate, replace the tool. SBF266H SRS-47 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart (Battery connected) Switch operation Left side lamp, green* “AIR BAG CONNECTOR VOLTAGE” Right side lamp, green* “DEPLOYMENT TOOL POWER” OFF OFF ON ON ON ON *: If this lamp glows red, the tool is connected to the battery incorrectly. Reverse the connections and make sure the lamp glows green. DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) Unless the vehicle is being scrapped, deploying the air bag in the vehicle is not recommended. This may cause damage to the vehicle interior. Anchor air bag module bracket [KV99105300 (J-41246-A)] in a vise secured to a firm foundation during deployment. WRS084 WRS082 Deployment of Driver Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle) 1. 2. 3. Using wire, secure driver air bag module to air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J-41246-A)] at two places. CAUTION: Use wire of at least 1 mm (0.04 in) diameter. Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J-41246-A)] with air bag module attached, in a vise. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] to driver air bag module connector. If adapter is required, use SST: KV99109000 (J44230). WHIA0040E SRS-48 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER 4. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. 5. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. 6. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the driver air bag module will deploy. CAUTION: When deploying the driver air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the driver air bag module. A B C WRS105 D Deployment of Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle) 1. Make an 8.5 mm (0.335 in) diameter hole in air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J-41246-A)] at the position shown in figure. E F G SRS236E 2. SRS Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246-A)] in a vise. I J K WRS084 3. Match the two holes in air bag module bracket (held in vise) and front passenger air bag module and fix them with two bolts [M8 × 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 in)]. CAUTION: If a gap exists between front passenger air bag module and air bag module bracket, use a piece of wood inserted in the gap to stabilize the front passenger air bag module. L M LRS081 SRS-49 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER 4. 5. 6. Connect deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99108300 (J3838135)] to deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] connector and front passenger air bag module connector. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. LRS080 7. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the front passenger air bag module will deploy. CAUTION: ● When deploying the front passenger air bag module, do not stand on the deploying side. ● Stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the front passenger air bag module. SRS020-B Deployment of Front Side Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle) 1. Make 6.5 mm (0.256 in) diameter holes in air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J-41246-A)] at the position shown in figure. WRS098 2. 3. Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246-A)] in a vise. Insert the stud bolts of front side air bag module (built-in type) into the two holes in air bag module bracket (held in vise) and fix them with two M6 nuts. CAUTION: Front side air bag module should be secured to air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J-41246-A)] in a vise with metal portion facing down. WRS099 SRS-50 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER 4. Connect deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99108300 (J3838135)] to deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] connector and connector on air bag module. A B C SRS492A D 5. 6. 7. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the front side air bag module will deploy. CAUTION: When deploying the front side air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the front side air bag module. E F G SRS020-B DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) 1. 2. Firmly grip front seat belt pre-tensioner in a vise and cut the webbing off. Connect deployment tool adapter to seat belt pre-tensioner. SRS I J K LRS065 3. L Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] connector to front seat belt pre-tensioner connector. M WHIA0056E SRS-51 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER 4. 5. 6. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “seat belt pre-tensioner connector voltage”, will illuminate and the front seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy. CAUTION: When deploying the front seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the front seat belt pre-tensioner. WRS216 DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN VEHICLE When disposing of a vehicle, deploy air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners while they are mounted in vehicle. CAUTION: When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, ensure vehicle is empty. 1. Disconnect both the vehicle battery cables and wait 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner connectors. 3. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] to air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. For driver air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99109000 (J44230)] to the tool connector. For front passenger air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99108300 (J38381-35)] to the tool connector. For front side air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99108300 (J38381-35)]. For front seat belt pre-tensioner, attach deployment tool adapter to the tool connector. 4. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. 5. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. 6. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy. CAUTION: Activate only one air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner at a time. SRS006-C DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Deployed air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are very hot. Before disposing of air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners, wait at least 30 minutes or 10 minutes, respectively. Seal them in a plastic bag before disposal. CAUTION: ● Never apply water to a deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. ● Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. ● No poisonous smoke is produced upon air bag module deployment. However, be careful not to inhale smoke since it irritates throat and can cause choking. ● Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. ● Air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners cannot be reused. ● Wash your hands clean after finishing work. SRS-52 SBF276H COLLISION DIAGNOSIS COLLISION DIAGNOSIS FOR FRONTAL COLLISION PFP:00015 A EHS000K7 To repair the SRS, perform the following steps. When SRS (except the side air bag) is activated in a collision: 1. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit and (LH and RH) side airbag sensors. 2. Remove the air bag modules (except the side air bag modules) and front seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies. 3. Check the SRS components using the table shown below: – Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks and deformation). 4. Install new air bag modules (except the side air bag modules), spiral cable and front seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies. 5. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II or “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. When SRS is not activated in a collision: 1. Check the SRS components using the table shown below: – Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks and deformation). 2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II or “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. B C D E F G SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Part SRS is activated SRS is NOT activated Air bag module (driver and front passenger side) REPLACE Install with new bolts. 1. Remove air bag module. Check terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. SRS 2. Install air bag modules. – Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. – Install front passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the instrument panel. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts. I J 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install air bag modules with new bolts. Air bag must be deployed before discarding. Front seat belt pretensioner assembly REPLACE Install front seat belt pre-tensioner with new bolts. 1. Remove front seat belt pre-tensioners. Check terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting. 3. Check retractor for smooth operation. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 5. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the front seat belt pre-tensioners with new bolts coated with bonding agent. Front seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before discarding. Diagnosis sensor unit REPLACE (LH and RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor Diagnosis sensor unit 1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts and ground bolt coated with bonding agent. 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install with new bolts and ground bolt. Steering wheel K 1. Visually check steering wheel for deformities. 2. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. Install driver air bag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel. 4. Check steering wheel for excessive free play. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts. 6. If damaged—REPLACE. SRS-53 L M COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part Spiral cable SRS is activated SRS is NOT activated 1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage. 2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage. 3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts. 5. If damaged—REPLACE. Harness and connectors 1. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities. 2. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors. 4. If damaged—REPLACE damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness. Instrument panel 1. When front passenger air bag inflates, check the following points for bending, deformities or cracks. – Opening portion for front passenger air bag LRS069 – Front passenger air bag module brackets LRS070 – The portions securing the instrument panel LRS071 2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel with new bolts and nuts. FOR SIDE COLLISION EHS000K8 To repair the SRS for a side collision, perform the following steps. When the side air bag is activated in the side collision: 1. Replace the following components: – Front seatback assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) SRS-54 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Diagnosis sensor unit – (LH and RH) side air bag (satellite) sensors 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below. – Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. When SRS is not activated in the side collision: 1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below. – If the front seatback assembly is damaged, the front seatback assembly must be replaced. 2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. – SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) Part Side air bag is activated Front (LH or RH) side air bag module REPLACE front seatback assembly. A B C D E SRS is NOT activated 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on the collision side. F 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly. Air bag must be deployed before disposing of it. (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor Diagnosis sensor unit REPLACE (LH and RH) side air bag (satellite sensor and diagnosis sensor unit. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) REPLACE (LH and RH) side air bag (satellite sensor and diagnosis sensor unit with new bolts. 1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new nut and bolt coated with bonding agent. 5. If damaged—REPLACE the (LH and RH) side air bag (satellite sensor and diagnosis sensor unit with new nut and bolt coated with bonding agent. I J 1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts and ground bolt coated with bonding agent. K L 1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly. If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly. – Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. – If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 2. Remove the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 5. If damaged—REPLACE the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new bolts coated with bonding agent. The front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly must be deployed before disposing of it. Seat (with side air bag) SRS 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the satellite sensor. 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install (LH and RH) side air bag (satellite sensor and diagnosis sensor unit with new bolts and ground bolt coated with bonding agent. Front seat belt pretensioner assembly G REPLACE front seatback assembly. 1. Visually check the seat on the collision side. 2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities. – Harness, connectors and terminals – Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat) 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts with new bolts. If the front seatback assembly is damaged, the front seatback assembly must be replaced. SRS-55 M COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part Center pillar inner Side air bag is activated SRS is NOT activated 1. Check the center pillar inner on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 2. If damaged—REPAIR the center pillar inner. Trim 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side. 2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts. SRS-56 E SUSPENSION A SECTION ROAD WHEELS & TIRES B C D CONTENTS NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 2 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 2 ROAD WHEEL ............................................................ 3 Inspection ................................................................. 3 WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY ................................. 4 Balancing Wheels .................................................... 4 REMOVAL ............................................................. 4 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 4 Rotation .................................................................... 5 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 6 Road Wheel .............................................................. 6 Tire ........................................................................... 6 Tightening Torque ..................................................... 6 WT F G H I J K L M WT-1 TIRES Symptom ROAD WHEEL Shake × × × × × Vibration Shimmy × × × × × Judder × × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × × × Noise × × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × × Shimmy, judder × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × ×: Applicable WT-2 BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-6, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BRAKE STEERING × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Refer to TIRES in this chart. × TIRES FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × DRIVE SHAFT × Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart. × × ROAD WHEEL × RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION — Non-uniformity × — — Deformation or damage × DIFFERENTIAL — Uneven tire wear × Refer to WT-6 Refer to WT-6 Incorrect tire pressure Noise Incorrect tire size Refer to WT-4 Imbalance Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Refer to WT-3 Reference page Out-of-round NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EES000JB Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × ROAD WHEEL ROAD WHEEL Inspection 1. 2. a. b. PFP:40300 A EES000JC Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. B C Wheel runout (Dial indicator value): Refer to WT-6, "Road Wheel" . 3. 4. D Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Check front suspension for looseness. SFA975B WT F G H I J K L M WT-3 WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY Balancing Wheels PFP:40300 EES000KI REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal procedures. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. ● After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ● 1. 2. If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz.) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz.) = 40 g (1.41 oz.) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 g = 35 g (1.23 oz.) 37.5 g = 40 g (1.41 oz.) SMA054D WT-4 WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY a. b. Install balance weight in the position shown. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ● Always use genuine Nissan adhesion balance weights. ● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight. A B C D WT F G SMA055D c. 3. 4. 5. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz.), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. Start wheel balancer again. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual unbalance values are 10 g (0.35 oz.) each or below. ● If either residual unbalance value exceeds 10 g (0.35 oz.), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance): Maximum allowable unbalance Dynamic (At rim flange) Static H I J SMA056D L 10 g (0.35 oz.) (one side) 20 g (0.71 oz.) M Rotation ● ● EES000KJ Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-32, "Tire Rotation" . Do not include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires. CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Tightening torque of wheel nut K : 98 - 117 N-m (10 - 12 kg-m, 73 - 86 ft-lb) SMA829C WT-5 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel Wheel type Maximum radial runout limit Allowable quantity of residual unbalance PFP:00030 EES000JF Steel Aluminum Inside Outside Lateral mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 1.0 (0.039) or less 0.9 (0.035) or less Radial mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 0.8 (0.031) or less 0.4 (0.016) or less Dynamic (On the ear part) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz.) (per side) Static (On the ear part) Less than 20 g (0.70 oz.) Tire EES000JG Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Air pressure Tire size Conventional tire Spare tire — 420 (4.2, 60) P195/60HR15 P195/55HR16 Front: 227.6 (2.322, 33) Rear: 207 (2.11, 30) — P215/45ZR17 227.6 (2.322, 33) — T115/70*14 T125/70*15 T135/90*15 T135/80*17 * D or R depending on manufacturer. Tightening Torque EES000PT Wheel nut 98 – 117 N·m (10 – 12 kg-m, 73 – 86 ft-lb) WT-6 K ELECTRICAL A SECTION WIPER, WASHER & HORN B C D CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 2 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER .................................. 3 System Description .................................................. 3 WIPER OPERATION ............................................ 3 WASHER OPERATION ......................................... 3 Wiring Diagram — WIPER — .................................. 5 WITH INTERMITTENT WIPERS .......................... 5 WITHOUT INTERMITTENT WIPERS ................... 6 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 WIPER ARMS ....................................................... 7 WIPER LINKAGE .................................................. 7 Washer Nozzle Adjustment ...................................... 8 Washer Tube Layout ................................................ 8 HORN .......................................................................... 9 Wiring Diagram — HORN — .................................... 9 CIGARETTE LIGHTER ............................................. 10 Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — ................................. 10 E F G H I J WW L M WW-1 PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS0039R The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams", and ● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES", and ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. WW-2 EKS0039S FRONT WIPER AND WASHER FRONT WIPER AND WASHER System Description PFP:28810 A EKS0039T WIPER OPERATION The wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch. There are three wiper switch positions: ● LO speed ● HI speed ● INT (with intermittent operation) With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 20A fuse [No. 25, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to wiper motor terminal B, and ● to front wiper switch terminal 15 (with intermittent operation). B C D E Low and High Speed Wiper Operation Ground is supplied to wiper switch terminal 17 through body grounds E7 and E37. When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied: ● through terminal 14 of the wiper switch ● to wiper motor terminal L. With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at low speed. When the wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied: ● through terminal 16 of the wiper switch ● to wiper motor terminal H. With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at high speed. Auto Stop Operation F G H I With the wiper switch turned OFF, the wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield base. When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with wiper switch OFF, ground is provided: J ● from terminal 14 of the wiper switch ● to wiper motor terminal L, in order to continue wiper motor operation at low speed. Ground is also supplied: WW ● through terminal 13 of the wiper switch ● to wiper motor terminal P ● through terminal E of the wiper motor, and L ● through body grounds E7 and E37. When wiper arms reach base of windshield, wiper motor terminals P and B are connected instead of terminals P and E. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position. M Intermittent Operation The wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 3 to 13 seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier (INT SW) combined with wiper switch. When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied to wiper amplifier. The desired interval time is input to wiper amplifier (INT VR) from wiper volume switch combined with wiper switch. Then intermittent ground is supplied: ● to wiper motor terminal L ● from terminal 14 of wiper switch ● through wiper amplifier (OUTPUT). The wiper motor operates at low speed at the desired interval. WASHER OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 20A fuse [No. 25, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to front washer motor terminal +. WW-3 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER When the lever is pulled to the WASH position, ground is supplied: ● to front washer motor terminal ● from terminal 18 of the wiper switch ● through terminal 17 of the wiper switch, and ● through body grounds E7 and E37. With power and ground supplied, the washer motor operates. Without intermittent operation, the wiper motor operates while the lever is pulled to the WASH position. With intermittent operation, when the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more, the wiper motor operates at low speed for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the same manner as intermittent operation. WW-4 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER Wiring Diagram — WIPER — EKS0039U A WITH INTERMITTENT WIPERS B C D E F G H I J WW L M WKWA0050E WW-5 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER WITHOUT INTERMITTENT WIPERS WKWA0051E WW-6 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER Removal and Installation EKS0039V A WIPER ARMS 1. 2. 3. 4. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop). Lift the blade up approximately 100 mm (3.94 in) and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to clearance “L1 ” & “L2 ” immediately before tightening nut. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it “OFF”. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance “L1 ” & “L2 ”. Clearance “L1 ” Clearance “L2 ” ● C D SEL543TA Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque. Front wiper ● : 27.5 - 42.5 mm (1.08 - 1.67 in) : 34.5 - 49.5 mm (1.36 - 1.95 in) B E : 21 - 26 N-m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb) F Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. G H I SEL024J WIPER LINKAGE J WW L M WEL169A Removal 1. Remove 4 bolts that secure wiper motor. 2. Detach wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint. 3. Remove wiper linkage. Be careful not to break ball joint rubber boot. Installation ● Grease ball joint portion before installation. WW-7 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER 1. Installation is the reverse order of removal. Washer Nozzle Adjustment ● EKS0039W Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure at left. Adjustable range : ±10° SEL241P Unit: mm (in) 1 400 (15.75) 5 151 (5.94) 2 325 (12.80) 6 155 (6.10) 3 425 (16.73) 7 250 (9.84) 4 226 (8.90) 8 380 (14.96) *: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in). LEL566 Washer Tube Layout EKS0039X LEL567 WW-8 HORN HORN Wiring Diagram — HORN — PFP:25610 A EKS0039Y B C D E F G H I J WW L M WKWA0200E WW-9 CIGARETTE LIGHTER CIGARETTE LIGHTER Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — PFP:35330 EKS0039Z WKWA0201E WW-10